This document was generated from the N3220 working draft of ISO/IEC 9899. This is not an official ISO publication. The HTML conversion is automated and ridden with errors. For an accurate version of the standard, refer to the PDF.

INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
©ISO/IEC
ISO/IEC 9899:2024

Information technology — Programming languages — C

Reply To: JeanHeyd Meneide <wg14@soasis.org>

Freek Wiedijk <freek@cs.ru.nl>

Abstract

(This cover sheet to be replaced by ISO.)

This document specifies the form and establishes the interpretation of programs expressed in the programming language C. Its purpose is to promote portability, reliability, maintainability, and efficient execution of C language programs on a variety of computing systems.

Clauses are included that detail the C language itself and the contents of the C language execution library. Annexes summarize aspects of both of them, and enumerate factors that influence the portability of C programs.

Although this document is intended to guide knowledgeable C language programmers as well as implementers of C language translation systems, the document itself is not designed to serve as a tutorial.

Recipients of this draft are invited to submit, with their comments, notification of any relevant patent rights of which they are aware and to provide supporting documentation.

After the end of the C23 cycle, work began on so-called "C2y", the next projected edition of this document on January 24.

January 2024

The following changes were made on or after the January 2024 meeting:

Contents

Foreword

Introduction xiii

1 Scope

2 Normative references

3 Terms, definitions, and symbols

4 Conformance

5 Environment

  1. 5.1 Conceptual models
    1. 5.1.1 Translation environment
    2. 5.1.2 Execution environments
  2. 5.2 Environmental considerations
    1. 5.2.1 Character sets
    2. 5.2.2 Multibyte characters
    3. 5.2.3 Character display semantics .
    4. 5.2.4 Signals and interrupts
    5. 5.2.5 Environmental limits

6 Language

  1. 6.1 Notation
  2. 6.2 Concepts
    1. 6.2.1 Scopes of identifiers, type names, and compound literals
    2. 6.2.2 Linkages of identifiers
    3. 6.2.3 Name spaces of identifiers
    4. 6.2.4 Storage durations of objects
    5. 6.2.5 Types
    6. 6.2.6 Representations of types
    7. 6.2.7 Compatible type and composite type
    8. 6.2.8 Alignment of objects
    9. 6.2.9 Encodings
  3. 6.3 Conversions
    1. 6.3.1 Arithmetic operands
    2. 6.3.2 Other operands
  4. 6.4 Lexical elements
  1. 6.4.1 Keywords
  2. 6.4.2 Identifiers
  3. 6.4.3 Universal character names .
  4. 6.4.4 Constants
  5. 6.4.5 String literals
  6. 6.4.6 Punctuators
  7. 6.4.7 Header names
  8. 6.4.8 Preprocessing numbers
  9. 6.4.9 Comments
  10. 6.5 Expressions
    1. 6.5.1 General .
    2. 6.5.2 Primary expressions
    3. 6.5.3 Postfix operators
    4. 6.5.4 Unary operators
    5. 6.5.5 Cast operators
    6. 6.5.6 Multiplicative operators
    7. 6.5.7 Additive operators
    8. 6.5.8 Bitwise shift operators
    9. 6.5.9 Relational operators
    10. 6.5.10 Equality operators
    11. 6.5.11 Bitwise AND operator
    12. 6.5.12 Bitwise exclusive OR operator
    13. 6.5.13 Bitwise inclusive OR operator
    14. 6.5.14 Logical AND operator
    15. 6.5.15 Logical OR operator
    16. 6.5.16 Conditional operator
    17. 6.5.17 Assignment operators
    18. 6.5.18 Comma operator
  11. 6.6 Constant expressions
  12. 6.7 Declarations
    1. 6.7.1 General .
    2. 6.7.2 Storage-class specifiers
    3. 6.7.3 Type specifiers
    4. 6.7.4 Type qualifiers
    5. 6.7.5 Function specifiers
    6. 6.7.6 Alignment specifier
    7. 6.7.7 Declarators
    8. 6.7.8 Type names
    9. 6.7.9 Type definitions
    10. 6.7.10 Type inference
  1. 6.7.11 Initialization
  2. 6.7.12 Static assertions
  3. 6.7.13 Attributes
  4. 6.8 Statements and blocks
    1. 6.8.1 General .
    2. 6.8.2 Labeled statements
    3. 6.8.3 Compound statement
    4. 6.8.4 Expression and null statements
    5. 6.8.5 Selection statements
    6. 6.8.6 Iteration statements
    7. 6.8.7 Jump statements
  5. 6.9 External definitions
    1. 6.9.1 General .
    2. 6.9.2 Function definitions
    3. 6.9.3 External object definitions
  6. 6.10 Preprocessing directives
    1. 6.10.1 General .
    2. 6.10.2 Conditional inclusion
    3. 6.10.3 Source file inclusion
    4. 6.10.4 Binary resource inclusion
    5. 6.10.5 Macro replacement
    6. 6.10.6 Line control
    7. 6.10.7 Diagnostic directives
    8. 6.10.8 Pragma directive
    9. 6.10.9 Null directive
  7. 6.11 Future language directions
    1. 6.11.1 Floating types
    2. 6.11.2 Linkages of identifiers
    3. 6.11.3 External names
    4. 6.11.4 Character escape sequences
    5. 6.11.5 Storage-class specifiers
    6. 6.11.6 Pragma directives .
    7. 6.11.7 Predefined macro names

7 Library

  1. 7.1 Introduction
    1. 7.1.1 Definitions of terms
    2. 7.1.2 Standard headers
  1. 7.1.3 Reserved identifiers
  2. 7.1.4 Use of library functions
  3. 7.2 Diagnostics <assert.h>
    1. 7.2.1 General .
    2. 7.2.2 Program diagnostics
  4. 7.3 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>
    1. 7.3.1 Introduction
    2. 7.3.2 Conventions
    3. 7.3.3 Branch cuts
    4. 7.3.4 The CX _ LIMITED _ RANGE pragma
    5. 7.3.5 Trigonometric functions
    6. 7.3.6 Hyperbolic functions
    7. 7.3.7 Exponential and logarithmic functions
    8. 7.3.8 Power and absolute-value functions
    9. 7.3.9 Manipulation functions
  5. 7.4 Character handling <ctype.h>
    1. 7.4.1 General .
    2. 7.4.2 Character classification functions
    3. 7.4.3 Character case mapping functions
  6. 7.5 Errors <errno.h>
  7. 7.6 Floating-point environment <fenv.h>
    1. 7.6.1 The FENV _ ACCESS pragma
    2. 7.6.2 The FENV _ ROUND pragma .
    3. 7.6.3 The FENV _ DEC _ ROUND pragma
    4. 7.6.4 Floating-point exceptions
    5. 7.6.5 Rounding and other control modes
    6. 7.6.6 Environment
  8. 7.7 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>
  9. 7.8 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>
    1. 7.8.1 Macros for format specifiers
    2. 7.8.2 Functions for greatest-width integer types
  10. 7.9 Alternative spellings <iso646.h>
  11. 7.10 Characteristics of integer types <limits.h>
  12. 7.11 Localization <locale.h>
    1. 7.11.1 Locale control
    2. 7.11.2 Numeric formatting convention inquiry
  13. 7.12 Mathematics <math.h>
    1. 7.12.1 Treatment of error conditions
    2. 7.12.2 The FP _ CONTRACT pragma
    3. 7.12.3 Classification macros
  1. 7.12.4 Trigonometric functions
  2. 7.12.5 Hyperbolic functions
  3. 7.12.6 Exponential and logarithmic functions
  4. 7.12.7 Power and absolute-value functions
  5. 7.12.8 Error and gamma functions
  6. 7.12.9 Nearest integer functions
  7. 7.13 Non-local jumps <setjmp.h>
    1. 7.13.1 Save calling environment
    2. 7.13.2 Restore calling environment
  8. 7.14 Signal handling <signal.h>
    1. 7.14.1 Specify signal handling
    2. 7.14.2 Send signal
  9. 7.15 Alignment <stdalign.h>
  10. 7.16 Variable arguments <stdarg.h>
    1. 7.16.1 Variable argument list access macros
  11. 7.17 Atomics <stdatomic.h>
    1. 7.17.1 Introduction
    2. 7.17.2 Initialization
    3. 7.17.3 Order and consistency
    4. 7.17.4 Fences
    5. 7.17.5 Lock-free property
    6. 7.17.6 Atomic integer types
    7. 7.17.7 Operations on atomic types
    8. 7.17.8 Atomic flag type and operations
  12. 7.18 Bit and byte utilities <stdbit.h>
    1. 7.18.1 General .
    2. 7.18.2 Endian
    3. 7.18.3 Count Leading Zeros
    4. 7.18.4 Count Leading Ones
    5. 7.18.5 Count Trailing Zeros
    6. 7.18.6 Count Trailing Ones
    7. 7.18.7 First Leading Zero
  1. 7.18.8 First Leading One .
  2. 7.18.9 First Trailing Zero .
  3. 7.19 Boolean type and values <stdbool.h>
  4. 7.20 Checked Integer Arithmetic <stdckdint.h>
    1. 7.20.1 Checked Integer Operation Type-generic Macros .
  5. 7.21 Common definitions <stddef.h>
    1. 7.21.1 The unreachable macro
    2. 7.21.2 The nullptr _ t type
  6. 7.22 Integer types <stdint.h>
    1. 7.22.1 Integer types
    2. 7.22.2 Widths of specified-width integer types
    3. 7.22.3 Width of other integer types
    4. 7.22.4 Macros for integer constants
    5. 7.22.5 Maximal and minimal values of integer types
  7. 7.23 Input/output <stdio.h>
    1. 7.23.1 Introduction
    2. 7.23.2 Streams
    3. 7.23.3 Files
    4. 7.23.4 Operations on files
    5. 7.23.5 File access functions
    6. 7.23.6 Formatted input/output functions
    7. 7.23.7 Character input/output functions
    8. 7.23.8 Direct input/output functions
    9. 7.23.9 File positioning functions
  8. 7.24 General utilities <stdlib.h>
    1. 7.24.1 Numeric conversion functions
    2. 7.24.2 Pseudo-random sequence generation functions
    3. 7.24.3 Memory management functions
    4. 7.24.4 Communication with the environment
    5. 7.24.5 Searching and sorting utilities .
    6. 7.24.6 Integer arithmetic functions
    7. 7.24.7 Multibyte/wide character conversion functions
  1. 7.24.8 Multibyte/wide string conversion functions
  2. 7.24.9 Alignment of memory
  3. 7.25 _ Noreturn <stdnoreturn.h>
  4. 7.26 String handling <string.h>
    1. 7.26.1 String function conventions
    2. 7.26.2 Copying functions
    3. 7.26.3 Concatenation functions
    4. 7.26.4 Comparison functions
    5. 7.26.5 Search functions
    6. 7.26.6 Miscellaneous functions
  5. 7.27 Type-generic math <tgmath.h>
  6. 7.28 Threads <threads.h>
    1. 7.28.1 Introduction
    2. 7.28.2 Initialization functions
    3. 7.28.3 Condition variable functions
    4. 7.28.4 Mutex functions
    5. 7.28.5 Thread functions
    6. 7.28.6 Thread-specific storage functions
  7. 7.29 Date and time <time.h>
    1. 7.29.1 Components of time
    2. 7.29.2 Time manipulation functions
    3. 7.29.3 Time conversion functions
  8. 7.30 Unicode utilities <uchar.h>
    1. 7.30.1 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions
  9. 7.31 Extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h>
    1. 7.31.1 Introduction
    2. 7.31.2 Formatted wide character input/output functions
    3. 7.31.3 Wide character input/output functions
    4. 7.31.4 General wide string utilities
      1. 7.31.4.1 Wide string numeric conversion functions
      2. 7.31.4.2 Wide string copying functions
      3. 7.31.4.3 Wide string concatenation functions .
      4. 7.31.4.4 Wide string comparison functions
      5. 7.31.4.5 Wide string search functions
      6. 7.31.4.6 Miscellaneous functions
    5. 7.31.5 Wide character time conversion functions
    6. 7.31.6 Extended multibyte/wide character conversion utilities
      1. 7.31.6.1 Single-byte/wide character conversion functions
      2. 7.31.6.2 Conversion state functions
      3. 7.31.6.3 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions
  1. 7.31.6.4 Restartable multibyte/wide string conversion functions
  2. 7.32 Wide character classification and mapping utilities <wctype.h>
    1. 7.32.1 Introduction
    2. 7.32.2 Wide character classification utilities
      1. 7.32.2.1 Wide character classification functions
      2. 7.32.2.2 Extensible wide character classification functions
    3. 7.32.3 Wide character case mapping utilities
      1. 7.32.3.1 Wide character case mapping functions
      2. 7.32.3.2 Extensible wide character case mapping functions
  3. 7.33 Future library directions
    1. 7.33.1 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>
    2. 7.33.2 Character handling <ctype.h>
    3. 7.33.3 Errors <errno.h>
    4. 7.33.4 Floating-point environment <fenv.h>
    5. 7.33.5 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>
    6. 7.33.6 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>
    7. 7.33.7 Localization <locale.h>
    8. 7.33.8 Mathematics <math.h>
    9. 7.33.9 Signal handling <signal.h>

A Language syntax summary

B Library summary

C Sequence points

D Universal character names for identifiers

E Implementation limits

F ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point arithmetic

G ISO/IEC 60559-compatible complex arithmetic

H ISO/IEC 60559 interchange and extended types

I Common warnings

J Portability issues

K Bounds-checking interfaces

L Analyzability

M Change History

Bibliography

Index

Foreword

1

ISO (the International Organization for Standardization) and IEC (the International Electrotechnical Commission) form the specialized system for worldwide standardization. National bodies that are members of ISO or IEC participate in the development of International Standards through technical committees established by the respective organization to deal with particular fields of technical activity. ISO and IEC technical committees collaborate in fields of mutual interest. Other international organizations, governmental and non-governmental, in liaison with ISO and IEC, also take part in the work.

2

The procedures used to develop this document and those intended for its further maintenance are described in the ISO/IEC Directives, Part 1. In particular, the different approval criteria needed for the different types of document should be noted. This document was drafted in accordance with the editorial rules of the ISO/IEC Directives, Part 2 (see www.iso.org/directives or www.iec.ch/members_experts/refdocs).

3

ISO and IEC draw attention to the possibility that the implementation of this document may involve the use of (a) patent(s). ISO and IEC take no position concerning the evidence, validity or applicability of any claimed patent rights in respect thereof. As of the date of publication of this document, ISO and IEC had not received notice of (a) patent(s) which may be required to implement this document. However, implementers are cautioned that this may not represent the latest information, which may be obtained from the patent database available at www.iso.org/patents and patents.iec.ch. ISO and IEC shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights.

4

Any trade name used in this document is information given for the convenience of users and does not constitute an endorsement.

5

For an explanation of the voluntary nature of standards, the meaning of ISO specific terms and expressions related to conformity assessment, as well as information about ISO’s adherence to the World Trade Organization (WTO) principles in the Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) see www.iso.org/iso/foreword.html. In the IEC, see www.iec.ch/understanding-standards.

6

This document was prepared by Joint Technical Committee ISO/IEC JTC1, Information technology, Subcommittee SC22, Programming languages, their environments and system software interfaces.

7

This fifth edition cancels and replaces the fourth edition (ISO/IEC 9899:2018), which has been technically revised. The main changes are contained in Annex M.

8

Any feedback or questions on this document should be directed to the user’s national standards body. A complete listing of these bodies can be found at www.iso.org/members.html and www.iec.ch/national-committees.

Introduction

1

With the introduction of new devices and extended character sets, new features could be added to future editions of this document. Subclauses in the language and library clauses warn implementers and programmers of usages which, though valid in themselves, could conflict with future additions.

2

Certain features are obsolescent, which means that they could be considered for withdrawal in future revisions of this document. They are retained because of their widespread use, but their use in new implementations (for implementation features) or new programs (for language [6.11] or library features [7.33]) is discouraged.

3

This document is divided into four major subdivisions:

  • preliminary elements (Clauses 1–4);
  • the characteristics of environments that translate and execute C programs (Clause 5);
  • the language syntax, constraints, and semantics (Clause 6);
  • the library facilities (Clause 7).
4

Examples are provided to illustrate possible forms of the constructions described. Footnotes are provided to emphasize consequences of the rules described in that subclause or elsewhere in this document. References are used to refer to other related subclauses. Recommendations are provided to give advice or guidance to implementers. Annexes define optional features, provide additional information and summarize the information contained in this document. A bibliography lists documents that were referred to during the preparation of this document.

5

The language clause (Clause 6) is derived from "The C Reference Manual"[15].

6

The library clause (Clause 7) is based on the 1984 /usr/group Standard[16].

Information technology — Programming languages — C

1 Scope

1

This document specifies the form and establishes the interpretation of programs written in the C programming language. It is designed to promote the portability of C programs among a variety of data-processing systems. It is intended for use by implementers and programmers. It specifies:

  • the representation of C programs;
  • the syntax and constraints of the C language;
  • the semantic rules for interpreting C programs;
  • the representation of input data to be processed by C programs;
  • the representation of output data produced by C programs;
  • the restrictions and limits imposed by a conforming implementation of C.
2

This document does not specify:

  • the mechanism by which C programs are transformed for use by a data-processing system;
  • the mechanism by which C programs are invoked for use by a data-processing system;
  • the mechanism by which input data are transformed for use by a C program;
  • the mechanism by which output data are transformed after being produced by a C program;
  • the size or complexity of a program and its data that will exceed the capacity of any specific data-processing system or the capacity of a particular processor;
  • all minimal requirements of a data-processing system that is capable of supporting a conforming implementation.
3

Annex J gives an overview of portability issues that a C program might encounter.

2 Normative references

1

The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all their content constitutes requirements of this document. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.

2

ISO/IEC 2382:2015, Information technology — Vocabulary.

3

ISO 4217, Codes for the representation of currencies.

4

ISO 8601 series, Data elements and interchange formats — Information interchange — Representation of dates and times.

5

ISO/IEC 10646, Information technology —Universal Coded Character Set (UCS).

6

ISO/IEC 60559:2020, Information technology — Microprocessor Systems — Floating-Point arithmetic.

7

ISO 80000–2, Quantities and units — Part 2: Mathematics.

8

The Unicode Consortium. Unicode Standard Annex, UAX #44, Unicode Character Database [online]. Edited by Ken Whistler. Available at https://www.unicode.org/reports/tr44.

9

The Unicode Consortium. The Unicode Standard, Derived Core Properties. Available at https://www.unicode.org/Public/UCD/latest/ucd/DerivedCoreProperties.txt.

3 Terms, definitions, and symbols

1

For the purposes of this document, the terms and definitions given in ISO/IEC 2382, ISO 80000–2, and the following apply.

2

ISO and IEC maintain terminology databases for use in standardization at the following addresses:

3

Additional terms are defined where they appear in italic type or on the left side of a syntax rule. Terms explicitly defined in this document are not to be presumed to refer implicitly to similar terms defined elsewhere.

3.1

1

access (verb)

⟨execution-time action⟩read or modify the value of an object

2

Note 1 to entry: Where only one of these two actions is meant, "read" or "modify" is used.

3

Note 2 to entry: "Modify" includes the case where the new value being stored is the same as the previous value.

4

Note 3 to entry: Expressions that are not evaluated do not access objects.

3.2

1

alignment

requirement that objects of a particular type be located on storage boundaries with addresses that are particular multiples of a byte (3.7) address

3.3

1

argument

actual argument

DEPRECATED: actual parameter

expression in the comma-separated list bounded by the parentheses in a function call expression, or a sequence of preprocessing tokens in the comma-separated list bounded by the parentheses in a function-like macro invocation

3.4

1

arithmetically negate

produce the negative of a given number

2

Note 1 to entry: For a floating-point number (5.2.5.3.3), this changes the sign; for an integer, this is equivalent to subtracting from zero.

3.5

1

behavior

external appearance or action

3.5.1

1

implementation-defined behavior

unspecified behavior where each implementation documents how the choice is made

2

Note 1 to entry: J.3 gives an overview over properties of C programs that lead to implementation-defined behavior.

3

EXAMPLE An example of implementation-defined behavior is the propagation of the high-order bit when a signed integer is shifted right.

3.5.2

1

locale-specific behavior

behavior that depends on local conventions of nationality, culture, and language that each implementation documents

2

Note 1 to entry: J.4 gives an overview over properties of C programs that lead to locale-specific behavior.

3

EXAMPLE An example of locale-specific behavior is whether the islower function returns true for characters other than the 26 lowercase Latin letters.

3.5.3

1

undefined behavior

behavior, upon use of a nonportable or erroneous program construct or of erroneous data, for which this document imposes no requirements

2

Note 1 to entry: Possible undefined behavior ranges from ignoring the situation completely with unpredictable results, to behaving during translation or program execution in a documented manner characteristic of the environment (with or without the issuance of a diagnostic message), to terminating a translation or execution (with the issuance of a diagnostic message).

3

Note 2 to entry: J.2 gives an overview over properties of C programs that lead to undefined behavior.

4

Note 3 to entry: Any other behavior during execution of a program is only affected as a direct consequence of the concrete behavior that occurs when encountering the erroneous or non-portable program construct or data. In particular, all observable behavior (5.1.2.4) appears as specified in this document when it happens before an operation with undefined behavior in the execution of the program.

5

EXAMPLE An example of undefined behavior is the behavior on dereferencing a null pointer.

3.5.4

1

unspecified behavior

behavior, that results from the use of an unspecified value, or other behavior upon which this document provides two or more possibilities and imposes no further requirements on which is chosen in any instance

2

Note 1 to entry: J.1 gives an overview over properties of C programs that lead to unspecified behavior.

3

EXAMPLE An example of unspecified behavior is the order in which the arguments to a function are evaluated.

3.6

1

bit

unit of data storage in the execution environment large enough to hold an object that can have one of two values. It may not be possible to express the address of each individual bit of an object.

3.7

1

byte

addressable unit of data storage large enough to hold any member of the basic character set of the execution environment

2

Note 1 to entry: It is possible to express the address of each individual byte of an object uniquely.

3.8

1

low-order bit

the least significant bit within a byte

3.9

1

high-order bit

the most significant bit within a byte

3.10

1

character

⟨abstract⟩member of a set of elements used for the organization, control, or representation of data

3.10.1

1

character

single-byte character

⟨C⟩bit representation that fits in a byte

3.10.2

1

multibyte character

sequence of one or more bytes representing a member of the extended character set of either the source or the execution environment

2

Note 1 to entry: The extended character set is a superset of the basic character set.

3.10.3

1

wide character

value representable by an object of type wchar_t, capable of representing any character in the current locale

3.11

1

constraint

restriction, either syntactic or semantic, by which the exposition of language elements is interpreted

3.12

1

correctly rounded result

representation in the result format that is nearest in value, subject to the current rounding mode, to what the result would be given unlimited range and precision

2

Note 1 to entry: In this document, the words "correctly rounded" may apply to an operation that produces a correctly rounded result, or to input for such an operation.

3

Note 2 to entry: ISO/IEC 60559 or implementation-defined rules apply for extreme magnitude results if the result format contains infinity.

3.13

1

diagnostic message

message belonging to an implementation-defined subset of the implementation’s message output

3.14

1

forward reference

reference to a subsequent subclause in this document that contains additional information relevant to the subclause containing the reference

3.15

1

implementation

particular set of software, running in a particular translation environment under particular control options, that performs translation of programs for, and supports execution of functions in, a

particular execution environment

3.16

1

implementation limit

restriction imposed upon programs by the implementation

3.17

1

memory location

either an object of scalar type, or a maximal sequence of adjacent bit-fields all having nonzero width

2

Note 1 to entry: Two threads of execution can update and access separate memory locations without interfering with each other.

3

Note 2 to entry: A bit-field and an adjacent non-bit-field member are in separate memory locations. The same applies to two bit-fields, if one is declared inside a nested structure declaration and the other is not, or if the two are separated by a zero-length bit-field declaration, or if they are separated by a non-bit-field member declaration. It is not safe to concurrently update two non-atomic bit-fields in the same structure if all members declared between them are also (nonzero-length) bit-fields, no matter what the sizes of those intervening bit-fields happen to be.

4

EXAMPLE A structure declared as

struct {
      char a;
      int b:5, c:11,:0, d:8;
      struct { int ee:8; } e;
}

contains four separate memory locations: The member a, and bit-fields d and e.ee are each separate memory locations, and can be modified concurrently without interfering with each other. The bit-fields b and c together constitute the fourth memory location. The bit-fields b and c cannot be concurrently modified, but b and a, for example, can be.

3.18

1

object

region of data storage in the execution environment, the contents of which can represent values

2

Note 1 to entry: When referenced, an object can be interpreted as having a particular type; see 6.3.2.1.

3.19

1

parameter

formal parameter

DEPRECATED: formal argument

object declared as part of a function declaration or definition that acquires a value on entry to the function, or an identifier from the comma-separated list bounded by the parentheses immediately following the macro name in a function-like macro definition

3.20

1

recommended practice

specification that is strongly recommended as being in keeping with the intent of the standard, but that may be impractical for some implementations

3.21

1

runtime-constraint

requirement on a program when calling a library function

2

Note 1 to entry: Despite the similar terms, a runtime-constraint is not a kind of constraint as defined by 3.11,

and it is not necessary for it to be diagnosed at translation time.

3

Note 2 to entry: Implementations that support the extensions in Annex K are required to verify that the runtime-constraints for a library function are not violated by the program; see K.3.1.4.

4

Note 3 to entry: Implementations that support Annex L are permitted to invoke a runtime-constraint handler when they perform a trap.

3.22

1

value

precise meaning of the contents of an object when interpreted as having a specific type

3.22.1

1

implementation-defined value

unspecified value where each implementation documents how the choice is made

3.22.2

1

unspecified value

valid value of the relevant type where this document imposes no requirements on which value is chosen in any instance

3.23

1

indeterminate representation

object representation that either represents an unspecified value or is a non-value representation

3.24

1

non-value representation

an object representation that does not represent a value of the object type

3.25

1

perform a trap

interrupt execution of the program such that no further operations are performed

2

Note 1 to entry: Fetching a non-value representation permits an implementation to perform a trap but is not required to (see 6.2.6.1).

3

Note 2 to entry: Implementations that support Annex L are permitted to invoke a runtime-constraint handler when they perform a trap.

3.26

1

x

ceiling of x

the least integer greater than or equal to x

2

EXAMPLE 2.4 is 3, 2.4 is 2.

3.27

1

x

floor of x

the greatest integer less than or equal to x

2

EXAMPLE 2.4 is 2, 2.4 is 3.

3.28

1

wraparound

the process by which a value is reduced modulo 2N, where N is the width of the resulting type

4 Conformance

1

In this document, "shall" is to be interpreted as a requirement on an implementation or on a program; conversely, "shall not" is to be interpreted as a prohibition.

2

If a "shall" or "shall not" requirement that appears outside of a constraint or runtime-constraint is violated, the behavior is undefined. Undefined behavior is otherwise indicated in this document by the words "undefined behavior" or by the omission of any explicit definition of behavior. There is no difference in emphasis among these three; they all describe "behavior that is undefined".

3

A program that is correct in all other aspects, operating on correct data, containing unspecified behavior shall be a correct program and act in accordance with 5.1.2.4.

4

The implementation shall not successfully translate a preprocessing translation unit containing a #error preprocessing directive unless it is part of a group skipped by conditional inclusion.

5

A strictly conforming program shall use only those features of the language and library specified in this document. It shall not produce output dependent on any unspecified, undefined, or implementationdefined behavior, and shall not exceed any minimum implementation limit.

6

EXAMPLE A strictly conforming program can use conditional features (see 6.10.10.4) provided the use is guarded by an appropriate conditional inclusion preprocessing directive using the related macro. For example:

#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ /* FE_UPWARD defined */
       /* ... */
       fesetround(FE_UPWARD);
       /* ... */
#endif
7

The two forms of conforming implementation are hosted and freestanding. A conforming hosted implementation shall accept any strictly conforming program. A conforming freestanding implementation shall accept any strictly conforming program in which the use of the features specified in the library clause (Clause 7) is confined to the contents of the standard headers <float.h>, <iso646.h>, <limits.h>, <stdalign.h>, <stdarg.h>, <stdbit.h>, <stdbool.h>, <stddef.h>, <stdint.h>, and <stdnoreturn.h>. Additionally, a conforming freestanding implementation shall accept any strictly conforming program where:

  • the features specified in the header <string.h> are used, except the following functions:

strcoll, strdup, strerror, strndup, strtok, strxfrm; and/or,

  • the selected function memalignment from <stdlib.h> is used.

A conforming implementation may have extensions (including additional library functions), provided they do not alter the behavior of any strictly conforming program.1)

8

The strictly conforming programs that shall be accepted by a conforming freestanding implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ or __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ may also use features in the contents of the standard headers <fenv.h>, <math.h>, and the strto* floating-point numeric conversion functions (7.24.1) of the standard header <stdlib.h>, provided the program does not set the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma to "on".

All identifiers that are reserved when <stdlib.h> is included in a hosted implementation are reserved when it is included in a freestanding implementation.

9

A conforming program is one that is acceptable to a conforming implementation.2)

10

An implementation shall be accompanied by a document that defines all implementation-defined and locale-specific characteristics and all extensions.

Forward references: conditional inclusion (6.10.2), error directive (6.10.7), characteristics of floating types <float.h> (7.7), alternative spellings <iso646.h> (7.9), sizes of integer types <limits.h> (7.10), alignment <stdalign.h> (7.15), variable arguments <stdarg.h> (7.16), boolean type and values <stdbool.h> (7.19), common definitions <stddef.h> (7.21), integer types <stdint.h> (7.22), <stdnoreturn.h> (7.25).

5 Environment

1

An implementation translates C source files and executes C programs in two data-processing-system environments, which will be called the translation environment and the execution environment in this document. Their characteristics define and constrain the results of executing conforming C programs constructed according to the syntactic and semantic rules for conforming implementations.

Forward references: In this clause, only a few of many possible forward references have been noted.

5.1 Conceptual models

5.1.1 Translation environment

5.1.1.1 Program structure

1

A C program is not required to be translated in its entirety at the same time. The text of the program is kept in units called source files, (or preprocessing files) in this document. A source file together with all the headers and source files included via the preprocessing directive #include is known as a preprocessing translation unit. After preprocessing, a preprocessing translation unit is called a translation unit. Previously translated translation units may be preserved individually or in libraries. The separate translation units of a program communicate by (for example) calls to functions whose identifiers have external linkage, manipulation of objects whose identifiers have external linkage, or manipulation of data files. Translation units may be separately translated and then later linked to produce an executable program.

Forward references: linkages of identifiers (6.2.2), external definitions (6.9), preprocessing directives (6.10).

5.1.1.2 Translation phases

1

The precedence among the syntax rules of translation is specified by the following phases.3)

  1. Physical source file multibyte characters are mapped, in an implementation-defined manner, to the source character set (introducing new-line characters for end-of-line indicators) if necessary.
  2. Each instance of a backslash character (\) immediately followed by a new-line character is deleted, splicing physical source lines to form logical source lines. Only the last backslash on any physical source line shall be eligible for being part of such a splice. A source file that is not empty shall end in a new-line character, which shall not be immediately preceded by a backslash character before any such splicing takes place.
  3. The source file is decomposed into preprocessing tokens4) and sequences of white-space characters (including comments). A source file shall not end in a partial preprocessing token or in a partial comment. Each comment is replaced by one space character. New-line characters are retained. Whether each nonempty sequence of white-space characters other than new-line is retained or replaced by one space character is implementation-defined.
  4. Preprocessing directives are executed, macro invocations are expanded, and _Pragma unary operator expressions are executed. If a character sequence that matches the syntax of a universal character name is produced by token concatenation (6.10.5.3), the behavior is undefined. A #include preprocessing directive causes the named header or source file to be processed from phase 1 through phase 4, recursively. All preprocessing directives are then deleted.
  5. Each source character set member and escape sequence in character constants and string literals is converted to the corresponding member of the execution character set. Each instance of a source character or escape sequence for which there is no corresponding member is converted in an implementation-defined manner to some member of the execution character set other than the null (wide) character.5)
  6. Adjacent string literal tokens are concatenated.
  7. White-space characters separating tokens are no longer significant. Each preprocessing token is converted into a token. The resulting tokens are syntactically and semantically analyzed and translated as a translation unit.
  8. All external object and function references are resolved. Library components are linked to satisfy external references to functions and objects not defined in the current translation. All such translator output is collected into a program image which contains information needed for execution in its execution environment.
Forward references: universal character names (6.4.3), lexical elements (6.4), preprocessing directives (6.10), external definitions (6.9).

5.1.1.3 Diagnostics

1

A conforming implementation shall produce at least one diagnostic message (identified in an implementation-defined manner) if a preprocessing translation unit or translation unit contains a violation of any syntax rule or constraint, even if the behavior is also explicitly specified as undefined or implementation-defined. Diagnostic messages are not required to be produced in other circumstances.

2

EXAMPLE An implementation is required to issue a diagnostic for the translation unit:

char i;
int i;

because in those cases where wording in this document describes the behavior for a construct as being both a constraint error and resulting in undefined behavior, the constraint error is still required to be diagnosed.

Recommended practice
3

An implementation is encouraged to identify the nature of, and where possible localize, each violation. Of course, an implementation is free to produce any number of diagnostic messages, often referred to as warnings, as long as a valid program is still correctly translated. It can also successfully translate an invalid program. Annex I lists a few of the more common warnings.

5.1.2 Execution environments

5.1.2.1 General

1

Two execution environments are defined: freestanding and hosted. In both cases, program startup occurs when a designated C function is called by the execution environment. All objects with static storage duration shall be initialized (set to their initial values) before program startup. The manner and timing of such initialization are otherwise unspecified. Program termination returns control to the execution environment.

Forward references: storage durations of objects (6.2.4), initialization (6.7.11).

5.1.2.2 Freestanding environment

1

In a freestanding environment (in which C program execution may take place without any benefit of an operating system), the name and type of the function called at program startup are implementation-defined. Any library facilities available to a freestanding program, other than the minimal set required by Clause 4, are implementation-defined.

2

The effect of program termination in a freestanding environment is implementation-defined.

5.1.2.3 Hosted environment

5.1.2.3.1 General
1

A hosted environment is not required to be provided, but shall conform to the following specifications if present.

5.1.2.3.2 Program startup
1

The function called at program startup is named main. The implementation declares no prototype for this function. It shall be defined with a return type of int and with no parameters:

int main(void) { /* ... */ }
or with two parameters (referred to here as argc and argv, though any names may be used, as they are local to the function in which they are declared):
int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { /* ... */ }

or equivalent;6) or in some other implementation-defined manner.

2

If they are declared, the parameters to the main function shall obey the following constraints:

  • The value of argc shall be nonnegative.
  • argv[argc] shall be a null pointer.
  • If the value of argc is greater than zero, the array members argv[0] through argv[argc-1]

inclusive shall contain pointers to strings, which are given implementation-defined values by the host environment prior to program startup. The intent is to supply to the program information determined prior to program startup from elsewhere in the hosted environment. If the host environment is not capable of supplying strings with letters in both uppercase and lowercase, the implementation shall ensure that the strings are received in lowercase.

  • If the value of argc is greater than zero, the string pointed to by argv[0] represents the program name; argv[0][0] shall be the null character if the program name is not available from the host environment. If the value of argc is greater than one, the strings pointed to by argv[1] through argv[argc-1] represent the program parameters.
  • The parameters argc and argv and the strings pointed to by the argv array shall be modifiable by the program, and retain their last-stored values between program startup and program termination.
5.1.2.3.3 Program execution
1

In a hosted environment, a program may use all the functions, macros, type definitions, and objects described in the library clause (Clause 7).

5.1.2.3.4 Program termination
1

If the return type of the main function is a type compatible with int, a return from the initial call to the main function is equivalent to calling the exit function with the value returned by the main function as its argument;7) reaching the } that terminates the main function returns a value of 0. If the return type is not compatible with int, the termination status returned to the host environment is unspecified.

Forward references: definition of terms (7.1.1), the exit function (7.24.4.4).

5.1.2.4 Program semantics

1

The semantic descriptions in this document describe the behavior of an abstract machine in which issues of optimization are irrelevant.

2

An access to an object through the use of an lvalue of volatile-qualified type is a volatile access. A volatile access to an object, modifying an object, modifying a file, or calling a function that does any of those operations are all side effects,8) which are changes in the state of the execution environment.

Evaluation of an expression in general includes both value computations and initiation of side effects. Value computation for an lvalue expression includes determining the identity of the designated object.

3

Sequenced before is an asymmetric, transitive, pair-wise relation between evaluations executed by a single thread, which induces a partial order among those evaluations. Given any two evaluations A and B, if A is sequenced before B, then the execution of A shall precede the execution of B. (Conversely, if A is sequenced before B, then B is sequenced after A.) If A is not sequenced before or after B, then A and B are unsequenced. Evaluations A and B are indeterminately sequenced when A is sequenced either before or after B, but it is unspecified which.9) The presence of a sequence point between the evaluation of expressions A and B implies that every value computation and side effect associated with A is sequenced before every value computation and side effect associated with B. (A summary of the sequence points is given in Annex C.)

4

In the abstract machine, all expressions are evaluated as specified by the semantics. An actual implementation is not required to evaluate part of an expression if it can deduce that its value is not used and that no needed side effects are produced (including any caused by calling a function or through volatile access to an object).

5

When the processing of the abstract machine is interrupted by receipt of a signal, the values of objects that are neither lock-free atomic objects nor of type volatile sig_atomic_t are unspecified, as is the state of the dynamic floating-point environment. The representation of any object modified by the handler that is neither a lock-free atomic object nor of type volatile sig_atomic_t becomes indeterminate when the handler exits, as does the state of the dynamic floating-point environment if it is modified by the handler and not restored to its original state.

6

The least requirements on a conforming implementation are:

  • Volatile accesses to objects are evaluated strictly according to the rules of the abstract machine.
  • At program termination, all data written into files shall be identical to the result that execution of the program according to the abstract semantics would have produced.
  • The input and output dynamics of interactive devices shall take place as specified in 7.23.3. The intent of these requirements is that unbuffered or line-buffered output appear as soon as possible, to ensure that prompting messages appear prior to a program waiting for input.

This is the observable behavior of the program.

7

What constitutes an interactive device is implementation-defined.

8

More stringent correspondences between abstract and actual semantics may be defined by each implementation.

9

EXAMPLE 1 An implementation can define a one-to-one correspondence between abstract and actual semantics: at every sequence point, the values of the actual objects would agree with those specified by the abstract semantics. The keyword volatile would then be redundant.

10

Alternatively, an implementation can perform various optimizations within each translation unit, such that the actual semantics would agree with the abstract semantics only when making function calls across translation

unit boundaries. In such an implementation, at the time of each function entry and function return where the calling function and the called function are in different translation units, the values of all externally linked objects and of all objects accessible via pointers therein would agree with the abstract semantics. Furthermore, at the time of each such function entry the values of the parameters of the called function and of all objects accessible via pointers therein would agree with the abstract semantics. In this type of implementation, objects referred to by interrupt service routines activated by the signal function would require explicit specification of volatile storage, as well as other implementation-defined restrictions.

11

EXAMPLE 2 In executing the fragment

char c1, c2;
/* ... */
c1 = c1 + c2;

the "integer promotions" require that the abstract machine promote the value of each variable to int size and then add the two ints and truncate the sum. Provided the addition of two chars can be done without integer overflow, or with integer overflow wrapping silently to produce the correct result, the actual execution need only produce the same result, possibly omitting the promotions.

12

EXAMPLE 3 Similarly, in the fragment

float f1, f2;
double d;
/* ... */
f1 = f2 * d;

the multiplication can be executed using float arithmetic if the implementation can ascertain that the result would be the same as if it were executed using double arithmetic (for example, if d were replaced by the constant 2.0, which has type double).

13

EXAMPLE 4 Implementations employing wide registers have to take care to honor appropriate semantics. Values are independent of whether they are represented in a register or in memory. For example, an implicit spilling of a register is not permitted to alter the value. Also, an explicit store and load is required to round to the precision of the storage type. In particular, casts and assignments are required to perform their specified conversion. For the fragment

double d1, d2;
float f;
d1 = f = expression;
d2 = (float) expression;

the values assigned to d1 and d2 are required to have been converted to float.

14

EXAMPLE 5 Rearrangement for floating-point expressions is often restricted because of limitations in precision as well as range. The implementation cannot generally apply the mathematical associative rules for addition or multiplication, nor the distributive rule, because of roundoff error, even in the absence of overflow and underflow. Likewise, implementations cannot generally replace decimal constants to rearrange expressions. In the following fragment, rearrangements suggested by mathematical rules for real numbers are often not valid (see F.9).

double x, y, z;
/* ... */
x = (x * y) * z;  // not equivalent to x *= y * z;
z = (x - y) + y;  // not equivalent to z = x;
z = x + x * y;    // not equivalent to z = x * (1.0 + y);
y = x / 5.0;      // not equivalent to y = x * 0.2;
15

EXAMPLE 6 To illustrate the grouping behavior of expressions, in the following fragment

int a, b;
/* ... */
a = a + 32760 + b + 5;
a = (((a + 32760) + b) + 5);
a = ((a + b) + 32765);
a = ((a + 32765) + b);
a = (a + (b + 32765));

since the values for a and b may have been, respectively, 4 and 8 or 17 and 12. However, on a machine in which integer overflow silently generates some value and where positive and negative integer overflows cancel, the preceding expression statement can be rewritten by the implementation in any of the previously specified ways because the same result will occur.

16

EXAMPLE 7 The grouping of an expression does not completely determine its evaluation. In the following fragment:

#include <stdio.h>
int sum;
char *p;
/* ... */
sum = sum * 10 - ’0’ + (*p++ = getchar());
the expression statement is grouped as if it were written as
sum = (((sum * 10) - ’0’) + ((*(p++)) = (getchar())));

but the actual increment of p can occur at any time between the previous sequence point and the next sequence point (the ;), and the call to getchar can occur at any point prior to the need of its returned value.

Forward references: expressions (6.5.1), type qualifiers (6.7.4), statements (6.8), floating-point environment <fenv.h> (7.6), the signal function (7.14), files (7.23.3).

5.1.2.5 Multi-threaded executions and data races

1

Under a hosted implementation that does not define __STDC_NO_THREADS__, a program can have more than one thread of execution (or thread) running concurrently. The execution of each thread proceeds as defined by the remainder of this document. The execution of the entire program consists of an execution of all its threads.10) Under a freestanding implementation, it is implementationdefined whether a program can have more than one thread of execution.

2

The value of an object visible to a thread T at a particular point is the initial value of the object, a value stored in the object by T, or a value stored in the object by another thread, according to the rules in the rest of this subclause.

3

NOTE 1 In some cases, there could instead be undefined behavior. Much of this section is motivated by the desire to support atomic operations with explicit and detailed visibility constraints. However, it also implicitly supports a simpler view for more restricted programs.

4

Two expression evaluations conflict if one of them modifies a memory location and the other one reads or modifies the same memory location.

5

The library defines atomic operations (7.17) and operations on mutexes (7.28.4) that are specially identified as synchronization operations. These operations play a special role in making assignments in one thread visible to another. A synchronization operation on one or more memory locations is one of an acquire operation, a release operation, both an acquire and release operation, or a consume operation. A synchronization operation without an associated memory location is a fence and can be either an acquire fence, a release fence, or both an acquire and release fence. In addition, there are relaxed atomic operations, which are not synchronization operations, and atomic read-modify-write operations, which have special characteristics.

6

NOTE 2 For example, a call that acquires a mutex will perform an acquire operation on the locations composing the mutex. Correspondingly, a call that releases the same mutex will perform a release operation on those same locations. Informally, performing a release operation on A forces prior side effects on other memory locations to become visible to other threads that later perform an acquire or consume operation on A. Relaxed atomic operations are not included as synchronization operations although, like synchronization operations, they cannot contribute to data races.

7

All modifications to a particular atomic object M occur in some particular total order, called the modification order of M. If A and B are modifications of an atomic object M, and A happens before B, then A shall precede B in the modification order of M, which is defined later in this subclause.

8

NOTE 3 This states that the modification orders are expected to respect the "happens before" relation.

9

NOTE 4 There is a separate order for each atomic object. There is no requirement that these can be combined into a single total order for all objects. In general this will be impossible since different threads can observe modifications to different variables in inconsistent orders.

10

A release sequence headed by a release operation A on an atomic object M is a maximal contiguous sub-sequence of side effects in the modification order of M, where the first operation is A and every subsequent operation either is performed by the same thread that performed the release or is an atomic read-modify-write operation.

11

Certain library calls synchronize with other library calls performed by another thread. In particular, an atomic operation A that performs a release operation on an object M synchronizes with an atomic operation B that performs an acquire operation on M and reads a value written by any side effect in the release sequence headed by A.

12

NOTE 5 Except in the specified cases, reading a later value does not necessarily ensure visibility as described later in this subclause. Such a requirement would sometimes interfere with efficient implementation.

13

NOTE 6 The specifications of the synchronization operations define when one reads the value written by another. For atomic variables, the definition is clear. All operations on a given mutex occur in a single total order. Each mutex acquisition "reads the value written" by the last mutex release.

14

An evaluation A carries a dependency11) to an evaluation B if:

  • the value of A is used as an operand of B, unless:
    • B is an invocation of the kill_dependency macro,
    • A is the left operand of a && or || operator,
    • A is the left operand of a ?: operator, or
    • A is the left operand of a , operator;

or

  • A writes a scalar object or bit-field M, B reads from M the value written by A, and A is sequenced before B, or
  • for some evaluation X, A carries a dependency to X and X carries a dependency to B.
15

An evaluation A is dependency-ordered before12) an evaluation B if:

16

An evaluation A inter-thread happens before an evaluation B if A synchronizes with B, A is dependency-ordered before B, or, for some evaluation X:

  • A synchronizes with X and X is sequenced before B,
  • A is sequenced before X and X inter-thread happens before B, or
  • A inter-thread happens before X and X inter-thread happens before B.
17

NOTE 7 The "inter-thread happens before" relation describes arbitrary concatenations of "sequenced before", "synchronizes with", and "dependency-ordered before" relationships, with two exceptions. The first exception is that a concatenation is not permitted to end with "dependency-ordered before" followed by "sequenced before". The reason for this limitation is that a consume operation participating in a "dependency-ordered before" relationship provides ordering only with respect to operations to which this consume operation carries a dependency. The reason that this limitation applies only to the end of such a concatenation is that any subsequent release operation will provide the required ordering for a prior consume operation. The second exception is that a concatenation is not permitted to consist entirely of "sequenced before". The reasons for this limitation are (1) to permit "inter-thread happens before" to be transitively closed and (2) the "happens before" relation, defined subsequently in this subclause, provides for relationships consisting entirely of "sequenced before".

18

An evaluation A happens before an evaluation B if A is sequenced before B or A inter-thread happens before B. The implementation shall ensure that no program execution demonstrates a cycle in the "happens before" relation.

19

NOTE 8 This cycle would otherwise be possible only through the use of consume operations.

20

A visible side effect A on an object M with respect to a value computation B of M satisfies the conditions:

  • A happens before B, and
  • there is no other side effect X to M such that A happens before X and X happens before B.

The value of a non-atomic scalar object M, as determined by evaluation B, shall be the value stored by the visible side effect A.

21

NOTE 9 If there is ambiguity about which side effect to a non-atomic object is visible, then there is a data race and the behavior is undefined.

22

NOTE 10 This states that operations on ordinary variables are not visibly reordered. This is not detectable without data races, but ensures that data races, as defined here, and with suitable restrictions on the use of atomics, correspond to data races in a simple interleaved (sequentially consistent) execution.

23

The value of an atomic object M, as determined by evaluation B, shall be the value stored by some side effect A that modifies M, where B does not happen before A.

24

NOTE 11 The set of side effects from which a given evaluation may take its value is also restricted by the rest of the rules described here, and in particular, by the coherence requirements subsequently in this subclause.

25

If an operation A that modifies an atomic object M happens before an operation B that modifies M, then A shall be earlier than B in the modification order of M.

26

NOTE 12 Such a requirement is known as "write-write coherence".

27

If a value computation A of an atomic object M happens before a value computation B of M, and A takes its value from a side effect X on M, then the value computed by B shall either be the value stored by X or the value stored by a side effect Y on M, where Y follows X in the modification order of M.

28

NOTE 13 Such a requirement is known as "read-read coherence".

29

If a value computation A of an atomic object M happens before an operation B on M, then A shall take its value from a side effect X on M, where X precedes B in the modification order of M.

30

NOTE 14 Such a requirement is known as "read-write coherence".

31

If a side effect X on an atomic object M happens before a value computation B of M, then the evaluation B shall take its value from X or from a side effect Y that follows X in the modification order of M.

32

NOTE 15 Such a requirement is known as "write-read coherence".

33

NOTE 16 This effectively disallows compiler reordering of atomic operations to a single object, even if both operations are "relaxed" loads. By doing so, it effectively makes the "cache coherence" guarantee provided by most hardware available to C atomic operations.

34

NOTE 17 The value observed by a load of an atomic object depends on the "happens before" relation, which in turn depends on the values observed by loads of atomic objects. The intended reading is that there exists an association of atomic loads with modifications they observe that, together with suitably chosen modification orders and the "happens before" relation derived as described previously, satisfy the resulting constraints as imposed here.

35

The execution of a program contains a data race if it contains two conflicting actions in different threads, at least one of which is not atomic, and neither happens before the other. Any such data race results in undefined behavior.

36

NOTE 18 It can be shown that programs that correctly use simple mutexes and memory_order_seq_cst operations to prevent all data races, and use no other synchronization operations, behave as though the operations executed by their constituent threads were simply interleaved, with each value computation of an object being the last value stored in that interleaving. This is normally referred to as "sequential consistency". However, this applies only to data-race-free programs, and data-race-free programs cannot observe most program transformations that do not change single-threaded program semantics. In fact, most single-threaded program transformations continue to be allowed, since any program that behaves differently as a result of such transformations necessarily has undefined behavior even before such a transformation is applied.

37

NOTE 19 Compiler transformations that introduce assignments to a potentially shared memory location that would not be modified by the abstract machine are generally precluded by this document, since such an assignment can overwrite another assignment by a different thread in cases in which an abstract machine execution would not have encountered a data race. This includes implementations of data member assignment that overwrite adjacent members in separate memory locations. Reordering of atomic loads in cases in which the atomics in question can alias is also generally precluded, since this could violate the coherence requirements.

38

NOTE 20 Transformations that introduce a speculative read of a potentially shared memory location may not preserve the semantics of the program as defined in this document, since they potentially introduce a data race. However, they are typically valid in the context of an optimizing compiler that targets a specific machine with well-defined semantics for data races. They would be invalid for a hypothetical machine that is not tolerant of races or provides hardware race detection.

1

5.2 Environmental considerations 5.2.1 Character sets Two sets of characters and their associated collating sequences shall be defined: the set in which source files are written (the source character set), and the set interpreted in the execution environment (the execution character set). Each set is further divided into a basic character set, whose contents are given by this subclause, and a set of zero or more locale-specific members (which are not members of the basic character set) called extended characters. The combined set is also called the extended character set. The values of the members of the execution character set are implementation-defined.

2

In a character constant or string literal, members of the execution character set shall be represented by corresponding members of the source character set or by escape sequences consisting of the backslash \ followed by one or more characters. A byte with all bits set to 0, called the null character, shall exist in the basic execution character set; it is used to terminate a character string.

3

Both the basic source and basic execution character sets shall have the following members: the 26 uppercase letters of the Latin alphabet

the space character, and control characters representing horizontal tab, vertical tab, and form feed. The representation of each member of the source and execution basic character sets shall fit in a byte. In both the source and execution basic character sets, the value of each character after 0 in the preceding list of decimal digits shall be one greater than the value of the previous. In source files, there shall be some way of indicating the end of each line of text; this document treats such an end-of-line indicator as if it were a single new-line character. In the basic execution character set, there shall be control characters representing alert, backspace, carriage return, and new line. If any other characters are encountered in a source file (except in an identifier, a character constant, a string literal, a header name, a comment, or a preprocessing token that is never converted to a token), the behavior is undefined.

4

A letter is an uppercase letter or a lowercase letter as defined previously in this subclause; in this document the term does not include other characters that are letters in other alphabets.

5

The universal character name construct provides a way to name other characters.

Forward references: universal character names (6.4.3), character constants (6.4.4.5), preprocessing directives (6.10), string literals (6.4.5), comments (6.4.9), string (7.1.1).

5.2.2 Multibyte characters

1

The source character set may contain multibyte characters, used to represent members of the extended character set. The execution character set may also contain multibyte characters, which are not required to have the same encoding as for the source character set. For both character sets, the following shall hold:

  • The basic character set shall be present and each character shall be encoded as a single byte.
  • The presence, meaning, and representation of any additional members is locale-specific.
  • A multibyte character set may have a state-dependent encoding, wherein each sequence of multibyte characters begins in an initial shift state and enters other locale-specific shift states when specific multibyte characters are encountered in the sequence. While in the initial shift state, all single-byte characters retain their usual interpretation and do not alter the shift state. The interpretation for subsequent bytes in the sequence is a function of the current shift state.
  • A byte with all bits zero shall be interpreted as a null character independent of shift state. Such a byte shall not occur as part of any other multibyte character.
2

For source files, the following shall hold:

  • An identifier, comment, string literal, character constant, or header name shall begin and end in the initial shift state.
  • An identifier, comment, string literal, character constant, or header name shall consist of a sequence of valid multibyte characters.

5.2.3 Character display semantics

1

The active position is that location on a display device where the next character output by the fputc function would appear. The intent of writing a printing character (as defined by the isprint function) to a display device is to display a graphic representation of that character at the active position and then advance the active position to the next position on the current line. The direction of writing is locale-specific. If the active position is at the final position of a line (if there is one), the behavior of the display device is unspecified.

2

Alphabetic escape sequences representing non-graphic characters in the execution character set are intended to produce actions on display devices as follows:

\a (alert) Produces an audible or visible alert without changing the active position.

\b (backspace) Moves the active position to the previous position on the current line. If the active position is at the initial position of a line, the behavior of the display device is unspecified.

\f (form feed) Moves the active position to the initial position at the start of the next logical page.

\n (new line) Moves the active position to the initial position of the next line.

\r (carriage return) Moves the active position to the initial position of the current line.

\t (horizontal tab) Moves the active position to the next horizontal tabulation position on the current line. If the active position is at or past the last defined horizontal tabulation position, the behavior of the display device is unspecified.

\v (vertical tab) Moves the active position to the initial position of the next vertical tabulation position. If the active position is at or past the last defined vertical tabulation position, the behavior of the display device is unspecified.

3

Each of these escape sequences shall produce a unique implementation-defined value which can be stored in a single char object. The external representations in a text file are not necessarily identical to the internal representations, and are outside the scope of this document.

Forward references: the isprint function (7.4.2.8), the fputc function (7.23.7.3).

5.2.4 Signals and interrupts

1

Functions shall be implemented such that they may be interrupted at any time by a signal, or may be called by a signal handler, or both, with no alteration to earlier, but still active, invocations’ control flow (after the interruption), function return values, or objects with automatic storage duration. All such objects shall be maintained outside the function image (the instructions that compose the executable representation of a function) on a per-invocation basis.

5.2.5 Environmental limits

5.2.5.1 General

1

Both the translation and execution environments constrain the implementation of language translators and libraries. The following summarizes the language-related environmental limits on a conforming implementation; the library-related limits are discussed in Clause 7.

5.2.5.2 Translation limits

1

The implementation shall be able to translate and execute a program that uses but does not exceed the following limitations for these constructs and entities:13)

  • 127 nesting levels of blocks
  • 63 nesting levels of conditional inclusion
  • 12 pointer, array, and function declarators (in any combinations) modifying an arithmetic, structure, union, or void type in a declaration

5.2.5.3 Numerical limits

5.2.5.3.1 General
1

An implementation is required to document all the limits specified in this subclause, which are specified in the headers <limits.h> and <float.h>. Additional limits are specified in <stdint.h>.

Forward references: integer types <stdint.h> (7.22).
5.2.5.3.2 Characteristics of integer types <limits.h>
1

The values given subsequently shall be replaced by constant expressions suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives. Their implementation-defined values shall be equal or greater to those shown.

  • width for an object of type bool15)
BOOL_WIDTH                       1
  • number of bits for smallest object that is not a bit-field (byte)
CHAR_BIT                         8

The macros CHAR_WIDTH, SCHAR_WIDTH, and UCHAR_WIDTH that represent the width of the types char, signed char and unsigned char shall expand to the same value as CHAR_BIT.

USHRT_WIDTH                     16

The macro SHRT_WIDTH represents the width of the type short int and shall expand to the same value as USHRT_WIDTH.

UINT_WIDTH                      16

The macro INT_WIDTH represents the width of the type int and shall expand to the same value as UINT_WIDTH.

ULONG_WIDTH                      32

The macro LONG_WIDTH represents the width of the type long int and shall expand to the same value as ULONG_WIDTH.

ULLONG_WIDTH                     64

The macro LLONG_WIDTH represents the width of the type long long int and shall expand to the same value as ULLONG_WIDTH.

BITINT_MAXWIDTH     /* see the following */

The macro BITINT_MAXWIDTH represents the maximum width N supported by the declaration of a bit-precise integer (6.2.5) in the type specifier _BitInt(N). The value BITINT_MAXWIDTH shall expand to a value that is greater than or equal to the value of ULLONG_WIDTH.

MB_LEN_MAX                       1
2

For all unsigned integer types for which <limits.h> or <stdint.h> define a macro with suffix _WIDTH holding its width N, there is a macro with suffix _MAX holding the maximal value 2N1 that is representable by the type and that has the same type as would an expression that is an object of the corresponding type converted according to the integer promotions. If the value is in the range of the type uintmax_t (7.22.1.5) the macro is suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives.

3

For all signed integer types for which <limits.h> or <stdint.h> define a macro with suffix _WIDTH holding its width N, there are macros with suffix _MIN and _MAX holding the minimal and maximal values 2N1 and 2N11 that are representable by the type and that have the same type as would an expression that is an object of the corresponding type converted according to the integer promotions. If the values are in the range of the type intmax_t (7.22.1.5) the macros are suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives.

4

If an object of type char can hold negative values, the value of CHAR_MIN shall be the same as that of SCHAR_MIN and the value of CHAR_MAX shall be the same as that of SCHAR_MAX. Otherwise, the value of CHAR_MIN shall be 0 and the value of CHAR_MAX shall be the same as that of UCHAR_MAX (see 6.2.5.).

Forward references: representations of types (6.2.6), conditional inclusion (6.10.2), integer types <stdint.h> (7.22).
5.2.5.3.3 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>
1

The characteristics of floating types are defined in terms of a model that describes a representation of floating-point numbers and allows other values. The characteristics provide information about an implementation’s floating-point arithmetic.16) An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ or __STDC_IEC_559__ shall implement floating types and arithmetic conforming to ISO/IEC 60559 as specified in Annex F of this document. An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__ or __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ shall implement complex types and arithmetic conforming to ISO/IEC 60559 as specified in Annex G of this document.

2

The following parameters are used to define the model for each floating type:

s sign (±1) b base or radix of exponent representation (an integer >1) e exponent (an integer between a minimum emin and a maximum emax ) p precision (the number of base-b digits in the significand) fk nonnegative integers less than b (the significand digits)

For each floating type, the parameters b, p, emin , and emax are fixed constants.

3

For each floating type, a floating-point number (x) is defined by the following model:

x=sbe p

k=1 fkbk, emineemax

4

Model floating-point numbers x with f1>0 are called normalized floating-point numbers.

5

Model floating-point numbers x̸=0 with f1=0 and e=emin are called subnormal floating-point numbers.

6

Model floating-point numbers x̸=0 with f1=0 and e>emin are called unnormalized floating-point numbers.

7

Model floating-point numbers x with all fk=0 are zeros.

8

Floating types shall be able to represent signed zeros or an unsigned zero and all normalized floatingpoint numbers. In addition, floating types may be able to contain other kinds of floating-point numbers, such as subnormal floating-point numbers and unnormalized floating-point numbers, and values that are not floating-point numbers, such as NaNs and (signed and unsigned) infinities.

9

NOTE 1 Some implementations have types that include finite numbers with range and/or precision that are not covered by the model.

10

A NaN is a value signifying Not-a-Number. A quiet NaN propagates through almost every arithmetic operation without raising a floating-point exception; a signaling NaN generally raises a floating-point exception when occurring as an arithmetic operand.

11

NOTE 2 ISO/IEC 60559 specifies quiet and signaling NaNs. For implementations that do not support ISO/IEC 60559, the terms quiet NaN and signaling NaN are intended to apply to values with similar behavior.

12

Wherever values are unsigned, any requirement in this document to get the sign shall produce an unspecified sign, and any requirement to set the sign shall be ignored, unless otherwise specified.

13

NOTE 3 Bit representations of floating-point values can include a sign bit, even if the values can be regarded as unsigned; ISO/IEC 60559 NaNs are such values.

14

Whether and in what cases subnormal numbers are treated as zeros is implementation-defined. Subnormal numbers that in some cases are treated by arithmetic operations as zeros are properly

classified as subnormal. However, object representations that could represent subnormal numbers but that are always treated by arithmetic operations as zeros are non-canonical zeros, and the values are properly classified as zero, not subnormal. ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic (with default exception handling) always treats subnormal numbers as nonzero.

15

A value is negative if and only if it compares less than 0. Thus, negative zeros and NaNs are not negative values.

16

An implementation may prefer particular representations of values that have multiple representations in a floating type, 6.2.6.1 not withstanding. The preferred representations of a floating type, including unique representations of values in the type, are called canonical. A floating type may also contain non-canonical representations, for example, redundant representations of some or all its values, or representations that are extraneous to the floating-point model. Typically, floating-point operations deliver results with canonical representations. ISO/IEC 60559 operations deliver results with canonical representations, unless specified otherwise.

17

NOTE 4 The library operations iscanonical and canonicalize distinguish canonical (preferred) representations, but this distinction alone does not imply that canonical and non-canonical representations are of different values.

18

NOTE 5 Some of the values in the ISO/IEC 60559 decimal formats have non-canonical representations (as well as a canonical representation).

19

The minimum range of representable values for a floating type is the most negative finite floatingpoint number representable in that type through the most positive finite floating-point number representable in that type. In addition, if negative infinity is representable in a type, the range of that type is extended to all negative real numbers; likewise, if positive infinity is representable in a type, the range of that type is extended to all positive real numbers.

20

The accuracy of the floating-point operations (+, -, *, /) and of most of the library functions in <math.h> and <complex.h> that return floating-point results is implementation-defined, as is the accuracy of the conversion between floating-point internal representations and string representations performed by the library functions in <stdio.h>, <stdlib.h>, and <wchar.h>. The implementation may state that the accuracy is unknown. Decimal floating-point operations have stricter requirements.

21

All integer values in the <float.h> header, except FLT_ROUNDS, shall be constant expressions suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives; all floating values shall be arithmetic constant expressions. All except CR_DECIMAL_DIG (F.5), DECIMAL_DIG, DEC_EVAL_METHOD, FLT_EVAL_METHOD, FLT_RADIX, and FLT_ROUNDS have separate names for all floating types. The floating-point model representation is provided for all values except DEC_EVAL_METHOD, FLT_EVAL_METHOD and FLT_ROUNDS.

22

The remainder of this subclause specifies characteristics of standard floating types.

23

The rounding mode for floating-point addition for standard floating types is characterized by the implementation-defined value of FLT_ROUNDS. Evaluation of FLT_ROUNDS correctly reflects any execution-time change of rounding mode through the function fesetround in <fenv.h>.

1 indeterminable

0 toward zero

1 to nearest, ties to even

2 toward positive infinity

3 toward negative infinity

4 to nearest, ties away from zero

All other values for FLT_ROUNDS characterize implementation-defined rounding behavior.

24

Whether a type has the same base (b), precision (p), and exponent range (emineemax ) as an ISO/IEC 60559 format is characterized by the implementation-defined values of FLT_IS_IEC_60559, DBL_IS_IEC_60559 and LDBL_IS_IEC_60559 (this does not imply conformance to Annex F):

0 type does not have the precision and exponent range of an ISO/IEC 60559 format

1 type has the precision and exponent range of an ISO/IEC 60559 format

25

NOTE 6 Outside of the normalized floating-point numbers, the representability of values (e.g. negative zero) of the ISO/IEC 60559 format is not implied.

26

The values of floating type yielded by operators subject to the usual arithmetic conversions, including the values yielded by the implicit conversion of operands, and the values of floating constants are evaluated to a format whose range and precision may be greater than required by the type. Such a format is called an evaluation format. In all cases, assignment and cast operators yield values in the format of the type. The extent to which evaluation formats are used is characterized by the value of FLT_EVAL_METHOD:17)

1 indeterminable;

0 evaluate all operations and constants just to the range and precision of the type;

1 evaluate operations and constants of type float and double to the range and precision of the double type, evaluate long double operations and constants to the range and precision of the long double type;

2 evaluate all operations and constants to the range and precision of the long double type.

All other negative values for FLT_EVAL_METHOD characterize implementation-defined behavior. The value of FLT_EVAL_METHOD does not characterize values returned by function calls (see 6.8.7.5, F.6).

27

The presence or absence of subnormal numbers is characterized by the implementation-defined values of FLT_HAS_SUBNORM, DBL_HAS_SUBNORM, and LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM:

1 indeterminable

0 absent (type does not support subnormal numbers)

1 present (type does support subnormal numbers)

The use of FLT_HAS_SUBNORM, DBL_HAS_SUBNORM, and LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM macros is an obsolescent feature.

28

Each of the signaling NaN macros

FLT_SNAN
DBL_SNAN
LDBL_SNAN

is defined if and only if the respective type contains signaling NaNs. They expand to a constant expression of the respective type representing a signaling NaN. If an optional unary + or - operator followed by a signaling NaN macro is used as an initializer that is evaluated at translation time, the object is initialized with a signaling NaN value.

29

The macro

INFINITY

is defined if and only if the implementation supports an infinity for the type float. It expands to a constant expression of type float representing positive or unsigned infinity.

30

The macro

NAN

is defined if and only if the implementation supports quiet NaNs for the float type. It expands to a constant expression of type float representing a quiet NaN.

31

The values given in the following list shall be replaced by constant expressions with implementationdefined values that are greater or equal in magnitude (absolute value) to those shown, with the same sign:

  • radix of exponent representation, b
FLT_RADIX                        2
  • number of base-FLT_RADIX digits in the floating-point significand, p
FLT_MANT_DIG
DBL_MANT_DIG
LDBL_MANT_DIG
  • number of decimal digits, n, such that any floating-point number with p radix b digits can be rounded to a floating-point number with n decimal digits and back again without change to the value, � plog10b if b is a power of 10 1+plog10b otherwise
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG                   6
DBL_DECIMAL_DIG                  10
LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG                 10
  • number of decimal digits, n, such that any floating-point number in the widest of the supported floating types and the supported ISO/IEC 60559 encodings with pmax radix b digits can be rounded to a floating-point number with n decimal digits and back again without change to the value, � pmaxlog10b if b is a power of 10 1+pmaxlog10b otherwise
DECIMAL_DIG                     10

This is an obsolescent feature, see 7.33.8.

  • number of decimal digits, q, such that any floating-point number with q decimal digits can be rounded into a floating-point number with p radix b digits and back again without change to the q decimal digits, � plog10b if b is a power of 10 (p1)log10b otherwise
FLT_DIG                          6
DBL_DIG                         10
LDBL_DIG                        10
FLT_MIN_EXP
DBL_MIN_EXP
LDBL_MIN_EXP
FLT_MIN_10_EXP                 -37
DBL_MIN_10_EXP                 -37
LDBL_MIN_10_EXP                -37
FLT_MAX_EXP
DBL_MAX_EXP
LDBL_MAX_EXP
FLT_MAX_10_EXP                 +37
DBL_MAX_10_EXP                 +37
LDBL_MAX_10_EXP                +37
32

The values given in the following list shall be replaced by constant expressions with implementationdefined values that are greater than or equal to those shown:

  • maximum representable finite floating-point number; if that number is normalized, its value is (1bp)bemax
FLT_MAX                      1E+37
DBL_MAX                      1E+37
LDBL_MAX                     1E+37
  • maximum normalized floating-point number, (1bp)bemax
FLT_NORM_MAX                 1E+37
DBL_NORM_MAX                 1E+37
LDBL_NORM_MAX                1E+37
33

The values given in the following list shall be replaced by constant expressions with implementationdefined (positive) values that are less than or equal to those shown:

  • the difference between 1 and the least normalized value greater than 1 that is representable in the given floating type, b1p
FLT_EPSILON                   1E-5
DBL_EPSILON                   1E-9
LDBL_EPSILON                  1E-9
FLT_MIN                      1E-37
DBL_MIN                      1E-37
LDBL_MIN                     1E-37
FLT_TRUE_MIN                 1E-37
DBL_TRUE_MIN                 1E-37
LDBL_TRUE_MIN                1E-37

Recommended practice

34

Conversion between real floating type and decimal character sequence with at most T_DECIMAL_DIG digits should be correctly rounded, where T is the macro prefix for the type. This assures conversion from real floating type to decimal character sequence with T_DECIMAL_DIG digits and back, using to-nearest rounding, is the identity function.

35

EXAMPLE 1 The following describes an artificial floating-point representation that meets the minimum requirements of this document, and the appropriate values in a <float.h> header for type float:

x=s16e 6

k=1 fk16k, 31e+32

FLT_RADIX                         16
FLT_MANT_DIG                       6
FLT_EPSILON          9.53674316E-07F
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG                    9
FLT_DIG                            6
FLT_MIN_EXP                      -31
FLT_MIN              2.93873588E-39F
FLT_MIN_10_EXP                   -38
FLT_MAX_EXP                      +32
FLT_MAX              3.40282347E+38F
FLT_MAX_10_EXP                   +38
36

EXAMPLE 2

The following describes floating-point representations that also meet the requirements for binary32 and binary64 numbers in ISO/IEC 60559,18) and the appropriate values in a <float.h> header for types float and double. Note that the decimal floating constants may not give correct values (and hence are not appropriate values in a <float.h> header) if FLT_EVAL_METHOD is not 0 or if a translation-time rounding mode other than the ISO/IEC 60559 default is supported (either as the default or as a constant rounding mode set by an FENV_ROUND pragma). The hexadecimal floating constants are correct in all such cases because their values are exactly representable in the type.

xf=s2e 24

k=1 fk2k, 125e+128

xd=s2e 53

k=1 fk2k, 1021e+1024

FLT_IS_IEC_60559                   1
FLT_RADIX                          2
FLT_MANT_DIG                      24
FLT_EPSILON          1.19209290E-07F // decimal constant
FLT_EPSILON                 0X1P-23F // hex constant
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG                    9
FLT_DIG                            6
FLT_MIN_EXP                     -125
FLT_MIN              1.17549435E-38F // decimal constant
FLT_MIN                    0X1P-126F // hex constant
FLT_TRUE_MIN         1.40129846E-45F // decimal constant
FLT_TRUE_MIN               0X1P-149F // hex constant
FLT_HAS_SUBNORM                    1
FLT_MIN_10_EXP                   -37
FLT_MAX_EXP                     +128
FLT_MAX              3.40282347E+38F // decimal constant
FLT_MAX              0X1.fffffeP127F // hex constant
FLT_MAX_10_EXP                   +38
DBL_MANT_DIG                      53
DBL_IS_IEC_60559                   1
DBL_EPSILON   2.2204460492503131E-16 // decimal constant
DBL_EPSILON                  0X1P-52 // hex constant
DBL_DECIMAL_DIG                   17
DBL_DIG                           15
DBL_MIN_EXP                    -1021
DBL_MIN      2.2250738585072014E-308 // decimal constant
DBL_MIN                    0X1P-1022 // hex constant
DBL_TRUE_MIN 4.9406564584124654E-324 // decimal constant
DBL_TRUE_MIN               0X1P-1074 // hex constant
DBL_HAS_SUBNORM                    1
DBL_MIN_10_EXP                  -307
DBL_MAX_EXP                    +1024
DBL_MAX      1.7976931348623157E+308 // decimal constant
DBL_MAX       0X1.fffffffffffffP1023 // hex constant
DBL_MAX_10_EXP                  +308
Forward references: conditional inclusion (6.10.2), predefined macro names (6.10.10), complex arithmetic <complex.h> (7.3), extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h> (7.31), floating-point environment <fenv.h> (7.6), general utilities <stdlib.h> (7.24), input/output <stdio.h> (7.23), mathematics <math.h> (7.12), ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point arithmetic (Annex F), ISO/IEC 60559-compatible complex arithmetic (Annex G).
5.2.5.3.4 Characteristics of decimal floating types in <float.h>
1

This subclause specifies macros in <float.h> that provide characteristics of decimal floating types (an optional feature) in terms of the model presented in 5.2.5.3.3. An implementation shall provide these macros if and only if it defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__. The prefixes DEC32_, DEC64_, and DEC128_ denote the types _Decimal32, _Decimal64, and _Decimal128 respectively.

2

DEC_EVAL_METHOD is the decimal floating-point analog of FLT_EVAL_METHOD (5.2.5.3.3). Its implementation-defined value characterizes the use of evaluation formats for decimal floating types:

1 indeterminable;

0 evaluate all operations and constants just to the range and precision of the type;

1 evaluate operations and constants of type _Decimal32 and _Decimal64 to the range and precision of the _Decimal64 type, evaluate _Decimal128 operations and constants to the range and precision of the _Decimal128 type;

2 evaluate all operations and constants to the range and precision of the _Decimal128 type.

3

Each of the decimal signaling NaN macros

DEC32_SNAN
DEC64_SNAN
DEC128_SNAN

expands to a constant expression of the respective decimal floating type representing a signaling NaN. If an optional unary + or - operator followed by a signaling NaN macro is used for initializing an object of the same type that has static or thread storage duration, the object is initialized with a signaling NaN value.

4

The macro

DEC_INFINITY

expands to a constant expression of type _Decimal32 representing positive infinity.

5

The macro

DEC_NAN

expands to a constant expression of type _Decimal32 representing a quiet NaN.

6

The integer values given in the following lists shall be replaced by constant expressions suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives:

  • radix of exponent representation, b (=10)

For the standard floating types, this value is implementation-defined and is specified by the macro FLT_RADIX. For the decimal floating types there is no corresponding macro, since the value 10 is an inherent property of the types. Wherever FLT_RADIX appears in a description of a function that has versions that operate on decimal floating types, it is noted that for the decimal floating-point versions the value used is implicitly 10, rather than FLT_RADIX.

  • number of digits in the coefficient
DEC32_MANT_DIG     7
DEC64_MANT_DIG     16
DEC128_MANT_DIG    34
  • minimum exponent
DEC32_MIN_EXP      -94
DEC64_MIN_EXP      -382
DEC128_MIN_EXP     -6142
  • maximum exponent
DEC32_MAX_EXP      97
DEC64_MAX_EXP      385
DEC128_MAX_EXP     6145
  • maximum representable finite decimal floating-point number (there are 6, 15 and 33 9’s after the decimal points respectively)
DEC32_MAX          9.999999E96DF
DEC64_MAX          9.999999999999999E384DD
DEC128_MAX         9.999999999999999999999999999999999E6144DL
  • the difference between 1 and the least value greater than 1 that is representable in the given floating type
DEC32_EPSILON      1E-6DF
DEC64_EPSILON      1E-15DD
DEC128_EPSILON     1E-33DL
DEC32_MIN          1E-95DF
DEC64_MIN          1E-383DD
DEC128_MIN         1E-6143DL
DEC32_TRUE_MIN     0.000001E-95DF
DEC64_TRUE_MIN     0.000000000000001E-383DD
DEC128_TRUE_MIN    0.000000000000000000000000000000001E-6143DL
7

For decimal floating-point arithmetic, it is often convenient to consider an alternate equivalent model where the significand is represented with integer rather than fraction digits. With s, b, e, p, and fk as defined in 5.2.5.3.3, a floating-point number x is defined by the model:

x=s·b(ep) p

k=1 fk·b(pk)

8

With b fixed to 10, a decimal floating-point number x is thus:

x=s·10(ep) p

k=1 fk·10(pk)

The quantum exponent is q=ep and the coefficient is c=f1f2···fp, which is an integer between 0 and 10p1, inclusive. Thus, x=s·c·10q is represented by the triple of integers (s,c,q). The quantum of x is 10q, which is the value of a unit in the last place of the coefficient.

Table 5.1: Quantum exponent ranges

Type _Decimal32 _Decimal64 _Decimal128 Maximum Quantum Exponent (qmax ) 90 369 6111 Minimum Quantum Exponent (qmin ) 101 398 6176

exponent of the operation result, provided the table formula is defined for the arguments. For the cases where the formula is undefined and the function result is ±, the preferred quantum exponent is immaterial because the quantum exponent of ± is defined to be infinity. For the other cases where the formula is undefined and the function result is finite, the preferred quantum exponent is unspecified.

11

NOTE Although unspecified in ISO/IEC 60559, a preferred quantum exponent of 0 for these cases would be a reasonable implementation choice.

Table 5.2: Preferred quantum exponents

Operation Preferred quantum exponent of result roundeven, round, trunc, ceil, floor, rint, nearbyint

max(Q(x),0)

nextup, nextdown, nextafter, nexttoward least possible remainder min(Q(x),Q(y)) fmin, fmax, fminimum, fmaximum, fminimum_mag, fmaximum_mag, fminimum_num, fmaximum_num, fminimum_mag_num, fmaximum_mag_num

Q(x) if x gives the result, Q(y) if y gives the result

scalbn, scalbln Q(x) + n ldexp Q(x) + p logb 0 postfix ++ operator, postfix -- operator, prefix ++ operator, prefix -- operator

min(Q(x),0)

+, d32add, d64add min(Q(x),Q(y)) -, d32sub, d64sub min(Q(x),Q(y))

*, d32mul, d64mul Q(x)+Q(y) /, d32div, d64div Q(x)Q(y) sqrt, d32sqrt, d64sqrt Q(x)/2 fma, d32fma, d64fma min(Q(x)+Q(y),Q(z)) conversion from integer type 0 exact conversion from non-decimal floating type

0

inexact conversion from non-decimal floating type

least possible

conversion between decimal floating types Q(x)

*cx returned by canonicalize Q(*x) strto, wcsto, scanf, floating constants of decimal floating type

see 7.24.1.6

-(x), +(x) Q(x) fabs Q(x) copysign Q(x) quantize Q(y) quantum Q(x)

*encptr returned by encodedec, encodebin

Q(*xptr)

*xptr returned by decodedec, decodebin Q(*encptr) fmod min(Q(x),Q(y)) fdim min((Q(x),Q(y)) if x > y, 0 if xy cbrt Q(x)/3 hypot min(Q(x),Q(y)) powy ×Q(x)⌋ modf Q(value)

*iptr returned by modf max(Q(value),0)

A function family listed in Table 5.2 indicates the functions for all decimal floating types, where the function family is represented by the name of the functions without a suffix. For example, ceil indicates the functions ceild32, ceild64, and ceild128.

Forward references: extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h> (7.31), floatingpoint environment <fenv.h> (7.6), general utilities <stdlib.h> (7.24), input/output <stdio.h> (7.23), mathematics <math.h> (7.12), type-generic mathematics <tgmath.h> (7.27), ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point arithmetic (Annex F).

6 Language

6.1 Notation

1

In the syntax notation used in this clause, syntactic categories (nonterminals) are indicated by italic type, and literal words and character set members (terminals) by bold type. A colon (:) following a nonterminal introduces its definition. Alternative definitions are listed on separate lines, except when prefaced by the words "one of". An optional symbol is indicated by the subscript "opt", so that

{ expressionopt }

indicates an optional expression enclosed in braces.

2

When syntactic categories are referred to in the main text, they are not italicized and words are separated by spaces instead of hyphens.

3

A summary of the language syntax is given in Annex A.

6.2 Concepts

6.2.1 Scopes of identifiers, type names, and compound literals

1

An identifier can denote:

  • a standard attribute, an attribute prefix, or an attribute name;
  • an object;
  • a function;
  • a tag or a member of a structure, union, or enumeration;
  • a typedef name;
  • a label name;
  • a macro name;
  • or, a macro parameter.

The same identifier can denote different entities at different points in the program. A member of an enumeration is called an enumeration constant. Macro names and macro parameters are not considered further here, because prior to the semantic phase of program translation any occurrences of macro names in the source file are replaced by the preprocessing token sequences that constitute their macro definitions.

2

For each different entity that an identifier designates, the identifier is visible (i.e. can be used) only within a region of program text called its scope. Different entities designated by the same identifier either have different scopes or are in different name spaces. There are four kinds of scopes: function, file, block, and function prototype. (A function prototype is a declaration of a function.)

3

A label name is the only kind of identifier that has function scope. It can be used (in a goto statement) anywhere in the function in which it appears, and is declared implicitly by its syntactic appearance (followed by a : and a statement).

4

Every other identifier has scope determined by the placement of its declaration (in a declarator or type specifier). If the declarator or type specifier that declares the identifier appears outside of any block or list of parameters, the identifier has file scope, which terminates at the end of the translation unit. If the declarator or type specifier that declares the identifier appears inside a block or within the list of parameter declarations in a function definition, the identifier has block scope, which terminates at the end of the associated block. If the declarator or type specifier that declares

the identifier appears within the list of parameter declarations in a function prototype (not part of a function definition), the identifier has function prototype scope, which terminates at the end of the function declarator. If an identifier designates two different entities in the same name space, the scopes can overlap. If so, the scope of one entity (the inner scope) will end strictly before the scope of the other entity (the outer scope). Within the inner scope, the identifier designates the entity declared in the inner scope; the entity declared in the outer scope is hidden (and not visible) within the inner scope.

5

Unless explicitly stated otherwise, where this document uses the term "identifier" to refer to an entity (as opposed to the syntactic construct), it refers to the entity in the relevant name space whose declaration is visible at the point the identifier occurs.

6

Two identifiers have the same scope if and only if their scopes terminate at the same point.

7

Structure, union, and enumeration tags have scope that begins just after the appearance of the tag in a type specifier that declares the tag. Each enumeration constant has scope that begins just after the appearance of its defining enumerator in an enumerator list. An ordinary identifier that has an underspecified definition has scope that starts when the definition is completed; if the same ordinary identifier declares another entity with a scope that encloses the current block, that declaration is hidden as soon as the inner declarator is completed.19) Any other identifier has scope that begins just after the completion of its declarator.

8

As a special case, a type name (which is not a declaration of an identifier) is considered to have a scope that begins just after the place within the type name where the omitted identifier would appear were it not omitted. A compound literal (which is an expression that provides access to an anonymous object) is associated with the scope of the type name used in its definition; that scope is either file scope, function prototype scope, or block scope.

Forward references: declarations (6.7), function calls (6.5.3.3), function calls (6.5.3.6), function definitions (6.9.2), identifiers (6.4.2), macro replacement (6.10.5), name spaces of identifiers (6.2.3), source file inclusion (6.10.3), statements and blocks (6.8).

6.2.2 Linkages of identifiers

1

An identifier declared in different scopes or in the same scope more than once can be made to refer to the same object or function by a process called linkage.20) There are three kinds of linkage: external, internal, and none.

2

In the set of translation units and libraries that constitutes an entire program, each declaration of a particular identifier with external linkage denotes the same object or function. Within one translation unit, each declaration of an identifier with internal linkage denotes the same object or function. Each declaration of an identifier with no linkage denotes a unique entity.

3

If the declaration of a file scope identifier for:

  • an object contains any of the storage-class specifiers static or constexpr;
  • or, a function contains the storage-class specifier static,

then the identifier has internal linkage.21)

4

For an identifier declared with the storage-class specifier extern in a scope in which a prior declaration of that identifier is visible,22) if the prior declaration specifies internal or external linkage, the linkage of the identifier at the later declaration is the same as the linkage specified at the prior declaration. If no prior declaration is visible, or if the prior declaration specifies no linkage, then the identifier has external linkage.

5

If the declaration of an identifier for a function has no storage-class specifier, its linkage is determined exactly as if it were declared with the storage-class specifier extern. If the declaration of an identifier

for an object has file scope and does not contain the storage-class specifier static or constexpr, its linkage is external.

6

The following identifiers have no linkage: an identifier declared to be anything other than an object or a function; an identifier declared to be a function parameter; a block scope identifier for an object declared without the storage-class specifier extern.

7

If, within a translation unit, the same identifier appears with both internal and external linkage, the behavior is undefined.

Forward references: declarations (6.7), expressions (6.5.1), external definitions (6.9), statements (6.8).

6.2.3 Name spaces of identifiers

1

If more than one declaration of a particular identifier is visible at any point in a translation unit, the syntactic context disambiguates uses that refer to different entities. Thus, there are separate name spaces for various categories of identifiers, as follows:

  • label names (disambiguated by the syntax of the label declaration and use);
  • the tags of structures, unions, and enumerations (disambiguated by following any23) of the keywords struct, union, or enum);
  • the members of structures or unions; each structure or union has a separate name space for its members (disambiguated by the type of the expression used to access the member via the . or -> operator);
  • standard attributes and attribute prefixes (disambiguated by the syntax of the attribute specifier and name of the attribute token) (6.7.13);
  • the trailing identifier in an attribute prefixed token; each attribute prefix has a separate name space for the implementation-defined attributes that it introduces (disambiguated by the attribute prefix and the trailing identifier token);
  • all other identifiers, called ordinary identifiers (declared in ordinary declarators or as enumeration constants).
Forward references: enumeration specifiers (6.7.3.3), labeled statements (6.8.2), structure and union specifiers (6.7.3.2), structure and union members (6.5.3.4), tags (6.7.3.4), the goto statement (6.8.7.2).

6.2.4 Storage durations of objects

1

An object has a storage duration that determines its lifetime. There are four storage durations: static, thread, automatic, and allocated. Allocated storage is described in 7.24.3.

2

The lifetime of an object is the portion of program execution during which storage is guaranteed to be reserved for it. An object exists, has a constant address,24) and retains its last-stored value throughout its lifetime.25) If an object is referred to outside of its lifetime, the behavior is undefined. If a pointer value is used in an evaluation after the object the pointer points to (or just past) reaches the end of its lifetime, the behavior is undefined. The representation of a pointer object becomes indeterminate when the object the pointer points to (or just past) reaches the end of its lifetime.

3

An object whose identifier is declared without the storage-class specifier thread_local, and either with external or internal linkage or with the storage-class specifier static, has static storage duration. Its lifetime is the entire execution of the program and its stored value is initialized only once, prior to program startup.

4

An object whose identifier is declared with the storage-class specifier thread_local has thread storage duration. Its explicit or implicit initializer is evaluated prior to program execution, its lifetime

is the entire execution of the thread for which it is created, and its stored value is initialized with the previously determined value when the thread is started. There is a distinct object per thread, and use of the declared name in an expression refers to the object associated with the thread evaluating the expression. The result of attempting to indirectly access an object with thread storage duration from a thread other than the one with which the object is associated is implementation-defined.

5

An object whose identifier is declared with no linkage and without the storage-class specifier static has automatic storage duration, as do some compound literals. The result of attempting to indirectly access an object with automatic storage duration from a thread other than the one with which the object is associated is implementation-defined.

6

For such an object that does not have a variable length array type, its lifetime extends from entry into the block with which it is associated until execution of that block ends in any way. (Entering an enclosed block or calling a function suspends, but does not end, execution of the current block.) If the block is entered recursively, a new instance of the object is created each time. The initial representation of the object is indeterminate. If an initialization is specified for the object and it is not specified with constexpr, it is performed each time the declaration or compound literal is reached in the execution of the block; if it is specified with constexpr the initializer is evaluated once at translation time and the new instance of the object is initialized to that fixed value each time the specification is reached; otherwise, the representation of the object becomes indeterminate each time the declaration is reached.

7

For such an object that does have a variable length array type, its lifetime extends from the declaration of the object until execution of the program leaves the scope of the declaration.26) If the scope is entered recursively, a new instance of the object is created each time. The initial representation of the object is indeterminate.

8

A non-lvalue expression with structure or union type, where the structure or union contains a member with array type (including, recursively, members of all contained structures and unions) refers to an object with automatic storage duration and temporary lifetime.27) Its lifetime begins when the expression is evaluated and its initial value is the value of the expression. Its lifetime ends when the evaluation of the containing full expression ends. Any attempt to modify an object with temporary lifetime results in undefined behavior. An object with temporary lifetime behaves as if it were declared with the type of its value for the purposes of effective type. Such an object may not have a unique address.

Forward references: array declarators (6.7.7.3), compound literals (6.5.3.6), declarators (6.7.7), function calls (6.5.3.3), initialization (6.7.11), statements (6.8), effective type (6.5.1).

6.2.5 Types

1

The meaning of a value stored in an object or returned by a function is determined by the type of the expression used to access it. (An identifier declared to be an object is the simplest such expression; the type is specified in the declaration of the identifier.) Types are partitioned into object types (types that describe objects) and function types (types that describe functions). At various points within a translation unit an object type may be incomplete28) (lacking sufficient information to determine the size of objects of that type) or complete (having sufficient information).29)

2

An object declared as type bool is large enough to store the values false and true.

3

An object declared as type char is large enough to store any member of the basic execution character set. If a member of the basic execution character set is stored in a char object, its value is guaranteed to be nonnegative. If any other character is stored in a char object, the resulting value is implementation-defined but shall be within the range of values that can be represented in that type.

4

There are five standard signed integer types, designated as signed char, short int, int, long int, and long long int. (These and other types may be designated in several additional ways, as described in 6.7.3.)

5

A bit-precise signed integer type is designated as _BitInt(N) where N is an integer constant expression that specifies the number of bits that are used to represent the type, including the sign bit. Each value of N designates a distinct type.30)

6

There may also be implementation-defined extended signed integer types.31) The standard signed integer types, bit-precise signed integer types, and extended signed integer types are collectively called signed integer types.32)

7

An object declared as type signed char occupies the same amount of storage as a "plain" char object. A "plain" int object has the natural size suggested by the architecture of the execution environment (large enough to contain any value in the range INT_MIN to INT_MAX as defined in the header <limits.h>).

8

For each of the signed integer types, there is a corresponding (but different) unsigned integer type (designated with the keyword unsigned) that uses the same amount of storage (including sign information) and has the same alignment requirements. The type bool and the unsigned integer types that correspond to the standard signed integer types are the standard unsigned integer types. The unsigned integer types that correspond to the extended signed integer types are the extended unsigned integer types. In addition to the unsigned integer types that correspond to the bit-precise signed integer types there is the type unsigned _BitInt(1), which uses one bit to represent the type. Collectively, unsigned _BitInt(1) and the unsigned integer types that correspond to the bitprecise signed integer types are the bit-precise unsigned integer types. The standard unsigned integer types, bit-precise unsigned integer types, and extended unsigned integer types are collectively called unsigned integer types.33)

9

The standard signed integer types and standard unsigned integer types are collectively called the standard integer types; the bit-precise signed integer types and bit-precise unsigned integer types are collectively called the bit-precise integer types; the extended signed integer types and extended unsigned integer types are collectively called the extended integer types.

10

For any two integer types with the same signedness and different integer conversion rank (see 6.3.1.1), the range of values of the type with smaller integer conversion rank is a subrange of the values of the other type.

11

The range of nonnegative values of a signed integer type is a subrange of the corresponding unsigned integer type, and the representation of the same value in each type is the same.34) The range of representable values for the unsigned type is 0 to 2N1 (inclusive). A computation involving unsigned operands can never produce an overflow, because arithmetic for the unsigned type is performed modulo 2N.

12

There are three standard floating types, designated as float, double, and long double.35) The set of values of the type float is a subset of the set of values of the type double; the set of values of the type double is a subset of the set of values of the type long double.

13

There are three decimal floating types, designated as _Decimal32, _Decimal64, and _Decimal128 . Respectively, they have the ISO/IEC 60559 formats: decimal32,36) decimal64, and decimal128. (Decimal floating types are a conditional feature that implementations may not support; see 6.10.10.4.)

14

The standard floating types and the decimal floating types are collectively called the real floating types..

15

There are three complex types, designated as float _Complex, double _Complex, and long double _Complex.37) (Complex types are a conditional feature that implementations may not support; see 6.10.10.4.) The real floating and complex types are collectively called the floating types.

16

For each floating type there is a corresponding real type, which is always a real floating type. For real floating types, it is the same type. For complex types, it is the type given by deleting the keyword _Complex from the type name.

17

Each complex type has the same representation and alignment requirements as an array type containing exactly two elements of the corresponding real type; the first element is equal to the real part, and the second element to the imaginary part, of the complex number.

18

The type char, the signed and unsigned integer types, and the floating types are collectively called the basic types. The basic types are complete object types. Even if the implementation defines two or more basic types to have the same representation, they are nevertheless distinct types.

19

NOTE An implementation can define new keywords that provide alternative ways to designate a basic (or any other) type; this does not violate the requirement that all basic types be different. Implementation-defined keywords have the form of an identifier reserved for any use as described in 7.1.3.

20

The three types char, signed char, and unsigned char are collectively called the character types. The implementation shall define char to have the same range, representation, and behavior as either signed char or unsigned char.38)

21

An enumeration comprises a set of named integer constant values. Each distinct enumeration constitutes a different enumerated type.

22

The type char, the signed and unsigned integer types, and the enumerated types are collectively called integer types. The integer and real floating types are collectively called real types.

23

Integer and floating types are collectively called arithmetic types. Each arithmetic type belongs to one type domain: the real type domain comprises the real types, the complex type domain comprises the complex types.

24

The void type comprises an empty set of values; it is an incomplete object type that cannot be completed.

25

Any number of derived types can be constructed from the object and function types, as follows:

  • An array type describes a contiguously allocated nonempty set of objects with a particular member object type, called the element type. The element type shall be complete whenever the array type is specified. Array types are characterized by their element type and by the number of elements in the array. An array type is said to be derived from its element type, and if its element type is T, the array type is sometimes called "array of T". The construction of an array type from an element type is called "array type derivation".
  • A structure type describes a sequentially allocated nonempty set of member objects (and, in certain circumstances, an incomplete array), each of which has an optionally specified name and possibly distinct type.
  • A union type describes an overlapping nonempty set of member objects, each of which has an optionally specified name and possibly distinct type.
  • A function type describes a function with specified return type. A function type is characterized by its return type and the number and types of its parameters. A function type is said to be derived from its return type, and if its return type is T, the function type is sometimes called "function returning T". The construction of a function type from a return type is called "function type derivation".

These methods of constructing derived types can be applied recursively.

26

Arithmetic types, pointer types, and the nullptr_t type are collectively called scalar types. Array and structure types are collectively called aggregate types.39)

27

An array type of unknown size is an incomplete type. It is completed, for an identifier of that type, by specifying the size in a later declaration (with internal or external linkage). A structure or union type of unknown content (as described in 6.7.3.4) is an incomplete type. It is completed, for all declarations of that type, by declaring the same structure or union tag with its defining content later in the same scope.

28

A complete type shall have a size that is less than or equal to SIZE_MAX. A type has known constant size if it is complete and is not a variable length array type.

29

Array, function, and pointer types are collectively called derived declarator types. A declarator type derivation from a type T is the construction of a derived declarator type from T by the application of an array-type, a function-type, or a pointer-type derivation to T.

30

A type is characterized by its type category, which is either the outermost derivation of a derived type (as noted previously in this subclause in the construction of derived types), or the type itself if the type consists of no derived types.

31

Any type so far mentioned is an unqualified type. Each unqualified type has several qualified versions of its type,40) corresponding to the combinations of one, two, or all three of the const, volatile, and restrict qualifiers. The qualified or unqualified versions of a type are distinct types that belong to the same type category and have the same representation and alignment requirements.41) An array and its element type are always considered to be identically qualified.42) Any other derived type is not qualified by the qualifiers (if any) of the type from which it is derived.

32

Further, there is the _Atomic qualifier. The presence of the _Atomic qualifier designates an atomic type. The size, representation, and alignment of an atomic type may not be the same as those of the corresponding unqualified type. Therefore, this document explicitly uses the phrase "atomic, qualified, or unqualified type" whenever the atomic version of a type is permitted along with the other qualified versions of a type. The phrase "qualified or unqualified type", without specific mention of atomic, does not include the atomic types.

33

A pointer to void shall have the same representation and alignment requirements as a pointer to a character type.41) Similarly, pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible types shall have the same representation and alignment requirements. All pointers to structure types shall have the same representation and alignment requirements as each other. All pointers to union types shall have the same representation and alignment requirements as each other. Pointers to other types may not have the same representation or alignment requirements.

34

EXAMPLE 1 The type designated as "float *" has type "pointer to float". Its type category is pointer, not a floating type. The const-qualified version of this type is designated as "float * const" whereas the type designated as "const float *" is not a qualified type — its type is "pointer to const-qualified float" and is a pointer to a qualified type.

35

EXAMPLE 2 The type designated as "struct tag (*[5])(float)" has type "array of pointer to function returning struct tag". The array has length five and the function has a single parameter of type float. Its type category is array.

Forward references: compatible type and composite type (6.2.7), declarations (6.7).

6.2.6 Representations of types

6.2.6.1 General

1

The representations of all types are unspecified except as stated in this subclause.

2

Except for bit-fields, objects are composed of contiguous sequences of one or more bytes, the number, order, and encoding of which are either explicitly specified or implementation-defined.

3

Values stored in unsigned bit-fields and objects of type unsigned char shall be represented using a pure binary notation.

4

Values stored in non-bit-field objects of any other object type are represented using n×CHAR_BIT bits, where n is the size of an object of that type, in bytes. An object that has the value may be copied into an object of type unsigned char [n] (e.g. by memcpy); the resulting set of bytes is called the object representation of the value. Values stored in bit-fields consist of m bits, where m is the size specified for the bit-field. The object representation is the set of m bits the bit-field comprises in the addressable storage unit holding it. Two values (other than NaNs) with the same object representation compare equal, but values that compare equal may have different object representations.

5

Certain object representations do not represent a value of the object type. If such a representation is read by an lvalue expression that does not have character type, the behavior is undefined. If such a representation is produced by a side effect that modifies all or any part of the object by an lvalue expression that does not have character type, the behavior is undefined.43) Such a representation is called a non-value representation.

6

When a value is stored in an object of structure or union type, including in a member object, the bytes of the object representation that correspond to any padding bytes take unspecified values (e.g. structure and union assignment may or may not copy any padding bits). The object representation of a structure or union object is never a non-value representation, even though the byte range corresponding to a member of the structure or union object may be a non-value representation for that member.

7

When a value is stored in a member of an object of union type, the bytes of the object representation that do not correspond to that member but do correspond to other members take unspecified values.

8

Where an operator is applied to a value that has more than one object representation, which object representation is used shall not affect the value of the result.44) Where a value is stored in an object using a type that has more than one object representation for that value, it is unspecified which representation is used, but a non-value representation shall not be generated.

9

Loads and stores of objects with atomic types are done with memory_order_seq_cst semantics.

Forward references: declarations (6.7), expressions (6.5.1), lvalues, arrays, and function designators (6.3.2.1), order and consistency (7.17.3).

6.2.6.2 Integer types

1

For unsigned integer types the bits of the object representation shall be divided into two groups: value bits and padding bits. If there are N value bits, each bit shall represent a different power of 2 between 1 and 2N1, so that objects of that type shall be capable of representing values from 0 to 2N1 using a pure binary representation; this shall be known as the value representation. The values of any padding bits are unspecified. The number of value bits N is called the width of the unsigned integer type. The type bool shall have one value bit and (sizeof(bool)*CHAR_BIT)- 1

padding bits. Otherwise, there is no requirement to have any padding bits; unsigned char shall not have any padding bits.

2

For signed integer types, the bits of the object representation shall be divided into three groups: value bits, padding bits, and the sign bit. If the corresponding unsigned type has width N, the signed type uses the same number of N bits, its width, as value bits and sign bit. N1 are value bits and the remaining bit is the sign bit. Each bit that is a value bit shall have the same value as the same bit in the object representation of the corresponding unsigned type. If the sign bit is zero, it shall not affect the resulting value. If the sign bit is one, it has value (2N1). There may or may not be any padding bits; signed char shall not have any padding bits.

3

The values of any padding bits are unspecified. A valid object representation of a signed integer type where the sign bit is zero is a valid object representation of the corresponding unsigned type, and shall represent the same value. For any integer type, the object representation where all the bits are zero shall be a representation of the value zero in that type.

4

The precision of an integer type is the number of value bits.

5

NOTE 1 Some combinations of padding bits may generate non-value representations, for example, if one padding bit is a parity bit. Regardless, no arithmetic operation on valid values can generate a non-value representation other than as part of an exceptional condition such as an integer overflow. All other combinations of padding bits are alternative object representations of the value specified by the value bits.

6

NOTE 2 The sign representation defined in this document is called two’s complement. Previous editions of this document (specifically ISO/IEC 9899:2018 and prior editions) additionally allowed other sign representations.

7

NOTE 3 For unsigned integer types the width and precision are the same, while for signed integer types the width is one greater than the precision.

6.2.7 Compatible type and composite type

1

Two types are compatible types if they are the same. Additional rules for determining whether two types are compatible are described in 6.7.3 for type specifiers, in 6.7.4 for type qualifiers, and in 6.7.7 for declarators.45) Moreover, two complete structure, union, or enumerated types declared with the same tag are compatible if members satisfy the following requirements:

  • there shall be a one-to-one correspondence between their members such that each pair of corresponding members are declared with compatible types;
  • if one member of the pair is declared with an alignment specifier, the other is declared with an equivalent alignment specifier;
  • and, if one member of the pair is declared with a name, the other is declared with the same name.

For two structures, corresponding members shall be declared in the same order. For two unions declared in the same translation unit, corresponding members shall be declared in the same order. For two structures or unions, corresponding bit-fields shall have the same widths. For two enumerations, corresponding members shall have the same values; if one has a fixed underlying type, then the other shall have a compatible fixed underlying type. For determining type compatibility, anonymous structures and unions are considered a regular member of the containing structure or union type, and the type of an anonymous structure or union is considered compatible to the type of another anonymous structure or union, respectively, if their members fulfill the preceding requirements.

Furthermore, two structure, union, or enumerated types declared in separate translation units are compatible in the following cases:

  • both are declared without tags and they fulfill the preceding requirements;
  • both have the same tag and are completed somewhere in their respective translation units and they fulfill the preceding requirements;

Otherwise, the structure, union, or enumerated types are incompatible.46)

2

All declarations that refer to the same object or function shall have compatible type; otherwise, the behavior is undefined.

3

A composite type can be constructed from two types that are compatible. If both types are the same type, the composite type is this type. Otherwise, it is a type that is compatible with both and satisfies the following conditions:

  • If both types are structure types or both types are union types, the composite type is determined recursively by forming the composite types of their members.
  • If both types are array types, the following rules are applied:

• If one type is an array of known constant size, the composite type is an array of that size.

• Otherwise, if one type is a variable length array whose size is specified by an expression that is not evaluated, the behavior is undefined.

• Otherwise, if one type is a variable length array whose size is specified, the composite type is a variable length array of that size.

• Otherwise, if one type is a variable length array of unspecified size, the composite type is a variable length array of unspecified size.

• Otherwise, both types are arrays of unknown size and the composite type is an array of unknown size.

The element type of the composite type is the composite type of the two element types.

  • If both types are function types, the type of each parameter in the composite parameter type list is the composite type of the corresponding parameters.
  • If one of the types has a standard attribute, the composite type also has that attribute.
  • If both types are enumerated types, the composite type is an enumerated type.
  • If one type is an enumerated type and the other is an integer type other than an enumerated type, it is implementation-defined whether or not the composite type is an enumerated type.

These rules apply recursively to the types from which the two types are derived.

4

If any of the original types satisfies all requirements of the composite type, it is unspecified whether the composite type is one of these types or a different type that satisfies the requirements.47)

5

For an identifier with internal or external linkage declared in a scope in which a prior declaration of that identifier is visible,48) if the prior declaration specifies internal or external linkage, the type of the identifier at the later declaration becomes the composite type.

6

EXAMPLE Given the following two file scope declarations:

int f(int (*)(char *), double (*)[3]);
int f(int (*)(char *), double (*)[]);
The resulting composite type for the function is:
int f(int (*)(char *), double (*)[3]);
Forward references: array declarators (6.7.7.3).

6.2.8 Alignment of objects

1

Complete object types have alignment requirements which place restrictions on the addresses at which objects of that type may be allocated. An alignment is an implementation-defined integer value representing the number of bytes between successive addresses at which a given object can be allocated. An object type imposes an alignment requirement on every object of that type: stricter alignment can be requested using the alignas keyword.

2

A fundamental alignment is a valid alignment less than or equal to alignof(max_align_t). Fundamental alignments shall be supported by the implementation for objects of all storage durations. The alignment requirements of the following types shall be fundamental alignments:

  • all atomic, qualified, or unqualified basic types;
  • all atomic, qualified, or unqualified enumerated types;
  • all atomic, qualified, or unqualified pointer types;
  • all array types whose element type has a fundamental alignment requirement;
  • all types specified in Clause 7 as complete object types;
  • all structure or union types whose elements have types with fundamental alignment requirements and none of whose elements have an alignment specifier specifying an alignment that is not a fundamental alignment.
3

An extended alignment is represented by an alignment greater than alignof(max_align_t). It is implementation-defined whether any extended alignments are supported and the storage durations for which they are supported. A type having an extended alignment requirement is an over-aligned type.49)

4

Alignments are represented as values of the type size_t. Valid alignments include only fundamental alignments, plus an additional implementation-defined set of values, which may be empty. Every valid alignment value shall be a nonnegative integral power of two.

5

Alignments have an order from weaker to stronger or stricter alignments. Stricter alignments have larger alignment values. An address that satisfies an alignment requirement also satisfies any weaker valid alignment requirement.

6

The alignment requirement of a complete type can be queried using an alignof expression. The types char, signed char, and unsigned char shall have the weakest alignment requirement.

7

Comparing alignments is meaningful and provides the obvious results:

  • Two alignments are equal when their numeric values are equal.
  • Two alignments are different when their numeric values are not equal.
  • When an alignment is larger than another it represents a stricter alignment.

6.2.9 Encodings

1

The literal encoding is an implementation-defined mapping of the characters of the execution character set to the values in a character constant (6.4.4.5) or string literal (6.4.5). It shall support a mapping from all the basic execution character set values into the implementation-defined encoding. It may contain multibyte character sequences (5.2.2).

2

The wide literal encoding is an implementation-defined mapping of the characters of the execution character set to the values in a wchar_t character constant (6.4.4.5) or a wchar_t string literal (6.4.5). It shall support a mapping from all the basic execution character set values into the implementationdefined encoding. The mapping shall produce values identical to the literal encoding for all the basic execution character set values if an implementation does not define __STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__. One or more values may map to one or more values of the extended execution character set.

6.3 Conversions

1

Several operators convert operand values from one type to another automatically. This subclause specifies the result required from such an implicit conversion, as well as those that result from a cast operation (an explicit conversion). The list in 6.3.1.8 summarizes the conversions performed by most ordinary operators; it is supplemented as required by the discussion of each operator in 6.5.1.

2

Unless explicitly stated otherwise, conversion of an operand value to a compatible type causes no change to the value or the representation.

Forward references: cast operators (6.5.5).

6.3.1 Arithmetic operands

6.3.1.1 Boolean, characters, and integers

1

Every integer type has an integer conversion rank defined as follows:

  • No two signed integer types shall have the same rank, even if they have the same representation.
  • The rank of a signed integer type shall be greater than the rank of any signed integer type with less precision.
  • The rank of long long int shall be greater than the rank of long int, which shall be greater than the rank of int, which shall be greater than the rank of short int, which shall be greater than the rank of signed char.
  • The rank of a bit-precise signed integer type shall be greater than the rank of any standard integer type with less width or any bit-precise integer type with less width.
  • The rank of any unsigned integer type shall equal the rank of the corresponding signed integer type, if any.
  • The rank of any standard integer type shall be greater than the rank of any extended integer type with the same width or bit-precise integer type with the same width.
  • The rank of any bit-precise integer type relative to an extended integer type of the same width is implementation-defined.
  • The rank of char shall equal the rank of signed char and unsigned char.
  • The rank of bool shall be less than the rank of all other standard integer types.
  • The rank of any enumerated type shall equal the rank of the compatible integer type (see 6.7.3.3).
  • The rank of any extended signed integer type relative to another extended signed integer type with the same precision is implementation-defined, but still subject to the other rules for determining the integer conversion rank.
  • For all integer types T1, T2, and T3, if T1 has greater rank than T2 and T2 has greater rank than

T3, then T1 has greater rank than T3.

2

The following may be used in an expression wherever an int or unsigned int may be used:

  • An object or expression with an integer type (other than int or unsigned int) whose integer conversion rank is less than or equal to the rank of int and unsigned int.
  • A bit-field of type bool, int, signed int, or unsigned int.

The value from a bit-field of a bit-precise integer type is converted to the corresponding bit-precise integer type. If the original type is not a bit-precise integer type (6.2.5): if an int can represent all values of the original type (as restricted by the width, for a bit-field), the value is converted to an int;50) otherwise, it is converted to an unsigned int. These are called the integer promotions. All other types are unchanged by the integer promotions.

3

NOTE The integer promotions are applied only:

  1. as part of the usual arithmetic conversions,
  2. to certain argument expressions,
  3. to the operands of the unary +, -, and ~ operators,
  4. and to both operands of the shift operators,

as specified by their respective subclauses.

4

The integer promotions preserve value including sign. As discussed earlier, whether a "plain" char can hold negative values is implementation-defined.

Forward references: enumeration specifiers (6.7.3.3), structure and union specifiers (6.7.3.2).

6.3.1.2 Boolean type

1

When any scalar value is converted to bool, the result is false if the value is a zero (for arithmetic types), null (for pointer types), or the scalar has type nullptr_t; otherwise, the result is true.

6.3.1.3 Signed and unsigned integers

1

When a value with integer type is converted to another integer type other than bool, if the value can be represented by the new type, it is unchanged.

2

Otherwise, if the new type is unsigned, the value is converted by repeatedly adding or subtracting one more than the maximum value that can be represented in the new type until the value is in the range of the new type.51)

3

Otherwise, the new type is signed and the value cannot be represented in it; either the result is implementation-defined or an implementation-defined signal is raised.

6.3.1.4 Real floating and integer

1

When a finite value of standard floating type is converted to an integer type other than bool, the fractional part is discarded (i.e. the value is truncated toward zero). If the value of the integral part cannot be represented by the integer type, the behavior is undefined.52)

2

When a finite value of decimal floating type is converted to an integer type other than bool, the fractional part is discarded (i.e. the value is truncated toward zero). If the value of the integral part cannot be represented by the integer type, the "invalid" floating-point exception shall be raised and the result of the conversion is unspecified.

3

When a value of integer type is converted to a standard floating type, if the value being converted can be represented exactly in the new type, it is unchanged. If the value being converted is in the range of values that can be represented but cannot be represented exactly, the result is either the nearest higher or nearest lower representable value, chosen in an implementation-defined manner. If the value being converted is outside the range of values that can be represented, the behavior is undefined. Results of some implicit conversions may be represented in greater range and precision than that required by the new type (see 6.3.1.8 and 6.8.7.5).

4

When a value of integer type is converted to a decimal floating type, if the value being converted can be represented exactly in the new type, it is unchanged. If the value being converted cannot be represented exactly, the result shall be correctly rounded with exceptions raised as specified in ISO/IEC 60559.

6.3.1.5 Real floating types

1

When a value of real floating type is converted to a real floating type, if the value being converted can be represented exactly in the new type, it is unchanged.

2

When a value of real floating type is converted to a standard floating type, if the value being converted is in the range of values that can be represented but cannot be represented exactly, the result is either the nearest higher or nearest lower representable value, chosen in an implementationdefined manner. If the value being converted is outside the range of values that can be represented, the behavior is undefined.

3

When a value of real floating type is converted to a decimal floating type, if the value being converted cannot be represented exactly, the result is correctly rounded with exceptions raised as specified in ISO/IEC 60559.

4

Results of some implicit conversions may be represented in greater range and precision than that required by the new type (see 6.3.1.8 and 6.8.7.5).

6.3.1.6 Complex types

1

When a value of complex type is converted to another complex type, both the real and imaginary parts follow the conversion rules for the corresponding real types.

6.3.1.7 Real and complex

1

When a value of real type is converted to a complex type, the real part of the complex result value is determined by the rules of conversion to the corresponding real type and the imaginary part of the complex result value is a positive zero or an unsigned zero.

2

When a value of complex type is converted to a real type other than bool,53) the imaginary part of the complex value is discarded and the value of the real part is converted according to the conversion rules for the corresponding real type.

6.3.1.8 Usual arithmetic conversions

1

Many operators that expect operands of arithmetic type cause conversions and yield result types in a similar way. The purpose is to determine a common real type for the operands and result. For the specified operands, each operand is converted, without change of type domain, to a type whose corresponding real type is the common real type. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, the common real type is also the corresponding real type of the result, whose type domain is the type domain of the operands if they are the same, and complex otherwise. This pattern is called the usual arithmetic conversions:

If one operand has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating, complex, or imaginary type.

First, if the type of either operand is _Decimal128, the other operand is converted to _Decimal128.

Otherwise, if the type of either operand is _Decimal64, the other operand is converted to _Decimal64.

Otherwise, if the type of either operand is _Decimal32, the other operand is converted to _Decimal32.

Otherwise, if the corresponding real type of either operand is long double, the other operand is converted, without change of type domain, to a type whose corresponding real type is long double.

Otherwise, if the corresponding real type of either operand is double, the other operand is converted, without change of type domain, to a type whose corresponding real type is double.

Otherwise, both operands are converted to the unsigned integer type corresponding to the type of the operand with signed integer type.

2

The values of floating operands and of the results of floating expressions may be represented in greater range and precision than that required by the type; the types are not changed thereby. See 5.2.5.3.3 regarding evaluation formats.

3

EXAMPLE One consequence of _BitInt being exempt from the integer promotion rules (6.3.1) is that a _BitInt operand of a binary operator is not always promoted to an int or unsigned int as part of the usual arithmetic conversions. Instead, a lower-ranked operand is converted to the higher-rank operand type and the result of the operation is the higher-ranked type.

_BitInt(2) a2 = 1;
_BitInt(3) a3 = 2;
_BitInt(33) a33 = 1;
signed char c = 3;
a2 * a3; /* As part of the multiplication, a2 is converted to
            _BitInt(3) and the result type is _BitInt(3). */
a2 * c;  /* As part of the multiplication, c is promoted to int,
            a2 is converted to int and the result type is int. */
a33 * c; /* As part of the multiplication, c is promoted to int.
            Then, provided int has a width of at most 32,
            it is converted to _BitInt(33) and the result type
            is _BitInt(33). */
void func(_BitInt(8) a8, _BitInt(24) a24) {
      /* Cast one of the operands to 32-bits to guarantee the
         result of the multiplication can contain all possible values. */
      _BitInt(32) a32 = a8 * (_BitInt(32))a24;
}

6.3.2 Other operands

6.3.2.1 Lvalues, arrays, and function designators

1

An lvalue is an expression (with an object type other than void) that potentially designates an object;55) if an lvalue does not designate an object when it is evaluated, the behavior is undefined.

When an object is said to have a particular type, the type is specified by the lvalue used to designate the object. A modifiable lvalue is an lvalue that does not have array type, does not have an incomplete type, does not have a const-qualified type, and if it is a structure or union, does not have any member (including, recursively, any member or element of all contained aggregates or unions) with a const-qualified type.

2

Except when it is the operand of the sizeof operator, or the typeof operators, the unary & operator, the ++ operator, the -- operator, or the left operand of the . operator or an assignment operator, an lvalue that does not have array type is converted to the value stored in the designated object (and is no longer an lvalue); this is called lvalue conversion. If the lvalue has qualified type, the value has the unqualified version of the type of the lvalue; additionally, if the lvalue has atomic type, the value has the non-atomic version of the type of the lvalue; otherwise, the value has the type of the lvalue. If the lvalue has an incomplete type and does not have array type, the behavior is undefined. If the lvalue designates an object of automatic storage duration that could have been declared with the register storage class (never had its address taken), and that object is uninitialized (not declared with an initializer and no assignment to it has been performed prior to use), the behavior is undefined.

3

Except when it is the operand of the sizeof operator, or typeof operators, or the unary & operator, or is a string literal used to initialize an array, an expression that has type "array of type" is converted to an expression with type "pointer to type" that points to the initial element of the array object and is not an lvalue. If the array object has register storage class, the behavior is undefined.

4

A function designator is an expression that has function type. Except when it is the operand of the sizeof operator,56) a typeof operator, or the unary & operator, a function designator with type "function returning type" is converted to an expression that has type "pointer to function returning type".

Forward references: address and indirection operators (6.5.4.2), assignment operators (6.5.17), common definitions <stddef.h> (7.21), initialization (6.7.11), postfix increment and decrement operators (6.5.3.5), prefix increment and decrement operators (6.5.4.1), the sizeof and alignof operators (6.5.4.4), structure and union members (6.5.3.4).

6.3.2.2 void

1

The (nonexistent) value of a void expression (an expression that has type void) shall not be used in any way, and implicit or explicit conversions (except to void) shall not be applied to such an expression. If an expression of any other type is evaluated as a void expression, its value or designator is discarded. (A void expression is evaluated for its side effects.)

6.3.2.3 Pointers

1

A pointer to void may be converted to or from a pointer to any object type. A pointer to any object type may be converted to a pointer to void and back again; the result shall compare equal to the original pointer.

2

For any qualifier q, a pointer to a non-q-qualified type may be converted to a pointer to the q-qualified version of the type; the values stored in the original and converted pointers shall compare equal.

3

An integer constant expression with the value 0, such an expression cast to type void *, or the predefined constant nullptr is called a null pointer constant.57) If a null pointer constant or a value of the type nullptr_t (which is necessarily the value nullptr) is converted to a pointer type, the resulting pointer, called a null pointer, is guaranteed to compare unequal to a pointer to any object or function.

4

Conversion of a null pointer to another pointer type yields a null pointer of that type. Any two null pointers shall compare equal.

5

An integer may be converted to any pointer type. Except as previously specified, the result is

implementation-defined, may not be correctly aligned, may not point to an entity of the referenced type, and can produce an indeterminate representation when stored into an object.58)

6

Any pointer type may be converted to an integer type. Except as previously specified, the result is implementation-defined. If the result cannot be represented in the integer type, the behavior is undefined. The result is not required to be in the range of values of any integer type.

7

A pointer to an object type may be converted to a pointer to a different object type. If the resulting pointer is not correctly aligned59) for the referenced type, the behavior is undefined. Otherwise, when converted back again, the result shall compare equal to the original pointer. When a pointer to an object is converted to a pointer to a character type, the result points to the lowest addressed byte of the object. Successive increments of the result, up to the size of the object, yield pointers to the remaining bytes of the object.

8

A pointer to a function of one type may be converted to a pointer to a function of another type and back again; the result shall compare equal to the original pointer. If a converted pointer is used to call a function whose type is not compatible with the referenced type, the behavior is undefined.

6.3.2.4 nullptr_t

1

The type nullptr_t may be converted to void, bool or to a pointer type; the result is a void expression, false, or a null pointer value, respectively.

2

A null pointer constant or value of type nullptr_t may be converted to nullptr_t.

Forward references: cast operators (6.5.5), equality operators (6.5.10), integer types capable of holding object pointers (7.22.1.4), simple assignment (6.5.17.2), the nullptr_t type (7.21.2).

6.4 Lexical elements

Syntax

1
token:
keyword
identifier
constant
string-literal
punctuator
preprocessing-token:
header-name
identifier
pp-number
character-constant
string-literal
punctuator
each universal character name that cannot be one of the above
each non-white-space character that cannot be one of the above

Constraints

2

Each preprocessing token that is converted to a token shall have the lexical form of a keyword, an identifier, a constant, a string literal, or a punctuator. A single universal character name shall match one of the other preprocessing token categories.

Semantics

3

A token is the minimal lexical element of the language in translation phases 7 and 8 (5.1.1.2). The categories of tokens are: keywords, identifiers, constants, string literals, and punctuators. A preprocessing token is the minimal lexical element of the language in translation phases 3 through 6. The categories of preprocessing tokens are: header names, identifiers, preprocessing numbers, character constants, string literals, punctuators, and both single universal character names as well as single non-white-space characters that do not lexically match the other preprocessing token categories.60) If a or a " character matches the last category, the behavior is undefined. Preprocessing tokens can be separated by white space; this consists of comments (described later), or white-space characters (space, horizontal tab, new-line, vertical tab, and form-feed), or both. As described in 6.10, in certain circumstances during translation phase 4, white space (or the absence thereof) serves as more than preprocessing token separation. White space may appear within a preprocessing token only as part of a header name or between the quotation characters in a character constant or string literal.

4

If the input stream has been parsed into preprocessing tokens up to a given character, the next preprocessing token is the longest sequence of characters that could constitute a preprocessing token. There is one exception to this rule: header name preprocessing tokens are recognized only within # include and #embed preprocessing directives, in __has_include and __has_embed expressions, as well as in implementation-defined locations within #pragma directives. In such contexts, a sequence of characters that could be either a header name or a string literal is recognized as the former.

5

EXAMPLE 1 The program fragment 1Ex is parsed as a preprocessing number token (one that is not a valid floating or integer constant token), even though a parse as the pair of preprocessing tokens 1 and Ex can produce a valid expression (for example, if Ex were a macro defined as +1). Similarly, the program fragment 1E1 is parsed as a preprocessing number (one that is a valid floating constant token), whether or not E is a macro name.

6

EXAMPLE 2 The program fragment x+++++y is parsed as x ++ ++ + y, which violates a constraint on increment operators, even though the parse x ++ + ++ y can yield a correct expression.

Forward references: character constants (6.4.4.5), comments (6.4.9), expressions (6.5.1), floating constants (6.4.4.3), header names (6.4.7), macro replacement (6.10.5), postfix increment and decrement operators (6.5.3.5), prefix increment and decrement operators (6.5.4.1), preprocessing directives (6.10), preprocessing numbers (6.4.8), string literals (6.4.5).

6.4.1 Keywords

Syntax

1

keyword: one of

alignas alignof

auto bool break

case char const constexpr

continue

default

do double

else enum extern

false float

for goto

if inline

int long nullptr register restrict

return

short signed sizeof static static_assert

struct switch thread_local

true typedef

typeof typeof_unqual

union unsigned

void volatile

while _Atomic _BitInt _Complex _Decimal128

_Decimal32 _Decimal64

_Generic _Imaginary

_Noreturn

Semantics

2

The previously listed tokens (case sensitive) are reserved (in translation phases 7 and 8) for use as keywords except in an attribute token, and shall not be used otherwise. The keyword _Imaginary is reserved for specifying imaginary types.61)

3

The following table provides alternate spellings for certain keywords. These can be used wherever the keyword can.62)

Keyword Alternative Spelling alignas _Alignas alignof _Alignof bool _Bool static_assert _Static_assert thread_local _Thread_local

The spelling of these keywords, their alternate forms, and of false and true inside expressions that are subject to the # and ## preprocessing operators is unspecified.63)

6.4.2 Identifiers

6.4.2.1 General

1
identifier:
identifier-start
identifier identifier-continue
identifier-start:
nondigit
XID_Start character
universal character name of class XID_Start
identifier-continue:
digit
nondigit
XID_Continue character
universal character name of class XID_Continue
nondigit: one of
_ a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
digit: one of
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Semantics
2

An XID_Start character is an implementation-defined character whose corresponding code point in ISO/IEC 10646 has the XID_Start property. An XID_Continue character is an implementationdefined character whose corresponding code point in ISO/IEC 10646 has the XID_Continue property. An identifier is a sequence of one identifier start character followed by 0 or more identifier continue characters, which designates one or more entities as described in 6.2.1. It is implementation-defined if a $ (U+0024, DOLLAR SIGN) may be used as a nondigit character. Lowercase and uppercase letters are distinct. There is no specific limit on the maximum length of an identifier.

3

The character classes XID_Start and XID_Continue are Derived Core Properties as described by UAX #44.64) Each character and universal character name in an identifier shall designate a character whose encoding in ISO/IEC 10646 has the XID_Continue property. The initial character (which may be a universal character name) shall designate a character whose encoding in ISO/IEC 10646 has the XID_Start property. An identifier shall conform to Normalization Form C as specified in ISO/IEC 10646. Annex D provides an overview of the conforming identifiers.

4

NOTE 1 Uppercase and lowercase letters are considered different for all identifiers.

5

NOTE 2 In translation phase 4, the term identifier also includes those preprocessing tokens (6.4.8) differentiated as keywords (6.4.1) in the later translation phase 7 (5.1.1.2).

6

When preprocessing tokens are converted to tokens during translation phase 7, if a preprocessing token could be converted to either a keyword or an identifier, it is converted to a keyword except in an attribute token.

7

Some identifiers are reserved.

  • All identifiers that begin with a double underscore (__) or begin with an underscore (_) followed by an uppercase letter are reserved for any use, except those identifiers which are lexically identical to keywords.65)
  • All identifiers that begin with an underscore are reserved for use as identifiers with file scope in both the ordinary and tag name spaces.

Other identifiers may be reserved, see 7.1.3.

8

If the program declares or defines an identifier in a context in which it is reserved (other than as allowed by 7.1.4), the behavior is undefined.

9

If the program defines a reserved identifier or standard attribute token described in 6.7.13.2 as a macro name, or removes (with #undef) any macro definition of an identifier in the first group listed previously or standard attribute token described in 6.7.13.2, the behavior is undefined.

10

Some identifiers may be potentially reserved. A potentially reserved identifier is an identifier which is not reserved unless made so by an implementation providing the identifier (7.1.3) but is anticipated to become reserved by an implementation or a future version of this document. An identifier that this document describes as optional:

  • If it is defined as a macro it is reserved.
  • Otherwise, if the definition is given in clauses 1 to 6 it is reserved.
  • Otherwise, it is potentially reserved.

Recommended practice

11

Implementations are encouraged to issue a diagnostic message when a potentially reserved identifier is declared or defined for any use that is not implementation-compatible (see subsequent description in this subclause) in a context where the potentially reserved identifier may be reserved under a conforming implementation. This brings attention to a potential conflict when porting a program to a future revision of this document.

12

An implementation-compatible use of a potentially reserved identifier is a declaration of an external name where the name is provided by the implementation as an external name and where the declaration declares an object or function with a type that is compatible with the type of the object or function provided by the implementation under that name.

Implementation limits

13

As discussed in 5.2.5.2, an implementation may limit the number of significant initial characters in an identifier; the limit for an external name (an identifier that has external linkage) may be more restrictive than that for an internal name (a macro name or an identifier that does not have external linkage). The number of significant characters in an identifier is implementation-defined.

14

Any identifiers that differ in a significant character are different identifiers. If two identifiers differ only in nonsignificant characters, the behavior is undefined.

Forward references: universal character names (6.4.3), macro replacement (6.10.5), reserved library identifiers (7.1.3), use of library functions (7.1.4), attributes (6.7.13.2).

6.4.2.2 Predefined identifiers

1

The identifier __func__ shall be implicitly declared by the translator as if, immediately following the opening brace of each function definition, the declaration

static const char __func__[] = "function-name";

appeared, where function-name is the name of the lexically-enclosing function.66)

2

This name is encoded as if the implicit declaration had been written in the source character set and then translated into the execution character set as indicated in translation phase 5.

3

EXAMPLE The following code fragment can be used as an example:

#include <stdio.h>
void myfunc(void)
{
      printf("%s\n", __func__);
      /* ... */
}
Each time the function is called, it will print to the standard output stream:
myfunc
Forward references: function definitions (6.9.2).

6.4.3 Universal character names

Syntax

Constraints

2

A universal character name shall not designate a code point where the hexadecimal value is:

  • in the range D800 through DFFF inclusive; or
  • greater than 10FFFF.67)

A universal character name outside the c-char sequence of a character constant, or the s-char sequence of a string literal shall not designate a control character or a character in the basic character set.

Description

3

Universal character names may be used in identifiers, character constants, and string literals to designate characters that are not in the basic character set.

Semantics

4

A universal character name designates the character in ISO/IEC 10646 whose code point is the hexadecimal value represented by the sequence of hexadecimal digits in the universal character name.

6.4.4 Constants

6.4.4.1 General

Constraints
2

Each constant shall have a type and the value of a constant shall be in the range of representable values for its type.

Semantics
3

Each constant has a type, determined by its form and value, as detailed later.

6.4.4.2 Integer constants

Description

2

An integer constant begins with a digit, but has no period or exponent part. It may have a prefix that specifies its base and a suffix that specifies its type. An optional separating single quote character

() in an integer or floating constant is called a digit separator. Digit separators are ignored when determining the value of the constant.

3

EXAMPLE 1 The following integer constants use digit separators; the comment associated with each constant shows the equivalent constant without digit separators.

0b11’10’11’01 /* 0b11101101 */
1’2 /* character constant ’1’ followed by integer constant 2,
      not the integer constant 12 */
11’22 /* 1122 */
0x’FFFF’FFFF /* invalid hexadecimal constant (’ cannot appear after 0x) */
0x1’2’3’4AB’C’D /* 0x1234ABCD */
4

A decimal constant begins with a nonzero digit and consists of a sequence of decimal digits. An octal constant consists of the prefix 0 optionally followed by a sequence of the digits 0 through 7 only. A hexadecimal constant consists of the prefix 0x or 0X followed by a sequence of the decimal digits and the letters a (or A) through f (or F) with values 10 through 15 respectively. A binary constant consists of the prefix 0b or 0B followed by a sequence of the digits 0 or 1.

Semantics

5

The value of a decimal constant is computed base 10; that of an octal constant, base 8; that of a hexadecimal constant, base 16; that of a binary constant, base 2. The lexically first digit is the most significant.

6

The type of an integer constant is the first of the corresponding list in which its value can be represented.

Octal, Hexadecimal or Binary Suffix Decimal Constant Constant none int int long int unsigned int long long int long int unsigned long int long long int unsigned long long int u or U unsigned int unsigned int unsigned long int unsigned long int unsigned long long int unsigned long long int l or L long int long int long long int unsigned long int long long int unsigned long long int Both u or U unsigned long int unsigned long int and l or L unsigned long long int unsigned long long int ll or LL long long int long long int unsigned long long int Both u or U unsigned long long int unsigned long long int and ll or LL

wb or WB _BitInt(N) where the width N _BitInt(N) where the width N is the smallest N greater than is the smallest N greater than 1 which can accommodate 1 which can accommodate the value and the sign bit. the value and the sign bit. Both u or U unsigned _BitInt(N) where the unsigned _BitInt(N) where the and wb or WB width N is the smallest N width N is the smallest N greater than 0 which can greater than 0 which can accommodate the value. accommodate the value.

its value. If all the types in the list for the constant are signed, the extended integer type shall be signed. If all the types in the list for the constant are unsigned, the extended integer type shall be unsigned. If the list contains both signed and unsigned types, the extended integer type may be signed or unsigned. If an integer constant cannot be represented by any type in its list and has no extended integer type, then the integer constant has no type.

8

EXAMPLE 2 The wb suffix results in an _BitInt that includes space for the sign bit even if the value of the constant is positive or was specified in binary, octal, or hexadecimal notation.

-3wb   /* Yields a _BitInt(3) that is then arithmetically negated;
            two value bits, one sign bit */
-0x3wb /* Yields a _BitInt(3) that is then arithmetically negated;
            two value bits, one sign bit */
3wb    /* Yields a _BitInt(3); two value bits, one sign bit */
3uwb   /* Yields an unsigned _BitInt(2) */
-3uwb  /* Yields an unsigned _BitInt(2) that is then arithmetically
             negated, resulting in wraparound */
Forward references: preprocessing numbers (6.4.8), numeric conversion functions (7.24.1).

6.4.4.3 Floating constants

Constraints

2

A floating suffix df, dd, dl, DF, DD, or DL shall not be used in a hexadecimal floating constant.

Description

3

A floating constant has a significand part that may be followed by an exponent part and a suffix that specifies its type. The components of the significand part may include a digit sequence representing the whole-number part, followed by a period ( .), followed by a digit sequence representing the fraction part. Digit separators (6.4.4.2) are ignored when determining the value of the constant. The components of the exponent part are an e, E, p, or P followed by an exponent consisting of an optionally signed digit sequence. Either the whole-number part or the fraction part has to be present; for decimal floating constants, either the period or the exponent part has to be present.

Semantics

4

The significand part is interpreted as a (decimal or hexadecimal) rational number; the digit sequence in the exponent part is interpreted as a decimal integer. For decimal floating constants, the exponent indicates the power of 10 by which the significand part is to be scaled. For hexadecimal floating constants, the exponent indicates the power of 2 by which the significand part is to be scaled. For decimal floating constants, and also for hexadecimal floating constants when FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, the result is either the nearest representable value, or the larger or smaller representable value immediately adjacent to the nearest representable value, chosen in an implementation-defined manner. For hexadecimal floating constants when FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the result is correctly rounded.

5

An unsuffixed floating constant has type double. If suffixed by a floating suffix it has a type according to Table 6.1.

Table 6.1: Suffixes for floating constants

Suffix Type f, F float l, L long double df, DF _Decimal32 dd, DD _Decimal64 dl, DL _Decimal128

evaluation formats.68)

7

Floating constants of decimal floating type that have the same numerical value but different quantum exponents have distinguishable internal representations. The value shall be correctly rounded as specified in ISO/IEC 60559. The coefficient c and the quantum exponent q of a finite converted decimal floating-point number (see 5.2.5.3.4) are determined as follows:

  • q is set to the value of signopt digit-sequence in the exponent part, if any, or to 0, otherwise.
  • If there is a fractional constant, q is decreased by the number of digits to the right of the period and the period is removed to form a digit sequence.
  • c is set to the value of the digit sequence (after any period has been removed).
  • Rounding required because of insufficient precision or range in the type of the result will round c to the full precision available in the type, and will adjust q accordingly within the limits of the type, provided the rounding does not yield an infinity (in which case the result is an appropriately signed internal representation of infinity). If the full precision of the type would require q to be smaller than the minimum for the type, then q is pinned at the minimum and c is adjusted through the subnormal range accordingly, perhaps to zero.
8

Floating constants are converted to internal format as if at translation-time. The conversion of a floating constant shall not raise an exceptional condition or a floating-point exception at execution time. All floating constants of the same source form69) shall convert to the same internal format and, provided they are subject to the same translation-time rounding direction (either the default or a constant rounding mode set by an FENV_ROUND or FENV_DEC_ROUND pragma), to the same value.

9

EXAMPLE Following are floating constants of type _Decimal64 and their values as triples (s,c,q). Note that for _Decimal64, the precision (maximum coefficient length) is 1 6 and the quantum exponent range is 398q369.

  1. dd (+1,0,0) 0.00dd (+1,0,2) 123.dd (+1,123,0) 1.23E3dd (+1,123,1) 1.23E+3dd (+1,123,1) 12.3E+7dd (+1,123,6) 12.0dd (+1,120,1) 12.3dd (+1,123,1) 0.00123dd (+1,123,5) 1.23E-12dd (+1,123,14) 1234.5E-4dd (+1,12345,5) 0E+7dd (+1,0,7) 12345678901234567890.dd (+1,1234567890123457, 4) assuming default rounding and DEC_EVAL_METHOD is 0 or 170)

1234E-400dd (+1,12,398) assuming default rounding and DEC_EVAL_METHOD is 0 or 1 1234E-402dd (+1,0,398) assuming default rounding and DEC_EVAL_METHOD is 0 or 1 1000.dd (+1,1000,0) .0001dd (+1,1,4) 1000.e0dd (+1,1000,0) .0001e0dd (+1,1,4) 1000.0dd (+1,10000,1) 0.0001dd (+1,1,4) 1000.00dd (+1,100000,2) 00.0001dd (+1,1,4) 001000.dd (+1,1000,0)

001000.0dd (+1,10000,1) 001000.00dd (+1,100000,2) 00.00dd (+1,0,2) 00.dd (+1,0,0) .00dd (+1,0,2) 00.00e-5dd (+1,0,7) 00.e-5dd (+1,0,5) .00e-5dd (+1,0,7)

Recommended practice

10

The implementation should produce a diagnostic message if a hexadecimal constant cannot be represented exactly in its evaluation format; the implementation should then proceed with the translation of the program.

11

The translation-time conversion of floating constants should match the execution-time conversion of character strings by library functions, such as strtod, given matching inputs suitable for both conversions, the same result format, and default execution-time rounding.71)

12

NOTE Floating constants do not include a sign and are arithmetically negated by the unary - operator (6.5.4.3) which arithmetically negates the rounded value of the constant. In contrast, the numeric conversion functions in the strto family (7.24.1.5, 7.24.1.6) can include the sign as part of the input value and convert and round the arithmetically negated input. Implementations conforming to Annex F have this behavior. Negating before rounding and negating after rounding may yield different results, depending on the rounding direction and whether the results are correctly rounded. For example, the results are the same when both are correctly rounded using rounding to nearest or rounding toward zero, but the results are different when they are inexact and correctly rounded using rounding toward positive infinity or rounding toward negative infinity.

Conversions yielding exact results are not affected by the order of negating and rounding. For types with radix 10, decimal floating constants expressed within the precision and range of the evaluation format convert exactly. For types whose radix is a power of 2, hexadecimal floating constants expressed within the precision and range of the evaluation format convert exactly.

Forward references: preprocessing numbers (6.4.8), numeric conversion functions (7.24.1), the strto function family (7.24.1.5, 7.24.1.6).

6.4.4.4 Enumeration constants

Semantics
2

An identifier declared as an enumeration constant for an enumeration without a fixed underlying type has either type int or the enumerated type, as defined in 6.7.3.3. An identifier declared as an enumeration constant for an enumeration with a fixed underlying type has the associated enumerated type.

3

An enumeration constant may be used in an expression (or constant expression) wherever a value of an integer type may be used.

Forward references: enumeration specifiers (6.7.3.3).

6.4.4.5 Character constants

Description

2

An integer character constant is a sequence of one or more multibyte characters enclosed in singlequotes, as in ’x’. A UTF-8 character constant is the same, except prefixed by u8. A wchar_t character constant is prefixed by the letter L. A UTF-16 character constant is prefixed by the letter u. A UTF-32 character constant is prefixed by the letter U. Collectively, wchar_t, UTF-16, and UTF-32 character constants are called wide character constants. With a few exceptions detailed later, the elements of the sequence are any members of the source character set; they are mapped in an implementationdefined manner to members of the execution character set.

3

The single-quote , the double-quote ", the question-mark ?, the backslash \, and arbitrary integer values are representable according to the following table of escape sequences:

single quote \’ double quote " \" question mark ? \? backslash \ \\ octal character \octal digits hexadecimal character \x hexadecimal digits

4

The double-quote " and question-mark ? are representable either by themselves or by the escape sequences \" and \?, respectively, but the single-quote and the backslash \ shall be represented, respectively, by the escape sequences \’ and \\.

5

The octal digits that follow the backslash in an octal escape sequence are taken to be part of the construction of a single character for an integer character constant or of a single wide character for a wide character constant. The numerical value of the octal integer so formed specifies the value of the desired character or wide character.

6

The hexadecimal digits that follow the backslash and the letter x in a hexadecimal escape sequence are taken to be part of the construction of a single character for an integer character constant or of a single wide character for a wide character constant. The numerical value of the hexadecimal integer so formed specifies the value of the desired character or wide character.

7

Each octal or hexadecimal escape sequence is the longest sequence of characters that can constitute the escape sequence.

8

In addition, characters not in the basic character set are representable by universal character names and certain non-graphic characters are representable by escape sequences consisting of the backslash \ followed by a lowercase letter: \a, \b, \f, \n, \r, \t, and \v.72)

Constraints

9

The value of an octal or hexadecimal escape sequence shall be in the range of representable values for the corresponding type:

Prefix Corresponding Type none unsigned char u8 char8_t L the unsigned type corresponding to wchar_t u char16_t U char32_t

10

A UTF-8, UTF-16, or UTF-32 character constant shall not contain more than one character.73) The value shall be representable with a single UTF-8, UTF-16, or UTF-32 code unit, respectively.

Semantics

11

An integer character constant has type int. The value of an integer character constant containing a single character that maps to a single value in the literal encoding (6.2.9) is the numerical value of the representation of the mapped character in the literal encoding interpreted as an integer. The value of an integer character constant containing more than one character (e.g. ’ab’), or containing a character or escape sequence that does not map to a single value in the literal encoding, is implementation-defined. If an integer character constant contains a single character or escape sequence, its value is the one that results when an object with type char whose value is that of the single character or escape sequence is converted to type int.

12

A UTF-8 character constant has type char8_t. If the UTF-8 character constant is not produced through a hexadecimal or octal escape sequence, the value of a UTF-8 character constant is equal to its ISO/IEC 10646 code point value, provided that the code point value can be encoded as a single UTF-8 code unit. Otherwise, the value of the UTF-8 character constant is the numeric value specified in the hexadecimal or octal escape sequence.

13

A UTF-16 character constant has type char16_t which is an unsigned integer type defined in the

<uchar.h> header. If the UTF-16 character constant is not produced through a hexadecimal or octal escape sequence, the value of a UTF-16 character constant is equal to its ISO/IEC 10646 code point value, provided that the code point value can be encoded as a single UTF-16 code unit. Otherwise, the value of the UTF-16 character constant is the numeric value specified in the hexadecimal or octal escape sequence.

14

A UTF-32 character constant has type char32_t which is an unsigned integer type defined in the <uchar.h> header. If the UTF-32 character constant is not produced through a hexadecimal or octal escape sequence, the value of a UTF-32 character constant is equal to its ISO/IEC 10646 code point value, provided that the code point value can be encoded as a single UTF-32 code unit. Otherwise, the value of the UTF-32 character constant is the numeric value specified in the hexadecimal or octal escape sequence.

15

A wchar_t character constant has type wchar_t, an integer type defined in the <stddef.h> header. The value of a wchar_t character constant containing a single multibyte character that maps to a single member of the extended execution character set is the wide character corresponding to that multibyte character in the implementation-defined wide literal encoding (6.2.9). The value of a wchar_t character constant containing more than one multibyte character or a single multibyte character that maps to multiple members of the extended execution character set, or containing a multibyte character or escape sequence not represented in the extended execution character set, is implementation-defined.

16

EXAMPLE 1 The construction ’\0’ is commonly used to represent the null character.

17

EXAMPLE 2 Implementations that use eight bits for objects that have type char can furnish certain values in an variety of ways. In an implementation in which type char has the same range of values as signed char, the integer character constant ’\xFF’ has the value 1; if type char has the same range of values as unsigned char, the character constant ’\xFF’ has the value +255.

18

EXAMPLE 3 Even if eight bits are used for objects that have type char, the construction ’\x123’ specifies an integer character constant containing only one character, since a hexadecimal escape sequence is terminated only by a non-hexadecimal character. To specify an integer character constant containing the two characters whose values are ’\x12’ and ’3’, the construction ’\0223’ can be used, since an octal escape sequence is terminated after three octal digits. (The value of this two-character integer character constant is implementation-defined.)

19

EXAMPLE 4 Even if 12 or more bits are used for objects that have type wchar_t, the construction L’\1234’ specifies the implementation-defined value that results from the combination of the values 0123 and ’4’.

Forward references: common definitions <stddef.h> (7.21), the mbtowc function (7.24.7.2), Unicode utilities <uchar.h> (7.30).

6.4.4.6 Predefined constants

1
predefined-constant:
false
true
nullptr
Description
2

Some keywords represent constants of a specific value and type.

3

The keywords false and true are constants of type bool with a value of 0 for false and 1 for true.74)

4

The keyword nullptr represents a null pointer constant. Details of its type are described in 7.21.2.

6.4.5 String literals

Syntax

1
string-literal:
encoding-prefixopt " s-char-sequenceopt "
s-char-sequence:
s-char
s-char-sequence s-char
s-char:
any member of the source character set except
the double-quote ", backslash \, or new-line character
escape-sequence

Constraints

2

If a sequence of adjacent string literal tokens includes prefixed string literal tokens, the prefixed tokens shall all have the same prefix.

Description

3

A character string literal is a sequence of zero or more multibyte characters enclosed in double-quotes, as in "xyz". A UTF-8 string literal is the same, except prefixed by u8. A wchar_t string literal is the same, except prefixed by L. A UTF-16 string literal is the same, except prefixed by u. A UTF-32 string literal is the same, except prefixed by U. Collectively, wchar_t, UTF-16, and UTF-32 string literals are called wide string literals.

4

The same considerations apply to each element of the sequence in a string literal as if it were in an integer character constant (for a character or UTF-8 string literal) or a wide character constant (for a wide string literal), except that the single-quote is representable either by itself or by the escape sequence \’, but the double-quote " shall be represented by the escape sequence \".

Semantics

5

In translation phase 6 (5.1.1.2), the multibyte character sequences specified by any sequence of adjacent character and identically-prefixed string literal tokens are concatenated into a single multibyte character sequence. If any of the tokens has an encoding prefix, the resulting multibyte character sequence is treated as having the same prefix; otherwise, it is treated as a character string literal.

6

In translation phase 7 (5.1.1.2), a byte or code of value zero is appended to each multibyte character sequence that results from a string literal or literals.75) The multibyte character sequence is then used to initialize an array of static storage duration and length just sufficient to contain the sequence. For character string literals, the array elements have type char, and are initialized with the individual bytes of the multibyte character sequence corresponding to the literal encoding (6.2.9). For UTF-8 string literals, the array elements have type char8_t, and are initialized with the characters of the multibyte character sequence, as encoded in UTF-8. For wide string literals prefixed by the letter L, the array elements have type wchar_t and are initialized with the sequence of wide characters corresponding to the wide literal encoding. For wide string literals prefixed by the letter u or U, the array elements have type char16_t or char32_t, respectively, and are initialized sequence of wide characters corresponding to UTF-16 and UTF-32 encoded text, respectively. The value of a string literal containing a multibyte character or escape sequence not represented in the execution character set is implementation-defined. Any hexadecimal escape sequence or octal escape sequence specified in a u8, u, or U string specifies a single char8_t, char16_t, or char32_t value and may result in the full character sequence not being valid UTF-8, UTF-16, or UTF-32.

7

It is unspecified whether these arrays are distinct provided their elements have the appropriate values. If the program attempts to modify such an array, the behavior is undefined.

8

EXAMPLE 1 This pair of adjacent character string literals

"\x12" "3"

produces a single character string literal containing the two characters whose values are ’\x12’ and ’3’, because escape sequences are converted into single members of the execution character set just prior to adjacent string literal concatenation.

9

EXAMPLE 2 Each of the sequences of adjacent string literal tokens

"a" "b" L"c"
"a" L"b" "c"
L"a" "b" L"c"
L"a" L"b" L"c"
is equivalent to the string literal
L"abc"
Likewise, each of the sequences
"a" "b" u"c"
"a" u"b" "c"
u"a" "b" u"c"
u"a" u"b" u"c"
is equivalent to
u"abc"

Forward references: common definitions <stddef.h> (7.21), the mbstowcs function (7.24.8.1), Unicode utilities <uchar.h> (7.30).

6.4.6 Punctuators

Syntax

1
punctuator: one of
[ ] ( ) { } . ->
++ -- & * + - ~ !
/ % << >> < > <= >= == != ^ | && ||
? : :: ; ...
= *= /= %= += -= <<= >>= &= ^= |=
, # ##
<: :> <% %> %: %:%:

Semantics

2

A punctuator is a symbol that has independent syntactic and semantic significance. Depending on context, it may specify an operation to be performed (which in turn may yield a value or a function designator, produce a side effect, or some combination thereof) in which case it is known as an operator (other forms of operator also exist in some contexts). An operand is an entity on which an operator acts.

3

In all aspects of the language, the six tokens76)

<: :> <% %> %: %:%:

:
[ ] { } # ##

except for their spelling.77)

Forward references: expressions (6.5.1), declarations (6.7), preprocessing directives (6.10), statements (6.8).

6.4.7 Header names

Syntax

1
header-name:
< h-char-sequence >
" q-char-sequence "
h-char-sequence:
h-char
h-char-sequence h-char
h-char:
any member of the source character set except
the new-line character and >
q-char-sequence:
q-char
q-char-sequence q-char
q-char:
any member of the source character set except
the new-line character and "

Semantics

2

The sequences in both forms of header names are mapped in an implementation-defined manner to headers or external source file names as specified in 6.10.3.

3

If the characters , \, ", //, or /* occur in the sequence between the < and > delimiters, the behavior is undefined. Similarly, if the characters , \, //, or /* occur in the sequence between the " delimiters, the behavior is undefined.78)

Header name preprocessing tokens are recognized only within #include and #embed preprocessing directives, in __has_include and __has_embed expressions, as well as in implementation-defined locations within #pragma directives.79)

4

EXAMPLE The following sequence of characters:

0x3<1/a.h>1e2
#include <1/a.h>
#define const.member@$
{0x3}{<}{1}{/}{a}{.}{h}{>}{1e2}
{#}{include} {<1/a.h>}
{#}{define} {const}{.}{member}{@}{$}

forms the following sequence of preprocessing tokens (with each individual preprocessing token delimited by a { on the left and a } on the right).

Forward references: source file inclusion (6.10.3).

6.4.8 Preprocessing numbers

Syntax

Description

2

A preprocessing number begins with a digit optionally preceded by a period (.) and may be followed by valid identifier characters and the character sequences e+, e-, E+, E-, p+, p-, P+, or P-.

3

Preprocessing number tokens lexically include all floating and integer constant tokens.

Semantics

4

A preprocessing number does not have type or a value; it acquires both after a successful conversion (as part of translation phase 7 (5.1.1.2)) to a floating constant token or an integer constant token.

6.4.9 Comments

1

Except within a character constant, a string literal, or a comment, the characters /* introduce a comment. The contents of such a comment are examined only to identify multibyte characters and to find the characters */ that terminate it.80)

2

Except within a character constant, a string literal, or a comment, the characters // introduce a comment that includes all multibyte characters up to, but not including, the next new-line character. The contents of such a comment are examined only to identify multibyte characters and to find the terminating new-line character.

3

EXAMPLE

"a//b"                   // four-character string literal
#include "//e"           // undefined behavior
// */                    // comment, not syntax error
f = g/**//h;             // equivalent to f = g / h;
//\
i();                     // part of a two-line comment
/\
/ j();                   // part of a two-line comment
#define glue(x,y) x##y
glue(/,/) k();           // syntax error, not comment
/*//*/ l();              // equivalent to l();
m = n//**/o
  + p;                   // equivalent to m = n + p;

6.5 Expressions

6.5.1 General

1

An expression is a sequence of operators and operands that specifies computation of a value, or that designates an object or a function, or that generates side effects, or that performs a combination thereof. The value computations of the operands of an operator are sequenced before the value computation of the result of the operator.

2

If a side effect on a scalar object is unsequenced relative to either a different side effect on the same scalar object or a value computation using the value of the same scalar object, the behavior is undefined. If there are multiple allowable orderings of the subexpressions of an expression, the behavior is undefined if such an unsequenced side effect occurs in any of the orderings.81)

3

The grouping of operators and operands is indicated by the syntax.82) Except as specified later, side effects and value computations of subexpressions are unsequenced.83)

4

Some operators (the unary operator ~, and the binary operators <<, >>, &, ^, and |, collectively described as bitwise operators) are required to have operands that have integer type. These operators yield values that depend on the internal representations of integers, and have implementationdefined and undefined aspects for signed types.

5

If an exceptional condition occurs during the evaluation of an expression (that is, if the result is not mathematically defined or not in the range of representable values for its type), the behavior is undefined.

6

The effective type of an object for an access to its stored value is the declared type of the object, if any.84) If a value is stored into an object having no declared type through an lvalue having a type that is not a non-atomic character type, then the type of the lvalue becomes the effective type of the object for that access and for subsequent accesses that do not modify the stored value. If a value is copied into an object having no declared type using memcpy or memmove, or is copied as an array of character type, then the effective type of the modified object for that access and for subsequent accesses that do not modify the value is the effective type of the object from which the value is copied, if it has one. For all other accesses to an object having no declared type, the effective type of the object is simply the type of the lvalue used for the access.

7

An object shall have its stored value accessed only by an lvalue expression that has one of the following types:85)

  • a type compatible with the effective type of the object,
  • a qualified version of a type compatible with the effective type of the object,
8

A floating expression may be contracted, that is, evaluated as though it were a single operation, thereby omitting rounding errors implied by the source code and the expression evaluation method.86) The FP_CONTRACT pragma in <math.h> provides a way to disallow contracted expressions. Otherwise, whether and how expressions are contracted is implementation-defined.87)

9

Operators involving decimal floating types are evaluated according to the semantics of ISO/IEC 60559, including production of results with the preferred quantum exponent as specified in ISO/IEC 60559.

Forward references: the FP_CONTRACT pragma (7.12.2), copying functions (7.26.2).

6.5.2 Primary expressions

Syntax

Constraints

2

The identifier in an identifier primary expression shall have a visible declaration as an ordinary identifier that declares an object or a function.88)

Semantics

3

An identifier primary expression designating an object is an lvalue. An identifier primary expression designating a function is a function designator.

4

A constant is a primary expression. Its type depends on its form and value, as detailed in 6.4.4.

5

A string literal is a primary expression. It is an lvalue with type as detailed in 6.4.5.

6

A parenthesized expression is a primary expression. Its type, value, and semantics are identical to those of the unparenthesized expression.

7

A generic selection is a primary expression. Its type, value, and semantics depend on the selected generic association, as detailed in the following subclause.

Forward references: declarations (6.7).

6.5.2.1 Generic selection

Constraints
2

A generic selection shall have no more than one default generic association. The type name in a generic association shall specify a complete object type other than a variably modified type. No two generic associations in the same generic selection shall specify compatible types. The type of the controlling expression is the type of the expression as if it had undergone an lvalue conversion,89)

array to pointer conversion, or function to pointer conversion. That type shall be compatible with at most one of the types named in the generic association list. If a generic selection has no default generic association, its controlling expression shall have type compatible with exactly one of the types named in its generic association list.

Semantics
3

The controlling expression of a generic selection is not evaluated. If a generic selection has a generic association with a type name that is compatible with the type of the controlling expression, then the result expression of the generic selection is the expression in that generic association. Otherwise, the result expression of the generic selection is the expression in the default generic association. None of the expressions from any other generic association of the generic selection is evaluated.

4

The type and value of a generic selection are identical to those of its result expression. It is an lvalue, a function designator, or a void expression if its result expression is, respectively, an lvalue, a function designator, or a void expression.

5

EXAMPLE A cbrt type-generic macro could be implemented as follows:

#define cbrt(X) _Generic((X),                   \
                        long double: cbrtl,     \
                        default: cbrt,          \
                        float: cbrtf            \
                        )(X)

7.27 shows how such a macro could be implemented with the required rounding properties.

6.5.3 Postfix operators

6.5.3.1 General

6.5.3.2 Array subscripting

1

One of the expressions shall have type "pointer to complete object type", the other expression shall have integer type, and the result has type "type".

Semantics
2

A postfix expression followed by an expression in square brackets [] is a subscripted designation of an element of an array object. The definition of the subscript operator [] is that E1[E2] is identical to (*((E1)+(E2))). Because of the conversion rules that apply to the binary + operator, if E1 is an array object (equivalently, a pointer to the initial element of an array object) and E2 is an integer, E1[E2] designates the E2-th element of E1 (counting from zero).

3

Successive subscript operators designate an element of a multidimensional array object. If E is an n-dimensional array (n2) with dimensions i×j×···×k, then E (used as other than an lvalue) is converted to a pointer to an (n1)-dimensional array with dimensions j×···×k. If the unary * operator is applied to this pointer explicitly, or implicitly as a result of subscripting, the result is the referenced (n1)-dimensional array, which itself is converted into a pointer if used as other than an lvalue. It follows from this that arrays are stored in row-major order (last subscript varies fastest).

4

EXAMPLE The following snippet has an array object defined by the declaration:

int x[3][5];

Here x is a 3×5 array of objects of type int; more precisely, x is an array of three element objects, each of which is an array of five objects of type int. In the expression x[i], which is equivalent to (*((x)+(i))), x is first converted to a pointer to the initial array of five objects of type int. Then i is adjusted according to the type of x, which conceptually entails multiplying i by the size of the object to which the pointer points, namely an array of five int objects. The results are added and indirection is applied to yield an array of five objects of type int. When used in the expression x[i][j], that array is in turn converted to a pointer to the first of the objects of type int, so x[i][j] yields an int.

Forward references: additive operators (6.5.7), address and indirection operators (6.5.4.2), array declarators (6.7.7.3).

6.5.3.3 Function calls

1

The expression that denotes the called function90) shall have type pointer to function returning void or returning a complete object type other than an array type.

2

The number of arguments shall agree with the number of parameters. Each argument shall have a type such that its value may be assigned to an object with the unqualified version of the type of its corresponding parameter

Semantics
3

A postfix expression followed by parentheses () containing a possibly empty, comma-separated list of expressions is a function call. The postfix expression denotes the called function. The list of expressions specifies the arguments to the function.

4

An argument may be an expression of any complete object type. In preparing for the call to a function, the arguments are evaluated, and each parameter is assigned the value of the corresponding argument.91)

5

If the expression that denotes the called function has type pointer to function returning an object type, the function call expression has the same type as that object type, and has the value determined as specified in 6.8.7.5. Otherwise, the function call has type void.

6

The arguments are implicitly converted, as if by assignment, to the types of the corresponding parameters, taking the type of each parameter to be the unqualified version of its declared type. The ellipsis notation in a function prototype declarator causes argument type conversion to stop after the last declared parameter, if present. The integer promotions are performed on each trailing argument, and trailing arguments that have type float are promoted to double. These are called the default argument promotions. No other conversions are performed implicitly.

7

If the function is defined with a type that is not compatible with the type (of the expression) pointed to by the expression that denotes the called function, the behavior is undefined.

8

There is a sequence point after the evaluations of the function designator and the actual arguments but before the actual call. Every evaluation in the calling function (including other function calls) that is not otherwise specifically sequenced before or after the execution of the body of the called function is indeterminately sequenced with respect to the execution of the called function.92)

9

Recursive function calls shall be permitted, both directly and indirectly through any chain of other functions.

10

EXAMPLE In the function call

(*pf[f1()]) (f2(), f3() + f4())

the functions f1, f2, f3, and f4 can be called in any order. All side effects are completed before the function pointed to by pf[f1()] is called.

Forward references: function declarators (6.7.7.4), function definitions (6.9.2), the return statement (6.8.7.5), simple assignment (6.5.17.2).

6.5.3.4 Structure and union members

1

The first operand of the . operator shall have an atomic, qualified, or unqualified structure or union type, and the second operand shall name a member of that type.

2

The first operand of the -> operator shall have type "pointer to atomic, qualified, or unqualified structure" or "pointer to atomic, qualified, or unqualified union", and the second operand shall name a member of the type pointed to.

Semantics
3

A postfix expression followed by the . operator and an identifier designates a member of a structure or union object. The value is that of the named member,93) and is an lvalue if the first expression is an lvalue. If the first expression has qualified type, the result has the so-qualified version of the type of the designated member.

4

A postfix expression followed by the -> operator and an identifier designates a member of a structure or union object. The value is that of the named member of the object to which the first expression points, and is an lvalue.94) If the first expression is a pointer to a qualified type, the result has the so-qualified version of the type of the designated member.

5

Accessing a member of an atomic structure or union object results in undefined behavior.95)

6

One special guarantee is made to simplify the use of unions: if a union contains several structures that share a common initial sequence (see following sentence), and if the union object currently contains one of these structures, it is permitted to inspect the common initial part of any of them anywhere that a declaration of the completed type of the union is visible. Two structures share a common initial sequence if corresponding members have compatible types (and, for bit-fields, the same widths) for a sequence of one or more initial members.

7

EXAMPLE 1 If f is a function returning a structure or union, and x is a member of that structure or union, f().x is a valid postfix expression but is not an lvalue.

8

EXAMPLE 2 In:

struct s { int i; const int ci; };
struct s s;
const struct s cs;
volatile struct s vs;

the various members have the types:

s.i int s.ci const int cs.i const int cs.ci const int vs.i volatile int vs.ci volatile const int

9

EXAMPLE 3 The following is a valid fragment:

union {
      struct {
            int    alltypes;
      } n;
      struct {
            int    type;
            int    intnode;
      } ni;
      struct {
            int    type;
            double doublenode;
      } nf;
} u;
u.nf.type = 1;
u.nf.doublenode = 3.14;
/* ... */
if (u.n.alltypes == 1)
      if (sin(u.nf.doublenode) == 0.0)
            /* ... */
The following is not a valid fragment (because the union type is not visible within function f):
struct t1 { int m; };
struct t2 { int m; };
int f(struct t1 *p1, struct t2 *p2)
{
      if (p1->m  <  0)
            p2->m = -p2->m;
      return p1->m;
}
int g()
{
      union {
            struct t1 s1;
            struct t2 s2;
      } u;
      /* ... */
      return f(&u.s1, &u.s2);
}

Forward references: address and indirection operators (6.5.4.2), structure and union specifiers (6.7.3.2).

6.5.3.5 Postfix increment and decrement operators

1

The operand of the postfix increment or decrement operator shall have atomic, qualified, or unqualified real or pointer type, and shall be a modifiable lvalue.

Semantics
2

The result of the postfix ++ operator is the value of the operand. As a side effect, the value of the operand object is incremented (that is, the value 1 of the appropriate type is added to it). See the discussions of additive operators and compound assignment for information on constraints, types, and conversions and the effects of operations on pointers. The value computation of the result is sequenced before the side effect of updating the stored value of the operand. With respect to an indeterminately sequenced function call, the operation of postfix ++ is a single evaluation. Postfix ++ on an object with atomic type is a read-modify-write operation with memory_order_seq_cst

memory order semantics.96)

3

The postfix -- operator is analogous to the postfix ++ operator, except that the value of the operand is decremented (that is, the value 1 of the appropriate type is subtracted from it).

Forward references: additive operators (6.5.7), compound assignment (6.5.17.3).

6.5.3.6 Compound literals

Constraints
2

The type name shall specify a complete object type or an array of unknown size, but not a variable length array type.

3

All the constraints for initializer lists in 6.7.11 also apply to compound literals.

4

If the compound literal is associated with file scope or block scope (see 6.2.1) the storage-class specifiers SC (possibly empty),97) type name T, and initializer list, if any, shall be such that they are

SC typeof(T) ID = { IL };

where ID is an identifier that is unique for the whole program and where IL is a (possibly empty) initializer list with nested structure, designators, values and types as the initializer list of the compound literal. All the constraints for storage-class specifiers in 6.7.2 also apply correspondingly to compound literals. If the compound literal is associated with function prototype scope, constraints as if in block scope apply.

Semantics

5

For a compound literal associated with function prototype scope:

  • the type is determined as if in block scope and no object is created;
  • if it is a compound literal constant it is evaluated at translation time;
  • if it is not a compound literal constant, neither the compound literal as a whole nor any of the initializers are evaluated.

Otherwise, a compound literal provides access to an unnamed object whose value, type, storage duration, initializer, and other properties are as if given by the definition syntax in the constraints.

6

If the storage duration is automatic, the lifetime of the instance of the unnamed object is the current execution of the enclosing block.98)

7

If the storage-class specifiers are absent or contain constexpr, static, register, or thread_local the behavior is as if the object were declared and initialized in the corresponding scope with these storage-class specifiers; if another storage-class specifier is present, the behavior is undefined. If the storage-class specifier constexpr is present, the initializer is evaluated at translation time. Otherwise, if the storage duration is automatic, the initializer is evaluated at each evaluation of the compound literal; if the storage duration is static or thread the initializer is (as if) evaluated once prior to program startup.

8

The value of the compound literal is that of an lvalue corresponding to the unnamed object.

9

All the semantic rules for initializer lists in 6.7.11 also apply to compound literals.99)

10

String literals, and compound literals with const-qualified types, including those specified with constexpr, are not required to designate distinct objects.100)

11

EXAMPLE 1 The following 2 functions can be used as an example:

int f(int*);
int g(char * para[f((int[27]){ 0, })]) {
      /* ... */
      return 0;
}

Here, each call to g creates an unnamed object of type int[27] to determine the variably-modified type of para for the duration of the call. During that determination, a pointer to the object is passed into a call to the function f. If a pointer to the object is kept by f, access to that object is possible during the whole execution of the call to g. The lifetime of the object ends with the end of the call to g; for any access after that, the behavior is undefined.

12

EXAMPLE 2 The file scope definition

int *p = (int []){2, 4};

initializes p to point to the first element of an array of two int s, the first having the value two and the second, four. The expressions in this compound literal are required to be constant. The unnamed object has static storage duration.

13

EXAMPLE 3 In contrast, in

void f(void)
{
      int *p;
      /*...*/
      p = (int [2]){*p};
      /*...*/
}

p is assigned the address of the first element of an array of two int s, the first having the value previously pointed to by p and the second, zero. The initializer expression in this compound literal is not required to be constant. The unnamed object has automatic storage duration.

14

EXAMPLE 4 Initializers with designations can be combined with compound literals. Structure objects created using compound literals can be passed to functions without depending on member order:

drawline((struct point){.x=1, .y=1},
      (struct point){.x=3, .y=4});
Or, if drawline instead expected pointers to struct point:
drawline(&(struct point){.x=1, .y=1},
      &(struct point){.x=3, .y=4});
15

EXAMPLE 5 A read-only compound literal can be specified through constructions like:

(const float []){1e0, 1e1, 1e2, 1e3, 1e4, 1e5, 1e6}
16

EXAMPLE 6 The following three expressions have different meanings:

"/tmp/fileXXXXXX"
(char []){"/tmp/fileXXXXXX"}
(const char []){"/tmp/fileXXXXXX"}

The first always has static storage duration and has type array of char, but could or could not be modifiable; the last two have automatic storage duration when they occur within the body of a function, and the first of these two is modifiable.

17

EXAMPLE 7 Like string literals, const-qualified compound literals can be placed into read-only memory and can even be shared. For example,

(const char []){"abc"} == "abc"

may yield 1 if the literals’ storage is shared.

18

EXAMPLE 8 Since compound literals are unnamed, a single compound literal cannot specify a circularly linked object. For example, there is no way to write a self-referential compound literal that could be used as the function argument in place of the named object endless_zeros in the following snippet:

struct int_list { int car; struct int_list *cdr; };
struct int_list endless_zeros = {0, &endless_zeros};
eval(endless_zeros);
19

EXAMPLE 9 Each compound literal creates only a single object in a given scope:

struct s { int i; };
int f (void)
{
      struct s *p = 0, *q;
      int j = 0;
again:
      q = p, p = &((struct s){ j++ });
      if (j  <  2) goto again;
      return p == q && q->i == 1;
}

The function f() always returns the value 1.

20

Note that if an iteration statement were used instead of an explicit goto and a label, the lifetime of the unnamed object would be the body of the loop only, and on entry next time around p would have indeterminate representation, which would result in undefined behavior.

Forward references: type names (6.7.8), initialization (6.7.11).

6.5.4 Unary operators

Syntax

6.5.4.1 Prefix increment and decrement operators

1

The operand of the prefix increment or decrement operator shall have atomic, qualified, or unqualified real or pointer type, and shall be a modifiable lvalue.

Semantics
2

The value of the operand of the prefix ++ operator is incremented. The result is the new value of the operand after incrementation. The expression ++E is equivalent to (E+=1), where the value 1 is of the appropriate type. See the discussions of additive operators and compound assignment for information on constraints, types, side effects, and conversions and the effects of operations on pointers.

3

The prefix -- operator is analogous to the prefix ++ operator, except that the value of the operand is decremented.

Forward references: additive operators (6.5.7), compound assignment (6.5.17.3).

6.5.4.2 Address and indirection operators

1

The operand of the unary & operator shall be either a function designator, the result of a [] or unary

* operator, or an lvalue that designates an object that is not a bit-field and is not declared with the

register storage-class specifier.

2

The operand of the unary * operator shall have pointer type.

Semantics

3

The unary & operator yields the address of its operand. If the operand has type "type", the result has type "pointer to type". If the operand is the result of a unary * operator, neither that operator nor the & operator is evaluated and the result is as if both were omitted, except that the constraints on the operators still apply and the result is not an lvalue. Similarly, if the operand is the result of a [] operator, neither the & operator nor the unary * that is implied by the [] is evaluated and the result is as if the & operator were removed and the [] operator were changed to a + operator. Otherwise, the result is a pointer to the object or function designated by its operand.

4

The unary * operator denotes indirection. If the operand points to a function, the result is a function designator; if it points to an object, the result is an lvalue designating the object. If the operand has type "pointer to type", the result has type "type". If an invalid value has been assigned to the pointer, the behavior of the unary * operator is undefined.101)

Forward references: storage-class specifiers (6.7.2), structure and union specifiers (6.7.3.2).

6.5.4.3 Unary arithmetic operators

1

The operand of the unary + or - operator shall have arithmetic type; of the ~ operator, integer type; of the ! operator, scalar type.

Semantics
2

The result of the unary + operator is the value of its (promoted) operand. The integer promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the promoted type.

3

The result of the unary - operator is the negative of its (promoted) operand. The integer promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the promoted type.

4

The result of the ~ operator is the bitwise complement of its (promoted) operand (that is, each bit in the result is set if and only if the corresponding bit in the converted operand is not set). The integer promotions are performed on the operand, and the result has the promoted type. If the promoted type is an unsigned type, the expression ~E is equivalent to the maximum value representable in that type minus E.

5

The result of the logical negation operator ! is 0 if the value of its operand compares unequal to 0, 1 if the value of its operand compares equal to 0. The result has type int. The expression !E is equivalent to (0==E).

6.5.4.4 The sizeof and alignof operators

1

The sizeof operator shall not be applied to an expression that has function type or an incomplete type, to the parenthesized name of such a type, or to an expression that designates a bit-field member. The alignof operator shall not be applied to a function type or an incomplete type.

Semantics
2

The sizeof operator yields the size (in bytes) of its operand, which may be an expression or the parenthesized name of a type. The size is determined from the type of the operand. The result is an integer. If the type of the operand is a variable length array type, the operand is evaluated; otherwise, the operand is not evaluated and the result is an integer constant.

3

The alignof operator yields the alignment requirement of its operand type. The operand is not

evaluated and the result is an integer constant expression. When applied to an array type, the result is the alignment requirement of the element type.

4

When sizeof is applied to an operand that has type char, unsigned char, or signed char, (or a qualified version thereof) the result is 1. When applied to an operand that has array type, the result is the total number of bytes in the array.102) When applied to an operand that has structure or union type, the result is the total number of bytes in such an object, including internal and trailing padding.

5

The value of the result of both operators is implementation-defined, and its type (an unsigned integer type) is size_t, defined in <stddef.h> (and other headers).

6

EXAMPLE 1 A principal use of the sizeof operator is in communication with routines such as storage allocators and I/O systems. A storage-allocation function can accept a size (in bytes) of an object to allocate and return a pointer to void. For example:

extern void *alloc(size_t);
double *dp = alloc(sizeof *dp);

The implementation of the alloc function presumably ensures that its return value is aligned suitably for conversion to a pointer to double.

7

EXAMPLE 2 Another use of the sizeof operator is to compute the number of elements in an array:

sizeof array / sizeof array[0]
8

EXAMPLE 3 In this example, the size of a variable length array is computed and returned from a function:

#include <stddef.h>
size_t fsize3(int n)
{
      char b[n+3];       // variable length array
      return sizeof b;   // execution time sizeof
}
int main(void)
{
      size_t size;
      size = fsize3(10); // fsize3 returns 13
      return 0;
}
Forward references: common definitions <stddef.h> (7.21), declarations (6.7), structure and union specifiers (6.7.3.2), type names (6.7.8), array declarators (6.7.7.3).

6.5.5 Cast operators

Syntax

Constraints

2

Unless the type name specifies a void type, the type name shall specify atomic, qualified, or unqualified scalar type, and the operand shall have scalar type.

3

Conversions that involve pointers, other than where permitted by the constraints of 6.5.17.2, shall be

specified by means of an explicit cast.

4

A pointer type shall not be converted to any floating type. A floating type shall not be converted to any pointer type. The type nullptr_t shall not be converted to any type other than void, bool or a pointer type. If the target type is nullptr_t, the cast expression shall be a null pointer constant or have type nullptr_t.

Semantics

5

Size expressions and typeof operators contained in a type name used with a cast operator are evaluated whenever the cast expression is evaluated.

6

Preceding an expression by a parenthesized type name converts the value of the expression to the unqualified, non-atomic version of the named type. This construction is called a cast.103) A cast that specifies no conversion has no effect on the type or value of an expression.

7

If the value of the expression is represented with greater range or precision than required by the type named by the cast (6.3.1.8), then the cast specifies a conversion even if the type of the expression is the same as the named type and removes any extra range and precision.

Forward references: equality operators (6.5.10), function declarators (6.7.7.4), simple assignment (6.5.17.2), type names (6.7.8).

6.5.6 Multiplicative operators

Syntax

Constraints

2

Each of the operands shall have arithmetic type. The operands of the % operator shall have integer type.

3

If either operand has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating type, complex type, or imaginary type.

Semantics

4

The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.

5

The result of the binary * operator is the product of the operands.

6

The result of the / operator is the quotient from the division of the first operand by the second; the result of the % operator is the remainder. In both operations, if the value of the second operand is zero, the behavior is undefined.

7

When integers are divided, the result of the / operator is the algebraic quotient with any fractional part discarded.104) If the quotient a/b is representable, the expression (a/b)*b + a%b shall equal a; otherwise, the behavior of both a/b and a%b is undefined.

6.5.7 Additive operators

Syntax

Constraints

2

For addition, either both operands shall have arithmetic type, or one operand shall be a pointer to a complete object type and the other shall have integer type. (Incrementing is equivalent to adding 1.)

3

For subtraction, one of the following shall hold:

  • both operands have arithmetic type;
  • both operands are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible complete object types; or
  • the left operand is a pointer to a complete object type and the right operand has integer type.

(Decrementing is equivalent to subtracting 1.)

4

If either operand has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating type, complex type, or imaginary type.

Semantics

5

If both operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are performed on them.

6

The result of the binary + operator is the sum of the operands.

7

The result of the binary - operator is the difference resulting from the subtraction of the second operand from the first.

8

For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the type of the object as its element type.

9

When an expression that has integer type is added to or subtracted from a pointer, the result has the type of the pointer operand. If the pointer operand points to an element of an array object, and the array is large enough, the result points to an element offset from the original element such that the difference of the subscripts of the resulting and original array elements equals the integer expression. In other words, if the expression P points to the i-th element of an array object, the expressions (P)+N (equivalently, N+(P)) and (P)-N (where N has the value n) point to, respectively, the i+n-th and in-th elements of the array object, provided they exist. Moreover, if the expression P points to the last element of an array object, the expression (P)+1 points one past the last element of the array object, and if the expression Q points one past the last element of an array object, the expression (Q)-1 points to the last element of the array object. If the pointer operand and the result do not point to elements of the same array object or one past the last element of the array object, the behavior is undefined. If the addition or subtraction produces an overflow, the behavior is undefined. If the result points one past the last element of the array object, it shall not be used as the operand of a unary * operator that is evaluated.

10

When two pointers are subtracted, both shall point to elements of the same array object, or one past the last element of the array object; the result is the difference of the subscripts of the two array elements. The size of the result is implementation-defined, and its type (a signed integer type) is ptrdiff_t defined in the <stddef.h> header. If the result is not representable in an object of that type, the behavior is undefined. In other words, if the expressions P and Q point to, respectively, the i-th and j-th elements of an array object, the expression (P)-(Q) has the value ij provided the value fits in an object of type ptrdiff_t. Moreover, if the expression P points either to an element of an array object or one past the last element of an array object, and the expression Q points to the last element of the same array object, the expression ((Q)+1)-(P) has the same value as ((Q)-(P))+1 and as -((P)-((Q)+1)), and has the value zero if the expression P points one past the last element of the array object, even though the expression (Q)+1 does not point to an element of the array object.105)

11

EXAMPLE Pointer arithmetic is well defined with pointers to variable length array types.

{
      int n = 4, m = 3;
      int a[n][m];
      int (*p)[m] = a;  // p == &a[0]
      p += 1;           // p == &a[1]
      (*p)[2] = 99;     // a[1][2] == 99
      n = p - a;        // n == 1
}
12

If array a in the preceding example were declared to be an array of known constant size, and pointer p were declared to be a pointer to an array of the same known constant size (pointing to a), the results would be the same.

Forward references: array declarators (6.7.7.3), common definitions <stddef.h> (7.21).

6.5.8 Bitwise shift operators

Syntax

Constraints

2

Each of the operands shall have integer type.

Semantics

3

The integer promotions are performed on each of the operands. The type of the result is that of the promoted left operand. If the value of the right operand is negative or is greater than or equal to the width of the promoted left operand, the behavior is undefined.

4

The result of E1 << E2 is E1 left-shifted E2 bit positions; vacated bits are filled with zeros. If E1 has an unsigned type, the value of the result is E1 ×2E2, wrapped around. If E1 has a signed type and nonnegative value, and E1 ×2E2 is representable in the result type, then that is the resulting value; otherwise, the behavior is undefined.

5

The result of E1 >> E2 is E1 right-shifted E2 bit positions. If E1 has an unsigned type or if E1 has a signed type and a nonnegative value, the value of the result is the integral part of the quotient of E1/2E2. If E1 has a signed type and a negative value, the resulting value is implementation-defined.

6.5.9 Relational operators

Syntax

Constraints

2

One of the following shall hold:

3

If either operand has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating type.

Semantics

4

If both of the operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are performed. Positive zeros compare equal to negative zeros.

5

For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the type of the object as its element type.

6

When two pointers are compared, the result depends on the relative locations in the address space of the objects pointed to. If two pointers to object types both point to the same object, or both point one past the last element of the same array object, they compare equal. If the objects pointed to are members of the same aggregate object, pointers to structure members declared later compare greater than pointers to members declared earlier in the structure, and pointers to array elements with larger subscript values compare greater than pointers to elements of the same array with lower subscript values. All pointers to members of the same union object compare equal. If the expression P points to an element of an array object and the expression Q points to the last element of the same array object, the pointer expression Q+1 compares greater than P. In all other cases, the behavior is undefined.

7

Each of the operators < (less than), > (greater than), <= (less than or equal to), and >= (greater than or equal to) shall yield 1 if the specified relation is true and 0 if it is false.106) The result has type int.

6.5.10 Equality operators

Syntax

Constraints

2

One of the following shall hold:

  • both operands have arithmetic type;
  • both operands are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible types;
  • one operand is a pointer to an object type and the other is a pointer to a qualified or unqualified version of void;
  • both operands have type nullptr_t;
  • one operand has type nullptr_t and the other is a null pointer constant; or,
  • one operand is a pointer and the other is a null pointer constant or has type nullptr_t.
3

If either operand has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating type, complex type, or imaginary type.

Semantics

4

The == (equal to) and != (not equal to) operators are analogous to the relational operators except for their lower precedence.107) Each of the operators yields 1 if the specified relation is true and 0 if it is false. The result has type int. For any pair of operands, exactly one of the relations is true.

5

If both of the operands have arithmetic type, the usual arithmetic conversions are performed. Positive zeros compare equal to negative zeros. Values of complex types are equal if and only if both their real parts are equal and also their imaginary parts are equal. Any two values of arithmetic types from different type domains are equal if and only if the results of their conversions to the (complex) result type determined by the usual arithmetic conversions are equal. If both operands have type nullptr_t or one operand has type nullptr_t and the other is a null pointer constant, they compare equal.

6

Otherwise, at least one operand is a pointer. If one operand is a pointer and the other is a null pointer constant or has type nullptr_t, they compare equal if the former is a null pointer. If one operand is a pointer to an object type and the other is a pointer to a qualified or unqualified version of void, the former is converted to the type of the latter.

7

Two pointers compare equal if and only if both are null pointers, both are pointers to the same object (including a pointer to an object and a subobject at its beginning) or function, both are pointers to one past the last element of the same array object, or one is a pointer to one past the end of one array object and the other is a pointer to the start of a different array object that happens to immediately follow the first array object in the address space.108)

8

For the purposes of these operators, a pointer to an object that is not an element of an array behaves the same as a pointer to the first element of an array of length one with the type of the object as its element type.

6.5.11 Bitwise AND operator

Syntax

Constraints

2

Each of the operands shall have integer type.

Semantics

3

The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.

4

The result of the binary & operator is the bitwise AND of the operands (that is, each bit in the result is set if and only if each of the corresponding bits in the converted operands is set).

6.5.12 Bitwise exclusive OR operator

Syntax

Constraints

2

Each of the operands shall have integer type.

Semantics

3

The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.

4

The result of the ^ operator is the bitwise exclusive OR of the operands (that is, each bit in the result is set if and only if exactly one of the corresponding bits in the converted operands is set).

6.5.13 Bitwise inclusive OR operator

Syntax

Constraints

2

Each of the operands shall have integer type.

Semantics

3

The usual arithmetic conversions are performed on the operands.

4

The result of the | operator is the bitwise inclusive OR of the operands (that is, each bit in the result is set if and only if at least one of the corresponding bits in the converted operands is set).

6.5.14 Logical AND operator

Syntax

Constraints

2

Each of the operands shall have scalar type.

Semantics

3

The && operator shall yield 1 if both of its operands compare unequal to 0; otherwise, it yields 0. The result has type int.

4

Unlike the bitwise binary & operator, the && operator guarantees left-to-right evaluation; if the second operand is evaluated, there is a sequence point between the evaluations of the first and second operands. If the first operand compares equal to 0, the second operand is not evaluated.

6.5.15 Logical OR operator

Syntax

Constraints

2

Each of the operands shall have scalar type.

Semantics

3

The || operator shall yield 1 if either of its operands compare unequal to 0; otherwise, it yields 0. The result has type int.

4

Unlike the bitwise | operator, the || operator guarantees left-to-right evaluation; if the second operand is evaluated, there is a sequence point between the evaluations of the first and second operands. If the first operand compares unequal to 0, the second operand is not evaluated.

6.5.16 Conditional operator

Syntax

Constraints

2

The first operand shall have scalar type.

3

One of the following shall hold for the second and third operands:109)

  • both operands have arithmetic type;
  • both operands have compatible structure or union type;
  • both operands have void type;
  • both operands are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible types;
  • both operands have nullptr_t type;
  • one operand is a pointer and the other is a null pointer constant or has type nullptr_t; or
  • one operand is a pointer to an object type and the other is a pointer to a qualified or unqualified version of void.
4

If either of the second or third operands has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating type, complex type, or imaginary type.

Semantics

5

The first operand is evaluated; there is a sequence point between its evaluation and the evaluation of the second or third operand (whichever is evaluated). The second operand is evaluated only if the first compares unequal to 0; the third operand is evaluated only if the first compares equal to 0; the result is the value of the second or third operand (whichever is evaluated), converted to the type described subsequently in this subclause.110)

6

If the second and third operands have arithmetic type, the result type is the same as if the usual arithmetic conversions were applied to both operands. If both the operands have structure or union type, the result is the composite type. If both operands have void type, the result has void type.

7

If both the second and third operands are pointers, the result type is a pointer to a type qualified with all the type qualifiers of the types referenced by both operands; if one is a null pointer constant (other than a pointer) or has type nullptr_t and the other is a pointer, the result type is the pointer type; if both the second and third operands have nullptr_t type, the result also has that type. Furthermore, if both operands are pointers to compatible types or to differently qualified versions of compatible types, the result type is a pointer to an appropriately qualified version of the composite type; if one operand is a null pointer constant, the result has the type of the other operand; otherwise, one operand is a pointer to void or a qualified version of void, in which case the result type is a pointer to an appropriately qualified version of void.

8

If one operand is a pointer to a variably modified type and the other operand is a null pointer constant or has type nullptr_t, the behavior is undefined if the type depends on an array size expression that is not evaluated.

9

EXAMPLE The common type that results when the second and third operands are pointers is determined in two independent stages. The appropriate qualifiers, for example, do not depend on whether the two pointers have compatible types.

10

Given the declarations

const void *c_vp;
void *vp;
const int *c_ip;
volatile int *v_ip;
int *ip;
const char *c_cp;

c_vp c_ip const void * v_ip 0 volatile int * c_ip v_ip const volatile int * vp c_cp const void * ip c_ip const int * vp ip void *

6.5.17 Assignment operators

6.5.17.1 General

Constraints
2

An assignment operator shall have a modifiable lvalue as its left operand.

Semantics
3

An assignment operator stores a value in the object designated by the left operand. An assignment expression has the value of the left operand after the assignment,111) but is not an lvalue. The type of an assignment expression is the type the left operand would have after lvalue conversion. The side effect of updating the stored value of the left operand is sequenced after the value computations of the left and right operands. The evaluations of the operands are unsequenced.

6.5.17.2 Simple assignment

1

One of the following shall hold:112)

  • the left operand has atomic, qualified, or unqualified arithmetic type, and the right operand has arithmetic type;
  • the left operand has an atomic, qualified, or unqualified version of a structure or union type compatible with the type of the right operand;
  • the left operand has atomic, qualified, or unqualified pointer type, and (considering the type the left operand would have after lvalue conversion) both operands are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible types, and the type pointed to by the left operand has all the qualifiers of the type pointed to by the right operand;

Semantics

2

In simple assignment (=), the value of the right operand is converted to the type of the assignment expression and replaces the value stored in the object designated by the left operand.113)

3

If the value being stored in an object is read from another object that overlaps in any way the storage of the first object, then the two objects shall occupy exactly the same storage and shall have qualified or unqualified versions of a compatible type; otherwise, the behavior is undefined.

4

EXAMPLE 1 In the program fragment

int f(void);
char c;
/* ... */
if ((c = f()) == -1)
      /* ... */

the int value returned by the function could be truncated when stored in the char, and then converted back to int width prior to the comparison. In an implementation in which "plain" char has the same range of values as unsigned char (and char is narrower than int), the result of the conversion cannot be negative, so the operands of the comparison can never compare equal. Therefore, for full portability, the variable c would be declared as int.

5

EXAMPLE 2 In the fragment:

char c;
int i;
long l;
l = (c = i);

the value of i is converted to the type of the assignment expression c = i, that is, char type. The value of the expression enclosed in parentheses is then converted to the type of the outer assignment expression, that is, long int type.

6

EXAMPLE 3 The following fragment can be used as an example:

const char **cpp;
char *p;
const char c = ’A’;
cpp = &p;       // constraint violation
*cpp = &c;      // valid
*p = 0;         // valid

The first assignment is unsafe because it would allow the following valid code to attempt to change the value of the const object c.

1

6.5.17.3 Compound assignment Constraints For the operators += and -= only, either the left operand shall be an atomic, qualified, or unqualified pointer to a complete object type, and the right shall have integer type; or the left operand shall have atomic, qualified, or unqualified arithmetic type, and the right shall have arithmetic type.

2

For the other operators, the left operand shall have atomic, qualified, or unqualified arithmetic type, and (considering the type the left operand would have after lvalue conversion) each operand shall have arithmetic type consistent with those allowed by the corresponding binary operator.

3

If either operand has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating type, complex type, or imaginary type.

4

Semantics A compound assignment of the form E1 op= E2 is equivalent to the simple assignment expression E1 =

E1 op (E2), except that the lvalue E1 is evaluated only once, and with respect to an indeterminately sequenced function call, the operation of a compound assignment is a single evaluation. If E1 has an atomic type, compound assignment is a read-modify-write operation with memory_order_seq_cst memory order semantics.

5

NOTE Where a pointer to an atomic object can be formed and E1 and E2 have integer type, this is equivalent to the following code sequence where T1 is the type of E1 and T2 is the type of E2:

T1 *addr = &E1;
T2 val = (E2);
T1 old = *addr;
T1 new;
do {
      new = old op val;
} while (!atomic_compare_exchange_strong(addr, &old, new));

with new being the result of the operation.

If E1 or E2 has floating type, then exceptional conditions or floating-point exceptions encountered during discarded evaluations of new would also be discarded to satisfy the equivalence of E1 op= E2 and E1 = E1 op (E2). For example, if Annex F is in effect, the floating types involved have ISO/IEC 60559 binary formats, and FLT_EVAL_METHOD is 0, the equivalent code would be:

#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
/* ... */
      fenv_t fenv;
      T1 *addr = &E1;
      T2 val = E2;
      T1 old = *addr;
      T1 new;
      feholdexcept(&fenv);
      for (;;) {
            new = old op val;
            if (atomic_compare_exchange_strong(addr, &old, new))
                        break;
            feclearexcept(FE_ALL_EXCEPT);
      }
      feupdateenv(&fenv);

If FLT_EVAL_METHOD is not 0, then T2 is expected to be a type with the range and precision to which E2 is evaluated to satisfy the equivalence.

6.5.18 Comma operator

Syntax

Semantics

2

The left operand of a comma operator is evaluated as a void expression; there is a sequence point between its evaluation and that of the right operand. Then the right operand is evaluated; the result has its type and value.114)

3

EXAMPLE As indicated by the syntax, the comma operator (as described in this subclause) cannot appear in contexts where a comma is used to separate items in a list (such as arguments to functions or lists of initializers). On the other hand, it can be used within a parenthesized expression or within the second expression of a conditional operator in such contexts. In the function call

f(a, (t=3, t+2), c)

the function has three arguments, the second of which has the value 5.

Forward references: initialization (6.7.11).

6.6 Constant expressions

Syntax

Description

2

A constant expression can be evaluated during translation rather than runtime, and accordingly may be used in any place that a constant may be.

Constraints

3

Constant expressions shall not contain assignment, increment, decrement, function-call, or comma operators, except when they are contained within a subexpression that is not evaluated.115)

4

Each constant expression shall evaluate to a constant that is in the range of representable values for its type.

Semantics

5

An expression that evaluates to a constant is required in several contexts. If a floating expression is evaluated in the translation environment, the arithmetic range and precision shall be at least as great as if the expression were being evaluated in the execution environment.116)

6

A compound literal with storage-class specifier constexpr is a compound literal constant, as is a postfix expression that applies the . member access operator to a compound literal constant of structure or union type, even recursively. A compound literal constant is a constant expression with the type and value of the unnamed object.

7

An identifier that is:

  • an enumeration constant,
  • a predefined constant, or
  • declared with storage-class specifier constexpr and has an object type,

is a named constant, as is a postfix expression that applies the . member access operator to a named constant of structure or union type, even recursively. For enumeration and predefined constants, their value and type are defined in the respective clauses; for constexpr objects, such a named constant is a constant expression with the type and value of the declared object.

8

An integer constant expression117) shall have integer type and shall only have operands that are integer constants, named and compound literal constants of integer type, character constants, sizeof expressions whose results are integer constants, alignof expressions, and floating, named, or compound literal constants of arithmetic type that are the immediate operands of casts. Cast operators in an integer constant expression shall only convert arithmetic types to integer types, except as part of an operand to the typeof operators, sizeof operator, or alignof operator.

9

More latitude is permitted for constant expressions in initializers. Such a constant expression shall be, or evaluate to, one of the following:

  • a named constant,
  • a compound literal constant,
10

An arithmetic constant expression shall have arithmetic type and shall only have operands that are integer constants, floating constants, named or compound literal constants of arithmetic type, character constants, sizeof expressions whose results are integer constants, and alignof expressions. Cast operators in an arithmetic constant expression shall only convert arithmetic types to arithmetic types, except as part of an operand to the typeof operators, sizeof operator, or alignof operator.

11

An address constant is a null pointer,118) a pointer to an lvalue designating an object of static storage duration, or a pointer to a function designator; it shall be created explicitly using the unary & operator or an integer constant cast to pointer type, or implicitly using an expression of array or function type.

12

The array-subscript [] and member-access -> operator, the address & and indirection * unary operators, and pointer casts may be used in the creation of an address constant, but the value of an object shall not be accessed by use of these operators.119)

13

A structure or union constant is a named constant or compound literal constant with structure or union type, respectively.

14

An implementation may accept other forms of constant expressions; however, it is implementationdefined whether they are an integer constant expression.120)

15

Starting from a structure or union constant, the member-access . operator may be used to form a named constant or compound literal constant as described previously in this subclause.

16

If the member-access operator . accesses a member of a union constant, the accessed member shall be the same as the member that is initialized by the union constant’s initializer.

17

The semantic rules for the evaluation of a constant expression are the same as for nonconstant expressions.121)

Forward references: array declarators (6.7.7.3), initialization (6.7.11).

6.7 Declarations

6.7.1 General

Syntax

Constraints

2

If a declaration other than a static_assert or attribute declaration does not include an init declarator list, its declaration specifiers shall include one of the following:

  • a struct or union specifier or enum specifier that includes a tag, with the declaration being of a form specified in 6.7.3.4 to declare that tag;
  • an enum specifier that includes an enumerator list.
3

EXAMPLE 1 The following are invalid, because the declared tag or enumeration constants are in a nested construct, rather than a declaration specifier of the declaration being of one of the given forms:

struct { struct s2 { int x2a; } x2b; };
typeof (struct s3 { int x3; });
alignas (struct s4 { int x4; }) int;
typeof (struct s5 *);
typeof (enum { E6 });
struct { void (*p)(struct s7 *); };
4

If an identifier has no linkage, there shall be no more than one declaration of the identifier (in a declarator or type specifier) with the same scope and in the same name space, except that:

  • a typedef name may be redefined to denote the same type as it currently does, provided that type is not a variably modified type;
  • enumeration constants and tags may be redeclared as specified in 6.7.3.3 and 6.7.3.4, respectively.
5

All declarations in the same scope that refer to the same object or function shall specify compatible types.

Semantics

6

A declaration specifies the interpretation and properties of a set of identifiers. A definition of an identifier is a declaration for that identifier that for:

  • an object, causes storage to be reserved for that object,
  • a function, includes the function body,122)
  • an enumeration constant, is the first (or only) declaration of the identifier, or
  • a typedef name, is the first (or only) declaration of the identifier.
7

The declaration specifiers consist of a sequence of specifiers, followed by an optional attribute specifier sequence. The declaration specifiers indicate the linkage, storage duration, and part of the type of the entities that the declarators denote. The init declarator list is a comma-separated sequence of declarators, each of which may have additional type information, or an initializer, or both. The declarators contain the identifiers (if any) being declared. The optional attribute specifier sequence in a declaration appertains to each of the entities declared by the declarators of the init declarator list.

8

If an identifier for an object is declared with no linkage, the type for the object shall be complete by the end of its declarator, or by the end of its init-declarator if it has an initializer. In the case of function parameters, it is the adjusted type (see 6.7.7.4) that is required to be complete.

9

The optional attribute specifier sequence terminating a sequence of declaration specifiers appertains to the type determined by the preceding sequence of declaration specifiers. The attribute specifier sequence affects the type only for the declaration it appears in, not other declarations involving the same type.

10

Except where specified otherwise, the meaning of an attribute declaration is implementation-defined.

11

EXAMPLE 2 In the declaration for an entity, attributes appertaining to that entity may appear at the start of the declaration and after the identifier for that declaration.

[[deprecated]] void f [[deprecated]] (void); // valid
12

A declaration such that the declaration specifiers contain no type specifier or that is declared with constexpr is said to be underspecified. If such a declaration is not a definition, if it declares no or more than one ordinary identifier, if the declared identifier already has a declaration in the same scope, if the declared entity is not an object, or if anywhere within the sequence of tokens making up the declaration identifiers that are not ordinary are declared, the behavior is implementation-defined.123)

13

EXAMPLE 3 As declarations using constexpr are underspecified, the following has implementation-defined behavior because tokens within the declaration declare s which is not an ordinary identifier:

constexpr typeof(struct s *) x = 0;

Forward references: declarators (6.7.7), enumeration specifiers (6.7.3.3), initialization (6.7.11), storage-class specifiers (6.7.2), type inference (6.7.10), type names (6.7.8), type qualifiers (6.7.4).

6.7.2 Storage-class specifiers

Syntax

1
storage-class-specifier:
auto
constexpr
extern
register
static
thread_local
typedef

Constraints

2

At most, one storage-class specifier may be given in the declaration specifiers in a declaration, except that:

  • thread_local may appear with static or extern,
  • auto may appear with all the others except typedef,124) and
  • constexpr may appear with auto, register, or static.
3

In the declaration of an object with block scope, if the declaration specifiers include thread_local, they shall also include either static or extern. If thread_local appears in any declaration of an object, it shall be present in every declaration of that object.

4

thread_local shall not appear in the declaration specifiers of a function declaration. auto shall only appear in the declaration specifiers of an identifier with file scope or along with other storage-class specifiers if the type is to be inferred from an initializer.

5

An object declared with storage-class specifier constexpr or any of its members, even recursively, shall not have an atomic type, or a variably modified type, or a type that is volatile or restrict qualified. An initializer of floating type shall be evaluated with the translation-time floating-point environment. The declaration shall be a definition and shall have an initializer.125) The value of any constant expressions or of any character in a string literal of the initializer shall be exactly representable in the corresponding target type; no change of value shall be applied.126)

6

If an object or subobject declared with storage-class specifier constexpr has pointer, integer, or arithmetic type, any explicit initializer value for it shall be null,127) an integer constant expression, or an arithmetic constant expression, respectively. If the object declared has real floating type, the initializer shall have integer or real floating type. If the object declared has imaginary type, the initializer shall have imaginary type. If the initializer has decimal floating type, the object declared shall have decimal floating type and the conversion shall preserve the quantum of the initializer. If the initializer has real type and a signaling NaN value, the unqualified versions of the type of the initializer and the corresponding real type of the object declared shall be compatible.

7

EXAMPLE 1 Although in the following the expression A.p is not a null pointer constant, only a constant expression with pointer type and a null pointer value, the member-wise initialization of B with A is valid.

struct s { void *p; };
constexpr struct s A = { nullptr };
constexpr struct s B = A;
8

EXAMPLE 2 Pointers may be initialized to eligible constant expressions, such as a null pointer constant:

constexpr int *p = {}; // Default initialization with a null pointer
9

EXAMPLE 3

void f (void) {
      constexpr float f = 1.0f;
      constexpr float g = 3.0f;
      fesetround(FE_TOWARDSZERO); // does not affect
                                  // the following initialization
                                  // of "h"
      constexpr float h = f / g;
      // ...
}

Semantics

10

Storage-class specifiers specify various properties of identifiers and declared features:

  • storage duration (static in block scope, thread_local, auto, register),
  • linkage (extern, static and constexpr in file scope, typedef),
  • value (constexpr), and
  • type (typedef).
11

The meanings of the various linkages and storage durations were discussed in 6.2.2 and 6.2.4, typedef is discussed in 6.7.9, and type inference using auto is discussed in 6.7.10.

12

A declaration of an identifier for an object with storage-class specifier register suggests that access to the object be as fast as possible. The extent to which such suggestions are effective is implementation-defined.128)

13

The declaration of an identifier for a function that has block scope shall have no explicit storage-class specifier other than extern.

14

If an aggregate or union object is declared with a storage-class specifier other than typedef, the properties resulting from the storage-class specifier, except with respect to linkage, also apply to the members of the object, including recursively for any aggregate or union member objects.

15

If auto appears with another storage-class specifier, or if it appears in a declaration at file scope, it is ignored for the purposes of determining a storage duration or linkage. In this case, it indicates only that the declared type may be inferred.

16

An object declared with a storage-class specifier constexpr has its value permanently fixed at translation-time; if not yet present, a const-qualification is implicitly added to the object’s type. The declared identifier is considered a constant expression of the respective kind, see 6.6.

17

NOTE 1 An object declared in block scope with a storage-class specifier constexpr and without static has automatic storage duration, the identifier has no linkage, and each instance of the object has a unique address obtainable with & (if it is not declared with the register specifier), if any. Such an object in file scope has static storage duration, the corresponding identifier has internal linkage, and each translation unit that sees the same textual definition implements a separate object with a distinct address.

18

NOTE 2 The constraints for constexpr objects are intended to enforce checks for portability at translation time.

constexpr unsigned int minusOne = -1;      // constraint violation
constexpr unsigned int uint_max = -1U;     // ok
constexpr double onethird       = 1.0/3.0; // possible constraint violation
constexpr double onethirdtrunc  = (double)(1.0/3.0);  // ok
constexpr _Decimal32 small      = DEC64_TRUE_MIN * 0; // constraint violation

If a truncation of excess precision changes the value in the initializer of onethird, a constraint is violated and a diagnostic is required. In contrast to that, the explicit conversion in the initializer for onethirdtrunc ensures that the definition is valid. Similarly, the initializer of small has a quantum exponent that is larger than the largest possible quantum exponent for _Decimal32.

19

NOTE 3 Similarly, implementation-defined behavior related to the char type of the elements of the string literal "\xFF" may cause constraint violations at translation time:

constexpr char string[]            = {   "\xFF", }; // ok
constexpr char8_t u8string[]       = { u8"\xFF", }; // ok
constexpr unsigned char ucstring[] = {   "\xFF", }; // possible constraint
                                                              // violation
In both the string and ucstring initializers, the initializer is a (brace-enclosed) string literal of type char. If the type char is capable of representing negative values and its width is 8, then the preceding code is equivalent to:
constexpr char string[]            = {  -1, 0, }; // ok
constexpr char8_t u8string[]       = { 255, 0, }; // ok
constexpr unsigned char ucstring[] = {  -1, 0, }; // constraint violation
The hexadecimal escape sequence results in a value of 255. For an initializer of type char, it is converted to a signed 8-bit integer, making a value of -1. A negative value does not fit within the range of values for unsigned char, and therefore the initialization of ucstring is a constraint violation under the previously stated implementation conditions. In the case where char is not capable of representing negative values, the original snippet is equivalent to the following and there is no constraint violation.
constexpr char string[]            = { 255, 0, }; // ok
constexpr char8_t u8string[]       = { 255, 0, }; // ok
constexpr unsigned char ucstring[] = { 255, 0, }; // ok
20

EXAMPLE 4 An identifier declared with the constexpr specifier may have its value used in constant expressions:

constexpr int K = 47;
enum {
      A = K,              // valid, constant initialization
};
constexpr int L = K;     // valid, constexpr initialization
static int b    = K + 1; // valid, static initialization
int array[K];            // not a VLA
21

EXAMPLE 5 This example illustrates constexpr initializations involving different type domains, decimal and non-decimal floating types, NaNs and infinities, and quanta in decimal floating types.

#include <float.h>
#include <complex.h>
constexpr float _Complex fc1 = 1.0; // ok
constexpr float _Complex fc2 = 0.1; // constraint violation, unless double
                                    // has the same precision as float
                                    // and is evaluated with the same
                                    // precision
constexpr float _Complex fc3 = 3*I; // ok
constexpr double d1 = (double _Complex)1.0; // constraint violation
constexpr float f1 = (long double)INFINITY; // ok
constexpr float f2 = (long double)NAN;      // ok, quiet NaNs in real floating
                                            // types are considered the same
                                            // value, regardless of payloads
constexpr double d2 = DBL_SNAN; // ok
constexpr double d3 = FLT_SNAN; // constraint violation, even if float
                                // and double have the same format
constexpr double _Complex dc1 = DBL_SNAN;            // ok
constexpr double _Complex dc2 = CMPLX(DBL_SNAN, 0.); // ok
constexpr double _Complex dc3 = CMPLX(0., DBL_SNAN); // ok
constexpr _Decimal32 d321 = 1.0;        // ok
constexpr _Decimal32 d322 = 1;          // ok
constexpr _Decimal32 d323 = INFINITY;   // ok
constexpr _Decimal32 d324 = NAN;        // ok
constexpr _Decimal64 d641 = DEC64_SNAN; // ok
constexpr _Decimal64 d642 = DEC32_SNAN; // constraint violation
constexpr float f3 = 1.DF;              // constraint violation
constexpr float f4 = DEC_INFINITY;      // constraint violation
constexpr double d4 = DEC_NAN;          // constraint violation
constexpr _Decimal32 d325 = DEC64_TRUE_MIN * 0; // constraint violation,
                                                 // quantum not preserved
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__
constexpr double d5 = (double _Imaginary)0.0; // constraint violation
constexpr double d6 = (double _Imaginary)0.0; // constraint violation
constexpr double _Imaginary di1 = 0.0*I;      // ok
constexpr double _Imaginary di2 = 0.0;        // constraint violation
#endif
22

EXAMPLE 6 An object declared with the constexpr specifier stores the exact value of its initializer, no implicit value change is applied:

#include <float.h>
constexpr int A          = 42LL;           // valid, 42 always fits in an int
constexpr signed short B = ULLONG_MAX;     // constraint violation, value never
                                           // fits
constexpr float C        = 47u;            // valid, exactly representable
                                           // in float
#if FLT_MANT_DIG > 24
constexpr float D = 536900000;             // constraint violation if float is
                                           // ISO/IEC 60559 binary32
#endif
#if (FLT_MANT_DIG == DBL_MANT_DIG) \
      && (0 <= FLT_EVAL_METHOD) \
      && (FLT_EVAL_METHOD <= 1)
constexpr float E = 1.0 / 3.0;             // only valid if double expressions
                                           // and float objects have the same
                                           // precision
#endif
#if FLT_EVAL_METHOD == 0
constexpr float F = 1.0f / 3.0f;           // valid, same type and precision
#else
constexpr float F = (float)(1.0f / 3.0f);  // needs cast to truncate the
                                           // excess precision
#endif
23

EXAMPLE 7 This recursively applies to initializers for all elements of an aggregate object declared with the constexpr specifier:

constexpr static unsigned short array[] = {
      3000,    // valid, fits in unsigned short range
      300000,  // constraint violation if short is 16-bit
      -1       // constraint violation, target type is unsigned
};
struct S {
      int x, y;
};
constexpr struct S s = {
      .x = INT_MAX,         // valid
      .y = UINT_MAX,        // constraint violation
};
Forward references: type definitions (6.7.9), type inference (6.7.10).

6.7.3 Type specifiers

6.7.3.1 General

1
type-specifier:
void
char
short
int
long
float
double
signed
unsigned
_BitInt ( constant-expression )
bool
_Complex
_Decimal32
_Decimal64
_Decimal128
atomic-type-specifier
struct-or-union-specifier
enum-specifier
typedef-name
typeof-specifier
Constraints
2

Except where the type is inferred (6.7.10), at least one type specifier shall be given in the declaration specifiers in each declaration, and in the specifier-qualifier list in each member declaration and type name. Each list of type specifiers shall be one of the following multisets (delimited by commas, when there is more than one multiset per item); the type specifiers may occur in any order, possibly intermixed with the other declaration specifiers.

  • void
  • char
  • signed char
  • unsigned char
  • short, signed short, short int, or signed short int
  • unsigned short, or unsigned short int
  • int, signed, or signed int
  • unsigned, or unsigned int
3

The type specifier _Complex shall not be used if the implementation does not support complex types, and the type specifiers _Decimal32, _Decimal64, and _Decimal128 shall not be used if the implementation does not support decimal floating types (see 6.10.10.4).

4

The parenthesized constant expression that follows the _BitInt keyword shall be an integer constant expression N that specifies the width (6.2.6.2) of the type. The value of N for unsigned _BitInt shall be greater than or equal to 1. The value of N for _BitInt shall be greater than or equal to 2. The value of N shall be less than or equal to the value of BITINT_MAXWIDTH (see 5.2.5.3.2).

Semantics

5

Specifiers for structures, unions, enumerations, atomic types, and typeof specifiers are discussed in 6.7.3.2 through 6.7.3.6. Declarations of typedef names are discussed in 6.7.9. The characteristics of the other types are discussed in 6.2.5.

6

For a declaration such that the declaration specifiers contain no type specifier a mechanism to infer the type from an initializer is discussed in 6.7.10. In such a declaration, optional elements, if any, of a sequence of declaration specifiers appertain to the inferred type (for qualifiers and attribute specifiers) or to the declared objects (for alignment specifiers).

7

Each of the comma-separated multisets designates the same type, except that for bit-fields, it is implementation-defined whether the specifier int designates the same type as signed int or the same type as unsigned int.

Forward references: atomic type specifiers (6.7.3.5), enumeration specifiers (6.7.3.3), structure and union specifiers (6.7.3.2), tags (6.7.3.4), type definitions (6.7.9).

6.7.3.2 Structure and union specifiers

Constraints

2

A member declaration that does not declare an anonymous structure or anonymous union shall contain a member declarator list.

3

A structure or union shall not contain a member with incomplete or function type (hence, a structure shall not contain an instance of itself, but may contain a pointer to an instance of itself), except that the last member of a structure with more than one named member may have incomplete array type; such a structure (and any union containing, possibly recursively, a member that is such a structure) shall not be a member of a structure or an element of an array.

4

The expression that specifies the width of a bit-field shall be an integer constant expression with a nonnegative value that does not exceed the width of an object of the type that would be specified were the colon and expression omitted.129) If the value is zero, the declaration shall have no declarator.

5

A bit-field shall have a type that is a qualified or unqualified bool, signed int, unsigned int, a bit-precise integer type, or other implementation-defined type. It is implementation-defined whether atomic types are permitted.

6

An attribute specifier sequence shall not appear in a struct-or-union specifier without a member

The attributes in the attribute specifier sequence, if any, are thereafter considered attributes of the struct or union whenever it is named.

Semantics

7

As discussed in 6.2.5, a structure is a type consisting of a sequence of members, whose storage is allocated in an ordered sequence, and a union is a type consisting of a sequence of members whose storage overlap.

8

Structure and union specifiers have the same form. The keywords struct and union indicate that the type being specified is, respectively, a structure type or a union type.

9

The optional attribute specifier sequence in a struct-or-union specifier appertains to the structure or union type being declared. The optional attribute specifier sequence in a member declaration appertains to each of the members declared by the member declarator list; it shall not appear if the optional member declarator list is omitted. The optional attribute specifier sequence in a specifier qualifier list appertains to the type denoted by the preceding type specifier qualifiers. The attribute specifier sequence affects the type only for the member declaration or type name it appears in, not other types or declarations involving the same type.

10

The member declaration list is a sequence of declarations for the members of the structure or union. If the member declaration list does not contain any named members, either directly or via an anonymous structure or anonymous union, the behavior is undefined.130)

11

A member of a structure or union may have any complete object type other than a variably modified type.131) In addition, a member may be declared to consist of a specified number of bits (including a sign bit, if any). Such a member is called a bit-field;132) its width is preceded by a colon.

12

A bit-field is interpreted as having a signed or unsigned integer type consisting of the specified number of bits.133) If the value 0 or 1 is stored into a nonzero-width bit-field of type bool, the value of the bit-field shall compare equal to the value stored; a bool bit-field has the semantics of a bool.

13

An implementation may allocate any addressable storage unit large enough to hold a bit-field. If enough space remains, a bit-field that immediately follows another bit-field in a structure shall be packed into adjacent bits of the same unit. If insufficient space remains, whether a bit-field that does not fit is put into the next unit or overlaps adjacent units is implementation-defined. The order of allocation of bit-fields within a unit (high-order to low-order or low-order to high-order) is implementation-defined. The alignment of the addressable storage unit is unspecified.

14

A bit-field declaration with no declarator, but only a colon and a width, indicates an unnamed bit-field.134) As a special case, a bit-field structure member with a width of zero indicates that no further bit-field is to be packed into the unit in which the previous bit-field, if any, was placed.

15

An unnamed member whose type specifier is a structure specifier with no tag is called an anonymous structure; an unnamed member whose type specifier is a union specifier with no tag is called an anonymous union. The members of an anonymous structure or union are members of the containing structure or union, keeping their structure or union layout. This applies recursively if the containing structure or union is also anonymous.

16

Each non-bit-field member of a structure or union object is aligned in an implementation-defined manner appropriate to its type.

17

Within a structure object, the non-bit-field members and the units in which bit-fields reside have addresses that increase in the order in which they are declared. A pointer to a structure object, suitably converted, points to its initial member (or if that member is a bit-field, then to the unit in which it resides), and vice versa. There may be unnamed padding within a structure object, but not at its beginning.

18

The size of a union is sufficient to contain the largest of its members. The value of at most one of the members can be stored in a union object at any time. A pointer to a union object, suitably converted, points to each of its members (or if a member is a bit-field, then to the unit in which it resides), and vice versa. The members of a union object overlap in such a way that pointers to them when converted to pointers to character type point to the same byte. There may be unnamed padding at the end of a union object, but not at its beginning.

19

There may be unnamed padding at the end of a structure or union.

20

As a special case, the last member of a structure with more than one named member may have an incomplete array type; this is called a flexible array member. In most situations, the flexible array member is ignored. In particular, the size of the structure is as if the flexible array member were omitted except that it may have more trailing padding than the omission would imply. However, when a . (or ->) operator has a left operand that is (a pointer to) a structure with a flexible array member and the right operand names that member, it behaves as if that member were replaced with the longest array (with the same element type) that would not make the structure larger than the object being accessed; the offset of the array shall remain that of the flexible array member, even if this would differ from that of the replacement array. If this array would have no elements, it behaves as if it had one element but the behavior is undefined if any attempt is made to access that element or to generate a pointer one past it.

21

EXAMPLE 1 The following declarations illustrate the behavior when an attribute is written on a tag declaration:

struct [[deprecated]] S; // valid, [[deprecated]] appertains to struct S
void f(struct S *s);     // valid, the struct S type has the [[deprecated]]
                         // attribute
struct S {               // valid, struct S inherits the [[deprecated]] attribute
      int a;              // from the previous declaration
};
void g(struct [[deprecated]] S s); // invalid
22

EXAMPLE 2 The following illustrates anonymous structures and unions:

struct v {
      union {     // anonymous union
            struct { int i, j; };   // anonymous structure
            struct { long k, l; } w;
      };
      int m;
} v1;
v1.i = 2;   // valid
v1.k = 3;   // invalid:  inner structure is not anonymous
v1.w.k = 5; // valid
23

EXAMPLE 3 After the declaration:

struct s { int n; double d[]; };
the structure struct s has a flexible array member d. A typical way to use this is:
int m = /* some value */;
struct s *p = malloc(sizeof(struct s) + sizeof(double [m]));

and assuming that the call to malloc succeeds, the object pointed to by p behaves, for most purposes, as if p had been declared as:

struct { int n; double d[m]; } *p;

(there are circumstances in which this equivalence is broken; in particular, the offsets of member d may not be the same).

24

Following the declaration of the previous example:

struct s t1 = { 0 };          // valid
struct s t2 = { 1, { 4.2 }};  // invalid
t1.n = 4;                     // valid
t1.d[0] = 4.2;                // may be undefined behavior
The initialization of t2 is invalid (and violates a constraint) because struct s is treated as if it did not contain member d. The assignment to t1.d[0] is probably undefined behavior, but it is possible that
sizeof(struct s) >= offsetof(struct s, d) + sizeof(double)

in which case the assignment would be legitimate. Nevertheless, it cannot appear in strictly conforming code.

25

After the further declaration:

struct ss { int n; };
the expressions:
sizeof(struct s) >= sizeof(struct ss)
sizeof(struct s) >= offsetof(struct s, d)

are always equal to 1.

26

If sizeof(double) is 8, then after the following code is executed:

struct s *s1;
struct s *s2;
s1 = malloc(sizeof(struct s) + 64);
s2 = malloc(sizeof(struct s) + 46);
and assuming that the calls to malloc succeed, the objects pointed to by s1 and s2 behave, for most purposes, as if the identifiers had been declared as:
struct { int n; double d[8]; } *s1;
struct { int n; double d[5]; } *s2;
27

Following the further successful assignments:

s1 = malloc(sizeof(struct s) + 10);
s2 = malloc(sizeof(struct s) +  6);
they then behave as if the declarations were:
struct { int n; double d[1]; } *s1, *s2;
and:
double *dp;
dp = &(s1->d[0]); // valid
*dp = 42;         // valid
dp = &(s2->d[0]); // valid
*dp = 42;         // undefined behavior
28

The assignment:

*s1 = *s2;

only copies the member n; if any of the array elements are within the first sizeof(struct s) bytes of the structure, they are set to an indeterminate representation, that may or may not coincide with a copy of the representation of the elements of the source array.

29

EXAMPLE 4 Because members of anonymous structures and unions are considered to be members of the containing structure or union, struct s in the following example has more than one named member and thus the use of a flexible array member is valid:

struct s {
      struct { int i; };
      int a[];
};
Forward references: declarators (6.7.7), tags (6.7.3.4).

6.7.3.3 Enumeration specifiers

2

All enumerations have an underlying type. The underlying type can be explicitly specified using an enum type specifier and is its fixed underlying type. If it is not explicitly specified, the underlying type is the enumeration’s compatible type, which is either char or a standard or extended signed or unsigned integer type.

Constraints
3

For an enumeration with a fixed underlying type, the integer constant expression defining the value of the enumeration constant shall be representable in that fixed underlying type. If the value of an enumeration constant without a defining constant expression for an enumeration with fixed underlying type is obtained by adding 1 to the previous enumeration constant, the value of that previous enumeration constant shall not be the maximum value of the underlying type.

4

For an enumeration without a fixed underlying type, the expression that defines the value of an enumeration constant shall be an integer constant expression. For all the integer constant expressions which make up the values of the enumeration constants, there shall be a type capable of representing all the values that is a standard or extended signed or unsigned integer type, or char.

5

If an enum type specifier is present, then the longest possible sequence of tokens that can be interpreted as a specifier qualifier list is interpreted as part of the enum type specifier. It shall name an integer type that is neither an enumeration nor a bit-precise integer type. The underlying type of the enumeration is the unqualified, non-atomic version of the type specified by the type specifiers in the specifier qualifier list.135)

6

An enum specifier of the form

enum identifier enum-type-specifier

may not appear except in a declaration of the form

enum identifier enum-type-specifier ;

unless it is immediately followed by an opening brace, an enumerator list (with an optional ending comma), and a closing brace.

7

If two enum specifiers that include an enum type specifier declare the same type, the underlying types shall be compatible.

8

An enumeration with a fixed underlying type shall be defined with an enum type specifier. No enum specifier for an enumeration without a fixed underlying type shall include an enum type specifier.

Semantics

9

The optional attribute specifier sequence in the enum specifier appertains to the enumeration; the attributes in that attribute specifier sequence are thereafter considered attributes of the enumeration whenever it is named. The optional attribute specifier sequence in the enumerator appertains to that enumerator.

10

The identifiers in an enumerator list are declared as constants of the types specified later in this subclause and may appear wherever such are permitted.136) An enumerator with = defines its enumeration constant as the value of the constant expression. If the first enumerator has no =, the value of its enumeration constant is zero. Each subsequent enumerator with no = defines its enumeration constant as the value of the constant expression obtained by adding 1 to the value of the previous enumeration constant. (The use of enumerators with = may produce enumeration constants with values that duplicate other values in the same enumeration.) The enumerators of an enumeration are also known as its members.

11

The type for the members of an enumeration is called the enumeration member type.

12

During the processing of each enumeration constant in the enumerator list, the type of the enumeration constant shall be:

  • the previously declared type, if it is a redeclaration of the same enumeration constant; or,
  • the enumerated type, for an enumeration with fixed underlying type; or,
  • int, if there are no previous enumeration constants in the enumerator list and no explicit =

with a defining integer constant expression; or,

  • int, if given explicitly with = and the value of the integer constant expression is representable by an int; or,
  • the type of the integer constant expression, if given explicitly with = and if the value of the integer constant expression is not representable by int; or,
  • the type of the value from the previous enumeration constant with one added to it. If such an integer constant expression would overflow or wraparound the value of the previous enumeration constant from the addition of one, the type takes on either:
  • a suitably sized signed integer type, excluding the bit-precise signed integer types, capable of representing the value of the previous enumeration constant plus one; or,
  • a suitably sized unsigned integer type, excluding the bit-precise unsigned integer types, capable of representing the value of the previous enumeration constant plus one.

A signed integer type is chosen if the previous enumeration constant being added is of signed integer type. An unsigned integer type is chosen if the previous enumeration constant is of unsigned integer type. If there is no suitably sized integer type described previously which can represent the new value, then the enumeration has no type which can represent all its values.137)

13

For all enumerations without a fixed underlying type, each enumerated type shall be compatible with char or a signed or an unsigned integer type that is not bool or a bit-precise integer type. The choice of type is implementation-defined,138) but shall be capable of representing the values of all the members of the enumeration.139)

14

Enumeration constants can be redefined in the same scope with the same value as part of a redeclaration of the same enumerated type.

15

The enumeration member type for an enumerated type without fixed underlying type upon completion is:

  • int if all the values of the enumeration are representable as an int; or,
  • the enumerated type.140)
16

The enumeration member type for an enumerated type with fixed underlying type is the enumerated type. The enumerated type is compatible with the underlying type of the enumeration. After possible lvalue conversion a value of the enumerated type behaves the same as the value with the underlying type, in particular with all aspects of promotion, conversion, and arithmetic. Conversion to the enumerated type has the same semantics as conversion to the underlying type.141)

17

EXAMPLE 1 The following fragment:

enum hue { chartreuse, burgundy, claret=20, winedark };
enum hue col, *cp;
col = claret;
cp = &col;
if (*cp != burgundy)
      /* ... */

makes hue the tag of an enumeration, and then declares col as an object that has that type and cp as a pointer to an object that has that type. The enumerated values are in the set {0,1,20,21}.

18

EXAMPLE 2 Even if the value of an enumeration constant is generated by the implicit addition of one, an enumeration with a fixed underlying type does not exhibit typical overflow behavior:

#include <limits.h>
enum us : unsigned short {
      us_max = USHRT_MAX,
      us_violation, /* Constraint violation:
                       USHRT_MAX + 1 would wraparound. */
      us_violation_2 = us_max + 1, /* Maybe constraint violation:
                                      USHRT_MAX + 1 may be promoted to "int", and
                                      result is too wide for the
                                      underlying type. */
      us_wraparound_to_zero = (unsigned short)(USHRT_MAX + 1) /* Okay:
                               conversion done in constant expression
                               before conversion to underlying type:
                               unsigned semantics okay. */
};
enum ui : unsigned int {
      ui_max = UINT_MAX,
      ui_violation, /* Constraint violation:
                       UINT_MAX + 1 would wraparound. */
      ui_no_violation = ui_max + 1, /* Okay: Arithmetic performed as typical
                                       unsigned integer arithmetic: conversion
                                       from a value that is already 0 to 0. */
      ui_wraparound_to_zero = (unsigned int)(UINT_MAX + 1) /* Okay: conversion
                               done in constant expression before conversion to
                               underlying type: unsigned semantics okay. */
};
int main () {
      // Same as return 0;
      return ui_wraparound_to_zero + us_wraparound_to_zero;
}
19

EXAMPLE 3 The following fragment:

#include <limits.h>
enum E1: short;
enum E2: short;
enum E3; /* Constraint violation: E3 forward declaration. */
enum E4 : unsigned long long;
enum E1 : short { m11, m12 };
enum E1 x = m11;
enum E2 : long { m21, m22 }; /* Constraint violation: different underlying types
    */
enum E3 {
      m31,
      m32,
      m33 = sizeof(enum E3) /* Constraint violation: E3 is not complete here. */
};
enum E3 : int; /* Constraint violation: E3 previously had no underlying type */
enum E4 : unsigned long long {
      m40 = sizeof(enum E4),
      m41 = ULLONG_MAX,
      m42 /* Constraint violation: unrepresentable value (wraparound) */
};
enum E5 y; /* Constraint violation: incomplete type */
enum E6 : long int z; /* Constraint violation: enum-type-specifier
                         with identifier in declarator */
enum E7 : long int = 0; /* Syntax violation:
                           enum-type-specifier with initializer */

demonstrates many of the properties of multiple declarations of enumerations with underlying types. Particularly, enum E3 is declared and defined without an underlying type first, therefore a redeclaration with an underlying type second is a violation. Because it not complete at that time within its enumerator list, sizeof(enum E3) is a constraint violation within the enum E3 definition. enum E4 is complete as it is being defined, therefore sizeof(enum E4) is not a constraint violation.

20

EXAMPLE 4 The following fragment:

enum no_underlying {
      a0
};
int main (void) {
      int a = _Generic(a0,
            int: 2,
            unsigned char: 1,
            default: 0
      );
      int b = _Generic((enum no_underlying)a0,
            int: 2,
            unsigned char: 1,
            default: 0
      );
      return a + b;
}

demonstrates the implementation-defined nature of the underlying type of enumerations using generic selection (6.5.2.1). The value of a after its initialization is 2. The value of b after its initialization is implementation-defined: the enumeration is compatible with a type large enough to fit the values of its enumeration constants due to the constraints. Because the only value is 0 for a0, b may hold any of 2, 1, or 0.

Now, consider a similar fragment, but using a fixed underlying type:

enum underlying : unsigned char {
      b0
};
int main (void) {
      int a = _Generic(b0,
            int: 2,
            unsigned char: 1,
            default: 0
      );
      int b = _Generic((enum underlying)b0,
            int: 2,
            unsigned char: 1,
            default: 0
      );
      return 0;
}

Here, we are guaranteed that a and b are both initialized to 1. This makes enumerations with a fixed underlying type more portable.

21

EXAMPLE 5 Enumerations with a fixed underlying type have braces and the enumerator list specified as part of their declaration if they are not a standalone declaration:

void f1 (enum a : long b); /* Constraint violation */
void f2 (enum c : long { x } d);
enum e : int f3(); /* Constraint violation */
typedef enum t u; /* Constraint violation: forward declaration of t. */
typedef enum v : short W; /* Constraint violation */
typedef enum q : short { s } R;
struct s1 {
      int x;
      enum e : int : 1; /* Constraint violation */
      int y;
};
enum forward; /* Constraint violation */
extern enum forward fwd_val0; /* Constraint violation: incomplete type */
extern enum forward* fwd_ptr0; /* Constraint violation: enums cannot be
                                    used like other incomplete types */
extern int* fwd_ptr0; /* Constraint violation: incompatible
                         with incomplete type. */
enum forward1 : int;
extern enum forward1 fwd_val1;
extern int fwd_val1;
extern enum forward1* fwd_ptr1;
extern int* fwd_ptr1;
int main () {
      enum e : short;
      enum e : short f = 0; /* Constraint violation */
      enum g : short { y } h = y;
      return 0;
}
22

EXAMPLE 6 Enumerations with a fixed underlying type are complete when the enum type specifier for that specific enumeration is complete. The enumeration e in this snippet:

enum e : typeof ((enum e : short { A })0, (short)0);

enum e is considered complete by the first opening brace within the typeof in this snippet.

Forward references: generic selection (6.5.2.1), tags (6.7.3.4), declarations (6.7), declarators (6.7.7), function declarators (6.7.7.4), type names (6.7.8).

6.7.3.4 Tags

1

Where two declarations that use the same tag declare the same type, they shall both use the same choice of struct, union, or enum. If two declarations of the same type have a member-declaration or enumerator-list, one shall not be nested within the other and both declarations shall fulfill all requirements of compatible types (6.2.7) with the additional requirement that corresponding members of structure or union types shall have the same (and not merely compatible) types.

2

A type specifier of the form

enum identifier

without an enumerator list shall only appear after the type it specifies is complete.

3

A type specifier of the form

struct-or-union attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifier

shall not contain an attribute specifier sequence.142)

Semantics
4

All declarations of structure, union, or enumerated types that have the same scope and use the same tag declare the same type.

5

Irrespective of whether there is a tag or what other declarations of the type are in the same translation unit, the type (except enumerated types with a fixed underlying type) is incomplete until immediately after the closing brace of the list defining the content for the first time and complete thereafter.

6

Enumerated types with fixed underlying type (6.7.3.3) are complete immediately after their first

associated enum type specifier ends.

7

EXAMPLE 1 The following example shows allowed redeclarations of the same structure, union, or enumerated type in the same scope:

struct foo { struct { int x; }; };
struct foo { struct { int x; }; };
union bar { int x; float y; };
union bar { int x; float y; };
typedef struct q { int x; } q_t;
typedef struct q { int x; } q_t;
void foo(void)
{
      struct S { int x; };
      struct T { struct S s; };
      struct S { int x; };
      struct T { struct S s; };
}
enum X { A = 1, B = 1 + 1 };
enum X { B = 2, A = 1 };
enum Q { C = 1 };
enum Q { C = C };              // ok!
8

EXAMPLE 2 The following example shows invalid redeclarations of the same structure, union, or enumerated type in the same scope:

struct foo { int (*p)[3]; };
struct foo { int (*p)[]; };    // member has different type
union bar { int x; float y; };
union bar { int z; float y; }; // member has different name
union purr { int x; float y; };
union purr { float y; int x; }; // members have different order
// "purr" only valid if each union "purr" is in
// two different translation units
typedef struct { int x; } q_t;
typedef struct { int x; } q_t; // not the same type
struct S { int x; };
void foo(void)
{
      struct T { struct S s; };
      struct S { int x; };
      struct T { struct S s; }; // struct S not the same type
}
enum X { A = 1, B = 2 };
enum X { A = 1, B = 3 };       // different enumeration constant
enum R { C = 1 };
enum Q { C = 1 };              // conflicting enumeration constant
9

Two declarations of structure, union, or enumerated types which are in different scopes or use different tags declare distinct types. Each declaration of a structure, union, or enumerated type which does not include a tag declares a distinct type.

10

A type specifier of the form

struct-or-union attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifieropt { member-declaration-list }

declares a structure, union, or enumerated type. The list defines the structure content, union content, or enumeration content. If an identifier is provided,143) the type specifier also declares the identifier to be the tag of that type. The optional attribute specifier sequence appertains to the structure, union, or enumerated type being declared; the attributes in that attribute specifier sequence are thereafter considered attributes of the structure, union, or enumerated type whenever it is named.

11

A declaration of the form

struct-or-union attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifier ;

or

enum identifier enum-type-specifier ;

specifies a structure, union, or enumerated type and declares the identifier as a tag of that type.144)

The optional attribute specifier sequence appertains to the structure or union type being declared; the attributes in that attribute specifier sequence are thereafter considered attributes of the structure or union type whenever it is named.

12

If a type specifier of the form

struct-or-union attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifier

occurs other than as part of one of the preceding forms, and no other declaration of the identifier as a tag is visible, then it declares an incomplete structure or union type, and declares the identifier as the tag of that type.144)

13

If a type specifier of the form

struct-or-union attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifier

or

enum identifier

occurs other than as part of one of the preceding forms, and a declaration of the identifier as a tag is visible, then it specifies the same type as that other declaration, and does not redeclare the tag.

14

EXAMPLE 3 This mechanism allows declaration of a self-referential structure.

struct tnode {
      int count;
      struct tnode *left, *right;
};
specifies a structure that contains an integer and two pointers to objects of the same type. Once this declaration has been given, the declaration
struct tnode s, *sp;

declares s to be an object of the given type and sp to be a pointer to an object of the given type. With these declarations, the expression sp->left refers to the left struct tnode pointer of the object to which sp points; the expression s.right->count designates the count member of the right struct tnode pointed to from s.

15

The following alternative formulation uses the typedef mechanism:

typedef struct tnode TNODE;
struct tnode {
      int count;
      TNODE *left, *right;
};
TNODE s, *sp;
16

EXAMPLE 4 To illustrate the use of prior declaration of a tag to specify a pair of mutually referential structures, the declarations

struct s1 { struct s2 *s2p; /* ... */ }; // D1
struct s2 { struct s1 *s1p; /* ... */ }; // D2
specify a pair of structures that contain pointers to each other. Note, however, that if s2 were already declared as a tag in an enclosing scope, the declaration D1 would refer to it, not to the tag s2 declared in D2. To eliminate this context sensitivity, the declaration
struct s2;

can be inserted ahead of D1. This declares a new tag s2 in the inner scope; the declaration D2 then completes the specification of the new type.

Forward references: declarators (6.7.7), type definitions (6.7.9).

6.7.3.5 Atomic type specifiers

Constraints
2

Atomic type specifiers shall not be used if the implementation does not support atomic types (see 6.10.10.4).

3

The type name in an atomic type specifier shall not refer to an array type, a function type, an atomic type, or a qualified type.

Semantics
4

The properties associated with atomic types are meaningful only for expressions that are lvalues. If the _Atomic keyword is immediately followed by a left parenthesis, it is interpreted as a type specifier (with a type name), not as a type qualifier.

6.7.3.6 Typeof specifiers

2

The typeof and typeof_unqual tokens are collectively called the typeof operators.

Constraints
3

The typeof operators shall not be applied to an expression that designates a bit-field member.

Semantics

4

The typeof specifier applies the typeof operators to an expression (6.5.1) or a type name. If the typeof operators are applied to an expression, they yield the type of their operand.145) Otherwise, they designate the same type as the type name with any nested typeof specifier evaluated.146) If the type of the operand is a variably modified type, the operand is evaluated; otherwise, the operand is not evaluated.

5

The result of the typeof_unqual operator is the non-atomic unqualified version of the type that would result from the typeof operator.147) The typeof operator preserves all qualifiers.

6

EXAMPLE 1 Type of an expression.

typeof(1+1) main () {
      return 0;
}
is equivalent to this program:
int main () {
      return 0;
}
7

EXAMPLE 2 The following program:

const _Atomic int purr = 0;
const int meow = 1;
const char* const animals[] = {
      "aardvark",
      "bluejay",
      "catte",
};
typeof_unqual(meow) main (int argc, char* argv[]) {
      typeof_unqual(purr)          plain_purr;
      typeof(_Atomic typeof(meow)) atomic_meow;
      typeof(animals)              animals_array;
      typeof_unqual(animals)       animals2_array;
      return 0;
}
is equivalent to this program:
const _Atomic int purr = 0;
const int meow = 1;
const char* const animals[] = {
      "aardvark",
      "bluejay",
      "catte",
};
int main (int argc, char* argv[]) {
      int               plain_purr;
      const _Atomic int atomic_meow;
      const char* const animals_array[3];
      const char*       animals2_array[3];
      return 0;
}
8

EXAMPLE 3 The equivalence between sizeof and typeof’s deduction of the type means this program has no constraint violations:

int main (int argc, char* argv[]) {
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof(’p’)) == sizeof(int));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof(’p’)) == sizeof(’p’));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof((char)’p’)) == sizeof(char));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof((char)’p’)) == sizeof((char)’p’));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof("meow")) == sizeof(char[5]));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof("meow")) == sizeof("meow"));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof(argc)) == sizeof(int));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof(argc)) == sizeof(argc));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof(argv)) == sizeof(char**));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof(argv)) == sizeof(argv));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual(’p’)) == sizeof(int));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual(’p’)) == sizeof(’p’));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual((char)’p’)) == sizeof(char));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual((char)’p’)) == sizeof((char)’p’));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual("meow")) == sizeof(char[5]));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual("meow")) == sizeof("meow"));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual(argc)) == sizeof(int));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual(argc)) == sizeof(argc));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual(argv)) == sizeof(char**));
      static_assert(sizeof(typeof_unqual(argv)) == sizeof(argv));
      return 0;
}
9

EXAMPLE 4 The following program with nested typeof(...):

int main (int argc, char*[]) {
      float val = 6.0f;
      return (typeof(typeof_unqual(typeof(argc))))val;
}
is equivalent to this program:
int main (int argc, char*[]) {
      float val = 6.0f;
      return (int)val;
}
10

EXAMPLE 5 Variable length arrays with typeof operators performs the operation at execution time rather than translation time.

#include <stddef.h>
size_t vla_size (int n) {
      typedef char vla_type[n + 3];
      vla_type b; // variable length array
      return sizeof(
            typeof_unqual(b)
      ); // execution-time sizeof, translation-time typeof operation
}
int main () {
      return (int)vla_size(10); // vla_size returns 13
}
11

EXAMPLE 6 Nested typeof operators, arrays, and pointers do not perform array to pointer decay.

int main () {
      typeof(typeof(const char*)[4]) y = {
            "a",
            "b",
            "c",
            "d"
      }; // 4-element array of "pointer to const char"
      return 0;
}
12

EXAMPLE 7 Function, pointer, and array types may be substituted with typeof operations.

void f(int);
typeof(f(5)) g(double x) {         // g has type "void(double)"
      printf("value %g\n", x);
}
typeof(g)* h;                      // h has type "void(*)(double)"
typeof(true ? g : nullptr) k;      // k has type "void(*)(double)"
void j(double A[5], typeof(A)* B); // j has type "void(double*, double**)"
extern typeof(double[]) D;         // D has an incomplete type
typeof(D) C = { 0.7, 99 };         // C has type "double[2]"
typeof(D) D = { 5, 8.9, 0.1, 99 }; // D is now completed to "double[4]"
typeof(D) E;                       // E has type "double[4]" from D’s completed type

6.7.4 Type qualifiers

6.7.4.1 General

1
type-qualifier:
const
restrict
volatile
_Atomic
Constraints
2

Types other than pointer types whose referenced type is an object type and (possibly multidimensional) array types with such pointer types as element type shall not be restrict-qualified.

3

The _Atomic qualifier shall not be used if the implementation does not support atomic types (see 6.10.10.4).

4

The type modified by the _Atomic qualifier shall not be an array type or a function type.

Semantics
5

The properties associated with qualified types are meaningful only for expressions that are lvalues.148)

6

If the same qualifier appears more than once in the same specifier-qualifier list or as declaration specifiers, either directly, via one or more typeof specifiers, or via one or more typedefs, the behavior is the same as if it appeared only once. If other qualifiers appear along with the _Atomic qualifier

the resulting type is the so-qualified atomic type.

7

If an attempt is made to modify an object defined with a const-qualified type through use of an lvalue with non-const-qualified type, the behavior is undefined. If an attempt is made to refer to an object defined with a volatile-qualified type through use of an lvalue with non-volatile-qualified type, the behavior is undefined.149)

8

An object that has volatile-qualified type may be modified in ways unknown to the implementation or have other unknown side effects. Therefore, any expression referring to such an object shall be evaluated strictly according to the rules of the abstract machine, as described in 5.1.2.4. Furthermore, at every sequence point the value last stored in the object shall agree with that prescribed by the abstract machine, except as modified by the unknown factors mentioned previously.150) What constitutes an access to an object that has volatile-qualified type is implementation-defined.

9

An object that is accessed through a restrict-qualified pointer has a special association with that pointer. This association, defined in 6.7.4.2, requires that all accesses to that object use, directly or indirectly, the value of that pointer.151) The intended use of the restrict qualifier (like the register storage class) is to promote optimization, and deleting all instances of the qualifier from all preprocessing translation units composing a conforming program does not change its meaning (i.e. observable behavior), unless _Generic is used to distinguish whether or not a type has that qualifier.

10

If the specification of an array type includes any type qualifiers, both the array and the element type are so-qualified. If the specification of a function type includes any type qualifiers, the behavior is undefined.152)

11

For two qualified types to be compatible, both shall have the identically qualified version of a compatible type; the order of type qualifiers within a list of specifiers or qualifiers does not affect the specified type.

12

EXAMPLE 1 An object declared

extern const volatile int real_time_clock;

may be modifiable by hardware, but cannot be assigned to, incremented, or decremented.

13

EXAMPLE 2 The following declarations and expressions illustrate the behavior when type qualifiers modify an aggregate type:

const struct s { int mem; } cs = { 1 };
struct s ncs;  // the object ncs is modifiable
typedef int A[2][3];
const A a = {{4, 5, 6}, {7, 8, 9}}; // array of array of const int
int *pi;
const int *pci;
ncs = cs;      // valid
cs = ncs;      // violates modifiable lvalue constraint for =
pi = &ncs.mem; // valid
pi = &cs.mem;  // violates type constraints for =
pci = &cs.mem; // valid
pi = a[0];     // invalid:  a[0] has type "const int *"
14

EXAMPLE 3 The declaration

_Atomic volatile int *p;

specifies that p has the type "pointer to volatile atomic int", a pointer to a volatile-qualified atomic type.

6.7.4.2 Formal definition of restrict

1

Let D be a declaration of an ordinary identifier that provides a means of designating an object P as a restrict-qualified pointer to type T.

2

If D appears inside a block and does not have storage class extern, let B denote the block. If D appears in the list of parameter declarations of a function definition, let B denote the associated block. Otherwise, let B denote the block of main (or the block of whatever function is called at program startup in a freestanding environment).

3

In what follows, a pointer expression E is said to be based on object P if (at some sequence point in the execution of B prior to the evaluation of E) modifying P to point to a copy of the array object into which it formerly pointed would change the value of E.153) Note that "based" is defined only for expressions with pointer types.

4

During each execution of B, let L be any lvalue that has &L based on P. If L is used to access the value of the object X that it designates, and X is also modified (by any means), then the following requirements apply: T shall not be const-qualified. Every other lvalue used to access the value of X shall also have its address based on P. Every access that modifies X shall be considered also to modify P, for the purposes of this subclause. If P is assigned the value of a pointer expression E that is based on another restricted pointer object P2, associated with block B2, then either the execution of B2 shall begin before the execution of B, or the execution of B2 shall end prior to the assignment. If these requirements are not met, then the behavior is undefined.

5

Here an execution of B means that portion of the execution of the program that would correspond to the lifetime of an object with scalar type and automatic storage duration associated with B.

6

A translator is free to ignore any or all aliasing implications of uses of restrict.

7

EXAMPLE 1 The file scope declarations

int * restrict a;
int * restrict b;
extern int c[];

assert that if an object is accessed using one of a, b, or c, and that object is modified anywhere in the program, then it is never accessed using either of the other two.

8

EXAMPLE 2 The function parameter declarations in the following example

void f(int n, int * restrict p, int * restrict q)
{
      while (n--  >  0)
            *p++ = *q++;
}

assert that, during each execution of the function, if an object is accessed through one of the pointer parameters, then it is not also accessed through the other. The translator can make this no-aliasing inference based on the parameter declarations alone, without analyzing the function body.

9

The benefit of the restrict qualifiers is that they enable a translator to make an effective dependence analysis of function f without examining any of the calls of f in the program. The cost is that the programmer has to examine all those calls to ensure that none give undefined behavior. For example, the second call of f in g has undefined behavior because each of d[1] through d[49] is accessed through both p and q.

void g(void)
{
      extern int d[100];
      f(50, d + 50, d); // valid
      f(50, d +  1, d); // undefined behavior
}
10

EXAMPLE 3 The function parameter declarations

void h(int n, int * restrict p, int * restrict q, int * restrict r)
{
      int i;
      for (i = 0; i  <  n; i++)
            p[i] = q[i] + r[i];
}

illustrate how an unmodified object can be aliased through two restricted pointers. If a and b are disjoint arrays, a call of the form h(100, a, b, b) has defined behavior, because array b is not modified within function h.

11

EXAMPLE 4 The rule limiting assignments between restricted pointers does not distinguish between a function call and an equivalent nested block. With one exception, only "outer-to-inner" assignments between restricted pointers declared in nested blocks have defined behavior.

{
      int * restrict p1;
      int * restrict q1;
      p1 = q1; // undefined behavior
      {
            int * restrict p2 = p1; // valid
            int * restrict q2 = q1; // valid
            p1 = q2;                // undefined behavior
            p2 = q2;                // undefined behavior
      }
}
12

The one exception allows the value of a restricted pointer to be carried out of the block in which it (or, more precisely, the ordinary identifier used to designate it) is declared when that block finishes execution. For example, this permits new_vector to return a vector.

typedef struct { int n; float * restrict v; } vector;
vector new_vector(int n)
{
      vector t;
      t.n = n;
      t.v = malloc(n * sizeof(float));
      return t;
}
13

EXAMPLE 5 Suppose that a programmer knows that references of the form p[i] and q[j] are never aliases in the body of a function:

void f(int n, int *p, int *q) { /* ... */ }
There are several ways that this information could be conveyed to a translator using the restrict qualifier. Example 2 shows the most effective way, qualifying all pointer parameters, and can be used provided that neither p nor q becomes based on the other in the function body. A potentially effective alternative is:
void f(int n, int * restrict p, int * const q) { /* ... */ }

Again, it is possible for a translator to make the no-aliasing inference based on the parameter declarations alone, though now subtler reasoning is used: that the const-qualification of q precludes it becoming based on p. There is also a requirement that q is not modified, so this alternative cannot be used for the function in Example 2, as written.

14

EXAMPLE 6 Another potentially effective alternative is:

void f(int n, int *p, int const * restrict q) { /* ... */ }

Again, it is possible for a translator to make the no-aliasing inference based on the parameter declarations alone, though now even subtler reasoning is used: that this combination of restrict and const means that objects referenced using q cannot be modified, and so no modified object can be referenced using both p and q.

15

EXAMPLE 7 The least effective alternative is:

void f(int n, int * restrict p, int *q) { /* ... */ }

Here the translator can make the no-aliasing inference only by analyzing the body of the function and proving that q cannot become based on p. Some translator designs may choose to exclude this analysis, given availability of the more effective alternatives described previously. Such a translator is required to assume that aliases are present because assuming that aliases are not present may result in an incorrect translation. Also, a translator that attempts the analysis may not succeed in all cases and consequently need to conservatively assume that aliases are present.

6.7.5 Function specifiers

Syntax

1
function-specifier:
inline
_Noreturn

Constraints

2

Function specifiers shall be used only in the declaration of an identifier for a function.

3

An inline definition of a function with external linkage shall not contain, anywhere in the tokens making up the function definition, a definition of a modifiable object with static or thread storage duration, and shall not contain, anywhere in the tokens making up the function definition, a reference to an identifier with internal linkage.

4

In a hosted environment, no function specifier(s) shall appear in a declaration of main.

Semantics

5

A function specifier may appear more than once; the behavior is the same as if it appeared only once.

6

A function declared with an inline function specifier is an inline function. Making a function an inline function suggests that calls to the function be as fast as possible.154) The extent to which such suggestions are effective is implementation-defined.155)

7

Any function with internal linkage can be an inline function. For a function with external linkage, the following restrictions apply: If a function is declared with an inline function specifier, then it shall also be defined in the same translation unit. If all the file scope declarations for a function in a translation unit include the inline function specifier without extern, then the definition in that translation unit is an inline definition. An inline definition does not provide an external definition for the function and does not forbid an external definition in another translation unit. Inline definitions provide an alternative to external definitions, which a translator may use to implement any call to the function in the same translation unit. It is unspecified whether a call to the function uses the

inline definition or the external definition.156)

8

A function declared with a _Noreturn function specifier shall not return to its caller. The attribute [[noreturn]] provides similar semantics. The _Noreturn function specifier is an obsolescent feature (6.7.13.7).

Recommended practice

9

The implementation should produce a diagnostic message for a function declared with a _Noreturn function specifier that appears to be capable of returning to its caller.

10

EXAMPLE 1 The declaration of an inline function with external linkage can result in either an external definition, or a definition available for use only within the translation unit. A file scope declaration with extern creates an external definition. The following example shows an entire translation unit.

inline double fahr(double t)
{
      return (9.0 * t) / 5.0 + 32.0;
}
inline double cels(double t)
{
      return (5.0 * (t - 32.0)) / 9.0;
}
extern double fahr(double);   // creates an external definition
double convert(int is_fahr, double temp)
{
      /* A translator may perform inline substitutions */
      return is_fahr ? cels(temp): fahr(temp);
}
11

Note that the definition of fahr is an external definition because fahr is also declared with extern, but the definition of cels is an inline definition. Because cels has external linkage and is referenced, an external definition has to appear in another translation unit (see 6.9); the inline definition and the external definition are distinct and either can be used for the call.

12

EXAMPLE 2 The following inline definitions are invalid:

static int a;
typeof (a) inline f() { return 0; }
typeof ((int) { 0 }) inline g() { return 0; }
Forward references: function definitions (6.9.2).

6.7.6 Alignment specifier

Syntax

Constraints

2

An alignment specifier shall appear only in the declaration specifiers of a declaration, or in the specifier-qualifier list of a member declaration, or in the type name of a compound literal. An alignment specifier shall not be used in conjunction with either of the storage-class specifiers typedef or register, nor in a declaration of a function or bit-field.

3

The constant expression shall be an integer constant expression. It shall evaluate to a valid fundamental alignment, or to a valid extended alignment supported by the implementation for an object of the storage duration (if any) being declared, or to zero.

4

An object shall not be declared with an over-aligned type with an extended alignment requirement not supported by the implementation for an object of that storage duration.

5

The combined effect of all alignment specifiers in a declaration shall not specify an alignment that is less strict than the alignment that would otherwise be required for the type of the object or member being declared.

Semantics

6

The first form is equivalent to alignas(alignof( type-name )).

7

The alignment requirement of the declared object or member is taken to be the specified alignment. An alignment specification of zero has no effect.157) When multiple alignment specifiers occur in a declaration, the effective alignment requirement is the strictest specified alignment.

8

If the definition of an object has an alignment specifier, any other declaration of that object shall either specify equivalent alignment or have no alignment specifier. If the definition of an object does not have an alignment specifier, any other declaration of that object shall also have no alignment specifier. If declarations of an object in different translation units have different alignment specifiers, the behavior is undefined.

6.7.7 Declarators

6.7.7.1 General

1
declarator:
pointeropt direct-declarator
direct-declarator:
identifier attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
( declarator )
array-declarator attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
function-declarator attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
array-declarator:
direct-declarator [ type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expressionopt ]
direct-declarator [ static type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expression ]
direct-declarator [ type-qualifier-list static assignment-expression ]
direct-declarator [ type-qualifier-listopt * ]
function-declarator:
direct-declarator ( parameter-type-listopt )
pointer:

* attribute-specifier-sequenceopt type-qualifier-listopt * attribute-specifier-sequenceopt type-qualifier-listopt pointer type-qualifier-list: type-qualifier type-qualifier-list type-qualifier parameter-type-list: parameter-list parameter-list , ... ... parameter-list: parameter-declaration

parameter-list , parameter-declaration parameter-declaration: attribute-specifier-sequenceopt declaration-specifiers declarator attribute-specifier-sequenceopt declaration-specifiers abstract-declaratoropt

Semantics

2

Each declarator declares an identifier for a single object, function, or type, within a declaration. The preceding specifiers indicate the type, storage class, or other properties of the identifier or identifiers being declared. Each declarator specifies one declaration and names it and/or modifies the type of the specifiers with operators such as * (pointer to) and () (function returning).

3

A full declarator is a declarator that is not part of another declarator. If, in the nested sequence of declarators in a full declarator, there is a declarator specifying a variable length array type, the type specified by the full declarator is said to be variably modified. Furthermore, any type derived by declarator type derivation from a variably modified type is itself variably modified.

4

In the following subclauses, consider a declaration

T D1

where T contains the declaration specifiers that specify a type T (such as int) and D1 is a declarator that contains an identifier ident. The type specified for the identifier ident in the various forms of declarator is described inductively using this notation.

5

If, in the declaration "T D1", D1 has the form

identifier attribute-specifier-sequenceopt

then the type specified for ident is T and the optional attribute specifier sequence appertains to the entity that is declared.

6

If, in the declaration "T D1", D1 has the form

( D )

then ident has the type specified by the declaration "T D". Thus, a declarator in parentheses is identical to the unparenthesized declarator, but the binding of complicated declarators may be altered by parentheses.

Implementation limits

7

As discussed in 5.2.5.2, an implementation may limit the number of pointer, array, and function declarators that modify an arithmetic, structure, union, or void type, either directly or via one or more typedefs.

Forward references: array declarators (6.7.7.3), type definitions (6.7.9).

6.7.7.2 Pointer declarators

1

If, in the declaration "T D1", D1 has the form

* attribute-specifier-sequenceopt type-qualifier-listopt D

and the type specified for ident in the declaration "T D" is "derived-declarator-type-list T", then the type specified for ident is "derived-declarator-type-list type-qualifier-list pointer to T". For each type qualifier in the list, ident is a so-qualified pointer. The optional attribute specifier sequence appertains to the pointer and not the object pointed to.

2

For two pointer types to be compatible, both shall be identically qualified and both shall be pointers to compatible types.

3

EXAMPLE The following pair of declarations demonstrates the difference between a "variable pointer to a constant value" and a "constant pointer to a variable value".

const int *ptr_to_constant;
int *const constant_ptr;

The contents of any object pointed to by ptr_to_constant cannot be modified through that pointer, but ptr_to_constant itself can be changed to point to another object. Similarly, the contents of the int pointed to by constant_ptr can be modified, but constant_ptr itself always points to the same location.

4

The declaration of the constant pointer constant_ptr can be clarified by including a definition for the type "pointer to int".

typedef int *int_ptr;
const int_ptr constant_ptr;

declares constant_ptr as an object that has type "const-qualified pointer to int".

6.7.7.3 Array declarators

1

In addition to optional type qualifiers and the keyword static, the [ and ] may delimit an expression or *. If they delimit an expression (which specifies the size of an array), the expression shall have an integer type. If the expression is a constant expression, it shall have a value greater than zero. The element type shall not be an incomplete or function type. The optional type qualifiers and the keyword static shall appear only in a declaration of a function parameter with an array type, and then only in the outermost array type derivation.

2

If an identifier is declared as having a variably modified type, it shall be an ordinary identifier (as defined in 6.2.3), have no linkage, and have either block scope or function prototype scope. If an identifier is declared to be an object with static or thread storage duration, it shall not have a variable length array type.

Semantics
3

If, in the declaration "T D1", D1 has one of the forms:

D [ type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expressionopt ] attribute-specifier-sequenceopt D [ static type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expression ] attribute-specifier-sequenceopt D [ type-qualifier-list static assignment-expression ] attribute-specifier-sequenceopt D [ type-qualifier-listopt * ] attribute-specifier-sequenceopt

and the type specified for ident in the declaration "T D" is "derived-declarator-type-list T", then the type specified for ident is "derived-declarator-type-list array of T".158)159) The optional attribute specifier sequence appertains to the array. (See 6.7.7.4 for the meaning of the optional type qualifiers and the keyword static.)

4

If the size is not present, the array type is an incomplete type. If the size is * instead of being an expression, the array type is a variable length array type of unspecified size, which can only be used as part of the nested sequence of declarators or abstract declarators for a parameter declaration, not including anything inside an array size expression in one of those declarators;160) such arrays are nonetheless complete types. If the size is an integer constant expression and the element type has a known constant size, the array type is not a variable length array type; otherwise, the array type is a variable length array type. (Variable length arrays with automatic storage duration are a conditional feature that implementations may support; see 6.10.10.4.)

5

If the size is an expression that is not an integer constant expression: if it occurs in a declaration at function prototype scope, it is treated as if it were replaced by *; otherwise, each time it is evaluated it shall have a value greater than zero. The size of each instance of a variable length array type does not change during its lifetime. Where a size expression is part of the operand of a typeof or sizeof operator and changing the value of the size expression would not affect the result of the operator, it is unspecified whether or not the size expression is evaluated. Where a size expression is part of the operand of an alignof operator, that expression is not evaluated.

6

For two array types to be compatible, both shall have compatible element types, and if both size specifiers are present, and are integer constant expressions, then both size specifiers shall have the same constant value. If the two array types are used in a context which requires them to be compatible, it is undefined behavior if the two size specifiers evaluate to unequal values.

7

EXAMPLE 1

float fa[11], *afp[17];

declares an array of float numbers and an array of pointers to float numbers.

8

EXAMPLE 2 Note the distinction between the declarations

extern int *x;
extern int y[];

The first declares x to be a pointer to int; the second declares y to be an array of int of unknown size (an incomplete type), the storage for which is defined elsewhere.

9

EXAMPLE 3 The following declarations demonstrate the compatibility rules for variably modified types.

extern int n;
extern int m;
void fcompat(void)
{
      int a[n][6][m];
      int (*p)[4][n+1];
      int c[n][n][6][m];
      int (*r)[n][n][n+1];
      p = a;      // invalid:  not compatible because 4 != 6
      r = c;      // compatible, but defined behavior only if
                  // n == 6 and m == n+1
}
10

EXAMPLE 4 All valid declarations of variably modified (VM) types are either at block scope or function prototype scope. Array objects declared with the thread_local, static, or extern storage-class specifier cannot have a variable length array (VLA) type. However, an object declared with the static storage-class specifier can have a VM type (that is, a pointer to a VLA type). Finally, only ordinary identifiers can be declared with a VM type and identifiers with VM type cannot, therefore, be members of structures or unions.

extern int n;
int A[n];                           // invalid:  file scope VLA
extern int (*p2)[n];                // invalid:  file scope VM
int B[100];                         // valid:  file scope but not VM
void fvla(int m, int C[m][m]);      // valid:  VLA with prototype scope
void fvla(int m, int C[m][m])       // valid:  adjusted to auto pointer to VLA
{
      typedef int VLA[m][m];        // valid:  block scope typedef VLA
      struct tag {
            int (*y)[n];            // invalid:  y not ordinary identifier
            int z[n];               // invalid:  z not ordinary identifier
      };
      int D[m];                     // valid:  auto VLA
      static int E[m];              // invalid:  static block scope VLA
      extern int F[m];              // invalid:  F has linkage and is VLA
      int (*s)[m];                  // valid:  auto pointer to VLA
      extern int (*r)[m];           // invalid:  r has linkage and points to VLA
      static int (*q)[m] = &B;      // valid:  q is a static block pointer to VLA
}
11

EXAMPLE 5 The following is invalid, because the use of [*] is inside an array size expression rather than directly part of the nested sequence of abstract declarators for a parameter declaration:

void f(int (*)[sizeof(int (*)[*])]);
Forward references: function declarators (6.7.7.4), function definitions (6.9.2), initialization (6.7.11).

6.7.7.4 Function declarators

1

A function declarator shall not specify a return type that is a function type or an array type.

2

The only storage-class specifier that shall occur in a parameter declaration is register.

3

After adjustment, the parameters in a parameter type list in a function declarator that is part of a definition of that function shall not have incomplete type.

Semantics
4

If, in the declaration "T D1", D1 has the form

D ( parameter-type-listopt ) attribute-specifier-sequenceopt

and the type specified for ident in the declaration "T D" is "derived-declarator-type-list T", then the type specified for ident is "derived-declarator-type-list function returning the unqualified, non-atomic version of T". The optional attribute specifier sequence appertains to the function type.

5

A parameter type list specifies the types of, and may declare identifiers for, the parameters of the function.

6

A declaration of a parameter as "array of type" shall be adjusted to "qualified pointer to type", where the type qualifiers (if any) are those specified within the [ and ] of the array type derivation. If the keyword static also appears within the [ and ] of the array type derivation, then for each call to the function, the value of the corresponding actual argument shall provide access to the first element of an array with at least as many elements as specified by the size expression.

7

A declaration of a parameter as "function returning type" shall be adjusted to "pointer to function returning type", as in 6.3.2.1.

8

If the list terminates with an ellipsis (...), no information about the number or types of the parameters after the comma is supplied.161)

9

The special case of an unnamed parameter of type void as the only item in the list specifies that the function has no parameters.

10

If, in a parameter declaration, an identifier can be treated either as a typedef name or as a parameter name, it shall be taken as a typedef name.

11

If the function declarator is not part of a definition of that function, parameters may have incomplete type and may use the [*] notation in their sequences of declarator specifiers to specify variable length array types.

12

The storage-class specifier in the declaration specifiers for a parameter declaration, if present, is ignored unless the declared parameter is one of the members of the parameter type list for a function definition. The optional attribute specifier sequence in a parameter declaration appertains to the parameter.

13

For a function declarator without a parameter type list: the effect is as if it were declared with a parameter type list consisting of the keyword void. A function declarator provides a prototype for the function.

14

For two function types to be compatible, both shall specify compatible return types. Moreover, the parameter type lists shall agree in the number of parameters and in use of the final ellipsis; corresponding parameters shall have compatible types. In the determination of type compatibility and of a composite type, each parameter declared with function or array type is taken as having the

adjusted type and each parameter declared with qualified type is taken as having the unqualified version of its declared type.

15

EXAMPLE 1 The declaration

int f(void), *fip(), (*pfi)();

declares a function f with no parameters returning an int, a function fip with no parameters returning a pointer to an int, and a pointer pfi to a function with no parameters returning an int. It is especially useful to compare the last two. The binding of *fip() is *(fip()), so that the declaration suggests, and the same construction in an expression requires, the calling of a function fip, and then using indirection through the pointer result to yield an int. In the declarator (*pfi)(), the extra parentheses are necessary to indicate that indirection through a pointer to a function yields a function designator, which is then used to call the function; it returns an int.

16

If the declaration occurs outside of any function, the identifiers have file scope and external linkage. If the declaration occurs inside a function, the identifiers of the functions f and fip have block scope and either internal or external linkage (depending on what file scope declarations for these identifiers are visible), and the identifier of the pointer pfi has block scope and no linkage.

17

EXAMPLE 2 The declaration

int (*apfi[3])(int *x, int *y);

declares an array apfi of three pointers to functions returning int. Each of these functions has two parameters that are pointers to int. The identifiers x and y are declared for descriptive purposes only and go out of scope at the end of the declaration of apfi.

18

EXAMPLE 3 The declaration

int (*fpfi(int (*)(long), int))(int, ...);

declares a function fpfi that returns a pointer to a function returning an int. The function fpfi has two parameters: a pointer to a function returning an int (with one parameter of type long int), and an int. The pointer returned by fpfi points to a function that has one int parameter and accepts zero or more additional arguments of any type.

19

EXAMPLE 4 The following prototype has a variably modified parameter.

void addscalar(int n, int m,
      double a[n][n*m+300], double x);
int main(void)
{
      double b[4][308];
      addscalar(4, 2, b, 2.17);
      return 0;
}
void addscalar(int n, int m,
      double a[n][n*m+300], double x)
{
      for (int i = 0; i  <  n; i++)
            for (int j = 0, k = n*m+300; j  <  k; j++)
                  // a is a pointer to a VLA with n*m+300 elements
                  a[i][j] += x;
}
20

EXAMPLE 5 The following are all compatible function prototype declarators.

double maximum(int n, int m, double a[n][m]);
double maximum(int n, int m, double a[*][*]);
double maximum(int n, int m, double a[ ][*]);
double maximum(int n, int m, double a[ ][m]);
void f(double (* restrict a)[5]);
void f(double a[restrict][5]);
void f(double a[restrict 3][5]);
void f(double a[restrict static 3][5]);

The last declaration also specifies that the argument corresponding to a in any call to f can be expected to be a non-null pointer to the first of at least three arrays of 5 doubles, which the others do not.

Forward references: function definitions (6.9.2), type names (6.7.8).

6.7.8 Type names

Syntax

Semantics

2

In several contexts, it is necessary to specify a type. This is accomplished using a type name, which is syntactically a declaration for a function or an object of that type that omits the identifier.162) The optional attribute specifier sequence in a direct abstract declarator appertains to the preceding array or function type. The attribute specifier sequence affects the type only for the declaration it appears in, not other declarations involving the same type.

3

EXAMPLE The constructions

(a)       int
(b)       int *
(c)       int *[3]
(d)       int (*)[3]
(e)       int (*)[*]
(f)       int *()
(g)       int (*)(void)
(h)       int (*const [])(unsigned int, ...)

name respectively the types

(a) int,

(b) pointer to int,

(c) array of three pointers to int,

(h) array of an unspecified number of constant pointers to functions, each with one parameter that has type unsigned int and an unspecified number of other parameters, returning an int.

6.7.9 Type definitions

Syntax

Constraints

2

If a typedef name specifies a variably modified type then it shall have block scope.

Semantics

3

In a declaration whose storage-class specifier is typedef, each declarator defines an identifier to be a typedef name that denotes the type specified for the identifier in the way described in 6.7.7. Any array size expressions associated with variable length array declarators and typeof operators are evaluated each time the declaration of the typedef name is reached in the order of execution. A typedef declaration does not introduce a new type, only a synonym for the type so specified. That is, in the following declarations:

typedef T type_ident;
type_ident D;

type_ident is defined as a typedef name with the type specified by the declaration specifiers in T (known as T), and the identifier in D has the type "derived-declarator-type-list T" where the deriveddeclarator-type-list is specified by the declarators of D. A typedef name shares the same name space as other identifiers declared in ordinary declarators. If the identifier is redeclared in an enclosed block, the type of the inner declaration shall not be inferred (6.7.10).

4

EXAMPLE 1 After

typedef int MILES, KLICKSP();
typedef struct { double hi, lo; } range;
the constructions
MILES distance;
extern KLICKSP *metricp;
range x;
range z, *zp;

are all valid declarations. The type of distance is int, that of metricp is "pointer to function with no parameters returning int", and that of x and z is the specified structure; zp is a pointer to such a structure. The object distance has a type compatible with any other int object.

5

EXAMPLE 2 After the declarations

typedef struct s1 { int x; } t1, *tp1;
typedef struct s2 { int x; } t2, *tp2;

type t1 and the type pointed to by tp1 are compatible. Type t1 is also compatible with type struct s1, but not compatible with the types struct s2, t2, the type pointed to by tp2, or int.

6

EXAMPLE 3 The following obscure constructions

typedef signed int t;
typedef int plain;
struct tag {
      unsigned t:4;
      const t:5;
      plain r:5;
};
t f(t (t));
long t;

then a function f is declared with type "function returning signed int with one unnamed parameter with type pointer to function returning signed int with one unnamed parameter with type signed int", and an identifier t with type long int.

7

EXAMPLE 4 On the other hand, typedef names can be used to improve code readability. All three of the following declarations of the signal function specify exactly the same type, the first without making use of any typedef names.

typedef void fv(int), (*pfv)(int);
void (*signal(int, void (*)(int)))(int);
fv *signal(int, fv *);
pfv signal(int, pfv);
8

EXAMPLE 5 If a typedef name denotes a variable length array type, the length of the array is fixed at the time the typedef name is defined, not each time it is used:

void copyt(int n)
{
      typedef int B[n];   // B is n ints, n evaluated now
      n += 1;
      B a;                // a is n ints, n without += 1
      int b[n];           // a and b are different sizes
      for (int i = 1; i  <  n; i++)
            a[i-1] = b[i];
}

6.7.10 Type inference

Constraints

1

A declaration for which the type is inferred shall contain the storage-class specifier auto.

Semantics

2

For such a declaration that is the definition of an object the init-declarator shall have the form

direct-declarator = assignment-expression

The inferred type of the declared object is the type of the assignment expression after lvalue, array to pointer or function to pointer conversion, additionally qualified by qualifiers and amended by attributes as they appear in the declaration specifiers, if any.163) Implementations may or may not

:
identifier attribute-specifier-sequenceopt

optionally enclosed in balanced pairs of parentheses; if a direct declarator of a different form is accepted, the behavior is implementation-defined.164)

3

NOTE A declaration that also defines a structure or union type has implementation-defined behavior. Here, the identifier x which is not ordinary but in the name space of the structure type is declared.

auto p = (struct { int x; } *)0;
Even a forward declaration of a structure tag
struct s;
auto p = (struct s { int x; } *)0;
would not change that situation. A direct use of the structure definition as the type specifier ensures portability of the declaration.
struct s { int x; } * p = 0;
The following also has implementation-defined behavior:
auto alignas (struct s *) x = 0;
4

EXAMPLE 1 The following file scope definitions:

static auto a = 3.5;
auto p = &a;
are interpreted as if they had been written as:
static double a = 3.5;
double * p = &a;

So effectively a is a double and p is a double*. Note that the restrictions on the syntax of such declarations does not allow the declarator to be *p, but that the final type here nevertheless is a pointer type.

5

EXAMPLE 2 The scope of the identifier for which the type is inferred only starts after the end of the initializer (6.2.1), so the assignment expression cannot use the identifier to refer to the object or function that is declared, for example to take its address. Any use of the identifier in the initializer is invalid, even if an entity with the same name exists in an outer scope.

{
      double a = 7;
      double b = 9;
      {
            double b = b * b;  // undefined, uses uninitialized
                               // variable without address
            printf("%g\n", a); // valid, uses "a" from outer scope, prints 7
            auto a   = a * a;  // invalid, "a" from outer scope is not
                               // visible during initialization
      }
      {
            auto b   = a * a;  // valid, uses "a" from outer scope
            auto a   = b;      // valid, "a" from outer scope not visible now
            // ...
            printf("%g\n", a); // valid, uses "a" from inner scope, prints 49
      }
      // ...
}
6

EXAMPLE 3 In the following, declarations of pA and qA are valid. The type of A after array-to-pointer conversion is a pointer type, and qA is a pointer to array.

double A[3] = { 0 };
auto pA = A;
auto qA = &A;
7

EXAMPLE 4 Type inference can be used to capture the type of a call to a type-generic function. It ensures that the same type as the argument x is used.

#include <tgmath.h>
auto y = cos(x);

If instead the type of y is explicitly specified to a different type than x, a diagnosis of the mismatch is not enforced.

8

EXAMPLE 5 A type-generic macro that generalizes the div functions (7.24.6.2) is defined and used as follows.

#define div(X, Y) _Generic((X)+(Y),\
      int: div,\
      long: ldiv,\
      long long: lldiv)((X), (Y))
auto z = div(x, y);
auto q = z.quot;
auto r = z.rem;
9

EXAMPLE 6 Definitions of objects with inferred type are valid in all contexts that allow the initializer syntax as described. In particular they can be used to ensure type safety of for-loop controlling expressions.

for (auto i = j; i < 2*j; ++i) {
      // ...
}

Here, regardless of the integer rank or signedness of the type of j, i will have the non-atomic unqualified version of j’s type. So, after lvalue conversion and possible promotion, the two operands of the < operator in the controlling expression are guaranteed to have the same type, and, in particular, the same signedness.

6.7.11 Initialization

Syntax

2

An empty brace pair ({}) is called an empty initializer and is referred to as empty initialization.

Constraints

3

No initializer shall attempt to provide a value for an object not contained within the entity being initialized.

4

The type of the entity to be initialized shall be an array of unknown size or a complete object type. An entity of variable length array type shall not be initialized except by an empty initializer. An array of unknown size shall not be initialized by an empty initializer.

5

All the expressions in an initializer for an object that has static or thread storage duration or is declared with the constexpr storage-class specifier shall be constant expressions or string literals.

6

If the declaration of an identifier has block scope, and the identifier has external or internal linkage, the declaration shall have no initializer for the identifier.

7

If a designator has the form

[ constant-expression ]

then the current object (defined subsequently in this subclause) shall have array type and the expression shall be an integer constant expression. If the array is of unknown size, any nonnegative value is valid.

8

If a designator has the form

. identifier

then the current object (defined subsequently in this subclause) shall have structure or union type and the identifier shall be the name of a member of that type.

Semantics

9

An initializer specifies the initial value stored in an object. For objects with atomic type additional restrictions apply, see 7.17.2 and 7.17.8.

10

Except where explicitly stated otherwise, for the purposes of this subclause unnamed members of objects of structure and union type do not participate in initialization. Unnamed members of structure objects have indeterminate representation even after initialization.

11

If an object that has automatic storage duration is not initialized explicitly, its representation is indeterminate. If an object that has static or thread storage duration is not initialized explicitly, or any object is initialized with an empty initializer, then it is subject to default initialization, which initializes an object as follows:

  • if it has pointer type, it is initialized to a null pointer;
  • if it has decimal floating type, it is initialized to positive zero, and the quantum exponent is implementation-defined;165)
  • if it has arithmetic type, and it does not have decimal floating type, it is initialized to (positive or unsigned) zero;
  • if it is an aggregate, every member is initialized (recursively) according to these rules, and any padding is initialized to zero bits;
12

The initializer for a scalar shall be a single expression, optionally enclosed in braces, or it shall be an empty initializer. If the initializer is not the empty initializer, the initial value of the object is that of the expression (after conversion); the same type constraints and conversions as for simple assignment apply, taking the type of the scalar to be the unqualified version of its declared type.

13

The rest of this subclause deals with initializers for objects that have aggregate or union type.

14

The initializer for a structure or union object shall be either an initializer list as described subsequently in this subclause, or a single expression that has compatible structure or union type. In the latter case, the initial value of the object, including unnamed members, is that of the expression.166)

15

An array of character type may be initialized by a character string literal or UTF-8 string literal, optionally enclosed in braces. Successive bytes of the string literal (including the terminating null character if there is room or if the array is of unknown size) initialize the elements of the array.

16

An array with element type compatible with a qualified or unqualified wchar_t, char16_t, or char32_t may be initialized by a wide string literal with the corresponding encoding prefix (L, u, or U, respectively), optionally enclosed in braces. Successive wide characters of the wide string literal (including the terminating null wide character if there is room or if the array is of unknown size) initialize the elements of the array.

17

Otherwise, the initializer for an object that has aggregate or union type shall be a brace-enclosed list of initializers for the elements or named members.

18

Each brace-enclosed initializer list has an associated current object. When no designations are present, subobjects of the current object are initialized in order according to the type of the current object: array elements in increasing subscript order, structure members in declaration order, and the first named member of a union.167) In contrast, a designation causes the following initializer to begin initialization of the subobject described by the designator. Initialization then continues forward in order, beginning with the next subobject after that described by the designator.168)

19

Each designator list begins its description with the current object associated with the closest surrounding brace pair. Each item in the designator list (in order) specifies a particular member of its current object and changes the current object for the next designator (if any) to be that member.169)

The current object that results at the end of the designator list is the subobject to be initialized by the following initializer.

20

The initialization shall occur in initializer list order, each initializer provided for a particular subobject overriding any previously listed initializer for the same subobject;170) all subobjects that are not initialized explicitly are subject to default initialization.

21

If the aggregate or union contains elements or members that are aggregates or unions, these rules apply recursively to the subaggregates or contained unions. If the initializer of a subaggregate or contained union begins with a left brace, the initializers enclosed by that brace and its matching right brace initialize the elements or members of the subaggregate or the contained union. Otherwise, only enough initializers from the list are taken to account for the elements or members of the subaggregate or the first member of the contained union; any remaining initializers are left to initialize the next element or member of the aggregate of which the current subaggregate or contained union is a part.

22

If there are fewer initializers in a brace-enclosed list than there are elements or members of an

aggregate, or fewer characters in a string literal used to initialize an array of known size than there are elements in the array, the remainder of the aggregate is subject to default initialization.

23

If an array of unknown size is initialized, its size is determined by the largest indexed element with an explicit initializer. The array type is completed at the end of its initializer list.

24

The evaluations of the initialization list expressions are indeterminately sequenced with respect to one another and thus the order in which any side effects occur is unspecified.171)

25

EXAMPLE 1 Provided that <complex.h> has been included, the declarations

int i = 3.5;
double complex c = 5 + 3 * I;

define and initialize i with the value 3 and c with the value 5.0+i3.0.

26

EXAMPLE 2 The declaration

int x[] = { 1, 3, 5 };

defines and initializes x as a one-dimensional array object that has three elements, as no size was specified and there are three initializers.

27

EXAMPLE 3 The declaration

int y[4][3] = {
      { 1, 3, 5 },
      { 2, 4, 6 },
      { 3, 5, 7 },
};
is a definition with a fully bracketed initialization: 1, 3, and 5 initialize the first row of y (the array object y[0]), namely y[0][0], y[0][1], and y[0][2]. Likewise the next two lines initialize y[1] and y[2]. The initializer ends early, so y[3] is initialized with zeros. Precisely the same effect could have been achieved by
int y[4][3] = {
      1, 3, 5, 2, 4, 6, 3, 5, 7
};

The initializer for y[0] does not begin with a left brace, so three items from the list are used. Likewise the next three are taken successively for y[1] and y[2].

28

EXAMPLE 4 The declaration

int z[4][3] = {
      { 1 }, { 2 }, { 3 }, { 4 }
};

initializes the first column of z as specified and initializes the rest with zeros.

29

EXAMPLE 5 The declaration

struct { int a[3], b; } w[] = { { 1 }, 2 };

is a definition with an inconsistently bracketed initialization. It defines an array with two element structures: w[0].a[0] is 1 and w[1].a[0] is 2; all the other elements are zero.

30

EXAMPLE 6 The declaration

short q[4][3][2] = {
      { 1 },
      { 2, 3 },
      { 4, 5, 6 }
};
short q[4][3][2] = {
      1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
      2, 3, 0, 0, 0, 0,
      4, 5, 6
};
short q[4][3][2] = {
      {
            { 1 },
      },
      {
            { 2, 3 },
      },
      {
            { 4, 5 },
            { 6 },
      }
};

in a fully bracketed form.

31

Note that the fully bracketed and minimally bracketed forms of initialization are, in general, less likely to cause confusion.

32

EXAMPLE 7 One form of initialization that completes array types involves typedef names. Given the declaration

typedef int A[];  // OK - declared with block scope
the declaration
A a = { 1, 2 }, b = { 3, 4, 5 };
is identical to
int a[] = { 1, 2 }, b[] = { 3, 4, 5 };

due to the rules for incomplete types.

33

EXAMPLE 8 The declaration

char s[] = "abc", t[3] = "abc";
defines "plain" char array objects s and t whose elements are initialized with character string literals. This declaration is identical to
char s[] = { ’a’, ’b’, ’c’, ’\0’ },
     t[] = { ’a’, ’b’, ’c’ };

The contents of the arrays are modifiable. On the other hand, the declaration

char *p = "abc";

defines p with type "pointer to char" and initializes it to point to an object with type "array of char" with length 4 whose elements are initialized with a character string literal. If an attempt is made to use p to modify the contents of the array, the behavior is undefined.

34

EXAMPLE 9 Arrays can be initialized to correspond to the elements of an enumeration by using designators:

enum { member_one, member_two };
const char *nm[] = {
      [member_two] = "member two",
      [member_one] = "member one",
};
35

EXAMPLE 10 Structure members can be initialized to nonzero values without depending on their order:

div_t answer = {.quot = 2, .rem = -1 };
36

EXAMPLE 11 Designators can be used to provide explicit initialization when unadorned initializer lists are difficult to understand:

struct { int a[3], b; } w[] =
      { [0].a = {1}, [1].a[0] = 2 };
37

EXAMPLE 12

struct T {
      int k;
      int l;
};
struct S {
      int i;
      struct T t;
};
struct T x = {.l = 43, .k = 42, };
void f(void)
{
      struct S l = { 1, .t = x, .t.l = 41, };
}

The value of l.t.k is 42, because implicit initialization does not override explicit initialization.

38

EXAMPLE 13 Space can be "allocated" from both ends of an array by using a single designator:

int a[A_MAX] = {
      1, 3, 5, 7, 9, [A_MAX-5] = 8, 6, 4, 2, 0
};

In the preceding snippet, if A_MAX is greater than ten, there will be some zero-valued elements in the middle; if it is less than ten, some of the values provided by the first five initializers will be overridden by the second five.

39

EXAMPLE 14 Any member of a union can be initialized:

union { /* ... */ } u = {.any_member = 42 };
Forward references: common definitions <stddef.h> (7.21).

6.7.12 Static assertions

Syntax

Constraints

2

The constant expression shall compare unequal to 0.

Semantics

3

The constant expression shall be an integer constant expression. If the value of the constant expression compares unequal to 0, the declaration has no effect. Otherwise, the constraint is violated and the implementation shall produce a diagnostic message which should include the text of the string literal, if present.

Forward references: diagnostics (7.2).

6.7.13 Attributes

6.7.13.1 Introduction

1

Attributes specify additional information for various source constructs such as types, objects, identifiers, or blocks. They are identified by an attribute token, which can either be a attribute prefixed token (for implementation-specific attributes) or a standard attribute specified by an identifier (for attributes specified in this document).

2

Support for any of the standard attributes specified in this document is implementation-defined and optional. For an attribute token (including an attribute prefixed token) not specified in this document, the behavior is implementation-defined. Any attribute token that is not supported by the implementation is ignored.

3

Attributes are said to appertain to some source construct, identified by the syntactic context where they appear, and for each individual attribute, the corresponding clause constrains the syntactic context in which this appurtenance is valid. The attribute specifier sequence appertaining to some source construct shall contain only attributes that are allowed to apply to that source construct.

4

In all aspects of the language, a standard attribute specified by this document as an identifier attr and an identifier of the form __attr__ shall behave the same when used as an attribute token, except for the spelling.172)

5

For all standard attributes specified by this document, the current value when its token sequence is given to the __has_c_attribute conditional inclusion expression (6.10.2) is written in the associated subclause for that attribute. A history of those values can be found in Annex M.

Recommended practice
6

It is recommended that implementations support all standard attributes as defined in this document.

6.7.13.2 General

Constraints

2

The identifier in a standard attribute shall be one of:

deprecated fallthrough

maybe_unused nodiscard

noreturn _Noreturn

unsequenced reproducible

Semantics

3

An attribute specifier that contains no attributes has no effect. The order in which attribute tokens appear in an attribute list is not significant. If a keyword (6.4.1) that satisfies the syntactic requirements of an identifier (6.4.2) is contained in an attribute token, it is considered an identifier. A strictly conforming program using a standard attribute remains strictly conforming in the absence of that attribute.173)

4

NOTE For each standard attribute, the form of the balanced token sequence, if any, will be specified.

Recommended practice

5

Each implementation should choose a distinctive name for the attribute prefix in an attribute prefixed token. Implementations should not define attributes without an attribute prefix unless it is a standard attribute as specified in this document.

6

EXAMPLE 1 Suppose that an implementation chooses the attribute prefix hal and provides specific attributes named daisy and rosie.

[[deprecated, hal::daisy]] double nine1000(double);
[[deprecated]] [[hal::daisy]] double nine1000(double);
[[deprecated]] double nine1000 [[hal::daisy]] (double);
Then all the following declarations should be equivalent aside from the spelling:
[[__deprecated__, __hal__::__daisy__]] double nine1000(double);
[[__deprecated__]] [[__hal__::__daisy__]] double nine1000(double);
[[__deprecated__]] double nine1000 [[__hal__::__daisy__]] (double);

These use the alternate spelling that is required for all standard attributes and recommended for prefixed attributes. These may be better-suited for use in header files, where the use of the alternate spelling avoids naming conflicts with user-provided macros.

7

EXAMPLE 2 For the same implementation, the following two declarations are equivalent, because the ordering inside attribute lists is not important.

[[hal::daisy, hal::rosie]] double nine999(double);
[[hal::rosie, hal::daisy]] double nine999(double);
On the other hand the following two declarations are not equivalent, because the ordering of different attribute specifiers may affect the semantics.
[[hal::daisy]] [[hal::rosie]] double nine999(double);
[[hal::rosie]] [[hal::daisy]] double nine999(double); // may have different semantics

6.7.13.3 The nodiscard attribute

1

The nodiscard attribute shall be applied to a function or to the definition of a structure, union, or enumerated type. If an attribute argument clause is present, it shall have the form:

( string-literal )

Semantics
2

The __has_c_attribute conditional inclusion expression (6.10.2) shall return the value 202311L when given nodiscard as the pp-tokens operand if the implementation supports the attribute.

3

A name or entity declared without the nodiscard attribute can later be redeclared with the attribute and vice versa. An entity is considered marked after the first declaration that marks it.

Recommended practice
4

A nodiscard call is a function call expression that calls a function previously declared with attribute nodiscard, or whose return type is a structure, union, or enumerated type marked with attribute nodiscard. Evaluation of a nodiscard call as a void expression (6.8.4) is discouraged unless explicitly cast to void. Implementations are encouraged to issue a diagnostic in such cases. This is typically because immediately discarding the return value of a nodiscard call has surprising consequences.

5

The diagnostic message should include text provided by the string literal within the attribute argument clause of any nodiscard attribute applied to the name or entity.

6

EXAMPLE 1

struct [[nodiscard]] error_info { /*...*/ };
struct error_info enable_missile_safety_mode(void);
void launch_missiles(void);
void test_missiles(void) {
      enable_missile_safety_mode();
      launch_missiles();
}

A diagnostic for the call to enable_missile_safety_mode is encouraged.

7

EXAMPLE 2

[[nodiscard]] int important_func(void);
void call(void) {
      int i = important_func();
}

No diagnostic for the call to important_func is encouraged despite the value of i not being used.

8

EXAMPLE 3

[[nodiscard("armer needs to check armed state")]]
bool arm_detonator(int within);
void call(void) {
      arm_detonator(3);
      detonate();
}

A diagnostic for the call to arm_detonator using the string literal "armer needs to check armed state" from the attribute argument clause is encouraged.

6.7.13.4 The maybe_unused attribute

1

The maybe_unused attribute shall be applied to the declaration of a structure, a union, a typedef name, an object, a structure or union member, a function, an enumeration, an enumerator, or a label. No attribute argument clause shall be present.

Semantics
2

The maybe_unused attribute indicates that a name or entity is possibly intentionally unused.

3

The __has_c_attribute conditional inclusion expression (6.10.2) shall return the value 202311L when given maybe_unused as the pp-tokens operand if the implementation supports the attribute.

A name or entity declared without the maybe_unused attribute can later be redeclared with the attribute and vice versa. An entity is considered marked with the attribute after the first declaration that marks it.

Recommended practice
4

For an entity marked maybe_unused, implementations are encouraged not to emit a diagnostic that the entity is unused, or that the entity is used despite the presence of the attribute.

5

EXAMPLE

[[maybe_unused]] void f([[maybe_unused]] int i) {
      [[maybe_unused]] int j = i + 100;
      assert(j);
}

Implementations are encouraged not to diagnose that j is unused, even if NDEBUG is defined.

6.7.13.5 The deprecated attribute

1

The deprecated attribute shall be applied to the declaration of a structure, a union, a typedef name, an object, a structure or union member, a function, an enumeration, or an enumerator.

2

If an attribute argument clause is present, it shall have the form:

( string-literal )

Semantics
3

The deprecated attribute can be used to mark names and entities whose use is still allowed, but is discouraged for some reason.174)

4

The __has_c_attribute conditional inclusion expression (6.10.2) shall return the value 202311L when given deprecated as the pp-tokens operand if the implementation supports the attribute.

5

A name or entity declared without the deprecated attribute can later be redeclared with the attribute and vice versa. An entity is considered marked with the attribute after the first declaration that marks it.

Recommended practice

6

Implementations should use the deprecated attribute to produce a diagnostic message in case the program refers to a name or entity other than to declare it, after a declaration that specifies the attribute, when the reference to the name or entity is not within the context of a related deprecated entity. The diagnostic message should include text provided by the string literal within the attribute argument clause of any deprecated attribute applied to the name or entity.

7

EXAMPLE

struct [[deprecated]] S {
      int a;
};
enum [[deprecated]] E1 {
      one
};
enum E2 {
      two [[deprecated("use ’three’ instead")]],
      three
};
[[deprecated]] typedef int Foo;
void f1(struct S s) { // Diagnose use of S
      int i = one; // Diagnose use of E1
      int j = two; // Diagnose use of two: "use ’three’ instead"
      int k = three;
      Foo f; // Diagnose use of Foo
}
[[deprecated]] void f2(struct S s) {
      int i = one;
      int j = two;
      int k = three;
      Foo f;
}
struct [[deprecated]] T {
      Foo f;
      struct S s;
};

Implementations are encouraged to diagnose the use of deprecated entities within a context which is not itself deprecated, as indicated for function f1, but not to diagnose within function f2 and struct T, as they are themselves deprecated.

6.7.13.6 The fallthrough attribute

1

The attribute token fallthrough shall only appear in an attribute declaration (6.7); such a declaration is a fallthrough declaration. No attribute argument clause shall be present. A fallthrough declaration may only appear within an enclosing switch statement (6.8.5.3). The next block item (6.8.3) that would be encountered after a fallthrough declaration shall be a case label or default label associated with the innermost enclosing switch statement and, if the fallthrough declaration is contained in an iteration statement, the next statement shall be part of the same execution of the secondary block of the innermost enclosing iteration statement.

Semantics
2

The __has_c_attribute conditional inclusion expression (6.10.2) shall return the value 202311L when given fallthrough as the pp-tokens operand if the implementation supports the attribute.

Recommended practice

3

The use of a fallthrough declaration is intended to suppress a diagnostic that an implementation may otherwise issue for a case or default label that is reachable from another case or default label along some path of execution. Implementations are encouraged to issue a diagnostic if a fallthrough declaration is not dynamically reachable.

4

EXAMPLE

void f(int n) {
      void g(void), h(void), i(void);
      switch (n) {
      case 1: /* diagnostic on fallthrough discouraged */
      case 2:
            g();
            [[fallthrough]];
      case 3: /* diagnostic on fallthrough discouraged */
            do {
                  [[fallthrough]]; /* constraint violation: next statement is not
                                      part of the same secondary block execution */
            } while(false);
      case 6:
            do {
                  [[fallthrough]]; /* constraint violation: next statement is not
                                      part of the same secondary block execution */
            } while (n--);
      case 7:
            while (false) {
                  [[fallthrough]]; /* constraint violation: next statement is not
                                      part of the same secondary block execution */
            }
      case 5:
            h();
      case 4: /* fallthrough diagnostic encouraged */
            i();
            [[fallthrough]]; /* constraint violation */
      }
}

6.7.13.7 The noreturn and _Noreturn attributes

1

When _Noreturn is used as an attribute token (instead of a function specifier), the constraints and semantics are identical to that of the noreturn attribute token. Use of _Noreturn as an attribute token is an obsolescent feature.175)

Constraints
2

The noreturn attribute shall be applied to a function. No attribute argument clause shall be present.

Semantics
3

The first declaration of a function shall specify the noreturn attribute if any declaration of that function specifies the noreturn attribute. If a function is declared with the noreturn attribute in one translation unit and the same function is declared without the noreturn attribute in another translation unit, the behavior is undefined.

4

If a function f is called where f was previously declared with the noreturn attribute and f eventually returns, the behavior is undefined.

5

The __has_c_attribute conditional inclusion expression (6.10.2) shall return the value 202311L when given noreturn as the pp-tokens operand if the implementation supports the attribute.

Recommended practice

6

The implementation should produce a diagnostic message for a function declared with a noreturn attribute that appears to be capable of returning to its caller.

7

EXAMPLE

[[noreturn]] void f(void) {
      abort(); // ok
}
[[noreturn]] void g(int i) { // causes undefined behavior if i <= 0
      if (i > 0) abort();
}
[[noreturn]] int h(void);

Implementations are encouraged to diagnose the definition of g() because it is capable of returning to its caller. Implementations are similarly encouraged to diagnose the declaration of h() because it appears capable of returning to its caller due to the non-void return type.

6.7.13.8 Standard attributes for function types

6.7.13.8.1 General
1

The identifier in a standard function type attribute shall be one of:

unsequenced reproducible

2

An attribute for a function type shall be applied to a function declarator176) or to a type specifier that has a function type. The corresponding attribute is a property of the function type.177) No attribute argument clause shall be present.

Description
3

The main purpose of the function type properties and attributes defined in this clause is to provide the translator with information about the access of objects by a function such that certain properties of function calls can be deduced; the properties distinguish read operations (stateless and independent) and write operations (effectless, idempotent and reproducible) or a combination of both (unsequenced). Although semantically attached to a function type, the attributes described are not part of the prototype of such a function, and redeclarations and conversions that drop such an attribute are valid and constitute compatible types. Conversely, if a definition that does not have the asserted property is accessed by a function declaration or a function pointer with a type that has the attribute, the behavior is undefined.178)

4

To allow reordering of calls to functions as they are described here, possible access to objects with a lifetime that starts before or ends after a call has to be restricted; effects on all objects that are accessed during a function call are restricted to the same thread as the call and the based-on relation between pointer parameters and lvalues (6.7.4.2) models the fact that objects do not change inadvertently during the call. In the following, an operation is said to be sequenced during a function call if it is sequenced after the start of the function call179) and before the call terminates. An object definition of an object X in a function f escapes if an access to X happens while no call to f is active. An object is local to a call to a function f if its lifetime starts and ends during the call or if it is defined by f

but does not escape. A function call and an object X synchronize if all accesses to X that are not sequenced during the call happen before or after the call. Execution state that is described in the library clause, such as the floating-point environment, conversion state, locale, input/output streams, external files or errno are considered as objects for the purposes of these attributes; operations that access this state, even indirectly, are considered as lvalue conversions for the purposes of these attributes, and operations that allow to change this state are considered as store operations, for the purposes of these attributes.

5

A function definition f is stateless if any definition of an object of static or thread storage duration in f or in a function that is called by f is const but not volatile qualified.

6

An object X is observed by a function call if both synchronize, if X is not local to the call, if X has a lifetime that starts before the function call and if an access of X is sequenced during the call; the last value of X, if any, that is stored before the call is said to be the value of X that is observed by the call. A function pointer value f is independent if for any object X that is observed by some call to f through an lvalue that is not based on a parameter of the call, then all accesses to X in all calls to f during the same program execution observe the same value; otherwise if the access is based on a pointer parameter, there shall be a unique such pointer parameter P such that any access to X shall be to an lvalue that is based on P. A function definition is independent if the derived function pointer value is independent.

7

A store operation to an object X that is sequenced during a function call such that both synchronize is said to be observable if X is not local to the call, if the lifetime of X ends after the call, if the stored value is different from the value observed by the call, if any, and if it is the last value written before the termination of the call. An evaluation of a function call180) is effectless if any store operation that is sequenced during the call is the modification of an object that synchronizes with the call; if additionally the operation is observable, there shall be a unique pointer parameter P of the function such that any access to X shall be to an lvalue that is based on P. A function pointer value f is effectless if any evaluation of a function call that calls f is effectless. A function definition is effectless if the derived function pointer value is effectless.

8

An evaluation E is idempotent if a second evaluation of E can be sequenced immediately after the original one without changing the resulting value, if any, or the observable state of the execution. A function pointer value f is idempotent if any evaluation of a function call181) that calls f is idempotent. A function definition is idempotent if the derived function pointer value is idempotent.

9

A function is reproducible if it is effectless and idempotent; it is unsequenced if it is stateless, effectless, idempotent and independent.182)

10

NOTE 1 The synchronization requirements with respect to any accessed object X for the independence of functions provide boundaries up to which a function call may safely be reordered without changing the semantics of the program. If X is const but not volatile qualified the reordering is unconstrained. If it is an object that is conditioned in an initialization phase, for a single threaded program a synchronization is provided by the sequenced before relation and the reordering may, in principle, move the call just after the initialization. For a multi-threaded program, synchronization guarantees can be given by calls to synchronizing functions of the <threads.h> header or by an appropriate call to atomic_thread_fence at the end of the initialization phase. If a function is known to be independent or effectless, adding restrict qualifications to the declarations of all pointer parameters does not change the semantics of any call. Similarly, changing the memory order to memory_order_relaxed for all atomic operations during a call to such a function preserves semantics.

11

NOTE 2 In general the functions provided by the <math.h> header do not have the properties that are defined previously in this subclause; many of them change the floating-point state or errno when they encounter an error (so they have observable side effects) and the results of most of them depend on execution-wide state such as the rounding direction mode (so they are not independent). Whether a particular C library function is reproducible or unsequenced additionally often depends on properties of the implementation, such as

implementation-defined behavior for certain error conditions.

Recommended practice

12

If possible, it is recommended that implementations diagnose if an attribute of this clause is applied to a function definition that does not have the corresponding property. It is recommended that applications that assert the independent or effectless properties for functions qualify pointer parameters with restrict.

Forward references: errors <errno.h> (7.5), floating-point environment <fenv.h> (7.6), localization <locale.h> (7.11), mathematics <math.h> (7.12), fences (7.17.4), input/output <stdio.h> (7.23), threads <threads.h> (7.28), extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h> (7.31).

6.7.13.8.2 The reproducible type attribute
1

The reproducible type attribute asserts that a function or pointed-to function with that type is reproducible.

2

The __has_c_attribute conditional inclusion expression (6.10.2) shall return the value 202311L when given reproducible as the pp-tokens operand if the implementation supports the attribute.

3

EXAMPLE The attribute in the following function declaration asserts that two consecutive calls to the function will result in the same return value. Changes to the abstract state during the call are possible as long as they are not observable, but no other side effects will occur. Thus the function definition may for example use local objects of static or thread storage duration to keep track of the arguments for which the function has been called and cache their computed return values.

size_t hash(char const[static 32]) [[reproducible]];
6.7.13.8.3 The unsequenced type attribute
1

The unsequenced type attribute asserts that a function or pointed-to function with that type is unsequenced.

2

The __has_c_attribute conditional inclusion expression (6.10.2) shall return the value 202311L when given unsequenced as the pp-tokens operand if the implementation supports the attribute.

3

NOTE 1 The unsequenced type attribute asserts strong properties for such a function, in particular that certain sequencing requirements for function calls can be relaxed without affecting the state of the abstract machine. Thereby, calls to such functions are natural candidates for optimization techniques such as common subexpression elimination, local memoization or lazy evaluation.

4

NOTE 2 A proof of validity of the annotation of a function type with the unsequenced attribute may depend on the property of whether a derived function pointer escapes the translation unit or not. For a function with internal linkage where no function pointer escapes the translation unit, all calling contexts are known and it is possible, in principle, to prove that no control flow exists such that a library function is called with arguments that trigger an exceptional condition. For a function with external linkage such a proof may not be possible and the use of such a function then has to ensure that no exceptional condition results from the provided arguments.

5

NOTE 3 The unsequenced property does not necessarily imply that the function is reentrant or that calls can be executed concurrently. This is because an unsequenced function can read from and write to objects of static storage duration, as long as no change is observable after a call terminates.

6

EXAMPLE 1 The attribute in the following function declaration asserts that it doesn’t depend on any modifiable state of the abstract machine. Calls to the function can be executed out of sequence before the return value is needed and two calls to the function with the same argument value will result in the same return value.

bool tendency(signed char) [[unsequenced]];

Therefore such a call for a given argument value needs only to be executed once and the returned value can be reused when appropriate. For example, calls for all possible argument values can be executed during program startup and tabulated.

7

EXAMPLE 2 The attribute in the following function declaration asserts that it doesn’t depend on any modifiable state of the abstract machine. Within the same thread, calls to the function can be executed out of sequence before the return value is needed and two calls to the function will result in the same pointer return value. Therefore such a call needs only to be executed once in a given thread and the returned pointer value can be reused when appropriate. For example, a single call can be executed during thread startup and the return value p and the value of the object *p of type toto const can be cached.

typedef struct toto toto;
toto const* toto_zero(void) [[unsequenced]];
8

EXAMPLE 3 The unsequenced property of a function f can be locally asserted within a function g that uses it. For example the library function sqrt is in general not unsequenced because a negative argument will raise a domain error and because the result may depend on the rounding mode. Nevertheless in contexts similar to the following function a user can prove that it will not be called with invalid arguments, and, that the floating-point environment has the same value for all calls.

#include <math.h>
#include <fenv.h>
inline double distance (double const x[static 2]) [[reproducible]] {
      #pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT OFF
      #pragma STDC FENV_ROUND  FE_TONEAREST
      // We assert that sqrt will not be called with invalid arguments
      // and the result only depends on the argument value.
      extern typeof(sqrt) [[unsequenced]] sqrt;
      return sqrt(x[0]*x[0] + x[1]*x[1]);
}
The function distance potentially has the side effect of changing the floating-point environment. Nevertheless the floating environment is thread local, thus a change to that state outside the function is sequenced with the change within and additionally the observed value is restored when the function returns. Thus this side effect is not observable for a caller. Overall the function distance is stateless, effectless and idempotent and in particular it is reproducible as the attribute indicates. Because the function can be called in a context where the floating-point environment has different state, distance is not independent and thus it is also not unsequenced. Nevertheless, adding an unsequenced attribute where this is justified may introduce optimization opportunities.
double g (double y[static 1], double const x[static 2]) {
      // We assert that distance will not see different states of the floating
      // point environment.
      extern double distance (double const x[static 2]) [[unsequenced]];
      y[0] = distance(x);
      ...
      return distance(x);   // replacement by y[0] is valid
}

6.8 Statements and blocks

6.8.1 General

Syntax

Semantics

2

A statement specifies an action to be performed. Except as indicated, statements are executed in sequence. The optional attribute specifier sequence appertains to the respective statement.

3

A block is either a primary block, a secondary block, or the block associated with a function definition; it allows a set of declarations and statements to be grouped into one syntactic unit. Whenever a block B appears in the syntax production as part of the definition of an enclosing block A, scopes of identifiers and lifetimes of objects that are associated with B do not extend to the parts of A that are outside of B. The initializers of objects that have automatic storage duration, and any size expressions and typeof operators in declarations of ordinary identifiers with block scope, are evaluated and the values are stored in the objects (the representation of objects without an initializer becomes indeterminate) each time the declaration is reached in the order of execution, as if it were a statement, and within each declaration in the order that declarators appear.

4

A full expression is an expression that is not part of another expression, nor part of a declarator or abstract declarator. There is also an implicit full expression in which the non-constant size expressions for a variably modified type are evaluated; within that full expression, the evaluation of different size expressions are unsequenced with respect to one another. There is a sequence point between the evaluation of a full expression and the evaluation of the next full expression to be evaluated.

5

NOTE Each of the following is a full expression:

  • a full declarator for a variably modified type,
  • an initializer that is not part of a compound literal,
  • the expression in an expression statement,
  • the controlling expression of a selection statement (if or switch),
  • the controlling expression of a while or do statement,
  • each of the (optional) expressions of a for statement,
  • the (optional) expression in a return statement.

While a constant expression satisfies the definition of a full expression, evaluating it does not depend on nor produce any side effects, so the sequencing implications of being a full expression are not relevant to a constant expression.

Forward references: expression and null statements (6.8.4), selection statements (6.8.5), iteration statements (6.8.6), the return statement (6.8.7.5).

6.8.2 Labeled statements

Syntax

Constraints

2

A case or default label shall appear only in a switch statement. Further constraints on such labels are discussed under the switch statement.

3

Label names shall be unique within a function.

Semantics

4

Any statement or declaration in a compound statement may be preceded by a prefix that declares an identifier as a label name. The optional attribute specifier sequence appertains to the label. Labels in themselves do not alter the flow of control, which continues unimpeded across them.

Forward references: the goto statement (6.8.7.2), the switch statement (6.8.5.3) .

6.8.3 Compound statement

Syntax

Semantics

2

A compound statement that is a function body together with the parameter type list and the optional attribute specifier sequence between them forms the block associated with the function definition in which it appears. Otherwise, it is a block that is different from any other block. A label shall be translated as if it were followed by a null statement.

6.8.4 Expression and null statements

Syntax

Semantics

2

The attribute specifier sequence appertains to the expression. The expression in an expression statement is evaluated as a void expression for its side effects.183)

3

A null statement (consisting of just a semicolon) performs no operations.

4

EXAMPLE 1 If a function call is evaluated as an expression statement for its side effects only, the discarding of its value can be made explicit by converting the expression to a void expression by means of a cast:

int p(int);
/* ... */
(void)p(0);
5

EXAMPLE 2 In the program fragment

char *s;
/* ... */
while (*s++ != ’\0’)
      ;

a null statement is used to supply an empty loop body to the iteration statement.

Forward references: iteration statements (6.8.6).

6.8.5 Selection statements

6.8.5.1 General

Semantics
2

A selection statement selects among a set of secondary blocks depending on the value of a controlling expression.

6.8.5.2 The if statement

1

The controlling expression of an if statement shall have scalar type.

Semantics
2

In both forms, the first substatement is executed if the expression compares unequal to 0. In the else form, the second substatement is executed if the expression compares equal to 0. If the first substatement is reached via a label, the second substatement is not executed.

3

An else is associated with the lexically nearest preceding if that is allowed by the syntax.

6.8.5.3 The switch statement

1

The controlling expression of a switch statement shall have integer type.

2

If a switch statement has an associated case or default label within the scope of an identifier with a variably modified type, the entire switch statement shall be within the scope of that identifier.184)

3

The expression of each case label shall be an integer constant expression and no two of the case constant expressions associated to the same switch statement shall have the same value after conversion. There may be at most one default label associated to a switch statement. (Any enclosed switch statement may have a default label or case constant expressions with values that duplicate case constant expressions in the enclosing switch statement.)

Semantics

4

A switch statement causes control to jump to, into, or past the statement that is the switch body, depending on the value of a controlling expression, and on the presence of a default label and the values of any case labels on or in the switch body. A case or default label is accessible only within the closest enclosing switch statement.

5

The integer promotions are performed on the controlling expression. The constant expression in each case label is converted to the promoted type of the controlling expression. If a converted value matches that of the promoted controlling expression, control jumps to the statement or declaration following the matched case label. Otherwise, if there is a default label, control jumps to the statement or declaration following the default label. If no converted case constant expression matches and there is no default label, no part of the switch body is executed.

Implementation limits

6

As discussed in 5.2.5.2, the implementation may limit the number of case values in a switch statement.

7

EXAMPLE In the artificial program fragment

switch (expr)
{
      int i = 4;
      f(i);
case 0:
      i = 17;
      /* falls through into default code */
default:
      printf("%d\n", i);
}

the object whose identifier is i exists with automatic storage duration (within the block) but is never initialized, and thus if the controlling expression has a nonzero value, the call to the printf function will access an object with an indeterminate representation. Similarly, the call to the function f cannot be reached.

6.8.6 Iteration statements

6.8.6.1 General

Constraints
2

The controlling expression of an iteration statement shall have scalar type.

Semantics
3

An iteration statement causes a secondary block called the loop body to be executed repeatedly until the controlling expression compares equal to 0. The repetition occurs regardless of whether the loop body is entered from the iteration statement or by a jump.185)

4

An iteration statement may be assumed by the implementation to terminate if its controlling expression is not a constant expression,186) and none of the following operations are performed in its

body, controlling expression or (in the case of a for statement) its expression-3:187)

6.8.6.2 The while statement

1

The evaluation of the controlling expression takes place before each execution of the loop body.

6.8.6.3 The do statement

1

The evaluation of the controlling expression takes place after each execution of the loop body.

6.8.6.4 The for statement

1

The statement

for (clause-1; expression-2; expression-3) statement

behaves as follows: The expression expression-2 is the controlling expression that is evaluated before each execution of the loop body. The expression expression-3 is evaluated as a void expression after each execution of the loop body. If clause-1 is a declaration, the scope of any identifiers it declares is the remainder of the declaration and the entire loop, including the other two expressions; it is reached in the order of execution before the first evaluation of the controlling expression. If clause-1 is an expression, it is evaluated as a void expression before the first evaluation of the controlling expression.188)

2

Both clause-1 and expression-3 can be omitted. An omitted expression-2 is replaced by a nonzero constant.

6.8.7 Jump statements

6.8.7.1 General

1
jump-statement:
goto identifier ;
continue ;
break ;
return expressionopt ;
Semantics
2

A jump statement causes an unconditional jump to another place.

6.8.7.2 The goto statement

1

The identifier in a goto statement shall name a label located somewhere in the enclosing function. A goto statement shall not jump from outside the scope of an identifier having a variably modified type to inside the scope of that identifier.

Semantics

2

A goto statement causes an unconditional jump to the statement prefixed by the named label in the enclosing function.

3

EXAMPLE 1 It is sometimes convenient to jump into the middle of a complicated set of statements. The following outline presents one possible approach to a problem based on these three assumptions:

  1. The general initialization code accesses objects only visible to the current function.
  2. The general initialization code is too large to warrant duplication.
  3. The code to determine the next operation is at the head of the loop. (To allow it to be reached by continue

statements, for example.)

/* ... */
goto first_time;
for (;;) {
      // determine next operation
      /* ... */
      if (need to reinitialize) {
            // reinitialize-only code
            /* ... */
      first_time:
            // general initialization code
            /* ... */
            continue;
      }
      // handle other operations
      /* ... */
}
4

EXAMPLE 2 A goto statement which jumps past any declarations of objects with variably modified types is not conforming. A jump within the scope, however, is valid.

goto lab3;              // invalid:  going INTO scope of VLA.
{
      double a[n];
      a[j] = 4.4;
lab3:
      a[j] = 3.3;
      goto lab4;        // valid:  going WITHIN scope of VLA.
      a[j] = 5.5;
lab4:
      a[j] = 6.6;
}
goto lab4;              // invalid:  going INTO scope of VLA.

6.8.7.3 The continue statement

1

A continue statement shall appear only in or as a loop body.

Semantics
2

A continue statement causes a jump to the loop-continuation portion of the innermost enclosing iteration statement; that is, to the end of the loop body. More precisely, in each of the statements

while (/* ...  */) {       do {                        for (/* ...  */) {
   /* ...  */                 /* ...  */                  /* ...  */
   continue;                  continue;                   continue;
   /* ...  */                 /* ...  */                  /* ...  */
contin:                    contin:;                    contin:
}                          } while (/* ...  */);       }

unless the continue statement shown is in an enclosed iteration statement (in which case it is interpreted within that statement), it is equivalent to goto contin; .189)

6.8.7.4 The break statement

1

A break statement shall appear only in or as a switch body or loop body.

Semantics
2

A break statement terminates execution of the innermost enclosing switch or iteration statement.

6.8.7.5 The return statement

1

A return statement with an expression shall not appear in a function whose return type is void. A return statement without an expression shall only appear in a function whose return type is void.

Semantics
2

A return statement terminates execution of the current function and returns control to its caller. A function may have any number of return statements.

3

If a return statement with an expression is executed, the value of the expression is returned to the caller as the value of the function call expression. If the expression has a type different from the return type of the function in which it appears, the value is converted as if by assignment to an object having the return type of the function.190)

4

EXAMPLE In:

struct s { double i; } f(void);
union {
      struct {
            int f1;
            struct s f2;
      } u1;
      struct {
            struct s f3;
            int f4;
      } u2;
} g;
struct s f(void)
{
      return g.u1.f2;
}
/* ... */
g.u2.f3 = f();

there is no undefined behavior, although there would be if the assignment were done directly (without using a function call to fetch the value).

6.9 External definitions

6.9.1 General

Syntax

Constraints

2

The storage-class specifier register shall not appear in the declaration specifiers in an external declaration. The storage-class specifier auto shall only appear in the declaration specifiers in an external declaration if the type is inferred.

3

There shall be no more than one external definition for each identifier declared with internal linkage in a translation unit. Moreover, if an identifier declared with internal linkage is used in an expression there shall be exactly one external definition for the identifier in the translation unit, unless it is:

  • part of the operand of a sizeof operator whose result is an integer constant;
  • part of the operand of an alignof operator whose result is an integer constant;
  • part of the controlling expression of a generic selection;
  • part of the expression in a generic association that is not the result expression of its generic selection;
  • or, part of the operand of any typeof operator whose result is not a variably modified type.

Semantics

4

As discussed in 5.1.1.1, the unit of program text after preprocessing is a translation unit, which consists of a sequence of external declarations. These are described as "external" because they appear outside any function (and hence have file scope). As discussed in 6.7, a declaration that also causes storage to be reserved for an object or a function named by the identifier is a definition.

5

An external definition is an external declaration that is also a definition of a function (other than an inline definition) or an object. If an identifier declared with external linkage is used in an expression (other than as part of the operand of a typeof operator whose result is not a variably modified type, part of the controlling expression of a generic selection, part of the expression in a generic association that is not the result expression of its generic selection, or part of a sizeof or alignof operator whose result is an integer constant expression), somewhere in the entire program there shall be exactly one external definition for the identifier; otherwise, there shall be no more than one.191)

6.9.2 Function definitions

Syntax

Constraints

2

The identifier declared in a function definition (which is the name of the function) shall have a function type, as specified by the declarator portion of the function definition.

3

The return type of a function shall be void or a complete object type other than array type.

4

The storage-class specifier, if any, in the declaration specifiers shall be either extern or static.

5

If the parameter list consists of a single parameter of type void, the parameter declarator shall not include an identifier.

6

Variable length array types of unspecified size shall not be used as part of a parameter declaration in a function definition.

Semantics

7

The optional attribute specifier sequence in a function definition appertains to the function.

8

The declarator in a function definition specifies the name of the function being defined and the types (and optionally the names) of all the parameters; the declarator also serves as a function prototype for later calls to the same function in the same translation unit. The type of each parameter is adjusted as described in 6.7.7.4.

9

If a function that accepts a variable number of arguments is defined without a parameter type list that ends with the ellipsis notation, the behavior is undefined.

10

The parameter type list, the attribute specifier sequence of the declarator that follows the parameter type list, and the compound statement of the function body form a single block.192) Each parameter has automatic storage duration; its identifier, if any,193) is an lvalue.194) The layout of the storage for parameters is unspecified.

11

On entry to the function, the size expressions of each variably modified parameter and typeof operators used in declarations of parameters are evaluated and the value of each argument expression is converted to the type of the corresponding parameter as if by assignment. (Array expressions and function designators as arguments were converted to pointers before the call.)

12

After all parameters have been assigned, the compound statement of the function body is executed.

13

Unless otherwise specified, if the } that terminates the function body is reached, and the value of the function call is used by the caller, the behavior is undefined.

14

NOTE In a function definition, the return type of the function and its prototype cannot be inherited from a typedef:

typedef int F(void);            // type F is "function with no parameters
                                // returning int"
F f, g;                         // f and g both have type compatible with F
F f { /* ... */ }               // WRONG: syntax/constraint error
F g() { /* ... */ }             // WRONG: declares that g returns a function
int f(void) { /* ... */ }       // RIGHT: f has type compatible with F
int g() { /* ... */ }           // RIGHT: g has type compatible with F
F *e(void) { /* ... */ }        // e returns a pointer to a function
F *((e))(void) { /* ... */ }    // same:  parentheses irrelevant
int (*fp)(void);                // fp points to a function that has type F
F *Fp;                          // Fp points to a function that has type F
15

EXAMPLE 1 In the following:

extern int max(int a, int b)
{
      return a  >  b ? a: b;
}
{ return a  >  b ? a: b; }

is the function body.

16

EXAMPLE 2 To pass one function to another, one can say

int f(void);
/* ... */
g(f);
Then the definition of g can read
void g(int (*funcp)(void))
{
      /* ... */
      (*funcp)(); /* or funcp(); ...*/
}
or, equivalently,
void g(int func(void))
{
      /* ... */
      func(); /* or (*func)(); ...*/
}

6.9.3 External object definitions

Semantics

1

If the declaration of an identifier for an object has file scope and an initializer, or has file scope and storage-class specifier thread_local, the declaration is an external definition for the identifier.

2

A declaration of an identifier for an object that has file scope without an initializer, and without the storage-class specifier extern or thread_local, constitutes a tentative definition. If a translation unit contains one or more tentative definitions for an identifier, and the translation unit contains no external definition for that identifier, then the behavior is exactly as if the translation unit contains a file scope declaration of that identifier with an empty initializer and a type determined as follows:

  • if the composite type as of the end of the translation unit is an array of unknown size, then an array of size one with the composite element type;
  • otherwise, the composite type at the end of the translation unit.
3

If the declaration of an identifier for an object is a tentative definition and has internal linkage, the declared type shall not be an incomplete type.

4

EXAMPLE 1

int i1 = 1;         // definition, external linkage
static int i2 = 2;  // definition, internal linkage
extern int i3 = 3;  // definition, external linkage
int i4;             // tentative definition, external linkage
static int i5;      // tentative definition, internal linkage
int i1;             // valid tentative definition, refers to previous
int i2;             // 6.2.2 renders undefined, linkage disagreement
int i3;             // valid tentative definition, refers to previous
int i4;             // valid tentative definition, refers to previous
int i5;             // 6.2.2 renders undefined, linkage disagreement
extern int i1;      // refers to previous, whose linkage is external
extern int i2;      // refers to previous, whose linkage is internal
extern int i3;      // refers to previous, whose linkage is external
extern int i4;      // refers to previous, whose linkage is external
extern int i5;      // refers to previous, whose linkage is internal
5

EXAMPLE 2 If at the end of the translation unit containing

int i[];

the array i still has incomplete type, the implicit initializer causes it to have one element, which is set to zero on program startup.

6.10 Preprocessing directives

6.10.1 General

Syntax

1
preprocessing-file:
groupopt
group:
group-part
group group-part
group-part:
if-section
control-line
text-line
# non-directive
if-section:
if-group elif-groupsopt else-groupopt endif-line
if-group:
# if constant-expression new-line groupopt
# ifdef identifier new-line groupopt
# ifndef identifier new-line groupopt
elif-groups:
elif-group
elif-groups elif-group
elif-group:
# elif constant-expression new-line groupopt
# elifdef identifier new-line groupopt
# elifndef identifier new-line groupopt
else-group:
# else new-line groupopt
endif-line:
# endif new-line
control-line:
# include pp-tokens new-line
# embed pp-tokens new-line
# define identifier replacement-list new-line
# define identifier lparen identifier-listopt ) replacement-list new-line
# define identifier lparen ... ) replacement-list new-line
# define identifier lparen identifier-list , ... ) replacement-list new-line
# undef identifier new-line
# line pp-tokens new-line
# error pp-tokensopt new-line
# warning pp-tokensopt new-line
# pragma pp-tokensopt new-line
# new-line
text-line:
pp-tokensopt new-line
non-directive:
pp-tokens new-line
lparen:
a ( character not immediately preceded by white space
replacement-list:
pp-tokensopt
pp-tokens:
preprocessing-token
pp-tokens preprocessing-token
new-line:
the new-line character
identifier-list:
identifier
identifier-list , identifier
pp-parameter:
pp-parameter-name pp-parameter-clauseopt
pp-parameter-name:
pp-standard-parameter
pp-prefixed-parameter
pp-standard-parameter:
identifier
pp-prefixed-parameter:
identifier :: identifier
pp-parameter-clause:
( pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt )
pp-balanced-token-sequence:
pp-balanced-token
pp-balanced-token-sequence pp-balanced-token
pp-balanced-token:
( pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt )
[ pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt ]
{ pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt }
any pp-token other than a parenthesis, a bracket, or a brace
embed-parameter-sequence:
pp-parameter
embed-parameter-sequence pp-parameter
2

Description A preprocessing directive consists of a sequence of preprocessing tokens that satisfies the following constraints: The first token in the sequence is a # preprocessing token that (at the start of translation phase 4) is either the first character in the source file (optionally after white space containing no new-line characters) or that follows white space containing at least one new-line character. The last

token in the sequence is the first new-line character that follows the first token in the sequence.195) A new-line character ends the preprocessing directive even if it occurs within what would otherwise be an invocation of a function-like macro.

3

A text line shall not begin with a # preprocessing token. A non-directive shall not begin with any of the directive names appearing in the syntax.

4

Some preprocessing directives take additional information using preprocessor parameters. A preprocessing parameter (pp-parameter) shall be either a preprocessor prefixed parameter (identified by a pp-prefixed-parameter, for implementation-defined preprocessor parameters) or a preprocessor standard parameter (identified with a pp-standard-parameter, for pp-parameters specified by this document).

5

In all aspects, a preprocessor standard parameter specified by this document as an identifier pp_param and an identifier of the form __pp_param__ shall behave the same when used as a preprocessor parameter, except for the spelling.

6

EXAMPLE 1 Thus, the preprocessor parameters on the two binary resource inclusion directives (6.10.4):

#embed "boop.h" limit(5)
#embed "boop.h" __limit__(5)

behave the same, and can be freely interchanged. Implementations are encouraged to behave similarly for preprocessor parameters (including preprocessor prefixed parameters) they provide.

7

When in a group that is skipped (6.10.2), the directive syntax is relaxed to allow any sequence of preprocessing tokens to occur between the directive name and the following new-line character.

Constraints

8

The only white-space characters that shall appear between preprocessing tokens within a preprocessing directive (from just after the introducing # preprocessing token through just before the terminating new-line character) are space and horizontal-tab (including spaces that have replaced comments or possibly other white-space characters in translation phase 3).

9

A preprocessor parameter shall be either a preprocessor standard parameter, or an implementationdefined preprocessor prefixed parameter.196)

Semantics

10

The implementation can process and skip sections of source files conditionally, include other source files, and replace macros. These capabilities are called preprocessing, because conceptually they occur before translation of the resulting translation unit.

11

The preprocessing tokens within a preprocessing directive are not subject to macro expansion unless otherwise stated.

12

EXAMPLE 2 In:

#define EMPTY
EMPTY # include <file.h>

the sequence of preprocessing tokens on the second line is not a preprocessing directive, because it does not begin with a # at the start of translation phase 4 (5.1.1.2), even though it will do so after the macro EMPTY has been replaced.

13

The execution of a non-directive preprocessing directive results in undefined behavior.

6.10.2 Conditional inclusion

Syntax

2

The #if and #elif directives are collectively known as the conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives. The conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives, #ifdef, #ifndef, #elifdef, and #elifndef directives are collectively known as the conditional inclusion preprocessing directives.

Constraints

3

The expression that controls conditional inclusion shall be an integer constant expression except that: identifiers (including those lexically identical to keywords) are interpreted as described subsequently in this subclause197) and it may contain zero or more defined macro expressions, has_include expressions, has_embed expressions, and/or has_c_attribute expressions as unary operator expressions.

4

A defined macro expression evaluates to 1 if the identifier is currently defined as a macro name (that is, if it is predefined or if it has been the subject of a #define preprocessing directive without an intervening #undef directive with the same subject identifier), 0 if it is not.

5

The second form of the has_include expression and has_embed expression is considered only if the first form does not match, in which case the preprocessing tokens are processed just as in normal text.

6

The header or source file identified by the parenthesized preprocessing token sequence in each contained has_include expression is searched for as if that preprocessing token were the pp-tokens in a #include directive, except that no further macro expansion is performed. Such a directive shall satisfy the syntactic requirements of a #include directive. The has_include expression evaluates to 1 if the search for the source file succeeds, and to 0 if the search fails.

7

The resource (6.10.4) identified by the header-name preprocessing token sequence in each contained has_embed expression is searched for as if those preprocessing token were the pp-tokens in a #embed directive, except that no further macro expansion is performed. Such a directive shall satisfy the syntactic requirements of a #embed directive. The has_embed expression evaluates to the same value as the following predefined macros (6.10.10.2):

  • __STDC_EMBED_NOT_FOUND__, if the search fails or if any of the embed parameters in the embed parameter sequence specified are not supported by the implementation for the #embed

directive; or,

8

NOTE 1 Unrecognized preprocessor prefixed parameters in has_embed expressions are not a constraint violation and instead cause the expression to be evaluated to 0, as specified previously.

9

Each has_c_attribute expression is replaced by a nonzero pp-number matching the form of an integer constant if the implementation supports an attribute with the name specified by interpreting the pp-tokens as an attribute token, and by 0 otherwise. The pp-tokens shall match the form of an attribute token.

10

Each preprocessing token that remains (in the list of preprocessing tokens that will become the controlling expression) after all macro replacements have occurred shall be in the lexical form of a token (6.4).

Semantics

11

The #ifdef, #ifndef, #elifdef, and #elifndef directives, and the defined conditional inclusion operator, shall treat __has_include, __has_embed and __has_c_attribute as if they were the name of defined macros. The identifiers __has_include, __has_embed, and __has_c_attribute shall not appear in any context not mentioned in this subclause.

12

Preprocessing directives of the forms

# if constant-expression new-line groupopt # elif constant-expression new-line groupopt

check whether the controlling constant expression evaluates to nonzero.

13

Prior to evaluation, macro invocations in the list of preprocessing tokens that will become the controlling constant expression are replaced (except for those macro names modified by the defined unary operator), just as in normal text. If the token defined is generated as a result of this replacement process or use of the defined unary operator does not match one of the two specified forms prior to macro replacement, the behavior is undefined. After all replacements due to macro expansion and evaluations of defined macro expressions, has_include expressions, has_embed expressions, and has_c_attribute expressions have been performed, all remaining identifiers other than true (including those lexically identical to keywords such as false) are replaced with the pp-number 0, true is replaced with pp-number 1, and then each preprocessing token is converted into a token. The resulting tokens compose the controlling constant expression which is evaluated according to the rules of 6.6. For the purposes of this token conversion and evaluation, all signed integer types and all unsigned integer types act as if they have the same representation as, respectively, the types intmax_t and uintmax_t defined in the header <stdint.h>. This includes interpreting character constants, which may involve converting escape sequences into execution character set members. Whether the numeric value for these character constants matches the value obtained when an identical character constant occurs in an expression (other than within a #if or #elif directive) is implementation-defined. Whether a single-character character constant may have a negative value is implementation-defined.

14

NOTE 2 On an implementation where INT_MAX is 0x7FFF and UINT_MAX is 0xFFFF, the constant 0x8000 is signed and positive within a #if expression even though it would be unsigned in translation phase 7 (5.1.1.2).

15

NOTE 3 The constant expression in the following #if directive and if statement is not guaranteed to evaluate to the same value in these two contexts.

#if ’z’ - ’a’ == 25
if (’z’ - ’a’ == 25)
16

Preprocessing directives of the forms

# ifdef identifier new-line groupopt # ifndef identifier new-line groupopt # elifdef identifier new-line groupopt # elifndef identifier new-line groupopt

check whether the identifier is or is not currently defined as a macro name. Their conditions are equivalent to #if defined identifier, #if !defined identifier, #elif defined identifier, and #elif !defined identifier respectively.

17

Each directive’s condition is checked in order. If it evaluates to false (zero), the group that it controls is skipped: directives are processed only through the name that determines the directive to keep track of the level of nested conditionals; the rest of the directives’ preprocessing tokens are ignored, as are the other preprocessing tokens in the group. Only the first group whose control condition evaluates to true (nonzero) is processed; any following groups are skipped and their controlling directives are processed as if they were in a group that is skipped. If none of the conditions evaluates to true, and there is a #else directive, the group controlled by the #else is processed; lacking a #else directive, all the groups until the #endif are skipped.198)

18

EXAMPLE 1 This demonstrates a way to include a header file only if it is available.

#if __has_include(<optional.h>)
#     include <optional.h>
#     define have_optional 1
#elif __has_include(<experimental/optional.h>)
#     include <experimental/optional.h>
#     define have_optional 1
#     define have_experimental_optional 1
#endif
#ifndef have_optional
#     define have_optional 0
#endif
19

EXAMPLE 2

/* Fallback for compilers not yet implementing this feature. */
#ifndef __has_c_attribute
#define __has_c_attribute(x) 0
#endif /* __has_c_attribute */
#if __has_c_attribute(fallthrough)
/* Standard attribute is available, use it. */
#define FALLTHROUGH [[fallthrough]]
#elif __has_c_attribute(vendor::fallthrough)
/* Vendor attribute is available, use it. */
#define FALLTHROUGH [[vendor::fallthrough]]
#else
/* Fallback implementation. */
#define FALLTHROUGH
#endif
20

EXAMPLE 3

#ifdef __STDC__
#define TITLE "ISO C Compilation"
#elifndef __cplusplus
#define TITLE "Non-ISO C Compilation"
#else
/* C++ */
#define TITLE "C++ Compilation"
#endif
21

EXAMPLE 4 A combination of __FILE__ (6.10.10.2) and __has_embed could be used to check for support of specific implementation extensions for the #embed (6.10.4) directive’s parameters.

#if __has_embed(__FILE__ ext::token(0xB055))
#define DESCRIPTION "Supports extended token embed parameter"
#else
#define DESCRIPTION "Does not support extended token embed parameter"
#endif
22

EXAMPLE 5 The following snippet uses __has_embed to check for support of a specific implementationdefined embed parameter, and otherwise uses standard behavior to produce the same effect.

void parse_into_s(short* ptr, unsigned char* ptr_bytes, unsigned long long size);
int main () {
#if __has_embed ("bits.bin" ds9000::element_type(short))
      /* Implementation extension: create short integers from the */
      /* translation environment resource into */
      /*  a sequence of integer constants */
      short meow[] = {
#embed "bits.bin" ds9000::element_type(short)
      };
#elif __has_embed ("bits.bin")
      /* no support for implementation-specific */
      /* ds9000::element_type(short) parameter */
      const unsigned char meow_bytes[] = {
#embed "bits.bin"
      };
      short meow[sizeof(meow_bytes) / sizeof(short)] = {};
      /* parse meow_bytes into short values by-hand! */
      parse_into_s(meow, meow_bytes, sizeof(meow_bytes));
#else
#error "cannot find bits.bin resource"
#endif
      return (int)(meow[0] + meow[(sizeof(meow) / sizeof(*meow)) - 1]);
}
23

EXAMPLE 6 If the search for the resource is successful, this resource is always considered empty due to the limit(0) embed parameter, including in __has_embed expressions.

int main () {
#if __has_embed(<infinite-resource> limit(0)) == 2
      // if <infinite-resource> exists, this
      // token sequence is always taken.
      return 0;
#else
      // the ’infinite-resource’ resource does not exist
      #error "The resource does not exist"
#endif
}
Forward references: macro replacement (6.10.5), source file inclusion (6.10.3), mandatory macros (6.10.10.2), largest integer types (7.22.1.5).

6.10.3 Source file inclusion

Constraints

1

A #include directive shall identify a header or source file that can be processed by the implementation.

Semantics

2

A preprocessing directive of the form

# include < h-char-sequence > new-line

searches a sequence of implementation-defined places for a header identified uniquely by the specified sequence between the < and > delimiters, and causes the replacement of that directive by the entire contents of the header. How the places are specified or the header identified is implementation-defined.

3

A preprocessing directive of the form

# include " q-char-sequence " new-line

causes the replacement of that directive by the entire contents of the source file identified by the specified sequence between the " delimiters. The named source file is searched for in an implementation-defined manner. If this search is not supported, or if the search fails, the directive is reprocessed as if it read

# include < h-char-sequence > new-line

with the identical contained sequence (including > characters, if any) from the original directive.

4

A preprocessing directive of the form

# include pp-tokens new-line

(that does not match one of the two previous forms) is permitted. The preprocessing tokens after include in the directive are processed just as in normal text. (Each identifier currently defined as a macro name is replaced by its replacement list of preprocessing tokens.) The directive resulting after all replacements shall match one of the two previous forms.199) The method by which a sequence of preprocessing tokens between a < and a > preprocessing token pair or a pair of " characters is combined into a single header name preprocessing token is implementation-defined.

5

The implementation shall provide unique mappings for sequences consisting of one or more nondigits or digits (6.4.2.1) followed by a period (.) and a single nondigit. The first character shall not be a digit. The implementation may ignore distinctions of alphabetical case and restrict the mapping to eight significant characters before the period.

6

A #include preprocessing directive may appear in a source file that has been read because of a #include directive in another file, up to an implementation-defined nesting limit (see 5.2.5.2).

7

EXAMPLE 1 The most common uses of #include preprocessing directives are as in the following:

#include <stdio.h>
#include "myprog.h"
8

EXAMPLE 2 This illustrates macro-replaced #include directives:

#if VERSION == 1
      #define INCFILE  "vers1.h"
#elif VERSION == 2
      #define INCFILE  "vers2.h"   // and so on
#else
      #define INCFILE  "versN.h"
#endif
#include INCFILE
Forward references: macro replacement (6.10.5).

6.10.4 Binary resource inclusion

6.10.4.1 #embed preprocessing directive

1

A resource is a source of data accessible from the translation environment. An embed parameter is a single preprocessor parameter in the embed parameter sequence. It has an implementation resource width, which is the implementation-defined size in bits of the located resource. It also has a resource width, which is either:

  • the number of bits as computed from the optionally-provided limit embed parameter (6.10.4.2), if present; or,
  • the implementation resource width.
2

An embed parameter sequence is a whitespace-delimited list of preprocessor parameters which may modify the result of the replacement for the #embed preprocessing directive.

Constraints
3

An #embed directive shall identify a resource that can be processed by the implementation as a binary data sequence given the provided embed parameters.

4

Embed parameters not specified in this document shall be implementation-defined. Implementationdefined embed parameters may change the subsequently-defined semantics of the directive; otherwise, #embed directives which do not contain implementation-defined embed parameters shall behave as described in this document.

5

A resource is considered empty when its resource width is zero.

6

Let embed element width be either:

  • an integer constant expression greater than zero determined by an implementation-defined embed parameter; or,
  • CHAR_BIT (5.2.5.3.2).

The result of (resourcewidth)%(embedelementwidth) shall be zero.200)

Semantics
7

The expansion of a #embed directive is a token sequence formed from the list of integer constant expressions described later in this subclause. The group of tokens for each integer constant expression in the list is separated in the token sequence from the group of tokens for the previous integer constant expression in the list by a comma. The sequence neither begins nor ends in a comma. If the list of integer constant expressions is empty, the token sequence is empty. The directive is replaced by its expansion and, with the presence of certain embed parameters, additional or replacement token sequences.

8

A preprocessing directive of the form

# embed < h-char-sequence > embed-parameter-sequenceopt new-line

searches a sequence of implementation-defined places for a resource identified uniquely by the specified sequence between the < and >. The search for the named resource is done in an implementationdefined manner.

9

A preprocessing directive of the form

# embed " q-char-sequence " embed-parameter-sequenceopt new-line

searches a sequence of implementation-defined places for a resource identified uniquely by the specified sequence between the " delimiters. The search for the named resource is done in an implementation-defined manner. If this search is not supported, or if the search fails, the directive is reprocessed as if it read

# embed < h-char-sequence > embed-parameter-sequenceopt new-line

with the identical contained q-char-sequence (including > characters, if any) from the original directive.

10

Either form of the #embed directive specified previously behaves as specified later in this subclause. The values of the integer constant expressions in the expanded sequence are determined by an implementation-defined mapping of the resource’s data. Each integer constant expression’s value is in the range from 0 to (2embedelementwidth)1, inclusive.201) If:

  • the list of integer constant expressions is used to initialize an array of a type compatible with unsigned char, or compatible with char if char cannot hold negative values; and,
  • the embed element width is equal to CHAR_BIT (5.2.5.3.2),

then the contents of the initialized elements of the array are as-if the resource’s binary data is fread (7.23.8.1) into the array at translation time.

11

A preprocessing directive of the form

# embed pp-tokens new-line

(that does not match one of the two previous forms) is permitted. The preprocessing tokens after embed in the directive are processed just as in normal text. (Each identifier currently defined as a macro name is replaced by its replacement list of preprocessing tokens.) The directive resulting after all replacements shall match one of the two previous forms.202) The method by which a sequence of preprocessing tokens between a < and a > preprocessing token pair or a pair of " characters is combined into a single resource name preprocessing token is implementation-defined.

12

An embed parameter with a preprocessor parameter token that is one of the following is a standard embed parameter:

limit prefix suffix if_empty

The significance of these standard embed parameters is specified later in this subclause.

Recommended practice

13

The #embed directive is meant to translate binary data in a resource to a sequence of integer constant expressions in a way that preserves the value of the resource’s bit stream where possible.

14

A mechanism similar to, but distinct from, the implementation-defined search paths used for source file inclusion (6.10.3) is encouraged.

15

Implementations should take into account translation-time bit and byte orders as well as executiontime bit and byte orders to more appropriately represent the resource’s binary data from the directive. This maximizes the chance that, if the resource referenced at translation time through the #embed directive is the same one accessed through execution-time means, the data that is e.g. fread or similar into contiguous storage will compare bit-for-bit equal to an array of character type initialized from an #embed directive’s expanded contents.

16

EXAMPLE 1 Placing a small image resource.

#include <stddef.h>
void have_you_any_wool(const unsigned char*, size_t);
int main (int, char*[]) {
      static const unsigned char baa_baa[] = {
#embed "black_sheep.ico"
      };
      have_you_any_wool(baa_baa, sizeof(baa_baa));
      return 0;
}
17

EXAMPLE 2 This snippet:

int main (int, char*[]) {
      static const unsigned char coefficients[] = {
#embed "only_8_bits.bin" // potential constraint violation
      };
      return 0;
}

may violate the constraint that (resourcewidth)%(embedelementwidth) is 0. The 8 bits may potentially not be evenly divisible by the embed element width (e.g. on a system where CHAR_BIT is 16). Issuing a diagnostic in this case may aid in portability by calling attention to potentially incompatible expectations between implementations and their resources.

18

EXAMPLE 3 Initialization of non-arrays.

int main () {
      /* Braces may be kept or elided as per normal initialization rules */
      int i = {
#embed "i.dat"
      }; /* valid if i.dat produces 1 value,
            i value is [0, 2(embedelement width ) )  */
      int i2 =
#embed "i.dat"
      ; /* valid if i.dat produces 1 value,
           i2 value is [0, 2(embedelement width ) )  */
      struct s {
            double a, b, c;
            struct { double e, f, g; };
            double h, i, j;
      };
      struct s x = {
      /* initializes each element in order according to initialization
      rules with comma-separated list of integer constant expressions
      inside of braces */
#embed "s.dat"
      };
      return 0;
}

Non-array types can still be initialized since the directive produces a comma-delimited list of integer constant expressions, a single integer constant expression, or nothing.

19

EXAMPLE 4 Equivalency of bit sequence and bit order between a translation-time read and an execution-time read of the same resource/file.

#include <string.h>
#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int main(void) {
      static const unsigned char embed_data[] = {
#embed <data.dat>
      };
      const size_t f_size = sizeof(embed_data);
      unsigned char f_data[f_size];
      FILE* f_source = fopen("data.dat", "rb");
      if (f_source == nullptr)
            return 1;
      char* f_ptr = (char*)&f_data[0];
      if (fread(f_ptr, 1, f_size, f_source) != f_size) {
            fclose(f_source);
            return 1;
      }
      fclose(f_source);
      int is_same = memcmp(&embed_data[0], f_ptr, f_size);
      // if both operations refers to the same resource/file at
      // execution time and translation time, "is_same" should be 0
      return is_same == 0 ? 0 : 1;
}

6.10.4.2 limit parameter

1

The limit standard embed parameter may appear zero times or one time in the embed parameter sequence. Its preprocessor argument clause shall be present and have the form:

( constant-expression )

and shall be an integer constant expression. The integer constant expression shall not evaluate to a value less than 0.

2

The token defined shall not appear within the constant expression.

Semantics
3

The embed parameter with a preprocessor parameter token limit denotes a balanced preprocessing token sequence that will be used to compute the resource width. Independently of any macro replacement done previously (e.g. when matching the form of #embed), the constant expression is evaluated after the balanced preprocessing token sequence is processed as in normal text, using the rules specified for conditional inclusion (6.10.2), with the exception that any defined macro expressions are not permitted.

4

The resource width is:

  • 0, if the integer constant expression evaluates to 0; or,
  • the implementation resource width if it is less than the embed element width multiplied by the integer constant expression; or,
  • the embed element width multiplied by the integer constant expression, if it is less than or equal to the implementation resource width.
5

EXAMPLE 1 Checking the first 4 elements of a sound resource.

#include <assert.h>
int main (int, char*[]) {
      static const char sound_signature[] = {
#embed <sdk/jump.wav> limit(2+2)
      };
      static_assert((sizeof(sound_signature) / sizeof(*sound_signature)) == 4,
            "There should only be 4 elements in this array.");
      // verify PCM WAV resource
      assert(sound_signature[0] == ’R’);
      assert(sound_signature[1] == ’I’);
      assert(sound_signature[2] == ’F’);
      assert(sound_signature[3] == ’F’);
      assert(sizeof(sound_signature) == 4);
      return 0;
}
6

EXAMPLE 2 Similar to a previous example, except it illustrates macro expansion specifically done for the limit(...) parameter.

#include <assert.h>
#define TWO_PLUS_TWO 2+2
int main (int, char*[]) {
      const char sound_signature[] = {
      /* the token sequence within the parentheses
      for the "limit" parameter undergoes macro
      expansion, at least once, resulting in
#embed <sdk/jump.wav> limit(2+2)
      */
#embed <sdk/jump.wav> limit(TWO_PLUS_TWO)
      };
      static_assert((sizeof(sound_signature) / sizeof(*sound_signature)) == 4,
            "There should only be 4 elements in this array.");
      // verify PCM WAV resource
      assert(sound_signature[0] == ’R’);
      assert(sound_signature[1] == ’I’);
      assert(sound_signature[2] == ’F’);
      assert(sound_signature[3] == ’F’);
      assert(sizeof(sound_signature) == 4);
      return 0;
}
7

EXAMPLE 3 A potential constraint violation from a resource that may not have enough information in an environment that has a CHAR_BIT greater than 24.

int main (int, char*[]) {
      const unsigned char arr[] = {
#embed "24_bits.bin" limit(1) // may be a constraint violation
      };
      return 0;
}
8

EXAMPLE 4 Resources interfacing with certain implementations may have an infinite stream of data, such as the </owo/uwurandom> resource used in the following snippet:

int main (int, char*[]) {
      const unsigned char arr[] = {
#embed </owo/uwurandom> limit(513)
      };
      return 0;
}

The limit parameter may help process only a portion of that information and prevent exhaustion of an implementation’s internal resources when processing such data.

6.10.4.3 suffix parameter

1

The suffix standard embed parameter may appear zero times or one time in the embed parameter sequence. Its preprocessor argument clause shall be present and have the form:

( pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt )

Semantics
2

The embed parameter with a preprocessing parameter token suffix denotes a balanced preprocessing token sequence within its preprocessor argument clause that will be placed immediately after the result of the associated #embed directive’s expansion.

3

If the resource is empty, then suffix has no effect and is ignored.

4

EXAMPLE Extra elements added to array initializer.

#include <string.h>
#ifndef SHADER_TARGET
#define SHADER_TARGET "edith-impl.glsl"
#endif
extern char* null_term_shader_data;
void fill_in_data () {
      const char internal_data[] = {
#embed SHADER_TARGET \
            suffix(,)
            0
      };
      strcpy(null_term_shader_data, internal_data);
}

6.10.4.4 prefix parameter

1

The prefix standard embed parameter may appear zero times or one time in the embed parameter sequence. Its preprocessor parameter clause shall be present and have the form:

( pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt )

Semantics
2

The embed parameter with a preprocessor parameter token prefix denotes a balanced preprocessing token sequence within its preprocessor argument clause that will be placed immediately before the result of the associated #embed directive’s expansion, if any.

3

If the resource is empty, then prefix has no effect and is ignored.

4

EXAMPLE A null-terminated character array with prefixed and suffixed additional tokens when the resource is not empty, providing null termination and a byte order mark.

#include <assert.h>
#include <string.h>
#ifndef SHADER_TARGET
#define SHADER_TARGET "ches.glsl"
#endif
extern char* merp;
void init_data () {
      const char whl[] = {
#embed SHADER_TARGET                                 \
            prefix(0xEF, 0xBB, 0xBF, ) /* UTF-8 BOM */ \
            suffix(,)
            0
      };
      // always null terminated,
      // contains BOM if not-empty
      int is_good = (sizeof(whl) == 1 && whl[0] == ’\0’)
      || (whl[0] == ’\xEF’ && whl[1] == ’\xBB’
      && whl[2] == ’\xBF’ && whl[sizeof(whl) - 1] == ’\0’);
      assert(is_good);
      strcpy(merp, whl);
}

6.10.4.5 if_empty parameter

1

The if_empty standard embed parameter may appear zero times or one time in the embed parameter sequence. Its preprocessor argument clause shall be present and have the form:

( pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt )

Semantics
2

The embed parameter with a preprocessing parameter token if_empty denotes a balanced preprocessing token sequence within its preprocessor argument clause that will replace the #embed directive entirely.

If the resource is not empty, then if_empty has no effect and is ignored.

3

EXAMPLE 1 If the search for the resource is successful, this resource is always considered empty due to the limit(0) embed parameter. This program always returns 0, even if the resource is searched for and found successfully by the implementation and has an implementation resource width greater than 0.

int main () {
      return
#embed <some_resource> limit(0) prefix(1) if_empty(0)
      ;
      // becomes:
      // return 0;
}
4

EXAMPLE 2 An example similar to using the suffix embed parameter, but changed slightly.

#include <string.h>
#ifndef SHADER_TARGET
#define SHADER_TARGET "edith-impl.glsl"
#endif
extern char* null_term_shader_data;
void fill_in_data () {
      const char internal_data[] = {
#embed SHADER_TARGET   \
            suffix(, 0) \
            if_empty(0)
      };
      strcpy(null_term_shader_data, internal_data);
}
5

EXAMPLE 3 This resource is considered empty due to the limit(0) embed parameter, meaning an if_empty expression replaces the directive as specified previously. A constraint is still violated if the search for the resource is unsuccessful.

int main () {
      return
            #embed <infinite-resource> limit(0) if_empty(45540)
      ;
}
becomes:
int main () {
      return 45540;
}

6.10.5 Macro replacement

Constraints

1

Two replacement lists are identical if and only if the preprocessing tokens in both have the same number, ordering, spelling, and white-space separation, where all white-space separations are considered identical.

2

An identifier currently defined as an object-like macro shall not be redefined by another #define preprocessing directive unless the second definition is an object-like macro definition and the two replacement lists are identical. Likewise, an identifier currently defined as a function-like macro shall not be redefined by another #define preprocessing directive unless the second definition is a function-like macro definition that has the same number and spelling of parameters, and the two replacement lists are identical.

3

There shall be white space between the identifier and the replacement list in the definition of an object-like macro.

4

If the identifier-list in the macro definition does not end with an ellipsis, the number of arguments (including those arguments consisting of no preprocessing tokens) in an invocation of a function-like macro shall equal the number of parameters in the macro definition. Otherwise, there shall be at least as many arguments in the invocation as there are parameters in the macro definition (excluding the ...). There shall exist a ) preprocessing token that terminates the invocation.

5

The identifiers __VA_ARGS__ and __VA_OPT__ shall occur only in the replacement-list of a functionlike macro that uses the ellipsis notation in the parameters.

6

A parameter identifier in a function-like macro shall be uniquely declared within its scope.

Semantics

7

The identifier immediately following the define is called the macro name. There is one name space for macro names. Any white-space characters preceding or following the replacement list of preprocessing tokens are not considered part of the replacement list for either form of macro.

8

If a # preprocessing token, followed by an identifier, occurs lexically at the point at which a preprocessing directive could begin, the identifier is not subject to macro replacement.

9

A preprocessing directive of the form

# define identifier replacement-list new-line

defines an object-like macro that causes each subsequent instance of the macro name203) to be replaced by the replacement list of preprocessing tokens that constitute the remainder of the directive. The replacement list is then rescanned for more macro names as specified later in this subclause.

10

A preprocessing directive of the form

# define identifier lparen identifier-listopt ) replacement-list new-line # define identifier lparen ... ) replacement-list new-line # define identifier lparen identifier-list , ... ) replacement-list new-line

defines a function-like macro with parameters, whose use is similar syntactically to a function call. The parameters are specified by the optional list of identifiers, whose scope extends from their declaration in the identifier list until the new-line character that terminates the #define preprocessing directive. Each subsequent instance of the function-like macro name followed by a ( as the next preprocessing token introduces the sequence of preprocessing tokens that is replaced by the replacement list in the definition (an invocation of the macro). The replaced sequence of preprocessing tokens is terminated by the matching ) preprocessing token, skipping intervening matched pairs of left and right parenthesis preprocessing tokens. Within the sequence of preprocessing tokens making up an invocation of a function-like macro, new-line is considered a normal white-space character.

11

The sequence of preprocessing tokens bounded by the outside-most matching parentheses forms the list of arguments for the function-like macro. The individual arguments within the list are separated by comma preprocessing tokens, but comma preprocessing tokens between matching inner parentheses do not separate arguments. If there are sequences of preprocessing tokens within the list of arguments that would otherwise act as preprocessing directives,204) the behavior is undefined.

12

If there is a ... in the identifier-list in the macro definition, then the trailing arguments (if any), including any separating comma preprocessing tokens, are merged to form a single item: the variable arguments. The number of arguments so combined is such that, following merger, the number of arguments is one more than the number of parameters in the macro definition (excluding the ...), except that if there are as many arguments as named parameters, the macro invocation behaves as if a comma token has been appended to the argument list such that variable arguments are formed that contain no pp-tokens.

6.10.5.1 Argument substitution

1

va-opt-replacement:

__VA_OPT__ ( pp-tokensopt )

Description
2

Argument substitution is a process during macro expansion in which identifiers corresponding to the parameters of the macro definition and the special constructs __VA_ARGS__ and __VA_OPT__ are replaced with token sequences from the arguments of the macro invocation and possibly of the argument of the feature __VA_OPT__. The latter process allows to control a substitute token sequence that is only expanded if the argument list that corresponds to a trailing ... of the parameter list is present and has a non-empty substitution.

Constraints
3

The identifier __VA_OPT__ shall always occur as part of the preprocessing token sequence va-optreplacement; its closing ) is determined by skipping intervening pairs of matching left and right parentheses in its pp-tokens. The pp-tokens of a va-opt-replacement shall not contain __VA_OPT__. The pp-tokens shall form a valid replacement list for the current function-like macro.

Semantics

4

After the arguments for the invocation of a function-like macro have been identified, argument substitution takes place. A va-opt-replacement is treated as if it were a parameter. For each parameter in the replacement list that is neither preceded by a # or ## preprocessing token nor followed by a ## preprocessing token, the preprocessing tokens naming the parameter are replaced by a token sequence determined as follows:

  • If the parameter is of the form va-opt-replacement, the replacement preprocessing tokens are the preprocessing token sequence for the corresponding argument, as specified later in this subclause.
  • Otherwise, the replacement preprocessing tokens are the preprocessing tokens of the corresponding argument after all macros contained therein have been expanded. The argument’s preprocessing tokens are completely macro replaced before being substituted as if they formed the rest of the preprocessing file with no other preprocessing tokens being available.
5

EXAMPLE 1

#define LPAREN() (
#define G(Q) 42
#define F(R, X, ...)  __VA_OPT__(G R X) )
int x = F(LPAREN(), 0, <:-);     // replaced by int x = 42;
6

An identifier __VA_ARGS__ that occurs in the replacement list is treated as if it were a parameter, and the variable arguments form the preprocessing tokens used to replace it.

7

The preprocessing token sequence for the corresponding argument of a va-opt-replacement is defined as follows. If a (hypothetical) substitution of __VA_ARGS__ as neither an operand of # nor ## consists of no preprocessing tokens, the argument consists of a single placemarker preprocessing token (6.10.5.3, 6.10.5.4). Otherwise, the argument consists of the results of the expansion of the contained pp-tokens as the replacement list of the current function-like macro before removal of placemarker tokens, rescanning, and further replacement.

8

NOTE The placemarker tokens are removed before stringization (6.10.5.2), and can be removed by rescanning and further replacement (6.10.5.4).

9

EXAMPLE 2

#define F(...)           f(0 __VA_OPT__(,) __VA_ARGS__)
#define G(X, ...)        f(0, X __VA_OPT__(,) __VA_ARGS__)
#define SDEF(sname, ...) S sname __VA_OPT__(= { __VA_ARGS__ })
#define EMP
F(a, b, c)        // replaced by f(0, a, b, c)
F()               // replaced by f(0)
F(EMP)            // replaced by f(0)
G(a, b, c)        // replaced by f(0, a, b, c)
G(a, )            // replaced by f(0, a)
G(a)              // replaced by f(0, a)
SDEF(foo);        // replaced by S foo;
SDEF(bar, 1, 2);  // replaced by S bar = { 1, 2 };
#define H1(X, ...)    X __VA_OPT__(##) __VA_ARGS__
                  // error: ## on line above
                  // may not appear at the beginning of a replacement
                  // list (6.10.5.3)
#define H2(X, Y, ...) __VA_OPT__(X ## Y,) __VA_ARGS__
H2(a, b, c, d)    // replaced by ab, c, d
#define H3(X, ...)    #__VA_OPT__(X##X X##X)
H3(, 0)           // replaced by ""
#define H4(X, ...)    __VA_OPT__(a X ## X) ## b
H4(, 1)           // replaced by a b
#define H5A(...)      __VA_OPT__()/**/__VA_OPT__()
#define H5B(X)        a ## X ## b
#define H5C(X)        H5B(X)
H5C(H5A())        // replaced by ab

6.10.5.2 The # operator

1

Each # preprocessing token in the replacement list for a function-like macro shall be followed by a parameter as the next preprocessing token in the replacement list.

Semantics
2

If, in the replacement list, a parameter is immediately preceded by a # preprocessing token, both are replaced by a single character string literal preprocessing token that contains the spelling of the preprocessing token sequence for the corresponding argument (excluding placemarker tokens).

3

Let the stringizing argument be the preprocessing token sequence for the corresponding argument with placemarker tokens removed. Each occurrence of white space between the stringizing argument’s preprocessing tokens becomes a single space character in the character string literal. White space before the first preprocessing token and after the last preprocessing token composing the stringizing argument is deleted. Otherwise, the original spelling of each preprocessing token in the stringizing argument is retained in the character string literal, except for special handling for producing the spelling of string literals and character constants: a \ character is inserted before each " and \ character of a character constant or string literal (including the delimiting " characters), except that it is implementation-defined whether a \ character is inserted before the \ character beginning a universal character name.

4

If the replacement that results is not a valid character string literal, the behavior is undefined. The character string literal corresponding to an empty stringizing argument is "". The order of evaluation of # and ## operators is unspecified.

6.10.5.3 The ## operator

1

A ## preprocessing token shall not occur at the beginning or at the end of a replacement list for either form of macro definition.

Semantics
2

If, in the replacement list of a function-like macro, a parameter is immediately preceded or followed by a ## preprocessing token, the parameter is replaced by the corresponding argument’s preprocessing token sequence; however, if an argument consists of no preprocessing tokens, the parameter is replaced by a placemarker preprocessing token instead.205)

3

For both object-like and function-like macro invocations, before the replacement list is reexamined for more macro names to replace, each instance of a ## preprocessing token in the replacement list (not from an argument) is deleted and the preceding preprocessing token is concatenated with the following preprocessing token. Placemarker preprocessing tokens are handled specially: concatenation of two placemarkers results in a single placemarker preprocessing token, and concatenation of a placemarker with a non-placemarker preprocessing token results in the non-placemarker preprocessing token. If the result is not a valid preprocessing token, the behavior is undefined. The

resulting token is available for further macro replacement. The order of evaluation of ## operators is unspecified.

4

EXAMPLE In the following fragment:

#define hash_hash # ## #
#define mkstr(a) # a
#define in_between(a) mkstr(a)
#define join(c, d) in_between(c hash_hash d)
char p[] = join(x, y); // equivalent to
                       // char p[] = "x ## y";
The expansion produces, at various stages:
join(x, y)
in_between(x hash_hash y)
in_between(x ## y)
mkstr(x ## y)
"x ## y"

In other words, expanding hash_hash produces a new token, consisting of two adjacent sharp signs, but this new token is not the ## operator.

6.10.5.4 Rescanning and further replacement

1

After all parameters in the replacement list have been substituted and # and ## processing has taken place, all placemarker preprocessing tokens are removed. The resulting preprocessing token sequence is then rescanned, along with all subsequent preprocessing tokens of the source file, for more macro names to replace.

2

If the name of the macro being replaced is found during this scan of the replacement list (not including the rest of the source file’s preprocessing tokens), it is not replaced. Furthermore, if any nested replacements encounter the name of the macro being replaced, it is not replaced. These nonreplaced macro name preprocessing tokens are no longer available for further replacement even if they are later (re)examined in contexts in which that macro name preprocessing token would otherwise have been replaced.

3

The resulting completely macro-replaced preprocessing token sequence is not processed as a preprocessing directive even if it resembles one, but all pragma unary operator expressions within it are then processed as specified in 6.10.11.

4

EXAMPLE There are cases where it is not clear whether a replacement is nested or not. For example, given the following macro definitions:

#define f(a) a*g
#define g(a) f(a)
the invocation
f(2)(9)
could expand to either
2*f(9)
or
2*9*g

Strictly conforming programs are not permitted to depend on such unspecified behavior.

6.10.5.5 Scope of macro definitions

1

A macro definition lasts (independent of block structure) until a corresponding #undef directive is encountered or (if none is encountered) until the end of the preprocessing translation unit. Macro definitions have no significance after translation phase 4.

2

A preprocessing directive of the form

# undef identifier new-line

causes the specified identifier no longer to be defined as a macro name. It is ignored if the specified identifier is not currently defined as a macro name.

3

EXAMPLE 1 The simplest use of this facility is to define a "manifest constant", as in

#define TABSIZE 100
int table[TABSIZE];
4

EXAMPLE 2 The following defines a function-like macro whose value is the maximum of its arguments. It has the advantages of working for any compatible types of the arguments and of generating in-line code without the overhead of function calling. It has the disadvantages of evaluating one or the other of its arguments a second time (including side effects) and generating more code than a function if invoked several times. It also cannot have its address taken, as it has none.

#define max(a, b) ((a)  >  (b) ? (a): (b))

The parentheses ensure that the arguments and the resulting expression are bound properly.

5

EXAMPLE 3 To illustrate the rules for redefinition and reexamination, the sequence

#define x      3
#define f(a)   f(x * (a))
#undef  x
#define x      2
#define g      f
#define z      z[0]
#define h      g(~
#define m(a)   a(w)
#define w      0,1
#define t(a)   a
#define p()    int
#define q(x)   x
#define r(x,y) x ## y
#define str(x) # x
f(y+1) + f(f(z)) % t(t(g)(0) + t)(1);
g(x+(3,4)-w) | h 5) & m
      (f)^m(m);
p() i[q()] = { q(1), r(2,3), r(4,), r(,5), r(,) };
char c[2][6] = { str(hello), str() };
results in
f(2 * (y+1)) + f(2 * (f(2 * (z[0])))) % f(2 * (0)) + t(1);
f(2 * (2+(3,4)-0,1)) | f(2 * (~ 5)) & f(2 * (0,1))^m(0,1);
int i[] = { 1, 23, 4, 5,  };
char c[2][6] = { "hello", "" };
6

EXAMPLE 4 To illustrate the rules for creating character string literals and concatenating tokens, the sequence

#define str(s)      # s
#define xstr(s)     str(s)
#define debug(s, t) printf("x" # s "= %d, x" # t "= %s", \
                        x ## s, x ## t)
#define INCFILE(n)  vers ## n
#define glue(a, b)  a ## b
#define xglue(a, b) glue(a, b)
#define HIGHLOW     "hello"
#define LOW         LOW ", world"
debug(1, 2);
fputs(str(strncmp("abc\0d", "abc", ’\4’) // this goes away
      == 0) str(: @\n), s);
#include xstr(INCFILE(2).h)
glue(HIGH, LOW);
xglue(HIGH, LOW)
printf("x" "1" "= %d, x" "2" "= %s", x1, x2);
fputs(
  "strncmp(\"abc\\0d\", \"abc\", ’\\4’) == 0" ": @\n",
  s);
#include "vers2.h"    (after macro replacement, before file access)
"hello";
"hello" ", world"
printf("x1= %d, x2= %s", x1, x2);
fputs(
  "strncmp(\"abc\\0d\", \"abc\", ’\\4’) == 0: @\n",
  s);
#include "vers2.h"    (after macro replacement, before file access)
"hello";
"hello, world"

Space around the # and ## tokens in the macro definition is optional.

7

EXAMPLE 5 To illustrate the rules for placemarker preprocessing tokens, the sequence

#define t(x,y,z) x ## y ## z
int j[] = { t(1,2,3), t(,4,5), t(6,,7), t(8,9,),
           t(10,,), t(,11,), t(,,12), t(,,) };
results in
int j[] = { 123, 45, 67, 89,
            10, 11, 12,  };
8

EXAMPLE 6 To demonstrate the redefinition rules, the following sequence is valid.

#define OBJ_LIKE      (1-1)
#define OBJ_LIKE      /* white space */ (1-1) /* other */
#define FUNC_LIKE(a)   ( a )
#define FUNC_LIKE( a ) (      /* note the white space */ \
                        a /* other stuff on this line
                           */)
But the following redefinitions of the preceding definitions are invalid:
#define OBJ_LIKE    (0)     // different token sequence
#define OBJ_LIKE    (1 - 1) // different white space
#define FUNC_LIKE(b) ( a )    // different parameter usage
#define FUNC_LIKE(b) ( b )    // different parameter spelling
9

EXAMPLE 7 Finally, to show the variable argument list macro facilities:

#define debug(...)      fprintf(stderr, __VA_ARGS__)
#define showlist(...)   puts(#__VA_ARGS__)
#define report(test, ...) ((test)?puts(#test):\
            printf(__VA_ARGS__))
debug("Flag");
debug("X = %d\n", x);
showlist(The first, second, and third items.);
report(x>y, "x is %d but y is %d", x, y);
results in
fprintf(stderr,  "Flag");
fprintf(stderr,  "X = %d\n", x);
puts("The first, second, and third items.");
((x>y)?puts("x>y"):
            printf("x is %d but y is %d", x, y));

6.10.6 Line control

Constraints

1

The string literal of a #line directive, if present, shall be a character string literal.

Semantics

2

The line number of the current source line is one greater than the number of new-line characters read or introduced in translation phase 1 (5.1.1.2) while processing the source file to the current token.

3

If a preprocessing token (in particular __LINE__) spans two or more physical lines, it is unspecified which of those line numbers is associated with that token. If a preprocessing directive spans two or more physical lines, it is unspecified which of those line numbers is associated with the preprocessing directive. If a macro invocation spans multiple physical lines, it is unspecified which of those line numbers is associated with that invocation. The line number of a preprocessing token is independent of the context (in particular, as a macro argument or in a preprocessing directive). The line number of a __LINE__ in a macro body is the line number of the macro invocation.

4

A preprocessing directive of the form

# line digit-sequence new-line

causes the implementation to behave as if the following sequence of source lines begins with a source line that has a line number as specified by the digit sequence (interpreted as a decimal integer, ignoring any optional digit separators (6.4.4.2) in the digit sequence). The digit sequence shall not specify zero, nor a number greater than 2147483647.

5

A preprocessing directive of the form

# line digit-sequence " s-char-sequenceopt " new-line

sets the presumed line number similarly and changes the presumed name of the source file to be the contents of the character string literal.

6

A preprocessing directive of the form

# line pp-tokens new-line

(that does not match one of the two previous forms) is permitted. The preprocessing tokens after line on the directive are processed just as in normal text (each identifier currently defined as a macro name is replaced by its replacement list of preprocessing tokens). The directive resulting after

all replacements shall match one of the two previous forms and is then processed as appropriate.206)

Recommended practice

7

The line number associated with a pp-token should be the line number of the first character of the pp-token. The line number associated with a preprocessing directive should be the line number of the line with the first # token. The line number associated with a macro invocation should be the line number of the first character of the macro name in the invocation.

6.10.7 Diagnostic directives

Semantics

1

A preprocessing directive of either form

# error pp-tokensopt new-line # warning pp-tokensopt new-line

causes the implementation to produce a diagnostic message that includes the specified sequence of preprocessing tokens.

6.10.8 Pragma directive

Semantics

1

A preprocessing directive of the form

# pragma pp-tokensopt new-line

where the preprocessing token STDC does not immediately follow pragma in the directive (prior to any macro replacement)207) causes the implementation to behave in an implementation-defined manner. The behavior may cause translation to fail or cause the translator or the resulting program to behave in a non-conforming manner. Any such pragma that is not recognized by the implementation is ignored.

2

If the preprocessing token STDC does immediately follow pragma in the directive (prior to any macro replacement), then no macro replacement is performed on the directive, and the directive shall have one of the following forms208) whose meanings are described elsewhere:

standard-pragma:
# pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT on-off-switch
# pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS on-off-switch
# pragma STDC FENV_DEC_ROUND dec-direction
# pragma STDC FENV_ROUND direction
# pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE on-off-switch
on-off-switch: one of
ON OFF DEFAULT
direction: one of
FE_DOWNWARD FE_TONEAREST FE_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_TOWARDZERO FE_UPWARD FE_DYNAMIC
dec-direction: one of
FE_DEC_DOWNWARD FE_DEC_TONEAREST FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO FE_DEC_UPWARD FE_DEC_DYNAMIC

Recommended practice

3

Implementations are encouraged to diagnose unrecognized pragmas.

Forward references: the FP_CONTRACT pragma (7.12.2), the FENV_ACCESS pragma (7.6.1), the FENV_DEC_ROUND pragma (7.6.3), the FENV_ROUND pragma (7.6.2), the CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma (7.3.4).

6.10.9 Null directive

Semantics

1

A preprocessing directive of the form

# new-line

has no effect.

6.10.10 Predefined macro names

6.10.10.1 General

1

The values of the predefined macros listed in the following subclauses209) (except for __FILE__ and __LINE__) remain constant throughout the translation unit.

2

None of the following macro names in this subclause nor the identifiers defined, __has_c_attribute, __has_include, or __has_embed shall be the subject of a #define or a #undef preprocessing directive. Any other predefined macro names: shall begin with a leading underscore followed by an uppercase letter; or, a second underscore; or, shall be any of the identifiers alignas, alignof, bool, false, static_assert, thread_local, or true.

3

The implementation shall not predefine the macro __cplusplus, nor shall it define it in any standard header.

Forward references: standard headers (7.1.2).

6.10.10.2 Mandatory macros

1

The following macro names shall be defined by the implementation:

__DATE__ The date of translation of the preprocessing translation unit: a character string literal of the form "Mmm dd yyyy", where the names of the months are the same as those generated by the asctime function, and the first character of dd is a space character if the value is less than 10. If the date of translation is not available, an implementation-defined valid date shall be supplied.

__FILE__ The presumed name of the current source file (a character string literal).210)

__LINE__ The presumed line number (within the current source file) of the current source line (an integer constant).210)

__STDC__ The integer constant 1, intended to indicate a conforming implementation.

__STDC_EMBED_NOT_FOUND__, __STDC_EMBED_FOUND__, __STDC_EMBED_EMPTY__ The integer constants 0, 1, and 2, respectively.

__STDC_HOSTED__ The integer constant 1 if the implementation is a hosted implementation or the integer constant 0 if it is not.

__TIME__ The time of translation of the preprocessing translation unit: a character string literal of the form "hh:mm:ss" as in the time generated by the asctime function. If the time of translation is not available, an implementation-defined valid time shall be supplied.

Forward references: the asctime function (7.29.3.1).

6.10.10.3 Environment macros

1

The following macro names are conditionally defined by the implementation:

__STDC_ISO_10646__ An integer constant of the form yyyymmL (for example, 202012L). If this symbol is defined, then every character in the Unicode required set, when stored in an object of type wchar_t, has the same value as the short identifier of that character. The Unicode required set consists of all the characters that are defined by ISO/IEC 10646, along with all amendments and technical corrigenda, as of the specified year and month. If some other encoding is used, the macro shall not be defined and the actual encoding used is implementation-defined.

__STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__ The integer constant 1, intended to indicate that, in the encoding for

wchar_t, a member of the basic character set is not required to have a code value equal to its value when used as the lone character in an integer character constant.

Forward references: common definitions (7.21), Unicode utilities (7.30).

6.10.10.4 Conditional feature macros

1

The following macro names are conditionally defined by the implementation:

__STDC_ANALYZABLE__ The integer constant 1, if the implementation conforms to the specifications in Annex L (Analyzability).

__STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ The integer constant 202311L, intended to indicate conformance to Annex F (ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point arithmetic) for binary floating-point arithmetic.

__STDC_IEC_559__ The integer constant 1, intended to indicate conformance to the specifications in Annex F (ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point arithmetic) for binary floating-point arithmetic. Use of this macro is an obsolescent feature.

__STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ The integer constant 202311L, intended to indicate support of decimal floating types and conformance to Annex F (ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point arithmetic) for decimal floating-point arithmetic.

__STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__ The integer constant 202311L, intended to indicate conformance to the specifications in Annex G (ISO/IEC 60559 compatible complex arithmetic).

__STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ The integer constant 202311L, intended to indicate conformance to the specification in Annex H (ISO/IEC 60559 interchange and extended types).

__STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ The integer constant 1, intended to indicate adherence to the specifications in Annex G (ISO/IEC 60559 compatible complex arithmetic). Use of this macro is an obsolescent feature.

__STDC_NO_VLA__ The integer constant 1, intended to indicate that the implementation does not support variable length arrays with automatic storage duration. Parameters declared with variable length array types are adjusted and then define objects of automatic storage duration with pointer types. Thus, support for such declarations is mandatory.

2

NOTE The intention for the macros __STDC_LIB_EXT1__, __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__, __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__, __STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__, and __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__, with the value 202311L, is that this will remain an integer constant of type long int that is increased with each revision of this document.

3

An implementation that defines __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__ shall not define __STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__

or __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__.

6.10.11 Pragma operator

Semantics

1

A unary operator expression of the form:

_Pragma ( string-literal )

is processed as follows: The string literal is destringized by deleting any encoding prefix, deleting the leading and trailing double-quotes, replacing each escape sequence \" by a double-quote, and replacing each escape sequence \\ by a single backslash. The resulting sequence of characters is processed through translation phase 3 to produce preprocessing tokens that are executed as if they were the pp-tokens in a pragma directive. The original four preprocessing tokens in the unary operator expression are removed.

2

EXAMPLE A directive of the form:

#pragma listing on "..\listing.dir"
can also be expressed as:
_Pragma ("listing on \"..\\listing.dir\"")
The latter form is processed in the same way whether it appears literally as shown, or results from macro replacement, as in:
#define LISTING(x) PRAGMA(listing on #x)
#define PRAGMA(x)  _Pragma(#x)
LISTING (..\listing.dir)

6.11 Future language directions

6.11.1 Floating types

1

Future standardization may include additional floating types, including those with greater range, precision, or both than long double.

6.11.2 Linkages of identifiers

1

Declaring an identifier with internal linkage at file scope without the static or constexpr storageclass specifier is an obsolescent feature.

6.11.3 External names

1

Restriction of the significance of an external name to fewer than 255 characters (considering each universal character name or extended source character as a single character) is an obsolescent feature that is a concession to existing implementations.

6.11.4 Character escape sequences

1

Lowercase letters as escape sequences are reserved for future standardization. Other characters may be used in extensions.

6.11.5 Storage-class specifiers

1

The placement of a storage-class specifier other than at the beginning of the declaration specifiers in a declaration is an obsolescent feature.

2

Future standardization may change the auto storage-class specifier to a type specifier.

6.11.6 Pragma directives

1

Pragmas whose first preprocessing token is STDC are reserved for future standardization.

6.11.7 Predefined macro names

1

Macro names beginning with __STDC_ are reserved for future standardization.

2

Uses of the __STDC_IEC_559__ and __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ macros are obsolescent features.

7 Library

7.1 Introduction

7.1.1 Definitions of terms

1

A string is a contiguous sequence of characters terminated by and including the first null character. The term multibyte string is sometimes used instead to emphasize special processing given to multibyte characters contained in the string or to avoid confusion with a wide string. A pointer to a string is a pointer to its initial (lowest addressed) character. The length of a string is the number of bytes preceding the null character and the value of a string is the sequence of the values of the contained characters, in order.

2

The decimal-point character is the character used by functions that convert floating-point numbers to or from character sequences to denote the beginning of the fractional part of such character sequences.212) It is represented in the text and examples by a period, but may be changed by the setlocale function.

3

A null wide character is a wide character with code value zero.

4

A wide string is a contiguous sequence of wide characters terminated by and including the first null wide character. A pointer to a wide string is a pointer to its initial (lowest addressed) wide character. The length of a wide string is the number of wide characters preceding the null wide character and the value of a wide string is the sequence of code values of the contained wide characters, in order.

5

A shift sequence is a contiguous sequence of bytes within a multibyte string that (potentially) causes a change in shift state (see 5.2.2). A shift sequence shall not have a corresponding wide character; it is instead taken to be an adjunct to an adjacent multibyte character.213) In this clause, "white-space character" refers to (execution) white-space character as defined by isspace. "White-space wide character" refers to (execution) white-space wide character as defined by iswspace.

Forward references: character handling (7.4), the setlocale function (7.11.1.1).

7.1.2 Standard headers

1

Each library function is declared in a header,214) whose contents are made available by the #include preprocessing directive. The header declares a set of related functions, plus any types and additional macros needed to facilitate the use of such related functions. In addition to the provisions given in this clause, an implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__, __STDC_IEC_559__, or __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ shall conform to the specifications in Annex F, one that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__ or __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ shall conform to the specifications in Annex G, one that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ shall conform to the specifications in Annex H and one that defines __STDC_LIB_EXT1__ shall conform to the specifications in Annex K, and those Annexes should be read as if they were merged into the parallel structure of named subclauses of this clause. Declarations of types described here, in Annex H, or in Annex K, shall not include type qualifiers, unless explicitly stated otherwise.

2

An implementation that does not support decimal floating types (6.10.10.4) may not support interfaces or aspects of interfaces that are specific to these types.

3

The standard headers are215)

:
<setjmp.h>
<signal.h>
<stdalign.h>
<stdarg.h>
<stdatomic.h>
<stdbit.h>
<stdbool.h>
<stdckdint.h>
<stddef.h>
<stdint.h>
<stdio.h>
<stdlib.h>
<stdnoreturn.h>
<string.h>
<tgmath.h>
<threads.h>
<time.h>
<uchar.h>
<wchar.h>
<wctype.h>

<assert.h> <complex.h> <ctype.h> <errno.h> <fenv.h> <float.h> <inttypes.h> <iso646.h> <limits.h> <locale.h> <math.h>

4

If a file with the same name as one of the preceding entries in < and > delimited sequences, not provided as part of the implementation, is placed in any of the standard places that are searched for included source files, the behavior is undefined.

5

Standard headers may be included in any order; each may be included more than once in a given scope, with no effect different from being included only once, except that the effect of including <assert.h> depends on the definition of NDEBUG (see 7.2). If used, a header shall be included outside of any external declaration or definition, and it shall first be included before the first reference to any of the functions or objects it declares, or to any of the types or macros it defines. However, if an identifier is declared or defined in more than one header, the second and subsequent associated headers may be included after the initial reference to the identifier. The program shall not have any macros with names lexically identical to keywords currently defined prior to the inclusion of the header or when any macro defined in the header is expanded.

6

Some standard headers define or declare identifiers that had not been present in previous versions of this document. To allow implementations and users to adapt to that situation, they also define a version macro for feature test of the form __STDC_VERSION_ XXXX_H__ which expands to 202311L, where XXXX is the all-caps spelling of the corresponding header <xxxx.h>.

7

Any definition of an object-like macro described in this clause or Annex F, Annex G, Annex H, or Annex K shall expand to code that is fully protected by parentheses where necessary, so that it groups in an arbitrary expression as if it were a single identifier.

8

Any declaration of a library function shall have external linkage.

9

A summary of the contents of the standard headers is given in Annex B.

Forward references: diagnostics (7.2).

7.1.3 Reserved identifiers

1

Each header declares or defines all identifiers listed in its associated subclause, and optionally declares or defines identifiers listed in its associated future library directions subclause and identifiers which are always reserved either for any use or for use as file scope identifiers.

  • All potentially reserved identifiers (including ones listed in the future library directions) that are provided by an implementation with an external definition are reserved for any use. An implementation shall not provide an external definition of a potentially reserved identifier unless that identifier is reserved for a use where it would have external linkage.216) All other potentially reserved identifiers that are provided by an implementation (including in the form of a macro) are reserved for any use when the associated header is included. No other potentially reserved identifiers are reserved.217)
  • Each macro name in any of the following subclauses (including the future library directions) is reserved for use as specified if any of its associated headers is included; unless explicitly stated otherwise (see 7.1.4).

7.1.4 Use of library functions

1

Each of the following statements applies unless explicitly stated otherwise in the detailed descriptions that follow:

  • If an argument to a function has an invalid value (such as a value outside the domain of the function, or a pointer outside the address space of the program, or a null pointer, or a pointer to non-modifiable storage when the corresponding parameter is not const-qualified) or a type (after default argument promotion) not expected by a function with a variable number of arguments, the behavior is undefined.
  • If a function argument is described as being an array, the pointer passed to the function shall have a value such that all address computations and accesses to objects (that would be valid if the pointer did point to the first element of such an array) are valid.219)
  • Any function declared in a header may be additionally implemented as a function-like macro defined in the header, so if a library function is declared explicitly when its header is included, one of the techniques shown later in the next subclause can be used to ensure the declaration is not affected by such a macro. Any macro definition of a function can be suppressed locally by enclosing the name of the function in parentheses, because the name is then not followed by the left parenthesis that indicates expansion of a macro function name. For the same syntactic reason, it is permitted to take the address of a library function even if it is also defined as a macro.220) The use of #undef to remove any macro definition will also ensure that an actual function is referred to.
  • Any invocation of a library function that is implemented as a macro shall expand to code that evaluates each of its arguments exactly once, fully protected by parentheses where necessary, so it is generally safe to use arbitrary expressions as arguments.221)
  • Likewise, those function-like macros described in the following subclauses may be invoked in an expression anywhere a function with a compatible return type could be called.222)
  • All object-like macros listed as expanding to integer constant expressions shall additionally be suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives.
2

Provided that a library function can be declared without reference to any type defined in a header, it is also permissible to declare the function and use it without including its associated header.

3

There is a sequence point immediately before a library function returns.

4

The functions in the standard library are not guaranteed to be reentrant and may modify objects with static or thread storage duration.223)

5

Unless explicitly stated otherwise in the detailed descriptions that follow, library functions shall prevent data races as follows: A library function shall not directly or indirectly access objects accessible by threads other than the current thread unless the objects are accessed directly or indirectly via the function’s arguments. A library function shall not directly or indirectly modify objects accessible by threads other than the current thread unless the objects are accessed directly or indirectly via the function’s non-const arguments.224) Implementations may share their own internal objects between threads if the objects are not visible to users and are protected against data races.

6

Unless otherwise specified, library functions shall perform all operations solely within the current thread if those operations have effects that are visible to users.225)

7

EXAMPLE The function atoi can be used in any of several ways:

  • by use of its associated header (possibly generating a macro expansion)
#include <stdlib.h>
const char *str;
/* ... */
i = atoi(str);
  • by use of its associated header (assuredly generating a true function reference)
#include <stdlib.h>
#undef atoi
const char *str;
/* ... */
i = atoi(str);
or
#include <stdlib.h>
const char *str;
/* ... */
i = (atoi)(str);
  • by explicit declaration
extern int atoi(const char *);
const char *str;
/* ... */
i = atoi(str);

7.2 Diagnostics <assert.h>

7.2.1 General

1

The header <assert.h> defines the assert and __STDC_VERSION_ASSERT_H__ macros and refers to another macro,

NDEBUG
which is not defined by <assert.h>. If NDEBUG is defined as a macro name at the point in the source file where <assert.h> is included, the assert macro is defined simply as
#define assert(...) ((void)0)

The assert macro is redefined according to the current state of NDEBUG each time that <assert.h> is included.

2

The assert macro shall be implemented as a macro with an ellipsis parameter, not as an actual function. If the macro definition is suppressed to access an actual function, the behavior is undefined.

3

NOTE Nevertheless, when NDEBUG is not defined, the macro acts as a function taking one parameter as indicated by the prototype as given later in this subclause (7.2.2.1). For both assert() and assert(1, 1), the number of arguments does not agree with the number of parameters. A diagnostic is required by 6.5.3.3.

4

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_ASSERT_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

7.2.2 Program diagnostics

7.2.2.1 The assert macro

1
#include <assert.h>
void assert(scalar expression);
Description
2

The assert macro puts diagnostic tests into programs; it expands to a void expression. When it is executed, if expression (which shall have a scalar type) is false (that is, compares equal to 0), the assert macro writes information about the particular invocation that failed (including the text of the argument, the name of the source file, the source line number, and the name of the enclosing function — the latter are respectively the values of the preprocessing macros __FILE__ and __LINE__ and of the identifier __func__) on the standard error stream in an implementation-defined format.226)

It then calls the abort function.

Returns
3

The assert macro returns no value.

Forward references: the abort function (7.24.4.1).

7.3 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>

7.3.1 Introduction

1

The header <complex.h> defines macros and declares functions that support complex arithmetic.227)

2

Implementations that define the macro __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__ may not provide this header nor support any of its facilities.

3

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_COMPLEX_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

4

Each synopsis, other than for the CMPLX macros, specifies a family of functions consisting of a principal function with one or more double complex parameters and a double complex or double return value; and other functions with the same name but with f and l suffixes which are corresponding functions with float and long double parameters and return values.

5

The macro

complex
expands to _Complex; the macro
_Complex_I

expands to an arithmetic constant expression of type float _Complex, with the value of the imaginary unit.228)

6

The macros

imaginary
and
_Imaginary_I

are defined if and only if the implementation supports imaginary types;229) and, if defined, they expand to _Imaginary and an arithmetic constant expression of type float _Imaginary with the value of the imaginary unit.

7

The macro

I

expands to either _Imaginary_I or _Complex_I. If _Imaginary_I is not defined, I shall expand to _Complex_I.

8

Notwithstanding the provisions of 7.1.3, a program may undefine and perhaps then redefine the macros complex, imaginary, and I.

Forward references: the CMPLX macros (7.3.9.3), ISO/IEC 60559-compatible complex arithmetic (Annex G).

7.3.2 Conventions

1

Values are interpreted as radians, not degrees. An implementation may set errno but is not required to do so.

7.3.3 Branch cuts

1

Some of the following functions have branch cuts, across which the function is discontinuous. For implementations with a signed zero (including all ISO/IEC 60559 implementations) that follow the specifications of Annex G, the sign of zero distinguishes one side of a cut from another so that the function is continuous (except for format limitations) as the cut is approached from either side. For example, for the square root function, which has a branch cut along the negative real axis, the top of the cut, with imaginary part +0, maps to the positive imaginary axis, and the bottom of the cut, with imaginary part -0, maps to the negative imaginary axis.

2

Implementations that do not support a signed zero (see Annex F) cannot distinguish the sides of branch cuts. These implementations shall map a cut so that the function is continuous as the cut is approached coming around the finite endpoint of the cut in a counter clockwise direction. (Branch cuts for the functions specified here have just one finite endpoint.) For example, in the square root function, coming counter clockwise around the finite endpoint of the cut along the negative real axis approaches the cut from above, so that the cut maps to the positive imaginary axis.

7.3.4 The CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma

1
#include <complex.h>
#pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE on-off-switch

Description

2

The usual mathematical formulas for complex multiply, divide, and absolute value are problematic because of their treatment of infinities and because of undue overflow and underflow. The CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma can be used to inform the implementation that (where the state is "on") the usual mathematical formulas are acceptable.230) The pragma can occur either outside external declarations or preceding all explicit declarations and statements inside a compound statement. When outside external declarations, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma is encountered, or until the end of the translation unit. When inside a compound statement, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma is encountered (including within a nested compound statement), or until the end of the compound statement; at the end of a compound statement the state for the pragma is restored to its condition just before the compound statement. If this pragma is used in any other context, the behavior is undefined. The default state for the pragma is "off".

7.3.5 Trigonometric functions

7.3.5.1 The cacos functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex cacos(double complex z);
float complex cacosf(float complex z);
long double complex cacosl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The cacos functions compute the complex arc cosine of z, with branch cuts outside the interval [1,+1] along the real axis.

230)The purpose of the pragma is to allow the implementation to use the formulas:

(x+iy)×(u+iv) = (xuyv)+i(yu+xv)

(x+iy)/(u+iv) = [(xu+yv)+i(yuxv)]/(u2+v2)

|x+iy| = � x2+y2

Returns

3

The cacos functions return the complex arc cosine value, in the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [0,π] along the real axis.

7.3.5.2 The casin functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex casin(double complex z);
float complex casinf(float complex z);
long double complex casinl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The casin functions compute the complex arc sine of z, with branch cuts outside the interval [1,+1] along the real axis.

Returns
3

The casin functions return the complex arc sine value, in the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [π

2,+π

2] along the real axis.

7.3.5.3 The catan functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex catan(double complex z);
float complex catanf(float complex z);
long double complex catanl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The catan functions compute the complex arc tangent of z, with branch cuts outside the interval [i,+i] along the imaginary axis.

Returns
3

The catan functions return the complex arc tangent value, in the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the imaginary axis and in the interval [π

2,+π

2] along the real axis.

Description

2

The csin functions compute the complex sine of z.

Returns

3

The csin functions return the complex sine value.

7.3.5.6 The ctan functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex ctan(double complex z);
float complex ctanf(float complex z);
long double complex ctanl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The ctan functions compute the complex tangent of z.

Returns
3

The ctan functions return the complex tangent value.

7.3.6 Hyperbolic functions

7.3.6.1 The cacosh functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex cacosh(double complex z);
float complex cacoshf(float complex z);
long double complex cacoshl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The cacosh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic cosine of z, with a branch cut at values less than 1 along the real axis.

Returns
3

The cacosh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic cosine value, in the range of a half-strip of nonnegative values along the real axis and in the interval [iπ,+] along the imaginary axis.

7.3.6.2 The casinh functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex casinh(double complex z);
float complex casinhf(float complex z);
long double complex casinhl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The casinh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic sine of z, with branch cuts outside the interval [i,+i] along the imaginary axis.

Returns
3

The casinh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic sine value, in the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [

2,+

2] along the imaginary axis.

double complex catanh(double complex z);
float complex catanhf(float complex z);
long double complex catanhl(long double complex z);

Description

2

The catanh functions compute the complex arc hyperbolic tangent of z, with branch cuts outside the interval [1,+1] along the real axis.

Returns

3

The catanh functions return the complex arc hyperbolic tangent value, in the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [

2,+

2] along the imaginary axis.

7.3.6.4 The ccosh functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex ccosh(double complex z);
float complex ccoshf(float complex z);
long double complex ccoshl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The ccosh functions compute the complex hyperbolic cosine of z.

Returns
3

The ccosh functions return the complex hyperbolic cosine value.

7.3.6.5 The csinh functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex csinh(double complex z);
float complex csinhf(float complex z);
long double complex csinhl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The csinh functions compute the complex hyperbolic sine of z.

Returns
3

The csinh functions return the complex hyperbolic sine value.

7.3.6.6 The ctanh functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex ctanh(double complex z);
float complex ctanhf(float complex z);
long double complex ctanhl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The ctanh functions compute the complex hyperbolic tangent of z.

Returns
3

The ctanh functions return the complex hyperbolic tangent value.

7.3.7 Exponential and logarithmic functions

7.3.7.1 The cexp functions

Synopsis

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex cexp(double complex z);
float complex cexpf(float complex z);
long double complex cexpl(long double complex z);

Description

2

The cexp functions compute the complex base-e exponential of z.

Returns

3

The cexp functions return the complex base-e exponential value.

7.3.7.2 The clog functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex clog(double complex z);
float complex clogf(float complex z);
long double complex clogl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The clog functions compute the complex natural (base-e) logarithm of z, with a branch cut along the negative real axis.

Returns
3

The clog functions return the complex natural logarithm value, in the range of a strip mathematically unbounded along the real axis and in the interval [iπ,+] along the imaginary axis.

7.3.8 Power and absolute-value functions

7.3.8.1 The cabs functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double cabs(double complex z);
float cabsf(float complex z);
long double cabsl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The cabs functions compute the complex absolute value (also called norm, modulus, or magnitude) of z.

Returns
3

The cabs functions return the complex absolute value.

7.3.8.2 The cpow functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex cpow(double complex x, double complex y);
float complex cpowf(float complex x, float complex y);
long double complex cpowl(long double complex x, long double complex y);
Description
2

The cpow functions compute the complex power function xy, with a branch cut for the first parameter along the negative real axis.

Returns

3

The cpow functions return the complex power function value.

7.3.8.3 The csqrt functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex csqrt(double complex z);
float complex csqrtf(float complex z);
long double complex csqrtl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The csqrt functions compute the complex square root of z, with a branch cut along the negative real axis.

Returns
3

The csqrt functions return the complex square root value, in the range of the right half-plane (including the imaginary axis).

7.3.9 Manipulation functions

7.3.9.1 The carg functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double carg(double complex z);
float cargf(float complex z);
long double cargl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The carg functions compute the argument (also called phase (which is an angle)) of z, with a branch cut along the negative real axis.

Returns
3

The carg functions return the value of the argument in the interval [π,+π].

7.3.9.2 The cimag functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double cimag(double complex z);
float cimagf(float complex z);
long double cimagl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The cimag functions compute the imaginary part of z.231)

Returns
3

The cimag functions return the imaginary part value (as a real).

7.3.9.3 The CMPLX macros

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex CMPLX(double x, double y);
float complex CMPLXF(float x, float y);
long double complex CMPLXL(long double x, long double y);

Description

2

The CMPLX macros expand to an expression of the specified complex type, with the real part having the (converted) value of x and the imaginary part having the (converted) value of y. The resulting expression shall be suitable for use as an initializer for an object with static or thread storage duration, provided both arguments are likewise suitable. The resulting expression shall be an arithmetic constant expression, provided both arguments are arithmetic constant expressions.

Returns

3

The CMPLX macros return the complex value x +iy.

4

NOTE These macros act as if the implementation supported imaginary types and the definitions were:

#define CMPLX(x, y)  ((double complex)((double)(x) + \
                              _Imaginary_I * (double)(y)))
#define CMPLXF(x, y) ((float complex)((float)(x) + \
                              _Imaginary_I * (float)(y)))
#define CMPLXL(x, y) ((long double complex)((long double)(x) + \
                              _Imaginary_I * (long double)(y)))

7.3.9.4 The conj functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex conj(double complex z);
float complex conjf(float complex z);
long double complex conjl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The conj functions compute the complex conjugate of z, by negating the sign of its imaginary part.

Returns
3

The conj functions return the complex conjugate value.

7.3.9.5 The cproj functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double complex cproj(double complex z);
float complex cprojf(float complex z);
long double complex cprojl(long double complex z);
Description
2

The cproj functions compute a projection of z onto the Riemann sphere where z projects to z except that all complex infinities (even those with one infinite part and one NaN part) project to positive infinity on the real axis. If z has an infinite part, then cproj(z) is equivalent to

INFINITY + I * copysign(0.0, cimag(z))
Returns
3

The cproj functions return the value of the projection onto the Riemann sphere.

7.3.9.6 The creal functions

1
#include <complex.h>
double creal(double complex z);
float crealf(float complex z);
long double creall(long double complex z);

Description

2

The creal functions compute the real part of z.232)

Returns

3

The creal functions return the real part value.

7.4 Character handling <ctype.h>

7.4.1 General

1

The header <ctype.h> declares several functions useful for classifying and mapping characters.233)

In all cases the argument is an int, the value of which shall be representable as an unsigned char or shall equal the value of the macro EOF. If the argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.

2

The behavior of these functions is affected by the current locale. Those functions that have localespecific aspects only when not in the "C" locale are noted subsequently in this subclause.

3

The term printing character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of characters, each of which occupies one printing position on a display device; the term control character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of characters that are not printing characters.234) All letters and digits are printing characters.

Forward references:

EOF (7.23.1), localization (7.11).

7.4.2 Character classification functions

1

The functions in this subclause return nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the argument c conforms to that in the description of the function.

7.4.2.1 The isalnum function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isalnum(int c);
Description
2

The isalnum function tests for any character for which isalpha or isdigit is true.

7.4.2.2 The isalpha function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isalpha(int c);
Description
2

The isalpha function tests for any character for which isupper or islower is true, or any character that is one of a locale-specific set of alphabetic characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or isspace is true.235) In the "C" locale, isalpha returns true only for the characters for which isupper or islower is true.

7.4.2.3 The isblank function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isblank(int c);
Description
2

The isblank function tests for any character that is a standard blank character or is one of a localespecific set of characters for which isspace is true and that is used to separate words within a line

of text. The standard blank characters are the following: space (’ ’), and horizontal tab (’\t’). In the "C" locale, isblank returns true only for the standard blank characters.

7.4.2.4 The iscntrl function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int iscntrl(int c);
Description
2

The iscntrl function tests for any control character.

7.4.2.5 The isdigit function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isdigit(int c);
Description
2

The isdigit function tests for any decimal-digit character (as defined in 5.2.1).

7.4.2.6 The isgraph function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isgraph(int c);
Description
2

The isgraph function tests for any printing character except space (’ ’).

7.4.2.7 The islower function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int islower(int c);
Description
2

The islower function tests for any character that is a lowercase letter or is one of a locale-specific set of characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or isspace is true. In the "C" locale, islower returns true only for the lowercase letters (as defined in 5.2.1).

7.4.2.8 The isprint function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isprint(int c);
Description
2

The isprint function tests for any printing character including space (’ ’).

7.4.2.9 The ispunct function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int ispunct(int c);

Description

2

The ispunct function tests for any printing character that is one of a locale-specific set of punctuation characters for which neither isspace nor isalnum is true. In the "C" locale, ispunct returns true for every printing character for which neither isspace nor isalnum is true.

7.4.2.10 The isspace function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isspace(int c);
Description
2

The isspace function tests for any character that is a standard white-space character or is one of a locale-specific set of characters for which isalnum is false. The standard white-space characters are the following: space (’ ’), form feed (’\f’), new-line (’\n’), carriage return (’\r’), horizontal tab (’\t’), and vertical tab (’\v’). In the "C" locale, isspace returns true only for the standard white-space characters.

7.4.2.11 The isupper function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isupper(int c);
Description
2

The isupper function tests for any character that is an uppercase letter or is one of a locale-specific set of characters for which none of iscntrl, isdigit, ispunct, or isspace is true. In the "C" locale, isupper returns true only for the uppercase letters (as defined in 5.2.1).

7.4.2.12 The isxdigit function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int isxdigit(int c);
Description
2

The isxdigit function tests for any hexadecimal-digit character (as defined in 6.4.4.2).

7.4.3 Character case mapping functions

7.4.3.1 The tolower function

1
#include <ctype.h>
int tolower(int c);
Description
2

The tolower function converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter.

Returns
3

If the argument is a character for which isupper is true and there are one or more corresponding characters, as specified by the current locale, for which islower is true, the tolower function returns one of the corresponding characters (always the same one for any given locale); otherwise, the argument is returned unchanged.

7.4.3.2 The toupper function

Synopsis

1
#include <ctype.h>
int toupper(int c);

Description

2

The toupper function converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter.

Returns

3

If the argument is a character for which islower is true and there are one or more corresponding characters, as specified by the current locale, for which isupper is true, the toupper function returns one of the corresponding characters (always the same one for any given locale); otherwise, the argument is returned unchanged.

7.5 Errors <errno.h>

1

The header <errno.h> defines several macros, all relating to the reporting of error conditions.

2

The macros are

EDOM
EILSEQ
ERANGE
which expand to integer constant expressions with type int, distinct positive values, and which are suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives; and
errno

which expands to a modifiable lvalue236) that has type int and thread storage duration, the value of which is set to a positive error number by several library functions. If a macro definition is suppressed to access an actual object, or a program defines an identifier with the name errno, the behavior is undefined.

3

The value of errno in the initial thread is zero at program startup (the initial representation of the object designated by errno in other threads is indeterminate), but is never set to zero by any library function.237) The value of errno may be set to nonzero by a library function call whether or not there is an error, provided the use of errno is not documented in the description of the function in this document.

4

Additional macro definitions, beginning with E and a digit or E and an uppercase letter,238) may also be specified by the implementation.

7.6 Floating-point environment <fenv.h>

1

The header <fenv.h> defines several macros, and declares types and functions that provide access to the floating-point environment. The floating-point environment refers collectively to any floating-point status flags and control modes supported by the implementation.239)

A floating-point status flag is a system variable whose value is set (but never cleared) when a floatingpoint exception is raised, which occurs as a side effect of exceptional floating-point arithmetic to provide auxiliary information.240) A floating-point control mode is a system variable whose value may be set by the user to affect the subsequent behavior of floating-point arithmetic.

2

A floating-point control mode may be constant (7.6.2) or dynamic. The dynamic floating-point environment includes the dynamic floating-point control modes and the floating-point status flags.

3

The dynamic floating-point environment has thread storage duration. The initial state for a thread’s dynamic floating-point environment is the current state of the dynamic floating-point environment of the thread that creates it. It is initialized at the time of the thread’s creation.

4

Certain programming conventions support the intended model of use for the dynamic floating-point environment:241)

  • a function call does not alter its caller’s floating-point control modes, clear its caller’s floatingpoint status flags, nor depend on the state of its caller’s floating-point status flags unless the function is so documented;
  • a function call is assumed to require default floating-point control modes, unless its documentation promises otherwise;
  • a function call is assumed to have the potential for raising floating-point exceptions, unless its documentation promises otherwise.
5

The feature test macro __STDC_VERSION_FENV_H__ expands to the token 202311L.

6

The type

fenv_t

represents the entire dynamic floating-point environment.

7

The type

femode_t

represents the collection of dynamic floating-point control modes supported by the implementation, including the dynamic rounding direction mode.

8

The type

fexcept_t

represents the floating-point status flags collectively, including any status the implementation associates with the flags.

9

Each of the macros

FE_DIVBYZERO
FE_INEXACT
FE_INVALID
FE_OVERFLOW
FE_UNDERFLOW

is defined if and only if the implementation supports the floating-point exception by means of the functions in 7.6.4.242) Additional implementation-defined floating-point exceptions, with macro definitions beginning with FE_ and an uppercase letter,243) may also be specified by the implementation. The defined macros expand to integer constant expressions with values such that bitwise ORs of all combinations of the macros result in distinct values, and furthermore, bitwise ANDs of all combinations of the macros result in zero.244)

10

Decimal floating-point operations and ISO/IEC 60559 binary floating-point operations (Annex F) access the same floating-point exception status flags.

11

The macro

FE_DFL_MODE

represents the default state for the collection of dynamic floating-point control modes supported by the implementation – and has type "pointer to const-qualified femode_t". Additional implementation-defined states for the dynamic mode collection, with macro definitions beginning with FE_ and an uppercase letter, and having type "pointer to const-qualified femode_t", may also be specified by the implementation.

12

The macro

FE_ALL_EXCEPT

is the bitwise OR of all floating-point exception macros defined by the implementation. If no such macros are defined, FE_ALL_EXCEPT shall be defined as 0.

13

Each of the macros

FE_DOWNWARD
FE_TONEAREST
FE_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_TOWARDZERO
FE_UPWARD

is defined if and only if the implementation supports getting and setting the represented rounding direction by means of the fegetround and fesetround functions. The defined macros expand to integer constant expressions whose values are distinct nonnegative values. Additional implementation-defined rounding directions, with macro definitions beginning with FE_ and an uppercase letter,245) may also be specified by the implementation.246)

14

If the implementation supports decimal floating types, each of the macros

FE_DEC_DOWNWARD
FE_DEC_TONEAREST
FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO
FE_DEC_UPWARD

is defined for use with the fe_dec_getround and fe_dec_setround functions for getting and setting the dynamic rounding direction mode for decimal floating-point operations. The decimal rounding direction affects all (inexact) operations that produce a result of decimal floating type and all operations that produce an integer or character sequence result and have an operand of decimal floating type, unless stated otherwise. The macros expand to integer constant expressions whose values are distinct nonnegative values.

15

During translation, constant rounding direction modes for decimal floating-point arithmetic are in effect where specified. Elsewhere, during translation the decimal rounding direction mode is FE_DEC_TONEAREST.

16

At program startup the dynamic rounding direction mode for decimal floating-point arithmetic is initialized to FE_DEC_TONEAREST.

17

The macro

FE_DFL_ENV

represents the default dynamic floating-point environment — the one installed at program startup — and has type "pointer to const-qualified fenv_t". It can be used as an argument to <fenv.h> functions that manage the dynamic floating-point environment.

18

Additional implementation-defined environments, with macro definitions beginning with FE_ and an uppercase letter,247) and having type "pointer to const-qualified fenv_t", may also be specified by the implementation.

7.6.1 The FENV_ACCESS pragma

1
#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS on-off-switch

Description

2

The FENV_ACCESS pragma provides a means to inform the implementation when a program can access the floating-point environment to test floating-point status flags or run under non-default floating-point control modes.248) The pragma shall occur either outside external declarations or preceding all explicit declarations and statements inside a compound statement. When outside external declarations, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another FENV_ACCESS pragma is encountered, or until the end of the translation unit. When inside a compound statement, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another FENV_ACCESS pragma is encountered (including within a nested compound statement), or until the end of the compound statement. At the end of a compound statement, the state for the pragma is restored to its condition just before the compound statement. If this pragma is used in any other context, the behavior is undefined. If part of a program tests floating-point status flags or establishes or is executed with non-default floating-point mode settings using any means other than the FENV_ROUND pragmas, but was translated with the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma "off", the behavior is undefined. The default state ("on" or "off") for the pragma is implementation-defined. (When execution passes from a part of the program translated with FENV_ACCESS "off" to a part translated with FENV_ACCESS "on", the state of the floating-point status flags is unspecified and the floating-point control modes have their default settings.)

3

EXAMPLE

#include <fenv.h>
void f(double x)
{
      #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
      void g(double);
      void h(double);
      /* ... */
      g(x + 1);
      h(x + 1);
      /* ... */
}
4

If the function g can depend on status flags set as a side effect of the first x + 1, or if the second x + 1 can depend on control modes set as a side effect of the call to function g, then the program has to contain an appropriately placed invocation of #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON as shown.249)

7.6.2 The FENV_ROUND pragma

1
#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ROUND direction
#pragma STDC FENV_ROUND FE_DYNAMIC

Description

2

The FENV_ROUND pragma provides a means to specify a constant rounding direction for floating-point operations for standard floating types within a translation unit or compound statement. The pragma shall occur either outside external declarations or before all explicit declarations and statements inside a compound statement. When outside external declarations, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another FENV_ROUND pragma is encountered, or until the end of the translation unit. When inside a compound statement, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another FENV_ROUND pragma is encountered (including within a nested compound statement), or until the end of the compound statement; at the end of a compound statement the static rounding mode is restored to its condition just before the compound statement. If this pragma is used in any other context, its behavior is undefined.

3

direction shall be: one of the names of the supported rounding direction macros for operations for standard floating types (7.6), to specify a constant rounding mode; or, FE_DYNAMIC, to specify dynamic rounding. If any other value is specified, the behavior is undefined. If no FENV_ROUND pragma is in effect, or the specified direction is FE_DYNAMIC, rounding is according to the mode specified by the dynamic floating-point environment, which is the dynamic rounding mode that was established either at thread creation or by a call to fesetround, fesetmode, fesetenv, or feupdateenv. If the direction FE_DYNAMIC is specified and FENV_ACCESS is "off", the translator may assume that the default rounding mode is in effect.

4

The FENV_ROUND pragma affects operations for standard floating types. Within the scope of an FENV_ROUND pragma establishing a constant rounding mode, floating-point operators, implicit conversions (including the conversion of a value represented in a format wider than its semantic types to its semantic type, as done by classification macros), and invocations of functions indicated in Table 7.1, for which macro replacement has not been suppressed (7.1.4), shall be evaluated according to the specified constant rounding mode (as though no constant mode was specified and the corresponding dynamic rounding mode had been established by a call to fesetround). Invocations of functions for which macro replacement has been suppressed and invocations of functions other than those indicated in Table 7.1 shall not be affected by constant rounding modes – they are affected by (and affect) only the dynamic mode. Floating constants (6.4.4.3) of a standard floating type that occur in the scope of a constant rounding mode shall be interpreted according to that mode.

A function family listed in Table 7.1 indicates the functions for all standard floating types, where the function family is represented by the name of the functions without a suffix. For example, acos indicates the functions acos, acosf, and acosl.

5

NOTE Constant rounding modes could be implemented using dynamic rounding modes as illustrated in the following example, except that this method does not interpret inexact floating constants according to the constant rounding mode as required.

{
      #pragma STDC FENV_ROUND direction
      // compiler inserts:
      // #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
      // int __savedrnd;
      // __savedrnd = __swapround(direction);
      ...  operations affected by constant rounding mode ...
      // compiler inserts:
      // __savedrnd = __swapround(__savedrnd);
      ...  operations not affected by constant rounding mode ...
      // compiler inserts:
      // __savedrnd = __swapround(__savedrnd);
      ...  operations affected by constant rounding mode ...
      // compiler inserts:
      // __swapround(__savedrnd);
}
where __swapround is defined by:
static inline int __swapround(const int new) {
      const int old = fegetround();
      fesetround(new);
      return old;
}

7.6.3 The FENV_DEC_ROUND pragma

1
#include <fenv.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
#pragma STDC FENV_DEC_ROUND dec-direction
#endif

Description

2

The FENV_DEC_ROUND pragma is a decimal floating-point analog of the FENV_ROUND pragma. If FLT_RADIX is not 10, the FENV_DEC_ROUND pragma affects operators, functions, and floating constants only for decimal floating types. The affected functions are listed in Table 7.2. If FLT_RADIX

is 10, whether the FENV_ROUND and FENV_DEC_ROUND pragmas alter the rounding direction of both standard and decimal floating-point operations is implementation-defined. dec-direction shall be one of the decimal rounding direction macro names (FE_DEC_DOWNWARD, FE_DEC_TONEAREST, FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO, FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO, and FE_DEC_UPWARD) defined in 7.6, to specify a constant rounding mode, or FE_DEC_DYNAMIC, to specify dynamic rounding. The corresponding dynamic rounding mode can be established by a call to fe_dec_setround.

Table 7.2: Functions affected by constant rounding modes – for decimal floating types

Header Function families <math.h> acos, acospi, asin, asinpi, atan, atan2, atan2pi, atanpi <math.h> cos, cospi, sin, sinpi, tan, tanpi <math.h> acosh, asinh, atanh <math.h> cosh, sinh, tanh <math.h> exp, exp10, exp10m1, exp2, exp2m1, expm1 <math.h> log, log10, log10p1, log1p, log2, log2p1, logp1 <math.h> scalbn, scalbln, ldexp <math.h> cbrt, compoundn, hypot, pow, pown, powr, rootn, rsqrt, sqrt <math.h> erf, erfc <math.h> lgamma, tgamma <math.h> rint, nearbyint, lrint, llrint <math.h> quantize <math.h> fdim <math.h> fma <math.h> d32add, d64add, d32sub, d64sub, d32mul, d64mul, d32div, d64div, d32fma, d64fma, d32sqrt, d64sqrt <stdlib.h> strfrom, strto <wchar.h> wcsto <stdio.h> printf and scanf families <wchar.h> wprintf and wscanf families

A function family listed in Table 7.2 indicates the functions for all decimal floating types, where the function family is represented by the name of the functions without a suffix. For example, acos indicates the functions acosd32, acosd64, and acosd128.

7.6.4 Floating-point exceptions

1

The following functions provide access to the floating-point status flags.250) The int input argument for the functions represents a subset of floating-point exceptions, and can be zero or the bitwise OR of one or more floating-point exception macros, for example FE_OVERFLOW | FE_INEXACT. For other argument values, the behavior of these functions is undefined.

7.6.4.1 The feclearexcept function

Synopsis

1
#include <fenv.h>
int feclearexcept(int excepts);

Description

2

The feclearexcept function attempts to clear the supported floating-point exceptions represented by its argument.

Returns

3

The feclearexcept function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all the specified exceptions were successfully cleared. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

7.6.4.2 The fegetexceptflag function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fegetexceptflag(fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts);
Description
2

The fegetexceptflag function attempts to store an implementation-defined representation of the states of the floating-point status flags indicated by the argument excepts in the object pointed to by the argument flagp.

Returns
3

The fegetexceptflag function returns zero if the representation was successfully stored. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

7.6.4.3 The feraiseexcept function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int feraiseexcept(int excepts);
Description
2

The feraiseexcept function attempts to raise the supported floating-point exceptions represented by its argument.251) The order in which these floating-point exceptions are raised is unspecified, except as stated in F.8.7. Whether the feraiseexcept function additionally raises the "inexact" floating-point exception whenever it raises the "overflow" or "underflow" floating-point exception is implementation-defined.

Returns
3

The feraiseexcept function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all the specified exceptions were successfully raised. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

Recommended practice Implementation extensions associated with raising a floating-point exception (for example, enabled traps or ISO/IEC 60559 alternate exception handling) should be honored by this function.

7.6.4.4 The fesetexcept function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fesetexcept(int excepts);

Description

2

The fesetexcept function attempts to set the supported floating-point exception flags represented by its argument. This function does not clear any floating-point exception flags. This function changes the state of the floating-point exception flags, but does not cause any other side effects that can be associated with raising floating-point exceptions.252)

Returns

3

The fesetexcept function returns zero if all the specified exceptions were successfully set or if the excepts argument is zero. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

7.6.4.5 The fesetexceptflag function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fesetexceptflag(const fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts);
Description
2

The fesetexceptflag function attempts to set the floating-point status flags indicated by the argument excepts to the states stored in the object pointed to by flagp. The value of *flagp shall have been set by a previous call to fegetexceptflag whose second argument represented at least those floating-point exceptions represented by the argument excepts. Like fesetexcept, this function does not raise floating-point exceptions, but only sets the state of the flags.

Returns
3

The fesetexceptflag function returns zero if the excepts argument is zero or if all the specified flags were successfully set to the appropriate state. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

7.6.4.6 The fetestexceptflag function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fetestexceptflag(const fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts);
Description
2

The fetestexceptflag function determines which of a specified subset of the floating-point exception flags are set in the object pointed to by flagp. The value of *flagp shall have been set by a previous call to fegetexceptflag whose second argument represented at least those floating-point exceptions represented by the argument excepts. The excepts argument specifies the floating-point status flags to be queried.

Returns
3

The fetestexceptflag function returns the value of the bitwise OR of the floating-point exception macros included in excepts corresponding to the floating-point exceptions set in *flagp.

7.6.4.7 The fetestexcept function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fetestexcept(int excepts);
Description
2

The fetestexcept function determines which of a specified subset of the floating-point exception flags are currently set. The excepts argument specifies the floating-point status flags to be queried.253)

Returns

3

The fetestexcept function returns the value of the bitwise OR of the floating-point exception macros corresponding to the currently set floating-point exceptions included in excepts.

4

EXAMPLE Call f if "invalid" is set, then g if "overflow" is set:

#include <fenv.h>
/* ... */
{
      #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
      int set_excepts;
      feclearexcept(FE_INVALID | FE_OVERFLOW);
      // maybe raise exceptions
      set_excepts = fetestexcept(FE_INVALID | FE_OVERFLOW);
      if (set_excepts & FE_INVALID) f();
      if (set_excepts & FE_OVERFLOW) g();
      /* ... */
}

7.6.5 Rounding and other control modes

1

The fegetround and fesetround functions provide control of rounding direction modes. The fegetmode and fesetmode functions manage all the implementation’s dynamic floating-point control modes collectively.

7.6.5.1 The fegetmode function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fegetmode(femode_t *modep);
Description
2

The fegetmode function attempts to store all the dynamic floating-point control modes in the object pointed to by modep.

Returns
3

The fegetmode function returns zero if the modes were successfully stored. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

7.6.5.2 The fegetround function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fegetround(void);
Description
2

The fegetround function gets the current value of the dynamic rounding direction mode.

Returns
3

The fegetround function returns the value of the rounding direction macro representing the current dynamic rounding direction or a negative value if there is no such rounding direction macro or the current dynamic rounding direction is not determinable.

7.6.5.3 The fe_dec_getround function

1
#include <fenv.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int fe_dec_getround(void);
#endif

Description

2

The fe_dec_getround function gets the current value of the dynamic rounding direction mode for decimal floating-point operations.

Returns

3

The fe_dec_getround function returns the value of the rounding direction macro representing the current dynamic rounding direction for decimal floating-point operations, or a negative value if there is no such rounding macro or the current rounding direction is not determinable.

7.6.5.4 The fesetmode function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fesetmode(const femode_t *modep);
Description
2

The fesetmode function attempts to establish the dynamic floating-point modes represented by the object pointed to by modep. The argument modep shall point to an object set by a call to fegetmode, or equal FE_DFL_MODE or a dynamic floating-point mode state macro defined by the implementation.

Returns The fesetmode fesetmode function returns zero if the modes were successfully established. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

7.6.5.5 The fesetround function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fesetround(int rnd);
Description
2

The fesetround function establishes the rounding direction represented by its argument rnd. If the argument is not equal to the value of a rounding direction macro, the rounding direction is not changed.

Returns
3

The fesetround function returns zero if and only if the dynamic rounding direction mode was set to the requested rounding direction.

4

EXAMPLE Save, set, and restore the rounding direction. Report an error and abort if setting the rounding direction fails.

#include <fenv.h>
#include <assert.h>
void f(int rnd_dir)
{
      #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
      int save_round;
      int setround_ok;
      save_round = fegetround();
      setround_ok = fesetround(rnd_dir);
      assert(setround_ok == 0);
      /* ... */
      fesetround(save_round);
      /* ... */
}

7.6.5.6 The fe_dec_setround function

1
#include <fenv.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int fe_dec_setround(int rnd);
#endif
Description
2

The fe_dec_setround function sets the dynamic rounding direction mode for decimal floatingpoint operations to be the rounding direction represented by its argument rnd. If the argument is not equal to the value of a decimal rounding direction macro, the rounding direction is not changed.

3

If FLT_RADIX is not 10, the rounding direction altered by the fesetround function is independent of the rounding direction altered by the fe_dec_setround function; otherwise if FLT_RADIX is 10, whether the fesetround and fe_dec_setround functions alter the rounding direction of both standard and decimal floating-point operations is implementation-defined.

Returns
4

The fe_dec_setround function returns a zero value if and only if the argument is equal to a decimal rounding direction macro (that is, if and only if the dynamic rounding direction mode for decimal floating-point operations was set to the requested rounding direction).

7.6.6 Environment

1

The functions in this section manage the floating-point environment — status flags and control modes — as one entity.

7.6.6.1 The fegetenv function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fegetenv(fenv_t *envp);
Description
2

The fegetenv function attempts to store the current dynamic floating-point environment in the object pointed to by envp.

Returns
3

The fegetenv function returns zero if the environment was successfully stored. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

7.6.6.2 The feholdexcept function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int feholdexcept(fenv_t *envp);
Description
2

The feholdexcept function saves the current dynamic floating-point environment in the object pointed to by envp, clears the floating-point status flags, and then installs a non-stop (continue on floating-point exceptions) mode, if available, for all floating-point exceptions.254)

Returns

3

The feholdexcept function returns zero if and only if non-stop floating-point exception handling was successfully installed.

7.6.6.3 The fesetenv function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int fesetenv(const fenv_t *envp);
Description
2

The fesetenv function attempts to establish the dynamic floating-point environment represented by the object pointed to by envp. The argument envp shall point to an object set by a call to fegetenv or feholdexcept, or equal a dynamic floating-point environment macro. Note that fesetenv merely installs the state of the floating-point status flags represented through its argument, and does not raise these floating-point exceptions.

Returns
3

The fesetenv function returns zero if the environment was successfully established. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

7.6.6.4 The feupdateenv function

1
#include <fenv.h>
int feupdateenv(const fenv_t *envp);
Description
2

The feupdateenv function attempts to save the currently raised floating-point exceptions in its automatic storage, install the dynamic floating-point environment represented by the object pointed to by envp, and then raise the saved floating-point exceptions. The argument envp shall point to an object set by a call to feholdexcept or fegetenv, or equal a dynamic floating-point environment macro.

Returns
3

The feupdateenv function returns zero if all the actions were successfully carried out. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

4

EXAMPLE Hide spurious underflow floating-point exceptions:

#include <fenv.h>
double f(double x)
{
      #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
      double result;
      fenv_t save_env;
      if (feholdexcept(&save_env))
            return /* indication of an environmental problem */;
      // compute result
      if (/* test spurious underflow */)
            if (feclearexcept(FE_UNDERFLOW))
                  return /* indication of an environmental problem */;
      if (feupdateenv(&save_env))
            return /* indication of an environmental problem */;
      return result;
}

7.7 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>

1

The header <float.h> defines several macros that expand to various limits and parameters of the real floating types.

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_FLOAT_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

The rest of the macros, their meanings, and the constraints (or restrictions) on their values are listed in 5.2.5.3.3 and 5.2.5.3.4. A summary is given in Annex E.

7.8 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>

1

The header <inttypes.h> includes the header <stdint.h> and extends it with additional facilities provided by hosted implementations.

2

It defines the macro

__STDC_VERSION_INTTYPES_H__

which is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

It declares functions for manipulating greatest-width integers and converting numeric character strings to greatest-width integers, and it declares the type

imaxdiv_t

which is a structure type that is the type of the value returned by the imaxdiv function. For each type declared in <stdint.h>, it defines corresponding macros for conversion specifiers for use with the formatted input/output functions.255)

Forward references: integer types <stdint.h> (7.22), formatted input/output functions (7.23.6), formatted wide character input/output functions (7.31.2).

7.8.1 Macros for format specifiers

1

Each of the following object-like macros expands to a character string literal containing a conversion specifier, possibly modified by a length modifier, suitable for use within the format argument of a formatted input/output function when converting the corresponding integer type. These macro names have the general form of PRI (character string literals for the fprintf and fwprintf family) or SCN (character string literals for the fscanf and fwscanf family),256) followed by the conversion specifier, followed by a name corresponding to a similar type name in 7.22.1. In these names, N represents the width of the type as described in 7.22.1. For example, PRIdFAST32 can be used in a format string to print the value of an integer of type int_fast32_t. The functions in the fprintf and fwprintf families shall behave as if they use va_arg with a type argument naming the type resulting from applying the default argument promotions to the type corresponding to the macro and then convert the result of the va_arg expansion to the type corresponding to the macro.

2

The fprintf macros for signed integers are:

PRIdN PRIdLEASTN PRIdFASTN PRIdMAX PRIdPTR PRIiN PRIiLEASTN PRIiFASTN PRIiMAX PRIiPTR

3

The fprintf macros for unsigned integers are:

PRIbN PRIbLEASTN PRIbFASTN PRIbMAX PRIbPTR PRIoN PRIoLEASTN PRIoFASTN PRIoMAX PRIoPTR PRIuN PRIuLEASTN PRIuFASTN PRIuMAX PRIuPTR PRIxN PRIxLEASTN PRIxFASTN PRIxMAX PRIxPTR PRIXN PRIXLEASTN PRIXFASTN PRIXMAX PRIXPTR

4

The following fprintf macros for unsigned integer types are optional:

PRIBN PRIBLEASTN PRIBFASTN PRIBMAX PRIBPTR

They shall be defined if the implementation supports the B specifier as indicated in 7.23.6.1 and 7.31.2.1; otherwise they shall not be defined.

5

The fscanf macros for signed integers are:

SCNdN SCNdLEASTN SCNdFASTN SCNdMAX SCNdPTR SCNiN SCNiLEASTN SCNiFASTN SCNiMAX SCNiPTR

6

The fscanf macros for unsigned integers are:

SCNbN SCNbLEASTN SCNbFASTN SCNbMAX SCNbPTR SCNoN SCNoLEASTN SCNoFASTN SCNoMAX SCNoPTR SCNuN SCNuLEASTN SCNuFASTN SCNuMAX SCNuPTR SCNxN SCNxLEASTN SCNxFASTN SCNxMAX SCNxPTR

7

For each type that the implementation provides in <stdint.h>, the corresponding fprintf macros shall be defined and the corresponding fscanf macros shall be defined unless the implementation does not have a suitable fscanf length modifier for the type.

8

EXAMPLE

#include <inttypes.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int main(void)
{
      uintmax_t i = UINTMAX_MAX;    // this type always exists
      wprintf(L"The largest integer value is %020"
            PRIxMAX "\n", i);
      return 0;
}

7.8.2 Functions for greatest-width integer types

7.8.2.1 The imaxabs function

1
#include <inttypes.h>
intmax_t imaxabs(intmax_t j);
Description
2

The imaxabs function computes the absolute value of an integer j. If the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.257)

Returns
3

The imaxabs function returns the absolute value.

7.8.2.2 The imaxdiv function

1
#include <inttypes.h>
imaxdiv_t imaxdiv(intmax_t numer, intmax_t denom);
Description
2

The imaxdiv function computes numer / denom and numer % denom in a single operation.

Returns
3

The imaxdiv function returns a structure of type imaxdiv_t comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structure shall contain (in either order) the members quot (the quotient) and rem (the remainder), each of which has type intmax_t. If either part of the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.

7.8.2.3 The strtoimax and strtoumax functions

1
#include <inttypes.h>
intmax_t strtoimax(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr, int base);
uintmax_t strtoumax(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr, int base);

Description

2

The strtoimax and strtoumax functions are equivalent to the strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions, except that the initial portion of the string is converted to intmax_t and uintmax_t representation, respectively.

Returns

3

The strtoimax and strtoumax functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable values, INTMAX_MAX, INTMAX_MIN, or UINTMAX_MAX is returned (according to the return type and sign of the value, if any), and the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno.

Forward references: the strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions (7.24.1.7).

7.8.2.4 The wcstoimax and wcstoumax functions

1
#include <stddef.h>
// for wchar_t
#include <inttypes.h>
intmax_t wcstoimax(const wchar_t *restrict nptr, wchar_t **restrict endptr, int base);
uintmax_t wcstoumax(const wchar_t *restrict nptr, wchar_t **restrict endptr, int base);
Description
2

The wcstoimax and wcstoumax functions are equivalent to the wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions except that the initial portion of the wide string is converted to intmax_t and uintmax_t representation, respectively.

Returns
3

The wcstoimax function returns the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable values, INTMAX_MAX, INTMAX_MIN, or UINTMAX_MAX is returned (according to the return type and sign of the value, if any), and the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno.

Forward references: the wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions (7.31.4.1.4).

7.9 Alternative spellings <iso646.h>

1

The header <iso646.h> defines the following eleven macros (on the left) that expand to the corresponding tokens (on the right):

and      &&
and_eq   &=
bitand   &
bitor    |
compl    ~
not      !
not_eq   !=
or       ||
or_eq    |=
xor      ^
xor_eq   ^=

7.10 Characteristics of integer types <limits.h>

1

The header <limits.h> defines several macros that expand to various limits and parameters of the standard integer types.

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_LIMITS_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

The rest of the macros, their meanings, and the constraints (or restrictions) on their values are listed in 5.2.5.3.2. A summary is given in Annex E.

7.11 Localization <locale.h>

1

The header <locale.h> declares two functions, one type, and defines several macros.

2

The type is

struct lconv
which contains members related to the formatting of numeric values. The structure shall contain at least the following members, in any order. The semantics of the members and their normal ranges are explained in 7.11.2.1. In the "C" locale, the members shall have the values specified in the comments.
char *decimal_point;       // "."
char *thousands_sep;       // ""
char *grouping;            // ""
char *mon_decimal_point;   // ""
char *mon_thousands_sep;   // ""
char *mon_grouping;        // ""
char *positive_sign;       // ""
char *negative_sign;       // ""
char *currency_symbol;     // ""
char frac_digits;          // CHAR_MAX
char p_cs_precedes;        // CHAR_MAX
char n_cs_precedes;        // CHAR_MAX
char p_sep_by_space;       // CHAR_MAX
char n_sep_by_space;       // CHAR_MAX
char p_sign_posn;          // CHAR_MAX
char n_sign_posn;          // CHAR_MAX
char *int_curr_symbol;     // ""
char int_frac_digits;      // CHAR_MAX
char int_p_cs_precedes;    // CHAR_MAX
char int_n_cs_precedes;    // CHAR_MAX
char int_p_sep_by_space;   // CHAR_MAX
char int_n_sep_by_space;   // CHAR_MAX
char int_p_sign_posn;      // CHAR_MAX
char int_n_sign_posn;      // CHAR_MAX
3

The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.21); and

LC_ALL
LC_COLLATE
LC_CTYPE
LC_MONETARY
LC_NUMERIC
LC_TIME

which expand to integer constant expressions with distinct values, suitable for use as the first argument to the setlocale function.258) Additional macro definitions, beginning with the characters LC_ and an uppercase letter,259) may also be specified by the implementation.

7.11.1 Locale control

7.11.1.1 The setlocale function

1
#include <locale.h>
char *setlocale(int category, const char *locale);

Description

2

The setlocale function selects the appropriate portion of the program’s locale as specified by the category and locale arguments. The setlocale function may be used to change or query the program’s entire current locale or portions thereof. The value LC_ALL for category names the program’s entire locale; the other values for category name only a portion of the program’s locale. LC_COLLATE affects the behavior of the strcoll and strxfrm functions. LC_CTYPE affects the behavior of the character handling functions260) and the multibyte and wide character functions. LC_MONETARY affects the monetary formatting information returned by the localeconv function. LC_NUMERIC affects the decimal-point character for the formatted input/output functions and the string conversion functions, as well as the nonmonetary formatting information returned by the localeconv function. LC_TIME affects the behavior of the strftime and wcsftime functions.

3

A value of "C" for locale specifies the minimal environment for C translation; a value of "" for locale specifies the locale-specific native environment. Other implementation-defined strings may be passed as the second argument to setlocale.

4

At program startup, the equivalent of

setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");

is executed.

5

A call to the setlocale function may introduce a data race with other calls to the setlocale function or with calls to functions that are affected by the current locale. The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the setlocale function.

Returns

6

If a pointer to a string is given for locale and the selection can be honored, the setlocale function returns a pointer to the string associated with the specified category for the new locale. If the selection cannot be honored, the setlocale function returns a null pointer and the program’s locale is not changed.

7

A null pointer for locale causes the setlocale function to return a pointer to the string associated with the category for the program’s current locale; the program’s locale is not changed.261)

8

The pointer to string returned by the setlocale function is such that a subsequent call with that string value and its associated category will restore that part of the program’s locale. The string pointed to shall not be modified by the program. The behavior is undefined if the returned value is used after a subsequent call to the setlocale function, or after the thread which called the setlocale function to obtain the returned value has exited.

Forward references: formatted input/output functions (7.23.6), multibyte/wide character conversion functions (7.24.7), multibyte/wide string conversion functions (7.24.8), numeric conversion functions (7.24.1), the strcoll function (7.26.4.3), the strftime function (7.29.3.5), the strxfrm function (7.26.4.5).

7.11.2 Numeric formatting convention inquiry

7.11.2.1 The localeconv function

1
#include <locale.h>
struct lconv *localeconv(void);
Description
2

The localeconv function sets the components of an object with type struct lconv with values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities (monetary and otherwise) according to the rules of the current locale.

3

The members of the structure with type char * are pointers to strings, any of which (except decimal_point) can point to "", to indicate that the value is not available in the current locale or is of zero length. Apart from grouping and mon_grouping, the strings shall start and end in the initial shift state. The members with type char are nonnegative numbers, any of which can be CHAR_MAX to indicate that the value is not available in the current locale. The members include the following:

char *decimal_point

The decimal-point character used to format nonmonetary quantities.

char *thousands_sep

The character used to separate groups of digits before the decimal-point character in formatted nonmonetary quantities.

char *grouping

A string whose elements indicate the size of each group of digits in formatted nonmonetary quantities.

char *mon_decimal_point

The decimal-point used to format monetary quantities.

char *mon_thousands_sep

The separator for groups of digits before the decimal-point in formatted monetary quantities.

char *mon_grouping

A string whose elements indicate the size of each group of digits in formatted monetary quantities.

char *positive_sign

The string used to indicate a nonnegative-valued formatted monetary quantity.

char *negative_sign

The string used to indicate a negative-valued formatted monetary quantity.

char *currency_symbol

The local currency symbol applicable to the current locale.

char frac_digits

The number of fractional digits (those after the decimal-point) to be displayed in a locally formatted monetary quantity.

char p_cs_precedes

Set to 1 or 0 if the currency_symbol respectively precedes or succeeds the value for a nonnegative locally formatted monetary quantity.

char n_cs_precedes

Set to 1 or 0 if the currency_symbol respectively precedes or succeeds the value for a negative locally formatted monetary quantity.

char p_sep_by_space

Set to a value indicating the separation of the currency_symbol, the sign string, and the value for a nonnegative locally formatted monetary quantity.

char n_sep_by_space

Set to a value indicating the separation of the currency_symbol, the sign string, and the value for a negative locally formatted monetary quantity.

char p_sign_posn

Set to a value indicating the positioning of the positive_sign for a nonnegative locally formatted monetary quantity.

Set to a value indicating the positioning of the negative_sign for a negative internationally formatted monetary quantity.

4

The elements of grouping and mon_grouping are interpreted according to the following:

CHAR_MAX No further grouping is to be performed.

0 The previous element is to be repeatedly used for the remainder of the digits.

other The integer value is the number of digits that compose the current group. The next element is examined to determine the size of the next group of digits before the current group.

5

The values of p_sep_by_space, n_sep_by_space, int_p_sep_by_space, and int_n_sep_by_space are interpreted according to the following:

0 No space separates the currency symbol and value.

1 If the currency symbol and sign string are adjacent, a space separates them from the value; otherwise, a space separates the currency symbol from the value.

2 If the currency symbol and sign string are adjacent, a space separates them; otherwise, a space separates the sign string from the value.

For int_p_sep_by_space and int_n_sep_by_space, the fourth character of int_curr_symbol is used instead of a space.

6

The values of p_sign_posn, n_sign_posn, int_p_sign_posn, and int_n_sign_posn are interpreted according to the following:

0 Parentheses surround the quantity and currency symbol.

1

1 The sign string precedes the quantity and currency symbol.

2

2 The sign string succeeds the quantity and currency symbol.

3

3 The sign string immediately precedes the currency symbol.

4

4 The sign string immediately succeeds the currency symbol.

7

The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the localeconv function.

Returns

8

The localeconv function returns a pointer to the filled-in object. The structure pointed to by the return value shall not be modified by the program, but may be overwritten by a subsequent call to the localeconv function. In addition, calls to the setlocale function with categories LC_ALL, LC_MONETARY, or LC_NUMERIC may overwrite the contents of the structure.

9

EXAMPLE 1 The following table illustrates rules which could have been used by four countries to format monetary quantities.

Local format International format Country Positive Negative Positive Negative

Country1 1.234,56 mk -1.234,56 mk FIM 1.234,56 FIM -1.234,56 Country2 L.1.234 -L.1.234 ITL 1.234 -ITL 1.234 Country3 ƒ 1.234,56 ƒ -1.234,56 NLG 1.234,56 NLG -1.234,56 Country4 SFrs.1,234.56 SFrs.1,234.56C CHF 1,234.56 CHF 1,234.56C

10

For these four countries, the respective values for the monetary members of the structure returned by localeconv could be:

Country1 Country2 Country3 Country4

mon_decimal_point "," "" "," "." mon_thousands_sep "." "." "." "," mon_grouping "\3" "\3" "\3" "\3" positive_sign "" "" "" "" negative_sign "-" "-" "-" "C" currency_symbol "mk" "L." "\u0192" "SFrs." frac_digits 2 0 2 2 p_cs_precedes 0 1 1 1 n_cs_precedes 0 1 1 1 p_sep_by_space 1 0 1 0 n_sep_by_space 1 0 2 0 p_sign_posn 1 1 1 1 n_sign_posn 1 1 4 2 int_curr_symbol "FIM " "ITL " "NLG " "CHF " int_frac_digits 2 0 2 2 int_p_cs_precedes 1 1 1 1 int_n_cs_precedes 1 1 1 1 int_p_sep_by_space 1 1 1 1 int_n_sep_by_space 2 1 2 1 int_p_sign_posn 1 1 1 1 int_n_sign_posn 4 1 4 2

11

EXAMPLE 2 The following table illustrates how the cs_precedes, sep_by_space, and sign_posn members affect the formatted value.

p_sep_by_space p_cs_precedes p_sign_posn 0 1 2

0 0 (1.25$) (1.25 $) (1.25$) 1 +1.25$ +1.25 $ + 1.25$ 2 1.25$+ 1.25 $+ 1.25$ + 3 1.25+$ 1.25 +$ 1.25+ $ 4 1.25$+ 1.25 $+ 1.25$ + 1 0 ($1.25) ($ 1.25) ($1.25) 1 +$1.25 +$ 1.25 + $1.25 2 $1.25+ $ 1.25+ $1.25 + 3 +$1.25 +$ 1.25 + $1.25 4 $+1.25 $+ 1.25 $ +1.25

7.12 Mathematics <math.h>

1

The header <math.h> declares two types and many mathematical functions and defines several macros. Most synopses specify a family of functions consisting of a principal function with one or more double parameters, a double return value, or both; and other functions with the same name but with f and l suffixes, which are corresponding functions with float and long double parameters, return values, or both.262) Integer arithmetic functions and conversion functions are discussed later.

2

The feature test macro __STDC_VERSION_MATH_H__ expands to the token 202311L.

3

The types

float_t
double_t

are floating types such that the values of float and double are subsets of the values of float_t and double_t, respectively, and such that the values of float_t are a subset of the values of double_t. If FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals 0, float_t and double_t are float and double, respectively; if FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals 1, they are both double; if FLT_EVAL_METHOD equals 2, they are both long double; and for other values of FLT_EVAL_METHOD, they are otherwise implementationdefined.263) If they are not real floating types, the behavior is implementation-defined.

4

The types

_Decimal32_t
_Decimal64_t

are decimal floating types at least as wide as _Decimal32 and _Decimal64, respectively, and such that _Decimal64_t is at least as wide as _Decimal32_t. They are present only if the implementation defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ and additionally the user code defines __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__ before any inclusion of <math.h>. If DEC_EVAL_METHOD equals 0, _Decimal32_t and _Decimal64_t are _Decimal32 and _Decimal64, respectively; if DEC_EVAL_METHOD equals 1, they are both _Decimal64; if DEC_EVAL_METHOD equals 2, they are both _Decimal128; and for other values of DEC_EVAL_METHOD, they are otherwise implementationdefined.

5

The macro

HUGE_VAL
expands to a double arithmetic constant expression, not necessarily representable as a float, whose value is the maximum value returned by library functions when a floating result of type double overflows under the default rounding mode, either maximum finite number in the type or positive or unsigned infinity. The macros
HUGE_VALF
HUGE_VALL

are respectively float and long double analogs of HUGE_VAL.264)

6

The macros in this paragraph are only present if the implementation defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ and additionally the user code defines __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__

before any inclusion of <math.h>. The macro

HUGE_VAL_D32
HUGE_VAL_D64
HUGE_VAL_D128

are respectively _Decimal64 and _Decimal128 analogs of HUGE_VAL_D32.

7

The macro

INFINITY

is defined if and only if the implementation supports an infinity for the type float. It expands to an arithmetic constant expression of type float representing positive or unsigned infinity.

8

The macro

DEC_INFINITY

expands to an arithmetic constant expression of type _Decimal32 representing positive infinity.

9

The macro

NAN

is defined if and only if the implementation supports quiet NaNs for the float type. It expands to an arithmetic constant expression of type float representing a quiet NaN.

10

The macro

DEC_NAN

expands to an arithmetic constant expression of type _Decimal32 representing a quiet NaN.

11

Use of the macros INFINITY, DEC_INFINITY, NAN, and DEC_NAN in <math.h> is an obsolescent feature. Instead, use the same macros in <float.h>.

12

The number classification macros

FP_INFINITE
FP_NAN
FP_NORMAL
FP_SUBNORMAL
FP_ZERO

represent mutually exclusive kinds of floating-point values. They expand to integer constant expressions with distinct values. Additional implementation-defined floating-point classifications, with macro definitions beginning with FP_ and an uppercase letter, may also be specified by the implementation.

13

The math rounding direction macros

FP_INT_UPWARD
FP_INT_DOWNWARD
FP_INT_TOWARDZERO
FP_INT_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FP_INT_TONEAREST

represent the rounding directions of the functions ceil, floor, trunc, round, and roundeven, respectively, that convert to integral values in floating-point formats. They expand to integer

constant expressions with distinct values suitable for use as the second argument to the fromfp, ufromfp, fromfpx, and ufromfpx functions.

14

The macro

FP_FAST_FMA
is optionally defined. If defined, it indicates that the fma function generally executes about as fast as, or faster than, a multiply and an add of double operands.265) The macros
FP_FAST_FMAF
FP_FAST_FMAL

are, respectively, float and long double analogs of FP_FAST_FMA. If defined, these macros expand to the integer constant 1.

15

The macros

FP_FAST_FMAD32
FP_FAST_FMAD64
FP_FAST_FMAD128

are, respectively, _Decimal32, _Decimal64, and _Decimal128 analogs of FP_FAST_FMA.

16

Each of the macros

FP_FAST_FADD FP_FAST_FADDL FP_FAST_DADDL FP_FAST_FSUB FP_FAST_FSUBL

FP_FAST_DSUBL FP_FAST_FMUL FP_FAST_FMULL FP_FAST_DMULL FP_FAST_FDIV

FP_FAST_FDIVL FP_FAST_DDIVL FP_FAST_FSQRT FP_FAST_FSQRTL FP_FAST_DSQRTL

FP_FAST_FFMA FP_FAST_FFMAL FP_FAST_DFMAL

is optionally defined. If defined, it indicates that the corresponding function generally executes about as fast, or faster, than the corresponding operation or function of the argument type with result type the same as the argument type followed by conversion to the narrower type. For FP_FAST_FFMA, FP_FAST_FFMAL, and FP_FAST_DFMAL, the comparison is to a call to fma or fmal followed by a conversion, not to separate multiply, add, and conversion. If defined, these macros expand to the integer constant 1.

17

The macros

FP_FAST_D32ADDD64 FP_FAST_D32ADDD128 FP_FAST_D64ADDD128 FP_FAST_D32SUBD64 FP_FAST_D32SUBD128 FP_FAST_D64SUBD128

FP_FAST_D32MULD64 FP_FAST_D32MULD128 FP_FAST_D64MULD128 FP_FAST_D32DIVD64 FP_FAST_D32DIVD128 FP_FAST_D64DIVD128

FP_FAST_D32FMAD64 FP_FAST_D32FMAD128 FP_FAST_D64FMAD128 FP_FAST_D32SQRTD64 FP_FAST_D32SQRTD128 FP_FAST_D64SQRTD128

are analogs of FP_FAST_FADD, FP_FAST_FADDL, FP_FAST_DADDL, etc., for decimal floating types.

18

The macros

FP_ILOGB0
FP_ILOGBNAN

expand to integer constant expressions whose values are returned by ilogb(x) if x is zero or NaN, respectively. The value of FP_ILOGB0 shall be either INT_MIN or -INT_MAX. The value of FP_ILOGBNAN shall be either INT_MAX or INT_MIN.

19

The macros

FP_LLOGB0
FP_LLOGBNAN

expand to integer constant expressions whose values are returned by llogb(x) if x is zero or NaN, respectively. The value of FP_LLOGB0 shall be LONG_MIN if the value of FP_ILOGB0 is INT_MIN, and shall be -LONG_MAX if the value of FP_ILOGB0 is -INT_MAX. The value of FP_LLOGBNAN shall be LONG_MAX if the value of FP_ILOGBNAN is INT_MAX, and shall be LONG_MIN if the value of FP_ILOGBNAN is INT_MIN.

20

The macros

MATH_ERRNO
MATH_ERREXCEPT
expand to the integer constants 1 and 2, respectively; the macro
math_errhandling

expands to an expression that has type int and the value MATH_ERRNO, MATH_ERREXCEPT, the bitwise OR of both, or 0; the value shall not be 0 in a hosted implementation. The value of math_errhandling is constant for the duration of the program. It is unspecified whether math_errhandling is a macro or an identifier with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed or a program defines an identifier with the name math_errhandling, the behavior is undefined. If the expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT can be nonzero, the implementation shall define the macros FE_DIVBYZERO, FE_INVALID, and FE_OVERFLOW in <fenv.h>.

7.12.1 Treatment of error conditions

1

The behavior of each of the functions in <math.h> is specified for all representable values of its input arguments, except where explicitly stated otherwise. Each function shall execute as if it were a single operation without raising SIGFPE and without generating any of the floating-point exceptions "invalid", "divide-by-zero", or "overflow" except to reflect the result of the function.

2

For all functions, a domain error occurs if and only if an input argument is outside the domain over which the mathematical function is defined. The description of each function lists any required domain errors; an implementation may define additional domain errors, provided that such errors are consistent with the mathematical definition of the function.266) Whether a signaling NaN input causes a domain error is implementation-defined. On a domain error, the function returns an implementation-defined value; if the integer expression math_errhandling

& MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, the integer expression errno acquires the value EDOM; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised.

3

Similarly, a pole error (also known as a singularity or infinitary) occurs if and only if the mathematical function has an exact infinite result as the finite input argument(s) are approached in the limit (for example, log(0.0)). The description of each function lists any required pole errors; an implementation may define additional pole errors, provided that such errors are consistent with the mathematical definition of the function. On a pole error, the function returns an implementation-defined value; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, the integer expression errno acquires the value ERANGE; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception is raised.

4

Likewise, a range error occurs if and only if the result overflows or underflows, as defined below. The description of each function lists any required range errors; an implementation may define additional range errors, provided that such errors are consistent with the mathematical definition of

the function and are the result of either overflow or underflow.267)

5

A floating result overflows if a finite result value with ordinary accuracy268) would have magnitude (absolute value) too large for the representation with full precision in the specified type. A result that is exactly an infinity does not overflow. If a floating result overflows and default rounding is in effect, then the function returns the value of the macro HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, or HUGE_VALL according to the return type, with the same sign as the correct value of the function; however, for the types with reduced-precision representations of numbers beyond the overflow threshold, the function may return a representation of the result with less than full precision for the type. If a floating result overflows and default rounding is in effect and the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, then the integer expression errno acquires the value ERANGE. If a floating result overflows, and the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the "overflow" floating-point exception is raised (regardless of whether default rounding is in effect).

6

The result underflows if a nonzero result value with ordinary accuracy would have magnitude (absolute value) less than the minimum normalized number in the type; however a zero result that is specified to be an exact zero does not underflow. Also, a result with ordinary accuracy and the magnitude of the minimum normalized number may underflow.269) If the result underflows, the function returns an implementation-defined value whose magnitude is no greater than the smallest normalized positive number in the specified type; if the integer expression math_errhandling &

MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, whether errno acquires the value ERANGE is implementation-defined; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, whether the "underflow" floating-point exception is raised is implementation-defined.

7

If a domain, pole, or range error occurs and the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is zero,270) then errno shall either be set to the value corresponding to the error or left unmodified. If no such error occurs, errno shall be left unmodified regardless of the setting of math_errhandling.

7.12.2 The FP_CONTRACT pragma

1
#include <math.h>
#pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT on-off-switch

Description

2

The FP_CONTRACT pragma can be used to allow (if the state is "on") or disallow (if the state is "off") the implementation to contract expressions (6.5.1). Each pragma can occur either outside external declarations or preceding all explicit declarations and statements inside a compound statement. When outside external declarations, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another FP_CONTRACT pragma is encountered, or until the end of the translation unit. When inside a compound statement, the pragma takes effect from its occurrence until another FP_CONTRACT pragma is encountered (including within a nested compound statement), or until the end of the compound statement; at the end of a compound statement the state for the pragma is restored to its condition just before the compound statement. If this pragma is used in any other context, the behavior is undefined. The default state ("on" or "off") for the pragma is implementation-defined.

7.12.3 Classification macros

1

Floating-point values can be classified as NaN, infinite, normal, subnormal, or zero, or into other implementation-defined categories. Numbers whose magnitude is at least bemin1 (the minimum magnitude of normalized floating-point numbers in the type) and at most (1bp)bemax (the maximum magnitude of normalized floating-point numbers in the type), where b, p, emin , and emax

are as in 5.2.5.3.3, are classified as normal. Larger magnitude finite numbers represented with full precision in the type may also be classified as normal. Nonzero numbers whose magnitude is less than bemin1 are classified as subnormal.

2

In the synopses in this subclause, real-floating indicates that the argument shall be an expression of real floating type.

7.12.3.1 The fpclassify macro

1
#include <math.h>
int fpclassify(real-floating x);
Description
2

The fpclassify macro classifies its argument value as NaN, infinite, normal, subnormal, zero, or into another implementation-defined category. First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then classification is based on the type of the argument.271)

Returns
3

The fpclassify macro returns the value of the number classification macro appropriate to the value of its argument.

7.12.3.2 The iscanonical macro

1
#include <math.h>
int iscanonical(real-floating x);
Description
2

The iscanonical macro determines whether its argument value is canonical (5.2.5.3.3). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then, determination is based on the type of the argument.

Returns
3

The iscanonical macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument is canonical.

7.12.3.3 The isfinite macro

1
#include <math.h>
int isfinite(real-floating x);
Description
2

The isfinite macro determines whether its argument has a finite value (zero, subnormal, or normal, and not infinite or NaN). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.

Returns
3

The isfinite macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a finite value.

7.12.3.4 The isinf macro

1
#include <math.h>
int isinf(real-floating x);

Description

2

The isinf macro determines whether its argument value is (positive or negative) infinity. First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.

Returns

3

The isinf macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has an infinite value.

7.12.3.5 The isnan macro

1
#include <math.h>
int isnan(real-floating x);
Description
2

The isnan macro determines whether its argument value is a NaN. First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.272)

Returns
3

The isnan macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a NaN value.

7.12.3.6 The isnormal macro

1
#include <math.h>
int isnormal(real-floating x);
Description
2

The isnormal macro determines whether its argument value is normal (neither zero, subnormal, infinite, nor NaN). First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.

Returns
3

The isnormal macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a normal value.

7.12.3.7 The signbit macro

1
#include <math.h>
int signbit(real-floating x);
Description
2

The signbit macro determines whether the sign of its argument value is negative.273) If the argument value is an unsigned zero, its sign is regarded as positive. Otherwise, if the argument value is unsigned, the result value (zero or nonzero) is implementation-defined.

Returns
3

The signbit macro returns a nonzero value if and only if the sign of its argument value is determined to be negative.

7.12.3.8 The issignaling macro

Synopsis

1
#include <math.h>
int issignaling(real-floating x);

Description

2

The issignaling macro determines whether its argument value is a signaling NaN.

Returns

3

The issignaling macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument is a signaling NaN.274)

7.12.3.9 The issubnormal macro

1
#include <math.h>
int issubnormal(real-floating x);
Description
2

The issubnormal macro determines whether its argument value is subnormal. First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then determination is based on the type of the argument.

Returns
3

The issubnormal macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument is subnormal.

7.12.3.10 The iszero macro

1
#include <math.h>
int iszero(real-floating x);
Description
2

The iszero macro determines whether its argument value is (positive, negative, or unsigned) zero. First, an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to its semantic type. Then, determination is based on the type of the argument.

Returns
3

The iszero macro returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument is zero.

7.12.4 Trigonometric functions

7.12.4.1 The acos functions

1
#include <math.h>
double acos(double x);
float acosf(float x);
long double acosl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 acosd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 acosd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 acosd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The acos functions compute the principal value of the arc cosine of x. A domain error occurs for arguments not in the interval [1,+1].

Returns

3

The acos functions return arccos x in the interval [0,π] radians.

7.12.4.2 The asin functions

1
#include <math.h>
double asin(double x);
float asinf(float x);
long double asinl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 asind32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 asind64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 asind128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The asin functions compute the principal value of the arc sine of x. A domain error occurs for arguments not in the interval [1,+1]. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The asin functions return arcsin x in the interval [π

2,+π

2] radians.

7.12.4.3 The atan functions

1
#include <math.h>
double atan(double x);
float atanf(float x);
long double atanl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 atand32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 atand64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 atand128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The atan functions compute the principal value of the arc tangent of x. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The atan functions return arctan x in the interval [π

2,+π

2] radians.

Description

2

The atan2 functions compute the value of the arc tangent of y/x, using the signs of both arguments to determine the quadrant of the return value. A domain error may occur if both arguments are zero. A range error occurs if x is positive and nonzero y

x is too close to zero.

Returns

3

The atan2 functions return arctan(y/x) in the interval [π,+π] radians.

7.12.4.5 The cos functions

1
#include <math.h>
double cos(double x);
float cosf(float x);
long double cosl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 cosd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 cosd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 cosd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The cos functions compute the cosine of x (measured in radians).

Returns
3

The cos functions return cos x.

7.12.4.6 The sin functions

1
#include <math.h>
double sin(double x);
float sinf(float x);
long double sinl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 sind32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 sind64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 sind128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The sin functions compute the sine of x (measured in radians). A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The sin functions return sin x.

7.12.4.7 The tan functions

1
#include <math.h>
double tan(double x);
float tanf(float x);
long double tanl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 tand32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 tand64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 tand128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The tan functions return the tangent of x (measured in radians). A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns

3

The tan functions return tan x.

7.12.4.8 The acospi functions

1
#include <math.h>
double acospi(double x);
float acospif(float x);
long double acospil(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 acospid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 acospid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 acospid128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The acospi functions compute the principal value of the arc cosine of x, divided by π, thus measuring the angle in half-revolutions. A domain error occurs for arguments not in the interval [1,+1].

Returns
3

The acospi functions return arccos(x)/π in the interval [0,1].

7.12.4.9 The asinpi functions

1
#include <math.h>
double asinpi(double x);
float asinpif(float x);
long double asinpil(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 asinpid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 asinpid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 asinpid128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The asinpi functions compute the principal value of the arc sine of x, divided by π, thus measuring the angle in half-revolutions. A domain error occurs for arguments not in the interval [1,+1]. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The asinpi functions return arcsin(x)/π in the interval [1

2,+1

2].

_Decimal128 atanpid128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The atanpi functions compute the principal value of the arc tangent of x, divided by π, thus measuring the angle in half-revolutions. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns

3

The atanpi functions return arctan(x)/π. in the interval [1

2,+1

2].

7.12.4.11 The atan2pi functions

1
#include <math.h>
double atan2pi(double y, double x);
float atan2pif(float y, float x);
long double atan2pil(long double y, long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 atan2pid32(_Decimal32 y, _Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 atan2pid64(_Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 atan2pid128(_Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The atan2pi functions compute the angle, measured in half-revolutions, subtended at the origin by the point (x, y) and the positive x-axis. Thus, the atan2pi functions compute arctan(y

x)/π, in the range [1,+1]. A domain error may occur if both arguments are zero. A range error occurs if x is positive and nonzero y

x is too close to zero.

long double sinpil(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 sinpid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 sinpid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 sinpid128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The sinpi functions compute the sine of π×x, thus regarding x as a measurement in half-revolutions. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns

3

The sinpi functions return sin(π× x).

7.12.4.14 The tanpi functions

1
#include <math.h>
double tanpi(double x);
float tanpif(float x);
long double tanpil(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 tanpid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 tanpid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 tanpid128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The tanpi functions compute the tangent of π× x, thus regarding x as a measurement in halfrevolutions. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero. A pole error may occur if |x| is (n+0.5) for integer n.

Returns
3

The tanpi functions return tan(π× x).

7.12.5 Hyperbolic functions

7.12.5.1 The acosh functions

1
#include <math.h>
double acosh(double x);
float acoshf(float x);
long double acoshl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 acoshd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 acoshd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 acoshd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The acosh functions compute the (nonnegative) arc hyperbolic cosine of x. A domain error occurs for arguments less than 1.

Returns
3

The acosh functions return arcosh x in the interval [0,+].

7.12.5.2 The asinh functions

Synopsis

1
#include <math.h>
double asinh(double x);
float asinhf(float x);
long double asinhl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 asinhd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 asinhd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 asinhd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The asinh functions compute the arc hyperbolic sine of x. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns

3

The asinh functions return arsinh x.

7.12.5.3 The atanh functions

1
#include <math.h>
double atanh(double x);
float atanhf(float x);
long double atanhl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 atanhd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 atanhd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 atanhd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The atanh functions compute the arc hyperbolic tangent of x. A domain error occurs for arguments not in the interval [1,+1]. A pole error may occur if the argument equals -1 or +1. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The atanh functions return artanh x.

7.12.5.4 The cosh functions

1
#include <math.h>
double cosh(double x);
float coshf(float x);
long double coshl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 coshd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 coshd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 coshd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The cosh functions compute the hyperbolic cosine of x. A range error occurs if the magnitude of finite x is too large.

Returns
3

The cosh functions return cosh x.

7.12.5.5 The sinh functions

1
#include <math.h>
double sinh(double x);
float sinhf(float x);
long double sinhl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 sinhd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 sinhd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 sinhd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The sinh functions compute the hyperbolic sine of x. A range error occurs if the magnitude of finite x is too large or if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The sinh functions return sinh x.

7.12.5.6 The tanh functions

1
#include <math.h>
double tanh(double x);
float tanhf(float x);
long double tanhl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 tanhd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 tanhd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 tanhd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The tanh functions compute the hyperbolic tangent of x. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The tanh functions return tanh x.

7.12.6 Exponential and logarithmic functions

7.12.6.1 The exp functions

1
#include <math.h>
double exp(double x);
float expf(float x);
long double expl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 expd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 expd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 expd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The exp functions compute the base-e exponential of x. A range error occurs if the magnitude of finite x is too large.

Returns

3

The exp functions return ex.

7.12.6.2 The exp10 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double exp10(double x);
float exp10f(float x);
long double exp10l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 exp10d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 exp10d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 exp10d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The exp10 functions compute the base-10 exponential of x. A range error occurs if the magnitude of finite x is too large.

Returns
3

The exp10 functions return 10x.

7.12.6.3 The exp10m1 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double exp10m1(double x);
float exp10m1f(float x);
long double exp10m1l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 exp10m1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 exp10m1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 exp10m1d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The exp10m1 functions compute the base-10 exponential of the argument, minus 1. A range error occurs if positive finite x is too large or if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The exp10m1 functions return 10x 1.

7.12.6.4 The exp2 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double exp2(double x);
float exp2f(float x);
long double exp2l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 exp2d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 exp2d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 exp2d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The exp2 functions compute the base-2 exponential of x. A range error occurs if the magnitude of finite x is too large.

Returns

3

The exp2 functions return 2x.

7.12.6.5 The exp2m1 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double exp2m1(double x);
float exp2m1f(float x);
long double exp2m1l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 exp2m1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 exp2m1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 exp2m1d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The exp2m1 functions compute the base-2 exponential of the argument, minus 1. A range error occurs if positive finite x is too large or if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The exp2m1 functions return 2x 1.

7.12.6.6 The expm1 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double expm1(double x);
float expm1f(float x);
long double expm1l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 expm1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 expm1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 expm1d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The expm1 functions compute the base-e exponential of the argument, minus 1. A range error occurs if positive finite x is too large or if nonzero x is too close to zero.275)

Returns
3

The expm1 functions return ex 1.

7.12.6.7 The frexp functions

1
#include <math.h>
double frexp(double value, int *p);
float frexpf(float value, int *p);
long double frexpl(long double value, int *p);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 frexpd32(_Decimal32 value, int *p);
_Decimal64 frexpd64(_Decimal64 value, int *p);
_Decimal128 frexpd128(_Decimal128 value, int *p);
#endif

Description

2

The frexp functions break a floating-point number into a normalized fraction and an integer exponent. They store the integer in the int object pointed to by p. If the return type of the function is a standard floating type, the exponent is an integral power of 2. If the return type of the function is a decimal floating type, the exponent is an integral power of 10.

Returns

3

If value is not a floating-point number or if the integral power is outside the range of int, the results are unspecified. Otherwise, the frexp functions return the value x, such that x has a magnitude in the interval [1

2,1) or zero, and value equals x ×2*p, when the return type of the function is a standard floating type; or x has a magnitude in the interval [1/10,1) or zero, and value equals x ×10*p, when the return type of the function is a decimal floating type. If value is zero, both parts of the result are zero.

7.12.6.8 The ilogb functions

1
#include <math.h>
int ilogb(double x);
int ilogbf(float x);
int ilogbl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int ilogbd32(_Decimal32 x);
int ilogbd64(_Decimal64 x);
int ilogbd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The ilogb functions extract the exponent of x as a signed int value. If x is zero they compute the value FP_ILOGB0; if x is infinite they compute the value INT_MAX; if x is a NaN they compute the value FP_ILOGBNAN; otherwise, they are equivalent to calling the corresponding logb function and converting the returned value to type int. A domain error or range error may occur if x is zero, infinite, or NaN. If the correct value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and a domain error or range error may occur.

Returns
3

The ilogb functions return the exponent of x as a signed int value.

Forward references: the logb functions (7.12.6.17).

7.12.6.9 The ldexp functions

1
#include <math.h>
double ldexp(double x, int p);
float ldexpf(float x, int p);
long double ldexpl(long double x, int p);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 ldexpd32(_Decimal32 x, int p);
_Decimal64 ldexpd64(_Decimal64 x, int p);
_Decimal128 ldexpd128(_Decimal128 x, int p);
#endif
Description
2

The ldexp functions multiply a floating-point number by an integral power of 2 when the return type of the function is a standard floating type, or by an integral power of 10 when the return type of the function is a decimal floating type. A range error occurs for some finite x, depending on p.

Returns

3

The ldexp functions return x ×2p when the return type of the function is a standard floating type, or return x ×10p when the return type of the function is a decimal floating type.

7.12.6.10 The llogb functions

1
#include <math.h>
long int llogb(double x);
long int llogbf(float x);
long int llogbl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
long int llogbd32(_Decimal32 x);
long int llogbd64(_Decimal64 x);
long int llogbd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The llogb functions extract the exponent of x as a signed long int value. If x is zero they compute the value FP_LLOGB0; if x is infinite they compute the value LONG_MAX; if x is a NaN they compute the value FP_LLOGBNAN; otherwise, they are equivalent to calling the corresponding logb function and converting the returned value to type long int. A domain error or range error may occur if x is zero, infinite, or NaN. If the correct value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified.

Returns
3

The llogb functions return the exponent of x as a signed long int value.

Forward references: the logb functions (7.12.6.17).

7.12.6.11 The log functions

1
#include <math.h>
double log(double x);
float logf(float x);
long double logl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 logd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 logd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 logd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The log functions compute the base-e (natural) logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if the argument is less than zero. A pole error may occur if the argument is zero.

Returns
3

The log functions return loge x.

7.12.6.12 The log10 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double log10(double x);
float log10f(float x);
long double log10l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 log10d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log10d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log10d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The log10 functions compute the base-10 (common) logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if the argument is less than zero. A pole error may occur if the argument is zero.

Returns

3

The log10 functions return log10 x.

7.12.6.13 The log10p1 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double log10p1(double x);
float log10p1f(float x);
long double log10p1l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 log10p1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log10p1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log10p1d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The log10p1 functions compute the base-10 logarithm of 1 plus the argument. A domain error occurs if the argument is less than 1. A pole error may occur if the argument equals 1. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The log10p1 functions return log10(1+ x).

7.12.6.14 The log1p and logp1 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double log1p(double x);
float log1pf(float x);
long double log1pl(long double x);
double logp1(double x);
float logp1f(float x);
long double logp1l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 log1pd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log1pd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log1pd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 logp1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 logp1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 logp1d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The log1p functions are equivalent to the logp1 functions.276) These functions compute the base-e (natural) logarithm of 1 plus the argument.277) A domain error occurs if the argument is less than 1. A pole error may occur if the argument equals 1. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns

3

The log1p and logp1 functions return loge(1+ x).

7.12.6.15 The log2 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double log2(double x);
float log2f(float x);
long double log2l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 log2d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log2d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log2d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The log2 functions compute the base-2 logarithm of x. A domain error occurs if the argument is less than zero. A pole error may occur if the argument is zero.

Returns
3

The log2 functions return log2 x.

7.12.6.16 The log2p1 functions

1
#include <math.h>
double log2p1(double x);
float log2p1f(float x);
long double log2p1l(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 log2p1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log2p1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log2p1d128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The log2p1 functions compute the base-2 logarithm of 1 plus the argument. A domain error occurs if the argument is less than 1. A pole error may occur if the argument equals 1. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The log2p1 functions return log2(1+x).

7.12.6.17 The logb functions

1
#include <math.h>
double logb(double x);
float logbf(float x);
long double logbl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 logbd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 logbd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 logbd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The logb functions extract the exponent of x, as a signed integer value in floating-point format. If x is subnormal it is treated as though it were normalized; thus, for positive finite x,

1x ×blogb(x) <b

where b= FLT_RADIX if the return type of the function is a standard floating type, or b=10 if the return type of the function is a decimal floating type. A domain error or pole error may occur if the argument is zero.

Returns

3

The logb functions return the signed exponent of x.

7.12.6.18 The modf functions

1
#include <math.h>
double modf(double value, double *iptr);
float modff(float value, float *iptr);
long double modfl(long double value, long double *iptr);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 modfd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 *iptr);
_Decimal64 modfd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 *iptr);
_Decimal128 modfd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 *iptr);
#endif
Description
2

The modf functions break the argument value into integral and fractional parts, each of which has the same type and sign as the argument. They store the integral part (in floating-point format) in the object pointed to by iptr.

Returns
3

The modf functions return the signed fractional part of value.

7.12.6.19 The scalbn and scalbln functions

1
#include <math.h>
double scalbn(double x, int n);
float scalbnf(float x, int n);
long double scalbnl(long double x, int n);
double scalbln(double x, long int n);
float scalblnf(float x, long int n);
long double scalblnl(long double x, long int n);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 scalbnd32(_Decimal32 x, int n);
_Decimal64 scalbnd64(_Decimal64 x, int n);
_Decimal128 scalbnd128(_Decimal128 x, int n);
_Decimal32 scalblnd32(_Decimal32 x, long int n);
_Decimal64 scalblnd64(_Decimal64 x, long int n);
_Decimal128 scalblnd128(_Decimal128 x, long int n);
#endif
Description
2

The scalbn and scalbln functions compute x ×bn, where b= FLT_RADIX if the return type of the function is a standard floating type, or b=10 if the return type of the function is a decimal floating type. A range error occurs for some finite x, depending on n.

Returns
3

The scalbn and scalbln functions return x ×bn.

7.12.7 Power and absolute-value functions

7.12.7.1 The cbrt functions

1
#include <math.h>
double cbrt(double x);
float cbrtf(float x);
long double cbrtl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 cbrtd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 cbrtd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 cbrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The cbrt functions compute the real cube root of x.

Returns
3

The cbrt functions return x

1 3 .

7.12.7.2 The compoundn functions

1
#include <math.h>
double compoundn(double x, long long int n);
float compoundnf(float x, long long int n);
long double compoundnl(long double x, long long int n);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 compoundnd32(_Decimal32 x, long long int n);
_Decimal64 compoundnd64(_Decimal64 x, long long int n);
_Decimal128 compoundnd128(_Decimal128 x, long long int n);
#endif
Description
2

The compoundn functions compute 1 plus x, raised to the power n. A domain error occurs if x <1. Depending on n, a range error occurs if either positive finite x is too large or if x is too near but not equal to -1. A pole error may occur if x equals 1 and n <0.

Returns
3

The compoundn functions return (1+ x)n.

7.12.7.3 The fabs functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fabs(double x);
float fabsf(float x);
long double fabsl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fabsd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 fabsd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 fabsd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The fabs functions compute the absolute value of x.

Returns

3

The fabs functions return |x|.

7.12.7.4 The hypot functions

1
#include <math.h>
double hypot(double x, double y);
float hypotf(float x, float y);
long double hypotl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 hypotd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 hypotd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 hypotd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The hypot functions compute the square root of the sum of the squares of x and y, without undue overflow or underflow. A range error occurs for some finite arguments.

Returns
3

The hypot functions return � x2+ y2.

7.12.7.5 The pow functions

1
#include <math.h>
double pow(double x, double y);
float powf(float x, float y);
long double powl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 powd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 powd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 powd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The pow functions compute x raised to the power y. A domain error occurs if x is finite and less than zero and y is finite and not an integer value. A domain error may occur if x is zero and y is zero. Depending on y, a range error occurs if either the magnitude of nonzero finite x is too large or too near zero. A domain error or pole error may occur if x is zero and y is less than zero.

Returns
3

The pow functions return xy.

7.12.7.6 The pown functions

1
#include <math.h>
double pown(double x, long long int n);
float pownf(float x, long long int n);
long double pownl(long double x, long long int n);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 pownd32(_Decimal32 x, long long int n);
_Decimal64 pownd64(_Decimal64 x, long long int n);
_Decimal128 pownd128(_Decimal128 x, long long int n);
#endif

Description

2

The pown functions compute x raised to the nth power. A pole error may occur if x equals 0 and n <0. Depending on n, a range error occurs if either the magnitude of nonzero finite x is too large or too near zero.

Returns

3

The pown functions return xn.

7.12.7.7 The powr functions

1
#include <math.h>
double powr(double y, double x);
float powrf(float y, float x);
long double powrl(long double y, long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 powrd32(_Decimal32 y, _Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 powrd64(_Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 powrd128(_Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The powr functions compute x raised to the power y as ey loge x.278) A domain error occurs if x <0 or if x and y are both zero. Depending on y, a range error occurs if either positive nonzero finite x is too large or too near zero. A pole error may occur if x equals zero and finite y <0.

Returns
3

The powr functions return ey loge x.

7.12.7.8 The rootn functions

1
#include <math.h>
double rootn(double x, long long int n);
float rootnf(float x, long long int n);
long double rootnl(long double x, long long int n);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 rootnd32(_Decimal32 x, long long int n);
_Decimal64 rootnd64(_Decimal64 x, long long int n);
_Decimal128 rootnd128(_Decimal128 x, long long int n);
#endif
Description
2

The rootn functions compute the principal nth root of x. A domain error occurs if n is 0 or if x <0 and n is even. If n is 1, a range error occurs if either the magnitude of nonzero finite x is too large or too near zero. A pole error may occur if x equals zero and n <0.

Returns
3

The rootn functions return x

1 n .

7.12.7.9 The rsqrt functions

1
#include <math.h>
double rsqrt(double x);
float rsqrtf(float x);
long double rsqrtl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 rsqrtd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 rsqrtd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 rsqrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The rsqrt functions compute the reciprocal of the nonnegative square root of the argument. A domain error occurs if the argument is less than zero. A pole error may occur if the argument equals zero.

Returns

3

The rsqrt functions return 1

x.

7.12.7.10 The sqrt functions

1
#include <math.h>
double sqrt(double x);
float sqrtf(float x);
long double sqrtl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 sqrtd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 sqrtd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 sqrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The sqrt functions compute the nonnegative square root of x. A domain error occurs if the argument is less than zero.

Returns
3

The sqrt functions return √

x.

7.12.8 Error and gamma functions

7.12.8.1 The erf functions

1
#include <math.h>
double erf(double x);
float erff(float x);
long double erfl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 erfd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 erfd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 erfd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The erf functions compute the error function of x. A range error occurs if nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns
3

The erf functions return erf x = 2 π

x

0 et2dt.

7.12.8.2 The erfc functions

1
#include <math.h>
double erfc(double x);
float erfcf(float x);
long double erfcl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 erfcd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 erfcd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 erfcd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The erfc functions compute the complementary error function of x. A range error occurs if positive finite x is too large.

Returns
3

The erfc functions return erfc x =1erf x = 2 π

x

et2dt.

7.12.8.3 The lgamma functions

1
#include <math.h>
double lgamma(double x);
float lgammaf(float x);
long double lgammal(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 lgammad32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 lgammad64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 lgammad128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The lgamma functions compute the natural logarithm of the absolute value of gamma of x. A range error occurs if positive finite x is too large. A pole error may occur if x is a negative integer or zero.

Returns
3

The lgamma functions return loge|Γ(x)|.

7.12.8.4 The tgamma functions

1
#include <math.h>
double tgamma(double x);
float tgammaf(float x);
long double tgammal(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 tgammad32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 tgammad64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 tgammad128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The tgamma functions compute the gamma function of x. A domain error or pole error may occur if x is a negative integer or zero. A range error occurs for some finite x less than zero, if positive finite x is too large, or nonzero x is too close to zero.

Returns

3

The tgamma functions return Γ(x).

7.12.9 Nearest integer functions

7.12.9.1 The ceil functions

1
#include <math.h>
double ceil(double x);
float ceilf(float x);
long double ceill(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 ceild32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 ceild64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 ceild128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The ceil functions compute the smallest integer value not less than x.

Returns
3

The ceil functions return ⌈x⌉, expressed as a floating-point number.

7.12.9.2 The floor functions

1
#include <math.h>
double floor(double x);
float floorf(float x);
long double floorl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 floord32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 floord64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 floord128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The floor functions compute the largest integer value not greater than x.

Returns
3

The floor functions return ⌊x⌋, expressed as a floating-point number.

7.12.9.3 The nearbyint functions

1
#include <math.h>
double nearbyint(double x);
float nearbyintf(float x);
long double nearbyintl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 nearbyintd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 nearbyintd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 nearbyintd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The nearbyint functions round their argument to an integer value in floating-point format, using the current rounding direction and without raising the "inexact" floating-point exception.

Returns

3

The nearbyint functions return the rounded integer value.

7.12.9.4 The rint functions

1
#include <math.h>
double rint(double x);
float rintf(float x);
long double rintl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 rintd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 rintd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 rintd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The rint functions differ from the nearbyint functions (7.12.9.3) only in that the rint functions may raise the "inexact" floating-point exception if the result differs in value from the argument.

Returns
3

The rint functions return the rounded integer value.

7.12.9.5 The lrint and llrint functions

1
#include <math.h>
long int lrint(double x);
long int lrintf(float x);
long int lrintl(long double x);
long long int llrint(double x);
long long int llrintf(float x);
long long int llrintl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
long int lrintd32(_Decimal32 x);
long int lrintd64(_Decimal64 x);
long int lrintd128(_Decimal128 x);
long long int llrintd32(_Decimal32 x);
long long int llrintd64(_Decimal64 x);
long long int llrintd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The lrint and llrint functions round their argument to the nearest integer value, rounding according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and a domain error or range error may occur.

Returns
3

The lrint and llrint functions return the rounded integer value.

7.12.9.6 The round functions

1
#include <math.h>
double round(double x);
float roundf(float x);
long double roundl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 roundd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 roundd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 roundd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The round functions round their argument to the nearest integer value in floating-point format, rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current rounding direction.

Returns

3

The round functions return the rounded integer value.

7.12.9.7 The lround and llround functions

1
#include <math.h>
long int lround(double x);
long int lroundf(float x);
long int lroundl(long double x);
long long int llround(double x);
long long int llroundf(float x);
long long int llroundl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
long int lroundd32(_Decimal32 x);
long int lroundd64(_Decimal64 x);
long int lroundd128(_Decimal128 x);
long long int llroundd32(_Decimal32 x);
long long int llroundd64(_Decimal64 x);
long long int llroundd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The lround and llround functions round their argument to the nearest integer value, rounding halfway cases away from zero, regardless of the current rounding direction. If the rounded value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and a domain error or range error may occur.

Returns
3

The lround and llround functions return the rounded integer value.

7.12.9.8 The roundeven functions

1
#include <math.h>
double roundeven(double x);
float roundevenf(float x);
long double roundevenl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 roundevend32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 roundevend64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 roundevend128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The roundeven functions round their argument to the nearest integer value in floating-point format, rounding halfway cases to even (that is, to the nearest value that is an even integer), regardless of the current rounding direction.

Returns

3

The roundeven functions return the rounded integer value.

7.12.9.9 The trunc functions

1
#include <math.h>
double trunc(double x);
float truncf(float x);
long double truncl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 truncd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 truncd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 truncd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The trunc functions round their argument to the integer value, in floating format, nearest to but no larger in magnitude than the argument.

Returns
3

The trunc functions return the truncated integer value.

7.12.9.10 The fromfp and ufromfp functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fromfp(double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
float fromfpf(float x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
long double fromfpl(long double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
double ufromfp(double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
float ufromfpf(float x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
long double ufromfpl(long double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fromfpd32(_Decimal32 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal64 fromfpd64(_Decimal64 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal128 fromfpd128(_Decimal128 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal32 ufromfpd32(_Decimal32 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal64 ufromfpd64(_Decimal64 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal128 ufromfpd128(_Decimal128 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
#endif
Description
2

The fromfp and ufromfp functions round x, using the math rounding direction indicated by rnd, to a signed or unsigned integer, respectively. If width is nonzero and the resulting integer is within the range

  • [2(width1),2(width1)1], for signed
  • [0,2width 1], for unsigned

then the functions return the integer value (represented in floating type). Otherwise, if width is zero or x does not round to an integer within the range, the functions return a NaN (of the type of the x argument, if available), else the value of x, and a domain error occurs. If the value of the rnd argument is not equal to the value of a math rounding direction macro (7.12), the direction of rounding is unspecified. The fromfp and ufromfp functions do not raise the "inexact" floating-point exception.

Returns

3

The fromfp and ufromfp functions return the rounded integer value.

4

EXAMPLE 1 Upward rounding of double x to type int, without raising the "inexact" floating-point exception, is achieved by

(int)fromfp(x, FP_INT_UPWARD, INT_WIDTH)
5

EXAMPLE 2 Unsigned integer wrapping is not performed in

ufromfp(-3.0, FP_INT_UPWARD, UINT_WIDTH) /* domain error */

7.12.9.11 The fromfpx and ufromfpx functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fromfpx(double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
float fromfpxf(float x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
long double fromfpxl(long double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
double ufromfpx(double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
float ufromfpxf(float x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
long double ufromfpxl(long double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fromfpxd32(_Decimal32 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal64 fromfpxd64(_Decimal64 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal128 fromfpxd128(_Decimal128 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal32 ufromfpxd32(_Decimal32 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal64 ufromfpxd64(_Decimal64 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal128 ufromfpxd128(_Decimal128 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
#endif
Description
2

The fromfpx and ufromfpx functions differ from the fromfp and ufromfp functions, respectively, only in that the fromfpx and ufromfpx functions raise the "inexact" floating-point exception if a rounded result not exceeding the specified width differs in value from the argument x.

Returns
3

The fromfpx and ufromfpx functions return the rounded integer value.

4

NOTE Conversions to integer types that are not required to raise the inexact exception can be done simply by rounding to integral value in floating type and then converting to the target integer type. For example, the conversion of long double x to uint64_t, using upward rounding, is done by

(uint64_t)ceill(x)

7.12.10 Remainder functions

7.12.10.1 The fmod functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fmod(double x, double y);
float fmodf(float x, float y);
long double fmodl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fmodd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmodd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmodd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif

Description

2

The fmod functions compute the floating-point remainder of x/y.

Returns

3

The fmod functions return the value x ny, for some integer n such that, if y is nonzero, the result has the same sign as x and magnitude less than the magnitude of y. If y is zero, whether a domain error occurs or the fmod functions return zero is implementation-defined.

7.12.10.2 The remainder functions

1
#include <math.h>
double remainder(double x, double y);
float remainderf(float x, float y);
long double remainderl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 remainderd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 remainderd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 remainderd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The remainder functions compute the remainder x REM y required by ISO/IEC 60559.279)

Returns
3

The remainder functions return x REM y. If y is zero, whether a domain error occurs or the functions return zero is implementation-defined.

7.12.10.3 The remquo functions

1
#include <math.h>
double remquo(double x, double y, int *quo);
float remquof(float x, float y, int *quo);
long double remquol(long double x, long double y, int *quo);
Description
2

The remquo functions compute the same remainder as the remainder functions. In the object pointed to by quo they store a value whose magnitude is congruent modulo 2n to the magnitude of the integral quotient of x/y, where n is an implementation-defined integer greater than or equal to 3. If the value stored is not zero, its sign is the sign of x/y.

Returns
3

The remquo functions return x REM y. If y is zero, the value stored in the object pointed to by quo is unspecified and whether a domain error occurs or the functions return zero is implementationdefined.

4

NOTE There are no decimal floating-point versions of the remquo functions.

7.12.11 Manipulation functions

7.12.11.1 The copysign functions

1
#include <math.h>
double copysign(double x, double y);

279)"When y̸=0, the remainder r=x REM y is defined regardless of the rounding mode by the mathematical relation r=xny, where n is the integer nearest the exact value of x

y ; whenever |nx

y|=1

2 , then n is even. If r=0, its sign shall be that of x." This definition is applicable for all implementations.

float copysignf(float x, float y);
long double copysignl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 copysignd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 copysignd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 copysignd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif

Description

2

The copysign functions produce a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y. If x or y is an unsigned value, the sign (if any) of the result is implementation-defined. On implementations that represent a signed zero but do not treat negative zero consistently in arithmetic operations, the copysign functions should regard the sign of zero as positive.

Returns

3

The copysign functions return a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y.

7.12.11.2 The nan functions

1
#include <math.h>
double nan(const char *tagp);
float nanf(const char *tagp);
long double nanl(const char *tagp);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 nand32(const char *tagp);
_Decimal64 nand64(const char *tagp);
_Decimal128 nand128(const char *tagp);
#endif
Description
2

The nan, nanf, and nanl functions convert the string pointed to by tagp according to the following rules. The call nan("n-char-sequence") is equivalent to strtod("NAN(n-char-sequence)", nullptr); the call nan("") is equivalent to strtod("NAN()", nullptr). If tagp does not point to an empty string or an n-char sequence, the call is equivalent to strtod("NAN", nullptr). Calls to nanf and nanl are equivalent to the corresponding calls to strtof and strtold.

Returns
3

The nan functions return a quiet NaN, if available, with content indicated through tagp. If the implementation does not support quiet NaNs, the functions return zero.

Forward references: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (7.24.1.5).

7.12.11.3 The nextafter functions

1
#include <math.h>
double nextafter(double x, double y);
float nextafterf(float x, float y);
long double nextafterl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 nextafterd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 nextafterd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 nextafterd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif

Description

2

The nextafter functions determine the next representable value, in the return type of the function, after x in the direction of y, where x and y are first converted to the return type of the function.280)

The nextafter functions return y if x equals y.

A range error occurs if the magnitude of x is the largest finite value representable in the type and the result is infinite or not representable in the type. If x != y, a range error occurs for either subnormal or zero results.

Returns

3

The nextafter functions return the next representable value in the specified format after x in the direction of y.

7.12.11.4 The nexttoward functions

1
#include <math.h>
double nexttoward(double x, long double y);
float nexttowardf(float x, long double y);
long double nexttowardl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 nexttowardd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 nexttowardd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal128 nexttowardd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The nexttoward functions are equivalent to the nextafter functions except that the second parameter has type long double or _Decimal128 and the functions return y converted to the return type of the function if x equals y.281)

Returns
3

The nexttoward functions return the next representable value in the specified format after x in the direction of y.

7.12.11.5 The nextup functions

1
#include <math.h>
double nextup(double x);
float nextupf(float x);
long double nextupl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 nextupd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 nextupd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 nextupd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The nextup functions determine the next representable value, in the return type of the function, greater than x. If x is the negative number of least magnitude in the type of x, nextup(x) is 0 if the type has signed zeros and is 0 otherwise. If x is zero, nextup(x) is the positive number of least magnitude in the type of x. If x is the positive number (finite or infinite) of maximum magnitude in the type, nextup(x) is x.

Returns

3

The nextup functions return the next representable value in the specified type greater than x.

7.12.11.6 The nextdown functions

1
#include <math.h>
double nextdown(double x);
float nextdownf(float x);
long double nextdownl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 nextdownd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 nextdownd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 nextdownd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The nextdown functions determine the next representable value, in the return type of the function, less than x. If x is the positive number of least magnitude in the type of x, nextdown(x) is +0 if the type has signed zeros and is 0 otherwise. If x is zero, nextdown(x) is the negative number of least magnitude in the type of x. If x is the negative number (finite or infinite) of maximum magnitude in the type, nextdown(x) is x.

Returns
3

The nextdown functions return the next representable value in the specified type less than x.

7.12.11.7 The canonicalize functions

1
#include <math.h>
int canonicalize(double *cx, const double *x);
int canonicalizef(float *cx, const float *x);
int canonicalizel(long double *cx, const long double *x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int canonicalized32(_Decimal32 *cx, const _Decimal32 *x);
int canonicalized64(_Decimal64 *cx, const _Decimal64 *x);
int canonicalized128(_Decimal128 *cx, const _Decimal128 *x);
#endif
Description
2

The canonicalize functions attempt to produce a canonical version of the floating-point representation in the object pointed to by the argument x, as if to a temporary object of the specified type, and store the canonical result in the object pointed to by the argument cx.282) If the input *x is a signaling NaN, the canonicalize functions are intended to store a canonical quiet NaN. If a canonical result is not produced the object pointed to by cx is unchanged.

Returns
3

The canonicalize functions return zero if a canonical result is stored in the object pointed to by cx. Otherwise they return a nonzero value.

7.12.12 Maximum, minimum, and positive difference functions

7.12.12.1 The fdim functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fdim(double x, double y);
float fdimf(float x, float y);
long double fdiml(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fdimd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fdimd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fdimd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif

Description

2

The fdim functions determine the positive difference between their arguments:

xy if x > y +0 if xy

A range error occurs for some finite arguments.

Returns

3

The fdim functions return the positive difference value.

7.12.12.2 The fmax functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fmax(double x, double y);
float fmaxf(float x, float y);
long double fmaxl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fmaxd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaxd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaxd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The fmax functions determine the maximum numeric value of their arguments.283)

Returns
3

The fmax functions return the maximum numeric value of their arguments.

7.12.12.3 The fmin functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fmin(double x, double y);
float fminf(float x, float y);
long double fminl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fmind32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmind64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmind128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The fmin functions determine the minimum numeric value of their arguments.284)

Returns

3

The fmin functions return the minimum numeric value of their arguments.

4

NOTE The fmax and fmin functions are similar to the fmaximum_num and fminimum_num functions, though may differ in which signed zero is returned when the arguments are differently signed zeros and in their treatment of signaling NaNs (see F.10.9.5).

7.12.12.4 The fmaximum functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fmaximum(double x, double y);
float fmaximumf(float x, float y);
long double fmaximuml(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fmaximumd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaximumd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaximumd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The fmaximum functions determine the maximum value of their arguments. For these functions, +0 is considered greater than 0. These functions differ from the fmaximum_num functions only in their treatment of NaN arguments (see F.10.9.4, F.10.9.5).

Returns
3

The fmaximum functions return the maximum value of their arguments.

7.12.12.5 The fminimum functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fminimum(double x, double y);
float fminimumf(float x, float y);
long double fminimuml(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fminimumd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fminimumd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fminimumd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The fminimum functions determine the minimum value of their arguments. For these functions, 0 is considered less than +0. These functions differ from the fminimum_num functions only in their treatment of NaN arguments (see F.10.9.4, F.10.9.5).

Returns
3

The fminimum functions return the minimum value of their arguments.

7.12.12.6 The fmaximum_mag functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fmaximum_mag(double x, double y);
float fmaximum_magf(float x, float y);
long double fmaximum_magl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fmaximum_magd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaximum_magd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaximum_magd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif

Description

2

The fmaximum_mag functions determine the value of the argument of maximum magnitude: x

if |x|>|y|, y if |y|>|x|, and fmaximum(x, y) otherwise. These functions differ from the fmaximum_mag_num functions only in their treatment of NaN arguments (see F.10.9.4, F.10.9.5).

Returns

3

The fmaximum_mag functions return the value of the argument of maximum magnitude.

7.12.12.7 The fminimum_mag functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fminimum_mag(double x, double y);
float fminimum_magf(float x, float y);
long double fminimum_magl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fminimum_magd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fminimum_magd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fminimum_magd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The fminimum_mag functions determine the value of the argument of minimum magnitude: x

if |x|<|y|, y if |y|<|x|, and fminimum(x, y) otherwise. These functions differ from the fminimum_mag_num functions only in their treatment of NaN arguments (see F.10.9.4, F.10.9.5).

Returns
3

The fminimum_mag functions return the value of the argument of minimum magnitude.

7.12.12.8 The fmaximum_num functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fmaximum_num(double x, double y);
float fmaximum_numf(float x, float y);
long double fmaximum_numl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fmaximum_numd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaximum_numd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaximum_numd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The fmaximum_num functions determine the maximum value of their numeric arguments. They determine the number if one argument is a number and the other is a NaN. These functions differ from the fmaximum functions only in their treatment of NaN arguments (see F.10.9.4, F.10.9.5).

Returns
3

The fmaximum_num functions return the maximum value of their numeric arguments.

7.12.12.9 The fminimum_num functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fminimum_num(double x, double y);
float fminimum_numf(float x, float y);
long double fminimum_numl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fminimum_numd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fminimum_numd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fminimum_numd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif

Description

2

The fminimum_num functions determine the minimum value of their numeric arguments. They determine the number if one argument is a number and the other is a NaN. These functions differ from the fminimum functions only in their treatment of NaN arguments (see F.10.9.4, F.10.9.5).

Returns

3

The fminimum_num functions return the minimum value of their numeric arguments.

7.12.12.10 The fmaximum_mag_num functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fmaximum_mag_num(double x, double y);
float fmaximum_mag_numf(float x, float y);
long double fmaximum_mag_numl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fmaximum_mag_numd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaximum_mag_numd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaximum_mag_numd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The fmaximum_mag_num functions determine the value of a numeric argument of maximum magnitude. They determine the number if one argument is a number and the other is a NaN. These functions differ from the fmaximum_mag functions only in their treatment of NaN arguments (see F.10.9.4, F.10.9.5).

Returns
3

The fmaximum_mag_num functions return the value of a numeric argument of maximum magnitude.

7.12.12.11 The fminimum_mag_num functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fminimum_mag_num(double x, double y);
float fminimum_mag_numf(float x, float y);
long double fminimum_mag_numl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fminimum_mag_numd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fminimum_mag_numd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fminimum_mag_numd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The fminimum_mag_num functions determine the value of a numeric argument of minimum magnitude. They determine the number if one argument is a number and the other is a NaN. These functions differ from the fminimum_mag functions only in their treatment of NaN arguments (see F.10.9.4, F.10.9.5).

Returns
3

The fminimum_mag_num functions return the value of a numeric argument of minimum magnitude.

7.12.13 Fused multiply-add

7.12.13.1 The fma functions

1
#include <math.h>
double fma(double x, double y, double z);
float fmaf(float x, float y, float z);
long double fmal(long double x, long double y, long double z);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 fmad32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y, _Decimal32 z);
_Decimal64 fmad64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 z);
_Decimal128 fmad128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 z);
#endif
Description
2

The fma functions compute (x × y) + z, rounded as one ternary operation: they compute the value (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the return type, according to the current rounding mode. A range error occurs for some finite arguments. A domain error occurs for some infinite arguments.

Returns
3

The fma functions return (x × y) + z, rounded as one ternary operation.

7.12.14 Functions that round result to narrower type

1

The functions in this subclause round their results to the return type, which is typically narrower285)

than the parameter types.

7.12.14.1 Add and round to narrower type

1
#include <math.h>
float fadd(double x, double y);
float faddl(long double x, long double y);
double daddl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 d32addd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal32 d32addd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 d64addd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

These functions compute the sum of x + y, rounded to the return type of the function. They compute the sum (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the return type, according to the current rounding mode. A range error occurs for some finite arguments. A domain error may occur for infinite arguments.

Returns
3

These functions return the sum of x + y, rounded to the return type of the function.

7.12.14.2 Subtract and round to narrower type

1
#include <math.h>
float fsub(double x, double y);
float fsubl(long double x, long double y);
double dsubl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 d32subd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal32 d32subd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 d64subd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif

Description

2

These functions compute the difference of xy, rounded to the return type of the function. They compute the difference (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the return type, according to the current rounding mode. A range error occurs for some finite arguments. A domain error may occur for infinite arguments.

Returns

3

These functions return the difference of xy, rounded to the return type of the function.

7.12.14.3 Multiply and round to narrower type

1
#include <math.h>
float fmul(double x, double y);
float fmull(long double x, long double y);
double dmull(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 d32muld64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal32 d32muld128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 d64muld128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

These functions compute the product x×y, rounded to the return type of the function. They compute the product (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the return type, according to the current rounding mode. A range error occurs for some finite arguments. A domain error occurs for one infinite argument and one zero argument.

Returns
3

These functions return the product of x × y, rounded to the return type of the function.

7.12.14.4 Divide and round to narrower type

1
#include <math.h>
float fdiv(double x, double y);
float fdivl(long double x, long double y);
double ddivl(long double x, long double y);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 d32divd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal32 d32divd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 d64divd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

These functions compute the quotient x ÷ y, rounded to the return type of the function. They compute the quotient (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the return type, according to the current rounding mode. A range error occurs for some finite arguments. A domain error occurs for either both arguments infinite or both arguments zero. A pole error occurs for a finite x and a zero y.

Returns
3

These functions return the quotient x ÷ y, rounded to the return type of the function.

7.12.14.5 Fused multiply-add and round to narrower type

1
#include <math.h>
float ffma(double x, double y, double z);
float ffmal(long double x, long double y, long double z);
double dfmal(long double x, long double y, long double z);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 d32fmad64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 z);
_Decimal32 d32fmad128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 z);
_Decimal64 d64fmad128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 z);
#endif
Description
2

These functions compute (x × y) + z (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the return type, according to the current rounding mode. A range error occurs for some finite arguments. A domain error may occur for an infinite argument.

Returns
3

These functions return (x × y) + z, rounded to the return type of the function.

7.12.14.6 Square root rounded to narrower type

1
#include <math.h>
float fsqrt(double x);
float fsqrtl(long double x);
double dsqrtl(long double x);
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 d32sqrtd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal32 d32sqrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal64 d64sqrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

These functions compute the square root of x, rounded to the return type of the function. They compute the square root (as if) to infinite precision and round once to the return type, according to the current rounding mode. A range error occurs for some finite positive arguments. A domain error occurs if the argument is less than zero.

Returns
3

These functions return the nonnegative square root of x, rounded to the return type of the function.

7.12.15 Quantum and quantum exponent functions

7.12.15.1 The quantizedN functions

1
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 quantized32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 quantized64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 quantized128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The quantizedN functions compute, if possible, a value with the numerical value of x and the quantum exponent of y. If the quantum exponent is being increased, the value shall be correctly rounded; if the result does not have the same value as x, the "inexact" floating-point exception shall

be raised. If the quantum exponent is being decreased and the significand of the result has more digits than the type would allow, the result is NaN, the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised, and a domain error occurs. If one or both operands are NaN the result is NaN. Otherwise if only one operand is infinite, the result is NaN, the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised, and a domain error occurs. If both operands are infinite, the result is DEC_INFINITY with the sign of x, converted to the return type of the function. The quantizedN functions do not raise the "overflow" and "underflow" floating-point exceptions.

Returns

3

The quantizedN functions return a value with the numerical value of x (except for any rounding) and the quantum exponent of y.

7.12.15.2 The samequantumdN functions

1
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
bool samequantumd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
bool samequantumd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
bool samequantumd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
#endif
Description
2

The samequantumdN functions determine if the quantum exponents of x and y are the same. If both x and y are NaN, or both infinite, they have the same quantum exponents; if exactly one operand is infinite or exactly one operand is NaN, they do not have the same quantum exponents. The samequantumdN functions raise no floating-point exception.

Returns
3

The samequantumdN functions return nonzero (true) when x and y have the same quantum exponents, zero (false) otherwise.

7.12.15.3 The quantumdN functions

1
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 quantumd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 quantumd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 quantumd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif
Description
2

The quantumdN functions compute the quantum (5.2.5.3.4) of a finite argument. If x is infinite, the result is +.

Returns
3

The quantumdN functions return the quantum of x.

7.12.15.4 The llquantexpdN functions

1
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
long long int llquantexpd32(_Decimal32 x);
long long int llquantexpd64(_Decimal64 x);
long long int llquantexpd128(_Decimal128 x);
#endif

Description

2

The llquantexpdN functions compute the quantum exponent (5.2.5.3.4) of a finite argument. If x is infinite or NaN, they compute LLONG_MIN, the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised, and a domain error occurs.

Returns

3

The llquantexpdN functions return the quantum exponent of x.

7.12.16 Decimal re-encoding functions

1

ISO/IEC 60559 specifies two different schemes to encode significands in the object representation of a decimal floating-point object: one based on decimal encoding (which packs three decimal digits into 10 bits), the other based on binary encoding (as a binary integer). An implementation may use either of these encoding schemes for its decimal floating types. The re-encoding functions in this subclause provide conversions between external decimal data with a given encoding scheme and the implementation’s corresponding decimal floating type.

7.12.16.1 The encodedecdN functions

1
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
void encodedecd32(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 4],
      const _Decimal32 * restrict xptr);
void encodedecd64(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 8],
      const _Decimal64 * restrict xptr);
void encodedecd128(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 16],
      const _Decimal128 * restrict xptr);
#endif
Description
2

The encodedecdN functions convert *xptr into an ISO/IEC 60559 decimalN encoding in the encoding scheme based on decimal encoding of the significand and store the resulting encoding as an N/8 element array, with 8 bits per array element, in the object pointed to by encptr. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2). These functions preserve the value of *xptr and raise no floating-point exceptions. If *xptr is non-canonical, these functions may or may not produce a canonical encoding.

Returns
3

The encodedecdN functions return no value.

7.12.16.2 The decodedecdN functions

1
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
void decodedecd32(_Decimal32 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 4]);
void decodedecd64(_Decimal64 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 8]);
void decodedecd128(_Decimal128 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 16]);
#endif
Description
2

The decodedecdN functions interpret the N/8 element array pointed to by encptr as an ISO/IEC 60559 decimalN encoding, with 8 bits per array element, in the encoding scheme based on decimal encoding of the significand. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2). These functions convert the given encoding into a value

of the decimal floating type, and store the result in the object pointed to by xptr. These functions preserve the encoded value and raise no floating-point exceptions. If the encoding is non-canonical, these functions may or may not produce a canonical representation.

Returns

3

The decodedecdN functions return no value.

7.12.16.3 The encodebindN functions

1
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
void encodebind32(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 4],
      const _Decimal32 * restrict xptr);
void encodebind64(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 8],
      const _Decimal64 * restrict xptr);
void encodebind128(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 16],
      const _Decimal128 * restrict xptr);
#endif
Description
2

The encodebindN functions convert *xptr into an ISO/IEC 60559 decimalN encoding in the encoding scheme based on binary encoding of the significand and store the resulting encoding as an N/8 element array, with 8 bits per array element, in the object pointed to by encptr. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2). These functions preserve the value of *xptr and raise no floating-point exceptions. If *xptr is non-canonical, these functions may or may not produce a canonical encoding.

Returns
3

The encodebindN functions return no value.

7.12.16.4 The decodebindN functions

1
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
void decodebind32(_Decimal32 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 4]);
void decodebind64(_Decimal64 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 8]);
void decodebind128(_Decimal128 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 16]);
#endif
Description
2

The decodebindN functions interpret the N/8 element array pointed to by encptr as an ISO/IEC 60559 decimalN encoding, with 8 bits per array element, in the encoding scheme based on binary encoding of the significand. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2). These functions convert the given encoding into a value of decimal floating type, and store the result in the object pointed to by xptr. These functions preserve the encoded value and raise no floating-point exceptions. If the encoding is non-canonical, these functions may or may not produce a canonical representation.

Returns
3

The decodebindN functions return no value.

7.12.17 Comparison macros

1

The relational and equality operators support the usual mathematical relationships between numeric values. For any ordered pair of numeric values exactly one of the relationships — less, greater, and equal — is true. Relational operators may raise the "invalid" floating-point exception when argument values are NaNs. For a NaN and a numeric value, or for two NaNs, just the unordered relationship is true.286) 7.12.17.1 through 7.12.17.6 provide macros that are quiet versions of the relational operators: the macros do not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception as an effect of quiet NaN arguments. The comparison macros facilitate writing efficient code that accounts for quiet NaNs without suffering the "invalid" floating-point exception. In the synopses in this subclause, realfloating indicates that the argument shall be an expression of real floating type287) (both arguments are not required to have the same type).288) If either argument has decimal floating type, the other argument shall have decimal floating type as well.

7.12.17.1 The isgreater macro

1
#include <math.h>
int isgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
Description
2

The isgreater macro determines whether its first argument is greater than its second argument. The value of isgreater(x,y) is always equal to (x) > (y).

However, unlike (x) > (y), isgreater(x,y) does not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception when x and y are unordered and neither is a signaling NaN.

Returns
3

The isgreater macro returns the value of (x) > (y).

7.12.17.2 The isgreaterequal macro

1
#include <math.h>
int isgreaterequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
Description
2

The isgreaterequal macro determines whether its first argument is greater than or equal to its second argument. The value of isgreaterequal(x,y) is always equal to (x) >= (y).

However, unlike (x) >= (y), isgreaterequal(x,y) does not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception when x and y are unordered and neither is a signaling NaN.

Returns
3

The isgreaterequal macro returns the value of (x) >= (y).

7.12.17.3 The isless macro

1
#include <math.h>
int isless(real-floating x, real-floating y);

Description

2

The isless macro determines whether its first argument is less than its second argument. The value of isless(x,y) is always equal to (x) < (y).

However, unlike (x) < (y), isless(x,y) does not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception when x and y are unordered and neither is a signaling NaN.

Returns

3

The isless macro returns the value of (x) < (y).

7.12.17.4 The islessequal macro

1
#include <math.h>
int islessequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
Description
2

The islessequal macro determines whether its first argument is less than or equal to its second argument. The value of islessequal(x,y) is always equal to (x) <= (y).

However, unlike (x) <= (y), islessequal(x,y) does not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception when x and y are unordered and neither is a signaling NaN.

Returns
3

The islessequal macro returns the value of (x) <= (y).

7.12.17.5 The islessgreater macro

1
#include <math.h>
int islessgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
Description
2

The islessgreater macro determines whether its first argument is less than or greater than its second argument. The islessgreater(x,y) macro is similar to (x) < (y) || (x) > (y).

However, islessgreater(x,y) does not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception when x and y are unordered and neither is a signaling NaN (nor does it evaluate x and y twice).

Returns
3

The islessgreater macro returns the value of (x) < (y) || (x) > (y).

7.12.17.6 The isunordered macro

1
#include <math.h>
int isunordered(real-floating x, real-floating y);
Description
2

The isunordered macro determines whether its arguments are unordered. It does not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception when x and y are unordered and neither is a signaling NaN.

Returns
3

The isunordered macro returns 1 if its arguments are unordered and 0 otherwise.

7.12.17.7 The iseqsig macro

1
#include <math.h>
int iseqsig(real-floating x, real-floating y);

Description

2

The iseqsig macro determines whether its arguments are equal. If an argument is a NaN, a domain error occurs for the macro, as if a domain error occurred for a function (7.12.1).

Returns

3

The iseqsig macro returns 1 if its arguments are equal and 0 otherwise.

7.13 Non-local jumps <setjmp.h>

1

The header <setjmp.h> defines the macros setjmp and __STDC_VERSION_SETJMP_H__, and declares one function and one type, for bypassing the normal function call and return discipline.289)

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_SETJMP_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

The type declared is

jmp_buf

which is an array type suitable for holding the information needed to restore a calling environment. The environment of an invocation of the setjmp macro consists of information sufficient for a call to the longjmp function to return execution to the correct block and invocation of that block, were it called recursively. It does not include the state of the floating-point environment, of open files, or of any other component of the abstract machine.

4

It is unspecified whether setjmp is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed to access an actual function, or a program defines an external identifier with the name setjmp, the behavior is undefined.

7.13.1 Save calling environment

7.13.1.1 The setjmp macro

1
#include <setjmp.h>
int setjmp(jmp_buf env);
Description
2

The setjmp macro saves its calling environment in its jmp_buf argument for later use by the longjmp function.

Returns
3

If the return is from a direct invocation, the setjmp macro returns the value zero. If the return is from a call to the longjmp function, the setjmp macro returns a nonzero value.

Environmental limits
4

An invocation of the setjmp macro shall appear only in one of the following contexts:

  • the entire controlling expression of a selection or iteration statement;
  • one operand of a relational or equality operator with the other operand an integer constant expression, with the resulting expression being the entire controlling expression of a selection or iteration statement;
  • the operand of a unary ! operator with the resulting expression being the entire controlling expression of a selection or iteration statement; or
  • the entire expression of an expression statement (possibly cast to void).
5

If the invocation appears in any other context, the behavior is undefined.

7.13.2 Restore calling environment

7.13.2.1 The longjmp function

Synopsis

1
#include <setjmp.h>
[[noreturn]] void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);

Description

2

The longjmp function restores the environment saved by the most recent invocation of the setjmp macro in the same invocation of the program with the corresponding jmp_buf argument. If there has been no such invocation, or if the invocation was from another thread of execution, or if the function containing the invocation of the setjmp macro has terminated execution290) in the interim, or if the invocation of the setjmp macro was within the scope of an identifier with variably modified type and execution has left that scope in the interim, the behavior is undefined.

3

All accessible objects have values, and all other components of the abstract machine291) have state, as of the time the longjmp function was called, except that the representation of objects of automatic storage duration that are local to the function containing the invocation of the corresponding setjmp macro that do not have volatile-qualified type and have been changed between the setjmp invocation and longjmp call is indeterminate.

Returns

4

After longjmp is completed, thread execution continues as if the corresponding invocation of the setjmp macro had just returned the value specified by val. The longjmp function cannot cause the setjmp macro to return the value 0; if val is 0, the setjmp macro returns the value 1.

5

EXAMPLE The longjmp function that returns control back to the point of the setjmp invocation can cause memory associated with a variable length array object to be squandered.

#include <setjmp.h>
jmp_buf buf;
void g(int n);
void h(int n);
int n = 6;
void f(void)
{
      int x[n];          // valid:  f is not terminated
      setjmp(buf);
      g(n);
}
void g(int n)
{
      int a[n];          // a may remain allocated
      h(n);
}
void h(int n)
{
      int b[n];          // b may remain allocated
      longjmp(buf, 2);   // can cause memory loss
}

7.14 Signal handling <signal.h>

1

The header <signal.h> declares a type and two functions and defines several macros, for handling various signals (conditions that may be reported during program execution).

2

The type defined is

sig_atomic_t

which is the (possibly volatile-qualified) integer type of an object that can be accessed as an atomic entity, even in the presence of asynchronous interrupts.

3

The macros defined are

SIG_DFL
SIG_ERR
SIG_IGN

which expand to constant expressions with distinct values that have type compatible with the second argument to, and the return value of, the signal function, and whose values compare unequal to the address of any declarable function; and the following, which expand to positive integer constant expressions with type int and distinct values that are the signal numbers, each corresponding to the specified condition:

SIGABRT abnormal termination, such as is initiated by the abort function

SIGFPE an erroneous arithmetic operation, such as zero divide or an operation resulting in overflow

SIGILL detection of an invalid function image, such as an invalid instruction

SIGINT receipt of an interactive attention signal

SIGSEGV an invalid access to storage

SIGTERM a termination request sent to the program

4

An implementation is not required to generate any of these signals, except as a result of explicit calls to the raise function. Additional signals and pointers to undeclarable functions, with macro definitions beginning, respectively, with the letters SIG and an uppercase letter or with SIG_ and an uppercase letter,292) may also be specified by the implementation. The complete set of signals, their semantics, and their default handling is implementation-defined; all signal numbers shall be positive.

7.14.1 Specify signal handling

7.14.1.1 The signal function

1
#include <signal.h>
void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);
Description
2

The signal function chooses one of three ways in which receipt of the signal number sig is to be subsequently handled. If the value of func is SIG_DFL, default handling for that signal will occur. If the value of func is SIG_IGN, the signal will be ignored. Otherwise, func shall point to a function to be called when that signal occurs. An invocation of such a function because of a signal, or (recursively) of any further functions called by that invocation (other than functions in the standard library),293) is called a signal handler.

3

When a signal occurs and func points to a function, it is implementation-defined whether the equivalent of signal(sig, SIG_DFL); is executed or the implementation prevents some implementationdefined set of signals (at least including sig) from occurring until the current signal handling has completed; in the case of SIGILL, the implementation may alternatively define that no action is taken. Then the equivalent of (*func)(sig); is executed. If and when the function returns, if the value of sig is SIGFPE, SIGILL, SIGSEGV, or any other implementation-defined value corresponding to a computational exception, the behavior is undefined; otherwise the program will resume execution at the point it was interrupted.

4

If the signal occurs as the result of calling the abort or raise function, the signal handler shall not call the raise function.

5

If the signal occurs other than as the result of calling the abort or raise function, the behavior is undefined if the signal handler refers to any object with static or thread storage duration that is not a lock-free atomic object and that is not declared with the constexpr storage-class specifier other than by assigning a value to an object declared as volatile sig_atomic_t, or the signal handler calls any function in the standard library other than

  • the abort function,
  • the _Exit function,
  • the quick_exit function,
  • the functions in <stdatomic.h> (except where explicitly stated otherwise) when the atomic arguments are lock-free,
  • the atomic_is_lock_free function with any atomic argument, or
  • the signal function with the first argument equal to the signal number corresponding to the signal that caused the invocation of the handler. Furthermore, if such a call to the signal function results in a SIG_ERR return, the object designated by errno has an indeterminate representation.294)
6

At program startup, the equivalent of

signal(sig, SIG_IGN);
may be executed for some signals selected in an implementation-defined manner; the equivalent of
signal(sig, SIG_DFL);

is executed for all other signals defined by the implementation.

7

Use of this function in a multi-threaded program results in undefined behavior. The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the signal function.

Returns

8

If the request can be honored, the signal function returns the value of func for the most recent successful call to signal for the specified signal sig. Otherwise, a value of SIG_ERR is returned and a positive value is stored in errno.

Forward references: the abort function (7.24.4.1), the exit function (7.24.4.4), the _Exit function (7.24.4.5), the quick_exit function (7.24.4.7).

7.14.2 Send signal

7.14.2.1 The raise function

Synopsis

1
#include <signal.h>
int raise(int sig);

Description

2

The raise function carries out the actions described in 7.14.1.1 for the signal sig. If a signal handler is called, the raise function shall not return until after the signal handler does.

Returns

3

The raise function returns zero if successful, nonzero if unsuccessful.

7.15 Alignment <stdalign.h>

1

The header <stdalign.h> provides no content.

7.16 Variable arguments <stdarg.h>

1

The header <stdarg.h> declares a type and defines five macros, for advancing through a list of arguments whose number and types are not known to the called function when it is translated.

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_STDARG_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

A function may be called with a variable number of arguments of varying types if its parameter type list ends with an ellipsis.

4

The type declared is

va_list

which is a complete object type suitable for holding information needed by the macros va_start, va_arg, va_end, and va_copy. If access to the varying arguments is desired, the called function shall declare an object (generally referred to as ap in this subclause) having type va_list. The object ap may be passed as an argument to another function; if that function invokes the va_arg macro with parameter ap, the representation of ap in the calling function is indeterminate and shall be passed to the va_end macro prior to any further reference to ap.295)

7.16.1 Variable argument list access macros

1

The va_start and va_arg macros described in this subclause shall be implemented as macros, not functions. It is unspecified whether va_copy and va_end are macros or identifiers declared with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed to access an actual function, or a program defines an external identifier with the same name, the behavior is undefined. Each invocation of the va_start and va_copy macros shall be matched by a corresponding invocation of the va_end macro in the same function.

7.16.1.1 The va_arg macro

1
#include <stdarg.h>
type va_arg(va_list ap, type);
Description
2

The va_arg macro expands to an expression that has the specified type and the value of the next argument in the call. The parameter ap shall have been initialized by the va_start or va_copy macro (without an intervening invocation of the va_end macro for the same ap). Each invocation of the va_arg macro modifies ap so that the values of successive arguments are returned in turn. The behavior is undefined if there is no actual next argument. The parameter type shall be an object type name. If type is not compatible with the type of the actual next argument (as promoted according to the default argument promotions), the behavior is undefined, except for the following cases:

  • both types are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible types;
  • one type is compatible with a signed integer type, the other type is compatible with the corresponding unsigned integer type, and the value is representable in both types;
  • one type is pointer to qualified or unqualified void and the other is a pointer to a qualified or unqualified character type;
  • or, the type of the next argument is nullptr_t and type is a pointer type that has the same representation and alignment requirements as a pointer to a character type.296)

Returns

3

The first invocation of the va_arg macro after that of the va_start macro returns the value of the first argument without an explicit parameter, which matches the position of the ... in the parameter list. Successive invocations return the values of the remaining arguments in succession.

7.16.1.2 The va_copy macro

1
#include <stdarg.h>
void va_copy(va_list dest, va_list src);
Description
2

The va_copy macro initializes dest as a copy of src, as if the va_start macro had been applied to dest followed by the same sequence of uses of the va_arg macro as had previously been used to reach the present state of src. Neither the va_copy nor va_start macro shall be invoked to reinitialize dest without an intervening invocation of the va_end macro for the same dest.

Returns
3

The va_copy macro returns no value.

7.16.1.3 The va_end macro

1
#include <stdarg.h>
void va_end(va_list ap);
Description
2

The va_end macro facilitates a normal return from the function whose variable argument list was referred to by the expansion of the va_start macro, or the function containing the expansion of the va_copy macro, that initialized the va_list ap. The va_end macro may modify ap so that it is no longer usable (without being reinitialized by the va_start or va_copy macro). If there is no corresponding invocation of the va_start or va_copy macro, or if the va_end macro is not invoked before the return, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The va_end macro returns no value.

7.16.1.4 The va_start macro

1
#include <stdarg.h>
void va_start(va_list ap, ...);
Description
2

The va_start macro shall be invoked before any access to the unnamed arguments.

3

The va_start macro initializes ap for subsequent use by the va_arg and va_end macros. Neither the va_start nor va_copy macro shall be invoked to reinitialize ap without an intervening invocation of the va_end macro for the same ap.

4

Only the first argument passed to va_start is evaluated. If any additional arguments expand to include unbalanced parentheses, or a preprocessing token that does not convert to a token, the behavior is undefined.

5

NOTE The macro allows additional arguments to be passed for va_start for compatibility with older versions of the library only.

Returns
6

The va_start macro returns no value.

Recommended practice

7

Additional arguments beyond the first given to the va_start macro may be expanded and used in unspecified contexts where they are unevaluated. For example, an implementation diagnoses potentially erroneous input for an invocation of va_start such as:

#include <stdarg.h>
void miaou (...) {
      va_list vl;
      va_start(vl, 1, 3.0, "12", xd); // diagnostic encouraged
      /* ... */
      va_end(vl);
}
Simultaneously, va_start usage consistent with older revisions of this document should not produce a diagnostic:
#include <stdarg.h>
void neigh (int last_arg, ...) {
      va_list vl;
      va_start(vl, last_arg); // no diagnostic
      /* ... */
      va_end(vl);
}
8

EXAMPLE 1 The function f1 gathers into an array a list of arguments that are pointers to strings (but not more than MAXARGS arguments), then passes the array as a single argument to function f2. The number of pointers is specified by the first argument to f1.

#include <stdarg.h>
#define MAXARGS   31
void f1(int n_ptrs, ...)
{
      va_list ap;
      char *array[MAXARGS];
      int ptr_no = 0;
      if (n_ptrs > MAXARGS)
            n_ptrs = MAXARGS;
      va_start(ap);
      while (ptr_no  <  n_ptrs)
            array[ptr_no++] = va_arg(ap, char *);
      va_end(ap);
      f2(n_ptrs, array);
}
Each call to f1 is required to have visible the definition of the function or a declaration such as
void f1(int, ...);
9

EXAMPLE 2 The function f3 is similar, but saves the status of the variable argument list after the indicated number of arguments; after f2 has been called once with the whole list, the trailing part of the list is gathered again and passed to function f4.

#include <stdarg.h>
#define MAXARGS 31
void f3(int n_ptrs, int f4_after, ...)
{
      va_list ap, ap_save;
      char *array[MAXARGS];
      int ptr_no = 0;
      if (n_ptrs > MAXARGS)
            n_ptrs = MAXARGS;
      va_start(ap);
      while (ptr_no < n_ptrs) {
            array[ptr_no++] = va_arg(ap, char *);
            if (ptr_no == f4_after)
                  va_copy(ap_save, ap);
      }
      va_end(ap);
      f2(n_ptrs, array);
      // Now process the saved copy.
      n_ptrs -= f4_after;
      ptr_no = 0;
      while (ptr_no < n_ptrs)
            array[ptr_no++] = va_arg(ap_save, char *);
      va_end(ap_save);
      f4(n_ptrs, array);
}
10

EXAMPLE 3 The function f5 is similar to f1, but instead of passing an explicit number of strings as the first argument, the argument list is terminated with a null pointer.

#include <stdarg.h>
#define MAXARGS 31
void f5(...)
{
      va_list ap;
      char *array[MAXARGS];
      int ptr_no = 0;
      va_start(ap);
      while (ptr_no < MAXARGS)
      {
            char *ptr = va_arg(ap, char *);
            if (!ptr)
                  break;
            array[ptr_no++] = ptr;
      }
      va_end(ap);
      f6(ptr_no, array);
}
Each call to f5 is required to have visible the definition of the function or a declaration such as
void f5(...);

and implicitly requires the last argument to be a null pointer.

7.17 Atomics <stdatomic.h>

7.17.1 Introduction

1

The header <stdatomic.h> defines several macros and declares several types and functions for performing atomic operations on data shared between threads.297)

2

Implementations that define the macro __STDC_NO_ATOMICS__ may not provide this header nor support any of its facilities.

3

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_STDATOMIC_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

4

The macros defined are the atomic lock-free macros

ATOMIC_BOOL_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_CHAR_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_CHAR8_T_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_CHAR16_T_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_CHAR32_T_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_WCHAR_T_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_SHORT_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_INT_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_LONG_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_LLONG_LOCK_FREE
ATOMIC_POINTER_LOCK_FREE
which expand to constant expressions suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives and which indicate the lock-free property of the corresponding atomic types (both signed and unsigned); and
ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT

which expands to an initializer for an object of type atomic_flag.

5

The types include

memory_order
which is an enumerated type whose enumerators identify memory ordering constraints;
atomic_flag

which is a structure type representing a lock-free, primitive atomic flag; and several atomic analogs of integer types.

6

In the following synopses:

  • An A refers to an atomic type.
  • A C refers to its corresponding non-atomic type.
  • An M refers to the type of the other argument for arithmetic operations. For atomic integer types, M is C. For atomic pointer types, M is ptrdiff_t.
  • The functions not ending in _explicit have the same semantics as the corresponding

_explicit function with memory_order_seq_cst for the memory_order argument.

7

It is unspecified whether any generic function declared in <stdatomic.h> is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed to access an actual function, or a program defines an external identifier with the name of a generic function, the behavior is undefined.

8

NOTE Many operations are volatile-qualified. The "volatile as device register" semantics have not changed in the standard. This qualification means that volatility is preserved when applying these operations to volatile objects.

7.17.2 Initialization

1

An atomic object with automatic storage duration that is not initialized or such an object with allocated storage duration initially has an indeterminate representation; equally, a non-atomic store to any byte of the representation (either directly or, for example, by calls to memcpy or memset) makes any atomic object have an indeterminate representation. Explicit or default initialization for atomic objects with static or thread storage duration that do not have the type atomic_flag is guaranteed to produce a valid state.298)

2

Concurrent access to an atomic object before it is set to a valid state, even via an atomic operation, constitutes a data race. If a signal occurs other than as the result of calling the abort or raise functions, the behavior is undefined if the signal handler reads or modifies an atomic object that has an indeterminate representation.

3

EXAMPLE The following definition ensure valid states for guide and head regardless if these are found in file scope or block scope. Thus any atomic operation that is performed on them after their initialization has been met is well defined.

_Atomic int guide = 42;
static _Atomic(void*) head;

7.17.2.1 The atomic_init generic function

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
void atomic_init(volatile A *obj, C value);
Description
2

The atomic_init generic function initializes the atomic object pointed to by obj to the value value, while also initializing any additional state that the implementation may need to carry for the atomic object. If the object has no declared type, after the call the effective type is the atomic type A.

3

Although this function initializes an atomic object, it does not avoid data races; concurrent access to the object being initialized, even via an atomic operation, constitutes a data race.

4

If a signal occurs other than as the result of calling the abort or raise functions, the behavior is undefined if the signal handler calls the atomic_init generic function.

Returns
5

The atomic_init generic function returns no value.

6

EXAMPLE

atomic_int guide;
atomic_init(&guide, 42);

7.17.3 Order and consistency

1

The enumerated type memory_order specifies the detailed regular (non-atomic) memory synchronization operations as defined in 5.1.2.5 and may provide for operation ordering. Its enumeration constants are as follows:299)

memory_order_relaxed
memory_order_consume
memory_order_acquire
memory_order_release
memory_order_acq_rel
memory_order_seq_cst
2

For memory_order_relaxed, no operation orders memory.

3

For memory_order_release, memory_order_acq_rel, and memory_order_seq_cst, a store operation performs a release operation on the affected memory location.

4

For memory_order_acquire, memory_order_acq_rel, and memory_order_seq_cst, a load operation performs an acquire operation on the affected memory location.

5

For memory_order_consume, a load operation performs a consume operation on the affected memory location.

6

There shall be a single total order S on all memory_order_seq_cst operations, consistent with the "happens before" order and modification orders for all affected locations, such that each

memory_order_seq_cst operation B that loads a value from an atomic object M observes one of the following values:

  • the result of the last modification A of M that precedes B in S, if it exists, or
  • if A exists, the result of some modification of M that is not memory_order_seq_cst and that does not happen before A, or
  • if A does not exist, the result of some modification of M that is not memory_order_seq_cst.
7

NOTE 1 Although it is not explicitly required that S include lock operations, it can always be extended to an order that does include lock and unlock operations, since the ordering between those is already included in the "happens before" ordering.

8

NOTE 2 Atomic operations specifying memory_order_relaxed are relaxed only with respect to memory ordering. Implementations still guarantee that any given atomic access to a particular atomic object is indivisible with respect to all other atomic accesses to that object.

9

For an atomic operation B that reads the value of an atomic object M, if there is a memory_order_seq_cst fence X sequenced before B, then B observes either the last memory_order_seq_cst modification of M preceding X in the total order S or a later modification of M in its modification order.

10

For atomic operations A and B on an atomic object M, where A modifies M and B takes its value, if there is a memory_order_seq_cst fence X such that A is sequenced before X and B follows X in S, then B observes either the effects of A or a later modification of M in its modification order.

11

For atomic modifications A and B of an atomic object M, B occurs later than A in the modification order of M if:

  • there is a memory_order_seq_cst fence X such that A is sequenced before X, and X precedes B in S, or
  • there is a memory_order_seq_cst fence Y such that Y is sequenced before B, and A precedes Y in S, or
  • there are memory_order_seq_cst fences X and Y such that A is sequenced before X, Y is sequenced before B, and X precedes Y in S.
12

Atomic read-modify-write operations shall always read the last value (in the modification order) stored before the write associated with the read-modify-write operation.

13

An atomic store shall only store a value that has been computed from constants and program input values by a finite sequence of program evaluations, such that each evaluation observes the stored

values of the objects as computed by the last prior assignment in the sequence. The ordering of evaluations in this sequence shall be such that

14

NOTE 3 The second requirement disallows "out-of-thin-air", or "speculative" stores of atomics when relaxed atomics are used. Since unordered operations are involved, evaluations can appear in this sequence out of thread order. For example, with x and y initially zero,

// Thread 1:
r1 = atomic_load_explicit(&y, memory_order_relaxed);
atomic_store_explicit(&x, r1, memory_order_relaxed);
// Thread 2:
r2 = atomic_load_explicit(&x, memory_order_relaxed);
atomic_store_explicit(&y, 42, memory_order_relaxed);
is allowed to produce r1 == 42 && r2 == 42. The sequence of evaluations justifying this consists of:
atomic_store_explicit(&y, 42, memory_order_relaxed);
r1 = atomic_load_explicit(&y, memory_order_relaxed);
atomic_store_explicit(&x, r1, memory_order_relaxed);
r2 = atomic_load_explicit(&x, memory_order_relaxed);
On the other hand,
// Thread 1:
r1 = atomic_load_explicit(&y, memory_order_relaxed);
atomic_store_explicit(&x, r1, memory_order_relaxed);
// Thread 2:
r2 = atomic_load_explicit(&x, memory_order_relaxed);
atomic_store_explicit(&y, r2, memory_order_relaxed);

is not allowed to produce r1 == 42 && r2 == 42, since there is no sequence of evaluations that results in the computation of 42. In the absence of "relaxed" operations and read-modify-write operations with weaker than memory_order_acq_rel ordering, the second requirement has no impact.

Recommended practice

15

The requirements do not forbid r1 == 42 && r2 == 42 in the following example, with x and y initially zero:

// Thread 1:
r1 = atomic_load_explicit(&x, memory_order_relaxed);
if (r1 == 42)
      atomic_store_explicit(&y, r1, memory_order_relaxed);
// Thread 2:
r2 = atomic_load_explicit(&y, memory_order_relaxed);
if (r2 == 42)
      atomic_store_explicit(&x, 42, memory_order_relaxed);

However, this is not useful behavior, and implementations should not allow it.

16

Implementations should make atomic stores visible to atomic loads within a reasonable amount of time.

7.17.3.1 The kill_dependency macro

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
type kill_dependency(type y);
Description
2

The kill_dependency macro terminates a dependency chain; the argument does not carry a dependency to the return value.

Returns
3

The kill_dependency macro returns the value of y.

7.17.4 Fences

1

This subclause introduces synchronization primitives called fences. Fences can have acquire semantics, release semantics, or both. A fence with acquire semantics is called an acquire fence; a fence with release semantics is called a release fence.

2

A release fence A synchronizes with an acquire fence B if there exist atomic operations X and Y , both operating on some atomic object M, such that A is sequenced before X, X modifies M, Y is sequenced before B, and Y reads the value written by X or a value written by any side effect in the hypothetical release sequence X would head if it were a release operation.

3

A release fence A synchronizes with an atomic operation B that performs an acquire operation on an atomic object M if there exists an atomic operation X such that A is sequenced before X, X modifies M, and B reads the value written by X or a value written by any side effect in the hypothetical release sequence X would head if it were a release operation.

4

An atomic operation A that is a release operation on an atomic object M synchronizes with an acquire fence B if there exists some atomic operation X on M such that X is sequenced before B and reads the value written by A or a value written by any side effect in the release sequence headed by A.

7.17.4.1 The atomic_thread_fence function

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
void atomic_thread_fence(memory_order order);
Description
2

Depending on the value of order, this operation:

  • has no effects, if order == memory_order_relaxed;
  • is an acquire fence, if order == memory_order_acquire or

order == memory_order_consume;

  • is a release fence, if order == memory_order_release;
  • is both an acquire fence and a release fence, if order == memory_order_acq_rel;
  • is a sequentially consistent acquire and release fence, if order == memory_order_seq_cst.
Returns
3

The atomic_thread_fence function returns no value.

7.17.4.2 The atomic_signal_fence function

Synopsis

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
void atomic_signal_fence(memory_order order);

Description

2

Equivalent to atomic_thread_fence(order), except that the resulting ordering constraints are established only between a thread and a signal handler executed in the same thread.

3

NOTE 1 The atomic_signal_fence function can be used to specify the order in which actions performed by the thread become visible to the signal handler.

4

NOTE 2 Compiler optimizations and reorderings of loads and stores are inhibited in the same way as with atomic_thread_fence, but the hardware fence instructions that atomic_thread_fence would have inserted are not emitted.

Returns

5

The atomic_signal_fence function returns no value.

7.17.5 Lock-free property

1

The atomic lock-free macros indicate the lock-free property of integer and address atomic types. A value of 0 indicates that the type is never lock-free; a value of 1 indicates that the type is sometimes lock-free; a value of 2 indicates that the type is always lock-free.

Recommended practice

2

Operations that are lock-free should also be address-free. That is, atomic operations on the same memory location via two different addresses will communicate atomically. The implementation should not depend on any per-process state. This restriction enables communication via memory mapped into a process more than once and memory shared between two processes.

7.17.5.1 The atomic_is_lock_free generic function

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
bool atomic_is_lock_free(const volatile A *obj);
Description
2

The atomic_is_lock_free generic function indicates whether atomic operations on objects of the type pointed to by obj are lock-free.

Returns
3

The atomic_is_lock_free generic function returns nonzero (true) if and only if atomic operations on objects of the type pointed to by the argument are lock-free. In any given program execution, the result of the lock-free query shall be consistent for all pointers of the same type.300)

7.17.6 Atomic integer types

1

For each line in the following table,301) the atomic type name is declared as a type that has the same representation and alignment requirements as the corresponding direct type.302)

Atomic type name Direct type atomic_bool _Atomic bool atomic_char _Atomic char atomic_schar _Atomic signed char atomic_uchar _Atomic unsigned char

Atomic type name Direct type atomic_short _Atomic short atomic_ushort _Atomic unsigned short atomic_int _Atomic int atomic_uint _Atomic unsigned int atomic_long _Atomic long atomic_ulong _Atomic unsigned long atomic_llong _Atomic long long atomic_ullong _Atomic unsigned long long atomic_char8_t _Atomic char8_t atomic_char16_t _Atomic char16_t atomic_char32_t _Atomic char32_t atomic_wchar_t _Atomic wchar_t atomic_int_least8_t _Atomic int_least8_t atomic_uint_least8_t _Atomic uint_least8_t atomic_int_least16_t _Atomic int_least16_t atomic_uint_least16_t _Atomic uint_least16_t atomic_int_least32_t _Atomic int_least32_t atomic_uint_least32_t _Atomic uint_least32_t atomic_int_least64_t _Atomic int_least64_t atomic_uint_least64_t _Atomic uint_least64_t atomic_int_fast8_t _Atomic int_fast8_t atomic_uint_fast8_t _Atomic uint_fast8_t atomic_int_fast16_t _Atomic int_fast16_t atomic_uint_fast16_t _Atomic uint_fast16_t atomic_int_fast32_t _Atomic int_fast32_t atomic_uint_fast32_t _Atomic uint_fast32_t atomic_int_fast64_t _Atomic int_fast64_t atomic_uint_fast64_t _Atomic uint_fast64_t atomic_intptr_t _Atomic intptr_t atomic_uintptr_t _Atomic uintptr_t atomic_size_t _Atomic size_t atomic_ptrdiff_t _Atomic ptrdiff_t atomic_intmax_t _Atomic intmax_t atomic_uintmax_t _Atomic uintmax_t

2

Conversions to atomic_bool behave the same as conversions to bool.

Recommended practice

3

The representation of an atomic integer type is not required to have the same size as the corresponding regular type but it should have the same size whenever possible, as it eases effort required to port existing code.

7.17.7 Operations on atomic types

1

There are only a few kinds of operations on atomic types, though there are many instances of those kinds. This subclause specifies each general kind.

7.17.7.1 The atomic_store generic functions

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
void atomic_store(volatile A *object, C desired);
void atomic_store_explicit(volatile A *object, C desired, memory_order order);

Description

2

The order argument shall not be memory_order_acquire, memory_order_consume, nor memory_order_acq_rel. Atomically replace the value pointed to by object with the value of desired. Memory is affected according to the value of order.

Returns

3

The atomic_store generic functions return no value.

7.17.7.2 The atomic_load generic functions

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
C atomic_load(const volatile A *object);
C atomic_load_explicit(const volatile A *object, memory_order order);
Description
2

The order argument shall not be memory_order_release nor memory_order_acq_rel. Memory is affected according to the value of order.

Returns
3

Atomically returns the value pointed to by object.

7.17.7.3 The atomic_exchange generic functions

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
C atomic_exchange(volatile A *object, C desired);
C atomic_exchange_explicit(volatile A *object, C desired, memory_order order);
Description
2

Atomically replace the value pointed to by object with desired. Memory is affected according to the value of order. These operations are read-modify-write operations (5.1.2.5).

Returns
3

Atomically returns the value pointed to by object immediately before the effects.

7.17.7.4 The atomic_compare_exchange generic functions

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
bool atomic_compare_exchange_strong(volatile A *object, C *expected, C desired);
bool atomic_compare_exchange_strong_explicit(volatile A *object, C *expected,
      C desired, memory_order success, memory_order failure);
bool atomic_compare_exchange_weak(volatile A *object, C *expected, C desired);
bool atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit(volatile A *object, C *expected,
      C desired, memory_order success, memory_order failure);
Description
2

The failure argument shall not be memory_order_release nor memory_order_acq_rel. The failure argument shall be no stronger than the success argument.

3

Atomically, compares the contents of the memory pointed to by object for equality with that pointed to by expected, and if true, replaces the contents of the memory pointed to by object with desired, and if false, updates the contents of the memory pointed to by expected with that pointed to by object. Further, if the comparison is true, memory is affected according to the value of success, and if the comparison is false, memory is affected according to the value of failure. These operations are atomic read-modify-write operations (5.1.2.5).

4

NOTE 1 For example, the effect of atomic_compare_exchange_strong is

if (memcmp(object, expected, sizeof(*object)) == 0)
      memcpy(object, &desired, sizeof(*object));
else
      memcpy(expected, object, sizeof(*object));
5

A weak compare-and-exchange operation may fail spuriously. That is, even when the contents of memory referred to by expected and object are equal, it may return zero and store back to expected the same memory contents that were originally there.

6

NOTE 2 This spurious failure enables implementation of compare-and-exchange on a broader class of machines; e.g. load-locked store-conditional machines.

7

EXAMPLE A consequence of spurious failure is that nearly all uses of weak compare-and-exchange will be in a loop.

exp = atomic_load(&cur);
do {
      des = function(exp);
} while (!atomic_compare_exchange_weak(&cur, &exp, des));

When a compare-and-exchange is in a loop, the weak version will yield better performance on some platforms. When a weak compare-and-exchange would require a loop and a strong one would not, the strong one is preferable.

Returns

8

The result of the comparison.

7.17.7.5 The atomic_fetch and modify generic functions

1

The following operations perform arithmetic and bitwise computations. All these operations are applicable to an object of any atomic integer type other than _Atomic bool, atomic_bool, or the atomic version of an enumeration with underlying type bool. The key, operator, and computation correspondence is:

key op computation add + addition sub - subtraction or | bitwise inclusive or xor ^ bitwise exclusive or and & bitwise and

Synopsis
2
#include <stdatomic.h>
C atomic_fetch_key(volatile A *object, M operand);
C atomic_fetch_key_explicit(volatile A *object, M operand, memory_order order);
Description
3

Atomically replaces the value pointed to by object with the result of the computation applied to the value pointed to by object and the given operand. Memory is affected according to the value of order. These operations are atomic read-modify-write operations (5.1.2.5). For signed integer types, arithmetic performs silent wraparound on integer overflow; there are no undefined results. For address types, the result may be an undefined address, but the operations otherwise have no undefined behavior.

Returns
4

Atomically, the value pointed to by object immediately before the effects.

7.17.8 Atomic flag type and operations

1

The atomic_flag type provides the classic test-and-set functionality. It has two states, set and clear.

2

Operations on an object of type atomic_flag shall be lock free.

3

NOTE Hence, as per 7.17.5, the operations should also be address-free. No other type requires lock-free operations, so the atomic_flag type is the minimum hardware-implemented type needed to conform to this document. The remaining types can be emulated with atomic_flag, though with less than ideal properties.

4

The macro ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT may be used to initialize an atomic_flag to the clear state. An atomic_flag that is not explicitly initialized with ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT has initially an indeterminate representation.

5

EXAMPLE

atomic_flag guard = ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT;

7.17.8.1 The atomic_flag_test_and_set functions

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
bool atomic_flag_test_and_set(volatile atomic_flag *object);
bool atomic_flag_test_and_set_explicit(volatile atomic_flag *object,
      memory_order order);
Description
2

Atomically places the atomic flag pointed to by object in the set state and returns the value corresponding to the immediately preceding state. Memory is affected according to the value of order. These operations are atomic read-modify-write operations (5.1.2.5).

Returns
3

The atomic_flag_test_and_set functions return the value that corresponds to the state of the atomic flag immediately before the effects. The return value true corresponds to the set state and the return value false corresponds to the clear state.

7.17.8.2 The atomic_flag_clear functions

1
#include <stdatomic.h>
void atomic_flag_clear(volatile atomic_flag *object);
void atomic_flag_clear_explicit(volatile atomic_flag *object,
memory_order order);
Description
2

The order argument shall not be memory_order_acquire nor memory_order_acq_rel. Atomically places the atomic flag pointed to by object into the clear state. Memory is affected according to the value of order.

Returns
3

The atomic_flag_clear functions return no value.

7.18 Bit and byte utilities <stdbit.h>

7.18.1 General

1

The header <stdbit.h> defines the following macros, types, and functions, to work with the byte and bit representation of many types, typically integer types. This header makes available the size_t type name (7.21) and any uintN_t, intN_t, uint_leastN_t, or int_leastN_t type names defined by the implementation (7.22).

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_STDBIT_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

The most significant index is the 0-based index counting from the most significant bit, 0, to the least significant bit, w1, where w is the width of the type that is having its most significant index computed.

4

The least significant index is the 0-based index counting from the least significant bit, 0, to the most significant bit, w1, where w is the width of the type that is having its least significant index computed.

5

It is unspecified whether any generic function declared in <stdbit.h> is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage. If a macro definition is suppressed to access an actual function, or a program defines an external identifier with the name of a generic function, the behavior is unspecified.

7.18.2 Endian

1

Two common methods of byte ordering in multi-byte scalar types are little-endian and big-endian. Little-endian is a format for storage or transmission of binary data in which the least significant byte is placed first, with the rest in ascending order. Or, that the least significant byte is stored at the smallest memory address. Big-endian is a format for storage or transmission of binary data in which the most significant byte is placed first, with the rest in descending order. Or, that the most significant byte is stored at the smallest memory address. Other byte orderings are also possible.

2

The macros are:

__STDC_ENDIAN_LITTLE__
which represents a method of byte order storage in which the least significant byte is placed first and the rest are in ascending order, and is an integer constant expression;
__STDC_ENDIAN_BIG__
which represents a method of byte order storage in which the most significant byte is placed first and the rest are in descending order, and is an integer constant expression;
__STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ /* see following description */

which represents the method of byte order storage for the execution environment and is an integer constant expression. __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ describes the endianness of the execution environment with respect to bit-precise integer types, standard integer types, and extended integer types which do not have padding bits.

3

__STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ shall expand to an integer constant expression whose value is equivalent to the value of __STDC_ENDIAN_LITTLE__ if the execution environment is littleendian. Otherwise, __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ shall expand to an integer constant expression whose value is equivalent to the value of __STDC_ENDIAN_BIG__ if the execution environment is big-endian. If the execution environment is neither little-endian nor big-endian, it then has some other implementation-defined byte order and the macro __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ shall expand to an integer constant expression whose value is different from the values of

__STDC_ENDIAN_LITTLE__ and __STDC_ENDIAN_BIG__. The values of the integer constant expressions for __STDC_ENDIAN_LITTLE__ and __STDC_ENDIAN_BIG__ are not equal.

7.18.3 Count Leading Zeros

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_leading_zeros_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_zeros_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_zeros_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_zeros_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_leading_zeros_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_leading_zeros(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the number of consecutive 0 bits in value, starting from the most significant bit.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the appropriate value based on the type of the input value, so long as it is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.4 Count Leading Ones

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_leading_ones_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_ones_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_ones_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_ones_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_leading_ones_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_leading_ones(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the number of consecutive 1 bits in value, starting from the most significant bit.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the appropriate value based on the type of the input value, so long as it is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.5 Count Trailing Zeros

Synopsis

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_trailing_zeros_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_zeros_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_zeros_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_zeros_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_trailing_zeros_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_trailing_zeros(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the number of consecutive 0 bits in value, starting from the least significant bit.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the appropriate value based on the type of the input value, so long as it is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.6 Count Trailing Ones

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_trailing_ones_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_ones_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_ones_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_ones_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_trailing_ones_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_trailing_ones(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the number of consecutive 1 bits in value, starting from the least significant bit.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the appropriate value based on the type of the input value, so long as it is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.7 First Leading Zero

Synopsis

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_zero_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_zero_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_zero_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_zero_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_leading_zero_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_first_leading_zero(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the most significant index of the first 0 bit in value, plus 1. If it is not found, this function returns 0.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the appropriate value based on the type of the input value, so long as it is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.8 First Leading One

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_one_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_one_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_one_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_one_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_leading_one_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_first_leading_one(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the most significant index of the first 1 bit in value, plus 1. If it is not found, this function returns 0.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the appropriate value based on the type of the input value, so long as it is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.9 First Trailing Zero

Synopsis

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_zero_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_zero_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_zero_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_trailing_zero_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_trailing_zero_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_first_trailing_zero(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the least significant index of the first 0 bit in value, plus 1. If it is not found, this function returns 0.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the appropriate value based on the type of the input value, so long as it is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.10 First Trailing One

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_one_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_one_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_one_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_one_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_trailing_one_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_first_trailing_one(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the least significant index of the first 1 bit in value, plus 1. If it is not found, this function returns 0.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the appropriate value based on the type of the input value, so long as it is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.11 Count Zeros

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_count_zeros_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_zeros_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_zeros_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_zeros_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_count_zeros_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_count_zeros(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the total number of 0 bits within the given value.

3

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the previously described result for a given input value so long as the generic_value_type is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.12 Count Ones

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_count_ones_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_ones_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_ones_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_ones_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_count_ones_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_count_ones(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

Returns the total number of 1 bits within the given value.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the previously described result for a given input value so long as the generic_value_type is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.13 Single-bit Check

Synopsis

1
#include <stdbit.h>
bool stdc_has_single_bit_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Returns

2

The stdc_has_single_bit functions return true if and only if there is a single 1 bit in value.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the previously described result for a given input value so long as the generic_value_type is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

7.18.14 Bit Width

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned int stdc_bit_width_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_width_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_width_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_width_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_bit_width_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_bit_width(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Description

2

The stdc_bit_width functions compute the smallest number of bits needed to store value.

Returns

3

The stdc_bit_width functions return 0 if value is 0. Otherwise, they return 1+log2(value).

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the previously described result for a given input value so long as the generic_value_type is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

The generic_return_type type shall be a suitable large unsigned integer type capable of representing the computed result.

7.18.15 Bit Floor

Synopsis

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned char stdc_bit_floor_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned short stdc_bit_floor_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_floor_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned long int stdc_bit_floor_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned long long int
stdc_bit_floor_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_value_type stdc_bit_floor(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Description

2

The stdc_bit_floor functions compute the largest integral power of 2 that is not greater than value.

Returns

3

The stdc_bit_floor functions return 0 if value is 0. Otherwise, they return the largest integral power of 2 that is not greater than value.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the previously described result for a given input value so long as the generic_value_type is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

7.18.16 Bit Ceiling

1
#include <stdbit.h>
unsigned char stdc_bit_ceil_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned short stdc_bit_ceil_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_ceil_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned long int stdc_bit_ceil_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned long long int
stdc_bit_ceil_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_value_type stdc_bit_ceil(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

Description

2

The stdc_bit_ceil functions compute the smallest integral power of 2 that is not less than value. If the computation does not fit in the given return type, they return 0.

Returns

3

The stdc_bit_ceil functions return the smallest integral power of 2 that is not less than value or 0 if such a value is not representable in the return type.

The type-generic function (marked by its generic_value_type argument) returns the previously described result for a given input value so long as the generic_value_type is a:

  • standard unsigned integer type, excluding bool;
  • extended unsigned integer type;
  • or, bit-precise unsigned integer type whose width matches a standard or extended integer type, excluding bool.

7.19 Boolean type and values <stdbool.h>

1

The header <stdbool.h> provides the obsolescent macro __bool_true_false_are_defined which expands to the integer constant 1.

7.20 Checked Integer Arithmetic <stdckdint.h>

1

The header <stdckdint.h> defines several macros for performing checked integer arithmetic.

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_STDCKDINT_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

7.20.1 Checked Integer Operation Type-generic Macros

1
#include <stdckdint.h>
bool ckd_add(type1 *result, type2 a, type3 b);
bool ckd_sub(type1 *result, type2 a, type3 b);
bool ckd_mul(type1 *result, type2 a, type3 b);

Description

2

These type-generic macros perform addition, subtraction, or multiplication of the mathematical values of a and b, storing the result of the operation in *result, (that is, *result is assigned the result of computing a + b, a - b, or a * b). Each operation is performed as if both operands were represented in a signed integer type with infinite range, and the result was then converted from this integer type to type1.

3

Both type2 and type3 shall be any integer type other than "plain" char, bool, a bit-precise integer type, or an enumerated type, and they may or may not be the same. *result shall be a modifiable lvalue of any integer type other than "plain" char, bool, a bit-precise integer type, or an enumerated type.

Recommended practice

4

It is recommended to produce a diagnostic message if type2 or type3 are not suitable integer types, or if *result is not a modifiable lvalue of a suitable integer type.

Returns

5

If these type-generic macros return false, the value assigned to *result correctly represents the mathematical result of the operation. Otherwise, these type-generic macros return true. In this case, the value assigned to *result is the mathematical result of the operation wrapped around to the width of *result.

6

EXAMPLE If a and b are values of type signed int, and result is a signed long, then

ckd_sub(&result, a, b);

indicates if a - b can be expressed as a signed long. If signed long has a greater width than signed int, this is the case and this macro invocation returns false.

7.21 Common definitions <stddef.h>

1

The header <stddef.h> defines the following macros and declares the following types. Some are also defined in other headers, as noted in their respective subclauses.

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_STDDEF_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

The types are

ptrdiff_t
which is the signed integer type of the result of subtracting two pointers;
size_t
which is the unsigned integer type of the result of the sizeof operator;
max_align_t
which is an object type whose alignment is the greatest fundamental alignment;
wchar_t
which is an integer type whose range of values can represent distinct codes for all members of the largest extended character set specified among the supported locales; the null character shall have the code value zero. Each member of the basic character set shall have a code value equal to its value when used as the lone character in an integer character constant if an implementation does not define __STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__; and,
nullptr_t

which is the type of the nullptr predefined constant, see the subsequent description in the following subclauses.

4

The macros are

NULL
which expands to an implementation-defined null pointer constant;
unreachable()
which expands to a void expression that invokes undefined behavior if it is reached during execution; and
offsetof(type, member-designator)
which expands to an integer constant expression that has type size_t, the value of which is the offset in bytes, to the subobject (designated by member-designator), from the beginning of any object of type type. The type and member designator shall be such that given
static type t;

then the expression &(t. member-designator) evaluates to an address constant. If the specified type name contains a comma not between matching parentheses or if the specified member is a bit-field, the behavior is undefined.

Recommended practice

5

The types used for size_t and ptrdiff_t should not have an integer conversion rank greater than that of signed long int unless the implementation supports objects large enough to make this necessary.

7.21.1 The unreachable macro

1
#include <stddef.h>
void unreachable(void);

Description

2

An invocation of the function-like macro unreachable indicates that the particular flow control that leads to the invocation will never be taken; it receives no arguments and expands to a void expression. The program execution shall not reach such an invocation.

Returns

3

If a macro invocation unreachable() is reached during execution, the behavior is undefined.

4

EXAMPLE 1 The following program assumes that each execution is provided with at least one command line argument. The behavior of an execution with no arguments is undefined.

#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int main (int argc, char* argv[static argc + 1]) {
      if (argc <= 2)
            unreachable();
      else
            return printf("%s: we see %s", argv[0], argv[1]);
      return puts("this should never be reached");
}

Here, the static array size expression and the annotation of the control flow with unreachable indicates that the pointed-to parameter array argv will hold at least three elements, regardless of the circumstances. A possible optimization is that the resulting executable never performs the comparison and unconditionally executes a tail call to printf that never returns to the main function. In particular, the entire call and reference to puts can be omitted from the executable. No diagnostic is expected.

Note that because argv and argc’s values are controlled by the implementation and cannot be deterministically accounted for by the program, this program runs a high risk of engaging in completely undefined behavior.

5

EXAMPLE 2 The following code expresses the expectation that the argument to the function will be one of the three enumerator values despite an enumeration type allowing other, non-enumerated values to be passed. Some implementations may diagnose the lack of a return statement after the switch, but use of the unreachable macro signals information to the implementation that this scenario should not be possible, allowing for better diagnostic and optimization properties.

enum Colors { Red, Green, Blue };
int get_channel_index(enum Colors c) {
      switch (c) {
            case Red: return 0;
            case Green: return 1;
            case Blue: return 2;
      }
      unreachable();
}

7.21.2 The nullptr_t type

Synopsis

1
#include <stddef.h>
typedef typeof_unqual(nullptr) nullptr_t;

Description

2

The nullptr_t type is the type of the nullptr predefined constant. It has only a very limited use in contexts where this type is needed to distinguish nullptr from other expression types. It is an unqualified complete scalar type that is different from all pointer or arithmetic types and is neither an atomic or array type and has exactly one value, nullptr. Default or empty initialization of an object of this type is equivalent to an initialization by nullptr.

3

The size and alignment of nullptr_t is the same as for a pointer to character type. An object representation of the value nullptr is the same as the object representation of a null pointer value of type void*. An lvalue conversion of an object of type nullptr_t with such an object representation has the value nullptr; if the object representation is different, the behavior is undefined.303)

4

NOTE Because it is considered to be a scalar type, nullptr_t may appear in many context where (void*)0 would be valid, for example,

  • as the operand of alignas, sizeof or typeof operators,
  • as the operand of an implicit or explicit conversion to a pointer type,
  • as the assignment expression in an assignment or initialization of an object of type nullptr_t,
  • as an argument to a parameter of type nullptr_t or in a variable argument list,
  • as a void expression,
  • as the operand of an implicit or explicit conversion to bool,
  • as an operand of a _Generic primary expression,
  • as an operand of the !, &&, || or conditional operators, or
  • as the controlling expression of an if or iteration statement.

7.22 Integer types <stdint.h>

1

The header <stdint.h> declares sets of integer types having specified widths, and defines corresponding sets of macros.304) It also defines macros that specify limits of integer types corresponding to types defined in other standard headers.

2

Types are defined in the following categories:

  • integer types having certain exact widths;
  • integer types having at least certain specified widths;
  • fastest integer types having at least certain specified widths;
  • integer types wide enough to hold pointers to objects;
  • integer types having greatest width.

(Some of these types may denote the same type.)

3

Corresponding macros specify limits of the declared types and construct suitable constants.

4

For each type described herein that the implementation provides,305) <stdint.h> shall declare that typedef name and define the associated macros. Conversely, for each type described herein that the implementation does not provide, <stdint.h> shall not declare that typedef name nor shall it define the associated macros. An implementation shall provide those types described as "required", but may not provide any of the others (described as "optional"). None of the types shall be defined as a synonym for a bit-precise integer type.

5

The feature test macro __STDC_VERSION_STDINT_H__ expands to the token 202311L.

7.22.1 Integer types

1

When typedef names differing only in the absence or presence of the initial u are defined, they shall denote corresponding signed and unsigned types as described in 6.2.5; an implementation providing one of these corresponding types shall also provide the other.

2

In the following descriptions, the symbol N represents an unsigned decimal integer with no leading zeros (e.g. 8 or 24, but not 04 or 048).

7.22.1.1 Exact-width integer types

1

The typedef name intN_t designates a signed integer type with width N and no padding bits. Thus, int8_t denotes such a signed integer type with a width of exactly 8 bits.

2

The typedef name uintN_t designates an unsigned integer type with width N and no padding bits. Thus, uint24_t denotes such an unsigned integer type with a width of exactly 24 bits.

3

If an implementation provides standard or extended integer types with a particular width and no padding bits, it shall define the corresponding typedef names.

7.22.1.2 Minimum-width integer types

1

The typedef name int_leastN_t designates a signed integer type with a width of at least N, such that no signed integer type with lesser size has at least the specified width. Thus, int_least32_t denotes a signed integer type with a width of at least 32 bits.

2

The typedef name uint_leastN_t designates an unsigned integer type with a width of at least N, such that no unsigned integer type with lesser size has at least the specified width. Thus, uint_least16_t denotes an unsigned integer type with a width of at least 16 bits.

3

If the typedef name intN_t is defined, int_leastN_t designates the same type. If the typedef name uintN_t is defined, uint_leastN_t designates the same type.

4

The following types are required:

:
uint_least8_t
uint_least16_t
uint_least32_t
uint_least64_t

All other types of this form are optional.

7.22.1.3 Fastest minimum-width integer types

1

Each of the following types designates an integer type that is usually fastest306) to operate with among all integer types that have at least the specified width.

2

The typedef name int_fastN_t designates the fastest signed integer type with a width of at least N. The typedef name uint_fastN_t designates the fastest unsigned integer type with a width of at least N.

3

The following types are required:

int_fast8_t int_fast16_t int_fast32_t int_fast64_t

uint_fast8_t uint_fast16_t uint_fast32_t uint_fast64_t

All other types of this form are optional.

7.22.1.4 Integer types capable of holding object pointers

1

The following type designates a signed integer type, other than a bit-precise integer type, with the property that any valid pointer to void can be converted to this type, then converted back to pointer to void, and the result will compare equal to the original pointer:

intptr_t
The following type designates an unsigned integer type, other than a bit-precise integer type, with the property that any valid pointer to void can be converted to this type, then converted back to pointer to void, and the result will compare equal to the original pointer:
uintptr_t

These types are optional.

7.22.1.5 Greatest-width integer types

1

The following type designates a signed integer type, other than a bit-precise integer type, capable of representing any value of any signed integer type with the possible exceptions of signed bit-precise integer types and of signed extended integer types that are wider than long long and that are referred by the type definition for an exact width integer type:

intmax_t
The following type designates the unsigned integer type that corresponds to intmax_t:307)
uintmax_t

These types are required.

7.22.2 Widths of specified-width integer types

1

The following object-like macros specify the width of the types declared in <stdint.h>. Each macro name corresponds to a similar type name in 7.22.1.

2

Each instance of any defined macro shall be replaced by a constant expression suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives. Its implementation-defined value shall be equal to or greater than the value given in the subsequent subclauses, except where stated to be exactly the given value. An implementation shall define only the macros corresponding to those typedef names it actually provides.308)

7.22.2.1 Width of exact-width integer types

1

INTN_WIDTH exactly N UINTN_WIDTH exactly N

7.22.2.2 Width of minimum-width integer types

1

INT_LEASTN_WIDTH exactly UINT_LEASTN_WIDTH UINT_LEASTN_WIDTH N

7.22.2.3 Width of fastest minimum-width integer types

1

INT_FASTN_WIDTH exactly UINT_FASTN_WIDTH UINT_FASTN_WIDTH N

7.22.2.4 Width of integer types capable of holding object pointers

1

INTPTR_WIDTH exactly UINTPTR_WIDTH UINTPTR_WIDTH 16

7.22.2.5 Width of greatest-width integer types

1

INTMAX_WIDTH exactly UINTMAX_WIDTH UINTMAX_WIDTH 64

7.22.3 Width of other integer types

1

The following object-like macros specify the width of integer types corresponding to types defined in other standard headers.

2

Each instance of these macros shall be replaced by a constant expression suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives. Its implementation-defined value shall be equal to or greater than the corresponding value given in the following subclauses. An implementation shall define only the macros corresponding to those typedef names it actually provides.309)

7.22.3.1 Width of ptrdiff_t

1
PTRDIFF_WIDTH
16

7.22.3.2 Width of sig_atomic_t

1
SIG_ATOMIC_WIDTH
8

7.22.3.3 Width of size_t

1
SIZE_WIDTH
16

7.22.3.4 Width of wchar_t

1
WCHAR_WIDTH
8

7.22.3.5 Width of wint_t

1
WINT_WIDTH
16

7.22.4 Macros for integer constants

1

The following function-like macros expand to integer constants suitable for initializing objects that have integer types corresponding to types defined in <stdint.h>. Each macro name corresponds to a similar type name in 7.22.1.2 or 7.22.1.5.

2

The argument in any instance of these macros shall be an unsuffixed integer constant (as defined in 6.4.4.2) with a value that does not exceed the limits for the corresponding type.

3

Each invocation of one of these macros shall expand to an integer constant expression. The type of the expression shall have the same type as would an expression of the corresponding type converted according to the integer promotions. The value of the expression shall be that of the argument. If the value is in the range of the type intmax_t (for a signed type) or the type uintmax_t (for an unsigned type), see 7.22.1.5, the expression is suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives.

7.22.4.1 Macros for minimum-width integer constants

1

The macro INTN_C(value) expands to an integer constant expression corresponding to the type int_leastN_t. The macro UINTN_C(value) expands to an integer constant expression corresponding to the type uint_leastN_t. For example, if uint_least64_t is a name for the type unsigned long long int, then UINT64_C(0x123) can expand to the integer constant 0x123ULL.

7.22.4.2 Macros for greatest-width integer constants

1

The following macro expands to an integer constant expression having the value specified by its argument and the type intmax_t:

INTMAX_C(value)
The following macro expands to an integer constant expression having the value specified by its argument and the type uintmax_t:
UINTMAX_C(value)

7.22.5 Maximal and minimal values of integer types

1

For all integer types for which there is a macro with suffix _WIDTH holding the width, maximum macros with suffix _MAX and, for all signed types, minimum macros with suffix _MIN are defined as by 5.2.5.3. If it is unspecified if a type is signed or unsigned and the implementation has it as an unsigned type, a minimum macro with extension _MIN and value 0 of the corresponding type, converted according to the integer promotions, is defined.

7.23 Input/output <stdio.h>

7.23.1 Introduction

1

The header <stdio.h> defines several macros, and declares three types and many functions for performing input and output.

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_STDIO_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

The types declared are size_t (described in 7.21);

FILE
which is an object type capable of recording all the information needed to control a stream, including its file position indicator, a pointer to its associated buffer (if any), an error indicator that records whether a read/write error has occurred, and an end-of-file indicator that records whether the end of the file has been reached; and
fpos_t

which is a complete object type other than an array type capable of recording all the information needed to specify uniquely every position within a file.

4

The macros are NULL (described in 7.21);

_IOFBF
_IOLBF
_IONBF
which expand to integer constant expressions with distinct values, suitable for use as the third argument to the setvbuf function;
BUFSIZ
which expands to an integer constant expression that is the size of the buffer used by the setbuf function;
EOF
which expands to an integer constant expression, with type int and a negative value, that is returned by several functions to indicate end-of-file, that is, no more input from a stream;
FOPEN_MAX
which expands to an integer constant expression that is the minimum number of files that the implementation guarantees can be open simultaneously;
FILENAME_MAX

which expands to an integer constant expression that is the size needed for an array of char large enough to hold the longest file name string that the implementation guarantees can be opened or, if the implementation imposes no practical limit on the length of file name strings, the recommended size of an array intended to hold a file name string;310)

_PRINTF_NAN_LEN_MAX
:
[-]NAN(n-char-sequence)
L_tmpnam
SEEK_CUR
SEEK_END
SEEK_SET
TMP_MAX
stderr
stdin
stdout

which are expressions of type "pointer to FILE" that point to the FILE objects associated, respectively, with the standard error, input, and output streams.

5

The header <wchar.h> declares functions for wide character input and output. The wide character input/output functions described in that subclause provide operations analogous to most of those described here, except that the fundamental units internal to the program are wide characters. The external representation (in the file) is a sequence of generalized multibyte characters, as described further in 7.23.3.

6

The input/output functions are given the following collective terms:

  • The wide character input functions — those functions described in 7.31 that perform input into wide characters and wide strings: fgetwc, fgetws, getwc, getwchar, fwscanf, wscanf, vfwscanf, and vwscanf.
  • The wide character output functions — those functions described in 7.31 that perform output from wide characters and wide strings: fputwc, fputws, putwc, putwchar, fwprintf, wprintf, vfwprintf, and vwprintf.
  • The wide character input/output functions — the union of the ungetwc function, the wide character input functions, and the wide character output functions.
  • The byte input/output functions — those functions described in this subclause that perform input/output: fgetc, fgets, fprintf, fputc, fputs, fread, fscanf, fwrite, getc, getchar, printf, putc, putchar, puts, scanf, ungetc, vfprintf, vfscanf, vprintf, and vscanf.
Forward references: files (7.23.3), the fseek function (7.23.9.2), streams (7.23.2), the tmpnam function (7.23.4.4), <wchar.h> (7.31).

7.23.2 Streams

1

Input and output, whether to or from physical devices such as terminals and tape drives, or whether to or from files supported on structured storage devices, are mapped into logical data streams, whose properties are more uniform than their various inputs and outputs. Two forms of mapping are supported, for text streams and for binary streams.312)

2

A text stream is an ordered sequence of characters composed into lines, each line consisting of zero or more characters plus a terminating new-line character. Whether the last line requires a terminating new-line character is implementation-defined. Characters may have to be added, altered, or deleted on input and output to conform to differing conventions for representing text in the host environment. Thus, there is not required to be a one-to-one correspondence between the characters in a stream and those in the external representation. Data read in from a text stream will necessarily compare equal to the data that were earlier written out to that stream only if:

  • the data consist only of printing characters and the control characters horizontal tab and new-line;
  • no new-line character is immediately preceded by space characters;
  • and, the last character is a new-line character.

Whether space characters that are written out immediately before a new-line character appear when read in is implementation-defined.

3

A binary stream is an ordered sequence of characters that can transparently record internal data. Data read in from a binary stream shall compare equal to the data that were earlier written out to that stream, under the same implementation. Such a stream may, however, have an implementationdefined number of null characters appended to the end of the stream.

4

Each stream has an orientation. After a stream is associated with an external file, but before any operations are performed on it, the stream is unoriented. Once a wide character input/output function has been applied to an unoriented stream, the stream becomes a wide-oriented stream. Similarly, once a byte input/output function has been applied to an unoriented stream, the stream becomes a byte-oriented stream. Only a call to the freopen function or the fwide function can otherwise alter the orientation of a stream. (A successful call to freopen removes any orientation.)313)

5

Byte input/output functions shall not be applied to a wide-oriented stream and wide character input/output functions shall not be applied to a byte-oriented stream. The remaining stream operations do not affect, and are not affected by, a stream’s orientation, except for the following additional restrictions:

  • Binary wide-oriented streams have the file-positioning restrictions ascribed to both text and binary streams.
  • For wide-oriented streams, after a successful call to a file-positioning function that leaves the file position indicator prior to the end-of-file, a wide character output function can overwrite a partial multibyte character; any file contents beyond the byte(s) written may henceforth not consist of valid multibyte characters.
6

Each wide-oriented stream has an associated mbstate_t object that stores the current parse state of the stream. A successful call to fgetpos stores a representation of the value of this mbstate_t object as part of the value of the fpos_t object. A later successful call to fsetpos using the same stored fpos_t value restores the value of the associated mbstate_t object as well as the position within the controlled stream.

7

Each stream has an associated lock that is used to prevent data races when multiple threads of execution access a stream, and to restrict the interleaving of stream operations performed by multiple

threads. Only one thread may hold this lock at a time. The lock is reentrant: a single thread may hold the lock multiple times at a given time.

8

All functions that read, write, position, or query the position of a stream lock the stream before accessing it. They release the lock associated with the stream when the access is complete.

Environmental limits

9

An implementation shall support text files with lines containing at least 254 characters, including the terminating new-line character. The value of the macro BUFSIZ shall be at least 256.

Forward references: the freopen function (7.23.5.4), the fwide function (7.31.3.5), mbstate_t (7.31.1), the fgetpos function (7.23.9.1), the fsetpos function (7.23.9.3).

7.23.3 Files

1

A stream is associated with an external file (which may be a physical device) by opening a file, which may involve creating a new file. Creating an existing file causes its former contents to be discarded, if necessary. If a file can support positioning requests (such as a disk file, as opposed to a terminal), then a file position indicator associated with the stream is positioned at the start (character number zero) of the file, unless the file is opened with append mode in which case it is implementationdefined whether the file position indicator is initially positioned at the beginning or the end of the file. The file position indicator is maintained by subsequent reads, writes, and positioning requests, to facilitate an orderly progression through the file.

2

Binary files are not truncated, except as defined in 7.23.5.3. Whether a write on a text stream causes the associated file to be truncated beyond that point is implementation-defined.

3

When a stream is unbuffered, characters are intended to appear from the source or at the destination as soon as possible. Otherwise characters may be accumulated and transmitted to or from the host environment as a block. When a stream is fully buffered, characters are intended to be transmitted to or from the host environment as a block when a buffer is filled. When a stream is line buffered, characters are intended to be transmitted to or from the host environment as a block when a new-line character is encountered. Furthermore, characters are intended to be transmitted as a block to the host environment when a buffer is filled, when input is requested on an unbuffered stream, or when input is requested on a line buffered stream that requires the transmission of characters from the host environment. Support for these characteristics is implementation-defined, and may be affected via the setbuf and setvbuf functions.

4

A file may be disassociated from a controlling stream by closing the file. Output streams are flushed (any unwritten buffer contents are transmitted to the host environment) before the stream is disassociated from the file. The lifetime of a FILE object ends when the associated file is closed (including the standard text streams). Whether a file of zero length (on which no characters have been written by an output stream) actually exists is implementation-defined.

5

The file may be subsequently reopened, by the same or another program execution, and its contents reclaimed or modified (if it can be repositioned at its start). If the main function returns to its original caller, or if the exit function is called, all open files are closed (hence all output streams are flushed) before program termination. Other paths to program termination, such as calling the abort function, are not required to close all files properly.

6

The address of the FILE object used to control a stream may be significant; a copy of a FILE object is not required to serve in place of the original.

7

At program startup, three text streams are predefined and are already opened — standard input (for reading conventional input), standard output (for writing conventional output), and standard error (for writing diagnostic output). As initially opened, the standard error stream is not fully buffered; the standard input and standard output streams are fully buffered if and only if the stream can be determined not to refer to an interactive device.

8

Functions that open additional (nontemporary) files require a file name, which is a string. The rules for composing valid file names are implementation-defined. Whether the same file can be simultaneously open multiple times is also implementation-defined.

9

Although both text and binary wide-oriented streams are conceptually sequences of wide characters, the external file associated with a wide-oriented stream is a sequence of multibyte characters, generalized as follows:

  • Multibyte encodings within files may contain embedded null bytes (unlike multibyte encodings valid for use internal to the program).
  • A file is not required to begin nor end in the initial shift state.314)
10

Moreover, the encodings used for multibyte characters may differ among files. Both the nature and choice of such encodings are implementation-defined.

11

The wide character input functions read multibyte characters from the stream and convert them to wide characters as if they were read by successive calls to the fgetwc function. Each conversion occurs as if by a call to the mbrtowc function, with the conversion state described by the stream’s own mbstate_t object. The byte input functions read characters from the stream as if by successive calls to the fgetc function.

12

The wide character output functions convert wide characters to multibyte characters and write them to the stream as if they were written by successive calls to the fputwc function. Each conversion occurs as if by a call to the wcrtomb function, with the conversion state described by the stream’s own mbstate_t object. The byte output functions write characters to the stream as if by successive calls to the fputc function.

13

In some cases, some of the byte input/output functions also perform conversions between multibyte characters and wide characters. These conversions also occur as if by calls to the mbrtowc and wcrtomb functions.

14

An encoding error occurs if the character sequence presented to the underlying mbrtowc function does not form a valid (generalized) multibyte character, or if the code value passed to the underlying wcrtomb does not correspond to a valid (generalized) multibyte character. The wide character input/output functions and the byte input/output functions store the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno if and only if an encoding error occurs.

Environmental limits

15

The value of FOPEN_MAX shall be at least eight, including the three standard text streams.

Forward references: the exit function (7.24.4.4), the fgetc function (7.23.7.1), the fopen function (7.23.5.3), the fputc function (7.23.7.3), the setbuf function (7.23.5.5), the setvbuf function (7.23.5.6), the fgetwc function (7.31.3.1), the fputwc function (7.31.3.3), conversion state (7.31.6), the mbrtowc function (7.31.6.3.2), the wcrtomb function (7.31.6.3.3).

7.23.4 Operations on files

7.23.4.1 The remove function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int remove(const char *filename);
Description
2

The remove function causes the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename to be no longer accessible by that name. A subsequent attempt to open that file using that name will fail, unless it is created anew. If the file is open, the behavior of the remove function is implementation-defined.

Returns
3

The remove function returns zero if the operation succeeds, nonzero if it fails.

7.23.4.2 The rename function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int rename(const char *old, const char *new);
Description
2

The rename function causes the file whose name is the string pointed to by old to be henceforth known by the name given by the string pointed to by new. The file named old is no longer accessible by that name. If a file named by the string pointed to by new exists prior to the call to the rename function, the behavior is implementation-defined.

Returns
3

The rename function returns zero if the operation succeeds, nonzero if it fails,315) in which case if the file existed previously it is still known by its original name.

7.23.4.3 The tmpfile function

1
#include <stdio.h>
FILE *tmpfile(void);
Description
2

The tmpfile function creates a temporary binary file that is different from any other existing file and that will automatically be removed when it is closed or at program termination. If the program terminates abnormally, whether an open temporary file is removed is implementation-defined. The file is opened for update with "wb+" mode.

Recommended practice
3

It should be possible to open at least TMP_MAX temporary files during the lifetime of the program (this limit may be shared with tmpnam) and there should be no limit on the number simultaneously open other than this limit and any limit on the number of open files (FOPEN_MAX).

Returns
4

The tmpfile function returns a pointer to the stream of the file that it created. If the file cannot be created, the tmpfile function returns a null pointer.

Forward references: the fopen function (7.23.5.3).

7.23.4.4 The tmpnam function

1
#include <stdio.h>
char *tmpnam(char *s);
Description
2

The tmpnam function generates a string that is a valid file name and that is not the same as the name of an existing file.316) The function is potentially capable of generating at least TMP_MAX different strings, but any or all of them may already be in use by existing files and thus not be suitable return values.

3

The tmpnam function generates a different string each time it is called.

4

Calls to the tmpnam function with a null pointer argument may introduce data races with each other. The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the tmpnam function.

Returns

5

If no suitable string can be generated, the tmpnam function returns a null pointer. Otherwise, if the argument is a null pointer, the tmpnam function leaves its result in an internal static object and returns a pointer to that object (subsequent calls to the tmpnam function may modify the same object). If the argument is not a null pointer, it is assumed to point to an array of at least L_tmpnam chars; the tmpnam function writes its result in that array and returns the argument as its value.

Environmental limits

6

The value of the macro TMP_MAX shall be at least 25.

7.23.5 File access functions

7.23.5.1 The fclose function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fclose(FILE *stream);
Description
2

A successful call to the fclose function causes the stream pointed to by stream to be flushed and the associated file to be closed. Any unwritten buffered data for the stream are delivered to the host environment to be written to the file; any unread buffered data are discarded. Whether the call succeeds or not, the stream is disassociated from the file and any buffer set by the setbuf or setvbuf function is disassociated from the stream (and deallocated if it was automatically allocated).

Returns
3

The fclose function returns zero if the stream was successfully closed, or EOF if any errors were detected.

7.23.5.2 The fflush function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fflush(FILE *stream);
Description
2

If stream points to an output stream or an update stream in which the most recent operation was not input, the fflush function causes any unwritten data for that stream to be delivered to the host environment to be written to the file; otherwise, the behavior is undefined.

3

If stream is a null pointer, the fflush function performs this flushing action on all streams for which the behavior is defined previously in this subclause.

Returns
4

The fflush function sets the error indicator for the stream and returns EOF if a write error occurs, otherwise it returns zero.

Forward references: the fopen function (7.23.5.3).

7.23.5.3 The fopen function

1
#include <stdio.h>
FILE *fopen(const char * restrict filename, const char * restrict mode);

Description

2

The fopen function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename, and associates a stream with it.

3

The argument mode points to a string. If the string is one of the following, the file is open in the indicated mode. Otherwise, the behavior is undefined.317)

r open text file for reading

w truncate to zero length or create text file for writing

wx create text file for writing

a append; open or create text file for writing at end-of-file

rb open binary file for reading

wb truncate to zero length or create binary file for writing

wbx create binary file for writing

ab append; open or create binary file for writing at end-of-file

r+ open text file for update (reading and writing)

w+ truncate to zero length or create text file for update

w+x create text file for update

a+ append; open or create text file for update, writing at end-of-file

r+b or rb+ open binary file for update (reading and writing)

w+b or wb+ truncate to zero length or create binary file for update

w+bx or wb+x create binary file for update

a+b or ab+ append; open or create binary file for update, writing at end-of-file

4

Opening a file with read mode (’r’ as the first character in the mode argument) fails if the file does not exist or cannot be read.

5

Opening a file with exclusive mode (’x’ as the last character in the mode argument) fails if the file already exists or cannot be created. The check for the existence of the file and the creation of the file if it does not exist is atomic with respect to other threads and other concurrent program executions. If the implementation is not capable of performing the check for the existence of the file and the creation of the file atomically, it shall fail instead of performing a non-atomic check and creation.

6

Opening a file with append mode (’a’ as the first character in the mode argument) causes all subsequent writes to the file to be forced to the then current end-of-file at the point of buffer flush or actual write, regardless of intervening calls to the fseek, fsetpos, or rewind functions. Incrementing the current end-of-file by the amount of data written is atomic with respect to other threads writing to the same file provided the file was also opened in append mode. If the implementation is not capable of incrementing the current end-of-file atomically, it shall fail instead of performing non-atomic end-of-file writes. In some implementations, opening a binary file with append mode (’b’ as the second or third character in the previously described list of mode argument values) may initially position the file position indicator for the stream beyond the last data written, because of null character padding.

7

When a file is opened with update mode (’+’ as the second or third character in the previously described list of mode argument values), both input and output may be performed on the associated stream. However, output shall not be directly followed by input without an intervening call to the fflush function or to a file positioning function (fseek, fsetpos, or rewind), and input shall not be directly followed by output without an intervening call to a file positioning function, unless the input operation encounters end-of-file. Opening (or creating) a text file with update mode may instead open (or create) a binary stream in some implementations.

8

When opened, a stream is fully buffered if and only if it can be determined not to refer to an interactive device. The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream are cleared.

Returns

9

The fopen function returns a pointer to the object controlling the stream. If the open operation fails, fopen returns a null pointer.

Forward references: file positioning functions (7.23.9).

7.23.5.4 The freopen function

1
#include <stdio.h>
FILE *freopen(const char * restrict filename, const char * restrict mode,
FILE * restrict stream);
Description
2

The freopen function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename and associates the stream pointed to by stream with it. The mode argument is used just as in the fopen function.318)

3

If filename is a null pointer, the freopen function attempts to change the mode of the stream to that specified by mode, as if the name of the file currently associated with the stream had been used. It is implementation-defined which changes of mode are permitted (if any), and under what circumstances.

4

The freopen function first attempts to close any file that is associated with the specified stream. Failure to close the file is ignored. The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream are cleared.

Returns
5

The freopen function returns a null pointer if the open operation fails. Otherwise, freopen returns the value of stream.

7.23.5.5 The setbuf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
void setbuf(FILE * restrict stream, char * restrict buf);
Description
2

Except that it returns no value, the setbuf function is equivalent to the setvbuf function invoked with the values _IOFBF for mode and BUFSIZ for size, or (if buf is a null pointer), with the value _IONBF for mode.

Returns
3

The setbuf function returns no value.

Forward references: the setvbuf function (7.23.5.6).

7.23.5.6 The setvbuf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int setvbuf(FILE * restrict stream, char * restrict buf, int mode, size_t size);
Description
2

The setvbuf function may be used only after the stream pointed to by stream has been associated with an open file and before any other operation (other than an unsuccessful call to setvbuf) is performed on the stream. The argument mode determines how stream will be buffered, as follows:

If buf is not a null pointer, the array it points to may be used instead of a buffer allocated by the setvbuf function319) and the argument size specifies the size of the array; otherwise, size may determine the size of a buffer allocated by the setvbuf function. The members of the array at any time have unspecified values.

Returns

3

The setvbuf function returns zero on success, or nonzero if an invalid value is given for mode or if the request cannot be honored.

7.23.6 Formatted input/output functions

1

The formatted input/output functions shall behave as if there is a sequence point after the actions associated with each specifier.320)

7.23.6.1 The fprintf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The fprintf function writes output to the stream pointed to by stream, under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are converted for output. If there are insufficient arguments for the format, the behavior is undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored. The fprintf function returns when the end of the format string is encountered.

3

The format shall be a multibyte character sequence, beginning and ending in its initial shift state. The format is composed of zero or more directives: ordinary multibyte characters (not %), which are copied unchanged to the output stream; and conversion specifications, each of which results in fetching zero or more subsequent arguments, converting them, if applicable, according to the corresponding conversion specifier, and then writing the result to the output stream.

4

Each conversion specification is introduced by the character %. After the %, the following appear in sequence:

  • Zero or more flags (in any order) that modify the meaning of the conversion specification.
  • An optional minimum field width. If the converted value has fewer characters than the field width, it is padded with spaces (by default) on the left (or right, if the left adjustment flag, described later, has been given) to the field width. The field width takes the form of an asterisk

* (described later) or a nonnegative decimal integer.321)

  • An optional precision that gives the minimum number of digits to appear for the b, B, d, i,

o, u, x, and X conversions, the number of digits to appear after the decimal-point character for a, A, e, E, f, and F conversions, the maximum number of significant digits for the g and G conversions, or the maximum number of bytes to be written for s conversions. The precision takes the form of a period (.) followed either by an asterisk * (described later) or by an optional nonnegative decimal integer; if only the period is specified, the precision is taken as zero. If a precision appears with any other conversion specifier, the behavior is undefined.

5

As noted previously, a field width, or precision, or both, may be indicated by an asterisk. In this case, an int argument supplies the field width or precision. The arguments specifying field width, or precision, or both, shall appear (in that order) before the argument (if any) to be converted. A negative field width argument is taken as a - flag followed by a positive field width. A negative precision argument is taken as if the precision were omitted.

6

The flag characters and their meanings are:

- The result of the conversion is left-justified within the field. (It is right-justified if this flag is not specified.)

+ The result of a signed conversion always begins with a plus or minus sign. (It begins with a sign only when a value with a negative sign is converted if this flag is not specified.)322)

space If the first character of a signed conversion is not a sign, or if a signed conversion results in no characters, a space is prefixed to the result. If the space and + flags both appear, the space flag is ignored.

# The result is converted to an "alternative form". For o conversion, it increases the precision, if and only if necessary, to force the first digit of the result to be a zero (if the value and precision are both 0, a single 0 is printed). For b conversion, a nonzero result has 0b prefixed to it. For the optional B conversion as described later in this subclause, a nonzero result has 0B prefixed to it. For x (or X) conversion, a nonzero result has 0x (or 0X) prefixed to it. For a, A, e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, the result of converting a floating-point number always contains a decimal-point character, even if no digits follow it. (Normally, a decimal-point character appears in the result of these conversions only if a digit follows it.) For g and G conversions, trailing zeros are not removed from the result. For other conversions, the behavior is undefined.

0 For b, B, d, i, o, u, x, X, a, A, e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, leading zeros (following any indication of sign or base) are used to pad to the field width rather than performing space padding, except when converting an infinity or NaN. If the 0 and - flags both appear, the 0 flag is ignored. For b, B, d, i, o, u, x, and X conversions, if a precision is specified, the 0 flag is ignored. For other conversions, the behavior is undefined.

7

The length modifiers and their meanings are:

hh Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a signed char or unsigned char argument (the argument will have been promoted according to the integer promotions, but its value shall be converted to signed char or unsigned char before printing); or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a signed char argument.

h Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a short int or unsigned short int argument (the argument will have been promoted according to the integer promotions, but its value shall be converted to short int or unsigned short int before printing); or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a short int argument.

l (ell) Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a long int or unsigned long int argument; that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a long int argument; that a following c conversion specifier applies to a wint_t argument; that a following s conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a wchar_t argument; or has no effect on a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier.

:
long int or unsigned long long int argument; or that a following n conversion
specifier applies to a pointer to a long long int argument.

If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified previously, the behavior is undefined.

8

The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:

d,i The int argument is converted to signed decimal in the style [-]dddd. The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in fewer digits, it is expanded with leading zeros. The default precision is 1. The result of converting a zero value with a precision of zero is no characters.

b,B,o,u,x,X The unsigned int argument is converted to unsigned binary (b or B), unsigned octal (o), unsigned decimal (u), or unsigned hexadecimal notation (x or X) in the style dddd; the letters abcdef are used for x conversion and the letters ABCDEF for X conversion. The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in fewer digits, it is expanded with leading zeros. The default precision

:
A double argument representing an infinity is converted in one of the styles [-]inf or
[-]infinity — which style is implementation-defined. A double argument representing a
NaN is converted in one of the styles [-]nan or [-]nan(n-char-sequence) — which style, and
the meaning of any n-char-sequence, is implementation-defined. The F conversion specifier
produces INF, INFINITY, or NAN instead of inf, infinity, or nan, respectively.323)
if P>X4, the conversion is with style f (or F) and precision P(X+1).
otherwise, the conversion is with style e (or E) and precision P1.

a,A A double argument representing a floating-point number is converted in the style [-]0xh.hhhhp±d, where there is one hexadecimal digit (which is nonzero if the argument is a normalized floating-point number and is otherwise unspecified) before the decimal-point character 324) and the number of hexadecimal digits after it is equal to the precision; if the

If an l length modifier is present, the argument shall be a pointer to storage of wchar_t type. Wide characters from the storage are converted to multibyte characters (each as if by a call to the wcrtomb function, with the conversion state described by an mbstate_t object initialized to zero before the first wide character is converted) up to and including

% A % character is written. No argument is converted. The complete conversion specification shall be %%.

9

If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.328) fprintf shall behave as if it uses va_arg with a type argument naming the type resulting from applying the default argument promotions to the type corresponding to the conversion specification and then converting the result of the va_arg expansion to the type corresponding to the conversion specification.329)

10

In no case does a nonexistent or small field width cause truncation of a field; if the result of a conversion is wider than the field width, the field is expanded to contain the conversion result.

11

For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value is correctly rounded to a hexadecimal floating number with the given precision.

Recommended practice

12

For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not exactly representable in the given precision, the result should be one of the two adjacent numbers in hexadecimal floating style with the given precision, with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.

13

For e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, if the number of significant decimal digits is at most the maximum value M of the T_DECIMAL_DIG macros (defined in <float.h>), then the result should be correctly rounded.330) If the number of significant decimal digits is more than M but the source value is exactly representable with M digits, then the result should be an exact representation with trailing zeros. Otherwise, the source value is bounded by two adjacent decimal strings L < U, both having M significant digits; the value of the resultant decimal string D should satisfy LDU, with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.

14

The uppercase B format specifier is made optional by the previous description, because it used to be available for extensions in previous versions of this document. Implementations that did not use an uppercase B as their own extension before are encouraged to implement it as previously described.

Returns

15

The fprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred or if the implementation does not support a specified width length modifier.

16

Environmental limits The number of characters that can be produced by any single conversion shall be at least 4095.

17

EXAMPLE 1 To print a date and time in the form "Sunday, July 3, 10:02" followed by π to five decimal places:

#include <math.h>
#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
char *weekday, *month;    // pointers to strings
int day, hour, min;
fprintf(stdout, "%s, %s %d, %.2d:%.2d\n",
      weekday, month, day, hour, min);
fprintf(stdout, "pi = %.5f\n", 4 * atan(1.0));
18

EXAMPLE 2 In this example, multibyte characters do not have a state-dependent encoding, and the members of the extended character set that consist of more than one byte each consist of exactly two bytes, the first of which is denoted here by a □and the second by an uppercase letter.

19

Given the following wide string with length seven,

static wchar_t wstr[] = L"□X□Yabc□Z□W";
the seven calls
fprintf(stdout, "|1234567890123|\n");
fprintf(stdout, "|%13ls|\n", wstr);
fprintf(stdout, "|%-13.9ls|\n", wstr);
fprintf(stdout, "|%13.10ls|\n", wstr);
fprintf(stdout, "|%13.11ls|\n", wstr);
fprintf(stdout, "|%13.15ls|\n", &wstr[2]);
fprintf(stdout, "|%13lc|\n", (wint_t) wstr[5]);
will print the following seven lines:
|1234567890123|
|  XYabcZW|
|□XYabcZ    |
|    XYabcZ|
|  XYabcZW|
|      abcZW|
|           Z|
20

EXAMPLE 3 Following are representations of _Decimal64 arguments as triples (s,c,q) and the corresponding character sequences fprintf produces with "%Da":

_Decimal32 x = 6543.00DF;        // (+1, 654300, -2)
fprintf(stdout, "%Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.6Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.5Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.4Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.3Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.2Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.1Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.0Ha\n", x);
_Decimal32 x = 9543210e87DF;    // (+1, 9543210, 87)
_Decimal32 y = 9500000e90DF;    // (+1, 9500000, 90)
fprintf(stdout, "%.6Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.5Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.4Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.3Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.2Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.1Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.1Ha\n", y);

assuming default rounding, results in:

_Decimal32 x = 9512345e90DF;     // (+1, 9512345, 90)
_Decimal32 y = 9512345e86DF;     // (+1, 9512345, 86)
fprintf(stdout, "%.3Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.2Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.1Ha\n", x);
fprintf(stdout, "%.2Ha\n", y);

9.51e+96 9.5e+96 1e+97 9.5e+92

Forward references: conversion state (7.31.6), the wcrtomb function (7.31.6.3.3).

7.23.6.2 The fscanf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The fscanf function reads input from the stream pointed to by stream, under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment, using subsequent arguments as pointers to the objects to receive the converted input. If there are insufficient arguments for the format, the behavior is undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored.

3

The format shall be a multibyte character sequence, beginning and ending in its initial shift state. The format is composed of zero or more directives: one or more white-space characters, an ordinary multibyte character (neither % nor a white-space character), or a conversion specification. Each conversion specification is introduced by the character %. After the %, the following appear in sequence:

  • An optional assignment-suppressing character *.
  • An optional decimal integer greater than zero that specifies the maximum field width (in characters).
  • An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the receiving object.
  • A conversion specifier character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied.
4

The fscanf function executes each directive of the format in turn. When all directives have been executed, or if a directive fails (as detailed later in this subclause), the function returns. Failures are described as input failures (due to the occurrence of an encoding error or the unavailability of input characters), or matching failures (due to inappropriate input).

5

A directive composed of white-space character(s) is executed by reading input up to the first nonwhite-space character (which remains unread), or until no more characters can be read. The directive never fails.

6

A directive that is an ordinary multibyte character is executed by reading the next characters of the stream. If any of those characters differ from the ones composing the directive, the directive fails and the differing and subsequent characters remain unread. Similarly, if end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevents a character from being read, the directive fails.

7

A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of matching input sequences, as described further in this subclause for each specifier. A conversion specification is executed in the following steps:

8

Input white-space characters are skipped, unless the specification includes a [, c, or n specifier.331)

9

An input item is read from the stream, unless the specification includes an n specifier. An input item is defined as the longest sequence of input characters which does not exceed any specified field width and which is, or is a prefix of, a matching input sequence.332) The first character, if any, after the input item remains unread. If the length of the input item is zero, the execution of the directive fails; this condition is a matching failure unless end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevented input from the stream, in which case it is an input failure.

10

Except in the case of a % specifier, the input item (or, in the case of a %n directive, the count of input characters) is converted to a type appropriate to the conversion specifier. If the input item is not a matching sequence, the execution of the directive fails: this condition is a matching failure. Unless assignment suppression was indicated by a *, the result of the conversion is placed in the object pointed to by the first argument following the format argument that has not already received a conversion result. If this object does not have an appropriate type, or if the result of the conversion cannot be represented in the object, the behavior is undefined.

11

The length modifiers and their meanings are:

hh Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to signed char or unsigned char.

h Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to short int or unsigned short int.

l (ell) Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to long int or unsigned long int; that a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to double; or that a following c, s, or [ conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to wchar_t.

ll (ell-ell) Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to long long int or unsigned long long int.

j Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to intmax_t or uintmax_t.

z Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to size_t or the corresponding signed integer type.

t Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to ptrdiff_t or the corresponding unsigned integer type.

wN Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument which is a pointer to an integer with a specific width where N is a positive decimal integer with no leading zeros. All minimum-width integer types (7.22.1.2) and exact-width integer types (7.22.1.1) defined in the header <stdint.h> shall be supported. Other supported values of N are implementation-defined.

If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified previously, the behavior is undefined.

12

In the following, the type of the corresponding argument for a conversion specifier shall be a pointer to a type determined by the length modifiers, if any, or specified by the conversion specifier. The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:

d Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtol function with the value 10 for the base argument. Unless a length modifier is specified, the corresponding argument shall be a pointer to int.

b Matches an optionally signed binary integer, whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtoul function with the value 2 for the base argument. Unless a length modifier is specified, the corresponding argument shall be a pointer to unsigned int.

i Matches an optionally signed integer, whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtol function with the value 0 for the base argument. Unless a length modifier is specified, the corresponding argument shall be a pointer to int.

o Matches an optionally signed octal integer, whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtoul function with the value 8 for the base argument. Unless a length modifier is specified, the corresponding argument shall be a pointer to unsigned int.

u Matches an optionally signed decimal integer, whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtoul function with the value 10 for the base argument. Unless a length modifier is specified, the corresponding argument shall be a pointer to unsigned int.

x Matches an optionally signed hexadecimal integer, whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtoul function with the value 16 for the base argument. Unless a length modifier is specified, the corresponding argument shall be a pointer to unsigned int.

a,e,f,g Matches an optionally signed floating-point number, infinity, or NaN, whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtod function. Unless a length modifier is specified, the corresponding argument shall be a pointer to float.

c Matches a sequence of characters of exactly the number specified by the field width (1 if no field width is present in the directive).

p Matches an implementation-defined set of sequences, which should be the same as the set of sequences that may be produced by the %p conversion of the fprintf function. The corresponding argument shall be a pointer to a pointer of void. The input item is converted to a pointer value in an implementation-defined manner. If the input item is a value converted earlier during the same program execution, the pointer that results shall compare equal to that value; otherwise the behavior of the %p conversion is undefined.

% Matches a single % character; no conversion or assignment occurs. The complete conversion specification shall be %%.

13

If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.334)

14

The conversion specifiers A, E, F, G, and X are also valid and behave the same as, respectively, a, e, f, g, and x.

15

Trailing white-space characters (including new-line characters) are left unread unless matched by a directive. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly determinable other than via the %n directive.

Returns

16

The fscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure or if the implementation does not support a specific width length modifier.

17

EXAMPLE 1 The call:

#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
int n, i; float x; char name[50];
n = fscanf(stdin, "%d%f%s", &i, &x, name);
with the input line:
25 54.32E-1 thompson

will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and to name the sequence thompson\0.

18

EXAMPLE 2 The call:

#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
int i; float x; char name[50];
fscanf(stdin, "%2d%f%*d %[0123456789]", &i, &x, name);
with input:
56789 0123 56a72

will assign to i the value 56 and to x the value 789.0, will skip 0123, and will assign to name the sequence 56\0. The next character read from the input stream will be a.

19

EXAMPLE 3 To accept repeatedly from stdin a quantity, a unit of measure, and an item name:

#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
int count; float quant; char units[21], item[21];
do {
      count = fscanf(stdin, "%f%20s of %20s", &quant, units, item);
      fscanf(stdin,"%*[^\n]");
} while (!feof(stdin) && !ferror(stdin));
20

If the stdin stream contains the following lines:

2 quarts of oil
-12.8degrees Celsius
lots of luck
10.0LBS     of
dirt
100ergs of energy
the execution of the preceding example will be analogous to the following assignments:
quant = 2; strcpy(units, "quarts"); strcpy(item, "oil");
count = 3;
quant = -12.8; strcpy(units, "degrees");
count = 2; // "C" fails to match "o"
count = 0; // "l" fails to match "%f"
quant = 10.0; strcpy(units, "LBS"); strcpy(item, "dirt");
count = 3;
count = 0; // "100e" fails to match "%f"
count = EOF;
21

EXAMPLE 4 In:

#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
int d1, d2, n1, n2, i;
i = sscanf("123", "%d%n%n%d", &d1, &n1, &n2, &d2);

the value 123 is assigned to d1 and the value 3 to n1. Because %n can never get an input failure, the value of 3 is also assigned to n2. The value of d2 is not affected. The value 1 is assigned to i.

22

EXAMPLE 5 The call:

#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
int n, i;
n = sscanf("foo  %bar  42", "foo%%bar%d", &i);

will assign to n the value 1 and to i the value 42 because input white-space characters are skipped for both the % and d conversion specifiers.

23

EXAMPLE 6 In these examples, multibyte characters do have a state-dependent encoding, and the members of the extended character set that consist of more than one byte each consist of exactly two bytes, the first of which is denoted here by a □and the second by an uppercase letter, but are only recognized as such when in the alternate shift state. The shift sequences are denoted by ↑and ↓, in which the first causes entry into the alternate shift state.

24

After the call:

#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
char str[50];
fscanf(stdin, "a%s", str);
with the input line:
a↑□X□Y↓ bc

str will contain ↑□XY\0 assuming that none of the bytes of the shift sequences (or of the multibyte characters, in the more general case) appears to be a single-byte white-space character.

25

In contrast, after the call:

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stddef.h>
/* ... */
wchar_t wstr[50];
fscanf(stdin, "a%ls", wstr);

with the same input line, wstr will contain the two wide characters that correspond to □X and □Y and a terminating null wide character.

26

However, the call:

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stddef.h>
/* ... */
wchar_t wstr[50];
fscanf(stdin, "a↑□X↓%ls", wstr);

with the same input line will return zero due to a matching failure against the ↓sequence in the format string.

27

Assuming that the first byte of the multibyte character □X is the same as the first byte of the multibyte character □Y, after the call:

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stddef.h>
/* ... */
wchar_t wstr[50];
fscanf(stdin, "a↑□Y↓%ls", wstr);

with the same input line, zero will again be returned, but stdin will be left with a partially consumed multibyte character.

Forward references: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (7.24.1.5), the strtol, strtoll , strtoul, and strtoull functions (7.24.1.7), conversion state (7.31.6), the wcrtomb function (7.31.6.3.3).

7.23.6.3 The printf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int printf(const char * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The printf function is equivalent to fprintf with the argument stdout interposed before the arguments to printf.

Returns
3

The printf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.

7.23.6.4 The scanf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int scanf(const char * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The scanf function is equivalent to fscanf with the argument stdin interposed before the arguments to scanf.

Returns

3

The scanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the scanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.23.6.5 The snprintf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int snprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The snprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, except that the output is written into an array (specified by argument s) rather than to a stream. If n is zero, nothing is written, and s may be a null pointer. Otherwise, output characters beyond the n-1st are discarded rather than being written to the array, and a null character is written at the end of the characters actually written into the array. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The snprintf function returns the number of characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is both nonnegative and less than n.

7.23.6.6 The sprintf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int sprintf(char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The sprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, except that the output is written into an array (specified by the argument s) rather than to a stream. A null character is written at the end of the characters written; it is not counted as part of the returned value. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The sprintf function returns the number of characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred.

7.23.6.7 The sscanf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int sscanf(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The sscanf function is equivalent to fscanf, except that input is obtained from a string (specified by the argument s) rather than from a stream. Reaching the end of the string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fscanf function. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The sscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the sscanf function returns the number of input

items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.23.6.8 The vfprintf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vfprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
Description
2

The vfprintf function is equivalent to fprintf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg invocations). The vfprintf function does not invoke the va_end macro.335)

Returns
3

The vfprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.

4

EXAMPLE The following shows the use of the vfprintf function in a general error-reporting routine.

#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
void error(char *function_name, char *format, ...)
{
      va_list args;
      va_start(args, format);
      // print out name of function causing error
      fprintf(stderr, "ERROR in %s: ", function_name);
      // print out remainder of message
      vfprintf(stderr, format, args);
      va_end(args);
}

7.23.6.9 The vfscanf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vfscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
Description
2

The vfscanf function is equivalent to fscanf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfscanf function does not invoke the va_end macro.335)

Returns
3

The vfscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vfscanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.23.6.10 The vprintf function

Synopsis

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vprintf(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);

Description

2

The vprintf function is equivalent to printf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vprintf function does not invoke the va_end macro.335)

Returns

3

The vprintf function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.

7.23.6.11 The vscanf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vscanf(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
Description
2

The vscanf function is equivalent to scanf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vscanf function does not invoke the va_end macro.335)

Returns
3

The vscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vscanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.23.6.12 The vsnprintf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vsnprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format, va_list
arg);
Description
2

The vsnprintf function is equivalent to snprintf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsnprintf function does not invoke the va_end macro.335) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The vsnprintf function returns the number of characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is both nonnegative and less than n.

7.23.6.13 The vsprintf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vsprintf(char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);

Description

2

The vsprintf function is equivalent to sprintf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsprintf function does not invoke the va_end macro.335) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns

3

The vsprintf function returns the number of characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred.

7.23.6.14 The vsscanf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vsscanf(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
Description
2

The vsscanf function is equivalent to sscanf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsscanf function does not invoke the va_end macro.335)

Returns
3

The vsscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vsscanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.23.7 Character input/output functions

7.23.7.1 The fgetc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fgetc(FILE *stream);
Description
2

If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by stream is not set and a next character is present, the fgetc function obtains that character as an unsigned char converted to an int and advances the associated file position indicator for the stream (if defined).

Returns
3

If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and the fgetc function returns EOF. Otherwise, the fgetc function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by stream. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and the fgetc function returns EOF.336)

7.23.7.2 The fgets function

1
#include <stdio.h>
char *fgets(char * restrict s, int n, FILE * restrict stream);

Description

2

The fgets function reads at most one less than the number of characters specified by n from the stream pointed to by stream into the array pointed to by s. No additional characters are read after a new-line character (which is retained) or after end-of-file. A null character is written immediately after the last character read into the array. If n is negative or zero, the behavior is undefined.

Returns

3

The fgets function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a null pointer is returned. If a read error occurs during the operation, the members of the array have unspecified values and a null pointer is returned.

7.23.7.3 The fputc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fputc(int c, FILE *stream);
Description
2

The fputc function writes the character specified by c (converted to an unsigned char) to the output stream pointed to by stream, at the position indicated by the associated file position indicator for the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator appropriately. If the file cannot support positioning requests, or if the stream was opened with append mode, the character is appended to the output stream.

Returns
3

The fputc function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and fputc returns EOF.

7.23.7.4 The fputs function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fputs(const char * restrict s, FILE * restrict stream);
Description
2

The fputs function writes the string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by stream. The terminating null character is not written.

Returns
3

The fputs function returns EOF if a write error occurs; otherwise it returns a nonnegative value.

7.23.7.5 The getc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int getc(FILE *stream);
Description
2

The getc function is equivalent to fgetc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so the argument should never be an expression with side effects.

Returns
3

The getc function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by stream. If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and getc returns EOF. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and getc returns EOF.

7.23.7.6 The getchar function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int getchar(void);
Description
2

The getchar function is equivalent to getc with the argument stdin.

Returns
3

The getchar function returns the next character from the input stream pointed to by stdin. If the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and getchar returns EOF. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and getchar returns EOF.

7.23.7.7 The putc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int putc(int c, FILE *stream);
Description
2

The putc function is equivalent to fputc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so that argument should never be an expression with side effects.

Returns
3

The putc function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and putc returns EOF.

7.23.7.8 The putchar function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int putchar(int c);
Description
2

The putchar function is equivalent to putc with the second argument stdout.

Returns
3

The putchar function returns the character written. If a write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and putchar returns EOF.

7.23.7.9 The puts function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int puts(const char *s);
Description
2

The puts function writes the string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by stdout, and appends a new-line character to the output. The terminating null character is not written.

Returns
3

The puts function returns EOF if a write error occurs; otherwise it returns a nonnegative value.

7.23.7.10 The ungetc function

Synopsis

1
#include <stdio.h>
int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);

Description

2

The ungetc function pushes the character specified by c (converted to an unsigned char) back onto the input stream pointed to by stream. Pushed-back characters will be returned by subsequent reads on that stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A successful intervening call (with the stream pointed to by stream) to a file positioning function (fseek, fsetpos, or rewind) discards any pushed-back characters for the stream. The external storage corresponding to the stream is unchanged.

3

One character of pushback is guaranteed. If the ungetc function is called too many times on the same stream without an intervening read or file positioning operation on that stream, the operation may fail.

4

If the value of c equals that of the macro EOF, the operation fails and the input stream is unchanged.

5

A successful call to the ungetc function clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream. The value of the file position indicator for the stream after reading or discarding all pushed-back characters shall be the same as it was before the characters were pushed back.337) For a text stream, the value of its file position indicator after a successful call to the ungetc function is unspecified until all pushed-back characters are read or discarded. For a binary stream, its file position indicator is decremented by each successful call to the ungetc function; if its value was zero before a call, it has an indeterminate representation after the call.338)

Returns

6

The ungetc function returns the character pushed back after conversion, or EOF if the operation fails.

Forward references: file positioning functions (7.23.9).

7.23.8 Direct input/output functions

7.23.8.1 The fread function

1
#include <stdio.h>
size_t fread(void * restrict ptr, size_t size, size_t nmemb,
FILE * restrict stream);
Description
2

The fread function reads, into the array pointed to by ptr, up to nmemb elements whose size is specified by size, from the stream pointed to by stream. For each object, size calls are made to the fgetc function and the results stored, in the order read, in an array of unsigned char exactly overlaying the object. The file position indicator for the stream (if defined) is advanced by the number of characters successfully read. If an error occurs, the resulting representation of the file position indicator for the stream is indeterminate. If a partial element is read, its representation is indeterminate.

Returns
3

The fread function returns the number of elements successfully read, which may be less than nmemb if a read error or end-of-file is encountered. If size or nmemb is zero, fread returns zero and the contents of the array and the state of the stream remain unchanged.

7.23.8.2 The fwrite function

Synopsis

1
#include <stdio.h>
size_t fwrite(const void * restrict ptr, size_t size, size_t nmemb,
FILE * restrict stream);

Description

2

The fwrite function writes, from the array pointed to by ptr, up to nmemb elements whose size is specified by size, to the stream pointed to by stream. For each object, size calls are made to the fputc function, taking the values (in order) from an array of unsigned char exactly overlaying the object. The file position indicator for the stream (if defined) is advanced by the number of characters successfully written. If an error occurs, the resulting representation of the file position indicator for the stream is indeterminate.

Returns

3

The fwrite function returns the number of elements successfully written, which will be less than nmemb only if a write error is encountered. If size or nmemb is zero, fwrite returns zero and the state of the stream remains unchanged.

7.23.9 File positioning functions

7.23.9.1 The fgetpos function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fgetpos(FILE * restrict stream, fpos_t * restrict pos);
Description
2

The fgetpos function stores the current values of the parse state (if any) and file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream in the object pointed to by pos. The values stored contain unspecified information usable by the fsetpos function for repositioning the stream to its position at the time of the call to the fgetpos function.

Returns
3

If successful, the fgetpos function returns zero; on failure, the fgetpos function returns nonzero and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.

Forward references: the fsetpos function (7.23.9.3).

7.23.9.2 The fseek function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fseek(FILE *stream, long int offset, int whence);
Description
2

The fseek function sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream. If a read or write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and fseek fails.

3

For a binary stream, the new position, measured in characters from the beginning of the file, is obtained by adding offset to the position specified by whence. The specified position is the beginning of the file if whence is SEEK_SET, the current value of the file position indicator if SEEK_CUR, or end-of-file if SEEK_END. A binary stream may or may not meaningfully support fseek calls with a whence value of SEEK_END.

4

For a text stream, either offset shall be zero, or offset shall be a value returned by an earlier successful call to the ftell function on a stream associated with the same file and whence shall be SEEK_SET.

5

After determining the new position, a successful call to the fseek function undoes any effects of the

ungetc function on the stream, clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream, and then establishes the new position. After a successful fseek call, the next operation on an update stream may be either input or output.

Returns

6

The fseek function returns nonzero only for a request that cannot be satisfied.

Forward references: the ftell function (7.23.9.4).

7.23.9.3 The fsetpos function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int fsetpos(FILE *stream, const fpos_t *pos);
Description
2

The fsetpos function sets the mbstate_t object (if any) and file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream according to the value of the object pointed to by pos, which shall be a value obtained from an earlier successful call to the fgetpos function on a stream associated with the same file. If a read or write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and fsetpos fails.

3

A successful call to the fsetpos function undoes any effects of the ungetc function on the stream, clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream, and then establishes the new parse state and position. After a successful fsetpos call, the next operation on an update stream may be either input or output.

Returns
4

If successful, the fsetpos function returns zero; on failure, the fsetpos function returns nonzero and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.

7.23.9.4 The ftell function

1
#include <stdio.h>
long int ftell(FILE *stream);
Description
2

The ftell function obtains the current value of the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream. For a binary stream, the value is the number of characters from the beginning of the file. For a text stream, its file position indicator contains unspecified information, usable by the fseek function for returning the file position indicator for the stream to its position at the time of the ftell call; the difference between two such return values is not necessarily a meaningful measure of the number of characters written or read.

Returns
3

If successful, the ftell function returns the current value of the file position indicator for the stream. On failure, the ftell function returns -1L and stores an implementation-defined positive value in errno.

7.23.9.5 The rewind function

1
#include <stdio.h>
void rewind(FILE *stream);
Description
2

The rewind function sets the file position indicator for the stream pointed to by stream to the beginning of the file. It is equivalent to

(void)fseek(stream, 0L, SEEK_SET)

except that the error indicator for the stream is also cleared.

Returns

3

The rewind function returns no value.

7.23.10 Error-handling functions

7.23.10.1 The clearerr function

1
#include <stdio.h>
void clearerr(FILE *stream);
Description
2

The clearerr function clears the end-of-file and error indicators for the stream pointed to by stream.

Returns
3

The clearerr function returns no value.

7.23.10.2 The feof function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int feof(FILE *stream);
Description
2

The feof function tests the end-of-file indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.

Returns
3

The feof function returns nonzero if and only if the end-of-file indicator is set for stream.

7.23.10.3 The ferror function

1
#include <stdio.h>
int ferror(FILE *stream);
Description
2

The ferror function tests the error indicator for the stream pointed to by stream.

Returns
3

The ferror function returns nonzero if and only if the error indicator is set for stream.

7.23.10.4 The perror function

1
#include <stdio.h>
void perror(const char *s);
Description
2

The perror function maps the error number in the integer expression errno to an error message. It writes a sequence of characters to the standard error stream thus: first (if s is not a null pointer and the character pointed to by s is not the null character), the string pointed to by s followed by a colon (:) and a space; then an appropriate error message string followed by a new-line character. The contents of the error message strings are the same as those returned by the strerror function with argument errno.

Returns
3

The perror function returns no value.

Forward references: the strerror function (7.26.6.3).

7.24 General utilities <stdlib.h>

1

The header <stdlib.h> declares several types and functions of general utility, and defines several macros.339)

2

The feature test macro __STDC_VERSION_STDLIB_H__ expands to the token 202311L.

3

The types declared are size_t and wchar_t (both described in 7.21), once_flag (described in 7.28),

div_t
which is a structure type that is the type of the value returned by the div function,
ldiv_t
which is a structure type that is the type of the value returned by the ldiv function, and
lldiv_t

which is a structure type that is the type of the value returned by the lldiv function.

4

The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.21); ONCE_FLAG_INIT (described in 7.28);

EXIT_FAILURE
and
EXIT_SUCCESS
which expand to integer constant expressions that can be used as the argument to the exit function to return unsuccessful or successful termination status, respectively, to the host environment;
RAND_MAX
which expands to an integer constant expression that is the maximum value returned by the rand function; and
MB_CUR_MAX

which expands to a positive integer expression with type size_t that is the maximum number of bytes in a multibyte character for the extended character set specified by the current locale (category LC_CTYPE), which is never greater than MB_LEN_MAX.

5

The function

#include <stdlib.h>
void call_once(once_flag *flag, void (*func)(void));

is described in 7.28.2.

7.24.1 Numeric conversion functions

1

The functions atof, atoi, atol, and atoll are not required to affect the value of the integer expression errno on an error. If the value of the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.

7.24.1.1 The atof function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
double atof(const char *nptr);

Description

2

The atof function converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to double representation. Except for the behavior on error, it is equivalent to

strtod(nptr, nullptr)

Returns

3

The atof function returns the converted value.

Forward references: the strtod, strtof, and strtold functions (7.24.1.5).

7.24.1.2 The atoi, atol, and atoll functions

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int atoi(const char *nptr);
long int atol(const char *nptr);
long long int atoll(const char *nptr);
Description
2

The atoi, atol, and atoll functions convert the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to int, long int, and long long int representation, respectively. Except for the behavior on error, they are equivalent to

atoi:  (int)strtol(nptr, nullptr, 10)
atol:  strtol(nptr, nullptr, 10)
atoll: strtoll(nptr, nullptr, 10)
Returns
3

The atoi, atol, and atoll functions return the converted value.

Forward references: the strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions (7.24.1.7).

7.24.1.3 The strfromd, strfromf, and strfroml functions

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int strfromd(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    double fp);
int strfromf(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    float fp);
int strfroml(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    long double fp);
Description
2

The strfromd, strfromf, and strfroml functions are equivalent to snprintf(s, n, format, fp) (7.23.6.5), except that the default argument promotions are not applied and the format string shall only contain the character %, an optional precision that does not contain an asterisk *, and one of the conversion specifiers a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G, which applies to the type (double, float, or long double) indicated by the function suffix (rather than by a length modifier). Use of these functions with any other format string results in undefined behavior.

Returns
3

The strfromd, strfromf, and strfroml functions return the number of characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is both nonnegative and less than n.

7.24.1.4 The strfromdN functions

1
#include <stdlib.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int strfromd32(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    _Decimal32 fp);
int strfromd64(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    _Decimal64 fp);
int strfromd128(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    _Decimal128 fp);
#endif
Description
2

The strfromdN functions are equivalent to snprintf(s, n, format, fp) (7.23.6.5), except the format string contains only the character %, an optional precision that does not contain an asterisk *, and one of the conversion specifiers a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G, which applies to the type (_Decimal32, _Decimal64, or _Decimal128) indicated by the function suffix (rather than by a length modifier). Use of these functions with any other format string results in undefined behavior.

Returns
3

The strfromdN functions return the number of characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is both nonnegative and less than n.

7.24.1.5 The strtod, strtof, and strtold functions

1
#include <stdlib.h>
double strtod(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
float strtof(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
long double strtold(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
Description
2

The strtod, strtof, and strtold functions convert the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to double, float, and long double representation, respectively. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space characters, a subject sequence resembling a floating constant or representing an infinity or NaN; and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including the terminating null character of the input string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to a floating-point number, and return the result.

3

The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign, then one of the following:

  • a nonempty sequence of decimal digits optionally containing a decimal-point character, then an optional exponent part as defined in 6.4.4.3, excluding any digit separators (6.4.4.2);
  • a 0x or 0X, then a nonempty sequence of hexadecimal digits optionally containing a decimalpoint character, then an optional binary exponent part as defined in 6.4.4.3, excluding any digit separators;
  • INF or INFINITY, ignoring case
  • NAN or NAN(n-char-sequenceopt), ignoring case in the NAN part, where: n-char-sequence: digit nondigit n-char-sequence digit
:
n-char-sequence nondigit

The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string, starting with the first non-white-space character, that is of the expected form. The subject sequence contains no characters if the input string is not of the expected form.

4

If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point number, the sequence of characters starting with the first digit or the decimal-point character (whichever occurs first) is interpreted as a floating constant according to the rules of 6.4.4.3, except that the decimal-point character is used in place of a period, and that if neither an exponent part nor a decimal-point character appears in a decimal floating-point number, or if a binary exponent part does not appear in a hexadecimal floating-point number, an exponent part of the appropriate type with value zero is assumed to follow the last digit in the string. If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign, the sequence is interpreted as arithmetically negated.340)

5

A character sequence INF or INFINITY is interpreted as an infinity, if representable in the return type, else like a floating constant that is too large for the range of the return type. A character sequence NAN or NAN(n-char-sequenceopt) is interpreted as a quiet NaN, if supported in the return type, else like a subject sequence part that does not have the expected form; the meaning of the n-char sequence is implementation-defined.341) A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

6

If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded.

7

In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be accepted.

8

If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

Recommended practice

9

If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form, FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, and the result is not exactly representable, the result should be one of the two numbers in the appropriate internal format that are adjacent to the hexadecimal floating source value, with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.

10

If the subject sequence has the decimal form and at most M significant digits, where M is the maximum value of the T_DECIMAL_DIG macros (defined in <float.h>), the result should be correctly rounded. If the subject sequence D has the decimal form and more than M significant digits, consider the two bounding, adjacent decimal strings L and U, both having M significant digits, such that the values of L, D, and U satisfy LDU. The result should be one of the (equal or adjacent) values that would be obtained by correctly rounding L and U according to the current rounding direction, with the extra stipulation that the error with respect to D should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.342)

Returns

11

The functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, positive or unsigned zero is returned.

12

If the correct value overflows and default rounding is in effect (7.12.1), plus or minus HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, or HUGE_VALL is returned (according to the return type and sign of the value); if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, the integer expression errno acquires the value of ERANGE; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the "overflow" floating-point exception is raised.

13

If the result underflows (7.12.1), the functions return a value whose magnitude is no greater than the smallest normalized positive number in the return type; if the integer expression math_errhandling

& MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, whether errno acquires the value ERANGE is implementation-defined; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, whether the "underflow" floating-point exception is raised is implementation-defined.

7.24.1.6 The strtodN functions

1
#include <stdlib.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 strtod32(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
_Decimal64 strtod64(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
_Decimal128 strtod128(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
#endif
Description
2

The strtodN functions convert the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to decimal floating type representation. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space characters; a subject sequence resembling a floating constant or representing an infinity or NaN; and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including the terminating null character of the input string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to a floating-point number, and return the result.

3

The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign, then one of the following:

  • a nonempty sequence of decimal digits optionally containing a decimal-point character, then an optional exponent part as defined in 6.4.4.3, excluding any digit separators (6.4.4.2)
  • a 0x or 0X, then a nonempty sequence of hexadecimal digits optionally containing a decimalpoint character, then an optional binary exponent part as defined in 6.4.4.3, excluding any digit separators (6.4.4.2)
  • INF or INFINITY, ignoring case
  • NAN or NAN(d-char-sequenceopt), ignoring case in the NAN part, where:
d-char-sequence:
digit
nondigit
d-char-sequence digit
d-char-sequence nondigit

The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string, starting with the first non-white-space character, that is of the expected form. The subject sequence contains no characters if the input string is not of the expected form.

4

If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point number, the sequence of characters starting with the first digit or the decimal-point character (whichever occurs first) is interpreted as a floating constant according to the rules of 6.4.4.3, except that the decimal-point character is used in place of a period, and that if neither an exponent part nor a decimal-point character appears in a decimal floating-point number, or if a binary exponent part does not appear in a hexadecimal floating-point number, an exponent part of the appropriate type with value zero is assumed to follow the last digit in the string. If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign, the sequence is interpreted as arithmetically negated before rounding and the sign s is set to 1, else s is set to 1.

5

If the subject sequence has the expected form for a decimal floating-point number, the value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded and the coefficient c and the quantum exponent q are determined by the rules in 6.4.4.3 for a decimal floating constant of decimal type.

6

If the subject sequence has the expected form for a hexadecimal floating-point number, the value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded provided the subject sequence has at most M significant hexadecimal digits, where M(P1)/4+1 is implementation-defined, and P is the maximum precision of the supported radix-2 floating types and binary non-arithmetic interchange formats.343) If all subject sequences of hexadecimal form are correctly rounded, M may be regarded as infinite. If the subject sequence has more than M significant hexadecimal digits, the implementation may first round to M significant hexadecimal digits according to the applicable decimal rounding direction mode, signaling exceptions as though converting from a wider format, then correctly round the result of the shortened hexadecimal input to the result type. The preferred quantum exponent for the result is 0 if the hexadecimal number is exactly represented in the decimal type; the preferred quantum exponent for the result is the least possible if the hexadecimal number is not exactly represented in the decimal type.

7

A character sequence INF or INFINITY is interpreted as an infinity. A character sequence NAN or NAN(d-char-sequenceopt), is interpreted as a quiet NaN; the meaning of the d-char sequence is implementation-defined.344) A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

8

In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be accepted.

9

If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

Returns

10

The strtodN functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, the value of the triple (+1,0,0) is returned. If the correct value overflows:

  • the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno if the integer expression math_errhandling

& MATH_ERRNO is nonzero;

  • the "overflow" floating-point exception is raised if the integer expression math_errhandling

& MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero.

If the result underflows (7.12.1), whether errno acquires the value ERANGE if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero is implementation-defined; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, whether the "underflow" floating-point exception is raised is implementation-defined.

11

EXAMPLE Following are subject sequences of the decimal form and the resulting triples (s,c,q) produced by strtod64. Note that for _Decimal64, the precision (maximum coefficient length) is 16 and the quantum exponent range is 398q369.

"0" (+1,0,0) "0.00" (+1,0,2) "123" (+1,123,0) "-123" (1,123,0) "1.23E3" (+1,123,1) "1.23E+3" (+1,123,1) "12.3E+7" (+1,123,6) "12.0" (+1,120,1) "12.3" (+1,123,1) "0.00123" (+1,123,5) "-1.23E-12" (1,123,14)

"1234.5E-4" (+1,12345,5) "-0" (1,0,0) "-0.00" (1,0,2) "0E+7" (+1,0,7) "-0E-7" (1,0,7) "12345678901234567890" (+1,1234567890123457,4) or (+1,1234567890123456,4) depending on rounding mode "1234E-400" (+1,12,398) or (+1,13,398) depending on rounding mode "1234E-402" (+1,0,398) or (+1,1,398) depending on rounding mode "1000." (+1,1000,0) ".0001" (+1,1,4) "1000.e0" (+1,1000,0) ".0001e0" (+1,1,4) "1000.0" (+1,10000,1) "0.0001" (+1,1,4) "1000.00" (+1,100000,2) "00.0001" (+1,1,4) "001000." (+1,1000,0) "001000.0" (+1,10000,1) "001000.00" (+1,100000,2) "00.00" (+1,0,2) "00." (+1,0,0) ".00" (+1,0,2) "00.00e-5" (+1,0,7) "00.e-5" (+1,0,5) ".00e-5" (+1,0,7) "0x1.8p+4" (+1,24,0) "infinite" infinity, and a pointer to "inite" is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided endptr is not a null pointer

7.24.1.7 The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions

1
#include <stdlib.h>
long int strtol(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr, int base);
long long int strtoll(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr,
    int base);
unsigned long int strtoul(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr,
    int base);
unsigned long long int strtoull(const char * restrict nptr,
    char ** restrict endptr, int base);
Description
2

The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions convert the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to long int, long long int, unsigned long int, and unsigned long long

int representation, respectively. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space characters, a subject sequence resembling an integer represented in some radix determined by the value of base, and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters, including the terminating null character of the input string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to an integer, and return the result.

3

If the value of base is zero, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of an integer constant as described in 6.4.4.2, optionally preceded by a plus or minus sign, but not including an integer suffix or any optional digit separators. If the value of base is between 2 and 36 (inclusive), the expected form of the subject sequence is a sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix specified by base, optionally preceded by a plus or minus sign, but not including an integer suffix or any optional digit separators. The letters from a (or A) through z (or Z) are ascribed the values 10 through 35; only letters and digits whose ascribed values are less than that of base are permitted. If the value of base is 2, the characters 0b or 0B may optionally precede the sequence of letters and

digits, following the sign if present. If the value of base is 16, the characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits, following the sign if present.

4

The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string, starting with the first non-white-space character, that is of the expected form. The subject sequence contains no characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of white-space characters, or if the first non-white-space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit.

5

If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero, the sequence of characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant according to the rules of 6.4.4.2. If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is between 2 and 36, it is used as the base for conversion, ascribing to each letter its value as previously given. If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign, the resulting value is the negative of the converted value; for functions whose return type is an unsigned integer type this action is performed in the return type. A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

6

In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be accepted.

7

If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

Returns

8

The strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable values, LONG_MIN, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MIN, LLONG_MAX, ULONG_MAX, or ULLONG_MAX is returned (according to the return type and sign of the value, if any), and the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno.

7.24.2 Pseudo-random sequence generation functions

7.24.2.1 The rand function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int rand(void);
Description
2

The rand function computes a sequence of pseudo-random integers in the range 0 to RAND_MAX inclusive.

3

The rand function is not required to avoid data races with other calls to pseudo-random sequence generation functions. The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the rand function.

4

NOTE There are no guarantees as to the quality of the random sequence produced and some implementations are known to produce sequences with distressingly non-random low-order bits. Applications with particular requirements should use a generator that is known to be sufficient for their needs.

Returns
5

The rand function returns a pseudo-random integer.

Environmental limits
6

The value of the RAND_MAX macro shall be at least 32767.

7.24.2.2 The srand function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void srand(unsigned int seed);

Description

2

The srand function uses the argument as a seed for a new sequence of pseudo-random numbers to be returned by subsequent calls to rand. If srand is then called with the same seed value, the sequence of pseudo-random numbers shall be repeated. If rand is called before any calls to srand have been made, the same sequence shall be generated as when srand is first called with a seed value of 1.

3

The srand function is not required to avoid data races with other calls to pseudo-random sequence generation functions. The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the srand function.

Returns

4

The srand function returns no value.

5

EXAMPLE The following functions define a portable implementation of rand and srand.

static unsigned long int next = 1;
int rand(void)   //  RAND_MAX assumed to be 32767
{
      next = next * 1103515245 + 12345;
      return (unsigned int)(next/65536) % 32768;
}
void srand(unsigned int seed)
{
      next = seed;
}

7.24.3 Memory management functions

1

The order and contiguity of storage allocated by successive calls to the aligned_alloc, calloc, malloc, and realloc functions is unspecified. The pointer returned if the allocation succeeds is suitably aligned so that it may be assigned to a pointer to any type of object with a fundamental alignment requirement and size less than or equal to the size requested. It may then be used to access such an object or an array of such objects in the space allocated (until the space is explicitly deallocated). The lifetime of an allocated object extends from the allocation until the deallocation. Each such allocation shall yield a pointer to an object disjoint from any other object. The pointer returned points to the start (lowest byte address) of the allocated space. If the space cannot be allocated, a null pointer is returned. If the size of the space requested is zero, the behavior is implementation-defined: either a null pointer is returned to indicate an error, or the behavior is as if the size were some nonzero value, except that the returned pointer shall not be used to access an object.

2

For purposes of determining the existence of a data race, memory allocation functions behave as though they accessed only memory locations accessible through their arguments and not other static duration storage. These functions may, however, visibly modify the storage that they allocate or deallocate. Calls to these functions that allocate or deallocate a particular region of memory shall occur in a single total order, and each such deallocation call shall synchronize with the next allocation (if any) in this order.

7.24.3.1 The aligned_alloc function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void *aligned_alloc(size_t alignment, size_t size);

Description

2

The aligned_alloc function allocates space for an object whose alignment is specified by alignment,345) whose size is specified by size, and whose representation is indeterminate. If the value of alignment is not a valid alignment supported by the implementation the function shall fail by returning a null pointer.

Returns

3

The aligned_alloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated space.

7.24.3.2 The calloc function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void *calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
Description
2

The calloc function allocates space for an array of nmemb objects, each of whose size is size. The space is initialized to all bits zero.346)

Returns
3

The calloc function returns either a pointer to the allocated space or a null pointer if the space cannot be allocated or if the product nmemb * size would wraparound size_t.

7.24.3.3 The free function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void free(void *ptr);
Description
2

The free function causes the space pointed to by ptr to be deallocated, that is, made available for further allocation. If ptr is a null pointer, no action occurs. Otherwise, if the argument does not match a pointer earlier returned by a memory management function, or if the space has been deallocated by a call to free or realloc, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The free function returns no value.

7.24.3.4 The free_sized function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void free_sized(void *ptr, size_t size);
Description
2

If ptr is a null pointer or the result obtained from a call to malloc, realloc, or calloc, where size size is equal to the requested allocation size, this function is equivalent to free(ptr). Otherwise, the behavior is undefined.

3

NOTE 1 A conforming implementation may ignore size and call free.

4

NOTE 2 The result of an aligned_alloc call may not be passed to free_sized.

Recommended practice
5

Implementations may provide extensions to query the usable size of an allocation, or to determine the usable size of the allocation that would result if a request for some other size were to succeed.

Such implementations should allow passing the resulting usable size as the size parameter, and provide functionality equivalent to free in such cases.

Returns

6

The free_sized function returns no value.

7.24.3.5 The free_aligned_sized function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void free_aligned_sized(void *ptr, size_t alignment, size_t size);
Description
2

If ptr is a null pointer or the result obtained from a call to aligned_alloc, where alignment is equal to the requested allocation alignment and size is equal to the requested allocation size, this function is equivalent to free(ptr). Otherwise, the behavior is undefined.

3

NOTE 1 A conforming implementation may ignore alignment and size and call free.

4

NOTE 2 The result of an malloc, calloc, or realloc call may not be passed to free_aligned_sized.

Recommended practice
5

Implementations may provide extensions to query the usable size of an allocation, or to determine the usable size of the allocation that would result if a request for some other size were to succeed. Such implementations should allow passing the resulting usable size as the size parameter, and provide functionality equivalent to free in such cases.

Returns
6

The free_aligned_sized function returns no value.

7.24.3.6 The malloc function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void *malloc(size_t size);
Description
2

The malloc function allocates space for an object whose size is specified by size and whose representation is indeterminate.

Returns
3

The malloc function returns either a null pointer or a pointer to the allocated space.

7.24.3.7 The realloc function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void *realloc(void *ptr, size_t size);
Description
2

The realloc function deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a pointer to a new object that has the size specified by size. The contents of the new object shall be the same as that of the old object prior to deallocation, up to the lesser of the new and old sizes. Any bytes in the new object beyond the size of the old object have unspecified values.

3

If ptr is a null pointer, the realloc function behaves like the malloc function for the specified size. Otherwise, if ptr does not match a pointer earlier returned by a memory management function, or if the space has been deallocated by a call to the free or realloc function, or if the size is zero, the

behavior is undefined. If memory for the new object is not allocated, the old object is not deallocated and its value is unchanged.

Returns

4

The realloc function returns a pointer to the new object (which may have the same value as a pointer to the old object), or a null pointer if the new object has not been allocated.

7.24.4 Communication with the environment

7.24.4.1 The abort function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
[[noreturn]] void abort(void);
Description
2

The abort function causes abnormal program termination to occur, unless the signal SIGABRT is being caught and the signal handler does not return. Whether open streams with unwritten buffered data are flushed, open streams are closed, or temporary files are removed is implementationdefined. An implementation-defined form of the status unsuccessful termination is returned to the host environment by means of the function call raise(SIGABRT).

Returns
3

The abort function does not return to its caller.

7.24.4.2 The atexit function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int atexit(void (*func)(void));
Description
2

The atexit function registers the function pointed to by func, to be called without arguments at normal program termination.347) It is unspecified whether a call to the atexit function that does not happen before the exit function is called will succeed.

Environmental limits
3

The implementation shall support the registration of at least 32 functions.

Returns
4

The atexit function returns zero if the registration succeeds, nonzero if it fails.

Forward references: the at_quick_exit function (7.24.4.3), the exit function (7.24.4.4).

7.24.4.3 The at_quick_exit function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int at_quick_exit(void (*func)(void));
Description
2

The at_quick_exit function registers the function pointed to by func, to be called without arguments should quick_exit be called.348) It is unspecified whether a call to the at_quick_exit function that does not happen before the quick_exit function is called will succeed.

Environmental limits

3

The implementation shall support the registration of at least 32 functions.

Returns

4

The at_quick_exit function returns zero if the registration succeeds, nonzero if it fails.

Forward references: the quick_exit function (7.24.4.7).

7.24.4.4 The exit function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
[[noreturn]] void exit(int status);
Description
2

The exit function causes normal program termination to occur. No functions registered by the at_quick_exit function are called. If a program calls the exit function more than once, or calls the quick_exit function in addition to the exit function, the behavior is undefined.

3

First, all functions registered by the atexit function are called, in the reverse order of their registration,349) except that a function is called after any previously registered functions that had already been called at the time it was registered. If, during the call to any such function, a call to the longjmp function is made that would terminate the call to the registered function, the behavior is undefined.

4

Next, all open streams with unwritten buffered data are flushed, all open streams are closed, and all files created by the tmpfile function are removed.

5

Finally, control is returned to the host environment. If the value of status is zero or EXIT_SUCCESS, an implementation-defined form of the status successful termination is returned. If the value of status is EXIT_FAILURE, an implementation-defined form of the status unsuccessful termination is returned. Otherwise the status returned is implementation-defined.

Returns
6

The exit function cannot return to its caller.

7.24.4.5 The _Exit function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
[[noreturn]] void _Exit(int status);
Description
2

The _Exit function causes normal program termination to occur and control to be returned to the host environment. No functions registered by the atexit function, the at_quick_exit function, or signal handlers registered by the signal function are called. The status returned to the host environment is determined in the same way as for the exit function (7.24.4.4). Whether open streams with unwritten buffered data are flushed, open streams are closed, or temporary files are removed is implementation-defined.

Returns
3

The _Exit function cannot return to its caller.

7.24.4.6 The getenv function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
char *getenv(const char *name);

Description

2

The getenv function searches an environment list, provided by the host environment, for a string that matches the string pointed to by name. The set of environment names and the method for altering the environment list are implementation-defined. The getenv function is not required to avoid data races with other threads of execution that modify the environment list.350)

3

The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the getenv function.

Returns

4

The getenv function returns a pointer to a string associated with the matched list member. The string pointed to shall not be modified by the program, but may be overwritten by a subsequent call to the getenv function. If the specified name cannot be found, a null pointer is returned.

7.24.4.7 The quick_exit function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
[[noreturn]] void quick_exit(int status);
Description
2

The quick_exit function causes normal program termination to occur. No functions registered by the atexit function or signal handlers registered by the signal function are called. If a program calls the quick_exit function more than once, or calls the exit function in addition to the quick_exit function, the behavior is undefined. If a signal is raised while the quick_exit function is executing, the behavior is undefined.

3

The quick_exit function first calls all functions registered by the at_quick_exit function, in the reverse order of their registration,351) except that a function is called after any previously registered functions that had already been called at the time it was registered. If, during the call to any such function, a call to the longjmp function is made that would terminate the call to the registered function, the behavior is undefined.

4

Then control is returned to the host environment by means of the function call _Exit(status).

Returns
5

The quick_exit function cannot return to its caller.

7.24.4.8 The system function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int system(const char *string);
Description
2

If string is a null pointer, the system function determines whether the host environment has a command processor. If string is not a null pointer, the system function passes the string pointed to by string to that command processor to be executed in a manner which the implementation shall document; this can then cause the program calling system to behave in a non-conforming manner or to terminate.

Returns
3

If the argument is a null pointer, the system function returns nonzero only if a command processor is available. If the argument is not a null pointer, and the system function does return, it returns an implementation-defined value.

7.24.5 Searching and sorting utilities

1

These utilities make use of a comparison function to search or sort arrays of unspecified type. Where an argument declared as size_t nmemb specifies the length of the array for a function, nmemb can have the value zero on a call to that function; the comparison function is not called, a search finds no matching element, and sorting performs no rearrangement. Pointer arguments on such a call shall still have valid values, as described in 7.1.4.

2

The implementation shall ensure that the second argument of the comparison function (when called from bsearch), or both arguments (when called from qsort), are pointers to elements of the array.352)

The first argument when called from bsearch shall equal key.

3

The comparison function shall not alter the contents of the array. The implementation may reorder elements of the array between calls to the comparison function, but shall not alter the contents of any individual element.

4

When the same objects (consisting of size bytes, irrespective of their current positions in the array) are passed more than once to the comparison function, the results shall be consistent with one another. That is, for qsort they shall define a total ordering on the array, and for bsearch the same object shall always compare the same way with the key.

5

A sequence point occurs immediately before and immediately after each call to the comparison function, and also between any call to the comparison function and any movement of the objects passed as arguments to that call.

7.24.5.1 The bsearch generic function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
QVoid *bsearch(const void *key, QVoid *base, size_t nmemb, size_t size,
int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
Description
2

The bsearch generic function searches an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which is pointed to by base, for an element that matches the object pointed to by key. The size of each element of the array is specified by size.

3

The comparison function pointed to by compar is called with two arguments that point to the key object and to an array element, in that order. The function shall return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if the key object is considered, respectively, to be less than, to match, or to be greater than the array element. The array shall consist of: all the elements that compare less than, all the elements that compare equal to, and all the elements that compare greater than the key object, in that order.353)

Returns
4

The bsearch generic function returns a pointer to a matching element of the array, or a null pointer if no match is found. If two elements compare as equal, which element is matched is unspecified.

5

The bsearch function is generic in the qualification of the type pointed to by the argument base. If this argument is a pointer to a const-qualified object type, the returned pointer will be a pointer to const-qualified void. Otherwise, the argument shall be a pointer to an unqualified object type or a null pointer constant,354) and the returned pointer will be a pointer to unqualified void.

void * (const void *, const void *, size_t, size_t,
      int (*) (const void *, const void *))

which supports all correct uses. If a macro definition of this generic function is suppressed to access an actual function, the external declaration with this concrete type is visible.355)

7.24.5.2 The qsort function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
void qsort(void *base, size_t nmemb, size_t size,
int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
Description
2

The qsort function sorts an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which is pointed to by base. The size of each object is specified by size.

3

The contents of the array are sorted into ascending order according to a comparison function pointed to by compar, which is called with two arguments that point to the objects being compared. The function shall return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if the first argument is considered to be respectively less than, equal to, or greater than the second.

4

If two elements compare as equal, their order in the resulting sorted array is unspecified.

Returns
5

The qsort function returns no value.

7.24.6 Integer arithmetic functions

7.24.6.1 The abs, labs, and llabs functions

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int abs(int j);
long int labs(long int j);
long long int llabs(long long int j);
Description
2

The abs, labs, and llabs functions compute the absolute value of an integer j. If the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.356)

Returns
3

The abs, labs, and llabs, functions return the absolute value.

7.24.6.2 The div, ldiv, and lldiv functions

1
#include <stdlib.h>
div_t div(int numer, int denom);
ldiv_t ldiv(long int numer, long int denom);
lldiv_t lldiv(long long int numer, long long int denom);
Description
2

The div, ldiv, and lldiv, functions compute numer/denom and numer%denom in a single operation.

Returns

3

The div, ldiv, and lldiv functions return a structure of type div_t, ldiv_t, and lldiv_t, respectively, comprising both the quotient and the remainder. The structures shall contain (in either order) the members quot (the quotient) and rem (the remainder), each of which has the same type as the arguments numer and denom. If either part of the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.

7.24.7 Multibyte/wide character conversion functions

1

The behavior of the multibyte character functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale. For a state-dependent encoding, each of the mbtowc and wctomb functions is placed into its initial conversion state prior to the first call to the function and can be returned to that state by a call for which its character pointer argument, s, is a null pointer. Subsequent calls with s as other than a null pointer cause the internal conversion state of the function to be altered as necessary. It is implementation-defined whether internal conversion state has thread storage duration, and whether a newly created thread has the same state as the current thread at the time of creation, or the initial conversion state. A call with s as a null pointer causes these functions to return a nonzero value if encodings have state dependency, and zero otherwise.357) It is implementation-defined whether these functions avoid data races with other calls to the same function.

2

Changing the LC_CTYPE category causes the internal object describing the conversion state of the mbtowc and wctomb functions to have an indeterminate representation.

7.24.7.1 The mblen function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int mblen(const char *s, size_t n);
Description
2

If s is not a null pointer, the mblen function determines the number of bytes contained in the multibyte character pointed to by s. Except that the conversion state of the mbtowc function is not affected, it is equivalent to

mbtowc((wchar_t *)0, (const char *)0, 0);
mbtowc((wchar_t *)0, s, n);
Returns
3

If s is a null pointer, the mblen function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is not a null pointer, the mblen function either returns 0 (if s points to the null character), or returns the number of bytes that are contained in the multibyte character (if the next n or fewer bytes form a valid multibyte character), or returns -1 (if they do not form a valid multibyte character).

Forward references: the mbtowc function (7.24.7.2).

7.24.7.2 The mbtowc function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int mbtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc, const char * restrict s, size_t n);
Description
2

If s is not a null pointer, the mbtowc function inspects at most n bytes beginning with the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the next multibyte character is

complete and valid, it determines the value of the corresponding wide character and then, if pwc is not a null pointer, stores that value in the object pointed to by pwc. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide character, the function is left in the initial conversion state.

3

The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the mbtowc function.

Returns

4

If s is a null pointer, the mbtowc function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is not a null pointer, the mbtowc function either returns 0 (if s points to the null character), or returns the number of bytes that are contained in the converted multibyte character (if the next n or fewer bytes form a valid multibyte character), or returns -1 (if they do not form a valid multibyte character).

5

In no case will the value returned be greater than n or the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro.

7.24.7.3 The wctomb function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
int wctomb(char *s, wchar_t wc);
Description
2

The wctomb function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte character corresponding to the wide character given by wc (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the array whose first element is pointed to by s (if s is not a null pointer). At most MB_CUR_MAX characters are stored. If wc is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state, and the function is left in the initial conversion state.

3

The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the wctomb function.

Returns
4

If s is a null pointer, the wctomb function returns a nonzero or zero value, if multibyte character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings. If s is not a null pointer, the wctomb function returns -1 if the value of wc does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, or returns the number of bytes that are contained in the multibyte character corresponding to the value of wc.

5

In no case will the value returned be greater than the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro.

7.24.8 Multibyte/wide string conversion functions

1

The behavior of the multibyte string functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.

7.24.8.1 The mbstowcs function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
size_t mbstowcs(wchar_t * restrict pwcs, const char * restrict s, size_t n);
Description
2

The mbstowcs function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the initial shift state from the array pointed to by s into a sequence of corresponding wide characters and stores not more than n wide characters into the array pointed to by pwcs. No multibyte characters that follow a null character (which is converted into a null wide character) will be examined or converted. Each multibyte character is converted as if by a call to the mbtowc function, except that the conversion state of the mbtowc function is not affected.

3

No more than n elements will be modified in the array pointed to by pwcs. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns

4

If an invalid multibyte character is encountered, the mbstowcs function returns (size_t)(-1). Otherwise, the mbstowcs function returns the number of array elements modified, not including a terminating null wide character, if any.358)

7.24.8.2 The wcstombs function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
size_t wcstombs(char * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict pwcs, size_t n);
Description
2

The wcstombs function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array pointed to by pwcs into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that begins in the initial shift state, and stores these multibyte characters into the array pointed to by s, stopping if a multibyte character would exceed the limit of n total bytes or if a null character is stored. Each wide character is converted as if by a call to the wctomb function, except that the conversion state of the wctomb function is not affected.

3

No more than n bytes will be modified in the array pointed to by s. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
4

If a wide character is encountered that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, the wcstombs function returns (size_t)(-1). Otherwise, the wcstombs function returns the number of bytes modified, not including a terminating null character, if any.358)

7.24.9 Alignment of memory

7.24.9.1 The memalignment function

1
#include <stdlib.h>
size_t memalignment(const void *p);
Description
2

The memalignment function accepts a pointer to any object and returns the maximum alignment satisfied by its address value. The alignment may be an extended alignment and may also be beyond the range supported by the implementation for explicit use by alignas.359) If so, it will satisfy all alignments usable by the implementation. The value returned can be compared to the result of alignof, and if it is greater or equal, the alignment requirement for the type operand is satisfied.

Returns
3

The alignment of the pointer p, which is a power of two. If p is a null pointer, an alignment of zero is returned.

4

NOTE An alignment of zero indicates that the tested pointer cannot be used to access an object of any type.

7.25 _Noreturn <stdnoreturn.h>

1

The header <stdnoreturn.h> defines the macro

noreturn

which expands to _Noreturn.

2

The noreturn macro and the <stdnoreturn.h> header are obsolescent features.

7.26 String handling <string.h>

7.26.1 String function conventions

1

The header <string.h> declares one type, several functions, several type-generic functions, and defines two macros useful for manipulating arrays of character type and other objects treated as arrays of character type.360) The type is size_t and one of the macros is NULL (both described in 7.21). Various methods are used for determining the lengths of the arrays, but in all cases a char * or void * argument points to the initial (lowest addressed) character of the array. If an array is accessed beyond the end of an object, the behavior is undefined.

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_STRING_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

Where an argument declared as size_t n specifies the length of the array for a function, n can have the value zero on a call to that function. Unless explicitly stated otherwise in the description of a particular function in this subclause, pointer arguments on such a call shall still have valid values, as described in 7.1.4. On such a call, a function that locates a character finds no occurrence, a function that compares two character sequences returns zero, and a function that copies characters copies zero characters.

4

For all functions in this subclause, each character shall be interpreted as if it had the type unsigned

char (and therefore every possible object representation is valid and has a different value).

7.26.2 Copying functions

7.26.2.1 The memcpy function

1
#include <string.h>
void *memcpy(void * restrict s1, const void * restrict s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The memcpy function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The memcpy function returns the value of s1.

7.26.2.2 The memccpy function

1
#include <string.h>
void *memccpy(void * restrict s1, const void * restrict s2, int c, size_t n);
Description
2

The memccpy function copies characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1, stopping after the first occurrence of character c (converted to an unsigned char) is copied, or after n characters are copied, whichever comes first. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The memccpy function returns a pointer to the character after the copy of c in s1, or a null pointer if c was not found in the first n characters of s2.

7.26.2.3 The memmove function

Synopsis

1
#include <string.h>
void *memmove(void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);

Description

2

The memmove function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1. Copying takes place as if the n characters from the object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n characters that does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 and s2, and then the n characters from the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.

Returns

3

The memmove function returns the value of s1.

7.26.2.4 The strcpy function

1
#include <string.h>
char *strcpy(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2);
Description
2

The strcpy function copies the string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null character) into the array pointed to by s1. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The strcpy function returns the value of s1.

7.26.2.5 The strncpy function

1
#include <string.h>
char *strncpy(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The strncpy function copies not more than n characters (characters that follow a null character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by s1.361) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

3

If the array pointed to by s2 is a string that is shorter than n characters, null characters are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1, until n characters in all have been written.

Returns
4

The strncpy function returns the value of s1.

7.26.2.6 The strdup function

1
#include <string.h>
char *strdup(const char *s);
Description
2

The strdup function creates a copy of the string pointed to by s in a space allocated as if by a call to malloc.

Returns

3

The strdup function returns a pointer to the first character of the duplicate string. The returned pointer can be passed to free. If no space can be allocated the strdup function returns a null pointer.

7.26.2.7 The strndup function

1
#include <string.h>
char *strndup(const char *s, size_t n);
Description
2

The strndup function creates a string initialized with no more than n initial characters of the array pointed to by s and up to the first null character, whichever comes first, in a space allocated as if by a call to malloc. If the array pointed to by s does not contain a null within the first n characters, a null is appended to the copy of the array.

Returns
3

The strndup function returns a pointer to the first character of the created string. The returned pointer can be passed to free. If space cannot be allocated the strndup function returns a null pointer.

7.26.3 Concatenation functions

7.26.3.1 The strcat function

1
#include <string.h>
char *strcat(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2);
Description
2

The strcat function appends a copy of the string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null character) to the end of the string pointed to by s1. The initial character of s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The strcat function returns the value of s1.

7.26.3.2 The strncat function

1
#include <string.h>
char *strncat(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The strncat function appends not more than n characters (a null character and characters that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of the string pointed to by s1. The initial character of s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1. A terminating null character is always appended to the result.362) If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The strncat function returns the value of s1.

Forward references: the strlen function (7.26.6.4).

7.26.4 Comparison functions

1

The sign of a nonzero value returned by the comparison functions memcmp, strcmp, and strncmp is determined by the sign of the difference between the values of the first pair of characters (both interpreted as unsigned char) that differ in the objects being compared.

7.26.4.1 The memcmp function

1
#include <string.h>
int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The memcmp function compares the first n characters of the object pointed to by s1 to the first n characters of the object pointed to by s2.363)

Returns
3

The memcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero, accordingly as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the object pointed to by s2.

7.26.4.2 The strcmp function

1
#include <string.h>
int strcmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);
Description
2

The strcmp function compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The strcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero, accordingly as the string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string pointed to by s2.

7.26.4.3 The strcoll function

1
#include <string.h>
int strcoll(const char *s1, const char *s2);
Description
2

The strcoll function compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by s2, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the current locale.

Returns
3

The strcoll function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero, accordingly as the string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the string pointed to by s2 when both are interpreted as appropriate to the current locale.

7.26.4.4 The strncmp function

1
#include <string.h>
int strncmp(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t n);

Description

2

The strncmp function compares not more than n characters (characters that follow a null character are not compared) from the array pointed to by s1 to the array pointed to by s2.

Returns

3

The strncmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero, accordingly as the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s2.

7.26.4.5 The strxfrm function

1
#include <string.h>
size_t strxfrm(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The strxfrm function transforms the string pointed to by s2 and places the resulting string into the array pointed to by s1. The transformation is such that if the strcmp function is applied to two transformed strings, it returns a value greater than, equal to, or less than zero, corresponding to the result of the strcoll function applied to the same two original strings. No more than n characters are placed into the resulting array pointed to by s1, including the terminating null character. If n is zero, s1 is permitted to be a null pointer. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The strxfrm function returns the length of the transformed string (not including the terminating null character). If the value returned is n or more, the members of the array pointed to by s1 have an indeterminate representation.

4

EXAMPLE The value of the following expression is the size of the array needed to hold the transformation of the string pointed to by s.

1 + strxfrm(nullptr, s, 0)

7.26.5 Search functions

7.26.5.1 Introduction

1

The stateless search functions in this section (memchr, strchr, strpbrk, strrchr, strstr) are generic functions. These functions are generic in the qualification of the array to be searched and will return a result pointer to an element with the same qualification as the passed array. If the array to be searched is const-qualified, the result pointer will be to a const-qualified element. If the array to be searched is not const-qualified,364) the result pointer will be to an unqualified element.

2

The external declarations of these generic functions have a concrete function type that returns a pointer to an unqualified element (of type char when specified as QChar, and void when specified as QVoid), and accepts a pointer to a const-qualified array of the same type to search. This signature supports all correct uses. If a macro definition of any of these generic functions is suppressed to access an actual function, the external declaration with the corresponding concrete type is visible.365)

3

The volatile and restrict qualifiers are not accepted on the elements of the array to search.

7.26.5.2 The memchr generic function

1
#include <string.h>
QVoid *memchr(QVoid *s, int c, size_t n);

Description

2

The memchr generic function locates the first occurrence of c (converted to an unsigned char) in the initial n characters (each interpreted as unsigned char) of the object pointed to by s. The implementation shall behave as if it reads the characters sequentially and stops as soon as a matching character is found.

Returns

3

The memchr generic function returns a pointer to the located character, or a null pointer if the character does not occur in the object.

7.26.5.3 The strchr generic function

1
#include <string.h>
QChar *strchr(QChar *s, int c);
Description
2

The strchr generic function locates the first occurrence of c (converted to a char) in the string pointed to by s. The terminating null character is considered to be part of the string.

Returns
3

The strchr generic function returns a pointer to the located character, or a null pointer if the character does not occur in the string.

7.26.5.4 The strcspn function

1
#include <string.h>
size_t strcspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
Description
2

The strcspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters not from the string pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The strcspn function returns the length of the segment.

7.26.5.5 The strpbrk generic function

1
#include <string.h>
QChar *strpbrk(QChar *s1, const char *s2);
Description
2

The strpbrk generic function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of any character from the string pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The strpbrk generic function returns a pointer to the character, or a null pointer if no character from s2 occurs in s1.

7.26.5.6 The strrchr generic function

1
#include <string.h>
QChar *strrchr(QChar *s, int c);

Description

2

The strrchr generic function locates the last occurrence of c (converted to a char) in the string pointed to by s. The terminating null character is considered to be part of the string.

Returns

3

The strrchr generic function returns a pointer to the character, or a null pointer if c does not occur in the string.

7.26.5.7 The strspn function

1
#include <string.h>
size_t strspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
Description
2

The strspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters from the string pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The strspn function returns the length of the segment.

7.26.5.8 The strstr generic function

1
#include <string.h>
QChar *strstr(QChar *s1, const char *s2);
Description
2

The strstr generic function locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of the sequence of characters (excluding the terminating null character) in the string pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The strstr generic function returns a pointer to the located string, or a null pointer if the string is not found. If s2 points to a string with zero length, the function returns s1.

7.26.5.9 The strtok function

1
#include <string.h>
char *strtok(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2);
Description
2

A sequence of calls to the strtok function breaks the string pointed to by s1 into a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a character from the string pointed to by s2. The first call in the sequence has a non-null first argument; subsequent calls in the sequence have a null first argument. If any of the subsequent calls in the sequence is made by a different thread than the first, the behavior is undefined. The separator string pointed to by s2 may be different from call to call.

3

The first call in the sequence searches the string pointed to by s1 for the first character that is not contained in the current separator string pointed to by s2. If no such character is found, then there are no tokens in the string pointed to by s1 and the strtok function returns a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is the start of the first token.

4

The strtok function then searches from there for a character that is contained in the current separator string. If no such character is found, the current token extends to the end of the string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches for a token will return a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is overwritten by a null character, which terminates the current token. The strtok function saves a pointer to the following character, from which the next search for a token will start.

5

Each subsequent call, with a null pointer as the value of the first argument, starts searching from the saved pointer and behaves as described previously.

6

The strtok function is not required to avoid data races with other calls to the strtok function.366)

The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the strtok function.

Returns

7

The strtok function returns a pointer to the first character of a token, or a null pointer if there is no token.

8

EXAMPLE

#include <string.h>
static char str[] = "?a???b,,,#c";
char *t;
t = strtok(str, "?");      // t points to the token "a"
t = strtok(nullptr, ",");  // t points to the token "??b"
t = strtok(nullptr, "#,"); // t points to the token "c"
t = strtok(nullptr, "?");  // t is a null pointer
Forward references: The strtok_s function (K.3.7.4.1).

7.26.6 Miscellaneous functions

7.26.6.1 The memset function

1
#include <string.h>
void *memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);
Description
2

The memset function copies the value of c (converted to an unsigned char) into each of the first n characters of the object pointed to by s.

Returns
3

The memset function returns the value of s.

7.26.6.2 The memset_explicit function

1
#include <string.h>
void *memset_explicit(void *s, int c, size_t n);
Description
2

The memset_explicit function copies the value of c (converted to an unsigned char) into each of the first n characters of the object pointed to by s. The purpose of this function is to make sensitive information stored in the object inaccessible.367)

Returns
3

The memset_explicit function returns the value of s.

7.26.6.3 The strerror function

1
#include <string.h>
char *strerror(int errnum);

Description

2

The strerror function maps the number in errnum to a message string. Typically, the values for errnum come from errno, but strerror shall map any value of type int to a message.

3

The strerror function is not required to avoid data races with other calls to the strerror function.368) The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the strerror function.

Returns

4

The strerror function returns a pointer to the string, the contents of which are locale-specific. The array pointed to shall not be modified by the program. The behavior is undefined if the returned value is used after a subsequent call to the strerror function, or after the thread which called the function to obtain the returned value has exited.

Forward references: The strerror_s function (K.3.7.5.2).

7.26.6.4 The strlen function

1
#include <string.h>
size_t strlen(const char *s);
Description
2

The strlen function computes the length of the string pointed to by s.

Returns
3

The strlen function returns the number of characters that precede the terminating null character.

7.27 Type-generic math <tgmath.h>

1

The header <tgmath.h> includes the headers <math.h> and <complex.h> and defines several type-generic macros.

2

The feature test macro __STDC_VERSION_TGMATH_H__ expands to the token 202311L.

3

This clause specifies a many-to-one correspondence of functions in <math.h> and <complex.h> with type-generic macros.369) Use of a type-generic macro invokes a corresponding function whose type is determined by the types of the arguments for particular parameters called the generic parameters.370)

4

Of the <math.h> and <complex.h> functions without an f (float) or l (long double) suffix, several have one or more parameters whose corresponding real type is double. For each such function, except the functions that round result to narrower type (7.12.14) (which are covered subsequently in this subclause) and modf, there is a corresponding type-generic macro. The parameters whose corresponding real type is double in the function synopsis are generic parameters.

5

Some of the <math.h> functions for decimal floating types have no unsuffixed counterpart. Of these functions with a d64 suffix, some have one or more parameters whose type is _Decimal64. For each such function, except decodedecd64, encodedecd64, decodebind64, and encodebind64, there is a corresponding type-generic macro. The parameters whose real type is _Decimal64 in the function synopsis are generic parameters.

6

If arguments for generic parameters of a type-generic macro are such that some argument has a corresponding real type that is of standard floating type and another argument is of decimal floating type, the behavior is undefined.

7

Except for the macros for functions that round result to a narrower type (7.12.14), use of a typegeneric macro invokes a function whose generic parameters have the corresponding real type determined by the types of the arguments for the generic parameters as follows:

  • Arguments of integer type are regarded as having type _Decimal64 if any argument has decimal floating type, and as having type double otherwise.
  • If the function has exactly one generic parameter, the type determined is the corresponding real type of the argument for the generic parameter.
  • If the function has exactly two generic parameters, the type determined is the corresponding real type determined by the usual arithmetic conversions (6.3.1.8) applied to the arguments for the generic parameters.
  • If the function has more than two generic parameters, the type determined is the corresponding real type determined by repeatedly applying the usual arithmetic conversions, first to the first two arguments for generic parameters, then to that result type and the next argument for a generic parameter, and so forth until the usual arithmetic conversions have been applied to the last argument for a generic parameter.

If neither <math.h> and <complex.h> define a function whose generic parameters have the determined corresponding real type, the behavior is undefined.

8

For each unsuffixed function in <math.h> for which there is a function in <complex.h> with the same name except for a c prefix, the corresponding type-generic macro (for both functions) has the same name as the function in <math.h>. The corresponding type-generic macro for fabs and cabs is fabs.

If at least one argument for a generic parameter is complex, then use of the macro invokes a complex function; otherwise, use of the macro invokes a real function.

9

For each unsuffixed function in <math.h> without a c-prefixed counterpart in <complex.h> (except functions that round result to narrower type, modf, and canonicalize), the corresponding typegeneric macro has the same name as the function. These type-generic macros are:

acospi asinpi atan2pi atan2 atanpi cbrt ceil compoundn copysign cospi erfc erf exp10m1 exp10 exp2m1

exp2 expm1 fdim floor fmax fmaximum fmaximum_mag fmaximum_num fmaximum_mag_num fma fmin fminimum fminimum_mag fminimum_num fminimum_mag_num

fmod frexp fromfpx fromfp hypot ilogb ldexp lgamma llogb llrint llround log10p1 log10 log1p log2p1

log2 logb logp1 lrint lround nearbyint nextafter nextdown nexttoward nextup pown powr remainder remquo rint

rootn roundeven round rsqrt scalbln scalbn sinpi tanpi tgamma trunc ufromfpx ufromfp

If all arguments for generic parameters are real, then use of the macro invokes a real function (provided <math.h> defines a function of the determined type); otherwise, use of the macro is undefined.

10

For each unsuffixed function in <complex.h> that is not a c-prefixed counterpart to a function in <math.h>, the corresponding type-generic macro has the same name as the function. These type-generic macros are:

carg cimag conj cproj creal

Use of the macro with any argument of standard floating or complex type invokes a complex function. Use of the macro with an argument of decimal floating type is undefined.

11

The functions that round result to a narrower type have type-generic macros whose names are obtained by omitting any suffix from the function names. Thus, the macros with f or d prefix are:

:
fsub
dsub
fmul
dmul
fdiv
ddiv
ffma
dfma
fsqrt
dsqrt
d32sub
d64sub
d32mul
d64mul
d32div
d64div
d32fma
d64fma
d32sqrt
d64sqrt

All arguments shall be real. If the macro prefix is f or d, use of an argument of decimal floating type is undefined. If the macro prefix is d32 or d64, use of an argument of standard floating type is undefined. The function invoked is determined as follows:

d64 suffix.

12

For each d64-suffixed function in <math.h>, except decodedecd64, encodedecd64, decodebind64, and encodebind64, that does not have an unsuffixed counterpart, the corresponding type-generic macro has the name of the function, but without the suffix. These type-generic macros are:

<math.h> function type-generic macro quantizedN quantize samequantumdN samequantum quantumdN quantum llquantexpdN llquantexp

15

EXAMPLE With the declarations

#include <tgmath.h>
int n;
float f;
double d;
long double ld;
float complex fc;
double complex dc;
long double complex ldc;
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 d32;
_Decimal64 d64;
_Decimal128 d128;
#endif

functions invoked by use of type-generic macros are shown in the following table:

macro use invocation exp(n) exp(n), the function acosh(f) acoshf(f) sin(d) sin(d), the function atan(ld) atanl(ld) log(fc) clogf(fc) sqrt(dc) csqrt(dc) pow(ldc, f) cpowl(ldc, f) remainder(n, n) remainder(n, n), the function nextafter(d, f) nextafter(d, f), the function nexttoward(f, ld) nexttowardf(f, ld) copysign(n, ld) copysignl(n, ld) ceil(fc) undefined rint(dc) undefined fmaximum(ldc, ld) undefined carg(n) carg(n), the function cproj(f) cprojf(f) creal(d) creal(d), the function cimag(ld) cimagl(ld) fabs(fc) cabsf(fc) carg(dc) carg(dc), the function cproj(ldc) cprojl(ldc) fsub(f, ld) fsubl(f, ld) fdiv(d, n) fdiv(d, n), the function dfma(f, d, ld) dfmal(f, d, ld) dadd(f, f) daddl(f, f) dsqrt(dc) undefined exp(d64) expd64(d64) sqrt(d32) sqrtd32(d32) fmaximum(d64, d128) fmaximumd128(d64, d128) pow(d32, n) powd64(d32, n) remainder(d64, d) undefined creal(d64) undefined remquo(d32, d32, &n) undefined llquantexp(d) undefined quantize(dc) undefined samequantum(n, n) undefined d32sub(d32, d128) d32subd128(d32, d128) d32div(d64, n) d32divd64(d64, n) d64fma(d32, d64, d128) d64fmad128(d32, d64, d128) d64add(d32, d32) d64addd128(d32, d32) d64sqrt(d) undefined

dadd(n, d64) undefined

7.28 Threads <threads.h>

7.28.1 Introduction

1

The header <threads.h> includes the header <time.h>, defines macros, and declares types, enumeration constants, and functions that support multiple threads of execution.371)

2

Implementations that define the macro __STDC_NO_THREADS__ may not provide this header nor support any of its facilities.

3

The macros are

ONCE_FLAG_INIT
which expands to a value that can be used to initialize an object of type once_flag; and
TSS_DTOR_ITERATIONS

which expands to an integer constant expression representing the maximum number of times that destructors will be called when a thread terminates.

4

The types are

cnd_t
which is a complete object type that holds an identifier for a condition variable;
thrd_t
which is a complete object type that holds an identifier for a thread;
tss_t
which is a complete object type that holds an identifier for a thread-specific storage pointer;
mtx_t
which is a complete object type that holds an identifier for a mutex;
tss_dtor_t
which is the function pointer type void (*)(void*), used for a destructor for a thread-specific storage pointer;
thrd_start_t
which is the function pointer type int (*)(void*) that is passed to thrd_create to create a new thread; and
once_flag

which is a complete object type that holds a flag for use by call_once.

5

The enumeration constants are

mtx_plain
which is passed to mtx_init to create a mutex object that does not support timeout;
mtx_recursive
mtx_timed
thrd_timedout
thrd_success
thrd_busy
thrd_error
thrd_nomem

which is returned by a function to indicate that the requested operation failed because it was unable to allocate memory.

Forward references: date and time (7.29).

7.28.2 Initialization functions

7.28.2.1 The call_once function

1
#include <threads.h>
void call_once(once_flag *flag, void (*func)(void));
Description
2

The call_once function uses the once_flag pointed to by flag to ensure that func is called exactly once, the first time the call_once function is called with that value of flag. Completion of an effective call to the call_once function synchronizes with all subsequent calls to the call_once function with the same value of flag.

Returns
3

The call_once function returns no value.

7.28.3 Condition variable functions

7.28.3.1 The cnd_broadcast function

1
#include <threads.h>
int cnd_broadcast(cnd_t *cond);

Description

2

The cnd_broadcast function unblocks all the threads that are blocked on the condition variable pointed to by cond at the time of the call. If no threads are blocked on the condition variable pointed to by cond at the time of the call, the function does nothing.

Returns

3

The cnd_broadcast function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.3.2 The cnd_destroy function

1
#include <threads.h>
void cnd_destroy(cnd_t *cond);
Description
2

The cnd_destroy function releases all resources used by the condition variable pointed to by cond. The cnd_destroy function requires that no threads be blocked waiting for the condition variable pointed to by cond.

Returns
3

The cnd_destroy function returns no value.

7.28.3.3 The cnd_init function

1
#include <threads.h>
int cnd_init(cnd_t *cond);
Description
2

The cnd_init function creates a condition variable. If it succeeds it sets the object pointed to by cond to a value that uniquely identifies the newly created condition variable. A thread that calls cnd_wait on a newly created condition variable will block.

Returns
3

The cnd_init function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_nomem if no memory could be allocated for the newly created condition, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.3.4 The cnd_signal function

1
#include <threads.h>
int cnd_signal(cnd_t *cond);
Description
2

The cnd_signal function unblocks one of the threads that are blocked on the condition variable pointed to by cond at the time of the call. If no threads are blocked on the condition variable at the time of the call, the function does nothing and returns success.

Returns
3

The cnd_signal function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.3.5 The cnd_timedwait function

1
#include <threads.h>
int cnd_timedwait(cnd_t * restrict cond, mtx_t * restrict mtx,
const struct timespec * restrict ts);

Description

2

The cnd_timedwait function atomically unlocks the mutex pointed to by mtx and blocks until the condition variable pointed to by cond is signaled by a call to cnd_signal or to cnd_broadcast, or until after the TIME_UTC-based calendar time pointed to by ts, or until it is unblocked due to an unspecified reason. When the calling thread becomes unblocked it locks the object pointed to by mtx before it returns. The cnd_timedwait function requires that the mutex pointed to by mtx be locked by the calling thread.

Returns

3

The cnd_timedwait function returns thrd_success upon success, or thrd_timedout if the time specified in the call was reached without acquiring the requested resource, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.3.6 The cnd_wait function

1
#include <threads.h>
int cnd_wait(cnd_t *cond, mtx_t *mtx);
Description
2

The cnd_wait function atomically unlocks the mutex pointed to by mtx and blocks until the condition variable pointed to by cond is signaled by a call to cnd_signal or to cnd_broadcast, or until it is unblocked due to an unspecified reason. When the calling thread becomes unblocked it locks the mutex pointed to by mtx before it returns. The cnd_wait function requires that the mutex pointed to by mtx be locked by the calling thread.

Returns
3

The cnd_wait function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.4 Mutex functions

1

For purposes of determining the existence of a data race, lock and unlock operations behave as atomic operations. All lock and unlock operations on a particular mutex occur in some particular total order.

2

NOTE This total order can be viewed as the modification order of the mutex.

7.28.4.1 The mtx_destroy function

1
#include <threads.h>
void mtx_destroy(mtx_t *mtx);
Description
2

The mtx_destroy function releases any resources used by the mutex pointed to by mtx. No threads can be blocked waiting for the mutex pointed to by mtx.

Returns
3

The mtx_destroy function returns no value.

7.28.4.2 The mtx_init function

1
#include <threads.h>
int mtx_init(mtx_t *mtx, int type);

Description

2

The mtx_init function creates a mutex object with properties indicated by type, which shall have one of these values:

mtx_plain for a simple non-recursive mutex,

mtx_timed for a non-recursive mutex that supports timeout,

mtx_plain | mtx_recursive for a simple recursive mutex, or

mtx_timed | mtx_recursive for a recursive mutex that supports timeout.

3

If the mtx_init function succeeds, it sets the mutex pointed to by mtx to a value that uniquely identifies the newly created mutex.

Returns

4

The mtx_init function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.4.3 The mtx_lock function

1
#include <threads.h>
int mtx_lock(mtx_t *mtx);
Description
2

The mtx_lock function blocks until it locks the mutex pointed to by mtx. If the mutex is nonrecursive, it shall not be locked by the calling thread. Prior calls to mtx_unlock on the same mutex synchronize with this operation.

Returns
3

The mtx_lock function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.4.4 The mtx_timedlock function

1
#include <threads.h>
int mtx_timedlock(mtx_t * restrict mtx, const struct timespec * restrict ts);
Description
2

The mtx_timedlock function endeavors to block until it locks the mutex pointed to by mtx or until after the TIME_UTC-based calendar time pointed to by ts. The specified mutex shall support timeout. If the operation succeeds, prior calls to mtx_unlock on the same mutex synchronize with this operation.

Returns
3

The mtx_timedlock function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_timedout if the time specified was reached without acquiring the requested resource, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.4.5 The mtx_trylock function

1
#include <threads.h>
int mtx_trylock(mtx_t *mtx);

Description

2

The mtx_trylock function endeavors to lock the mutex pointed to by mtx. If the mutex is already locked, the function returns without blocking. If the operation succeeds, prior calls to mtx_unlock on the same mutex synchronize with this operation.

Returns

3

The mtx_trylock function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_busy if the resource requested is already in use, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored. mtx_trylock may spuriously fail to lock an unused resource, in which case it returns thrd_busy.

7.28.4.6 The mtx_unlock function

1
#include <threads.h>
int mtx_unlock(mtx_t *mtx);
Description
2

The mtx_unlock function unlocks the mutex pointed to by mtx. The mutex pointed to by mtx shall be locked by the calling thread.

Returns
3

The mtx_unlock function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.5 Thread functions

7.28.5.1 The thrd_create function

1
#include <threads.h>
int thrd_create(thrd_t *thr, thrd_start_t func, void *arg);
Description
2

The thrd_create function creates a new thread executing func(arg). If the thrd_create function succeeds, it sets the object pointed to by thr to the identifier of the newly created thread. (A thread’s identifier may be reused for a different thread once the original thread has exited and either been detached or joined to another thread.) The completion of the thrd_create function synchronizes with the beginning of the execution of the new thread.

3

Returning from func has the same behavior as invoking thrd_exit with the value returned from func.

Returns
4

The thrd_create function returns thrd_success on success, or thrd_nomem if no memory could be allocated for the thread requested, or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.5.2 The thrd_current function

1
#include <threads.h>
thrd_t thrd_current(void);
Description
2

The thrd_current function identifies the thread that called it.

Returns
3

The thrd_current function returns the identifier of the thread that called it.

7.28.5.3 The thrd_detach function

1
#include <threads.h>
int thrd_detach(thrd_t thr);
Description
2

The thrd_detach function tells the operating system to dispose of any resources allocated to the thread identified by thr when that thread terminates. The thread identified by thr shall not have been previously detached or joined with another thread.

Returns
3

The thrd_detach function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.5.4 The thrd_equal function

1
#include <threads.h>
int thrd_equal(thrd_t thr0, thrd_t thr1);
Description
2

The thrd_equal function will determine whether the thread identified by thr0 refers to the thread identified by thr1.

Returns
3

The thrd_equal function returns zero if the thread thr0 and the thread thr1 refer to different threads. Otherwise the thrd_equal function returns a nonzero value.

7.28.5.5 The thrd_exit function

1
#include <threads.h>
[[noreturn]] void thrd_exit(int res);
Description
2

For every thread-specific storage key which was created with a non-null destructor and for which the value is non-null, thrd_exit sets the value associated with the key to a null pointer value and then invokes the destructor with its previous value. The order in which destructors are invoked is unspecified.

3

If after this process there remain keys with both non-null destructors and values, the implementation repeats this process up to TSS_DTOR_ITERATIONS times.

4

Following this, the thrd_exit function terminates execution of the calling thread and sets its result code to res.

5

The program terminates normally after the last thread has been terminated. The behavior is as if the program called the exit function with the status EXIT_SUCCESS at thread termination time.

Returns
6

The thrd_exit function returns no value.

7.28.5.6 The thrd_join function

1
#include <threads.h>
int thrd_join(thrd_t thr, int *res);

Description

2

The thrd_join function joins the thread identified by thr with the current thread by blocking until the other thread has terminated. If the parameter res is not a null pointer, it stores the thread’s result code in the integer pointed to by res. The termination of the other thread synchronizes with the completion of the thrd_join function. The thread identified by thr shall not have been previously detached or joined with another thread.

Returns

3

The thrd_join function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.28.5.7 The thrd_sleep function

1
#include <threads.h>
int thrd_sleep(const struct timespec *duration, struct timespec *remaining);
Description
2

The thrd_sleep function suspends execution of the calling thread until either the interval specified by duration has elapsed or a signal which is not being ignored is received. If interrupted by a signal and the remaining argument is not null, the amount of time remaining (the requested interval minus the time actually slept) is stored in the interval it points to. The duration and remaining arguments may point to the same object.

3

The suspension time may be longer than requested because the interval is rounded up to an integer multiple of the sleep resolution or because of the scheduling of other activity by the system. But, except for the case of being interrupted by a signal, the suspension time will not be less than that specified, as measured by the system clock TIME_UTC.

Returns
4

The thrd_sleep function returns zero if the requested time has elapsed, 1 if it has been interrupted by a signal, or a negative value (which may also be 1) if it fails.

7.28.5.8 The thrd_yield function

1
#include <threads.h>
void thrd_yield(void);
Description
2

The thrd_yield function endeavors to permit other threads to run, even if the current thread would ordinarily continue to run.

Returns
3

The thrd_yield function returns no value.

7.28.6 Thread-specific storage functions

7.28.6.1 The tss_create function

1
#include <threads.h>
int tss_create(tss_t *key, tss_dtor_t dtor);
Description
2

The tss_create function creates a thread-specific storage pointer with destructor dtor, which may be null.

3

A null pointer value is associated with the newly created key in all existing threads. Upon subsequent thread creation, the value associated with all keys is initialized to a null pointer value in the new thread.

4

Destructors associated with thread-specific storage are not invoked at program termination.

5

The tss_create function shall not be called from within a destructor.

Returns

6

If the tss_create function is successful, it sets the thread-specific storage pointed to by key to a value that uniquely identifies the newly created pointer and returns thrd_success; otherwise, thrd_error is returned and the thread-specific storage pointed to by key is set to an indeterminate representation.

7.28.6.2 The tss_delete function

1
#include <threads.h>
void tss_delete(tss_t key);
Description
2

The tss_delete function releases any resources used by the thread-specific storage identified by key. The tss_delete function shall only be called with a value for key that was returned by a call to tss_create before the thread commenced executing destructors.

3

If tss_delete is called while another thread is executing destructors, whether this will affect the number of invocations of the destructor associated with key on that thread is unspecified.

4

Calling tss_delete will not result in the invocation of any destructors.

Returns
5

The tss_delete function returns no value.

7.28.6.3 The tss_get function

1
#include <threads.h>
void *tss_get(tss_t key);
Description
2

The tss_get function returns the value for the current thread held in the thread-specific storage identified by key. The tss_get function shall only be called with a value for key that was returned by a call to tss_create before the thread commenced executing destructors.

Returns
3

The tss_get function returns the value for the current thread if successful, or zero if unsuccessful.

7.28.6.4 The tss_set function

1
#include <threads.h>
int tss_set(tss_t key, void *val);
Description
2

The tss_set function sets the value for the current thread held in the thread-specific storage identified by key to val. The tss_set function shall only be called with a value for key that was returned by a call to tss_create before the thread commenced executing destructors.

3

This action will not invoke the destructor associated with the key on the value being replaced.

Returns

4

The tss_set function returns thrd_success on success or thrd_error if the request could not be honored.

7.29 Date and time <time.h>

7.29.1 Components of time

1

The header <time.h> defines several macros, and declares types and functions for manipulating time. Many functions deal with a calendar time that represents the current date (according to the Gregorian calendar) and time. Some functions deal with local time, which is the calendar time expressed for some specific time zone, and with Daylight Saving Time, which is a temporary change in the algorithm for determining local time. The local time zone and Daylight Saving Time are implementation-defined.

2

The feature test macro __STDC_VERSION_TIME_H__ expands to the token 202311L. The other macros defined are NULL (described in 7.21);

CLOCKS_PER_SEC
which expands to an expression with type clock_t (described later in this subclause) that is the number per second of the value returned by the clock function;
TIME_UTC
TIME_MONOTONIC
which expand to integer constants greater than 0 designating the calendar time and monotonic time bases, respectively. Additional time base macro definitions, beginning with TIME_ and an uppercase letter, may also be specified by the implementation;372) and,
TIME_ACTIVE
TIME_THREAD_ACTIVE

which, if defined, expand to integer values, designating overall execution and thread-specific active processing time bases, respectively.

3

The definition of macros for time bases other than TIME_UTC are optional. If defined, the corresponding time bases are supported by timespec_get and timespec_getres, and their values are positive. If defined, the value of the optional macro TIME_ACTIVE shall be different from the constants TIME_UTC and TIME_MONOTONIC and shall not change during the same program invocation. The optional macro TIME_THREAD_ACTIVE shall not be defined if the implementation does not support threads; its value shall be different from TIME_UTC, TIME_MONOTONIC, and TIME_ACTIVE, it shall be the same for all expansions of the macro for the same thread, and the value provided for one thread shall not be used by a different thread as the base argument of timespec_get or timespec_getres.

4

The types declared are size_t (described in 7.21);

clock_t
and
time_t
which are real types capable of representing times;
struct timespec
which holds an interval specified in seconds and nanoseconds (which may represent a calendar time based on a particular epoch); and
struct tm

which holds the components of a calendar time, called the broken-down time.

5

The range and precision of times representable in clock_t and time_t are implementation-defined. The timespec structure shall contain at least the following members, in any order. The semantics of the members and their normal ranges are expressed in the comments.373)

time_t          tv_sec;  // whole seconds -- ≥ 0
/* see the following */ tv_nsec; // nanoseconds -- [0, 999999999]

The tv_nsec member shall be an implementation-defined signed integer type capable of representing the range [0, 999999999].

6

The tm structure shall contain at least the following members, in any order.374) The semantics of the members and their normal ranges are expressed in the comments.

int tm_sec;   // seconds after the minute -- [0, 60]
int tm_min;   // minutes after the hour -- [0, 59]
int tm_hour;  // hours since midnight -- [0, 23]
int tm_mday;  // day of the month -- [1, 31]
int tm_mon;   // months since January -- [0, 11]
int tm_year;  // years since 1900
int tm_wday;  // days since Sunday -- [0, 6]
int tm_yday;  // days since January 1 -- [0, 365]
int tm_isdst; // Daylight Saving Time flag

The value of tm_isdst is positive if Daylight Saving Time is in effect, zero if Daylight Saving Time is not in effect, and negative if the information is not available.

7.29.2 Time manipulation functions

7.29.2.1 The clock function

1
#include <time.h>
clock_t clock(void);
Description
2

The clock function determines the processor time used.

Returns
3

The clock function returns the implementation’s best approximation of the active processing time associated with the program execution since the beginning of an implementation-defined era related only to the program invocation. To determine the time in seconds, the value returned by the clock function should be divided by the value of the macro CLOCKS_PER_SEC. If the processor time used is not available, the function returns the value (clock_t)(-1). If the value cannot be represented, the function returns an unspecified value.375)

7.29.2.2 The difftime function

1
#include <time.h>
double difftime(time_t time1, time_t time0);
Description
2

The difftime function computes the difference between two calendar times: time1 - time0.

Returns

3

The difftime function returns the difference expressed in seconds as a double.

7.29.2.3 The mktime function

1
#include <time.h>
time_t mktime(struct tm *timeptr);
Description
2

The mktime function converts the broken-down time, expressed as local time, in the structure pointed to by timeptr into a calendar time value with the same encoding as that of the values returned by the time function. The original values of the tm_wday and tm_yday components of the structure are ignored, and the original values of the other components are not restricted to the ranges indicated previously. If the local time to be used for the conversion is one that includes Daylight Saving Time adjustments, a positive or zero value for tm_isdst causes the mktime function to perform the conversion as if Daylight Saving Time, respectively, is or is not in effect for the specified time. A negative value causes it to attempt to determine whether Daylight Saving Time is in effect for the specified time; if it determines that Daylight Saving Time is in effect it produces the same result as an equivalent call with a positive tm_isdst value, otherwise it produces the same result as an equivalent call with a tm_isdst value of zero.376) On successful completion, the components of the structure are set to the same values that would be returned by a call to the localtime function with the calculated calendar time as its argument.

Returns
3

The mktime function returns the specified calendar time encoded as a value of type time_t. If the calendar time cannot be represented in the time_t encoding used for the return value or the value to be returned in the tm_year component of the structure pointed to by timeptr cannot be represented as an int, the function returns the value (time_t)(-1) and does not change the value of the tm_wday component of the structure.

4

EXAMPLE What day of the week is July 4, 2001?

#include <stdio.h>
#include <time.h>
static const char *const wday[] = {
      "Sunday", "Monday", "Tuesday", "Wednesday",
      "Thursday", "Friday", "Saturday", "-unknown-"
};
struct tm time_str;
/* ... */
time_str.tm_year  = 2001 - 1900;
time_str.tm_mon   = 7 - 1;
time_str.tm_mday  = 4;
time_str.tm_hour  = 0;
time_str.tm_min   = 0;
time_str.tm_sec   = 1;
time_str.tm_isdst = -1;
time_str.tm_wday  = 7;
mktime(&time_str);
printf("%s\n", wday[time_str.tm_wday]);

7.29.2.4 The timegm function

#include <time.h>
time_t timegm(struct tm *timeptr);

Description

2

The timegm function converts the broken-down time, expressed as UTC time, in the structure pointed to by timeptr into a calendar time value with the same encoding as that of the values returned by the time function. The original values of the tm_wday and tm_yday components of the structure are ignored, and the original values of the other components are not restricted to the ranges indicated previously. On successful completion, the values of the tm_wday and tm_yday components of the structure are set appropriately, and the other components are set to represent the specified calendar time, but with their values forced to the ranges indicated previously; the final value of tm_mday is not set until tm_mon and tm_year are determined.

Returns

3

The timegm function returns the specified calendar time encoded as a value of type time_t. If the calendar time cannot be represented in the time_t encoding used for the return value or the value to be returned in the tm_year component of the structure pointed to by timeptr cannot be represented as an int, the function returns the value (time_t)(-1) and does not change the value of the tm_wday component of the structure.

7.29.2.5 The time function

1
#include <time.h>
time_t time(time_t *timer);
Description
2

The time function determines the current calendar time. The encoding of the value is unspecified.

Returns
3

The time function returns the implementation’s best approximation to the current calendar time. The value (time_t)(-1) is returned if the calendar time is not available. If timer is not a null pointer, the return value is also assigned to the object it points to.

7.29.2.6 The timespec_get function

1
#include <time.h>
int timespec_get(struct timespec *ts, int base);
Description
2

The timespec_get function sets the interval pointed to by ts to hold the current calendar time based on the specified time base.

3

If base is TIME_UTC, the tv_sec member is set to the number of seconds since an implementationdefined epoch, truncated to a whole value and the tv_nsec member is set to the integral number of nanoseconds, rounded to the resolution of the system clock.377) The optional time base TIME_MONOTONIC is the same, but the reference point is an implementation-defined time point; different program invocations may or may not refer to the same reference points.378) For the same program invocation, the results of two calls to timespec_get with TIME_MONOTONIC such that the first happens before the second shall not be decreasing. It is implementation-defined if TIME_MONOTONIC accounts for time during which the execution environment is suspended.379) For the optional time

bases TIME_ACTIVE and TIME_THREAD_ACTIVE the result is similar, but the call measures the amount of active processing time associated with the whole program invocation or with the calling thread, respectively.

Returns

4

If the timespec_get function is successful it returns the nonzero value base; otherwise, it returns zero.

Recommended practice

5

It is recommended practice that timing results of calls to timespec_get with TIME_ACTIVE, if defined, and of calls to clock are as close to each other as their types, value ranges, and resolutions (obtained with timespec_getres and CLOCKS_PER_SEC, respectively) allow. Because of its wider value range and improved indications on error, timespec_get with time base TIME_ACTIVE should be used instead of clock by new code whenever possible.

7.29.2.7 The timespec_getres function

1
#include <time.h>
int timespec_getres(struct timespec *ts, int base);
Description
2

If ts is non-null and base is supported by the timespec_get function, the timespec_getres

function returns the resolution of the time provided by the timespec_get function for base in the timespec structure pointed to by ts. For each supported base, multiple calls to the timespec_getres function during the same program execution shall have identical results.

Returns
3

If the value base is supported by the timespec_get function, the timespec_getres function returns the nonzero value base; otherwise, it returns zero.

7.29.3 Time conversion functions

1

Functions with a _r suffix place the result of the conversion into the buffer referred by buf and return that pointer. These functions and the function strftime shall not be subject to data races, unless the time or calendar state is changed in a multi-thread execution.380)

2

Functions gmtime and localtime are the same as their counterparts suffixed with _r. In place of the parameter buf, they use a pointer to one or two broken-down time structures. Similarly, an array of char is commonly used by asctime and ctime. Execution of any of the functions that return a pointer to one of these objects may overwrite the information returned from any previous call to one of these functions that uses the same object. These functions are not reentrant and are not required to avoid data races with each other. Accessing the returned pointer after the thread that called the function that returned it has exited results in undefined behavior. The implementation shall behave as if no other library functions call these functions.

7.29.3.1 The asctime function

1
#include <time.h>
[[deprecated]] char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr);
Description
2

This function is obsolescent and should be avoided in new code.

3

The asctime function converts the broken-down time in the structure pointed to by timeptr into a string in the form

Sun Sep 16 01:03:52 1973\n\0
using the equivalent of the following algorithm.
[[deprecated]] char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr)
{
      static const char wday_name[7][3] = {
            "Sun", "Mon", "Tue", "Wed", "Thu", "Fri", "Sat"
      };
      static const char mon_name[12][3] = {
            "Jan", "Feb", "Mar", "Apr", "May", "Jun",
            "Jul", "Aug", "Sep", "Oct", "Nov", "Dec"
      };
      static char result[26];
      snprintf(result, 26, "%.3s %.3s%3d %.2d:%.2d:%.2d %d\n",
            wday_name[timeptr->tm_wday],
            mon_name[timeptr->tm_mon],
            timeptr->tm_mday, timeptr->tm_hour,
            timeptr->tm_min, timeptr->tm_sec,
            1900 + timeptr->tm_year);
      return result;
}
4

If any of the members of the broken-down time contain values that are outside their normal ranges,381) the behavior of the asctime function is undefined. Likewise, if the calculated year exceeds four digits or is less than the year 1000, the behavior is undefined.

Returns

5

The asctime function returns a pointer to the string.

7.29.3.2 The ctime function

1
#include <time.h>
[[deprecated]] char *ctime(const time_t *timer);
Description
2

This function is obsolescent and should be avoided in new code.

3

The ctime function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer to local time in the form of a string. They are equivalent to:

asctime(localtime(timer))
Returns
4

The ctime function returns the pointer returned by the asctime function with that broken-down time as argument.

Forward references: the localtime functions (7.29.3.4).

7.29.3.3 The gmtime functions

1
#include <time.h>
struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *timer);
struct tm *gmtime_r(const time_t *timer, struct tm *buf);

Description

2

The gmtime functions convert the calendar time pointed to by timer into a broken-down time, expressed as UTC.

Returns

3

The gmtime functions return a pointer to the broken-down time, or a null pointer if the specified time cannot be converted to UTC.

7.29.3.4 The localtime functions

1
#include <time.h>
struct tm *localtime(const time_t *timer);
struct tm *localtime_r(const time_t *timer, struct tm *buf);
Description
2

The localtime functions convert the calendar time pointed to by timer into a broken-down time, expressed as local time.

Returns
3

The localtime functions return a pointer to the broken-down time, or a null pointer if the specified time cannot be converted to local time.

7.29.3.5 The strftime function

1
#include <time.h>
size_t strftime(char * restrict s, size_t maxsize, const char * restrict format,
const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
Description
2

The strftime function places characters into the array pointed to by s as controlled by the string pointed to by format. The format shall be a multibyte character sequence, beginning and ending in its initial shift state. The format string consists of zero or more conversion specifiers and ordinary multibyte characters. A conversion specifier consists of a % character, possibly followed by an E or O modifier character (described later), followed by a character that determines the behavior of the conversion specifier. All ordinary multibyte characters (including the terminating null character) are copied unchanged into the array. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined. No more than maxsize characters are placed into the array.

3

Each conversion specifier shall be replaced by appropriate characters as described in the following list. The appropriate characters shall be determined using the LC_TIME category of the current locale and by the values of zero or more members of the broken-down time structure pointed to by timeptr, as specified in brackets in the description. If any of the specified values is outside the normal range, the characters stored are unspecified.

%a is replaced by the locale’s abbreviated weekday name. [tm_wday]

%A is replaced by the locale’s full weekday name. [tm_wday]

%b is replaced by the locale’s abbreviated month name. [tm_mon]

%B is replaced by the locale’s full month name. [tm_mon]

%c is replaced by the locale’s appropriate date and time representation. [all specified in 7.29.1]

%C is replaced by the year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer, as a decimal number (0099). [tm_year]

%% is replaced by %.

4

Some conversion specifiers can be modified by the inclusion of an E or O modifier character to indicate an alternative format or specification. If the alternative format or specification does not exist for the current locale, the modifier is ignored.

%Oy is replaced by the last 2 digits of the year, using the locale’s alternative numeric symbols.

5

%g, %G, and %V give values according to the ISO 8601 week-based year. In this system, weeks begin on a Monday and week 1 of the year is the week that includes January 4th, which is also the week that includes the first Thursday of the year, and is also the first week that contains at least four days in the year. If the first Monday of January is the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th, the preceding days are part of the last week of the preceding year; thus, for Saturday 2nd January 1999, %G is replaced by 1998 and %V is replaced by 53. If December 29th, 30th, or 31st is a Monday, it and any following days are part of week 1 of the following year. Thus, for Tuesday 30th December 1997, %G is replaced by 1998 and %V is replaced by 01.

6

If a conversion specifier is not one of the ones previously specified, the behavior is undefined.

7

In the "C" locale, the E and O modifiers are ignored and the replacement strings for the following specifiers are:

%a the first three characters of %A.

%A one of "Sunday", "Monday", ..., "Saturday".

%b the first three characters of %B.

%B one of "January", "February", ..., "December".

%c equivalent to "%a %b %e %T %Y".

%p one of "AM" or "PM".

%r equivalent to "%I:%M:%S %p".

%x equivalent to "%m/%d/%y".

%X equivalent to %T.

%Z implementation-defined.

Returns

8

If the total number of resulting characters including the terminating null character is not more than maxsize, the strftime function returns the number of characters placed into the array pointed to by s not including the terminating null character. Otherwise, zero is returned and the members of the array have an indeterminate representation.

7.30 Unicode utilities <uchar.h>

1

The header <uchar.h> declares one macro, a few types, and several functions for manipulating Unicode characters.

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_UCHAR_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

The types declared are mbstate_t (described in 7.31.1) and size_t (described in 7.21);

char8_t
which is an unsigned integer type used for 8-bit characters and is the same type as unsigned char;
char16_t
which is an unsigned integer type used for 16-bit characters and is the same type as uint_least16_t (described in 7.22.1.2); and
char32_t

which is an unsigned integer type used for 32-bit characters and is the same type as uint_least32_t (also described in 7.22.1.2).

7.30.1 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions

1

These functions have a parameter, ps, of type pointer to mbstate_t that points to an object that can completely describe the current conversion state of the associated multibyte character sequence, which the functions alter as necessary. If ps is a null pointer, each function uses its own internal mbstate_t object instead, which is initialized prior to the first call to the function to the initial conversion state; the functions are not required to avoid data races with other calls to the same function in this case. It is implementation-defined whether the internal mbstate_t object has thread storage duration; if it has thread storage duration, it is initialized to the initial conversion state prior to the first call to the function on the new thread. The implementation behaves as if no library function calls these functions with a null pointer for ps.

2

When used in the functions in this subclause, the encoding of char8_t, char16_t, and char32_t objects, and sequences of such objects, is UTF-8, UTF-16, and UTF-32, respectively. Similarly, the encoding of char and wchar_t, and sequences of such objects, is the execution and wide execution encodings (6.2.9), respectively.

7.30.1.1 The mbrtoc8 function

1
#include <uchar.h>
size_t mbrtoc8(char8_t * restrict pc8, const char * restrict s, size_t n,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

If s is a null pointer, the mbrtoc8 function is equivalent to the call:

mbrtoc8(nullptr, "", 1, ps)

In this case, the values of the parameters pc8 and n are ignored.

3

If s is not a null pointer, the mbrtoc8 function function inspects at most n bytes beginning with the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the next multibyte character

is complete and valid, it determines the values of the corresponding characters and then, if pc8 is not a null pointer, stores the value of the first (or only) such character in the object pointed to by pc8. Subsequent calls will store successive characters without consuming any additional input until all the characters have been stored. If the corresponding character is the null character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns

4

The mbrtoc8 function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current conversion state):

0 if the next n or fewer bytes complete the multibyte character that corresponds to the null character (which is the value stored).

between 1 and n inclusive if the next n or fewer bytes complete a valid multibyte character (which is the value stored); the value returned is the number of bytes that complete the multibyte character.

(size_t)(-3) if the next character resulting from a previous call has been stored (no bytes from the input have been consumed by this call).

(size_t)(-2) if the next n bytes contribute to an incomplete (but potentially valid) multibyte character, and all n bytes have been processed (no value is stored).382)

(size_t)(-1) if an encoding error occurs, in which case the next n or fewer bytes do not contribute to a complete and valid multibyte character (no value is stored); the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno, and the conversion state is unspecified.

7.30.1.2 The c8rtomb function

1
#include <uchar.h>
size_t c8rtomb(char * restrict s, char8_t c8, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

If s is a null pointer, the c8rtomb function is equivalent to the call

c8rtomb(buf, u8’\0’, ps)

where buf is an internal buffer.

3

If s is not a null pointer, the c8rtomb function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the character given or completed by c8 (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the array whose first element is pointed to by s, or stores nothing if c8 does not represent a complete character. At most MB_CUR_MAX bytes are stored. If c8 is a null character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns
4

The c8rtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including any shift sequences). When c8 is not a valid character, an encoding error occurs: the function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion state is unspecified.

7.30.1.3 The mbrtoc16 function

Synopsis

1
#include <uchar.h>
size_t mbrtoc16(char16_t * restrict pc16, const char * restrict s, size_t n,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);

Description

2

If s is a null pointer, the mbrtoc16 function is equivalent to the call:

mbrtoc16(nullptr, "", 1, ps)

In this case, the values of the parameters pc16 and n are ignored.

3

If s is not a null pointer, the mbrtoc16 function inspects at most n bytes beginning with the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the next multibyte character is complete and valid, it determines the values of the corresponding wide characters and then, if pc16 is not a null pointer, stores the value of the first (or only) such character in the object pointed to by pc16. Subsequent calls will store successive wide characters without consuming any additional input until all the characters have been stored. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns

4

The mbrtoc16 function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current conversion state):

0 if the next n or fewer bytes complete the multibyte character that corresponds to the null wide character (which is the value stored).

between 1 and n inclusive if the next n or fewer bytes complete a valid multibyte character (which is the value stored); the value returned is the number of bytes that complete the multibyte character.

(size_t)(-3) if the next character resulting from a previous call has been stored (no bytes from the input have been consumed by this call).

(size_t)(-2) if the next n bytes contribute to an incomplete (but potentially valid) multibyte character, and all n bytes have been processed (no value is stored).383)

(size_t)(-1) if an encoding error occurs, in which case the next n or fewer bytes do not contribute to a complete and valid multibyte character (no value is stored); the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno, and the conversion state is unspecified.

7.30.1.4 The c16rtomb function

1
#include <uchar.h>
size_t c16rtomb(char * restrict s, char16_t c16, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

If s is a null pointer, the c16rtomb function is equivalent to the call

c16rtomb(buf, u’\0’, ps)

where buf is an internal buffer.

3

If s is not a null pointer, the c16rtomb function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given or completed by c16 (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the array whose first element is pointed to by s, or stores nothing if c16 does not represent a complete character. At most MB_CUR_MAX bytes are stored. If c16 is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns

4

The c16rtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including any shift sequences). When c16 is not a valid wide character, an encoding error occurs: the function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion state is unspecified.

7.30.1.5 The mbrtoc32 function

1
#include <uchar.h>
size_t mbrtoc32(char32_t * restrict pc32, const char * restrict s, size_t n,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

If s is a null pointer, the mbrtoc32 function is equivalent to the call:

mbrtoc32(nullptr, "", 1, ps)

In this case, the values of the parameters pc32 and n are ignored.

3

If s is not a null pointer, the mbrtoc32 function inspects at most n bytes beginning with the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the next multibyte character is complete and valid, it determines the values of the corresponding wide characters and then, if pc32 is not a null pointer, stores the value of the first (or only) such character in the object pointed to by pc32. Subsequent calls will store successive wide characters without consuming any additional input until all the characters have been stored. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns
4

The mbrtoc32 function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current conversion state):

0 if the next n or fewer bytes complete the multibyte character that corresponds to the null wide character (which is the value stored).

between 1 and n inclusive if the next n or fewer bytes complete a valid multibyte character (which is the value stored); the value returned is the number of bytes that complete the multibyte character.

(size_t)(-3) if the next character resulting from a previous call has been stored (no bytes from the input have been consumed by this call).

(size_t)(-2) if the next n bytes contribute to an incomplete (but potentially valid) multibyte character, and all n bytes have been processed (no value is stored).384)

(size_t)(-1) if an encoding error occurs, in which case the next n or fewer bytes do not contribute to a complete and valid multibyte character (no value is stored); the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno, and the conversion state is unspecified.

7.30.1.6 The c32rtomb function

1
#include <uchar.h>
size_t c32rtomb(char * restrict s, char32_t c32, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

If s is a null pointer, the c32rtomb function is equivalent to the call

c32rtomb(buf, U’\0’, ps)

where buf is an internal buffer.

3

If s is not a null pointer, the c32rtomb function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given by c32 (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the array whose first element is pointed to by s. At most MB_CUR_MAX bytes are stored. If c32 is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns
4

The c32rtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including any shift sequences). When c32 is not a valid wide character, an encoding error occurs: the function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1);the conversion state is unspecified.

7.31 Extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h>

7.31.1 Introduction

1

The header <wchar.h> defines five macros, and declares four data types, one tag, and many functions.385)

2

The macro

__STDC_VERSION_WCHAR_H__

is an integer constant expression with a value equivalent to 202311L.

3

The types declared are wchar_t and size_t (both described in 7.21);

mbstate_t
which is a complete object type other than an array type that can hold the conversion state information necessary to convert between sequences of multibyte characters and wide characters;
wint_t
which is an integer type unchanged by default argument promotions that can hold any value corresponding to members of the extended character set, as well as at least one value that does not correspond to any member of the extended character set (see subsequent WEOF description);386) and
struct tm

which is declared as an incomplete structure type (the contents are described in 7.29.1).

4

The macros defined are NULL (described in 7.21); WCHAR_MIN, WCHAR_MAX, and WCHAR_WIDTH (described in 7.22); and

WEOF

which expands to a constant expression of type wint_t whose value does not correspond to any member of the extended character set.387) It is accepted (and returned) by several functions in this subclause to indicate end-of-file, that is, no more input from a stream. It is also used as a wide character value that does not correspond to any member of the extended character set.

5

The functions declared are grouped as follows:

  • Functions that perform input and output of wide characters, or multibyte characters, or both;
  • Functions that provide wide string numeric conversion;
  • Functions that perform general wide string manipulation;
  • Functions for wide string date and time conversion; and
  • Functions that provide extended capabilities for conversion between multibyte and wide character sequences.
6

Arguments to the functions in this subclause may point to arrays containing wchar_t values that do not correspond to members of the extended character set. Such values shall be processed according to the specified semantics, except that it is unspecified whether an encoding error occurs if such a value appears in the format string for a function in 7.31.2 or 7.31.5 and the specified semantics do not require that value to be processed by wcrtomb.

7

Unless explicitly stated otherwise, if the execution of a function described in this subclause causes copying to take place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

7.31.2 Formatted wide character input/output functions

1

The formatted wide character input/output functions shall behave as if there is a sequence point after the actions associated with each specifier.388)

7.31.2.1 The fwprintf function

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int fwprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The fwprintf function writes output to the stream pointed to by stream, under control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are converted for output. If there are insufficient arguments for the format, the behavior is undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored. The fwprintf function returns when the end of the format string is encountered.

3

The format is composed of zero or more directives: ordinary wide characters (not %), which are copied unchanged to the output stream; and conversion specifications, each of which results in fetching zero or more subsequent arguments, converting them, if applicable, according to the corresponding conversion specifier, and then writing the result to the output stream.

4

Each conversion specification is introduced by the wide character %. After the %, the following appear in sequence:

  • Zero or more flags (in any order) that modify the meaning of the conversion specification.
  • An optional minimum field width. If the converted value has fewer wide characters than the field width, it is padded with spaces (by default) on the left (or right, if the left adjustment flag, described later, has been given) to the field width. The field width takes the form of an asterisk

* (described later) or a nonnegative decimal integer.389)

  • An optional precision that gives the minimum number of digits to appear for the b, B, d, i, o, u,

x, and X conversions, the number of digits to appear after the decimal-point wide character for a, A, e, E, f, and F conversions, the maximum number of significant digits for the g and G conversions, or the maximum number of wide characters to be written for s conversions. The precision takes the form of a period (.) followed either by an asterisk * (described later) or by an optional nonnegative decimal integer; if only the period is specified, the precision is taken as zero. If a precision appears with any other conversion specifier, the behavior is undefined.

  • An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the argument.
  • A conversion specifier wide character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied.
5

As noted previously, a field width, or precision, or both, may be indicated by an asterisk. In this case, an int argument supplies the field width or precision. The arguments specifying field width, or precision, or both, shall appear (in that order) before the argument (if any) to be converted. A negative field width argument is taken as a - flag followed by a positive field width. A negative precision argument is taken as if the precision were omitted.

6

The flag wide characters and their meanings are:

- The result of the conversion is left-justified within the field. (It is right-justified if this flag is not specified.)

+ The result of a signed conversion always begins with a plus or minus sign. (It begins with a sign only when a value with a negative sign is converted if this flag is not specified.)390)

0 For b, B, d, i, o, u, x, X, a, A, e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, leading zeros (following any indication of sign or base) are used to pad to the field width rather than performing space padding, except when converting an infinity or NaN. If the 0 and - flags both appear, the 0 flag is ignored. For b, B, d, i, o, u, x, and X conversions, if a precision is specified, the 0 flag is ignored. For other conversions, the behavior is undefined.

7

The length modifiers and their meanings are:

hh Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a signed char or unsigned char argument (the argument will have been promoted according to the integer promotions, but its value shall be converted to signed char or unsigned char before printing); or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a signed char argument.

h Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a short int or unsigned short int argument (the argument will have been promoted according to the integer promotions, but its value shall be converted to short int or unsigned short int before printing); or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a short int argument.

l (ell) Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a long int or unsigned long int argument; that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a long int argument; that a following c conversion specifier applies to a wint_t argument; that a following s conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a wchar_t argument; or has no effect on a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier.

ll (ell-ell) Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a long

long int or unsigned long long int argument; or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a long long int argument.

j Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to an intmax_t or uintmax_t argument; or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to an intmax_t argument.

z Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a size_t or the corresponding signed integer type argument; or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a signed integer type corresponding to size_t argument.

t Specifies that a following b, B, d, i, o, u, x, or X conversion specifier applies to a ptrdiff_t or the corresponding unsigned integer type argument; or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a ptrdiff_t argument.

If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified previously, the behavior is undefined.

8

The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:

d,i The int argument is converted to signed decimal in the style [-]dddd. The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in fewer digits, it is expanded with leading zeros. The default precision is 1. The result of converting a zero value with a precision of zero is no wide characters.

b,B,o,u,x,X The unsigned int argument is converted to unsigned binary (b or B), unsigned octal (o), unsigned decimal (u), or unsigned hexadecimal notation (x or X) in the style dddd; the letters abcdef are used for x conversion and the letters ABCDEF for X conversion. The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in fewer digits, it is expanded with leading zeros. The default precision is 1. The result of converting a zero value with a precision of zero is no wide characters. The specifier B is optional and provides the same functionality as b, except for the # flag as previously specified. The PRIB macros from <inttypes.h> shall only be defined if the implementation follows the specification as given here.

f,F A double argument representing a floating-point number is converted to decimal notation in the style [-]ddd.ddd, where the number of digits after the decimal-point wide character is equal to the precision specification. If the precision is missing, it is taken as 6; if the precision is zero and the # flag is not specified, no decimal-point wide character appears. If a decimal-point wide character appears, at least one digit appears before it. The value is rounded to the appropriate number of digits.

A double argument representing an infinity is converted in one of the styles [-]inf or [-]infinity — which style is implementation-defined. A double argument representing a NaN is converted in one of the styles [-]nan or [-]nan(n-wchar-sequence) — which style, and

:
the meaning of any n-wchar-sequence, is implementation-defined. The F conversion specifier
produces INF, INFINITY, or NAN instead of inf, infinity, or nan, respectively.391)
if P>X4, the conversion is with style f (or F) and precision P(X+1).
otherwise, the conversion is with style e (or E) and precision P1.

a,A A double argument representing a floating-point number is converted in the style [-]0xh.hhhhp±d, where there is one hexadecimal digit (which is nonzero if the argument is a normalized floating-point number and is otherwise unspecified) before the decimal-point wide character 392) and the number of hexadecimal digits after it is equal to the precision; if the precision is missing and FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, then the precision is sufficient for an exact representation of the value; if the precision is missing and FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, then the precision is sufficient to distinguish393) values of type double, except that trailing zeros may be omitted; if the precision is zero and the # flag is not specified, no decimal-point wide character appears. The letters abcdef are used for a conversion and the letters ABCDEF for A conversion. The A conversion specifier produces a number with X and P instead of x and p. The exponent always contains at least one digit, and only as many more digits as necessary to represent the decimal exponent of 2. If the value is zero, the exponent is zero.

n The argument shall be a pointer to signed integer whose type is specified by the length modifier, if any, for the conversion specification, or shall be int if no length modifier is specified for the conversion specification. The number of wide characters written to the output stream so far by this call to fwprintf is stored into the integer object pointed to by the argument. No argument is converted, but one is consumed. If the conversion specification includes any flags, a field width, or a precision, the behavior is undefined.

% A % wide character is written. No argument is converted. The complete conversion specification shall be %%.

9

If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.394) fwprintf shall behave as if it uses va_arg with a type argument naming the type resulting from applying the default argument promotions to the type corresponding to the conversion specification and then converting the result of the va_arg expansion to the type corresponding to the conversion specification.395)

10

In no case does a nonexistent or small field width cause truncation of a field; if the result of a conversion is wider than the field width, the field is expanded to contain the conversion result.

11

For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value is correctly rounded to a hexadecimal floating number with the given precision.

Recommended practice

12

For a and A conversions, if FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2 and the result is not exactly representable in the given precision, the result should be one of the two adjacent numbers in hexadecimal floating style with the given precision, with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.

13

For e, E, f, F, g, and G conversions, if the number of significant decimal digits is at most the maximum value M of the T_DECIMAL_DIG macros (defined in <float.h>), then the result should be correctly rounded.396) If the number of significant decimal digits is more than M but the source value is exactly representable with M digits, then the result should be an exact representation with trailing zeros. Otherwise, the source value is bounded by two adjacent decimal strings L < U, both having M significant digits; the value of the resultant decimal string D should satisfy LDU, with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.

14

The uppercase B format specifier is made optional by the previous description, because it used to be available for extensions in previous versions of this document. Implementations that did not use an uppercase B as their own extension before are encouraged to implement it as previously described.

Returns

15

The fwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred or if the implementation does not support a specified width length modifier.

Environmental limits

16

The number of wide characters that can be produced by any single conversion shall be at least 4095.

17

EXAMPLE To print a date and time in the form "Sunday, July 3, 10:02" followed by π to five decimal places:

#include <math.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
/* ... */
wchar_t *weekday, *month;  // pointers to wide strings
int day, hour, min;
fwprintf(stdout, L"%ls, %ls %d, %.2d:%.2d\n",
      weekday, month, day, hour, min);
fwprintf(stdout, L"pi = %.5f\n", 4 * atan(1.0));
Forward references: the btowc function (7.31.6.1.1), the mbrtowc function (7.31.6.3.2).

7.31.2.2 The fwscanf function

Synopsis

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int fwscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

Description

2

The fwscanf function reads input from the stream pointed to by stream, under control of the wide string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment, using subsequent arguments as pointers to the objects to receive the converted input. If there are insufficient arguments for the format, the behavior is undefined. If the format is exhausted while arguments remain, the excess arguments are evaluated (as always) but are otherwise ignored.

3

The format is composed of zero or more directives: one or more white-space wide characters, an ordinary wide character (neither % nor a white-space wide character), or a conversion specification. Each conversion specification is introduced by the wide character %. After the %, the following appear in sequence:

  • An optional assignment-suppressing wide character *.
  • An optional decimal integer greater than zero that specifies the maximum field width (in wide characters).
  • An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the receiving object.
  • A conversion specifier wide character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied.
4

The fwscanf function executes each directive of the format in turn. When all directives have been executed, or if a directive fails (as detailed later in this subclause), the function returns. Failures are described as input failures (due to the occurrence of an encoding error or the unavailability of input characters), or matching failures (due to inappropriate input).

5

A directive composed of white-space wide character(s) is executed by reading input up to the first non-white-space wide character (which remains unread), or until no more wide characters can be read. The directive never fails.

6

A directive that is an ordinary wide character is executed by reading the next wide character of the stream. If that wide character differs from the directive, the directive fails and the differing and subsequent wide characters remain unread. Similarly, if end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevents a wide character from being read, the directive fails.

7

A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of matching input sequences, as described further in this subclause for each specifier. A conversion specification is executed in the following steps:

8

Input white-space wide characters are skipped, unless the specification includes a [, c, or n specifier.397)

9

An input item is read from the stream, unless the specification includes an n specifier. An input item is defined as the longest sequence of input wide characters which does not exceed any specified field width and which is, or is a prefix of, a matching input sequence.398) The first wide character, if any, after the input item remains unread. If the length of the input item is zero, the execution of the directive fails; this condition is a matching failure unless end-of-file, an encoding error, or a read error prevented input from the stream, in which case it is an input failure.

10

Except in the case of a % specifier, the input item (or, in the case of a %n directive, the count of input wide characters) is converted to a type appropriate to the conversion specifier. If the input item is not a matching sequence, the execution of the directive fails: this condition is a matching failure.

Unless assignment suppression was indicated by a *, the result of the conversion is placed in the object pointed to by the first argument following the format argument that has not already received a conversion result. If this object does not have an appropriate type, or if the result of the conversion cannot be represented in the object, the behavior is undefined.

11

The length modifiers and their meanings are:

hh Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to signed char or unsigned char.

h Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to short int or unsigned short int.

l (ell) Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to long int or unsigned long int; that a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to double; or that a following c, s, or [ conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to wchar_t.

ll (ell-ell) Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to long long int or unsigned long long int.

j Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to intmax_t or uintmax_t.

z Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to size_t or the corresponding signed integer type.

t Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to ptrdiff_t or the corresponding unsigned integer type.

wN Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument which is a pointer to an integer with a specific width where N is a positive decimal integer with no leading zeros. All minimum-width integer types (7.22.1.2) and exact-width integer types (7.22.1.1) defined in the header <stdint.h> shall be supported. Other supported values of N are implementation-defined.

wfN Specifies that a following b, d, i, o, u, x, X, or n conversion specifier applies to an argument which is a pointer to a fastest minimum-width integer with a specific width where N is a positive decimal integer with no leading zeros. All fastest minimum-width integer types (7.22.1.3) defined in the header <stdint.h> shall be supported. Other supported values of N are implementation-defined.

L Specifies that a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to long double.

H Specifies that a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to _Decimal32.

D Specifies that a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to _Decimal64.

DD Specifies that a following a, A, e, E, f, F, g, or G conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to _Decimal128.

If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified previously, the behavior is undefined.

12

In the following, the type of the corresponding argument for a conversion specifier shall be a pointer to a type determined by the length modifiers, if any, or specified by the conversion specifier. The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:

[ Matches a nonempty sequence of wide characters from a set of expected characters (the scanset).

% Matches a single % wide character; no conversion or assignment occurs. The complete conversion specification shall be %%.

13

If a conversion specification is invalid, the behavior is undefined.399)

14

The conversion specifiers A, E, F, G, and X are also valid and behave the same as, respectively, a, e, f, g, and x.

15

Trailing white-space wide characters (including new-line wide characters) are left unread unless matched by a directive. The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly determinable other than via the %n directive.

Returns

16

The fwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure or if the implementation does not support a specific width length modifier.

17

EXAMPLE 1 The call:

#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
/* ... */
int n, i; float x; wchar_t name[50];
n = fwscanf(stdin, L"%d%f%ls", &i, &x, name);
25 54.32E-1 thompson

will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and to name the sequence thompson\0.

18

EXAMPLE 2 The call:

#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
/* ... */
int i; float x; double y;
fwscanf(stdin, L"%2d%f%*d %lf", &i, &x, &y);
with input:
56789 0123 56a72

will assign to i the value 56 and to x the value 789.0, will skip past 0123, and will assign to y the value 56.0. The next wide character read from the input stream will be a.

Forward references: the wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions (7.31.4.1.2), the wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions (7.31.4.1.4), the wcrtomb function (7.31.6.3.3).

7.31.2.3 The swprintf function

1
#include <wchar.h>
int swprintf(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
...);
Description
2

The swprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf, except that the argument s specifies an array of wide characters into which the generated output is to be written, rather than written to a stream. No more than n wide characters are written, including a terminating null wide character, which is always added (unless n is zero).

Returns
3

The swprintf function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null wide character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be written.

7.31.2.4 The swscanf function

1
#include <wchar.h>
int swscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The swscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf, except that the argument s specifies a wide string from which the input is to be obtained, rather than from a stream. Reaching the end of the wide string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fwscanf function.

Returns

3

The swscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the swscanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.31.2.5 The vfwprintf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vfwprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Description
2

The vfwprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg invocations). The vfwprintf function does not invoke the va_end macro.400)

Returns
3

The vfwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.

4

EXAMPLE The following shows the use of the vfwprintf function in a general error-reporting routine.

#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
void error(char *function_name, wchar_t *format, ...)
{
      va_list args;
      va_start(args, format);
      // print out name of function causing error
      fwprintf(stderr, L"ERROR in %s: ", function_name);
      // print out remainder of message
      vfwprintf(stderr, format, args);
      va_end(args);
}

7.31.2.6 The vfwscanf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vfwscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Description
2

The vfwscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vfwscanf function does not invoke the va_end macro.400)

Returns

3

The vfwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vfwscanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.31.2.7 The vswprintf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vswprintf(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Description
2

The vswprintf function is equivalent to swprintf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswprintf function does not invoke the va_end macro.400)

Returns
3

The vswprintf function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null wide character, or a negative value if an encoding error occurred or if n or more wide characters were requested to be generated.

7.31.2.8 The vswscanf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vswscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Description
2

The vswscanf function is equivalent to swscanf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vswscanf function does not invoke the va_end macro.400)

Returns
3

The vswscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vswscanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.31.2.9 The vwprintf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vwprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);
Description
2

The vwprintf function is equivalent to wprintf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwprintf function does not invoke the va_end macro.400)

Returns

3

The vwprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.

7.31.2.10 The vwscanf function

1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vwscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);
Description
2

The vwscanf function is equivalent to wscanf, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vwscanf function does not invoke the va_end macro.400)

Returns
3

The vwscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the vwscanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.31.2.11 The wprintf function

1
#include <wchar.h>
int wprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The wprintf function is equivalent to fwprintf with the argument stdout interposed before the arguments to wprintf.

Returns
3

The wprintf function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred.

7.31.2.12 The wscanf function

1
#include <wchar.h>
int wscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
Description
2

The wscanf function is equivalent to fwscanf with the argument stdin interposed before the arguments to wscanf.

Returns
3

The wscanf function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before the first conversion (if any) has completed. Otherwise, the wscanf function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7.31.3 Wide character input/output functions

7.31.3.1 The fgetwc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
wint_t fgetwc(FILE *stream);

Description

2

If the end-of-file indicator for the input stream pointed to by stream is not set and a next wide character is present, the fgetwc function obtains that wide character as a wchar_t converted to a wint_t and advances the associated file position indicator for the stream (if defined).

Returns

3

If the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set, or if the stream is at end-of-file, the end-of-file indicator for the stream is set and the fgetwc function returns WEOF. Otherwise, the fgetwc function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to by stream. If a read error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and the fgetwc function returns WEOF. If an encoding error occurs (including too few bytes), the error indicator for the stream is set and the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno and the fgetwc function returns WEOF.401)

7.31.3.2 The fgetws function

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *fgetws(wchar_t * restrict s, int n, FILE * restrict stream);
Description
2

The fgetws function reads at most one less than the number of wide characters specified by n from the stream pointed to by stream into the array pointed to by s. No additional wide characters are read after a new-line wide character (which is retained) or after end-of-file. A null wide character is written immediately after the last wide character read into the array. If n is negative or zero, the behavior is undefined.

Returns
3

The fgetws function returns s if successful. If end-of-file is encountered and no characters have been read into the array, the contents of the array remain unchanged and a null pointer is returned. If a read or encoding error occurs during the operation, the array members have an indeterminate representation and a null pointer is returned.

7.31.3.3 The fputwc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
wint_t fputwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
Description
2

The fputwc function writes the wide character specified by c to the output stream pointed to by stream, at the position indicated by the associated file position indicator for the stream (if defined), and advances the indicator appropriately. If the file cannot support positioning requests, or if the stream was opened with append mode, the character is appended to the output stream.

Returns
3

The fputwc function returns the wide character written. If a write error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and fputwc returns WEOF. If an encoding error occurs, the error indicator for the stream is set and the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno and fputwc returns WEOF.

7.31.3.4 The fputws function

Synopsis

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int fputws(const wchar_t * restrict s, FILE * restrict stream);

Description

2

The fputws function writes the wide string pointed to by s to the stream pointed to by stream. The terminating null wide character is not written.

Returns

3

The fputws function returns EOF if a write or encoding error occurs; otherwise, it returns a nonnegative value.

7.31.3.5 The fwide function

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int fwide(FILE *stream, int mode);
Description
2

The fwide function determines the orientation of the stream pointed to by stream. If mode is greater than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream wide oriented. If mode is less than zero, the function first attempts to make the stream byte oriented.402) Otherwise, mode is zero and the function does not alter the orientation of the stream.

Returns
3

The fwide function returns a value greater than zero if, after the call, the stream has wide orientation, a value less than zero if the stream has byte orientation, or zero if the stream has no orientation.

7.31.3.6 The getwc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
wint_t getwc(FILE *stream);
Description
2

The getwc function is equivalent to fgetwc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so the argument should never be an expression with side effects.

Returns
3

The getwc function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to by stream, or WEOF.

7.31.3.7 The getwchar function

1
#include <wchar.h>
wint_t getwchar(void);
Description
2

The getwchar function is equivalent to getwc with the argument stdin.

Returns

3

The getwchar function returns the next wide character from the input stream pointed to by stdin, or WEOF.

7.31.3.8 The putwc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
wint_t putwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
Description
2

The putwc function is equivalent to fputwc, except that if it is implemented as a macro, it may evaluate stream more than once, so that argument should never be an expression with side effects.

Returns
3

The putwc function returns the wide character written, or WEOF.

7.31.3.9 The putwchar function

1
#include <wchar.h>
wint_t putwchar(wchar_t c);
Description
2

The putwchar function is equivalent to putwc with the second argument stdout.

Returns
3

The putwchar function returns the character written, or WEOF.

7.31.3.10 The ungetwc function

1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
wint_t ungetwc(wint_t c, FILE *stream);
Description
2

The ungetwc function pushes the wide character specified by c back onto the input stream pointed to by stream. Pushed-back wide characters will be returned by subsequent reads on that stream in the reverse order of their pushing. A successful intervening call (with the stream pointed to by stream) to a file positioning function (fseek, fsetpos, or rewind) discards any pushed-back wide characters for the stream. The external storage corresponding to the stream is unchanged.

3

One wide character of pushback is guaranteed, even if the call to the ungetwc function follows just after a call to a formatted wide character input function fwscanf, vfwscanf, vwscanf, or wscanf. If the ungetwc function is called too many times on the same stream without an intervening read or file positioning operation on that stream, the operation may fail.

4

If the value of c equals that of the macro WEOF, the operation fails and the input stream is unchanged.

5

A successful call to the ungetwc function clears the end-of-file indicator for the stream. The value of the file position indicator for the stream after reading or discarding all pushed-back wide characters is the same as it was before the wide characters were pushed back.403) For a text or binary stream, the value of its file position indicator after a successful call to the ungetwc function is unspecified until all pushed-back wide characters are read or discarded.

Returns

6

The ungetwc function returns the wide character pushed back, or WEOF if the operation fails.

7.31.4 General wide string utilities

1

The header <wchar.h> declares functions for wide string manipulation. Various methods are used for determining the lengths of the arrays, but in all cases a wchar_t* argument points to the initial (lowest addressed) element of the array. If an array is accessed beyond the end of an object, the behavior is undefined.

2

Where an argument declared as size_t n determines the length of the array for a function, n can have the value zero on a call to that function. Unless explicitly stated otherwise in the description of a particular function in this subclause, pointer arguments on such a call shall still have valid values, as described in 7.1.4. On such a call, a function that locates a wide character finds no occurrence, a function that compares two wide character sequences returns zero, and a function that copies wide characters copies zero wide characters.

7.31.4.1 Wide string numeric conversion functions

7.31.4.1.1 General
1

This subclause describes wide string analogs of the strtod family of functions (7.24.1.5, 7.24.1.6).404)

7.31.4.1.2 The wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions
1
#include <wchar.h>
double wcstod(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
float wcstof(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
long double wcstold(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
Description
2

The wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions convert the initial portion of the wide string pointed to by nptr to double, float, and long double representation, respectively. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space wide characters, a subject sequence resembling a floating constant or representing an infinity or NaN; and a final wide string of one or more unrecognized wide characters, including the terminating null wide character of the input wide string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to a floating-point number, and return the result.

3

The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign, then one of the following:

  • a nonempty sequence of decimal digits optionally containing a decimal-point wide character,

then an optional exponent part as defined for the corresponding single-byte characters in 6.4.4.3, excluding any digit separators (6.4.4.2);

The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input wide string, starting with the first non-white-space wide character, that is of the expected form. The subject sequence contains no wide characters if the input wide string is not of the expected form.

4

If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point number, the sequence of wide characters starting with the first digit or the decimal-point wide character (whichever occurs first) is interpreted as a floating constant according to the rules of 6.4.4.3, except that the decimal-point wide character is used in place of a period, and that if neither an exponent part nor a decimal-point wide character appears in a decimal floating-point number, or if a binary exponent part does not appear in a hexadecimal floating-point number, an exponent part of the appropriate type with value zero is assumed to follow the last digit in the string.

5

If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign, the sequence is interpreted as arithmetically negated.405)

6

A wide character sequence INF or INFINITY is interpreted as an infinity, if representable in the return type, else like a floating constant that is too large for the range of the return type. A wide character sequence NAN or NAN(n-wchar-sequenceopt) is interpreted as a quiet NaN, if supported in the return type, else like a subject sequence part that does not have the expected form; the meaning of the n-wchar sequence is implementation-defined.406)

7

A pointer to the final wide string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

8

If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form and FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, the value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded.

9

In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be accepted.

10

If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

Recommended practice

11

If the subject sequence has the hexadecimal form, FLT_RADIX is not a power of 2, and the result is not exactly representable, the result should be one of the two numbers in the appropriate internal format that are adjacent to the hexadecimal floating source value, with the extra stipulation that the error should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.

12

If the subject sequence has the decimal form and at most M significant digits, where M is the maximum value of the T_DECIMAL_DIG macros (defined in <float.h>), the result should be correctly rounded. If the subject sequence D has the decimal form and more than M significant digits, consider the two bounding, adjacent decimal strings L and U, both having M significant digits, such that the values of L, D, and U satisfy LDU. The result should be one of the (equal or adjacent) values that would be obtained by correctly rounding L and U according to the current rounding direction, with the extra stipulation that the error with respect to D should have a correct sign for the current rounding direction.407)

Returns

13

The functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, positive or unsigned zero is returned.

14

If the correct value overflows and default rounding is in effect (7.12.1), plus or minus HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, or HUGE_VALL is returned (according to the return type and sign of the value); if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, the integer expression errno acquires the value of ERANGE; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, the "overflow" floating-point exception is raised.

15

If the result underflows (7.12.1), the functions return a value whose magnitude is no greater than the smallest normalized positive number in the return type; if the integer expression math_errhandling

& MATH_ERRNO is nonzero, whether errno acquires the value ERANGE is implementation-defined; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, whether the "underflow" floating-point exception is raised is implementation-defined.

7.31.4.1.3 The wcstodN functions
1
#include <wchar.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 wcstod32(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
_Decimal64 wcstod64(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
_Decimal128 wcstod128(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
#endif
Description
2

The wcstodN functions convert the initial portion of the wide string pointed to by nptr to decimal floating type representation. First, they decompose the input wide string into three parts: an initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space wide characters; a subject sequence resembling a floating constant or representing an infinity or NaN; and a final wide string of one or more unrecognized wide characters, including the terminating null wide character of the input wide string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to a floating-point number, and return the result.

3

The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign, then one of the following:

  • a nonempty sequence of decimal digits optionally containing a decimal-point wide character, then an optional exponent part as defined in 6.4.4.3, excluding any digit separators (6.4.4.2)
  • a 0x or 0X, then a nonempty sequence of hexadecimal digits optionally containing a decimalpoint wide character, then an optional binary exponent part as defined in 6.4.4.3, excluding any digit separators (6.4.4.2)
  • INF or INFINITY, ignoring case
  • NAN or NAN(d-wchar-sequenceopt), ignoring case in the NAN part, where:
d-wchar-sequence:
digit
nondigit
d-wchar-sequence digit
d-wchar-sequence nondigit

The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input wide string, starting with the first non-white-space wide character, that is of the expected form. The subject sequence contains no wide characters if the input wide string is not of the expected form.

4

If the subject sequence has the expected form for a floating-point number, the sequence of wide characters starting with the first digit or the decimal-point wide character (whichever occurs first) is interpreted as a floating constant according to the rules of 6.4.4.3, except that the decimal-point wide character is used in place of a period, and that if neither an exponent part nor a decimal-point wide character appears in a decimal floating-point number, or if a binary exponent part does not appear in a hexadecimal floating-point number, an exponent part of the appropriate type with value zero is assumed to follow the last digit in the wide string. If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign, the sequence is interpreted as arithmetically negated before rounding and the sign s is set to 1, else s is set to 1.

5

If the subject sequence has the expected form for a decimal floating-point number, the value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded and the coefficient c and the quantum exponent q are determined by the rules in 6.4.4.3 for a decimal floating constant of decimal type.

6

If the subject sequence has the expected form for a hexadecimal floating-point number, the value resulting from the conversion is correctly rounded provided the subject sequence has at most M significant hexadecimal digits, where M(P1)/4+1 is implementation-defined, and P is the maximum precision of the supported radix-2 floating types and binary non-arithmetic interchange formats.408) If all subject sequences of hexadecimal form are correctly rounded, M may be regarded as infinite. If the subject sequence has more than M significant hexadecimal digits, the implementation may first round to M significant hexadecimal digits according to the applicable decimal rounding direction mode, signaling exceptions as though converting from a wider format, then correctly round the result of the shortened hexadecimal input to the result type. The preferred quantum exponent for the result is 0 if the hexadecimal number is exactly represented in the decimal type; the preferred quantum exponent for the result is the least possible if the hexadecimal number is not exactly represented in the decimal type.

7

A wide character sequence INF or INFINITY is interpreted as an infinity. A wide character sequence NAN or NAN(d-wchar-sequenceopt), is interpreted as a quiet NaN; the meaning of the d-wchar sequence is implementation-defined.409) A pointer to the final wide string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

8

In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be accepted.

9

If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is performed; the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

Returns

10

The wcstodN functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, the value of the triple (+1,0,0) is returned. If the correct value overflows:

  • the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno if the integer expression math_errhandling

& MATH_ERRNO is nonzero;

If the result underflows (7.12.1), whether errno acquires the value ERANGE if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERRNO is nonzero is implementation-defined; if the integer expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, whether the "underflow" floating-point exception is raised is implementation-defined.

7.31.4.1.4 The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions
1
#include <wchar.h>
long int wcstol(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr,
      int base);
long long int wcstoll(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr,
      int base);
unsigned long int wcstoul(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
      wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);
unsigned long long int wcstoull(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
      wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);
Description
2

The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions convert the initial portion of the wide string pointed to by nptr to long int, long long int, unsigned long int, and unsigned long

long int representation, respectively. First, they decompose the input string into three parts: an initial, possibly empty, sequence of white-space wide characters, a subject sequence resembling an integer represented in some radix determined by the value of base, and a final wide string of one or more unrecognized wide characters, including the terminating null wide character of the input wide string. Then, they attempt to convert the subject sequence to an integer, and return the result.

3

If the value of base is zero, the expected form of the subject sequence is that of an integer constant as described for the corresponding single-byte characters in 6.4.4.2, optionally preceded by a plus or minus sign, but not including an integer suffix or any optional digit separators (6.4.4.2). If the value of base is between 2 and 36 (inclusive), the expected form of the subject sequence is a sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix specified by base, optionally preceded by a plus or minus sign, but not including an integer suffix or any optional digit separators. The letters from a (or A) through z (or Z) are ascribed the values 10 through 35; only letters and digits whose ascribed values are less than that of base are permitted. If the value of base is 2, the characters 0b or 0B may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits, following the sign if present. If the value of base is 16, the wide characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits, following the sign if present.

4

The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input wide string, starting with the first non-white-space wide character, that is of the expected form. The subject sequence contains no wide characters if the input wide string is empty or consists entirely of white-space wide characters, or if the first non-white-space wide character is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit.

5

If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero, the sequence of wide characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant according to the rules of 6.4.4.2. If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is between 2 and 36, it is used as the base for conversion, ascribing to each letter its value as previously given. If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign, the resulting value is the negative of the converted value; for functions whose return type is an unsigned integer type this action is performed in the return type. A pointer to the final wide string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

6

In other than the "C" locale, additional locale-specific subject sequence forms may be accepted.

7

If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form, no conversion is performed; the

value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr, provided that endptr is not a null pointer.

Returns

8

The wcstol, wcstoll, wcstoul, and wcstoull functions return the converted value, if any. If no conversion could be performed, zero is returned. If the correct value is outside the range of representable values, LONG_MIN, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MIN, LLONG_MAX, ULONG_MAX, or ULLONG_MAX is returned (according to the return type sign of the value, if any), and the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno.

7.31.4.2 Wide string copying functions

7.31.4.2.1 The wcscpy function
1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcscpy(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2);
Description
2

The wcscpy function copies the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null wide character) into the array pointed to by s1.

Returns
3

The wcscpy function returns the value of s1.

7.31.4.2.2 The wcsncpy function
1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcsncpy(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The wcsncpy function copies not more than n wide characters (those that follow a null wide character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by s1.410)

3

If the array pointed to by s2 is a wide string that is shorter than n wide characters, null wide characters are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1, until n wide characters in all have been written.

Returns
4

The wcsncpy function returns the value of s1.

7.31.4.2.3 The wmemcpy function
1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wmemcpy(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The wmemcpy function copies n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 to the object pointed to by s1.

Returns
3

The wmemcpy function returns the value of s1.

7.31.4.2.4 The wmemmove function

Synopsis

1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wmemmove(wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);

Description

2

The wmemmove function copies n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 to the object pointed to by s1. Copying takes place as if the n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n wide characters that does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 or s2, and then the n wide characters from the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.

Returns

3

The wmemmove function returns the value of s1.

7.31.4.3 Wide string concatenation functions

7.31.4.3.1 The wcscat function
1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcscat(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2);
Description
2

The wcscat function appends a copy of the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null wide character) to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial wide character of s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1.

Returns
3

The wcscat function returns the value of s1.

7.31.4.3.2 The wcsncat function
1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcsncat(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The wcsncat function appends not more than n wide characters (a null wide character and those that follow it are not appended) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial wide character of s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1. A terminating null wide character is always appended to the result.411)

Returns
3

The wcsncat function returns the value of s1.

7.31.4.4 Wide string comparison functions

1

Unless explicitly stated otherwise, the functions described in this subclause order two wide characters the same way as two integers of the underlying integer type designated by wchar_t.

7.31.4.4.1 The wcscmp function
1
#include <wchar.h>
int wcscmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

Description

2

The wcscmp function compares the wide string pointed to by s1 to the wide string pointed to by s2.

Returns

3

The wcscmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero, accordingly as the wide string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the wide string pointed to by s2.

7.31.4.4.2 The wcscoll function
1
#include <wchar.h>
int wcscoll(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
Description
2

The wcscoll function compares the wide string pointed to by s1 to the wide string pointed to by s2, both interpreted as appropriate to the LC_COLLATE category of the current locale.

Returns
3

The wcscoll function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero, accordingly as the wide string pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the wide string pointed to by s2 when both are interpreted as appropriate to the current locale.

7.31.4.4.3 The wcsncmp function
1
#include <wchar.h>
int wcsncmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The wcsncmp function compares not more than n wide characters (those that follow a null wide character are not compared) from the array pointed to by s1 to the array pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The wcsncmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero, accordingly as the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the possibly null-terminated array pointed to by s2.

7.31.4.4.4 The wcsxfrm function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcsxfrm(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The wcsxfrm function transforms the wide string pointed to by s2 and places the resulting wide string into the array pointed to by s1. The transformation is such that if the wcscmp function is applied to two transformed wide strings, it returns a value greater than, equal to, or less than zero, corresponding to the result of the wcscoll function applied to the same two original wide strings. No more than n wide characters are placed into the resulting array pointed to by s1, including the terminating null wide character. If n is zero, s1 is permitted to be a null pointer.

Returns
3

The wcsxfrm function returns the length of the transformed wide string (not including the terminating null wide character). If the value returned is n or greater, the members of the array pointed to by s1 have an indeterminate representation.

4

EXAMPLE The value of the following expression is the length of the array needed to hold the transformation of the wide string pointed to by s:

1 + wcsxfrm(nullptr, s, 0)
7.31.4.4.5 The wmemcmp function
1
#include <wchar.h>
int wmemcmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);
Description
2

The wmemcmp function compares the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by s1 to the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The wmemcmp function returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than zero, accordingly as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than, equal to, or less than the object pointed to by s2.

7.31.4.5 Wide string search functions

7.31.4.5.1 Introduction
1

The stateless search functions in this section (wcschr, wcspbrk, wcsrchr, wmemchr, wcsstr) are generic functions. These functions are generic in the qualification of the array to be searched and will return a result pointer to an element with the same qualification as the passed array. If the array to be searched is const-qualified, the result pointer will be to a const-qualified element. If the array to be searched is not const-qualified,412) the result pointer will be to an unqualified element.

2

The external declarations of these generic functions have a concrete function type that returns a pointer to an unqualified element of type wchar_t (indicated by QWchar_t), and accepts a pointer to a const-qualified array of the same type to search. This signature supports all correct uses. If a macro definition of any of these generic functions is suppressed to access an actual function, the external declaration with this concrete type is visible.413)

3

The volatile and restrict qualifiers are not accepted on the elements of the array to search.

7.31.4.5.2 The wcschr generic function
1
#include <wchar.h>
QWchar_t *wcschr(QWchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
Description
2

The wcschr generic function locates the first occurrence of c in the wide string pointed to by s. The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide string.

Returns
3

The wcschr generic function returns a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if the wide character does not occur in the wide string.

7.31.4.5.3 The wcscspn function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcscspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

Description

2

The wcscspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the wide string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of wide characters not from the wide string pointed to by s2.

Returns

3

The wcscspn function returns the length of the segment.

7.31.4.5.4 The wcspbrk generic function
1
#include <wchar.h>
QWchar_t *wcspbrk(QWchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
Description
2

The wcspbrk generic function locates the first occurrence in the wide string pointed to by s1 of any wide character from the wide string pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The wcspbrk generic function returns a pointer to the wide character in s1, or a null pointer if no wide character from s2 occurs in s1.

7.31.4.5.5 The wcsrchr generic function
1
#include <wchar.h>
QWchar_t *wcsrchr(QWchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
Description
2

The wcsrchr generic function locates the last occurrence of c in the wide string pointed to by s. The terminating null wide character is considered to be part of the wide string.

Returns
3

The wcsrchr generic function returns a pointer to the wide character, or a null pointer if c does not occur in the wide string.

7.31.4.5.6 The wcsspn function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcsspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
Description
2

The wcsspn function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the wide string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of wide characters from the wide string pointed to by s2.

Returns
3

The wcsspn function returns the length of the segment.

7.31.4.5.7 The wcsstr generic function
1
#include <wchar.h>
QWchar_t *wcsstr(QWchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

Description

2

The wcsstr generic function locates the first occurrence in the wide string pointed to by s1 of the sequence of wide characters (excluding the terminating null wide character) in the wide string pointed to by s2.

Returns

3

The wcsstr generic function returns a pointer to the located wide string, or a null pointer if the wide string is not found. If s2 points to a wide string with zero length, the function returns s1.

7.31.4.5.8 The wcstok function
1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcstok(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2,
wchar_t ** restrict ptr);
Description
2

A sequence of calls to the wcstok function breaks the wide string pointed to by s1 into a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a wide character from the wide string pointed to by s2. The third argument points to a caller-provided wchar_t pointer into which the wcstok function stores information necessary for it to continue scanning the same wide string.

3

The first call in a sequence has a non-null first argument and stores an initial value in the object pointed to by ptr. Subsequent calls in the sequence have a null first argument and the object pointed to by ptr is required to have the value stored by the previous call in the sequence, which is then updated. The separator wide string pointed to by s2 may be different from call to call.

4

The first call in the sequence searches the wide string pointed to by s1 for the first wide character that is not contained in the current separator wide string pointed to by s2. If no such wide character is found, then there are no tokens in the wide string pointed to by s1 and the wcstok function returns a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is the start of the first token.

5

The wcstok function then searches from there for a wide character that is contained in the current separator wide string. If no such wide character is found, the current token extends to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches in the same wide string for a token return a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is overwritten by a null wide character, which terminates the current token.

6

In all cases, the wcstok function stores sufficient information in the pointer pointed to by ptr so that subsequent calls, with a null pointer for s1 and the unmodified pointer value for ptr, shall start searching just past the element overwritten by a null wide character (if any).

Returns
7

The wcstok function returns a pointer to the first wide character of a token, or a null pointer if there is no token.

8

EXAMPLE

#include <wchar.h>
static wchar_t str1[] = L"?a???b,,,#c";
static wchar_t str2[] = L"\t \t";
wchar_t *t, *ptr1, *ptr2;
t = wcstok(str1, L"?", &ptr1);     // t points to the token L"a"
t = wcstok(nullptr, L",", &ptr1);  // t points to the token L"??b"
t = wcstok(str2, L" \t", &ptr2);   // t is a null pointer
t = wcstok(nullptr, L"#,", &ptr1); // t points to the token L"c"
t = wcstok(nullptr, L"?", &ptr1);  // t is a null pointer
7.31.4.5.9 The wmemchr generic function
1
#include <wchar.h>
QWchar_t *wmemchr(QWchar_t *s, wchar_t c, size_t n);
Description
2

The wmemchr generic function locates the first occurrence of c in the initial n wide characters of the object pointed to by s.

Returns

3

The wmemchr generic function returns a pointer to the located wide character, or a null pointer if the wide character does not occur in the object.

7.31.4.6 Miscellaneous functions

7.31.4.6.1 The wcslen function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcslen(const wchar_t *s);
Description
2

The wcslen function computes the length of the wide string pointed to by s.

Returns
3

The wcslen function returns the number of wide characters that precede the terminating null wide character.

7.31.4.6.2 The wmemset function
1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wmemset(wchar_t *s, wchar_t c, size_t n);
Description
2

The wmemset function copies the value of c into each of the first n wide characters of the object pointed to by s.

Returns
3

The wmemset function returns the value of s.

7.31.5 Wide character time conversion functions

7.31.5.1 The wcsftime function

1
#include <time.h>
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcsftime(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t maxsize,
const wchar_t * restrict format, const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
Description
2

The wcsftime function is equivalent to the strftime function, except that:

  • The argument s points to the initial element of an array of wide characters into which the generated output is to be placed.
  • The argument maxsize indicates the limiting number of wide characters.
  • The argument format is a wide string and the conversion specifiers are replaced by corresponding sequences of wide characters.
  • The return value indicates the number of wide characters.
Returns
3

If the total number of resulting wide characters including the terminating null wide character is not more than maxsize, the wcsftime function returns the number of wide characters placed into the array pointed to by s not including the terminating null wide character. Otherwise, zero is returned and the members of the array have an indeterminate representation.

7.31.6 Extended multibyte/wide character conversion utilities

1

The header <wchar.h> declares an extended set of functions useful for conversion between multibyte characters and wide characters.

2

Most of the following functions — those that are listed as "restartable", 7.31.6.3 and 7.31.6.4 — take as a last argument a pointer to an object of type mbstate_t that is used to describe the current conversion state from a particular multibyte character sequence to a wide character sequence (or the reverse) under the rules of a particular setting for the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.

3

The initial conversion state corresponds, for a conversion in either direction, to the beginning of a new multibyte character in the initial shift state. A zero-valued mbstate_t object is (at least) one way to describe an initial conversion state. A zero-valued mbstate_t object can be used to initiate conversion involving any multibyte character sequence, in any LC_CTYPE category setting. If an mbstate_t object has been altered by any of the functions described in this subclause, and is then used with a different multibyte character sequence, or in the other conversion direction, or with a different LC_CTYPE category setting than on earlier function calls, the behavior is undefined.414)

4

On entry, each function takes the described conversion state (either internal or pointed to by an argument) as current. The conversion state described by the referenced object is altered as needed to track the shift state, and the position within a multibyte character, for the associated multibyte character sequence.

7.31.6.1 Single-byte/wide character conversion functions

7.31.6.1.1 The btowc function
1
#include <wchar.h>
wint_t btowc(int c);
Description
2

The btowc function determines whether c constitutes a valid single-byte character in the initial shift state.

Returns
3

The btowc function returns WEOF if c has the value EOF or if (unsigned char)c does not constitute a valid single-byte character in the initial shift state. Otherwise, it returns the wide character representation of that character.

7.31.6.1.2 The wctob function
1
#include <wchar.h>
int wctob(wint_t c);
Description
2

The wctob function determines whether c corresponds to a member of the extended character set whose multibyte character representation is a single byte when in the initial shift state.

Returns
3

The wctob function returns EOF if c does not correspond to a multibyte character with length one in the initial shift state. Otherwise, it returns the single-byte representation of that character as an unsigned char converted to an int.

7.31.6.2 Conversion state functions

7.31.6.2.1 The mbsinit function
1
#include <wchar.h>
int mbsinit(const mbstate_t *ps);

Description

2

If ps is not a null pointer, the mbsinit function determines whether the referenced mbstate_t object describes an initial conversion state.

Returns

3

The mbsinit function returns nonzero if ps is a null pointer or if the referenced object describes an initial conversion state; otherwise, it returns zero.

7.31.6.3 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions

1

These functions differ from the corresponding multibyte character functions of 7.24.7 (mblen, mbtowc , and wctomb) in that they have an extra parameter, ps, of type pointer to mbstate_t that points to an object that can completely describe the current conversion state of the associated multibyte character sequence. If ps is a null pointer, each function uses its own internal mbstate_t object instead, which is initialized prior to the first call to the function to the initial conversion state; the functions are not required to avoid data races with other calls to the same function in this case. It is implementation-defined whether the internal mbstate_t object has thread storage duration; if it has thread storage duration, it is initialized to the initial conversion state prior to the first call to the function on the new thread. The implementation behaves as if no library function calls these functions with a null pointer for ps.

2

Also unlike their corresponding functions, the return value does not represent whether the encoding is state-dependent.

7.31.6.3.1 The mbrlen function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t mbrlen(const char * restrict s, size_t n, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

The mbrlen function is equivalent to the call:

mbrtowc(nullptr, s, n, ps != nullptr ? ps: &internal)

where internal is the mbstate_t object for the mbrlen function, except that the expression designated by ps is evaluated only once.

Returns
3

The mbrlen function returns a value between zero and n, inclusive, (size_t)(-2), or (size_t) (-1).

Forward references: the mbrtowc function (7.31.6.3.2).
7.31.6.3.2 The mbrtowc function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t mbrtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc, const char * restrict s, size_t n,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

If s is a null pointer, the mbrtowc function is equivalent to the call:

mbrtowc(nullptr, "", 1, ps)

In this case, the values of the parameters pwc and n are ignored.

3

If s is not a null pointer, the mbrtowc function inspects at most n bytes beginning with the byte pointed to by s to determine the number of bytes needed to complete the next multibyte character (including any shift sequences). If the function determines that the next multibyte character is complete and valid, it determines the value of the corresponding wide character and then, if pwc is not a null pointer, stores that value in the object pointed to by pwc. If the corresponding wide character is the null wide character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns

4

The mbrtowc function returns the first of the following that applies (given the current conversion state):

0 if the next n or fewer bytes complete the multibyte character that corresponds to the null wide character (which is the value stored).

between 1 and n inclusive if the next n or fewer bytes complete a valid multibyte character (which is the value stored); the value returned is the number of bytes that complete the multibyte character.

(size_t)(-2) if the next n bytes contribute to an incomplete (but potentially valid) multibyte character, and all n bytes have been processed (no value is stored).415)

(size_t)(-1) if an encoding error occurs, in which case the next n or fewer bytes do not contribute to a complete and valid multibyte character (no value is stored); the value of the macro EILSEQ is stored in errno, and the conversion state is unspecified.

7.31.6.3.3 The wcrtomb function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcrtomb(char * restrict s, wchar_t wc, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

If s is a null pointer, the wcrtomb function is equivalent to the call

wcrtomb(buf, L’\0’, ps)

where buf is an internal buffer.

3

If s is not a null pointer, the wcrtomb function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given by wc (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the array whose first element is pointed to by s. At most MB_CUR_MAX bytes are stored. If wc is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns
4

The wcrtomb function returns the number of bytes stored in the array object (including any shift sequences). When wc is not a valid wide character, an encoding error occurs: the function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion state is unspecified.

7.31.6.4 Restartable multibyte/wide string conversion functions

1

These functions differ from the corresponding multibyte string functions of 7.24.8 (mbstowcs and wcstombs) in that they have an extra parameter, ps, of type pointer to mbstate_t that points to an object that can completely describe the current conversion state of the associated multibyte character sequence. If ps is a null pointer, each function uses its own internal mbstate_t object

instead, which is initialized prior to the first call to the function to the initial conversion state; the functions are not required to avoid data races with other calls to the same function in this case. It is implementation-defined whether the internal mbstate_t object has thread storage duration; if it has thread storage duration, it is initialized to the initial conversion state prior to the first call to the function on the new thread. The implementation behaves as if no library function calls these functions with a null pointer for ps.

2

Also unlike their corresponding functions, the conversion source parameter, src, has a pointer-topointer type. When the function is storing the results of conversions (that is, when dst is not a null pointer), the pointer object pointed to by this parameter is updated to reflect the amount of the source processed by that invocation.

7.31.6.4.1 The mbsrtowcs function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t mbsrtowcs(wchar_t * restrict dst, const char ** restrict src, size_t len,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

The mbsrtowcs function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps, from the array indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding wide characters. If dst is not a null pointer, the converted characters are stored into the array pointed to by dst. Conversion continues up to and including a terminating null character, which is also stored. Conversion stops earlier in two cases: when a sequence of bytes is encountered that does not form a valid multibyte character, or (if dst is not a null pointer) when len wide characters have been stored into the array pointed to by dst.416) Each conversion takes place as if by a call to the mbrtowc function.

3

If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null character) or the address just past the last multibyte character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null character and if dst is not a null pointer, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns
4

If the input conversion encounters a sequence of bytes that do not form a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the mbsrtowcs function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion state is unspecified. Otherwise, it returns the number of multibyte characters successfully converted, not including the terminating null character (if any).

7.31.6.4.2 The wcsrtombs function
1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcsrtombs(char * restrict dst, const wchar_t ** restrict src, size_t len,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Description
2

The wcsrtombs function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that begins in the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps. If dst is not a null pointer, the converted characters are then stored into the array pointed to by dst. Conversion continues up to and including a terminating null wide character, which is also stored. Conversion stops earlier in two cases: when a wide character is reached that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, or (if dst is not a null pointer) when the next multibyte character would exceed the limit of len total bytes to be stored into the

array pointed to by dst. Each conversion takes place as if by a call to the wcrtomb function.417)

3

If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null wide character) or the address just past the last wide character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null wide character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

Returns

4

If conversion stops because a wide character is reached that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the wcsrtombs function stores the value of the macro EILSEQ in errno and returns (size_t)(-1); the conversion state is unspecified. Otherwise, it returns the number of bytes in the resulting multibyte character sequence, not including the terminating null character (if any).

7.32 Wide character classification and mapping utilities <wctype.h>

7.32.1 Introduction

1

The header <wctype.h> defines one macro, and declares three data types and many functions.418)

2

The types declared are wint_t described in 7.31.1;

wctrans_t
which is a scalar type that can hold values which represent locale-specific character mappings; and
wctype_t

which is a scalar type that can hold values which represent locale-specific character classifications.

3

The macro defined is WEOF (described in 7.31.1).

4

The functions declared are grouped as follows:

  • Functions that provide wide character classification;
  • Extensible functions that provide wide character classification;
  • Functions that provide wide character case mapping;
  • Extensible functions that provide wide character mapping.
5

For all functions described in this subclause that accept an argument of type wint_t, the value shall be representable as a wchar_t or shall equal the value of the macro WEOF. If this argument has any other value, the behavior is undefined.

6

The behavior of these functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.

7.32.2 Wide character classification utilities

1

The header <wctype.h> declares several functions useful for classifying wide characters.

2

The term printing wide character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of wide characters, each of which occupies at least one printing position on a display device. The term control wide character refers to a member of a locale-specific set of wide characters that are not printing wide characters.

7.32.2.1 Wide character classification functions

1

The functions in this subclause return nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the argument wc conforms to that in the description of the function.

2

Each of the following functions returns true for each wide character that corresponds (as if by a call to the wctob function) to a single-byte character for which the corresponding character classification function from 7.4.2 returns true, except that the iswgraph and iswpunct functions may differ with respect to wide characters other than L’’ that are both printing and white-space wide characters.419)

Forward references: the wctob function (7.31.6.1.2).
7.32.2.1.1 The iswalnum function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswalnum(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswalnum function tests for any wide character for which iswalpha or iswdigit is true.

7.32.2.1.2 The iswalpha function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswalpha(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswalpha function tests for any wide character for which iswupper or iswlower is true, or any wide character that is one of a locale-specific set of alphabetic wide characters for which none of iswcntrl, iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.420)

7.32.2.1.3 The iswblank function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswblank(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswblank function tests for any wide character that is a standard blank wide character or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which iswspace is true and that is used to separate words within a line of text. The standard blank wide characters are the following: space (L’’), and horizontal tab (L’\t’). In the "C" locale, iswblank returns true only for the standard blank characters.

7.32.2.1.4 The iswcntrl function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswcntrl(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswcntrl function tests for any control wide character.

7.32.2.1.5 The iswdigit function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswdigit(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswdigit function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a decimal-digit character (as defined in 5.2.1).

7.32.2.1.6 The iswgraph function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswgraph(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswgraph function tests for any wide character for which iswprint is true and iswspace is false.421)

7.32.2.1.7 The iswlower function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswlower(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswlower function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a lowercase letter or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which none of iswcntrl, iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.

7.32.2.1.8 The iswprint function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswprint(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswprint function tests for any printing wide character.

7.32.2.1.9 The iswpunct function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswpunct(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswpunct function tests for any printing wide character that is one of a locale-specific set of punctuation wide characters for which neither iswspace nor iswalnum is true.421)

7.32.2.1.10 The iswspace function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswspace(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswspace function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a locale-specific set of white-space wide characters for which none of iswalnum, iswgraph, or iswpunct is true.

7.32.2.1.11 The iswupper function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswupper(wint_t wc);

Description

2

The iswupper function tests for any wide character that corresponds to an uppercase letter or is one of a locale-specific set of wide characters for which none of iswcntrl, iswdigit, iswpunct, or iswspace is true.

7.32.2.1.12 The iswxdigit function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswxdigit(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The iswxdigit function tests for any wide character that corresponds to a hexadecimal-digit character (as defined in 6.4.4.2).

7.32.2.2 Extensible wide character classification functions

1

The functions wctype and iswctype provide extensible wide character classification as well as testing equivalent to that performed by the functions described in the previous subclause (7.32.2.1).

7.32.2.2.1 The iswctype function
1
#include <wctype.h>
int iswctype(wint_t wc, wctype_t desc);
Description
2

The iswctype function determines whether the wide character wc has the property described by desc. The current setting of the LC_CTYPE category shall be the same as during the call to wctype that returned the value desc.

3

Each of the following expressions has a truth-value equivalent to the call to the wide character classification function (7.32.2.1) in the comment that follows the expression:

iswctype(wc, wctype("alnum"))    // iswalnum(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("alpha"))    // iswalpha(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("blank"))    // iswblank(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("cntrl"))    // iswcntrl(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("digit"))    // iswdigit(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("graph"))    // iswgraph(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("lower"))    // iswlower(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("print"))    // iswprint(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("punct"))    // iswpunct(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("space"))    // iswspace(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("upper"))    // iswupper(wc)
iswctype(wc, wctype("xdigit"))   // iswxdigit(wc)
Returns
4

The iswctype function returns nonzero (true) if and only if the value of the wide character wc has the property described by desc. If desc is zero, the iswctype function returns zero (false).

Forward references: the wctype function (7.32.2.2.2).
7.32.2.2.2 The wctype function
1
#include <wctype.h>
wctype_t wctype(const char *property);

Description

2

The wctype function constructs a value with type wctype_t that describes a class of wide characters identified by the string argument property.

3

The strings listed in the description of the iswctype function shall be valid in all locales as property arguments to the wctype function.

Returns

4

If property identifies a valid class of wide characters according to the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale, the wctype function returns a nonzero value that is valid as the second argument to the iswctype function; otherwise, it returns zero.

7.32.3 Wide character case mapping utilities

1

The header <wctype.h> declares several functions useful for mapping wide characters.

7.32.3.1 Wide character case mapping functions

7.32.3.1.1 The towlower function
1
#include <wctype.h>
wint_t towlower(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The towlower function converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter.

Returns
3

If the argument is a wide character for which iswupper is true and there are one or more corresponding wide characters, as specified by the current locale, for which iswlower is true, the towlower function returns one of the corresponding wide characters (always the same one for any given locale); otherwise, the argument is returned unchanged.

7.32.3.1.2 The towupper function
1
#include <wctype.h>
wint_t towupper(wint_t wc);
Description
2

The towupper function converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter.

Returns
3

If the argument is a wide character for which iswlower is true and there are one or more corresponding wide characters, as specified by the current locale, for which iswupper is true, the towupper function returns one of the corresponding wide characters (always the same one for any given locale); otherwise, the argument is returned unchanged.

7.32.3.2 Extensible wide character case mapping functions

1

The functions wctrans and towctrans provide extensible wide character mapping as well as case mapping equivalent to that performed by the functions described in the previous subclause (7.32.3.1).

7.32.3.2.1 The towctrans function
1
#include <wctype.h>
wint_t towctrans(wint_t wc, wctrans_t desc);

Description

2

The towctrans function maps the wide character wc using the mapping described by desc. The current setting of the LC_CTYPE category shall be the same as during the call to wctrans that returned the value desc.

3

Each of the following expressions behaves the same as the call to the wide character case mapping function (7.32.3.1) in the comment that follows the expression:

towctrans(wc, wctrans("tolower"))    // towlower(wc)
towctrans(wc, wctrans("toupper"))    // towupper(wc)

Returns

4

The towctrans function returns the mapped value of wc using the mapping described by desc. If desc is zero, the towctrans function returns the value of wc.

7.32.3.2.2 The wctrans function
1
#include <wctype.h>
wctrans_t wctrans(const char *property);
Description
2

The wctrans function constructs a value with type wctrans_t that describes a mapping between wide characters identified by the string argument property.

3

The strings listed in the description of the towctrans function shall be valid in all locales as property arguments to the wctrans function.

Returns
4

If property identifies a valid mapping of wide characters according to the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale, the wctrans function returns a nonzero value that is valid as the second argument to the towctrans function; otherwise, it returns zero.

7.33 Future library directions

1

Although grouped under individual headers, all the external names identified as reserved identifiers or potentially reserved identifiers in this subclause remain so regardless of which headers are included in the program.

7.33.1 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>

1

The function names

cacospi casinpi catanpi ccompoundn ccospi cerfc cerf

cexp10m1 cexp10 cexp2m1 cexp2 cexpm1 clgamma clog10p1

clog10 clog1p clog2p1 clog2 clogp1 cpown cpowr

crootn crsqrt csinpi ctanpi ctgamma

and the same names suffixed with f or l are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <complex.h> header.

7.33.2 Character handling <ctype.h>

1

Function names that begin with either is or to, and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <ctype.h> header.

7.33.3 Errors <errno.h>

1

Macros that begin with E and a digit or E and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros defined in the <errno.h> header by a future revision of this document or by an implementation.

7.33.4 Floating-point environment <fenv.h>

1

Macros that begin with FE_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros defined in the <fenv.h> header by a future revision of this document or by an implementation.

7.33.5 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>

1

Macros that begin with DBL_, DEC32_, DEC64_, DEC128_, DEC_, FLT_, or LDBL_ and an uppercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the macros defined in the <float.h> header.

2

Use of the DECIMAL_DIG macro is an obsolescent feature. A similar type-specific macro, such as LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG, can be used instead.

3

The use of FLT_HAS_SUBNORM, DBL_HAS_SUBNORM, and LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM macros is an obsolescent feature.

7.33.6 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>

1

Macros that begin with either PRI or SCN, and either a lowercase letter, B, or X are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the macros defined in the <inttypes.h> header.

2

Function names that begin with str, or wcs and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers may be added to the declarations in the <inttypes.h> header.

7.33.7 Localization <locale.h>

1

Macros that begin with LC_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros defined in the <locale.h> header by a future revision of this document or by an implementation.

7.33.8 Mathematics <math.h>

1

Macros that begin with FP_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros defined in the <math.h> header by a future revision of this document or by an implementation.

2

Macros that begin with MATH_ and an uppercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the macros in the <math.h> header.

3

Function names that begin with is and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <math.h> header.

4

Function names that begin with cr_ are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the <math.h> header. The cr_ prefix is intended to indicate a correctly rounded version of the function.

5

Use of the macros INFINITY, DEC_INFINITY, NAN, and DEC_NAN in <math.h> is an obsolescent feature. Instead, use the same macros in <float.h>.

7.33.9 Signal handling <signal.h>

1

Macros that begin with either SIG and an uppercase letter or SIG_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros defined in the <signal.h> header by a future revision of this document or by an implementation.

7.33.10 Atomics <stdatomic.h>

1

Macros that begin with ATOMIC_ and an uppercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the macros defined in the <stdatomic.h> header. Typedef names that begin with either atomic_ or memory_, and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <stdatomic.h> header. Enumeration constants that begin with memory_order_ and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the definition of the memory_order type in the <stdatomic.h> header. Function names that begin with atomic_ and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <stdatomic.h> header.

7.33.11 Boolean type and values <stdbool.h>

1

The macro __bool_true_false_are_defined is an obsolescent feature.

7.33.12 Bit and byte utilities <stdbit.h>

1

Type and function names that begin with stdc_ are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <stdbit.h> header.

7.33.13 Checked Arithmetic Functions <stdckdint.h>

1

Type and function names that begin with ckd_ are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <stdckdint.h> header.

7.33.14 Integer types <stdint.h>

1

Typedef names beginning with int or uint and ending with _t are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the types defined in the <stdint.h> header. Macro names beginning with INT or UINT and ending with _MAX, _MIN, _WIDTH, or _C are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the macros defined in the <stdint.h> header.

7.33.15 Input/output <stdio.h>

1

Lowercase letters may be added to the conversion specifiers and length modifiers in fprintf and fscanf. Other characters may be used in extensions. The specifier B for printf may become mandatory in future versions of this document.

2

The use of ungetc on a binary stream where the file position indicator is zero prior to the call is an obsolescent feature.

7.33.16 General utilities <stdlib.h>

1

Function names that begin with str or wcs and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <stdlib.h> header.

2

Suppressing the macro definition of bsearch to access the actual function is an obsolescent feature.

7.33.17 String handling <string.h>

1

Function names that begin with str, mem, or wcs and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <string.h> header.

2

Suppressing the macro definitions of memchr, strchr, strpbrk, strrchr, or strstr to access the corresponding actual function is an obsolescent feature.

7.33.18 Date and time <time.h>

1

Macros beginning with TIME_ and an uppercase letter may be added to the macros in the <time.h> header by a future revision of this document or by an implementation.

2

The time bases TIME_MONOTONIC, TIME_ACTIVE and TIME_THREAD_ACTIVE may become mandatory in future versions of this standard.

7.33.19 Threads <threads.h>

1

Function names, type names, and enumeration constants that begin with either cnd_, mtx_, thrd_, or tss_, and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <threads.h> header.

7.33.20 Extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h>

1

Function names that begin with wcs and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <wchar.h> header.

2

Lowercase letters may be added to the conversion specifiers and length modifiers in fwprintf and fwscanf. Other characters may be used in extensions.

3

Suppressing the macro definitions of wcschr, wcspbrk, wcsrchr, wmemchr, or wcsstr to access the corresponding actual function is an obsolescent feature.

7.33.21 Wide character classification and mapping utilities <wctype.h>

1

Function names that begin with is or to and a lowercase letter are potentially reserved identifiers and may be added to the declarations in the <wctype.h> header.

A Language syntax summary

A.1 Notation The notation is described in 6.1.

A.2 Lexical grammar

A.2.1 Lexical elements

token:
keyword
identifier
constant
string-literal
punctuator
preprocessing-token:
header-name
identifier
pp-number
character-constant
string-literal
punctuator
each universal character name that cannot be one of the above
each non-white-space character that cannot be one of the above

A.2.2 Keywords

keyword: one of

alignas alignof

auto bool break

case char const constexpr

continue

default

do double

else enum extern

false float

for goto

if inline

int long nullptr register restrict

return

short signed sizeof static static_assert

struct switch thread_local

true typedef

typeof typeof_unqual

union unsigned

void volatile

while _Atomic _BitInt _Complex _Decimal128

_Decimal32 _Decimal64

_Generic _Imaginary

_Noreturn

A.2.3 Identifiers

identifier:
identifier-start
identifier identifier-continue
identifier-start:
nondigit
XID_Start character
universal character name of class XID_Start
identifier-continue:
digit
nondigit
XID_Continue character
universal character name of class XID_Continue
nondigit: one of
_ a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
digit: one of
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A.2.4 Universal character names

universal-character-name:
\u hex-quad
\U hex-quad hex-quad
hex-quad:
hexadecimal-digit hexadecimal-digit hexadecimal-digit hexadecimal-digit

A.2.5 Constants

constant:
integer-constant
floating-constant
enumeration-constant
character-constant
predefined-constant
integer-constant:
decimal-constant integer-suffixopt
octal-constant integer-suffixopt
hexadecimal-constant integer-suffixopt
binary-constant integer-suffixopt
decimal-constant:
nonzero-digit
decimal-constant opt digit
octal-constant:
0
octal-constant opt octal-digit
hexadecimal-constant:
hexadecimal-prefix hexadecimal-digit-sequence
binary-constant:
binary-prefix binary-digit
binary-constant opt binary-digit
hexadecimal-prefix: one of
0x 0X
binary-prefix: one of
0b 0B
nonzero-digit: one of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
octal-digit: one of
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
hexadecimal-digit-sequence:
hexadecimal-digit
hexadecimal-digit-sequence opt hexadecimal-digit
hexadecimal-digit: one of
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
a b c d e f
A B C D E F
binary-digit: one of
0 1
integer-suffix:
unsigned-suffix long-suffixopt
unsigned-suffix long-long-suffix
unsigned-suffix bit-precise-int-suffix
long-suffix unsigned-suffixopt
long-long-suffix unsigned-suffixopt
bit-precise-int-suffix unsigned-suffixopt
bit-precise-int-suffix: one of
wb WB
unsigned-suffix: one of
u U
long-suffix: one of
l L
long-long-suffix: one of
ll LL
floating-constant:
decimal-floating-constant
hexadecimal-floating-constant
decimal-floating-constant:
fractional-constant exponent-partopt floating-suffixopt
digit-sequence exponent-part floating-suffixopt
hexadecimal-floating-constant:
hexadecimal-prefix hexadecimal-fractional-constant
binary-exponent-part floating-suffixopt
hexadecimal-prefix hexadecimal-digit-sequence
binary-exponent-part floating-suffixopt
fractional-constant:
digit-sequenceopt . digit-sequence
digit-sequence .
exponent-part:
e signopt digit-sequence
E signopt digit-sequence
sign: one of
+ -
digit-sequence:
digit
digit-sequence opt digit
hexadecimal-fractional-constant:
hexadecimal-digit-sequenceopt . hexadecimal-digit-sequence
hexadecimal-digit-sequence .
binary-exponent-part:
p signopt digit-sequence
P signopt digit-sequence
floating-suffix: one of
f l F L df dd dl DF DD DL
enumeration-constant:
identifier
character-constant:
encoding-prefixopt c-char-sequence
encoding-prefix: one of
u8 u U L
c-char-sequence:
c-char
c-char-sequence c-char
c-char:
any member of the source character set except
the single-quote , backslash \, or new-line character
escape-sequence
escape-sequence:
simple-escape-sequence
octal-escape-sequence
hexadecimal-escape-sequence
universal-character-name
simple-escape-sequence: one of
\’ \" \? \\
\a \b \f \n \r \t \v
octal-escape-sequence:
\ octal-digit
\ octal-digit octal-digit
\ octal-digit octal-digit octal-digit
hexadecimal-escape-sequence:
\x hexadecimal-digit
hexadecimal-escape-sequence hexadecimal-digit
predefined-constant:
false
true
nullptr

A.2.6 String literals

string-literal:
encoding-prefixopt " s-char-sequenceopt "
s-char-sequence:
s-char
s-char-sequence s-char
s-char:
any member of the source character set except
the double-quote ", backslash \, or new-line character
escape-sequence

A.2.7 Punctuators

punctuator: one of
[ ] ( ) { } . ->
++ -- & * + - ~ !
/ % << >> < > <= >= == != ^ | && ||
? : :: ; ...
= *= /= %= += -= <<= >>= &= ^= |=
, # ##
<: :> <% %> %: %:%:

A.2.8 Header names

header-name:
< h-char-sequence >
" q-char-sequence "
h-char-sequence:
h-char
h-char-sequence h-char
h-char:
any member of the source character set except
the new-line character and >
q-char-sequence:
q-char
q-char-sequence q-char
q-char:
any member of the source character set except
the new-line character and "

A.2.9 Preprocessing numbers

pp-number:
digit
. digit
pp-number identifier-continue
pp-number digit
pp-number nondigit
pp-number e sign
pp-number E sign
pp-number p sign
pp-number P sign
pp-number .

A.3 Phrase structure grammar

A.3.1 Expressions

primary-expression:
identifier
constant
string-literal
( expression )
generic-selection
generic-selection:
_Generic ( assignment-expression , generic-assoc-list )
generic-assoc-list:
generic-association
generic-assoc-list , generic-association
generic-association:
type-name : assignment-expression
default : assignment-expression
postfix-expression:
primary-expression
postfix-expression [ expression ]
postfix-expression ( argument-expression-listopt )
postfix-expression . identifier
postfix-expression -> identifier
postfix-expression ++
postfix-expression --
compound-literal
argument-expression-list:
assignment-expression
argument-expression-list , assignment-expression

(6.5.3.6) compound-literal: ( storage-class-specifiersopt type-name ) braced-initializer (6.5.3.6) storage-class-specifiers: storage-class-specifier storage-class-specifiers storage-class-specifier

unary-expression:
postfix-expression
++ unary-expression
-- unary-expression
unary-operator cast-expression
sizeof unary-expression
sizeof ( type-name )
alignof ( type-name )
unary-operator: one of
& * + - ~ !
cast-expression:
unary-expression
( type-name ) cast-expression
multiplicative-expression:
cast-expression
multiplicative-expression * cast-expression
multiplicative-expression / cast-expression
multiplicative-expression % cast-expression
additive-expression:
multiplicative-expression
additive-expression + multiplicative-expression
additive-expression - multiplicative-expression
shift-expression:
additive-expression
shift-expression << additive-expression
shift-expression >> additive-expression
relational-expression:
shift-expression
relational-expression < shift-expression
relational-expression > shift-expression
relational-expression <= shift-expression
relational-expression >= shift-expression
equality-expression:
relational-expression
equality-expression == relational-expression
equality-expression != relational-expression
AND-expression:
equality-expression
AND-expression & equality-expression
exclusive-OR-expression:
AND-expression
exclusive-OR-expression ^ AND-expression
inclusive-OR-expression:
exclusive-OR-expression
inclusive-OR-expression | exclusive-OR-expression
logical-AND-expression:
inclusive-OR-expression
logical-AND-expression && inclusive-OR-expression
logical-OR-expression:
logical-AND-expression
logical-OR-expression || logical-AND-expression
conditional-expression:
logical-OR-expression
logical-OR-expression ? expression : conditional-expression
assignment-expression:
conditional-expression
unary-expression assignment-operator assignment-expression
assignment-operator: one of
= *= /= %= += -= <<= >>= &= ^= |=
expression:
assignment-expression
expression , assignment-expression
constant-expression:
conditional-expression

A.3.2 Declarations

declaration:
declaration-specifiers init-declarator-listopt ;
attribute-specifier-sequence declaration-specifiers init-declarator-list ;
static_assert-declaration
attribute-declaration
declaration-specifiers:
declaration-specifier attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
declaration-specifier declaration-specifiers
declaration-specifier:
storage-class-specifier
type-specifier-qualifier
function-specifier
init-declarator-list:
init-declarator
init-declarator-list , init-declarator
init-declarator:
declarator
declarator = initializer
attribute-declaration:
attribute-specifier-sequence ;
storage-class-specifier:
auto
constexpr
extern
register
static
thread_local
typedef
type-specifier:
void
char
short
int
long
float
double
signed
unsigned
_BitInt ( constant-expression )
bool
_Complex
_Decimal32
_Decimal64
_Decimal128
atomic-type-specifier
struct-or-union-specifier
enum-specifier
typedef-name
typeof-specifier
struct-or-union-specifier:
struct-or-union attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifieropt { member-declaration-list }
struct-or-union attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifier
struct-or-union:
struct
union
member-declaration-list:
member-declaration
member-declaration-list member-declaration
member-declaration:
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt specifier-qualifier-list member-declarator-listopt ;
static_assert-declaration
specifier-qualifier-list:
type-specifier-qualifier attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
type-specifier-qualifier specifier-qualifier-list
type-specifier-qualifier:
type-specifier
type-qualifier
alignment-specifier
member-declarator-list:
member-declarator
member-declarator-list , member-declarator
member-declarator:
declarator
declaratoropt : constant-expression
enum-specifier:
enum attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifieropt enum-type-specifieropt
{ enumerator-list }
enum attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifieropt enum-type-specifieropt
{ enumerator-list , }
enum identifier enum-type-specifieropt
enumerator-list:
enumerator
enumerator-list , enumerator
enumerator:
enumeration-constant attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
enumeration-constant attribute-specifier-sequenceopt = constant-expression
enum-type-specifier:
: specifier-qualifier-list
atomic-type-specifier:
_Atomic ( type-name )
typeof-specifier:
typeof ( typeof-specifier-argument )
typeof_unqual ( typeof-specifier-argument )
typeof-specifier-argument:
expression
type-name
type-qualifier:
const
restrict
volatile
_Atomic
function-specifier:
inline
_Noreturn
alignment-specifier:
alignas ( type-name )
alignas ( constant-expression )
declarator:
pointeropt direct-declarator
direct-declarator:
identifier attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
( declarator )
array-declarator attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
function-declarator attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
array-declarator:
direct-declarator [ type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expressionopt ]
direct-declarator [ static type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expression ]
direct-declarator [ type-qualifier-list static assignment-expression ]
direct-declarator [ type-qualifier-listopt * ]
function-declarator:
direct-declarator ( parameter-type-listopt )
pointer:
* attribute-specifier-sequenceopt type-qualifier-listopt
* attribute-specifier-sequenceopt type-qualifier-listopt pointer
type-qualifier-list:
type-qualifier
type-qualifier-list type-qualifier
parameter-type-list:
parameter-list
parameter-list , ...
...
parameter-list:
parameter-declaration
parameter-list , parameter-declaration
parameter-declaration:
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt declaration-specifiers declarator
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt declaration-specifiers abstract-declaratoropt
type-name:
specifier-qualifier-list abstract-declaratoropt
abstract-declarator:
pointer
pointeropt direct-abstract-declarator
direct-abstract-declarator:
( abstract-declarator )
array-abstract-declarator attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
function-abstract-declarator attribute-specifier-sequenceopt
array-abstract-declarator:
direct-abstract-declaratoropt [ type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expressionopt ]
direct-abstract-declaratoropt [ static type-qualifier-listopt assignment-expression ]
direct-abstract-declaratoropt [ type-qualifier-list static assignment-expression ]
direct-abstract-declaratoropt [ * ]
function-abstract-declarator:
direct-abstract-declaratoropt ( parameter-type-listopt )
typedef-name:
identifier
braced-initializer:
{ }
{ initializer-list }
{ initializer-list , }
initializer:
assignment-expression
braced-initializer
initializer-list:
designationopt initializer
initializer-list , designationopt initializer
designation:
designator-list =
designator-list:
designator
designator-list designator
designator:
[ constant-expression ]
. identifier
static_assert-declaration:
static_assert ( constant-expression , string-literal ) ;
static_assert ( constant-expression ) ;
attribute-specifier-sequence:
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt attribute-specifier
attribute-specifier:
[ [ attribute-list ] ]
attribute-list:
attributeopt
attribute-list , attributeopt
attribute:
attribute-token attribute-argument-clauseopt
attribute-token:
standard-attribute
attribute-prefixed-token
standard-attribute:
identifier
attribute-prefixed-token:
attribute-prefix :: identifier
attribute-prefix:
identifier
attribute-argument-clause:
( balanced-token-sequenceopt )
balanced-token-sequence:
balanced-token
balanced-token-sequence balanced-token
balanced-token:
( balanced-token-sequenceopt )
[ balanced-token-sequenceopt ]
{ balanced-token-sequenceopt }
any token other than a parenthesis, a bracket, or a brace

A.3.3 Statements

statement:
labeled-statement
unlabeled-statement
unlabeled-statement:
expression-statement
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt primary-block
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt jump-statement
primary-block:
compound-statement
selection-statement
iteration-statement
secondary-block:
statement
label:
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt identifier :
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt case constant-expression :
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt default :
labeled-statement:
label statement
compound-statement:
{ block-item-listopt }
block-item-list:
block-item
block-item-list block-item
block-item:
declaration
unlabeled-statement
label
expression-statement:
expressionopt ;
attribute-specifier-sequence expression ;
selection-statement:
if ( expression ) secondary-block
if ( expression ) secondary-block else secondary-block
switch ( expression ) secondary-block
iteration-statement:
while ( expression ) secondary-block
do secondary-block while ( expression ) ;
for ( expressionopt ; expressionopt ; expressionopt ) secondary-block
for ( declaration expressionopt ; expressionopt ) secondary-block
jump-statement:
goto identifier ;
continue ;
break ;
return expressionopt ;

A.3.4 External definitions

translation-unit:
external-declaration
translation-unit external-declaration
external-declaration:
function-definition
declaration
function-definition:
attribute-specifier-sequenceopt declaration-specifiers declarator function-body
function-body:
compound-statement

A.4 Preprocessing directives

preprocessing-file:
groupopt
group:
group-part
group group-part
group-part:
if-section
control-line
text-line
# non-directive
if-section:
if-group elif-groupsopt else-groupopt endif-line
if-group:
# if constant-expression new-line groupopt
# ifdef identifier new-line groupopt
# ifndef identifier new-line groupopt
elif-groups:
elif-group
elif-groups elif-group
elif-group:
# elif constant-expression new-line groupopt
# elifdef identifier new-line groupopt
# elifndef identifier new-line groupopt
else-group:
# else new-line groupopt
endif-line:
# endif new-line
control-line:
# include pp-tokens new-line
# embed pp-tokens new-line
# define identifier replacement-list new-line
# define identifier lparen identifier-listopt ) replacement-list new-line
# define identifier lparen ... ) replacement-list new-line
# define identifier lparen identifier-list , ... ) replacement-list new-line
# undef identifier new-line
# line pp-tokens new-line
# error pp-tokensopt new-line
# warning pp-tokensopt new-line
# pragma pp-tokensopt new-line
# new-line
text-line:
pp-tokensopt new-line
non-directive:
pp-tokens new-line
lparen:
a ( character not immediately preceded by white space
replacement-list:
pp-tokensopt
pp-tokens:
preprocessing-token
pp-tokens preprocessing-token
new-line:
the new-line character
identifier-list:
identifier
identifier-list , identifier
pp-parameter:
pp-parameter-name pp-parameter-clauseopt
pp-parameter-name:
pp-standard-parameter
pp-prefixed-parameter
pp-standard-parameter:
identifier
pp-prefixed-parameter:
identifier :: identifier
pp-parameter-clause:
( pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt )
pp-balanced-token-sequence:
pp-balanced-token
pp-balanced-token-sequence pp-balanced-token
pp-balanced-token:
( pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt )
[ pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt ]
{ pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt }
any pp-token other than a parenthesis, a bracket, or a brace
embed-parameter-sequence:
pp-parameter
embed-parameter-sequence pp-parameter
defined-macro-expression:
defined identifier
defined ( identifier )
h-preprocessing-token:
any preprocessing-token other than >
h-pp-tokens:
h-preprocessing-token
h-pp-tokens h-preprocessing-token
header-name-tokens:
string-literal
< h-pp-tokens >
has-include-expression:
__has_include ( header-name )
__has_include ( header-name-tokens )
has-embed-expression:
__has_embed ( header-name embed-parameter-sequenceopt )
__has_embed ( header-name-tokens pp-balanced-token-sequenceopt )
has-c-attribute-express:
__has_c_attribute ( pp-tokens )
va-opt-replacement:
__VA_OPT__ ( pp-tokensopt )
standard-pragma:
# pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT on-off-switch
# pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS on-off-switch
# pragma STDC FENV_DEC_ROUND dec-direction
# pragma STDC FENV_ROUND direction
# pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE on-off-switch
on-off-switch: one of
ON OFF DEFAULT
direction: one of
FE_DOWNWARD FE_TONEAREST FE_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_TOWARDZERO FE_UPWARD FE_DYNAMIC
dec-direction: one of
FE_DEC_DOWNWARD FE_DEC_TONEAREST FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO FE_DEC_UPWARD FE_DEC_DYNAMIC

A.5 Floating-point subject sequence

A.5.1 NaN char sequence

n-char-sequence:
digit
nondigit
n-char-sequence digit
n-char-sequence nondigit

A.5.2 NaN wchar_t sequence

n-wchar-sequence:
digit
nondigit
n-wchar-sequence digit
n-wchar-sequence nondigit

A.6 Decimal floating-point subject sequence

A.6.1 NaN decimal char sequence

d-char-sequence:
digit
nondigit
d-char-sequence digit
d-char-sequence nondigit

A.6.2 NaN decimal wchar_t sequence

d-wchar-sequence:
digit
nondigit
d-wchar-sequence digit
d-wchar-sequence nondigit

B Library summary

B.1 Diagnostics <assert.h>

void assert(scalar expression);

__STDC_VERSION_ASSERT_H__ NDEBUG

B.2 Complex <complex.h>

:
imaginary
_Imaginary_I
I
#pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE on-off-switch
double complex cacos(double complex z);
float complex cacosf(float complex z);
long double complex cacosl(long double complex z);
double complex casin(double complex z);
float complex casinf(float complex z);
long double complex casinl(long double complex z);
double complex catan(double complex z);
float complex catanf(float complex z);
long double complex catanl(long double complex z);
double complex ccos(double complex z);
float complex ccosf(float complex z);
long double complex ccosl(long double complex z);
double complex csin(double complex z);
float complex csinf(float complex z);
long double complex csinl(long double complex z);
double complex ctan(double complex z);
float complex ctanf(float complex z);
long double complex ctanl(long double complex z);
double complex cacosh(double complex z);
float complex cacoshf(float complex z);
long double complex cacoshl(long double complex z);
double complex casinh(double complex z);
float complex casinhf(float complex z);
long double complex casinhl(long double complex z);
double complex catanh(double complex z);
float complex catanhf(float complex z);
long double complex catanhl(long double complex z);
double complex ccosh(double complex z);
float complex ccoshf(float complex z);
long double complex ccoshl(long double complex z);
double complex csinh(double complex z);
float complex csinhf(float complex z);
long double complex csinhl(long double complex z);
double complex ctanh(double complex z);
float complex ctanhf(float complex z);
long double complex ctanhl(long double complex z);
double complex cexp(double complex z);
float complex cexpf(float complex z);
long double complex cexpl(long double complex z);

complex _Complex_I

double complex clog(double complex z);
float complex clogf(float complex z);
long double complex clogl(long double complex z);
double cabs(double complex z);
float cabsf(float complex z);
long double cabsl(long double complex z);
double complex cpow(double complex x, double complex y);
float complex cpowf(float complex x, float complex y);
long double complex cpowl(long double complex x, long double complex y);
double complex csqrt(double complex z);
float complex csqrtf(float complex z);
long double complex csqrtl(long double complex z);
double carg(double complex z);
float cargf(float complex z);
long double cargl(long double complex z);
double cimag(double complex z);
float cimagf(float complex z);
long double cimagl(long double complex z);
double complex CMPLX(double x, double y);
float complex CMPLXF(float x, float y);
long double complex CMPLXL(long double x, long double y);
double complex conj(double complex z);
float complex conjf(float complex z);
long double complex conjl(long double complex z);
double complex cproj(double complex z);
float complex cprojf(float complex z);
long double complex cprojl(long double complex z);
double creal(double complex z);
float crealf(float complex z);
long double creall(long double complex z);

B.3 Character handling <ctype.h>

int isalnum(int c);
int isalpha(int c);
int isblank(int c);
int iscntrl(int c);
int isdigit(int c);
int isgraph(int c);
int islower(int c);
int isprint(int c);
int ispunct(int c);
int isspace(int c);
int isupper(int c);
int isxdigit(int c);
int tolower(int c);
int toupper(int c);

B.4 Errors <errno.h>

errno_t

B.5 Floating-point environment <fenv.h>

:
FE_INVALID
FE_OVERFLOW
FE_UNDERFLOW
FE_ALL_EXCEPT
FE_DOWNWARD
FE_TONEAREST
FE_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_TOWARDZERO
FE_UPWARD
FE_DFL_ENV
__STDC_VERSION_FENV_H__
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS on-off-switch
#pragma STDC FENV_ROUND direction
#pragma STDC FENV_ROUND FE_DYNAMIC
int feclearexcept(int excepts);
int fegetexceptflag(fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts);
int feraiseexcept(int excepts);
int fesetexcept(int excepts);
int fesetexceptflag(const fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts);
int fetestexceptflag(const fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts);
int fetestexcept(int excepts);
int fegetmode(femode_t *modep);
int fegetround(void);
int fesetmode(const femode_t *modep);
int fesetround(int rnd);
int fegetenv(fenv_t *envp);
int feholdexcept(fenv_t *envp);
int fesetenv(const fenv_t *envp);
int feupdateenv(const fenv_t *envp);
:
FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO
FE_DEC_UPWARD
#pragma STDC FENV_DEC_ROUND dec-direction
int fe_dec_getround(void);
int fe_dec_setround(int rnd);

FE_SNANS_ALWAYS_SIGNAL

B.6 Characteristics of floating types <float.h>

B.6.1 Macros

:
DECIMAL_DIG
FLT_IS_IEC_60559
DBL_IS_IEC_60559
LDBL_IS_IEC_60559
FLT_DIG
DBL_DIG
LDBL_DIG
FLT_MIN_EXP
DBL_MIN_EXP
LDBL_MIN_EXP
FLT_MIN_10_EXP
DBL_MIN_10_EXP
LDBL_MIN_10_EXP
FLT_MAX_EXP
DBL_MAX_EXP
LDBL_MAX_EXP
FLT_MAX_10_EXP
DBL_MAX_10_EXP
LDBL_MAX_10_EXP
FLT_MAX
DBL_MAX
LDBL_MAX
FLT_NORM_MAX
DBL_NORM_MAX
LDBL_NORM_MAX
FLT_EPSILON

FLT_ROUNDS FLT_EVAL_METHOD FLT_HAS_SUBNORM DBL_HAS_SUBNORM LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM FLT_RADIX FLT_MANT_DIG DBL_MANT_DIG LDBL_MANT_DIG FLT_DECIMAL_DIG DBL_DECIMAL_DIG LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG

:
FLT_SNAN
DBL_SNAN
LDBL_SNAN
FLT_TRUE_MIN
DBL_TRUE_MIN
LDBL_TRUE_MIN
INFINITY
NAN

CR_DECIMAL_DIG

B.6.2 Characteristics of decimal floating types

1

The following macros are provided only if the implementation defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__. N is 32, 64 and 128.

DEC_EVAL_METHOD DEC_INFINITY DEC_NAN

DECN_EPSILON DECN_MANT_DIG DECN_MAX_EXP

DECN_MAX DECN_MIN_EXP DECN_MIN

DECN_TRUE_MIN DECN_SNAN

B.7 Format conversion of integer types <inttypes.h>

intmax_t imaxabs(intmax_t j);
imaxdiv_t imaxdiv(intmax_t numer, intmax_t denom);
intmax_t strtoimax(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr, int base);
uintmax_t strtoumax(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr, int base);
intmax_t wcstoimax(const wchar_t *restrict nptr, wchar_t **restrict endptr, int base);
uintmax_t wcstoumax(const wchar_t *restrict nptr, wchar_t **restrict endptr, int base);

PRIbN PRIbLEASTN PRIbFASTN PRIbMAX PRIbPTR PRIBN PRIBLEASTN PRIBFASTN PRIBMAX PRIBPTR PRIdN PRIdLEASTN PRIdFASTN PRIdMAX PRIdPTR PRIiN PRIiLEASTN PRIiFASTN PRIiMAX PRIiPTR PRIoN PRIoLEASTN PRIoFASTN PRIoMAX PRIoPTR PRIuN PRIuLEASTN PRIuFASTN PRIuMAX PRIuPTR PRIxN PRIxLEASTN PRIxFASTN PRIxMAX PRIxPTR PRIXN PRIXLEASTN PRIXFASTN PRIXMAX PRIXPTR SCNbN SCNbLEASTN SCNbFASTN SCNbMAX SCNbPTR SCNdN SCNdLEASTN SCNdFASTN SCNdMAX SCNdPTR SCNiN SCNiLEASTN SCNiFASTN SCNiMAX SCNiPTR SCNoN SCNoLEASTN SCNoFASTN SCNoMAX SCNoPTR SCNuN SCNuLEASTN SCNuFASTN SCNuMAX SCNuPTR SCNxN SCNxLEASTN SCNxFASTN SCNxMAX SCNxPTR

B.8 Alternative spellings <iso646.h>

:
bitor
compl
not
not_eq
or
or_eq
xor
xor_eq

and and_eq bitand

B.9 Sizes of integer types <limits.h>

:
ULONG_WIDTH
LLONG_WIDTH
ULLONG_WIDTH
BOOL_MAX
SCHAR_MIN
SCHAR_MAX
UCHAR_MAX
CHAR_MIN
CHAR_MAX
MB_LEN_MAX
SHRT_MIN
SHRT_MAX
USHRT_MAX
INT_MIN
INT_MAX
UINT_MAX
LONG_MIN
LONG_MAX
ULONG_MAX
LLONG_MIN
LLONG_MAX
ULLONG_MAX

BITINT_MAXWIDTH BOOL_WIDTH CHAR_BIT CHAR_WIDTH SCHAR_WIDTH UCHAR_WIDTH SHRT_WIDTH USHRT_WIDTH INT_WIDTH UINT_WIDTH LONG_WIDTH

B.10 Localization <locale.h>

:
LC_ALL
LC_COLLATE
LC_CTYPE
LC_MONETARY
LC_NUMERIC
LC_TIME
char *setlocale(int category, const char *locale);
struct lconv *localeconv(void);

struct lconv NULL

B.11 Mathematics <math.h>

:
FP_INT_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FP_INT_TONEAREST
FP_FAST_FMA
FP_FAST_FMAF
FP_FAST_FMAL
FP_FAST_FADD
FP_FAST_FADDL
FP_FAST_DADDL
FP_FAST_FSUB
FP_FAST_FSUBL
FP_FAST_DSUBL
FP_FAST_FMUL
FP_FAST_FMULL
FP_FAST_DMULL
FP_FAST_FDIV
FP_FAST_FDIVL
FP_FAST_DDIVL
FP_FAST_FSQRT
FP_FAST_FSQRTL
FP_FAST_DSQRTL
FP_FAST_FFMA
FP_FAST_FFMAL
FP_FAST_DFMAL
FP_ILOGB0
FP_ILOGBNAN
FP_LLOGB0
FP_LLOGBNAN
MATH_ERRNO
MATH_ERREXCEPT
math_errhandling
#pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT on-off-switch
int fpclassify(real-floating x);
int iscanonical(real-floating x);
int isfinite(real-floating x);
int isinf(real-floating x);
int isnan(real-floating x);
int isnormal(real-floating x);
int signbit(real-floating x);
int issignaling(real-floating x);
int issubnormal(real-floating x);
int iszero(real-floating x);
double acos(double x);
float acosf(float x);
long double acosl(long double x);
double asin(double x);
float asinf(float x);

float_t double_t HUGE_VAL HUGE_VALF HUGE_VALL INFINITY NAN FP_INFINITE FP_NAN FP_NORMAL FP_SUBNORMAL FP_ZERO FP_INT_UPWARD FP_INT_DOWNWARD FP_INT_TOWARDZERO

long double asinl(long double x);
double atan(double x);
float atanf(float x);
long double atanl(long double x);
double atan2(double y, double x);
float atan2f(float y, float x);
long double atan2l(long double y, long double x);
double cos(double x);
float cosf(float x);
long double cosl(long double x);
double sin(double x);
float sinf(float x);
long double sinl(long double x);
double tan(double x);
float tanf(float x);
long double tanl(long double x);
double acospi(double x);
float acospif(float x);
long double acospil(long double x);
double asinpi(double x);
float asinpif(float x);
long double asinpil(long double x);
double atanpi(double x);
float atanpif(float x);
long double atanpil(long double x);
double atan2pi(double y, double x);
float atan2pif(float y, float x);
long double atan2pil(long double y, long double x);
double cospi(double x);
float cospif(float x);
long double cospil(long double x);
double sinpi(double x);
float sinpif(float x);
long double sinpil(long double x);
double tanpi(double x);
float tanpif(float x);
long double tanpil(long double x);
double acosh(double x);
float acoshf(float x);
long double acoshl(long double x);
double asinh(double x);
float asinhf(float x);
long double asinhl(long double x);
double atanh(double x);
float atanhf(float x);
long double atanhl(long double x);
double cosh(double x);
float coshf(float x);
long double coshl(long double x);
double sinh(double x);
float sinhf(float x);
long double sinhl(long double x);
double tanh(double x);
float tanhf(float x);
long double tanhl(long double x);
double exp(double x);
float expf(float x);
long double expl(long double x);
double exp10(double x);
float exp10f(float x);
long double exp10l(long double x);
double exp10m1(double x);
float exp10m1f(float x);
long double exp10m1l(long double x);
double exp2(double x);
float exp2f(float x);
long double exp2l(long double x);
double exp2m1(double x);
float exp2m1f(float x);
long double exp2m1l(long double x);
double expm1(double x);
float expm1f(float x);
long double expm1l(long double x);
double frexp(double value, int *p);
float frexpf(float value, int *p);
long double frexpl(long double value, int *p);
int ilogb(double x);
int ilogbf(float x);
int ilogbl(long double x);
double ldexp(double x, int p);
float ldexpf(float x, int p);
long double ldexpl(long double x, int p);
long int llogb(double x);
long int llogbf(float x);
long int llogbl(long double x);
double log(double x);
float logf(float x);
long double logl(long double x);
double log10(double x);
float log10f(float x);
long double log10l(long double x);
double log10p1(double x);
float log10p1f(float x);
long double log10p1l(long double x);
double log1p(double x);
float log1pf(float x);
long double log1pl(long double x);
double logp1(double x);
float logp1f(float x);
long double logp1l(long double x);
double log2(double x);
float log2f(float x);
long double log2l(long double x);
double log2p1(double x);
float log2p1f(float x);
long double log2p1l(long double x);
double logb(double x);
float logbf(float x);
long double logbl(long double x);
double modf(double value, double *iptr);
float modff(float value, float *iptr);
long double modfl(long double value, long double *iptr);
double scalbn(double x, int n);
float scalbnf(float x, int n);
long double scalbnl(long double x, int n);
double scalbln(double x, long int n);
float scalblnf(float x, long int n);
long double scalblnl(long double x, long int n);
double cbrt(double x);
float cbrtf(float x);
long double cbrtl(long double x);
double compoundn(double x, long long int n);
float compoundnf(float x, long long int n);
long double compoundnl(long double x, long long int n);
double fabs(double x);
float fabsf(float x);
long double fabsl(long double x);
double hypot(double x, double y);
float hypotf(float x, float y);
long double hypotl(long double x, long double y);
double pow(double x, double y);
float powf(float x, float y);
long double powl(long double x, long double y);
double pown(double x, long long int n);
float pownf(float x, long long int n);
long double pownl(long double x, long long int n);
double powr(double y, double x);
float powrf(float y, float x);
long double powrl(long double y, long double x);
double rootn(double x, long long int n);
float rootnf(float x, long long int n);
long double rootnl(long double x, long long int n);
double rsqrt(double x);
float rsqrtf(float x);
long double rsqrtl(long double x);
double sqrt(double x);
float sqrtf(float x);
long double sqrtl(long double x);
double erf(double x);
float erff(float x);
long double erfl(long double x);
double erfc(double x);
float erfcf(float x);
long double erfcl(long double x);
double lgamma(double x);
float lgammaf(float x);
long double lgammal(long double x);
double tgamma(double x);
float tgammaf(float x);
long double tgammal(long double x);
double ceil(double x);
float ceilf(float x);
long double ceill(long double x);
double floor(double x);
float floorf(float x);
long double floorl(long double x);
double nearbyint(double x);
float nearbyintf(float x);
long double nearbyintl(long double x);
double rint(double x);
float rintf(float x);
long double rintl(long double x);
long int lrint(double x);
long int lrintf(float x);
long int lrintl(long double x);
long long int llrint(double x);
long long int llrintf(float x);
long long int llrintl(long double x);
double round(double x);
float roundf(float x);
long double roundl(long double x);
long int lround(double x);
long int lroundf(float x);
long int lroundl(long double x);
long long int llround(double x);
long long int llroundf(float x);
long long int llroundl(long double x);
double roundeven(double x);
float roundevenf(float x);
long double roundevenl(long double x);
double trunc(double x);
float truncf(float x);
long double truncl(long double x);
double fromfp(double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
float fromfpf(float x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
long double fromfpl(long double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
double ufromfp(double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
float ufromfpf(float x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
long double ufromfpl(long double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
double fromfpx(double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
float fromfpxf(float x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
long double fromfpxl(long double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
double ufromfpx(double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
float ufromfpxf(float x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
long double ufromfpxl(long double x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
double fmod(double x, double y);
float fmodf(float x, float y);
long double fmodl(long double x, long double y);
double remainder(double x, double y);
float remainderf(float x, float y);
long double remainderl(long double x, long double y);
double remquo(double x, double y, int *quo);
float remquof(float x, float y, int *quo);
long double remquol(long double x, long double y, int *quo);
double copysign(double x, double y);
float copysignf(float x, float y);
long double copysignl(long double x, long double y);
double nan(const char *tagp);
float nanf(const char *tagp);
long double nanl(const char *tagp);
double nextafter(double x, double y);
float nextafterf(float x, float y);
long double nextafterl(long double x, long double y);
double nexttoward(double x, long double y);
float nexttowardf(float x, long double y);
long double nexttowardl(long double x, long double y);
double nextup(double x);
float nextupf(float x);
long double nextupl(long double x);
double nextdown(double x);
float nextdownf(float x);
long double nextdownl(long double x);
int canonicalize(double *cx, const double *x);
int canonicalizef(float *cx, const float *x);
int canonicalizel(long double *cx, const long double *x);
double fdim(double x, double y);
float fdimf(float x, float y);
long double fdiml(long double x, long double y);
double fmax(double x, double y);
float fmaxf(float x, float y);
long double fmaxl(long double x, long double y);
double fmin(double x, double y);
float fminf(float x, float y);
long double fminl(long double x, long double y);
double fmaximum(double x, double y);
float fmaximumf(float x, float y);
long double fmaximuml(long double x, long double y);
double fminimum(double x, double y);
float fminimumf(float x, float y);
long double fminimuml(long double x, long double y);
double fmaximum_mag(double x, double y);
float fmaximum_magf(float x, float y);
long double fmaximum_magl(long double x, long double y);
double fminimum_mag(double x, double y);
float fminimum_magf(float x, float y);
long double fminimum_magl(long double x, long double y);
double fmaximum_num(double x, double y);
float fmaximum_numf(float x, float y);
long double fmaximum_numl(long double x, long double y);
double fminimum_num(double x, double y);
float fminimum_numf(float x, float y);
long double fminimum_numl(long double x, long double y);
double fmaximum_mag_num(double x, double y);
float fmaximum_mag_numf(float x, float y);
long double fmaximum_mag_numl(long double x, long double y);
double fminimum_mag_num(double x, double y);
float fminimum_mag_numf(float x, float y);
long double fminimum_mag_numl(long double x, long double y);
double fma(double x, double y, double z);
float fmaf(float x, float y, float z);
long double fmal(long double x, long double y, long double z);
float fadd(double x, double y);
float faddl(long double x, long double y);
double daddl(long double x, long double y);
float fsub(double x, double y);
float fsubl(long double x, long double y);
double dsubl(long double x, long double y);
float fmul(double x, double y);
float fmull(long double x, long double y);
double dmull(long double x, long double y);
float fdiv(double x, double y);
float fdivl(long double x, long double y);
double ddivl(long double x, long double y);
float ffma(double x, double y, double z);
float ffmal(long double x, long double y, long double z);
double dfmal(long double x, long double y, long double z);
float fsqrt(double x);
float fsqrtl(long double x);
double dsqrtl(long double x);
int isgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
int isgreaterequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
int isless(real-floating x, real-floating y);
int islessequal(real-floating x, real-floating y);
int islessgreater(real-floating x, real-floating y);
int isunordered(real-floating x, real-floating y);
int iseqsig(real-floating x, real-floating y);
:
FP_FAST_D32ADDD64
FP_FAST_D32ADDD128
FP_FAST_D64ADDD128
FP_FAST_D32SUBD64
FP_FAST_D32SUBD128
FP_FAST_D64SUBD128
FP_FAST_D32MULD64
FP_FAST_D32MULD128
FP_FAST_D64MULD128
FP_FAST_D32DIVD64

DEC_INFINITY DEC_NAN FP_FAST_FMAD32 FP_FAST_FMAD64 FP_FAST_FMAD128

:
FP_FAST_D32FMAD128
FP_FAST_D64FMAD128
FP_FAST_D32SQRTD64
FP_FAST_D32SQRTD128
FP_FAST_D64SQRTD128
_Decimal32 acosd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 acosd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 acosd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 asind32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 asind64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 asind128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 atand32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 atand64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 atand128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 atan2d32(_Decimal32 y, _Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 atan2d64(_Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 atan2d128(_Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 cosd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 cosd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 cosd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 sind32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 sind64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 sind128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 tand32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 tand64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 tand128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 acospid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 acospid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 acospid128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 asinpid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 asinpid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 asinpid128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 atanpid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 atanpid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 atanpid128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 atan2pid32(_Decimal32 y, _Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 atan2pid64(_Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 atan2pid128(_Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 cospid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 cospid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 cospid128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 sinpid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 sinpid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 sinpid128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 tanpid32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 tanpid64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 tanpid128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 acoshd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 acoshd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 acoshd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 asinhd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 asinhd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 asinhd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 atanhd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 atanhd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 atanhd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 coshd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 coshd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 coshd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 sinhd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 sinhd64(_Decimal64 x);

FP_FAST_D32DIVD128 FP_FAST_D64DIVD128 FP_FAST_D32FMAD64

_Decimal128 sinhd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 tanhd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 tanhd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 tanhd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 expd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 expd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 expd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 exp10d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 exp10d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 exp10d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 exp10m1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 exp10m1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 exp10m1d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 exp2d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 exp2d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 exp2d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 exp2m1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 exp2m1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 exp2m1d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 expm1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 expm1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 expm1d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 frexpd32(_Decimal32 value, int *p);
_Decimal64 frexpd64(_Decimal64 value, int *p);
_Decimal128 frexpd128(_Decimal128 value, int *p);
int ilogbd32(_Decimal32 x);
int ilogbd64(_Decimal64 x);
int ilogbd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 ldexpd32(_Decimal32 x, int p);
_Decimal64 ldexpd64(_Decimal64 x, int p);
_Decimal128 ldexpd128(_Decimal128 x, int p);
long int llogbd32(_Decimal32 x);
long int llogbd64(_Decimal64 x);
long int llogbd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 logd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 logd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 logd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 log10d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log10d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log10d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 log10p1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log10p1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log10p1d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 log1pd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log1pd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log1pd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 logp1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 logp1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 logp1d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 log2d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log2d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log2d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 log2p1d32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 log2p1d64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 log2p1d128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 logbd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 logbd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 logbd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 modfd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 *iptr);
_Decimal64 modfd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 *iptr);
_Decimal128 modfd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 *iptr);
_Decimal32 scalbnd32(_Decimal32 x, int n);
_Decimal64 scalbnd64(_Decimal64 x, int n);
_Decimal128 scalbnd128(_Decimal128 x, int n);
_Decimal32 scalblnd32(_Decimal32 x, long int n);
_Decimal64 scalblnd64(_Decimal64 x, long int n);
_Decimal128 scalblnd128(_Decimal128 x, long int n);
_Decimal32 cbrtd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 cbrtd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 cbrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 compoundnd32(_Decimal32 x, long long int n);
_Decimal64 compoundnd64(_Decimal64 x, long long int n);
_Decimal128 compoundnd128(_Decimal128 x, long long int n);
_Decimal32 fabsd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 fabsd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 fabsd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 hypotd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 hypotd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 hypotd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 powd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 powd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 powd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 pownd32(_Decimal32 x, long long int n);
_Decimal64 pownd64(_Decimal64 x, long long int n);
_Decimal128 pownd128(_Decimal128 x, long long int n);
_Decimal32 powrd32(_Decimal32 y, _Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 powrd64(_Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 powrd128(_Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 rootnd32(_Decimal32 x, long long int n);
_Decimal64 rootnd64(_Decimal64 x, long long int n);
_Decimal128 rootnd128(_Decimal128 x, long long int n);
_Decimal32 rsqrtd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 rsqrtd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 rsqrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 sqrtd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 sqrtd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 sqrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 erfd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 erfd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 erfd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 erfcd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 erfcd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 erfcd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 lgammad32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 lgammad64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 lgammad128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 tgammad32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 tgammad64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 tgammad128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 ceild32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 ceild64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 ceild128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 floord32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 floord64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 floord128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 nearbyintd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 nearbyintd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 nearbyintd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 rintd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 rintd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 rintd128(_Decimal128 x);
long int lrintd32(_Decimal32 x);
long int lrintd64(_Decimal64 x);
long int lrintd128(_Decimal128 x);
long long int llrintd32(_Decimal32 x);
long long int llrintd64(_Decimal64 x);
long long int llrintd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 roundd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 roundd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 roundd128(_Decimal128 x);
long int lroundd32(_Decimal32 x);
long int lroundd64(_Decimal64 x);
long int lroundd128(_Decimal128 x);
long long int llroundd32(_Decimal32 x);
long long int llroundd64(_Decimal64 x);
long long int llroundd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 roundevend32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 roundevend64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 roundevend128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 truncd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 truncd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 truncd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 fromfpd32(_Decimal32 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal64 fromfpd64(_Decimal64 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal128 fromfpd128(_Decimal128 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal32 ufromfpd32(_Decimal32 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal64 ufromfpd64(_Decimal64 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal128 ufromfpd128(_Decimal128 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal32 fromfpxd32(_Decimal32 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal64 fromfpxd64(_Decimal64 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal128 fromfpxd128(_Decimal128 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal32 ufromfpxd32(_Decimal32 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal64 ufromfpxd64(_Decimal64 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal128 ufromfpxd128(_Decimal128 x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_Decimal32 fmodd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmodd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmodd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 remainderd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 remainderd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 remainderd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 copysignd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 copysignd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 copysignd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 nand32(const char *tagp);
_Decimal64 nand64(const char *tagp);
_Decimal128 nand128(const char *tagp);
_Decimal32 nextafterd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 nextafterd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 nextafterd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 nexttowardd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 nexttowardd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal128 nexttowardd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 nextupd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 nextupd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 nextupd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 nextdownd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 nextdownd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 nextdownd128(_Decimal128 x);
int canonicalized32(_Decimal32 *cx, const _Decimal32 *x);
int canonicalized64(_Decimal64 *cx, const _Decimal64 *x);
int canonicalized128(_Decimal128 *cx, const _Decimal128 *x);
_Decimal32 fdimd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fdimd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fdimd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fmaxd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaxd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaxd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fmind32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmind64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmind128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fmaximumd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaximumd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaximumd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fminimumd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fminimumd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fminimumd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fmaximum_magd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaximum_magd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaximum_magd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fminimum_magd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fminimum_magd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fminimum_magd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fmaximum_numd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaximum_numd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaximum_numd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fminimum_numd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fminimum_numd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fminimum_numd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fmaximum_mag_numd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fmaximum_mag_numd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fmaximum_mag_numd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fminimum_mag_numd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 fminimum_mag_numd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 fminimum_mag_numd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 fmad32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y, _Decimal32 z);
_Decimal64 fmad64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 z);
_Decimal128 fmad128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 z);
_Decimal32 d32addd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal32 d32addd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 d64addd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 d32subd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal32 d32subd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 d64subd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 d32muld64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal32 d32muld128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 d64muld128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 d32divd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal32 d32divd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal64 d64divd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 d32fmad64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y, _Decimal64 z);
_Decimal32 d32fmad128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 z);
_Decimal64 d64fmad128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y, _Decimal128 z);
_Decimal32 d32sqrtd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal32 d32sqrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal64 d64sqrtd128(_Decimal128 x);
_Decimal32 quantized32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
_Decimal64 quantized64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
_Decimal128 quantized128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
bool samequantumd32(_Decimal32 x, _Decimal32 y);
bool samequantumd64(_Decimal64 x, _Decimal64 y);
bool samequantumd128(_Decimal128 x, _Decimal128 y);
_Decimal32 quantumd32(_Decimal32 x);
_Decimal64 quantumd64(_Decimal64 x);
_Decimal128 quantumd128(_Decimal128 x);
long long int llquantexpd32(_Decimal32 x);
long long int llquantexpd64(_Decimal64 x);
long long int llquantexpd128(_Decimal128 x);
void encodedecd32(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 4],
      const _Decimal32 * restrict xptr);
void encodedecd64(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 8],
      const _Decimal64 * restrict xptr);
void encodedecd128(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 16],
      const _Decimal128 * restrict xptr);
void decodedecd32(_Decimal32 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 4]);
void decodedecd64(_Decimal64 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 8]);
void decodedecd128(_Decimal128 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 16]);
void encodebind32(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 4],
      const _Decimal32 * restrict xptr);
void encodebind64(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 8],
      const _Decimal64 * restrict xptr);
void encodebind128(unsigned char encptr[restrict static 16],
      const _Decimal128 * restrict xptr);
void decodebind32(_Decimal32 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 4]);
void decodebind64(_Decimal64 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 8]);
void decodebind128(_Decimal128 * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static 16]);
int totalorder(const double *x, const double *y);
int totalorderf(const float *x, const float *y);
int totalorderl(const long double *x, const long double *y);
int totalordermag(const double *x, const double *y);
int totalordermagf(const float *x, const float *y);
int totalordermagl(const long double *x, const long double *y);
double getpayload(const double *x);
float getpayloadf(const float *x);
long double getpayloadl(const long double *x);
int setpayload(double *res, double pl);
int setpayloadf(float *res, float pl);
int setpayloadl(long double *res, long double pl);
int setpayloadsig(double *res, double pl);
int setpayloadsigf(float *res, float pl);
int setpayloadsigl(long double *res, long double pl);
int totalorderd32(const _Decimal32 *x, const _Decimal32 *y);
int totalorderd64(const _Decimal64 *x, const _Decimal64 *y);
int totalorderd128(const _Decimal128 *x, const _Decimal128 *y);
int totalordermagd32(const _Decimal32 *x, const _Decimal32 *y);
int totalordermagd64(const _Decimal64 *x, const _Decimal64 *y);
int totalordermagd128(const _Decimal128 *x, const _Decimal128 *y);
_Decimal32 getpayloadd32(const _Decimal32 *x);
_Decimal64 getpayloadd64(const _Decimal64 *x);

_Decimal32_t _Decimal64_t HUGE_VAL_D32 HUGE_VAL_D64 HUGE_VAL_D128

_Decimal128 getpayloadd128(const _Decimal128 *x);
int setpayloadd32(_Decimal32 *res, _Decimal32 pl);
int setpayloadd64(_Decimal64 *res, _Decimal64 pl);
int setpayloadd128(_Decimal128 *res, _Decimal128 pl);
int setpayloadsigd32(_Decimal32 *res, _Decimal32 pl);
int setpayloadsigd64(_Decimal64 *res, _Decimal64 pl);
int setpayloadsigd128(_Decimal128 *res, _Decimal128 pl);

B.12 Non-local jumps <setjmp.h>

int setjmp(jmp_buf env);
[[noreturn]] void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);

__STDC_VERSION_SETJMP_H__ jmp_buf

B.13 Signal handling <signal.h>

:
SIG_IGN
SIGABRT
SIGFPE
SIGILL
SIGINT
SIGSEGV
SIGTERM
void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);
int raise(int sig);

B.14 Alignment <stdalign.h> The header <stdalign.h> provides no content.

B.15 Variable arguments <stdarg.h>

type va_arg(va_list ap, type);
void va_copy(va_list dest, va_list src);
void va_end(va_list ap);
void va_start(va_list ap, ...);

va_list __STDC_VERSION_STDARG_H__

B.16 Atomics <stdatomic.h>

:
atomic_flag
memory_order_relaxed
memory_order_consume
memory_order_acquire
memory_order_release
memory_order_acq_rel
memory_order_seq_cst
atomic_bool
atomic_char
atomic_schar
atomic_uchar
atomic_short
atomic_ushort
atomic_int
atomic_uint

ATOMIC_BOOL_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_CHAR_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_CHAR8_T_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_CHAR16_T_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_CHAR32_T_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_WCHAR_T_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_SHORT_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_INT_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_LONG_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_LLONG_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_POINTER_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT memory_order

:
atomic_uint_least64_t
atomic_int_fast8_t
atomic_uint_fast8_t
atomic_int_fast16_t
atomic_uint_fast16_t
atomic_int_fast32_t
atomic_uint_fast32_t
atomic_int_fast64_t
atomic_uint_fast64_t
atomic_intptr_t
atomic_uintptr_t
atomic_size_t
atomic_ptrdiff_t
atomic_intmax_t
atomic_uintmax_t
void atomic_init(volatile A *obj, C value);
type kill_dependency(type y);
void atomic_thread_fence(memory_order order);
void atomic_signal_fence(memory_order order);
bool atomic_is_lock_free(const volatile A *obj);
void atomic_store(volatile A *object, C desired);
void atomic_store_explicit(volatile A *object, C desired, memory_order order);
C atomic_load(const volatile A *object);
C atomic_load_explicit(const volatile A *object, memory_order order);
C atomic_exchange(volatile A *object, C desired);
C atomic_exchange_explicit(volatile A *object, C desired, memory_order order);
bool atomic_compare_exchange_strong(volatile A *object, C *expected, C desired);
bool atomic_compare_exchange_strong_explicit(volatile A *object, C *expected,
      C desired, memory_order success, memory_order failure);
bool atomic_compare_exchange_weak(volatile A *object, C *expected, C desired);
bool atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit(volatile A *object, C *expected,
      C desired, memory_order success, memory_order failure);
C atomic_fetch_key(volatile A *object, M operand);
C atomic_fetch_key_explicit(volatile A *object, M operand, memory_order order);
bool atomic_flag_test_and_set(volatile atomic_flag *object);
bool atomic_flag_test_and_set_explicit(volatile atomic_flag *object,
      memory_order order);
void atomic_flag_clear(volatile atomic_flag *object);
void atomic_flag_clear_explicit(volatile atomic_flag *object,
      memory_order order);

atomic_long atomic_ulong atomic_llong atomic_ullong atomic_char8_t atomic_char16_t atomic_char32_t atomic_wchar_t atomic_int_least8_t atomic_uint_least8_t atomic_int_least16_t atomic_uint_least16_t atomic_int_least32_t atomic_uint_least32_t atomic_int_least64_t

B.17 Bit and byte utilities <stdbit.h>

:
__STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__
__STDC_VERSION_STDBIT_H__
unsigned int stdc_leading_zeros_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_zeros_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_zeros_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_zeros_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_leading_zeros_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_leading_zeros(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_ones_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_ones_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_ones_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_leading_ones_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];

__STDC_ENDIAN_BIG__ __STDC_ENDIAN_LITTLE__

unsigned int
stdc_leading_ones_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_leading_ones(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_zeros_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_zeros_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_zeros_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_zeros_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_trailing_zeros_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_trailing_zeros(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_ones_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_ones_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_ones_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_trailing_ones_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_trailing_ones_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_trailing_ones(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_zero_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_zero_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_zero_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_zero_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_leading_zero_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_first_leading_zero(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_one_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_one_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_one_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_leading_one_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_leading_one_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_first_leading_one(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_zero_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_zero_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_zero_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_trailing_zero_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_trailing_zero_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_first_trailing_zero(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_one_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_one_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_one_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_first_trailing_one_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_first_trailing_one_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type
stdc_first_trailing_one(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_zeros_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_zeros_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_zeros_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_zeros_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_count_zeros_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_count_zeros(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_ones_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_ones_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_ones_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_count_ones_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_count_ones_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_count_ones(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
bool stdc_has_single_bit(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_width_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_width_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_width_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_width_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int
stdc_bit_width_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_return_type stdc_bit_width(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned char stdc_bit_floor_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned short stdc_bit_floor_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_floor_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned long int stdc_bit_floor_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned long long int
stdc_bit_floor_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_value_type stdc_bit_floor(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned char stdc_bit_ceil_uc(unsigned char value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned short stdc_bit_ceil_us(unsigned short value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned int stdc_bit_ceil_ui(unsigned int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned long int stdc_bit_ceil_ul(unsigned long int value) [[unsequenced]];
unsigned long long int
stdc_bit_ceil_ull(unsigned long long int value) [[unsequenced]];
generic_value_type stdc_bit_ceil(generic_value_type value) [[unsequenced]];

B.18 Boolean type and values <stdbool.h>

__bool_true_false_are_defined

B.19 Checked Integer Operations <stdckdint.h>

bool ckd_add(type1 *result, type2 a, type3 b);
bool ckd_sub(type1 *result, type2 a, type3 b);
bool ckd_mul(type1 *result, type2 a, type3 b);

__STDC_VERSION_STDCKDINT_H__

B.20 Common definitions <stddef.h>

:
max_align_t
wchar_t
__STDC_VERSION_STDDEF_H__
NULL
offsetof(type, member-designator)
unreachable()

Only if the implementation defines __STDC_LIB_EXT1__ and additionally the user code defines __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ before any inclusion of <stddef.h>:

rsize_t

B.21 Integer types <stdint.h>

:
INT_LEASTN_WIDTH
UINT_LEASTN_MAX
UINT_LEASTN_WIDTH
INT_FASTN_MIN
INT_FASTN_MAX
INT_FASTN_WIDTH
UINT_FASTN_MAX
UINT_FASTN_WIDTH
INTPTR_MIN
INTPTR_MAX
INTPTR_WIDTH
UINTPTR_MAX
UINTPTR_WIDTH
INTMAX_MIN
INTMAX_MAX
INTMAX_WIDTH
UINTMAX_MAX
UINTMAX_WIDTH
PTRDIFF_MIN
PTRDIFF_MAX
SIG_ATOMIC_MIN
SIG_ATOMIC_MAX
SIG_ATOMIC_WIDTH
SIZE_MAX
SIZE_WIDTH
WCHAR_MIN
WCHAR_MAX
WCHAR_WIDTH
WINT_MIN
WINT_MAX
WINT_WIDTH
INTN_C( value )
UINTN_C( value )
INTMAX_C( value )
UINTMAX_C( value )

RSIZE_MAX

B.22 Input/output <stdio.h>

:
_IONBF
BUFSIZ
EOF
FOPEN_MAX
FILENAME_MAX
L_tmpnam
SEEK_CUR
SEEK_END
SEEK_SET
TMP_MAX
stderr
stdin
stdout
_PRINTF_NAN_LEN_MAX
__STDC_VERSION_STDIO_H__
int remove(const char *filename);
int rename(const char *old, const char *new);
FILE *tmpfile(void);
char *tmpnam(char *s);
int fclose(FILE *stream);
int fflush(FILE *stream);
FILE *fopen(const char * restrict filename, const char * restrict mode);
FILE *freopen(const char * restrict filename, const char * restrict mode,
      FILE * restrict stream);
void setbuf(FILE * restrict stream, char * restrict buf);
int setvbuf(FILE * restrict stream, char * restrict buf, int mode, size_t size);
int printf(const char * restrict format, ...);
int scanf(const char * restrict format, ...);
int snprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format, ...);
int sprintf(char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, ...);
int sscanf(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, ...);
int vfprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vfscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vprintf(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);

size_t FILE fpos_t NULL _IOFBF _IOLBF

int vscanf(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vsnprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vsprintf(char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vsscanf(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int fgetc(FILE *stream);
char *fgets(char * restrict s, int n, FILE * restrict stream);
int fputc(int c, FILE *stream);
int fputs(const char * restrict s, FILE * restrict stream);
int getc(FILE *stream);
int getchar(void);
int putc(int c, FILE *stream);
int putchar(int c);
int puts(const char *s);
int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);
size_t fread(void * restrict ptr, size_t size, size_t nmemb,
      FILE * restrict stream);
size_t fwrite(const void * restrict ptr, size_t size, size_t nmemb,
      FILE * restrict stream);
int fgetpos(FILE * restrict stream, fpos_t * restrict pos);
int fseek(FILE *stream, long int offset, int whence);
int fsetpos(FILE *stream, const fpos_t *pos);
long int ftell(FILE *stream);
void rewind(FILE *stream);
void clearerr(FILE *stream);
int feof(FILE *stream);
int ferror(FILE *stream);
void perror(const char *s);
int fprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, ...);
int fscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, ...);
errno_t tmpfile_s(FILE * restrict * restrict streamptr);
errno_t tmpnam_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize);
errno_t fopen_s(FILE * restrict * restrict streamptr,
      const char * restrict filename, const char * restrict mode);
errno_t freopen_s(FILE * restrict * restrict newstreamptr,
      const char * restrict filename, const char * restrict mode,
      FILE * restrict stream);
int fprintf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, ...);
int fscanf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, ...);
int printf_s(const char * restrict format, ...);
int scanf_s(const char * restrict format, ...);
int snprintf_s(char * restrict s, rsize_t n, const char * restrict format, ...);
int sprintf_s(char * restrict s, rsize_t n, const char * restrict format, ...);
int sscanf_s(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, ...);
int vfprintf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vfscanf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vprintf_s(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vscanf_s(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vsnprintf_s(char * restrict s, rsize_t n, const char * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vsprintf_s(char * restrict s, rsize_t n, const char * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vsscanf_s(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
char *gets_s(char *s, rsize_t n);

L_tmpnam_s TMP_MAX_S errno_t rsize_t

B.23 General utilities <stdlib.h>

:
once_flag
__STDC_VERSION_STDLIB_H__
EXIT_FAILURE
EXIT_SUCCESS
MB_CUR_MAX
NULL
ONCE_FLAG_INIT
RAND_MAX
void call_once(once_flag *flag, void (*func)(void));
double atof(const char *nptr);
int atoi(const char *nptr);
long int atol(const char *nptr);
long long int atoll(const char *nptr);
int strfromd(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    double fp);
int strfromf(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    float fp);
int strfroml(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    long double fp);
double strtod(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
float strtof(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
long double strtold(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
long int strtol(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr, int base);
long long int strtoll(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr,
    int base);
unsigned long int strtoul(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr,
    int base);
unsigned long long int strtoull(const char * restrict nptr,
    char ** restrict endptr, int base);
int rand(void);
void srand(unsigned int seed);
void *aligned_alloc(size_t alignment, size_t size);
void *calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
void free(void *ptr);
void free_sized(void *ptr, size_t size);
void free_aligned_sized(void *ptr, size_t alignment, size_t size);
void *malloc(size_t size);
void *realloc(void *ptr, size_t size);
[[noreturn]] void abort(void);
int atexit(void (*func)(void));
int at_quick_exit(void (*func)(void));
[[noreturn]] void exit(int status);
[[noreturn]] void _Exit(int status);
char *getenv(const char *name);
[[noreturn]] void quick_exit(int status);
int system(const char *string);
QVoid *bsearch(const void *key, QVoid *base, size_t nmemb, size_t size,
      int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
void qsort(void *base, size_t nmemb, size_t size,
      int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));
int abs(int j);
long int labs(long int j);
long long int llabs(long long int j);
div_t div(int numer, int denom);
ldiv_t ldiv(long int numer, long int denom);
lldiv_t lldiv(long long int numer, long long int denom);
int mblen(const char *s, size_t n);
int mbtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc, const char * restrict s, size_t n);
int wctomb(char *s, wchar_t wc);
size_t mbstowcs(wchar_t * restrict pwcs, const char * restrict s, size_t n);

size_t wchar_t div_t ldiv_t lldiv_t

size_t wcstombs(char * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict pwcs, size_t n);
size_t memalignment(const void *p);
int strfromd32(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    _Decimal32 fp);
int strfromd64(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    _Decimal64 fp);
int strfromd128(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
    _Decimal128 fp);
_Decimal32 strtod32(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
_Decimal64 strtod64(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
_Decimal128 strtod128(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
constraint_handler_t set_constraint_handler_s(constraint_handler_t handler);
void abort_handler_s(const char * restrict msg, void * restrict ptr,
      errno_t error);
void ignore_handler_s(const char * restrict msg, void * restrict ptr,
      errno_t error);
errno_t getenv_s(size_t * restrict len, char * restrict value, rsize_t maxsize,
      const char * restrict name);
QVoid *bsearch_s(const void *key, QVoid *base, rsize_t nmemb, rsize_t size,
      int (*compar)(const void *k, const void *y, void *context),
      void *context);
errno_t qsort_s(void *base, rsize_t nmemb, rsize_t size,
      int (*compar)(const void *x, const void *y, void *context),
      void *context);
errno_t wctomb_s(int * restrict status, char * restrict s, rsize_t smax,
      wchar_t wc);
errno_t mbstowcs_s(size_t * restrict retval, wchar_t * restrict dst,
      rsize_t dstmax, const char * restrict src, rsize_t len);
errno_t wcstombs_s(size_t * restrict retval, char * restrict dst, rsize_t dstmax,
      const wchar_t * restrict src, rsize_t len);

errno_t rsize_t constraint_handler_t

B.24 _Noreturn <stdnoreturn.h>

noreturn

B.25 String handling <string.h>

:
NULL
void *memcpy(void * restrict s1, const void * restrict s2, size_t n);
void *memccpy(void * restrict s1, const void * restrict s2, int c, size_t n);
void *memmove(void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
char *strcpy(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2);
char *strncpy(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2, size_t n);
char *strdup(const char *s);
char *strndup(const char *s, size_t n);
char *strcat(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2);
char *strncat(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2, size_t n);

size_t __STDC_VERSION_STRING_H__

int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
int strcmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);
int strcoll(const char *s1, const char *s2);
int strncmp(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t n);
size_t strxfrm(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2, size_t n);
QVoid *memchr(QVoid *s, int c, size_t n);
QChar *strchr(QChar *s, int c);
size_t strcspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
QChar *strpbrk(QChar *s1, const char *s2);
QChar *strrchr(QChar *s, int c);
size_t strspn(const char *s1, const char *s2);
QChar *strstr(QChar *s1, const char *s2);
char *strtok(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2);
void *memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);
void *memset_explicit(void *s, int c, size_t n);
char *strerror(int errnum);
size_t strlen(const char *s);
errno_t memcpy_s(void * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const void * restrict s2,
      rsize_t n);
errno_t memmove_s(void *s1, rsize_t s1max, const void *s2, rsize_t n);
errno_t strcpy_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const char * restrict s2);
errno_t strncpy_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const char * restrict s2,
      rsize_t n);
errno_t strcat_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const char * restrict s2);
errno_t strncat_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const char * restrict s2,
      rsize_t n);
char *strtok_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t * restrict s1max,
      const char * restrict s2, char ** restrict ptr);
errno_t memset_s(void *s, rsize_t smax, int c, rsize_t n)
errno_t strerror_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize, errno_t errnum);
size_t strerrorlen_s(errno_t errnum);
size_t strnlen_s(const char *s, size_t maxsize);

errno_t rsize_t

B.26 Type-generic math <tgmath.h>

:
sqrt
fabs
acospi
asinpi
atan2pi
atan2
atanpi
cbrt
ceil
compoundn
copysign
cospi
erfc
erf
exp10m1
exp10
exp2m1
exp2
expm1
fdim
floor
fmax
fmaximum
fmaximum_mag
fmaximum_num
fmaximum_mag_num
fma
fmin
fminimum
fminimum_mag
fminimum_num
fminimum_mag_num

acos asin atan acosh asinh atanh cos sin tan cosh sinh tanh exp log pow

:
lrint
lround
nearbyint
nextafter
nextdown
nexttoward
nextup
pown
powr
remainder
remquo
rint
rootn
roundeven
round
rsqrt
scalbln
scalbn
sinpi
tanpi
tgamma
trunc
ufromfpx
ufromfp
fadd
dadd
fsub
dsub
fmul
dmul
fdiv
ddiv
ffma
dfma
fsqrt
dsqrt
d64sub
d32mul
d64mul
d32div
d64div
d32fma
d64fma
d32sqrt
d64sqrt
quantize
samequantum
quantum
llquantexp

d32add d64add d32sub

B.27 Threads <threads.h>

:
mtx_t
tss_dtor_t
thrd_start_t
once_flag
mtx_plain
mtx_recursive
mtx_timed
thrd_timedout
thrd_success
thrd_busy
thrd_error
thrd_nomem
void call_once(once_flag *flag, void (*func)(void));
int cnd_broadcast(cnd_t *cond);
void cnd_destroy(cnd_t *cond);
int cnd_init(cnd_t *cond);
int cnd_signal(cnd_t *cond);
int cnd_timedwait(cnd_t * restrict cond, mtx_t * restrict mtx,
      const struct timespec * restrict ts);
int cnd_wait(cnd_t *cond, mtx_t *mtx);
void mtx_destroy(mtx_t *mtx);
int mtx_init(mtx_t *mtx, int type);
int mtx_lock(mtx_t *mtx);
int mtx_timedlock(mtx_t * restrict mtx, const struct timespec * restrict ts);
int mtx_trylock(mtx_t *mtx);
int mtx_unlock(mtx_t *mtx);
int thrd_create(thrd_t *thr, thrd_start_t func, void *arg);
thrd_t thrd_current(void);
int thrd_detach(thrd_t thr);
int thrd_equal(thrd_t thr0, thrd_t thr1);

ONCE_FLAG_INIT TSS_DTOR_ITERATIONS cnd_t thrd_t tss_t

[[noreturn]] void thrd_exit(int res);
int thrd_join(thrd_t thr, int *res);
int thrd_sleep(const struct timespec *duration, struct timespec *remaining);
void thrd_yield(void);
int tss_create(tss_t *key, tss_dtor_t dtor);
void tss_delete(tss_t key);
void *tss_get(tss_t key);
int tss_set(tss_t key, void *val);

B.28 Date and time <time.h>

:
TIME_UTC
size_t
clock_t
time_t
struct timespec
struct tm
clock_t clock(void);
double difftime(time_t time1, time_t time0);
time_t mktime(struct tm *timeptr);
time_t timegm(struct tm *timeptr);
time_t time(time_t *timer);
int timespec_get(struct timespec *ts, int base);
int timespec_getres(struct timespec *ts, int base);
[[deprecated]] char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr);
[[deprecated]] char *ctime(const time_t *timer);
struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *timer);
struct tm *gmtime_r(const time_t *timer, struct tm *buf);
struct tm *localtime(const time_t *timer);
struct tm *localtime_r(const time_t *timer, struct tm *buf);
size_t strftime(char * restrict s, size_t maxsize, const char * restrict format,
      const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
errno_t asctime_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize, const struct tm *timeptr);
errno_t ctime_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize, const time_t *timer);
struct tm *gmtime_s(const time_t * restrict timer, struct tm * restrict result);
struct tm *localtime_s(const time_t * restrict timer, struct tm * restrict result);

errno_t rsize_t

B.29 Unicode utilities <uchar.h>

:
size_t
char8_t
char16_t
char32_t

mbstate_t

size_t mbrtoc8(char8_t * restrict pc8, const char * restrict s, size_t n,
      mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t c8rtomb(char * restrict s, char8_t c8, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t mbrtoc16(char16_t * restrict pc16, const char * restrict s, size_t n,
      mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t c16rtomb(char * restrict s, char16_t c16, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t mbrtoc32(char32_t * restrict pc32, const char * restrict s, size_t n,
      mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t c32rtomb(char * restrict s, char32_t c32, mbstate_t * restrict ps);

B.30 Extended multibyte/wide character utilities <wchar.h>

:
struct tm
__STDC_VERSION_WCHAR_H__
NULL
WCHAR_MAX
WCHAR_MIN
WEOF
int fwprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
int fwscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
int swprintf(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      ...);
int swscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
int vfwprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vfwscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vswprintf(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vswscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vwprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vwscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);
int wprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
int wscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
wint_t fgetwc(FILE *stream);
wchar_t *fgetws(wchar_t * restrict s, int n, FILE * restrict stream);
wint_t fputwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
int fputws(const wchar_t * restrict s, FILE * restrict stream);
int fwide(FILE *stream, int mode);
wint_t getwc(FILE *stream);
wint_t getwchar(void);
wint_t putwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);
wint_t putwchar(wchar_t c);
wint_t ungetwc(wint_t c, FILE *stream);
double wcstod(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
float wcstof(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
long double wcstold(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
long int wcstol(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr,
      int base);
long long int wcstoll(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr,
      int base);
unsigned long int wcstoul(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
      wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);
unsigned long long int wcstoull(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
      wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);
wchar_t *wcscpy(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2);
wchar_t *wcsncpy(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
wchar_t *wmemcpy(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
wchar_t *wmemmove(wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);

wchar_t size_t mbstate_t wint_t

wchar_t *wcscat(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2);
wchar_t *wcsncat(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
int wcscmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
int wcscoll(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
int wcsncmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);
size_t wcsxfrm(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
int wmemcmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);
QWchar_t *wcschr(QWchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
size_t wcscspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
QWchar_t *wcspbrk(QWchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
QWchar_t *wcsrchr(QWchar_t *s, wchar_t c);
size_t wcsspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
QWchar_t *wcsstr(QWchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);
wchar_t *wcstok(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2,
      wchar_t ** restrict ptr);
QWchar_t *wmemchr(QWchar_t *s, wchar_t c, size_t n);
size_t wcslen(const wchar_t *s);
wchar_t *wmemset(wchar_t *s, wchar_t c, size_t n);
size_t wcsftime(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t maxsize,
      const wchar_t * restrict format, const struct tm * restrict timeptr);
wint_t btowc(int c);
int wctob(wint_t c);
int mbsinit(const mbstate_t *ps);
size_t mbrlen(const char * restrict s, size_t n, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t mbrtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc, const char * restrict s, size_t n,
      mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t wcrtomb(char * restrict s, wchar_t wc, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t mbsrtowcs(wchar_t * restrict dst, const char ** restrict src, size_t len,
      mbstate_t * restrict ps);
size_t wcsrtombs(char * restrict dst, const wchar_t ** restrict src, size_t len,
      mbstate_t * restrict ps);
_Decimal32 wcstod32(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
_Decimal64 wcstod64(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
_Decimal128 wcstod128(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
int fwprintf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
int fwscanf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
int snwprintf_s(wchar_t * restrict s, rsize_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      ...);
int swprintf_s(wchar_t * restrict s, rsize_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      ...);
int swscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
int vfwprintf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vfwscanf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vsnwprintf_s(wchar_t * restrict s, rsize_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vswprintf_s(wchar_t * restrict s, rsize_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);
int vswscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);

errno_t rsize_t

int vwprintf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);
int vwscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);
int wprintf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
int wscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
errno_t wcscpy_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
      const wchar_t * restrict s2);
errno_t wcsncpy_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
      const wchar_t * restrict s2, rsize_t n);
errno_t wmemcpy_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
      const wchar_t * restrict s2, rsize_t n);
errno_t wmemmove_s(wchar_t *s1, rsize_t s1max, const wchar_t *s2, rsize_t n);
errno_t wcscat_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
      const wchar_t * restrict s2);
errno_t wcsncat_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
      const wchar_t * restrict s2, rsize_t n);
wchar_t *wcstok_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t * restrict s1max,
      const wchar_t * restrict s2, wchar_t ** restrict ptr);
size_t wcsnlen_s(const wchar_t *s, size_t maxsize);
errno_t wcrtomb_s(size_t * restrict retval, char * restrict s, rsize_t smax,
      wchar_t wc, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
errno_t mbsrtowcs_s(size_t * restrict retval, wchar_t * restrict dst,
      rsize_t dstmax, const char ** restrict src, rsize_t len,
      mbstate_t * restrict ps);
errno_t wcsrtombs_s(size_t * restrict retval, char * restrict dst,
      rsize_t dstmax, const wchar_t ** restrict src, rsize_t len,
      mbstate_t * restrict ps);

B.31 Wide character classification and mapping utilities <wctype.h>

int iswalnum(wint_t wc);
int iswalpha(wint_t wc);
int iswblank(wint_t wc);
int iswcntrl(wint_t wc);
int iswdigit(wint_t wc);
int iswgraph(wint_t wc);
int iswlower(wint_t wc);
int iswprint(wint_t wc);
int iswpunct(wint_t wc);
int iswspace(wint_t wc);
int iswupper(wint_t wc);
int iswxdigit(wint_t wc);
int iswctype(wint_t wc, wctype_t desc);
wctype_t wctype(const char *property);
wint_t towlower(wint_t wc);
wint_t towupper(wint_t wc);
wint_t towctrans(wint_t wc, wctrans_t desc);
wctrans_t wctrans(const char *property);

wint_t wctrans_t wctype_t WEOF

C Sequence points

C.1 Known Sequence Points

1

The following are the sequence points described in 5.1.2.4:

  • Between the evaluations of the function designator and actual arguments in a function call and the actual call. (6.5.3.3).
  • Between the evaluations of the first and second operands of the following operators: logical AND && (6.5.14); logical OR || (6.5.15); comma , (6.5.18).
  • Between the evaluations of the first operand of the conditional ?: operator and whichever of the second and third operands is evaluated (6.5.16).
  • Between the evaluation of a full expression and the next full expression to be evaluated. The following are full expressions: a full declarator for a variably modified type; an initializer that is not part of a compound literal (6.7.11); the expression in an expression statement (6.8.4); the controlling expression of a selection statement (if or switch) (6.8.5); the controlling expression of a while or do statement (6.8.6); each of the (optional) expressions of a for statement (6.8.6.4); the (optional) expression in a return statement (6.8.7.5).
  • Immediately before a library function returns (7.1.4).
  • After the actions associated with each formatted input/output function conversion specifier (7.23.6, 7.31.2).
  • Immediately before and immediately after each call to a comparison function, and also between any call to a comparison function and any movement of the objects passed as arguments to that call (7.24.5).

D Universal character names for identifiers

D.1 Introduction

1

This subclause describes the choices made in application of UAX #31 ("Unicode Identifier and Pattern Syntax") to C of the requirements from UAX #31 and how they do or do not apply to C. For UAX #31, C conforms by meeting the requirements "Default Identifiers" (D.2) and "Equivalent Normalized Identifiers" (D.2). The other requirements, also listed in the following subclauses, are either alternatives not taken or do not apply to C.

D.2 Default Identifiers

D.2.1 General

1

UAX #31 specifies a default syntax for identifiers based on properties from the Unicode Character Database, UAX #44. The general syntax is

<Identifier> := <Start> <Continue>* (<Medial> <Continue>+)*
where <Start> has the XID_Start property, <Continue> has the XID_Continue property, and <Medial> is a list of characters permitted between continue characters. For C we add the character _ (U+005F, LOW LINE) to the set of permitted Start characters, the Medial set is empty, and the Continue characters are unmodified. In the grammar used in UAX #31, this is
<Identifier> := <Start> <Continue>*
<Start> := XID_Start + U+005F
<Continue> := <Start> + XID_Continue

Additionally, implementations may add the character $ (U+0024, DOLLAR SIGN) to the set of permitted Start and Continue characters. This is described in the C grammar (6.4.2.1), where identifier is formed from identifier-start or identifier followed by identifier-continue.

D.2.2 Restricted Format Characters

1

If an implementation of UAX #31 wishes to allow format characters such as ZERO WIDTH JOINER or ZERO WIDTH NON-JOINER it shall define a profile allowing them, or describe precisely which combinations are permitted.

2

C does not allow format characters in identifiers, so this does not apply.

D.2.3 Stable Identifiers

1

An implementation of UAX #31 may choose to guarantee that identifiers are stable across versions of the Unicode Standard. Once a string qualifies as an identifier it does so in all future versions. C does not make this guarantee, except to the extent that UAX #31 guarantees the stability of the XID_Start and XID_Continue properties.

D.3 Immutable Identifiers

1

An implementation may choose to guarantee that the set of identifiers will never change by fixing the set of code points allowed in identifiers forever.

2

C does not choose to make this guarantee. As scripts are added to Unicode, additional characters in those scripts may become available for use in identifiers.

D.4 Pattern_White_Space and Pattern_Syntax Characters

1

UAX #31 describes how languages that use or interpret patterns of characters, such as regular expressions or number formats, may describe that syntax with Unicode properties.

2

C does not do this as part of the language, deferring to library components for such usage of patterns. This requirement does not apply to C.

D.5 Equivalent Normalized Identifiers

1

UAX #31 requires that implementations describe how identifiers are compared and considered equivalent.

2

C requires that identifiers be in Normalization Form C and therefore identifiers that compare the same under NFC are equivalent. This is described in 6.4.2.

D.6 Equivalent Case-Insensitive Identifiers

1

C considers case to be significant in identifier comparison, and does not do any case folding. This requirement does not apply to C

D.7 Filtered Normalized Identifiers

1

If any characters are excluded from normalization, UAX #31 requires a precise specification of those exclusions.

2

C does not make any such exclusions.

D.8 Filtered Case-Insensitive Identifiers

1

C identifiers are case sensitive, and therefore this requirement does not apply.

D.9 Hashtag Identifiers

1

There are no hashtags in C, so this requirement does not apply.

E Implementation limits

E.1 Introduction

1

The contents of the header <limits.h> are given in the following subclauses. The values shall all be constant expressions suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives. The components are described further in 5.2.5.3.2.

E.2 Minimum values

1

For the following macros, the minimum values shown shall be replaced by implementation-defined values.

#define BOOL_WIDTH                       1 // exact value
#define CHAR_BIT                         8
#define USHRT_WIDTH                     16
#define UINT_WIDTH                      16
#define ULONG_WIDTH                     32
#define ULLONG_WIDTH                    64
#define BITINT_MAXWIDTH                 ULLONG_WIDTH // at minimum as large
                                                     // as unsigned long long
#define MB_LEN_MAX                       1
2

For the following macros, the minimum magnitudes shown shall be replaced by implementationdefined magnitudes with the same sign that are deduced from the prior macros as indicated.422)

            _                                  2BOOL_WIDTH  − 1
#define BOOL MAX                         1  //
#define CHAR_MAX    UCHAR_MAX or SCHAR_MAX
#define CHAR_MIN            0 or SCHAR_MIN
#define CHAR_WIDTH                       8  // CHAR_BIT
             _                                 2UCHAR_WIDTH  − 1
#define UCHAR MAX                      255  //
#define UCHAR_WIDTH                      8  // CHAR_BIT
             _                                 2USHRT_WIDTH  − 1
#define USHRT MAX                    65535  //
             _                                 2SCHAR_WIDTH − 1  − 1
#define SCHAR MAX                     +127  //
#define SCHAR_MIN                     -128  // −2SCHAR_WIDTH − 1
#define SCHAR_WIDTH                      8  // CHAR_BIT
            _                                  2SHRT_WIDTH − 1  − 1
#define SHRT MAX                    +32767  //
#define SHRT_MIN                    -32768  // −2SHRT_WIDTH − 1
#define SHRT_WIDTH                      16  // USHRT_WIDTH
           _                                   2INT_WIDTH − 1  − 1
#define INT MAX                     +32767  //
#define INT_MIN                     -32768  // −2INT_WIDTH − 1
#define INT_WIDTH                       16  // UINT_WIDTH
            _                                  2UINT_WIDTH  − 1
#define UINT MAX                     65535  //
            _                                  2LONG_WIDTH − 1  − 1
#define LONG MAX               +2147483647  //
#define LONG_MIN               -2147483648  // −2LONG_WIDTH − 1
#define LONG_WIDTH                      32  // ULONG_WIDTH
             _                                 2LLONG_WIDTH − 1  − 1
#define LLONG MAX     +9223372036854775807  //
#define LLONG_MIN     -9223372036854775808  // −2LLONG_WIDTH − 1
#define LLONG_WIDTH                     64  // ULLONG_WIDTH
             _                                 2ULONG_WIDTH  − 1
#define ULONG MAX               4294967295  //
              _                                2ULLONG_WIDTH  − 1
#define ULLONG MAX    18446744073709551615  //
3

The contents of the header <float.h> are given in the following subclauses. All integer values, except FLT_ROUNDS, shall be constant expressions suitable for use in #if preprocessing directives;

all floating values shall be arithmetic constant expressions. The components are described further in 5.2.5.3.3 and 5.2.5.3.4.

4

The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined expressions:

#define FLT_EVAL_METHOD
#define FLT_ROUNDS
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
#define DEC_EVAL_METHOD
#endif
5

The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined constant expressions that are greater or equal in magnitude (absolute value) to those shown, with the same sign:

#define DBL_DECIMAL_DIG                 10
#define DBL_DIG                         10
#define DBL_MANT_DIG
#define DBL_MAX_10_EXP                 +37
#define DBL_MAX_EXP
#define DBL_MIN_10_EXP                 -37
#define DBL_MIN_EXP
#define DECIMAL_DIG                     10
#define FLT_DECIMAL_DIG                  6
#define FLT_DIG                          6
#define FLT_MANT_DIG
#define FLT_MAX_10_EXP                 +37
#define FLT_MAX_EXP
#define FLT_MIN_10_EXP                 -37
#define FLT_MIN_EXP
#define FLT_RADIX                        2
#define LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG                10
#define LDBL_DIG                        10
#define LDBL_MANT_DIG
#define LDBL_MAX_10_EXP                +37
#define LDBL_MAX_EXP
#define LDBL_MIN_10_EXP                -37
#define LDBL_MIN_EXP
6

The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined constant expressions with values that are greater than or equal to those shown:

#define DBL_MAX                      1E+37
#define DBL_NORM_MAX                 1E+37
#define FLT_MAX                      1E+37
#define FLT_NORM_MAX                 1E+37
#define LDBL_MAX                     1E+37
#define LDBL_NORM_MAX                1E+37
7

The values given in the following list shall be replaced by implementation-defined constant expressions with (positive) values that are less than or equal to those shown:

#define DBL_EPSILON                   1E-9
#define DBL_MIN                      1E-37
#define FLT_EPSILON                   1E-5
#define FLT_MIN                      1E-37
#define LDBL_EPSILON                  1E-9
#define LDBL_MIN                     1E-37
8

If the implementation supports decimal floating types, the following macros provide the parameters of these types as exact values.

#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
#define DEC32_EPSILON      1E-6DF
#define DEC32_MANT_DIG     7
#define DEC32_MAX          9.999999E96DF
#define DEC32_MAX_EXP      97
#define DEC32_MIN          1E-95DF
#define DEC32_MIN_EXP      -94
#define DEC32_TRUE_MIN     0.000001E-95DF
#define DEC64_EPSILON      1E-15DD
#define DEC64_MANT_DIG     16
#define DEC64_MAX          9.999999999999999E384DD
#define DEC64_MAX_EXP      385
#define DEC64_MIN          1E-383DD
#define DEC64_MIN_EXP      -382
#define DEC64_TRUE_MIN     0.000000000000001E-383DD
#define DEC128_EPSILON     1E-33DL
#define DEC128_MANT_DIG    34
#define DEC128_MAX         9.999999999999999999999999999999999E6144DL
#define DEC128_MAX_EXP     6145
#define DEC128_MIN         1E-6143DL
#define DEC128_MIN_EXP     -6142
#define DEC128_TRUE_MIN    0.000000000000000000000000000000001E-6143DL
#endif

F ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point arithmetic

F.1 Introduction

1

This annex specifies C language support for the ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point standard. The ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point standard is specifically Floating-point arithmetic (ISO/IEC 60559:2020), also designated as IEEE Standard for Floating-Point Arithmetic (IEEE 754–2019). ISO/IEC 60559 generally refers to the floating-point standard, as in ISO/IEC 60559 operation, ISO/IEC 60559 format, etc.

2

The ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point standard is a minor upgrade to ISO/IEC/IEEE 60559:2011 (IEEE 754-2008). ISO/IEC/IEEE 60559:2011 was a major upgrade to IEC 60559:1989 (IEEE 754–1985), specifying decimal as well as binary floating-point arithmetic.

3

An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ to 202311L shall conform to the specifications in this annex for binary floating-point arithmetic and shall also define __STDC_IEC_559__ to 1.423)

4

An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ to 202311L shall conform to the specifications for decimal floating-point arithmetic in the following subclauses of this annex:

— F.2.2 Infinities and NaNs — F.3 Operations — F.4 Floating to integer conversions — F.6 The return statement — F.7 Contracted expressions — F.8 Floating-point environment — F.9 Optimization — F.10 Mathematics <math.h> and <tgmath.h>

For the purpose of specifying these conformance requirements, the macros, functions, and values mentioned in the subclauses listed prior are understood to refer to the corresponding macros, functions, and values for decimal floating types. Likewise, the "rounding direction mode" is understood to refer to the rounding direction mode for decimal floating-point arithmetic.

5

Where a binding between the C language and ISO/IEC 60559 is indicated, the ISO/IEC 60559specified behavior is adopted by reference, unless stated otherwise.

F.2 Types

F.2.1 General

1

The C floating types match the ISO/IEC 60559 formats as follows:

  • The float type matches the ISO/IEC 60559 binary32 format.
  • The double type matches the ISO/IEC 60559 binary64 format.
  • The long double type matches the ISO/IEC 60559 binary128 format, else an ISO/IEC 60559 binary64-extended format,424) else a non-ISO/IEC 60559 extended format, else the ISO/IEC 60559 binary64 format.

Any non-ISO/IEC 60559 extended format used for the long double type shall have more precision than ISO/IEC 60559 binary64 and at least the range of ISO/IEC 60559 binary64.425) The value

of FLT_ROUNDS applies to all ISO/IEC 60559 types supported by the implementation, but is not required to apply to non-ISO/IEC 60559 types.

Recommended practice

2

The long double type should match the ISO/IEC 60559 binary128 format, else an ISO/IEC 60559 binary64-extended format.

F.2.2 Infinities and NaNs

1

Since negative and positive infinity are representable in ISO/IEC 60559 formats, all real numbers lie within the range of representable values (5.2.5.3.3).

2

The NAN and INFINITY macros in <float.h> and the nan functions in <math.h> provide designations for ISO/IEC 60559 quiet NaNs and infinities. The FLT_SNAN, DBL_SNAN, and LDBL_SNAN macros in <float.h> provide designations for ISO/IEC 60559 signaling NaNs.

3

This annex does not require the full support for signaling NaNs specified in ISO/IEC 60559. This annex uses the term NaN, unless explicitly qualified, to denote quiet NaNs. Where specification of signaling NaNs is not provided, the behavior of signaling NaNs is implementation-defined (either treated as an ISO/IEC 60559 quiet NaN or treated as an ISO/IEC 60559 signaling NaN).426)

4

Any operator or <math.h> function that raises an "invalid" floating-point exception, if delivering a floating type result, shall return a quiet NaN, unless explicitly specified otherwise.

5

To support signaling NaNs as specified in ISO/IEC 60559, an implementation should adhere to the following recommended practice.

Recommended practice

6

Any floating-point operator or <math.h> function or macro with a signaling NaN input, unless explicitly specified otherwise, raises an "invalid" floating-point exception.

7

NOTE Some functions do not propagate quiet NaN arguments. For example, hypot(x, y) returns infinity if x or y is infinite and the other is a quiet NaN. The recommended practice in this subclause specifies that such functions (and others) raise the "invalid" floating-point exception if an argument is a signaling NaN, which also implies they return a quiet NaN in these cases.

8

The <fenv.h> header defines the macro FE_SNANS_ALWAYS_SIGNAL if and only if the implementation follows the recommended practice in this subclause. If defined, FE_SNANS_ALWAYS_SIGNAL expands to the integer constant 1.

F.3 Operations

1

C operators, functions, and function-like macros provide operations specified by ISO/IEC 60559 as shown in Table F.2. In the table, C functions are represented by the function name without a type suffix. Specifications for the C facilities are provided in the listed clauses. The C specifications are intended to match ISO/IEC 60559, unless stated otherwise.

Table F.2: Operation binding

ISO/IEC 60559 operation C operation Clause roundToIntegralTiesToEven roundeven 7.12.9.8, F.10.6.8 roundToIntegralTiesAway round 7.12.9.6, F.10.6.6 roundToIntegralTowardZero trunc 7.12.9.9, F.10.6.9 roundToIntegralTowardPositive ceil 7.12.9.1, F.10.6.1 roundToIntegralTowardNegative floor 7.12.9.2, F.10.6.2 roundToIntegralExact rint 7.12.9.4, F.10.6.4 nextUp nextup 7.12.11.5, F.10.8.5 nextDown nextdown 7.12.11.6, F.10.8.6 getPayload getpayload F.10.13.2

7.24.1.5, 7.31.4.1.2, 7.23.6.4, 7.31.2.12, F.5 convertToDecimalCharacter printf, wprintf, strfromd 7.23.6.3, 7.31.2.11, 7.24.1.3, F.5

7.12.3.1, 7.12.3.7, 7.12.3.8 isSignMinus signbit 7.12.3.7 isNormal isnormal 7.12.3.6 isFinite isfinite 7.12.3.3 isZero iszero 7.12.3.10 isSubnormal issubnormal 7.12.3.9 isInfinite isinf 7.12.3.4 isNaN isnan 7.12.3.5 isSignaling issignaling 7.12.3.8 isCanonical iscanonical 7.12.3.2 radix FLT_RADIX 5.2.5.3.3 totalOrder totalorder F.10.12.2 totalOrderMag totalordermag F.10.12.3 lowerFlags feclearexcept 7.6.4.1 raiseFlags fesetexcept 7.6.4.4 testFlags fetestexcept 7.6.4.7 testSavedFlags fetestexceptflag 7.6.4.6 restoreFlags fesetexceptflag 7.6.4.5 saveAllFlags fegetexceptflag 7.6.4.2 getBinaryRoundingDirection fegetround 7.6.5.2 setBinaryRoundingDirection fesetround 7.6.5.5 saveModes fegetmode 7.6.5.1

restoreModes fesetmode 7.6.5.4 defaultModes fesetmode(FE_DFL_MODE) 7.6.5.4, 7.6

2

The ISO/IEC 60559 requirement that certain of its operations be provided for operands of different formats (of the same radix) is satisfied by C’s usual arithmetic conversions (6.3.1.8) and function-call argument conversions (6.5.3.3). For example, the following operations take float f and double d inputs and produce a long double result:

(long double)f * d
powl(f, d)
3

The functions fmin and fmax have been superseded by fminimum_num and fmaximum_num. The fmin and fmax functions provide the minNum and maxNum operations specified in (the superseded) ISO/IEC/IEEE 60559:2011.

4

Whether C assignment (6.5.17) (and conversion as if by assignment) to the same format is an ISO/IEC 60559 convertFormat or copy operation427) is implementation-defined, even if <fenv.h> defines the macro FE_SNANS_ALWAYS_SIGNAL (F.2.2). If the return expression of a return statement is evaluated to the floating-point format of the return type, it is implementation-defined whether a convertFormat operation is applied to the result of the return expression.

5

The unary + and - operators raise no floating-point exceptions, even if the operand is a signaling NaN.

6

The C classification macros fpclassify, iscanonical, isfinite, isinf, isnan, isnormal, issignaling, issubnormal, iszero, and signbit provide the ISO/IEC 60559 operations indicated in Table F.2 provided their arguments are in the format of their semantic type. Then these macros raise no floating-point exceptions, even if an argument is a signaling NaN.

7

The signbit macro, providing the ISO/IEC 60559 isSignMinus operation, determines the sign of its argument value as the sign bit of the value’s representation. This applies to all values, including NaNs whose sign bit is not generally interpreted by ISO/IEC 60559.

8

The C nearbyint functions (7.12.9.3, F.10.6.3) provide the nearbyinteger function recommended in the Appendix to (superseded) ANSI/IEEE 854–1987.

9

The C nextafter (7.12.11.3, F.10.8.3) and nexttoward (7.12.11.4, F.10.8.4) functions provide the nextafter function recommended in the Appendix to (superseded) IEC 60559:1989 (but with a minor change to better handle signed zeros).

10

The macros (7.6) FE_DOWNWARD, FE_TONEAREST, FE_TONEARESTFROMZERO, FE_TOWARDZERO, and FE_UPWARD, which are used in conjunction with the fegetround and fesetround functions and the FENV_ROUND pragma, represent the ISO/IEC 60559 rounding-direction attributes roundTowardNegative, roundTiesToEven, roundTiesToAway, roundTowardZero, and roundTowardPositive, respectively, for binary floating-point arithmetic. Support for the roundTiesToAway attribute for binary floating-point arithmetic, and hence for the FE_TONEARESTFROMZERO macro, is optional.

11

The C fegetenv (7.6.6.1), feholdexcept (7.6.6.2), fesetenv (7.6.6.3) and feupdateenv (7.6.6.4) functions provide a facility to manage the dynamic floating-point environment, comprising the ISO/IEC 60559 status flags and dynamic control modes.

12

ISO/IEC 60559 requires operations with specified operand and result formats. Therefore, math functions that are bound to ISO/IEC 60559 operations (see Table F.2) shall remove any extra range and precision from arguments or results.

13

ISO/IEC 60559 requires operations that round their result to formats the same as and wider than the operands, in addition to the operations that round their result to narrower formats (see 7.12.14). Operators (+, -, *, and /) whose evaluation formats are wider than the semantic type (5.2.5.3.3)

may not support some of the ISO/IEC 60559 operations, because getting a result in a given format can require a cast that could introduce an extra rounding error. The functions that round result to narrower type (7.12.14) provide the ISO/IEC 60559 operations that round result to same and wider (as well as narrower) formats, in those cases where built-in operators and casts do not. For example, ddivl(x, y) computes a correctly rounded double divide of float x by float y, regardless of the evaluation method.

14

Decimal versions of the remquo library function are not provided. (The decimal remainder functions provide the remainder operation defined by ISO/IEC 60559.)

15

The binding for the convertFormat operation applies to all conversions among ISO/IEC 60559 formats. Therefore, for implementations that conform to this annex, conversions between decimal floating types and standard floating types with ISO/IEC 60559 formats are correctly rounded and raise floating-point exceptions as specified in ISO/IEC 60559.

16

ISO/IEC 60559 specifies the convertFromHexCharacter and convertToHexCharacter operations only for binary floating-point arithmetic.

17

The integer constant 10 provides the radix operation defined in ISO/IEC 60559 for decimal floatingpoint arithmetic.

18

The fe_dec_getround (7.6.5.3) and fe_dec_setround (7.6.5.6) functions provide the getDecimalRoundingDirection and setDecimalRoundingDirection operations defined in ISO/IEC 60559 for decimal floating-point arithmetic. The macros (7.6) FE_DEC_DOWNWARD, FE_DEC_TONEAREST, FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO, FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO, and FE_DEC_UPWARD, which are used in conjunction with the fe_dec_getround and fe_dec_setround functions and the FENV_DEC_ROUND

pragma, represent the ISO/IEC 60559 rounding-direction attributes roundTowardNegative, roundTiesToEven, roundTiesToAway, roundTowardZero, and roundTowardPositive, respectively, for decimal floating-point arithmetic.

19

The llquantexpdN (7.12.15.4) functions compute the (quantum) exponent q defined in ISO/IEC 60559 for decimal numbers viewed as having integer significands.

20

The C functions in the following table correspond to mathematical operations recommended by ISO/IEC 60559. However, correct rounding, which ISO/IEC 60559 specifies for its operations, is not required for the C functions in the table. 7.33.8 (potentially) reserves cr_ prefixed names for functions fully matching the ISO/IEC 60559 mathematical operations. In the table, the C functions are represented by the function name without a type suffix.

ISO/IEC 60559 operation C function Clause exp exp 7.12.6.1, F.10.3.1 expm1 expm1 7.12.6.6, F.10.3.6 exp2 exp2 7.12.6.4, F.10.3.4 exp2m1 exp2m1 7.12.6.5, F.10.3.5 exp10 exp10 7.12.6.2, F.10.3.2 exp10m1 exp10m1 7.12.6.3, F.10.3.3 log log 7.12.6.11, F.10.3.11 log2 log2 7.12.6.15, F.10.3.15 log10 log10 7.12.6.12, F.10.3.12 logp1 log1p, logp1 7.12.6.14, F.10.3.14 log2p1 log2p1 7.12.6.16, F.10.3.16 log10p1 log10p1 7.12.6.13, F.10.3.13 hypot hypot 7.12.7.4, F.10.4.4 rSqrt rsqrt 7.12.7.9, F.10.4.9 compound compoundn 7.12.7.2, F.10.4.2 rootn rootn 7.12.7.8, F.10.4.8 pown pown 7.12.7.6, F.10.4.6 pow pow 7.12.7.5, F.10.4.5 powr powr 7.12.7.7, F.10.4.7 ... continued ...

... continued ... ISO/IEC 60559 operation C function Clause sin sin 7.12.4.6, F.10.1.6 cos cos 7.12.4.5, F.10.1.5 tan tan 7.12.4.7, F.10.1.7 sinPi sinpi 7.12.4.13, F.10.1.13 cosPi cospi 7.12.4.12, F.10.1.12 tanPi tanpi 7.12.4.14, F.10.1.14 asinPi asinpi 7.12.4.9, F.10.1.9 acosPi acospi 7.12.4.8, F.10.1.8 atanPi atanpi 7.12.4.10, F.10.1.10 atan2Pi atan2pi 7.12.4.11, F.10.1.11 asin asin 7.12.4.2, F.10.1.2 acos acos 7.12.4.1, F.10.1.1 atan atan 7.12.4.3, F.10.1.3 atan2 atan2 7.12.4.4, F.10.1.4 sinh sinh 7.12.5.5, F.10.2.5 cosh cosh 7.12.5.4, F.10.2.4 tanh tanh 7.12.5.6, F.10.2.6 asinh asinh 7.12.5.2, F.10.2.2 acosh acosh 7.12.5.1, F.10.2.1 atanh atanh 7.12.5.3, F.10.2.3

F.4 Floating to integer conversion

1

If the integer type is bool, 6.3.1.2 applies and the conversion raises no floating-point exceptions if the floating-point value is not a signaling NaN. Otherwise, if the floating value is infinite or NaN or if the integral part of the floating value exceeds the range of the integer type, then the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised and the resulting value is unspecified. Otherwise, the resulting value is determined by 6.3.1.4. Conversion of an integral floating value that does not exceed the range of the integer type raises no floating-point exceptions; whether conversion of a non-integral floating value raises the "inexact" floating-point exception is unspecified.428)

F.5 Conversions between binary floating types and decimal character sequences

1

The <float.h> header defines the macro

CR_DECIMAL_DIG

if and only if __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__ is defined as a macro at the point in the source file where <float.h> is first included. If defined, CR_DECIMAL_DIG expands to an integer constant expression suitable for use in conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directives whose value is a number such that conversions between all supported ISO/IEC 60559 binary formats and character sequences with at most CR_DECIMAL_DIG significant decimal digits are correctly rounded. The value of CR_DECIMAL_DIG shall be at least M+3, where M is the maximum value of the T_DECIMAL_DIG macros for ISO/IEC 60559 binary formats. If the implementation correctly rounds for all numbers of significant decimal digits, then CR_DECIMAL_DIG shall have the value of the macro UINTMAX_MAX.

2

Conversions of types with ISO/IEC 60559 binary formats to character sequences with more than CR_DECIMAL_DIG significant decimal digits shall correctly round to CR_DECIMAL_DIG significant digits and pad zeros on the right.

3

Conversions from character sequences with more than CR_DECIMAL_DIG significant decimal digits to types with ISO/IEC 60559 binary formats shall correctly round to an intermediate character sequence

with CR_DECIMAL_DIG significant decimal digits, according to the applicable rounding direction, and correctly round the intermediate result (having CR_DECIMAL_DIG significant decimal digits) to the destination type. The "inexact" floating-point exception is raised (once) if either conversion is inexact.429) (The second conversion may raise the "overflow" or "underflow" floating-point exception.)

4

The specification in this subclause assures conversion between ISO/IEC 60559 binary format and decimal character sequence follows all pertinent recommended practice. It also assures conversion from ISO/IEC 60559 format to decimal character sequence with at least T_DECIMAL_DIG digits and back, using to-nearest rounding, is the identity function, where T is the macro prefix for the format.

5

Functions such as strtod that convert character sequences to floating types honor the rounding direction. Hence, if the rounding direction can be upward or downward, the implementation cannot convert a minus-signed sequence by negating the converted unsigned sequence.

6

NOTE ISO/IEC 60559 specifies that conversion to one-digit character strings using roundTiesToEven when both choices have an odd least significant digit, shall produce the value with the larger magnitude. For example, this can happen with 9.5e2 whose nearest neighbors are 9.e2 and 1.e3, both of which have a single odd digit in the significand part.

F.6 The return statement If the return expression is evaluated in a floating-point format different from the return type, the expression is converted as if by assignment430) to the return type of the function and the resulting value is returned to the caller.

F.7 Contracted expressions

1

A contracted expression is correctly rounded (once) and treats infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and the rounding directions in a manner consistent with the basic arithmetic operations covered by ISO/IEC 60559.

Recommended practice

2

A contracted expression should raise floating-point exceptions in a manner generally consistent with the basic arithmetic operations.

F.8 Floating-point environment

F.8.1 General

1

The floating-point environment defined in <fenv.h> includes the ISO/IEC 60559 floating-point exception status flags and rounding-direction control modes. It may also include other floating-point status or modes that the implementation provides as extensions.431)

2

This annex does not include support for ISO/IEC 60559’s optional alternate exception handling. The specification in this annex assumes ISO/IEC 60559 default exception handling: the flag is set, a default result is delivered, and execution continues. Implementations may provide alternate exception handling as an extension.

F.8.2 Environment management

1

ISO/IEC 60559 requires that floating-point operations implicitly raise floating-point exception status flags, and that rounding control modes can be set explicitly to affect result values of floating-point operations. These changes to the floating-point state are treated as side effects which respect sequence points.432)

F.8.3 Translation

1

During translation, constant rounding direction modes (7.6.2) are in effect where specified. Elsewhere, during translation the ISO/IEC 60559 default modes are in effect:

  • The rounding direction mode is rounding to nearest.
  • The rounding precision mode (if supported) is set so that results are not shortened.
  • Trapping or stopping (if supported) is disabled on all floating-point exceptions.

Recommended practice

2

The implementation should produce a diagnostic message for each translation-time floating-point exception, other than "inexact";433) the implementation should then proceed with the translation of the program.

F.8.4 Execution

1

At program startup the dynamic floating-point environment is initialized as prescribed by ISO/IEC 60559:

  • All floating-point exception status flags are cleared.
  • The dynamic rounding direction mode is rounding to nearest.
  • The dynamic rounding precision mode (if supported) is set so that results are not shortened.
  • Trapping or stopping (if supported) is disabled on all floating-point exceptions.

F.8.5 Constant expressions

1

An arithmetic constant expression of floating type, other than one in an initializer for an object that has static or thread storage duration or that is declared with storage-class specifier constexpr, is evaluated (as if) during execution; thus, it is affected by any operative floating-point control modes and raises floating-point exceptions as required by ISO/IEC 60559 (provided the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on").434)

2

EXAMPLE

#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
void f(void)
{
      constexpr double v = 0.0/0.0; // does not raise an exception
      float w[] = { 0.0/0.0 };  // raises an exception
      static float x = 0.0/0.0; // does not raise an exception
      float y = 0.0/0.0;        // raises an exception
      double z = 0.0/0.0;       // raises an exception
      /* ... */
}
3

For the static and constexpr initializations, the division is done at translation time, raising no (executiontime) floating-point exceptions. On the other hand, for the three automatic initializations the invalid division occurs at execution time.

F.8.6 Initialization

1

All computation for automatic initialization is done (as if) at execution time; thus, it is affected by any operative modes and raises floating-point exceptions as required by ISO/IEC 60559 (provided the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on"). All computation for initialization of objects that have static or thread storage duration, or that are declared with storage-class specifier constexpr, is done (as if) at translation time.

2

EXAMPLE

#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
void f(void)
{
      constexpr float t = (float)1.1e75; // does not raise exceptions
      float u[] = { 1.1e75 };  // raises exceptions
      static float v = 1.1e75; // does not raise exceptions
      float w = 1.1e75;        // raises exceptions
      double x = 1.1e75;       // may raise exceptions
      float y = 1.1e75f;       // may raise exceptions
      long double z = 1.1e75;  // does not raise exceptions
      /* ... */
}
3

The constexpr initialization of t and the static initialization of v raise no (execution-time) floating-point exceptions because their computation is done at translation time. The automatic initialization of u and w require an execution-time conversion to float of the wider value 1.1e75, which raises floating-point exceptions. The automatic initializations of x and y entail execution-time conversion; however, in some expression evaluation methods, the conversions are not to a narrower format, in which case no floating-point exception is raised.435)

The automatic initialization of z entails execution-time conversion, but not to a narrower format, so no floatingpoint exception is raised. Note that the conversions of the floating constants 1.1e75 and 1.1e75f to their internal representations occur at translation time in all cases.

F.8.7 Changing the environment

1

Operations defined in 6.5.1 and functions and macros defined for the standard libraries change floating-point status flags and control modes just as indicated by their specifications (including conformance to ISO/IEC 60559). They do not change flags or modes (so as to be detectable by the user) in any other cases.

2

If the floating-point exceptions represented by the argument to the feraiseexcept function in <fenv.h> include both "overflow" and "inexact", then "overflow" is raised before "inexact". Similarly, if the represented exceptions include both "underflow" and "inexact", then "underflow" is raised before "inexact".

F.9 Optimization

F.9.1 General

1

This section identifies code transformations that may subvert ISO/IEC 60559-specified behavior, and others that do not.

F.9.2 Global transformations

1

Floating-point arithmetic operations and external function calls may entail side effects which optimization shall honor, at least where the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on". The flags and modes in the floating-point environment may be regarded as global variables; floating-point operations (+, *, etc.) implicitly read the modes and write the flags.

2

Concern about side effects may inhibit code motion and removal of seemingly useless code. For example, in

#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
void f(double x)
{
      /* ... */
      for (i = 0; i  <  n; i++) x + 1;
      /* ... */
}

x+1 may raise floating-point exceptions, so cannot be removed. And since the loop body may not execute (maybe 0n), x+1 cannot be moved out of the loop. (Of course these optimizations are valid if the implementation can rule out the nettlesome cases.)

3

This specification does not require support for trap handlers that maintain information about the order or count of floating-point exceptions. Therefore, between function calls, the side effects due to floating-point exceptions are not required be precise: the actual order and number of occurrences of floating-point exceptions (>1) may vary from what the source code expresses. Thus, the preceding loop could be treated as

if (0  <  n) x + 1;

F.9.3 Expression transformations

1

Valid expression transformations shall preserve numerical values.

2

The equivalences noted in the following description apply to expressions of standard floating types.

x/2x×0.5 Although similar transformations involving inexact constants generally do not yield equivalent expressions, if the constants are exact then such transformations can be made on ISO/IEC 60559 machines and others that round perfectly.

1×x and x/1x The expressions 1×x, x/1, and x may be regarded as equivalent (on ISO/IEC 60559 machines, among others).436)

x/x1.0 The expressions x/x and 1.0 are not equivalent if x can be zero, infinite, or NaN.

xyx+(y) The expressions xy, x+(y), and (y)+x are equivalent (on ISO/IEC 60559 machines, among others).

xy(yx) The expressions xy and (yx) are not equivalent because 11 is +0 but (11) is 0 (in the default rounding direction).437)

xx0.0 The expressions xx and 0.0 are not equivalent if x is a NaN or infinite.

0×x0.0 The expressions 0×x and 0.0 are not equivalent if x is a NaN, infinite, or 0.

x+0x The expressions x+0 and x are not equivalent if x is 0, because (0)+(+0) yields +0 (in the default rounding direction), not 0.

x0x The expressions x and 0x are not equivalent if x is +0, because (+0) yields 0, but 0(+0) yields +0 (unless rounding is downward).

3

For expressions of decimal floating types, transformations shall preserve quantum exponents, as well as numerical values (5.2.5.3.4).

4

EXAMPLE 1.×xx is valid for decimal floating-point expressions x, but 1.0×xx is not:

1.×12.34 = (+1,1,0)×(+1,1234,2) yields (+1,1234,2) = 12.34 1.0×12.34 = (+1,10,1)×(+1,1234,2) yields (+1,12340,3) = 12.340

In the second case, the factor 12.34 and the result 12.340 have different quantum exponents, demonstrating that 1.0×x and x are not equivalent expressions.

F.9.4 Relational operators

1

x̸=xfalse The expression x̸=x is true if x is a NaN.

x=xtrue The expression x=x is false if x is a NaN.

x<yisless(x,y) (and similarly for ≤, >, ≥) Though equal, these expressions are not equivalent because of side effects when x or y is a NaN and the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on". This transformation, which would be desirable if extra code were required to cause the "invalid" floating-point exception for unordered cases, could be performed provided the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "off".

The sense of relational operators shall be maintained. This includes handling unordered cases as expressed by the source code.

2

EXAMPLE

// calls g and raises "invalid" if a and b are unordered
if (a  <  b)
      f();
else
      g();
is not equivalent to
// calls f and raises "invalid" if a and b are unordered
if (a >= b)
      g();
else
      f();
nor to
// calls f without raising "invalid" if a and b are unordered
if (isgreaterequal(a,b))
      g();
else
      f();
nor, unless the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "off", to
// calls g without raising "invalid" if a and b are unordered
if (isless(a,b))
      f();
else
      g();
if (!(a  <  b))
      g();
else
      f();

but is equivalent to

F.9.5 Constant arithmetic

1

The implementation shall honor floating-point exceptions raised by execution-time constant arithmetic wherever the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on". (See F.8.5 and F.8.6.) An operation on constants that raises no floating-point exception can be folded during translation, except, if the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on", a further check is required to assure that changing the rounding direction to downward does not alter the sign of the result,438) and implementations that support dynamic rounding precision modes shall assure further that the result of the operation raises no floating-point exception when converted to the semantic type of the operation.

F.10 Mathematics <math.h> and <tgmath.h>

1

This subclause contains specifications of <math.h> and <tgmath.h> facilities that are particularly suited for ISO/IEC 60559 implementations.

2

The Standard C macro HUGE_VAL and its float and long double analogs, HUGE_VALF and HUGE_VALL, expand to expressions whose values are positive infinities.

3

For each single-argument function f in <math.h> whose mathematical counterpart is symmetric (even), f(-x) is f(x) for all rounding modes and for all x in the (valid) domain of the function. For each single-argument function f in <math.h> whose mathematical counterpart is antisymmetric (odd), f(-x) is -f(x) for the ISO/IEC 60559 rounding modes roundTiesToEven, roundTiesToAway, and roundTowardZero, and for all x in the (valid) domain of the function. The atan2 and atan2pi functions are odd in their first argument.

4

Special cases for functions in <math.h> are covered directly or indirectly by ISO/IEC 60559. The functions that ISO/IEC 60559 specifies directly are identified in F.3. The other functions in <math.h> treat infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and (provided the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on") the floating-point status flags in a manner consistent with ISO/IEC 60559 operations.

5

The expression math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT shall evaluate to a nonzero value.

6

The functions bound to operations in ISO/IEC 60559 (F.3) are fully specified by ISO/IEC 60559, including rounding behaviors and floating-point exceptions.

7

The "invalid" and "divide-by-zero" floating-point exceptions are raised as specified in subsequent subclauses of this annex.

8

The "overflow" floating-point exception is raised whenever an infinity — or, because of rounding direction, a maximal-magnitude finite number — is returned in lieu of a finite value whose magnitude is too large.

9

The "underflow" floating-point exception is raised whenever a computed result is tiny439) and the returned result is inexact.

10

Whether or when library functions not listed in the "Operation binding" table in F.3 raise the "inexact" floating-point exception is unspecified, unless stated otherwise.

11

Whether or when library functions not listed in the "Operation binding" table in F.3 raise a spurious

"underflow" floating-point exception is not specified by this annex.440)

12

As implied by F.8.7, library functions do not raise spurious "invalid", "overflow", or "divide-by-zero" floating-point exceptions (detectable by the user).

13

Whether the functions not listed in the "Operation binding" table in F.3 honor the rounding direction mode is implementation-defined, unless explicitly specified otherwise.

14

Functions with a NaN argument return a NaN result and raise no floating-point exception, except where explicitly stated otherwise.

15

The specifications in the following subclauses append to the definitions in <math.h>. For families of functions, the specifications apply to all the functions even though only the principal function is shown. Unless otherwise specified, where the symbol "±" occurs in both an argument and the result, the result has the same sign as the argument.

Recommended practice

16

ISO/IEC 60559 specifies correct rounding for the operations in the F.3 table of operations recommended by ISO/IEC 60559, and thereby preserves useful mathematical properties such as symmetry, monotonicity, and periodicity. The corresponding functions with (potentially) reserved cr_-prefixed names (7.33.8) do the same. The C functions in the table, however, are not required to be correctly rounded, but implementations should still preserve as many of these useful mathematical properties as possible.

17

If a function with one or more NaN arguments returns a NaN result, the result should be the same as one of the NaN arguments (after possible type conversion), except perhaps for the sign.

F.10.1 Trigonometric functions

F.10.1.1 The acos functions

1
  • acos(1) returns +0.
  • acos(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for |x|>1.

F.10.1.2 The asin functions

1
  • asin(±0) returns ±0.
  • asin(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for |x|>1.

F.10.1.3 The atan functions

1
  • atan(±0) returns ±0.
  • atan(±) returns ±π

2 .

F.10.1.4 The atan2 functions

1
  • atan2(±0,0) returns ±π.441)
  • atan2(±0,+0) returns ±0.
  • atan2(±0,x) returns ±π for x<0.
  • atan2(±0,x) returns ±0 for x>0.
  • atan2(y,±0) returns π

2 for y<0.

  • atan2(y,±0) returns π

2 for y>0.

2 for finite x.

4 .

4 .

F.10.1.5 The cos functions

1
  • cos(±0) returns 1.
  • cos(±) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.

F.10.1.6 The sin functions

1
  • sin(±0) returns ±0.
  • sin(±) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.

F.10.1.7 The tan functions

1
  • tan(±0) returns ±0.
  • tan(±) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.

F.10.1.8 The acospi functions

1
  • acospi(+1) returns +0.
  • acospi(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for |x|>1.

F.10.1.9 The asinpi functions

1
  • asinpi(±0) returns ±0.
  • asinpi(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for |x|>1.

F.10.1.10 The atanpi functions

1
  • atanpi(±0) returns ±0.
  • atanpi(±) returns ±1

2.

F.10.1.11 The atan2pi functions

1
  • atan2pi(±0,0) returns ±1.442)
  • atan2pi(±0,+0) returns ±0.
  • atan2pi(±0,x) returns ±1 for x<0.
  • atan2pi(±0,x) returns ±0 for x>0.
  • atan2pi(y,±0) returns 1

2 for y<0.

  • atan2pi(y,±0) returns +1

2 for y>0.

  • atan2pi(±y,) returns ±1 for finite y>0.
  • atan2pi(±y,+) returns ±0 for finite y>0.
  • atan2pi(±,x) returns ±1

2 for finite x.

  • atan2pi(±,) returns ±3

4.

  • atan2pi(±,+) returns ±1

4.

F.10.1.12 The cospi functions

1
  • cospi(±0) returns 1.
  • cospi(n+1

2) returns +0, for integers n.

  • cospi(±) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.

F.10.1.13 The sinpi functions

1
  • sinpi(±0) returns ±0.
  • sinpi(±n) returns ±0, for positive integers n.
  • sinpi(±) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.

F.10.1.14 The tanpi functions

1
  • tanpi(±0) returns ±0.
  • tanpi(n) returns +0, for positive even and negative odd integers n.
  • tanpi(n) returns 0, for positive odd and negative even integers n.
  • tanpi(n+1

2) returns + and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception, for even integers n.

  • tanpi(n+1

2) returns and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception, for odd integers n.

  • tanpi(±) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.

F.10.2 Hyperbolic functions

F.10.2.1 The acosh functions

1
  • acosh(1) returns +0.
  • acosh(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<1.
  • acosh(+) returns +.

F.10.2.2 The asinh functions

1
  • asinh(±0) returns ±0.
  • asinh(±) returns ±.

F.10.2.3 The atanh functions

1
  • atanh(±0) returns ±0.
  • atanh(±1) returns ± and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • atanh(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for |x|>1.

F.10.2.4 The cosh functions

1
  • cosh(±0) returns 1.
  • cosh(±) returns +.

F.10.2.5 The sinh functions

1
  • sinh(±0) returns ±0.
  • sinh(±) returns ±.

F.10.2.6 The tanh functions

1
  • tanh(±0) returns ±0.
  • tanh(±) returns ±1.

F.10.3 Exponential and logarithmic functions

F.10.3.1 The exp functions

1
  • exp(±0) returns 1.
  • exp() returns +0.
  • exp(+) returns +.

F.10.3.2 The exp10 functions

1
  • exp10(±0) returns 1.
  • exp10() returns +0.
  • exp10(+) returns +.

F.10.3.3 The exp10m1 functions

1
  • exp10m1(±0) returns ±0.
  • exp10m1() returns 1.
  • exp10m1(+) returns +.

F.10.3.4 The exp2 functions

1
  • exp2(±0) returns 1.
  • exp2() returns +0.
  • exp2(+) returns +.

F.10.3.5 The exp2m1 functions

1
  • exp2m1(±0) returns ±0.
  • exp2m1() returns 1.
  • exp2m1(+) returns +.

F.10.3.6 The expm1 functions

1
  • expm1(±0) returns ±0.
  • expm1() returns 1.
  • expm1(+) returns +.

F.10.3.7 The frexp functions

1
  • frexp(±0,p) returns ±0, and stores 0 in the object pointed to by p.
  • frexp(±,p) returns ±, and stores an unspecified value in the object pointed to by p.
  • frexp(NaN,p) stores an unspecified value in the object pointed to by p (and returns a NaN).
2

frexp raises no floating-point exceptions if value is not a signaling NaN.

3

The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

4

On a binary system, the body of the frexp function may be

{
      *p = (value == 0 || !isfinite(value)) ? 0: (int)(1 + logb(value));
      return scalbn(value, -(*p));
}

F.10.3.8 The ilogb functions

1

When the correct result is representable in the range of the return type, the returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

2

If the correct result is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised.

3

ilogb(x), for x zero, infinite, or NaN, raises the "invalid" floating-point exception and returns the value specified in 7.12.6.8.

F.10.3.9 The ldexp functions

1

On a binary system, ldexp(x, exp) is equivalent to scalbn(x, exp).

F.10.3.10 The llogb functions

1

The llogb functions are equivalent to the ilogb functions, except that the llogb functions determine a result in the long int type.

F.10.3.11 The log functions

1
  • log(±0) returns and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • log(1) returns +0.
  • log(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<0.
  • log(+) returns +.

F.10.3.12 The log10 functions

1
  • log10(±0) returns and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • log10(1) returns +0.
  • log10(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<0.
  • log10(+) returns +.

F.10.3.13 The log10p1 functions

1
  • log10p1(±0) returns ±0.
  • log10p1(1) returns and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • log10p1(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<1.
  • log10p1(+) returns +.

F.10.3.14 The log1p and logp1 functions

1
  • logp1(±0) returns ±0.
  • logp1(1) returns and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • logp1(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<1.
  • logp1(+) returns +.

The log1p functions are equivalent to the logp1 functions.

F.10.3.15 The log2 functions

1
  • log2(±0) returns and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • log2(1) returns +0.
  • log2(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<0.
  • log2(+) returns +.

F.10.3.16 The log2p1 functions

1
  • log2p1(±0) returns ±0.
  • log2p1(1) returns and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • log2p1(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<1.
  • log2p1(+) returns +.

F.10.3.17 The logb functions

1
  • logb(±0) returns and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • logb(±) returns +.
2

The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.3.18 The modf functions

1
  • modf(±x,iptr) returns a result with the same sign as x.
  • modf(±,iptr) returns ±0 and stores ± in the object pointed to by iptr.
  • modf(NaN,iptr) stores a NaN in the object pointed to by iptr (and returns a NaN).
2

The returned values are exact and are independent of the current rounding direction mode.

3

modf behaves as though implemented by

#include <math.h>
#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
double modf(double value, double *iptr)
{
      int save_round = fegetround();
      fesetround(FE_TOWARDZERO);
      *iptr = nearbyint(value);
      fesetround(save_round);
      return copysign(
            isinf(value) ? 0.0:
                  value - (*iptr), value);
}

F.10.3.19 The scalbn and scalbln functions

1
  • scalbn(±0,n) returns ±0.
  • scalbn(x,0) returns x.
  • scalbn(±,n) returns ±.
2

If the calculation does not overflow or underflow, the returned value is exact and independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.4 Power and absolute value functions

F.10.4.1 The cbrt functions

1
  • cbrt(±0) returns ±0.
  • cbrt(±) returns ±.

F.10.4.2 The compoundn functions

1
  • compoundn(x,0) returns 1 for x1 or x a NaN.
  • compoundn(x,n) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<1.
  • compoundn(1,n) returns + and raises the divide-by-zero floating-point exception for n<0.
  • compoundn(1,n) returns +0 for n>0.
  • compoundn(+,n) returns + for n>0.
  • compoundn(+,n) returns +0 for n<0.

F.10.4.3 The fabs functions

1
  • fabs(±0) returns +0.
  • fabs(±) returns +.
2

fabs(x) raises no floating-point exceptions, even if x is a signaling NaN. The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.4.4 The hypot functions

1
  • hypot(x,y), hypot(y,x), and hypot(x,y) are equivalent.
  • hypot(x,±0) returns the absolute value of x, if x is not a NaN.
  • hypot(±,y) returns +, even if y is a NaN.
  • hypot(x, NaN) returns a NaN, if x is not ±.

F.10.4.5 The pow functions

1
  • pow(±0,y) returns ± and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception for y an odd integer <0.
  • pow(±0,y) returns + and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception for y<0, finite, and not an odd integer.
  • pow(±0,) returns +.
  • pow(±0,y) returns ±0 for y an odd integer >0.
  • pow(±0,y) returns +0 for y>0 and not an odd integer.
  • pow(1,±) returns 1.
  • pow(+1,y) returns 1 for any y, even a NaN.
  • pow(x,±0) returns 1 for any x, even a NaN.
  • pow(x,y) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for finite x<0 and finite non-integer y.
  • pow(x,) returns + for |x|<1.
  • pow(x,) returns +0 for |x|>1.
  • pow(x,+) returns +0 for |x|<1.
  • pow(x,+) returns + for |x|>1.
  • pow(,y) returns 0 for y an odd integer <0.
  • pow(,y) returns +0 for y<0 and not an odd integer.
  • pow(,y) returns for y an odd integer >0.
  • pow(,y) returns + for y>0 and not an odd integer.
  • pow(+,y) returns +0 for y<0.
  • pow(+,y) returns + for y>0.

F.10.4.6 The pown functions

1
  • pown(x,0) returns 1 for all x not a signaling NaN.
  • pown(±0,n) returns ± and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception for odd n<0.
  • pown(±0,n) returns + and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception for even n<0.
  • pown(±0,n) returns +0 for even n>0.
  • pown(±0,n) returns ±0 for odd n>0.
  • pown(±,n) is equivalent to pown(±0,n) for n not 0, except that the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception is not raised.

F.10.4.7 The powr functions

1
  • powr(x,±0) returns 1 for finite x>0.
  • powr(±0,y) returns + and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception for finite y<0.
  • powr(±0,) returns +.
  • powr(±0,y) returns +0 for y>0.
  • powr(+1,y) returns 1 for finite y.
  • powr(+1,±) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.
  • powr(x,y) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<0.
  • powr(±0,±0) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.
  • powr(+,±0) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.

F.10.4.8 The rootn functions

1
  • rootn(±0,n) returns ± and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception for odd n<0.
  • rootn(±0,n) returns + and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception for even n<0.
  • rootn(±0,n) returns +0 for even n>0.
  • rootn(±0,n) returns ±0 for odd n>0.
  • rootn(+,n) returns + for n>0.
  • rootn(,n) returns for odd n>0.
  • rootn(,n) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for even n>0.
  • rootn(+,n) returns +0 for n<0.
  • rootn(,n) returns 0 for odd n<0.
  • rootn(,n) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for even n<0.
  • rootn(x,0) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for all x (including NaN).
  • rootn(x,n) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<0 and n even.

F.10.4.9 The rsqrt functions

1
  • rsqrt(±0) returns ± and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • rsqrt(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<0.
  • rsqrt(+) returns +0.

F.10.4.10 The sqrt functions

1
  • sqrt(±0) returns ±0.
  • sqrt(+) returns +.
  • sqrt(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x<0.
2

The returned value is dependent on the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.5 Error and gamma functions

F.10.5.1 The erf functions

1
  • erf(±0) returns ±0.
  • erf(±) returns ±1.

F.10.5.2 The erfc functions

1
  • erfc() returns 2.
  • erfc(+) returns +0.

F.10.5.3 The lgamma functions

1
  • lgamma(1) returns +0.
  • lgamma(2) returns +0.
  • lgamma(x) returns + and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception for x a negative integer or zero.
  • lgamma() returns +.
  • lgamma(+) returns +.

F.10.5.4 The tgamma functions

1
  • tgamma(±0) returns ± and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • tgamma(x) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x a negative integer.
  • tgamma() returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.
  • tgamma(+) returns +.

F.10.6 Nearest integer functions

F.10.6.1 The ceil functions

1
  • ceil(±0) returns ±0.
  • ceil(±) returns ±.
2

The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

3

The double version of ceil behaves as though implemented by

#include <math.h>
#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
double ceil(double x)
{
      double result;
      int save_round = fegetround();
      fesetround(FE_UPWARD);
      result = nearbyint(x);
      fesetround(save_round);
      return result;
}

F.10.6.2 The floor functions

1
  • floor(±0) returns ±0.
  • floor(±) returns ±.
2

The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

3

See the sample implementation for ceil in F.10.6.1.

F.10.6.3 The nearbyint functions

1

The nearbyint functions use ISO/IEC 60559 rounding according to the current rounding direction. They do not raise the "inexact" floating-point exception if the result differs in value from the argument.

  • nearbyint(±0) returns ±0 (for all rounding directions).
  • nearbyint(±) returns ± (for all rounding directions).

F.10.6.4 The rint functions

1

The rint functions differ from the nearbyint functions only in that they do raise the "inexact" floating-point exception if the result differs in value from the argument.

F.10.6.5 The lrint and llrint functions

1

The lrint and llrint functions provide floating-to-integer conversion as prescribed by ISO/IEC 60559. They round according to the current rounding direction. If the rounded value is outside the range of the return type, the numeric result is unspecified and the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised. When they raise no other floating-point exception and the result differs from the argument, they raise the "inexact" floating-point exception.

F.10.6.6 The round functions

1
  • round(±0) returns ±0.
  • round(±) returns ±.
2

The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

3

The double version of round behaves as though implemented by:443)

#include <math.h>
#include <fenv.h>
  #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
  double round(double x)
  {
      double result;
    fenv_t save_env;
    feholdexcept(&save_env);
    result = rint(x);
    if (fetestexcept(FE_INEXACT)) {
        fesetround(FE_TOWARDZERO);
        result = rint(copysign(0.5 + fabs(x), x));
        feclearexcept(FE_INEXACT);
    }
    feupdateenv(&save_env);
    return result;
}

F.10.6.7 The lround and llround functions

1

The lround and llround functions differ from the lrint and llrint functions with the default rounding direction just in that the lround and llround functions round halfway cases away from zero and are not required to raise the "inexact" floating-point exception for non-integer arguments that round to within the range of the return type.

F.10.6.8 The roundeven functions

1
  • roundeven(±0) returns ±0.
  • roundeven(±) returns ±.
2

The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

3

See the sample implementation for ceil in F.10.6.1.

F.10.6.9 The trunc functions

1

The trunc functions use ISO/IEC 60559 rounding toward zero (regardless of the current rounding direction).

  • trunc(±0) returns ±0.
  • trunc(±) returns ±.
2

The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.6.10 The fromfp and ufromfp functions

1

The fromfp and ufromfp functions raise the "invalid" floating-point exception and return a NaN if the argument width is zero or if the floating-point argument x is infinite or NaN or rounds to an integral value that is outside the range determined by the argument width (see 7.12.9.10).

2

These functions do not raise the "inexact" floating-point exception.

F.10.6.11 The fromfpx and ufromfpx functions

1

The fromfpx and ufromfpx functions raise the "invalid" floating-point exception and return a NaN if the argument width is zero or if the floating-point argument x is infinite or NaN or rounds to an integral value that is outside the range determined by the argument width (see 7.12.9.11).

2

These functions raise the "inexact" floating-point exception if a valid result differs in value from the floating-point argument x.

F.10.7 Remainder functions

F.10.7.1 The fmod functions

1
  • fmod(±0,y) returns ±0 for y not zero.
  • fmod(x,y) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x infinite or y zero (and neither is a NaN).
2

When subnormal results are supported, the returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

3

The double version of fmod behaves as though implemented by

#include <math.h>
#include <fenv.h>
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
double fmod(double x, double y)
{
      double result;
      result = remainder(fabs(x), (y = fabs(y)));
      if (signbit(result)) result += y;
      return copysign(result, x);
}

F.10.7.2 The remainder functions

1
  • remainder(±0,y) returns ±0 for y not zero.
  • remainder(x,y) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception for x infinite or y zero (and neither is a NaN).
  • remainder(x,±) returns x for finite x.
2

When subnormal results are supported, the returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.7.3 The remquo functions

1

The remquo functions follow the specifications for the remainder functions.

2

If a NaN is returned, the value stored in the object pointed to by quo is unspecified.

3

When subnormal results are supported, the returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.8 Manipulation functions

F.10.8.1 The copysign functions

1

copysign(x,y) raises no floating-point exceptions, even if x or y is a signaling NaN. The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.8.2 The nan functions

1

All ISO/IEC 60559 implementations support quiet NaNs, in all floating formats.

2

The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.8.3 The nextafter functions

1
  • nextafter(x,y) raises the "overflow" and "inexact" floating-point exceptions for x finite and the function value infinite.
  • nextafter(x,y) raises the "underflow" and "inexact" floating-point exceptions for the function value subnormal or zero and x̸=y.
2

Even though underflow or overflow can occur, the returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.8.4 The nexttoward functions

1

No additional requirements beyond those on nextafter.

2

Even though underflow or overflow can occur, the returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.8.5 The nextup functions

1
  • nextup(+) returns +.
  • nextup() returns the largest-magnitude negative finite number in the return type of the function.
2

nextup(x) raises no floating-point exceptions if x is not a signaling NaN. The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.8.6 The nextdown functions

1
  • nextdown() returns .
  • nextdown(+) returns the largest-magnitude positive finite number in the type of the function.
2

nextdown(x) raises no floating-point exceptions if x is not a signaling NaN. The returned value is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.8.7 The canonicalize functions

1

The canonicalize functions produce444) the canonical version of the representation in the object pointed to by the argument x. If the input *x is a signaling NaN, the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised and a (canonical) quiet NaN (which should be the canonical version of that signaling NaN made quiet) is produced. For quiet NaN, infinity, and finite inputs, the functions raise no floating-point exceptions.

F.10.9 Maximum, minimum, and positive difference functions

F.10.9.1 The fdim functions

1

No additional requirements.

F.10.9.2 The fmax functions

1

If just one argument is a NaN, the fmax functions return the other argument (if both arguments are NaNs, the functions return a NaN).

2

The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

3

The body of the fmax function may be:445)

{
      double r = (isgreaterequal(x, y) || isnan(y)) ? x : y;
      (void) canonicalize(&r, &r);
      return r;
}

F.10.9.3 The fmin functions

1

The fmin functions are analogous to the fmax functions (see F.10.9.2).

2

The returned value is exact and is independent of the current rounding direction mode.

F.10.9.4 The fmaximum, fminimum, fmaximum_mag, and fminimum_mag functions

1

These functions treat NaNs like other functions in <math.h> (see F.10). They differ from the corresponding fmaximum_num, fminimum_num, fmaximum_mag_num, and fminimum_mag_num functions only in their treatment of NaNs.

F.10.9.5 The fmaximum_num, fminimum_num, fmaximum_mag_num, and fminimum_mag_num func-

1

These functions return the number if one argument is a number and the other is a quiet or signaling NaN. If both arguments are NaNs, a quiet NaN is returned. If an argument is a signaling NaN, the "invalid" floating-point exception is raised (even though the function returns the number when the other argument is a number).

F.10.10 Fused multiply-add

F.10.10.1 The fma functions

1
  • fma(x,y,z) computes xy+z, correctly rounded once.
  • fma(x,y,z) returns a NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception if one of x and y is infinite, the other is zero, and z is a NaN.
  • fma(x,y,z) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception if one of x and y is infinite, the other is zero, and z is not a NaN.
  • fma(x,y,z) returns a NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception if x times y is an exact infinity and z is also an infinity but with the opposite sign.

F.10.11 Functions that round result to narrower type

1

The functions that round their result to narrower type (7.12.14) are fully specified in ISO/IEC 60559. The returned value is dependent on the current rounding direction mode.

2

These functions treat zero and infinite arguments like the corresponding operation or function: +, -,

*, /, fma, or sqrt.

F.10.12 Total order functions

F.10.12.1 General

1

This subclause specifies the total order functions required by ISO/IEC 60559.

2

NOTE These functions are specified only in this annex because the functions for standard floating types depend on details of ISO/IEC 60559 formats that may not be supported if the relevant feature test macro, __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ or __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__, is not defined.

F.10.12.2 The totalorder functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__
int totalorder(const double *x, const double *y);
int totalorderf(const float *x, const float *y);
int totalorderl(const long double *x, const long double *y);
#endif
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int totalorderd32(const _Decimal32 *x, const _Decimal32 *y);
int totalorderd64(const _Decimal64 *x, const _Decimal64 *y);
int totalorderd128(const _Decimal128 *x, const _Decimal128 *y);
#endif
Description
2

The totalorder functions determine whether the total order relationship, defined by ISO/IEC 60559, is true for the ordered pair of *x, *y. These functions are fully specified in ISO/IEC 60559. These functions are independent of the current rounding direction mode and raise no floating-point exceptions, even if *x or *y is a signaling NaN.

Returns

3

The totalorder functions return nonzero if and only if the total order relation is true for the ordered pair of *x, *y.

F.10.12.3 The totalordermag functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__
int totalordermag(const double *x, const double *y);
int totalordermagf(const float *x, const float *y);
int totalordermagl(const long double *x, const long double *y);
#endif
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int totalordermagd32(const _Decimal32 *x, const _Decimal32 *y);
int totalordermagd64(const _Decimal64 *x, const _Decimal64 *y);
int totalordermagd128(const _Decimal128 *x, const _Decimal128 *y);
#endif
Description
2

The totalordermag functions determine whether the total order relationship, defined by ISO/IEC 60559, is true for the ordered pair of the magnitudes of *x, *y. These functions are fully specified in ISO/IEC 60559. These functions are independent of the current rounding direction mode and raise no floating-point exceptions, even if *x or *y is a signaling NaN.

Returns
3

The totalordermag functions return nonzero if and only if the total order relation is true for the ordered pair of the magnitudes of *x, *y.

F.10.13 Payload functions

F.10.13.1 General

1

ISO/IEC 60559 defines the payload to be information contained in a quiet or signaling NaN. The payload is intended for implementation-defined diagnostic information about the NaN, such as where or how the NaN was created.446) The implementation interprets the payload as a nonnegative integer suitable for use with the functions in this subclause, which get and set payloads. The implementation may restrict which payloads are admissible for the user to set.

2

NOTE These functions are specified only in this annex because the functions for standard floating types depend on details of ISO/IEC 60559 formats that may not be supported if the relevant feature test macro, __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ or __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__, is not defined.

F.10.13.2 The getpayload functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__
double getpayload(const double *x);
float getpayloadf(const float *x);
long double getpayloadl(const long double *x);
#endif
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
_Decimal32 getpayloadd32(const _Decimal32 *x);
_Decimal64 getpayloadd64(const _Decimal64 *x);
_Decimal128 getpayloadd128(const _Decimal128 *x);
#endif

Description

2

The getpayload functions extract the payload of a quiet or signaling NaN input and return it as a positive-signed floating-point integer. If *x is not a NaN, the return result is 1. These functions raise no floating-point exceptions, even if *x is a signaling NaN.

Returns

3

The getpayload functions return the payload of the NaN input as a positive-signed floating-point integer.

F.10.13.3 The setpayload functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__
int setpayload(double *res, double pl);
int setpayloadf(float *res, float pl);
int setpayloadl(long double *res, long double pl);
#endif
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int setpayloadd32(_Decimal32 *res, _Decimal32 pl);
int setpayloadd64(_Decimal64 *res, _Decimal64 pl);
int setpayloadd128(_Decimal128 *res, _Decimal128 pl);
#endif
Description
2

The setpayload functions create a quiet NaN with the payload specified by pl and a zero sign bit and store that NaN in the object pointed to by *res. If pl is not a floating-point integer representing an admissible payload, *res is set to +0.

Returns
3

If the setpayload functions stored the specified NaN, they return a zero value, otherwise a nonzero value (and *res is set to +0).

F.10.13.4 The setpayloadsig functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_EXT__
#include <math.h>
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__
int setpayloadsig(double *res, double pl);
int setpayloadsigf(float *res, float pl);
int setpayloadsigl(long double *res, long double pl);
#endif
#ifdef __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
int setpayloadsigd32(_Decimal32 *res, _Decimal32 pl);
int setpayloadsigd64(_Decimal64 *res, _Decimal64 pl);
int setpayloadsigd128(_Decimal128 *res, _Decimal128 pl);
#endif
Description
2

The setpayloadsig functions create a signaling NaN with the payload specified by pl and a zero sign bit and store that NaN in the object pointed to by *res. If pl is not a floating-point integer representing an admissible payload, *res is set to +0.

Returns
3

If the setpayloadsig functions stored the specified NaN, they return a zero value, otherwise a nonzero value (and *res is set to +0).

F.10.14 Comparison macros

F.10.14.1 General

1

Relational operators and their corresponding comparison macros (7.12.17) produce equivalent result values, even if argument values are represented in wider formats. Thus, comparison macro arguments represented in formats wider than their semantic types are not converted to the semantic types, unless the wide evaluation method converts operands of relational operators to their semantic types. The standard wide evaluation methods characterized by FLT_EVAL_METHOD and DEC_EVAL_METHOD equal to 1 or 2 (5.2.5.3.3, 5.2.5.3.4), do not convert operands of relational operators to their semantic types.

F.10.14.2 The iseqsig macro

1

The equality operator == and the iseqsig macro produce equivalent results, except that the iseqsig macro raises the "invalid" floating-point exception if an argument is a NaN.

G ISO/IEC 60559-compatible complex arithmetic

G.1 Introduction

1

This annex supplements Annex F to specify complex arithmetic for compatibility with ISO/IEC 60559 real floating-point arithmetic. An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__ or __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ shall conform to the specifications in this annex.447)

G.2 Types

1

There is a new keyword _Imaginary, which is used to specify imaginary types. It is used as a type specifier within declaration specifiers in the same way as _Complex is (thus, float _Imaginary is a valid type name).

2

There are three imaginary type, designated as float _Imaginary, double _Imaginary, and long

double _Imaginary. The imaginary types (along with the real floating and complex types) are floating types.

3

For imaginary types, the corresponding real type is given by deleting the keyword _Imaginary from the type name.

4

Each imaginary type has the same representation and alignment requirements as the corresponding real type. The value of an object of imaginary type is the value of the real representation times the imaginary unit.

5

The imaginary type domain comprises the imaginary types.

G.3 Conventions

1

A complex or imaginary value with at least one infinite part is regarded as an infinity (even if its other part is a quiet NaN). A complex or imaginary value is a finite number if each of its parts is a finite number (neither infinite nor NaN). A complex or imaginary value is a zero if each of its parts is a zero.

G.4 Conversions

G.4.1 Imaginary types

1

Conversions among imaginary types follow rules analogous to those for real floating types.

G.4.2 Real and imaginary

1

When a value of imaginary type is converted to a real type other than bool,448) the result is a positive zero.

2

When a value of real type is converted to an imaginary type, the result is a positive imaginary zero.

G.4.3 Imaginary and complex

1

When a value of imaginary type is converted to a complex type, the real part of the complex result value is a positive zero and the imaginary part of the complex result value is determined by the conversion rules for the corresponding real types.

2

When a value of complex type is converted to an imaginary type, the real part of the complex value is discarded and the value of the imaginary part is converted according to the conversion rules for the corresponding real types.

G.5 Binary operators

G.5.1 General

1

The following subclauses supplement 6.5.1 to specify the type of the result for an operation with an imaginary operand.

2

For most operand types, the value of the result of a binary operator with an imaginary or complex operand is completely determined, with reference to real arithmetic, by the usual mathematical formula. For some operand types, the usual mathematical formula is problematic because of its treatment of infinities and because of undue overflow or underflow; in these cases the result satisfies certain properties (specified in G.5.2), but is not completely determined.

G.5.2 Multiplicative operators

Semantics

1

If one operand has real type and the other operand has imaginary type, then the result has imaginary type. If both operands have imaginary type, then the result has real type. (If either operand has complex type, then the result has complex type.)

2

If the operands are not both complex, then the result and floating-point exception behavior of the * operator is defined by the usual mathematical formula:

* u iv u+iv x xu i(xv) (xu)+i(xv) iy i(yu) (y)v ((y)v)+i(yu) x+iy (xu)+i(yu) ((y)v)+i(xv)

3

If the second operand is not complex, then the result and floating-point exception behavior of the / operator is defined by the usual mathematical formula:

/ u iv x x/u i((x)/v) iy i(y/u) y/v x+iy (x/u)+i(y/u) (y/v)+i((x)/v)

4

The * and / operators satisfy the following infinity properties for all real, imaginary, and complex operands:449)

  • if one operand is an infinity and the other operand is a nonzero finite number or an infinity, then the result of the * operator is an infinity;
  • if the first operand is an infinity and the second operand is a finite number, then the result of the / operator is an infinity;
  • if the first operand is a finite number and the second operand is an infinity, then the result of the / operator is a zero;
  • if the first operand is a nonzero finite number or an infinity and the second operand is a zero, then the result of the / operator is an infinity.
5

If both operands of the * operator are complex or if the second operand of the / operator is complex, the operator raises floating-point exceptions if appropriate for the calculation of the parts of the result, and may raise spurious floating-point exceptions.

6

EXAMPLE 1 Multiplication of double _Complex operands could be implemented as follows. Note that the imaginary unit I has imaginary type (see G.6).

#include <math.h>
#include <complex.h>
/* Multiply z * w ...*/
double complex _Cmultd(double complex z, double complex w)
{
      #pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT OFF
      double a, b, c, d, ac, bd, ad, bc, x, y;
      a = creal(z); b = cimag(z);
      c = creal(w); d = cimag(w);
      ac = a * c;   bd = b * d;
      ad = a * d;   bc = b * c;
      x = ac - bd;  y = ad + bc;
      if (isnan(x) && isnan(y)) {
            /* Recover  infinities  that  computed  as  NaN+iNaN  ...  */
            int recalc = 0;
            if (isinf(a) || isinf(b)) { // z is infinite
                  /* "Box"  the  infinity  and  change  NaNs  in  the  other  factor  to  0  */
                  a = copysign(isinf(a) ? 1.0: 0.0, a);
                  b = copysign(isinf(b) ? 1.0: 0.0, b);
                  if (isnan(c)) c = copysign(0.0, c);
                  if (isnan(d)) d = copysign(0.0, d);
                  recalc = 1;
            }
            if (isinf(c) || isinf(d)) { // w is infinite
                  /* "Box"  the  infinity  and  change  NaNs  in  the  other  factor  to  0  */
                  c = copysign(isinf(c) ? 1.0: 0.0, c);
                  d = copysign(isinf(d) ? 1.0: 0.0, d);
                  if (isnan(a)) a = copysign(0.0, a);
                  if (isnan(b)) b = copysign(0.0, b);
                  recalc = 1;
            }
            if (!recalc && (isinf(ac) || isinf(bd) ||
                            isinf(ad) || isinf(bc))) {
                  /* Recover  infinities  from  overflow  by  changing  NaNs  to  0  ...  */
                  if (isnan(a)) a = copysign(0.0, a);
                  if (isnan(b)) b = copysign(0.0, b);
                  if (isnan(c)) c = copysign(0.0, c);
                  if (isnan(d)) d = copysign(0.0, d);
                  recalc = 1;
            }
            if (recalc) {
                  x = INFINITY * (a * c - b * d);
                  y = INFINITY * (a * d + b * c);
            }
      }
      return x + I * y;
}
7

This implementation achieves the required treatment of infinities at the cost of only one isnan test in ordinary (finite) cases. It is less than ideal in that undue overflow and underflow could occur.

8

EXAMPLE 2 Division of two double _Complex operands could be implemented as follows.

#include <math.h>
#include <complex.h>
/* Divide z / w ... */
double complex _Cdivd(double complex z, double complex w)
{
      #pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT OFF
      double a, b, c, d, logbw, denom, x, y;
      int ilogbw = 0;
      a = creal(z); b = cimag(z);
      c = creal(w); d = cimag(w);
      logbw = logb(fmaximum_num(fabs(c), fabs(d)));
      if (isfinite(logbw)) {
            ilogbw = (int)logbw;
            c = scalbn(c, -ilogbw); d = scalbn(d, -ilogbw);
      }
      denom = c * c + d * d;
      x = scalbn((a * c + b * d) / denom, -ilogbw);
      y = scalbn((b * c - a * d) / denom, -ilogbw);
      /* Recover  infinities  and  zeros  that  computed  as  NaN+iNaN; * /
      /* the only  cases  are  nonzero/zero,  infinite/finite,  and  finite/infinite,  ... * /
      if (isnan(x) && isnan(y)) {
            if ((denom == 0.0) &&
                  (!isnan(a) || !isnan(b))) {
                  x = copysign(INFINITY, c) * a;
                  y = copysign(INFINITY, c) * b;
            }
            else if ((isinf(a) || isinf(b)) &&
                  isfinite(c) && isfinite(d)) {
                  a = copysign(isinf(a) ? 1.0: 0.0, a);
                  b = copysign(isinf(b) ? 1.0: 0.0, b);
                  x = INFINITY * (a * c + b * d);
                  y = INFINITY * (b * c - a * d);
            }
            else if ((logbw == INFINITY) &&
                  isfinite(a) && isfinite(b)) {
                  c = copysign(isinf(c) ? 1.0: 0.0, c);
                  d = copysign(isinf(d) ? 1.0: 0.0, d);
                  x = 0.0 * (a * c + b * d);
                  y = 0.0 * (b * c - a * d);
            }
      }
      return x + I * y;
}
9

Scaling the denominator alleviates the main overflow and underflow problem, which is more serious than for multiplication. In the spirit of the preceding multiplication example, this code does not defend against overflow and underflow in the calculation of the numerator. Scaling with the scalbn function, instead of with division, provides better roundoff characteristics.

G.5.3 Additive operators

Semantics

1

If both operands have imaginary type, then the result has imaginary type. (If one operand has real type and the other operand has imaginary type, or if either operand has complex type, then the result has complex type.)

2

In all cases the result and floating-point exception behavior of a + or - operator is defined by the usual mathematical formula:

+ or - u iv u+iv x x±u x±iv (x±u)±iv iy ±u+iy i(y±v) ±u+i(y±v) x+iy (x±u)+iy x+i(y±v) (x±u)+i(y±v)

_Imaginary_I
I

is defined to be _Imaginary_I (not _Complex_I as stated in 7.3). Notwithstanding the provisions of 7.1.3, a program may undefine and then perhaps redefine the macro imaginary.

2

This subclause contains specifications for the <complex.h> functions that are particularly suited to ISO/IEC 60559 implementations. For families of functions, the specifications apply to all of the functions even though only the principal function is shown. Unless otherwise specified, where the symbol "±" occurs in both an argument and the result, the result has the same sign as the argument.

3

The functions are continuous onto both sides of their branch cuts, taking into account the sign of zero. For example, csqrt(2±i0)=±i

2.

4

Since complex and imaginary values are composed of real values, each function may be regarded as computing real values from real values. Except as noted, the functions treat real infinities, NaNs, signed zeros, subnormals, and the floating-point exception flags in a manner consistent with the specifications for real functions in F.10.450)

5

In subsequent subclauses in G.6 "NaN" refers to a quiet NaN. The behavior of signaling NaNs in this annex is implementation-defined.

6

The functions cimag, conj, cproj, and creal are fully specified for all implementations, including ISO/IEC 60559 ones, in 7.3.9. These functions raise no floating-point exceptions.

7

Each of the functions cabs and carg is specified by a formula in terms of a real function (whose special cases are covered in Annex F):

cabs(x + iy )  =  hypot ( x ,  y )
carg(x + iy )  =  atan2 ( y ,  x )
8

Each of the functions casin, catan, ccos, csin, and ctan is specified implicitly by a formula in terms of other complex functions (whose special cases are specified below):

casin(z) = − i casinh(iz )
catan(z) = − i catanh(iz )
ccos(z)  = ccosh(iz)
csin(z)  = − i csinh(iz )
ctan(z)  = − i ctanh(iz )
9

For the other functions, the following subclauses specify behavior for special cases, including treatment of the "invalid" and "divide-by-zero" floating-point exceptions. For families of functions, the specifications apply to all of the functions even though only the principal function is shown. For a function f satisfying f( conj(z))= conj(f(z)), the specifications for the upper half-plane imply the specifications for the lower half-plane; if the function f is also either even, f(z)=f(z), or odd, f(z)=f(z), then the specifications for the first quadrant imply the specifications for the other three quadrants.

10

In the following subclauses, cis(y) is defined as cos(y)+isin(y).

G.6.2 Trigonometric functions

G.6.2.1 The cacos functions

1
  • cacos(conj(z))= conj(cacos(z)).
  • cacos(±0+i0) returns π

2i0.

  • cacos(±0+i NaN) returns π

2+i NaN.

  • cacos(x+i) returns π

2i, for finite x.

  • cacos(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for nonzero finite x.
  • cacos(+iy) returns πi, for positive-signed finite y.
  • cacos(++iy) returns +0i, for positive-signed finite y.
  • cacos(+i) returns 3π

4i.

  • cacos(++i) returns π

4i.

  • cacos(±+i NaN) returns NaN±i (where the sign of the imaginary part of the result is unspecified).
  • cacos(NaN +iy) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite y.
  • cacos(NaN +i) returns NaN i.
  • cacos(NaN +i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN.

G.6.3 Hyperbolic functions

G.6.3.1 The cacosh functions

1
  • cacosh(conj(z))= conj(cacosh(z)).
  • cacosh(±0+i0) returns +0+

2 .

  • cacosh(x+i) returns ++

2 , for finite x.

  • cacosh(0+i NaN) returns NaN±

2 (where the sign of the imaginary part of the result is unspecified).

  • cacosh(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite nonzero x.
  • cacosh(+iy) returns ++, for positive-signed finite y.
  • cacosh(++iy) returns ++i0, for positive-signed finite y.
  • cacosh(+i) returns ++i3π

4 .

  • cacosh(++i) returns ++

4 .

G.6.3.2 The casinh functions

1
  • casinh(conj(z))= conj(casinh(z)). and casinh is odd.
  • casinh(+0+i0) returns 0+i0.
  • casinh(x+i) returns ++

2 for positive-signed finite x.

  • casinh(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite x.
  • casinh(++iy) returns ++i0 for positive-signed finite y.
  • casinh(++i) returns ++

4 .

  • casinh(++i NaN) returns ++i NaN.
  • casinh(NaN +i0) returns NaN +i0.
  • casinh(NaN +iy) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite nonzero y.
  • casinh(NaN +i) returns ±+i NaN (where the sign of the real part of the result is unspecified).
  • casinh(NaN +i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN.

G.6.3.3 The catanh functions

1
  • catanh(conj(z))= conj(catanh(z)). and catanh is odd.
  • catanh(+0+i0) returns +0+i0.
  • catanh(+0+i NaN) returns +0+i NaN.
  • catanh(+1+i0) returns ++i0 and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • catanh(x+i) returns +0+

2 , for finite positive-signed x.

  • catanh(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for nonzero finite x.
  • catanh(++iy) returns +0+

2 , for finite positive-signed y.

  • catanh(++i) returns +0+

2 .

  • catanh(++i NaN) returns +0+i NaN.
  • catanh(NaN +iy) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite y.
  • catanh(NaN+i) returns ±0+

2 (where the sign of the real part of the result is unspecified).

G.6.3.5 The csinh functions

1
  • csinh(conj(z))= conj(csinh(z)). and csinh is odd.
  • csinh(+0+i0) returns +0+i0.
  • csinh(+0+i) returns ±0+i NaN (where the sign of the real part of the result is unspecified) and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.
  • csinh(+0+i NaN) returns ±0+i NaN (where the sign of the real part of the result is unspecified).
  • csinh(x+i) returns NaN +i NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for positive finite x.
  • csinh(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite nonzero x.
  • csinh(++i0) returns ++i0.
  • csinh(++iy) returns +cis(y), for positive finite y.
  • csinh(++i) returns ±+i NaN (where the sign of the real part of the result is unspecified) and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.
  • csinh(++i NaN) returns ±+i NaN (where the sign of the real part of the result is unspecified).
  • csinh(NaN +i0) returns NaN +i0.
  • csinh(NaN +iy) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for all nonzero numbers y.
  • csinh(NaN +i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN.

G.6.3.6 The ctanh functions

1
  • ctanh(conj(z))= conj(ctanh(z)) and ctanh is odd.
  • ctanh(+0+i0) returns +0+i0.
  • ctanh(0+i) returns 0+i NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception.
  • ctanh(x+i) returns NaN +i NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite nonzero x.
  • ctanh(0+i NaN) returns 0+i NaN.
  • ctanh(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite nonzero x.
  • ctanh(++iy) returns 1+i0sin(2y), for positive-signed finite y.
  • ctanh(++i) returns 1±i0 (where the sign of the imaginary part of the result is unspecified).
  • ctanh(++i NaN) returns 1±i0 (where the sign of the imaginary part of the result is unspecified).
  • ctanh(NaN +i0) returns NaN +i0.
  • ctanh(NaN +iy) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for all nonzero numbers y.
  • ctanh(NaN +i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN.

G.6.4 Exponential and logarithmic functions

G.6.4.1 The cexp functions

1
  • cexp(conj(z))= conj(cexp(z)).
  • cexp(±0+i0) returns 1+i0.
  • cexp(x+i) returns NaN +i NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite x.
  • cexp(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite x.
  • cexp(++i0) returns ++i0.
  • cexp(+iy) returns +0cis(y), for finite y.
  • cexp(++iy) returns +cis(y), for finite nonzero y.
  • cexp(+i) returns ±0±i0 (where the signs of the real and imaginary parts of the result are unspecified).
  • cexp(++i) returns ±+i NaN and raises the "invalid" floating-point exception (where the sign of the real part of the result is unspecified).
  • cexp(+i NaN) returns ±0±i0 (where the signs of the real and imaginary parts of the result are unspecified).
  • cexp(++i NaN) returns ±+i NaN (where the sign of the real part of the result is unspecified).
  • cexp(NaN +i0) returns NaN +i0.
  • cexp(NaN +iy) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for all nonzero numbers y.
  • cexp(NaN +i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN.

G.6.4.2 The clog functions

1
  • clog(conj(z))= conj(clog(z)).
  • clog(0+i0) returns + and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • clog(+0+i0) returns +i0 and raises the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.
  • clog(x+i) returns ++

2 , for finite x.

  • clog(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite x.
  • clog(+iy) returns ++, for finite positive-signed y.
  • clog(++iy) returns ++i0, for finite positive-signed y.
  • clog(+i) returns ++i3π

4 .

  • clog(++i) returns ++

4 .

  • clog(±+i NaN) returns ++i NaN.
  • clog(NaN +iy) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite y.
  • clog(NaN +i) returns ++i NaN.
  • clog(NaN +i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN.

G.6.5 Power and absolute-value functions

G.6.5.1 The cpow functions

1

The cpow functions raise floating-point exceptions if appropriate for the calculation of the parts of the result, and may also raise spurious floating-point exceptions.451)

G.6.5.2 The csqrt functions

1
  • csqrt(conj(z))= conj(csqrt(z)).
  • csqrt(±0+i0) returns +0+i0.
  • csqrt(x+i) returns ++i, for all x (including NaN).
  • csqrt(x+i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite x.
  • csqrt(+iy) returns +0+i, for finite positive-signed y.
  • csqrt(++iy) returns ++i0, for finite positive-signed y.
  • csqrt(+i NaN) returns NaN±i (where the sign of the imaginary part of the result is unspecified).
  • csqrt(++i NaN) returns ++i NaN.
  • csqrt(NaN +iy) returns NaN +i NaN and optionally raises the "invalid" floating-point exception, for finite y.
  • csqrt(NaN +i NaN) returns NaN +i NaN.

G.7 Type-generic math <tgmath.h>

1

Type-generic macros that accept complex arguments also accept imaginary arguments. If an argument is imaginary, the macro expands to an expression whose type is real, imaginary, or complex, as appropriate for the particular function: if the argument is imaginary, then the types of cos, cosh, fabs, carg, cimag, and creal are real; the types of sin, tan, sinh, tanh, asin, atan, asinh, and atanh are imaginary; and the types of the others are complex.

2

Given an imaginary argument, each of the type-generic macros cos, sin, tan, cosh, sinh, tanh, asin, atan, asinh, atanh is specified by a formula in terms of real functions:

cos(iy)   = cosh(y)
sin(iy)   = i sinh(y)
tan(iy)   = i tanh(y)
cosh(iy)  = cos(y)
sinh(iy)  = i sin(y)
tanh(iy)  = i tan(y)
asin(iy)  = i asinh(y)
atan(iy)  = i atanh(y)
asinh(iy) = i asin(y)
atanh(iy) = i atan(y)

H ISO/IEC 60559 interchange and extended types

H.1 Introduction

1

This annex specifies extension types for programming language C that have the arithmetic interchange and extended floating-point formats specified in ISO/IEC 60559. This annex also includes functions that support the non-arithmetic interchange formats in that standard. This annex was adapted from ISO/IEC TS 18661-3:2015, Floating-point extensions for C —Interchange and extended types.

2

An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ to 202311L shall conform to the specifications in this annex. An implementation may define __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ only if it defines __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__, indicating support for ISO/IEC 60559 binary floating-point arithmetic, or defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__, indicating support for ISO/IEC 60559 decimal floatingpoint arithmetic (or defines both). Where a binding between the C language and ISO/IEC 60559 is indicated, the ISO/IEC 60559-specified behavior is adopted by reference, unless stated otherwise.

H.2 Types

H.2.1 General

1

This clause specifies types that support ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic interchange and extended formats. The encoding conversion functions (H.11.3) and numeric conversion functions for encodings (H.12.4, H.12.5) support the non-arithmetic interchange formats specified in ISO/IEC 60559.

H.2.2 Interchange floating types

1

ISO/IEC 60559 specifies interchange formats, and their encodings, which can be used for the exchange of floating-point data between implementations. These formats are identified by their radix (binary or decimal) and their storage width N. Tables H.1 and H.2 give the C floating-point model parameters452) (5.2.5.3.3) for the ISO/IEC 60559 interchange formats, where the function round() rounds to the nearest integer.

Table H.1: Binary interchange format parameters

Parameter binary16 binary32 binary64 binary128 N, storage width in bits 16 32 64 128 p, precision in binary digits (bits) 11 24 53 113 emax , maximum exponent e 16 128 1024 16384 emin , minimum exponent e 13 125 1021 16381

Parameter binaryN (N128) N, storage width in bits N, a multiple of 32 p, precision in binary digits (bits) Nround(4×log2(N))+13 emax , maximum exponent e 2(Np1)

emin , minimum exponent e 3emax

Parameter decimalN (N32) N, storage width in bits N, a multiple of 32 p, precision in decimal digits 9×(N÷32)2 emax , maximum exponent e 3×2((N÷16)+3)+1 emin , minimum exponent e 3emax

2

EXAMPLE For the binary160 format, p=144, emax=32678 and emin=32765. For the decimal160 format, p=43, emax=24577 and emin=24574.

3

Types designated:

_FloatN
where N is 16, 32, 64, or ≥128 and a multiple of 32; and, types designated
_DecimalN

where N 32 and a multiple of 32, are collectively called the interchange floating types. Each interchange floating type has the ISO/IEC 60559 interchange format corresponding to its width (N) and radix (2 for _FloatN, 10 for _DecimalN). Each interchange floating type is not compatible with any other type.

4

An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ and __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ shall provide _Float32 and _Float64 as interchange floating types with the same representation and alignment requirements as float and double, respectively. If the implementation’s long double type supports an ISO/IEC 60559 interchange format of width N>64, then the implementation shall also provide the type _FloatN as an interchange floating type with the same representation and alignment requirements as long double. The implementation may provide other radix-2 interchange floating types _FloatN; the set of such types supported is implementation-defined.

5

An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ provides the decimal floating types _Decimal32, _Decimal64, and _Decimal128 (6.2.5). If the implementation also defines __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__, it may provide other radix-10 interchange floating types _DecimalN; the set of such types supported is implementation-defined.

H.2.3 Non-arithmetic interchange formats

1

An implementation supports ISO/IEC 60559 non-arithmetic interchange formats by providing the associated encoding-to-encoding conversion functions (H.11.3.3) in <math.h> and the string-fromencoding functions (H.12.4) and string-to-encoding functions (H.12.5) in <stdlib.h>.

2

An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ and __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ supports some ISO/IEC 60559 radix-2 interchange formats as arithmetic formats by providing types _FloatN (as well as float and double) with those formats. The implementation may support other ISO/IEC 60559 radix-2 interchange formats as non-arithmetic formats; the set of such formats supported is implementation-defined.

3

An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ and __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ supports some ISO/IEC 60559 radix-10 interchange formats as arithmetic formats by providing types

_DecimalN with those formats. The implementations may support other ISO/IEC 60559 radix-10 interchange formats as non-arithmetic formats; the set of such formats supported is implementationdefined.

H.2.4 Extended floating types

1

For each of its basic formats, ISO/IEC 60559 specifies an extended format whose maximum exponent and precision exceed those of the basic format it is associated with. Extended formats are intended for arithmetic with more precision and exponent range than is available in the basic formats used for the input data. The extra precision and range often mitigate round-off error and eliminate overflow and underflow in intermediate computations. Table H.3 gives the minimum values of these parameters, as defined for the C floating-point model (5.2.5.3.3). For all ISO/IEC 60559 extended (and interchange) formats, emin=3emax .

Table H.3: Extended format parameters for floating-point numbers

Extended formats associated with: Parameter binary32 binary64 binary128 decimal64 decimal128 p digits ≥ 32 64 128 22 40 emax 1024 16384 65536 6145 24577

2

Types designated _Float32x, _Float64x, _Float128x, _Decimal64x, and _Decimal128x support the corresponding ISO/IEC 60559 extended formats and are collectively called the extended floating types. The set of values of _Float32x is a subset of the set of values of _Float64x; the set of values of _Float64x is a subset of the set of values of _Float128x. The set of values of _Decimal64x is a subset of the set of values of _Decimal128x. Each extended floating type is not compatible with any other type. An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ and __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ shall provide _Float32x, and may provide one or both of the types _Float64x and _Float128x. An implementation that defines __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__ and __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__ shall provide _Decimal64x, and may provide _Decimal128x. Which (if any) of the optional extended floating types are provided is implementation-defined.

3

NOTE 1 ISO/IEC 60559 does not specify an extended format associated with the decimal32 format, nor does this annex specify an extended type associated with the _Decimal32 type.

4

NOTE 2 The _Float32x type may have the same format as double. The _Decimal64x type may have the same format as _Decimal128.

H.2.5 Classification of real floating types

1

6.2.5 defines standard floating types as a collective name for the types float, double and long

double and it defines decimal floating types as a collective name for the types _Decimal32, _Decimal64, and _Decimal128.

2

H.2.2 defines interchange floating types and H.2.4 defines extended floating types.

3

The types _FloatN and _FloatNx are collectively called binary floating types..

4

This subclause broadens decimal floating types to include the types _DecimalN and _DecimalNx, introduced in this annex, as well as _Decimal32, _Decimal64, and _Decimal128.

5

This subclause broadens real floating types to include all interchange floating types and extended floating types, as well as standard floating types.

6

Thus, in this annex, real floating types are classified as follows:

  • standard floating types, composed of float, double, long double;
  • decimal floating types, composed of _DecimalN, _DecimalNx;
7

NOTE Standard floating types (which have an implementation-defined radix) are not included in either binary floating types (which always have radix 2) or decimal floating types (which always have radix 10).

H.2.6 Complex types

1

This subclause broadens the C complex types (6.2.5) to also include similar types whose corresponding real parts have binary floating types. For the types _FloatN and _FloatNx, there are complex types designated respectively as _FloatN _Complex and _FloatNx _Complex. (Complex types are a conditional feature that implementations are not required to support; see 6.10.10.4.)

H.2.7 Imaginary types

1

This subclause broadens the C imaginary types (G.2) to also include similar types whose corresponding real parts have binary floating types. For the types _FloatN and _FloatNx, there are imaginary types designated respectively as _FloatN _Imaginary and _FloatNx _Imaginary. The imaginary types (along with the real floating and complex types) are floating types. (Annex G, including imaginary types, is a conditional feature that implementations are not required to support; see 6.10.10.4.)

H.3 Characteristics in <float.h>

1

This subclause enhances the FLT_EVAL_METHOD and DEC_EVAL_METHOD macros to apply to the types introduced in this annex.

2

If FLT_RADIX is 2, the value of FLT_EVAL_METHOD (5.2.5.3.3) characterizes the use of evaluation formats for standard floating types and for binary floating types:

-1 indeterminable;

0 evaluate all operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of float, to the range and precision of float; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type;

1 evaluate operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of double, to the range and precision of double; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type;

2 evaluate operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of long double, to the range and precision of long double; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type;

N where _FloatN is a supported interchange floating type, evaluate operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of _FloatN, to the range and precision of _FloatN; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type;

N+ 1 where _FloatNx is a supported extended floating type, evaluate operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of _FloatNx, to the range and precision of _FloatNx; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type.

If FLT_RADIX is not 2, the use of evaluation formats for operations and constants of binary floating types is implementation-defined.

3

The implementation-defined value of DEC_EVAL_METHOD (5.2.5.3.4) characterizes the use of evaluation formats for decimal floating types:

-1 indeterminable;

0 evaluate all operations and constants just to the range and precision of the type;

1

1 evaluate operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of _Decimal64, to the range and precision of _Decimal64; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type;

2

2 evaluate operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of _Decimal128, to the range and precision of _Decimal128; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type;

N where _DecimalN is a supported interchange floating type, evaluate operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of _DecimalN, to the range and precision of _DecimalN; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type;

N+ 1 where _DecimalNx is a supported extended floating type, evaluate operations and constants, whose semantic type comprises a set of values that is a strict subset of the values of _DecimalNx, to the range and precision of _DecimalNx; evaluate all other operations and constants to the range and precision of the semantic type.

4

This subclause also specifies <float.h> macros, analogous to the macros for standard floating types, that characterize binary floating types in terms of the model presented in 5.2.5.3.3. This subclause generalizes the specification of characteristics in 5.2.5.3.4 to include the decimal floating types introduced in this annex. The prefix FLTN_ indicates the type _FloatN or the non-arithmetic binary interchange format of width N. The prefix FLTNX_ indicates the type _FloatNx. The prefix DECN_ indicates the type _DecimalN or the non-arithmetic decimal interchange format of width N. The prefix DECNX_ indicates the type _DecimalNx. The type parameters p, emax , and emin for extended floating types are for the extended floating type itself, not for the basic format that it extends.

5

If __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__ is defined (by the user) at the point in the code where <float.h> is first included, the following applies (H.8). For each interchange or extended floating type that the implementation provides, <float.h> shall define the associated macros in the following lists. Conversely, for each such type that the implementation does not provide, <float.h> shall not define the associated macros in the following list, except, the implementation shall define the macros FLTN_DECIMAL_DIG and FLTN_DIG if it supports the ISO/IEC 60559 non-arithmetic binary interchange format of width N (H.2.3).

6

The signaling NaN macros

FLTN_SNAN
DECN_SNAN
FLTNX_SNAN
DECNX_SNAN

expand to constant expressions of types _FloatN, _DecimalN, _FloatNx, and _DecimalNx respectively, representing a signaling NaN. If an optional unary + or - operator followed by a signaling NaN macro is used for initializing an object of the same type that has static or thread storage duration, the object is initialized with a signaling NaN value.

7

The integer values given in the following lists shall be replaced by integer constant expressions:

  • radix of exponent representation, b (2 for binary, 10 for decimal)

For the standard floating types, this value is implementation-defined and is specified by the macro FLT_RADIX. For the interchange and extended floating types there is no corresponding macro; the radix is an inherent property of the types.

FLTN_MANT_DIG
FLTNX_MANT_DIG
DECN_MANT_DIG
DECNX_MANT_DIG
FLTN_DECIMAL_DIG
FLTNX_DECIMAL_DIG
FLTN_DIG
FLTNX_DIG
FLTN_MIN_EXP
FLTNX_MIN_EXP
DECN_MIN_EXP
DECNX_MIN_EXP
FLTN_MIN_10_EXP
FLTNX_MIN_10_EXP
FLTN_MAX_EXP
FLTNX_MAX_EXP
DECN_MAX_EXP
DECNX_MAX_EXP
FLTN_MAX_10_EXP
FLTNX_MAX_10_EXP
FLTN_MAX
FLTNX_MAX
DECN_MAX
DECNX_MAX
FLTN_EPSILON
FLTNX_EPSILON
DECN_EPSILON
DECNX_EPSILON
FLTN_MIN
FLTNX_MIN
DECN_MIN
DECNX_MIN
FLTN_TRUE_MIN
FLTNX_TRUE_MIN
DECN_TRUE_MIN
DECNX_TRUE_MIN

H.4 Conversions

H.4.1 General

1

This subclause enhances the usual arithmetic conversions (6.3.1.8) to handle interchange and extended floating types. It supports the ISO/IEC 60559 recommendation against allowing implicit conversions of operands to obtain a common type where the conversion is between types where neither is a subset of (or equivalent to) the other.

2

This subclause also broadens the operation binding in F.3 for the ISO/IEC 60559 convertFormat operation to apply to ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic and non-arithmetic formats.

H.4.2 Real floating and integer

1

When a finite value of interchange or extended floating type is converted to an integer type other than bool, the fractional part is discarded (i.e. the value is truncated toward zero). If the value of the integral part cannot be represented by the integer type, the "invalid" floating-point exception shall be raised and the result of the conversion is unspecified.

2

When a value of integer type is converted to an interchange or extended floating type, if the value being converted can be represented exactly in the new type, it is unchanged. If the value being converted cannot be represented exactly, the result shall be correctly rounded with exceptions raised as specified in ISO/IEC 60559.

H.4.3 Usual arithmetic conversions

1

If either operand is of floating type, the common real type is determined as follows:

  • If one operand has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating type, binary floating type, complex type, or imaginary type.
  • If only one operand has a floating type, the other operand is converted to the corresponding real type of the operand of floating type.
  • If both operands have the same corresponding real type, no further conversion is needed.
  • If both operands have floating types and neither of the sets of values of their corresponding real types is a subset of (or equivalent to) the other, the behavior is undefined.

, the other operand is converted, without change of type domain, to a type whose corresponding real type is _Float64x or _Decimal64x, respectively.

H.4.4 Arithmetic and non-arithmetic formats

1

The operation binding in F.3 for the ISO/IEC 60559 convertFormat operation applies to ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic and non-arithmetic formats as follows:

  • For conversions between arithmetic formats supported by floating types (same or different radix) – casts and implicit conversions.
  • For same-radix conversions between non-arithmetic interchange formats – encoding-toencoding conversion functions (H.11.3.3).
  • For conversions between non-arithmetic interchange formats (same or different radix) – compositions of string-from-encoding functions (H.12.4) (converting exactly) and string-to-encoding functions (H.12.5).
  • For same-radix conversions from interchange formats supported by interchange floating types to non-arithmetic interchange formats – compositions of encode functions (H.11.3.2.2, 7.12.16.1, 7.12.16.3) and encoding-to-encoding functions (H.11.3.3).
  • For same radix conversions from non-arithmetic interchange formats to interchange formats supported by interchange floating types – compositions of encoding-to-encoding conversion functions (H.11.3.3) and decode functions (H.11.3.2.3, 7.12.16.2, 7.12.16.4). See the example in H.11.3.3.2.
  • For conversions from non-arithmetic interchange formats to arithmetic formats supported by floating types (same or different radix) – compositions of string-from-encoding functions (H.12.4) (converting exactly) and numeric conversion functions strtod, etc. (7.24.1.5, 7.24.1.6). See the example in H.12.3.
  • For conversions from arithmetic formats supported by floating types to non-arithmetic interchange formats (same or different radix) – compositions of numeric conversion functions strfromd, etc. (7.24.1.3, 7.24.1.4) (converting exactly) and string-to-encoding functions (H.12.5).

H.5 Lexical Elements

H.5.1 Keywords

1

This subclause expands the list of keywords (6.4.1) to also include:

  • _FloatN, where N is 16, 32, 64, or ≥128 and a multiple of 32
  • _Float32x
  • _Float64x
  • _Float128x
  • _DecimalN, where N is 96 or > 128 and a multiple of 32
  • _Decimal64x
  • _Decimal128x

H.5.2 Constants

1

This subclause specifies constants of interchange and extended floating types.

2

This subclause expands floating-suffix (6.4.4.3) to also include: fN, FN, fNx, FNx, dN, DN, dNx, or DNx.

3

A floating suffix dN, DN, dNx, or DNx shall not be used in a hexadecimal-floating-constant.

4

A floating suffix shall not designate a type that the implementation does not provide.

5

If a floating constant is suffixed by fN or FN, it has type _FloatN. If suffixed by fNx or FNx, it has type _FloatNx. If suffixed by dN or DN, it has type _DecimalN. If suffixed by dNx or DNx, it has type _DecimalNx.

6

The quantum exponent of a floating constant of decimal floating type is the same as for the result value of the corresponding strtodN or strtodNx function (H.12.3) for the same numeric string.

7

NOTE For N = 32, 64, and 128, the suffixes dN and DN in this subclause for constants of type _DecimalN are equivalent alternatives to the suffixes df, dd, dl, DF, DD, and DL in 6.4.4.3 for the same types.

H.6 Expressions

1

This subclause expands the specification of expressions to also cover interchange and extended floating types.

2

Operators involving operands of interchange or extended floating type are evaluated according to the semantics of ISO/IEC 60559, including production of decimal floating-point results with the preferred quantum exponent as specified in ISO/IEC 60559 (see 5.2.5.3.4).

3

For multiplicative operators (6.5.6), additive operators (6.5.7), relational operators (6.5.9), equality operators (6.5.10), and compound assignment operators (6.5.17.3), if either operand has decimal floating type, the other operand shall not have standard floating type, binary floating type, complex type, or imaginary type.

4

For conditional operators (6.5.16), if the second or third operand has decimal floating type, the other of those operands shall not have standard floating type, binary floating type, complex type, or imaginary type.

5

The equivalence of expressions noted in F.9.3 apply to expressions of binary floating types, as well as standard floating types.

H.7 Declarations

1

This subclause expands the list of type specifiers (6.7.3) to also include:

  • _FloatN, where N is 16, 32, 64, or ≥128 and a multiple of 32
  • _Float32x
2

The type specifiers _FloatN (where N is 16, 32, 64, or 128 and a multiple of 32), _Float32x, _Float64x, _Float128x, _DecimalN (where N is 96 or > 128 and a multiple of 32), _Decimal64x, and _Decimal128x shall not be used if the implementation does not support the corresponding types (see 6.10.10.4 and H.2).

3

This subclause also expands the list under Constraints in 6.7.3 to also include:

  • _FloatN, where N is 16, 32, 64, or ≥128 and a multiple of 32
  • _Float32x
  • _Float64x
  • _Float128x
  • _DecimalN, where N is 96 or > 128 and a multiple of 32
  • _Decimal64x
  • _Decimal128x
  • _FloatN _Complex, where N is 16, 32, 64, or ≥128 and a multiple of 32
  • _Float32x _Complex
  • _Float64x _Complex
  • _Float128x _Complex

H.8 Identifiers in standard headers

1

The identifiers added to library headers by this annex are defined or declared by their respective headers only if the macro __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__ is defined (by the user) at the point in the code where the appropriate header is first included.

H.9 Complex arithmetic <complex.h>

1

This subclause specifies complex functions for corresponding real types that are binary floating types.

2

Each function synopsis in 7.3 specifies a family of functions including a principal function with one or more double complex parameters and a double complex or double return value. This subclause expands the synopsis to also include other functions, with the same name as the principal function but with fN and fNx suffixes, which are corresponding functions whose parameters and return values have corresponding real types _FloatN and _FloatNx.

3

The following function prototypes are added to the synopses of the respective subclauses in 7.3. For each binary floating type that the implementation provides, <complex.h> shall declare the associated functions (see H.8). Conversely, for each such type that the implementation does not provide, <complex.h> shall not declare the associated functions.

7.3.5 Trigonometric functions

_FloatN complex cacosfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex cacosfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex casinfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex casinfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex catanfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex catanfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex ccosfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex ccosfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex csinfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex csinfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex ctanfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex ctanfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex cacoshfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex cacoshfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex casinhfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex casinhfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex catanhfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex catanhfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex ccoshfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex ccoshfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex csinhfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex csinhfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex ctanhfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex ctanhfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex cexpfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex cexpfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex clogfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex clogfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN cabsfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx cabsfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex cpowfN(_FloatN complex x, _FloatN complex y);
_FloatNx complex cpowfNx(_FloatNx complex x, _FloatNx complex y);
_FloatN complex csqrtfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex csqrtfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN cargfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx cargfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN cimagfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx cimagfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex CMPLXFN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx complex CMPLXFNX(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_FloatN complex conjfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex conjfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN complex cprojfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx complex cprojfNx(_FloatNx complex z);
_FloatN crealfN(_FloatN complex z);
_FloatNx crealfNx(_FloatNx complex z);

7.3.9 Manipulation functions

4

For the functions listed in "future library directions" for <complex.h> (7.33.1), the possible suffixes are expanded to also include fN and fNx.

H.10 Floating-point environment

1

This subclause broadens the effects of the floating-point environment (7.6) to apply to types and formats specified in this annex.

2

The same floating-point status flags are used by floating-point operations for all floating types, including those types introduced in this annex, and by conversions for ISO/IEC 60559 non-arithmetic interchange formats.

3

Both the dynamic rounding direction mode accessed by fegetround and fesetround and the FENV_ROUND rounding control pragma apply to operations for binary floating types, as well as for standard floating types, and also to conversions for radix-2 non-arithmetic interchange formats. Likewise, both the dynamic rounding direction mode accessed by fe_dec_getround and fe_dec_setround and the FENV_DEC_ROUND rounding control pragmas apply to operations for all the decimal floating types, including those decimal floating types introduced in this annex, and to conversions for radix-10 non-arithmetic interchange formats.

4

In 7.6.2, the table of functions affected by constant rounding modes for standard floating types applies also for binary floating types. Each <math.h> function family listed in the table indicates the family of functions of all standard and binary floating types (for example, the acos family includes acosf, acosl, acosfN, and acosfNx as well as acos). The fMencfN, strfromencfN, and strtoencfN functions are also affected by these constant rounding modes.

5

In 7.6.3, in the table of functions affected by constant rounding modes for decimal floating types, each <math.h> function family indicates the family of functions of all decimal floating types (for example, the acos family includes acosdN and acosdNx). The dMencbindN, dMencdecdN, strfromencbindN, strfromencdecdN, strtoencbindN, and strtoencdecdN functions are also affected by these constant rounding modes.

H.11 Mathematics <math.h>

1

This subclause specifies types, functions, and macros for interchange and extended floating types, generally corresponding to those specified in 7.12 and F.10.

2

All classification macros (7.12.3) and comparison macros (7.12.17) naturally extend to handle interchange and extended floating types. For comparison macros, if neither of the sets of values of the argument formats is a subset of (or equivalent to) the other, the behavior is undefined.

3

This subclause also specifies encoding conversion functions that are part of support for the nonarithmetic interchange formats in ISO/IEC 60559 (see H.2.3).

4

Most function synopses in 7.12 specify a family of functions including a principal function with one or more double parameters, a double return value, or both. The synopses are expanded to also include functions with the same name as the principal function but with fN, fNx, dN, and dNx suffixes, which are corresponding functions whose parameters, return values, or both are of types _FloatN, _FloatNx, _DecimalN, and _DecimalNx, respectively.

5

For each interchange or extended floating type that the implementation provides, <math.h> shall define the associated types and macros and declare the associated functions (see H.8). Conversely, for each such type that the implementation does not provide, <math.h> shall not define the associated types and macros or declare the associated functions unless explicitly specified otherwise.

6

With the types

float_t
double_t
in 7.12 are included the type
long_double_t
_FloatN_t
_DecimalN_t

These are floating types, such that:

If FLT_RADIX is 2 and FLT_EVAL_METHOD (H.3) is nonnegative, then each of the types corresponding to a standard or binary floating type is the type whose range and precision are specified by FLT_EVAL_METHOD to be used for evaluating operations and constants of that standard or binary floating type. If DEC_EVAL_METHOD (H.3) is nonnegative, then each of the types corresponding to a decimal floating type is the type whose range and precision are specified by DEC_EVAL_METHOD to be used for evaluating operations and constants of that decimal floating type.

7

EXAMPLE If the supported standard and binary floating types are

Type ISO/IEC 60559 format _Float16 binary16 float, _Float32 binary32 double, _Float64, _Float32x binary64 long double, _Float64x 80-bit binary64-extended _Float128 binary128

:
Table H.4: _t type (vertical) vs. m (horizontal) relation

are, respectively, _FloatN, _DecimalN, _FloatNx, and _DecimalNx analogues of FP_FAST_FMA.

4

The macros in the following lists are interchange and extended floating type analogues of FP_FAST_FADD, FP_FAST_FADDL, FP_FAST_DADDL, etc.

5

For M<N, the macros

FP_FAST_FMADDFN
FP_FAST_FMSUBFN
FP_FAST_FMMULFN
FP_FAST_FMDIVFN
FP_FAST_FMFMAFN
FP_FAST_FMSQRTFN
FP_FAST_DMADDDN
FP_FAST_DMSUBDN
FP_FAST_DMMULDN
FP_FAST_DMDIVDN
FP_FAST_DMFMADN
FP_FAST_DMSQRTDN

characterize the corresponding functions whose arguments are of an interchange floating type of width N and whose return type is an interchange floating type of width M.

6

For MN, the macros

FP_FAST_FMADDFNX
FP_FAST_FMSUBFNX
FP_FAST_FMMULFNX
FP_FAST_FMDIVFNX
FP_FAST_FMFMAFNX
FP_FAST_FMSQRTFNX
FP_FAST_DMADDDNX
FP_FAST_DMSUBDNX
FP_FAST_DMMULDNX
FP_FAST_DMDIVDNX
FP_FAST_DMFMADNX
FP_FAST_DMSQRTDNX

characterize the corresponding functions whose arguments are of an extended floating type that extends a format of width N and whose return type is an interchange floating type of width M.

7

For M<N, the macros

FP_FAST_FMXADDFN
FP_FAST_FMXSUBFN
FP_FAST_FMXMULFN
FP_FAST_FMXDIVFN
FP_FAST_FMXFMAFN
FP_FAST_FMXSQRTFN
FP_FAST_DMXADDDN
FP_FAST_DMXSUBDN
FP_FAST_DMXMULDN
FP_FAST_DMXDIVDN
FP_FAST_DMXFMADN
FP_FAST_DMXSQRTDN

characterize the corresponding functions whose arguments are of an interchange floating type of width N and whose return type is an extended floating type that extends a format of width M.

8

For M<N, the macros

FP_FAST_FMXADDFNX
FP_FAST_FMXSUBFNX
FP_FAST_FMXMULFNX
FP_FAST_FMXDIVFNX
FP_FAST_FMXFMAFNX
FP_FAST_FMXSQRTFNX
FP_FAST_DMXADDDNX
FP_FAST_DMXSUBDNX
FP_FAST_DMXMULDNX
FP_FAST_DMXDIVDNX
FP_FAST_DMXFMADNX
FP_FAST_DMXSQRTDNX

characterize the corresponding functions whose arguments are of an extended floating type that extends a format of width N and whose return type is an extended floating type that extends a format of width M.

H.11.2 Functions

1

This subclause adds the following functions to the synopses of the respective subclauses in 7.12.

7.12.4 Trigonometric functions

_FloatN acosfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx acosfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN acosdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx acosdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN asinfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx asinfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN asindN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx asindNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN atanfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx atanfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN atandN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx atandNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN atan2fN(_FloatN y, _FloatN x);
_FloatNx atan2fNx(_FloatNx y, _FloatNx x);
_DecimalN atan2dN(_DecimalN y, _DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx atan2dNx(_DecimalNx y, _DecimalNx x);
_FloatN cosfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx cosfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN cosdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx cosdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN sinfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx sinfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN sindN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx sindNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN tanfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx tanfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN tandN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx tandNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN acospifN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx acospifNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN acospidN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx acospidNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN asinpifN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx asinpifNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN asinpidN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx asinpidNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN atanpifN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx atanpifNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN atanpidN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx atanpidNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN atan2pifN(_FloatN y, _FloatN x);
_FloatNx atan2pifNx(_FloatNx y, _FloatNx x);
_DecimalN atan2pidN(_DecimalN y, _DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx atan2pidNx(_DecimalNx y, _DecimalNx x);
_FloatN cospifN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx cospifNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN cospidN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx cospidNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN sinpifN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx sinpifNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN sinpidN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx sinpidNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN tanpifN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx tanpifNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN tanpidN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx tanpidNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN acoshfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx acoshfNx(_FloatNx x);

7.12.5 Hyperbolic functions

_DecimalN acoshdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx acoshdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN asinhfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx asinhfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN asinhdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx asinhdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN atanhfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx atanhfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN atanhdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx atanhdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN coshfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx coshfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN coshdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx coshdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN sinhfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx sinhfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN sinhdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx sinhdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN tanhfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx tanhfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN tanhdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx tanhdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN expfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx expfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN expdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx expdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN exp10fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx exp10fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN exp10dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx exp10dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN exp10m1fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx exp10m1fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN exp10m1dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx exp10m1dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN exp2fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx exp2fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN exp2dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx exp2dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN exp2m1fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx exp2m1fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN exp2m1dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx exp2m1dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN expm1fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx expm1fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN expm1dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx expm1dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN frexpfN(_FloatN value, int *exp);

7.12.6 Exponential and logarithmic functions

_FloatNx frexpfNx(_FloatNx value, int *exp);
_DecimalN frexpdN(_DecimalN value, int *exp);
_DecimalNx frexpdNx(_DecimalNx value, int *exp);
int ilogbfN(_FloatN x);
int ilogbfNx(_FloatNx x);
int ilogbdN(_DecimalNx x);
int ilogbdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN ldexpfN(_FloatN value, int exp);
_FloatNx ldexpfNx(_FloatNx value, int exp);
_DecimalN ldexpdN(_DecimalN value, int exp);
_DecimalNx ldexpdNx(_DecimalNx value, int exp);
long int llogbfN(_FloatN x);
long int llogbfNx(_FloatNx x);
long int llogbdN(_DecimalN x);
long int llogbdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN logfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx logfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN logdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx logdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN log10fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx log10fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN log10dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx log10dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN log10p1fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx log10p1fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN log10p1dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx log10p1dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN log1pfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx log1pfNx(_FloatNx x);
_FloatN logp1fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx logp1fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN log1pdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx log1pdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_DecimalN logp1dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx logp1dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN log2fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx log2fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN log2dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx log2dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN log2p1fN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx log2p1fNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN log2p1dN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx log2p1dNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN logbfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx logbfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN logbdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx logbdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN modffN(_FloatN x, _FloatN *iptr);
_FloatNx modffNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx *iptr);
_DecimalN modfdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN *iptr);
_DecimalNx modfdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx *iptr);
_FloatN scalbnfN(_FloatN value, int exp);
_FloatNx scalbnfNx(_FloatNx value, int exp);
_DecimalN scalbndN(_DecimalN value, int exp);
_DecimalNx scalbndNx(_DecimalNx value, int exp);
_FloatN scalblnfN(_FloatN value, long int exp);
_FloatNx scalblnfNx(_FloatNx value, long int exp);
_DecimalN scalblndN(_DecimalN value, long int exp);
_DecimalNx scalblndNx(_DecimalNx value, long int exp);
_FloatN cbrtfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx cbrtfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN cbrtdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx cbrtdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN compoundnfN(_FloatN x, long long int n);
_FloatNx compoundnfNx(_FloatNx x, long long int n);
_DecimalN compoundndN(_DecimalN x, long long int n);
_DecimalNx compoundndNx(_DecimalNx x, long long int n);
_FloatN fabsfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx fabsfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN fabsdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx fabsdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN hypotfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx hypotfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN hypotdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx hypotdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN powfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx powfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN powdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx powdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN pownfN(_FloatN x, long long int n);
_FloatNx pownfNx(_FloatNx x, long long int n);
_DecimalN powndN(_DecimalN x, long long int n);
_DecimalNx powndNx(_DecimalNx x, long long int n);
_FloatN powrfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx powrfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN powrdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx powrdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN rootnfN(_FloatN x, long long int n);
_FloatNx rootnfNx(_FloatNx x, long long int n);
_DecimalN rootndN(_DecimalN x, long long int n);
_DecimalNx rootndNx(_DecimalNx x, long long int n);
_FloatN rsqrtfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx rsqrtfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN rsqrtdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx rsqrtdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN sqrtfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx sqrtfNx(_FloatNx x);

7.12.7 Power and absolute-value functions

_DecimalN sqrtdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx sqrtdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN erffN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx erffNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN erfdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx erfdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN erfcfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx erfcfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN erfcdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx erfcdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN lgammafN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx lgammafNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN lgammadN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx lgammadNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN tgammafN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx tgammafNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN tgammadN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx tgammadNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN ceilfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx ceilfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN ceildN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx ceildNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN floorfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx floorfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN floordN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx floordNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN nearbyintfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx nearbyintfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN nearbyintdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx nearbyintdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN rintfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx rintfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN rintdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx rintdNx(_DecimalNx x);
long int lrintfN(_FloatN x);
long int lrintfNx(_FloatNx x);
long int lrintdN(_DecimalN x);
long int lrintdNx(_DecimalNx x);
long long int llrintfN(_FloatN x);
long long int llrintfNx(_FloatNx x);
long long int llrintdN(_DecimalN x);
long long int llrintdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN roundfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx roundfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN rounddN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx rounddNx(_DecimalNx x);

7.12.9 Nearest integer functions

long int lroundfN(_FloatN x);
long int lroundfNx(_FloatNx x);
long int lrounddN(_DecimalN x);
long int lrounddNx(_DecimalNx x);
long long int llroundfN(_FloatN x);
long long int llroundfNx(_FloatNx x);
long long int llrounddN(_DecimalN x);
long long int llrounddNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN roundevenfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx roundevenfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN roundevendN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx roundevendNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN truncfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx truncfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN truncdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx truncdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN fromfpfN(_FloatN x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_FloatNx fromfpfNx(_FloatNx x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_DecimalN fromfpdN(_DecimalN x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_DecimalNx fromfpdNx(_DecimalNx x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_FloatN ufromfpfN(_FloatN x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_FloatNx ufromfpfNx(_FloatNx x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_DecimalN ufromfpdN(_DecimalN x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_DecimalNx ufromfpdNx(_DecimalNx x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_FloatN fromfpxfN(_FloatN x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_FloatNx fromfpxfNx(_FloatNx x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_DecimalN fromfpxdN(_DecimalN x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_DecimalNx fromfpxdNx(_DecimalNx x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_FloatN ufromfpxfN(_FloatN x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_FloatNx ufromfpxfNx(_FloatNx x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_DecimalN ufromfpxdN(_DecimalN x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_DecimalNx ufromfpxdNx(_DecimalNx x, int rnd, unsigned int width);
_FloatN fmodfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fmodfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fmoddN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fmoddNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN remainderfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx remainderfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN remainderdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx remainderdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN remquofN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y, int *quo);
_FloatNx remquofNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y, int *quo);
_FloatN copysignfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx copysignfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN copysigndN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx copysigndNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);

7.12.11 Manipulation functions

_FloatN nanfN(const char *tagp);
_FloatNx nanfNx(const char *tagp);
_DecimalN nandN(const char *tagp);
_DecimalNx nandNx(const char *tagp);
_FloatN nextafterfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx nextafterfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN nextafterdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx nextafterdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN nextupfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx nextupfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN nextupdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx nextupdNx(_DecimalNx x);
_FloatN nextdownfN(_FloatN x);
_FloatNx nextdownfNx(_FloatNx x);
_DecimalN nextdowndN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx nextdowndNx(_DecimalNx x);
int canonicalizefN(_FloatN *cx, const _FloatN *x);
int canonicalizefNx(_FloatNx *cx, const _FloatNx *x);
int canonicalizedN(_DecimalN *cx, const _DecimalN *x);
int canonicalizedNx(_DecimalNx *cx, const _DecimalNx *x);
_FloatN fdimfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fdimfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fdimdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fdimdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN fmaximumfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fmaximumfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fmaximumdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fmaximumdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN fminimumfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fminimumfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fminimumdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fminimumdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN fmaximum_magfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fmaximum_magfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fmaximum_magdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fmaximum_magdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN fminimum_magfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fminimum_magfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fminimum_magdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fminimum_magdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN fmaximum_numfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fmaximum_numfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fmaximum_numdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fmaximum_numdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN fminimum_numfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fminimum_numfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fminimum_numdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fminimum_numdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);

7.12.12 Maximum, minimum, and positive difference functions

_FloatN fmaximum_mag_numfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fmaximum_mag_numfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fmaximum_mag_numdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fmaximum_mag_numdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN fminimum_mag_numfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y);
_FloatNx fminimum_mag_numfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y);
_DecimalN fminimum_mag_numdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx fminimum_mag_numdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_FloatN fmafN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y, _FloatN z);
_FloatNx fmafNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y, _FloatNx z);
_DecimalN fmadN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y, _DecimalN z);
_DecimalNx fmadNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y, _DecimalNx z);
_FloatM fMaddfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y); // M  < N
_FloatM fMaddfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y); // M  ≤ N
_FloatMx fMxaddfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y); // M  < N
_FloatMx fMxaddfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMadddN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMadddNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y); // M  ≤ N
_DecimalMx dMxadddN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y); // M  < N
_DecimalMx dMxadddNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y); // M  < N
_FloatM fMsubfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y); // M  < N
_FloatM fMsubfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y); // M  ≤ N
_FloatMx fMxsubfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y); // M  < N
_FloatMx fMxsubfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMsubdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMsubdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y); // M  ≤ N
_DecimalMx dMxsubdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y); // M  < N
_DecimalMx dMxsubdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y); // M  < N
_FloatM fMmulfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y); // M  < N
_FloatM fMmulfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y); // M  ≤ N
_FloatMx fMxmulfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y); // M  < N
_FloatMx fMxmulfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMmuldN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMmuldNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y); // M  ≤ N
_DecimalMx dMxmuldN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y); // M  < N
_DecimalMx dMxmuldNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y); // M  < N
_FloatM fMdivfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y); // M  < N
_FloatM fMdivfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y); // M  ≤ N
_FloatMx fMxdivfN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y); // M  < N
_FloatMx fMxdivfNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMdivdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMdivdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y); // M  ≤ N
_DecimalMx dMxdivdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y); // M  < N
_DecimalMx dMxdivdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y); // M  < N
_FloatM fMfmafN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y, _FloatN z); // M  < N
_FloatM fMfmafNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y, _FloatNx z); // M  ≤ N
_FloatMx fMxfmafN(_FloatN x, _FloatN y, _FloatN z); // M  < N
_FloatMx fMxfmafNx(_FloatNx x, _FloatNx y, _FloatNx z); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMfmadN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y, _DecimalN z); // M  < N

7.12.14 Functions that round result to narrower type

_DecimalM dMfmadNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y, _DecimalNx z); // M  ≤ N
_DecimalMx dMxfmadN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y, _DecimalN z); // M  < N
_DecimalMx dMxfmadNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y, _DecimalNx z); // M  < N
_FloatM fMsqrtfN(_FloatN x); // M  < N
_FloatM fMsqrtfNx(_FloatNx x); // M  ≤ N
_FloatMx fMxsqrtfN(_FloatN x); // M  < N
_FloatMx fMxsqrtfNx(_FloatNx x); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMsqrtdN(_DecimalN x); // M  < N
_DecimalM dMsqrtdNx(_DecimalNx x); // M  ≤ N
_DecimalMx dMxsqrtdN(_DecimalN x); // M  < N
_DecimalMx dMxsqrtdNx(_DecimalNx x); // M  < N
_DecimalN quantizedN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
_DecimalNx quantizedNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
bool samequantumdN(_DecimalN x, _DecimalN y);
bool samequantumdNx(_DecimalNx x, _DecimalNx y);
_DecimalN quantumdN(_DecimalN x);
_DecimalNx quantumdNx(_DecimalNx x);
long long int llquantexpdN(_DecimalN x);
long long int llquantexpdNx(_DecimalNx x);
void encodedecdN(unsigned char * restrict encptr,
      const _DecimalN * restrict xptr);
void decodedecdN(_DecimalN * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char * restrict encptr);
void encodebindN(unsigned char * restrict encptr,
      const _DecimalN * restrict xptr);
void decodebindN(_DecimalN * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char * restrict encptr);
int totalorderfN(const _FloatN *x, const _FloatN *y);
int totalorderfNx(const _FloatNx *x, const _FloatNx *y);
int totalorderdN(const _DecimalN *x, const _DecimalN *y);
int totalorderdNx(const _DecimalNx *x, const _DecimalNx *y);
int totalordermagfN(const _FloatN *x, const _FloatN *y);
int totalordermagfNx(const _FloatNx *x, const _FloatNx *y);
int totalordermagdN(const _DecimalN *x, const _DecimalN *y);
int totalordermagdNx(const _DecimalNx *x, const _DecimalNx *y);
_FloatN getpayloadfN(const _FloatN *x);
_FloatNx getpayloadfNx(const _FloatNx *x);
_DecimalN getpayloaddN(const _DecimalN *x);
_DecimalNx getpayloaddNx(const _DecimalNx *x);
int setpayloadfN(_FloatN *res, _FloatN pl);
int setpayloadfNx(_FloatNx *res, _FloatNx pl);
int setpayloaddN(_DecimalN *res, _DecimalN pl);
int setpayloaddNx(_DecimalNx *res, _DecimalNx pl);

F.10.13 Payload functions

int setpayloadsigfN(_FloatN *res, _FloatN pl);
int setpayloadsigfNx(_FloatNx *res, _FloatNx pl);
int setpayloadsigdN(_DecimalN *res, _DecimalN pl);
int setpayloadsigdNx(_DecimalNx *res, _DecimalNx pl);
2

The specification of the frexp functions (7.12.6.7) applies to the functions for binary floating types like those for standard floating types: the exponent is an integral power of 2 and, when applicable, value equals x×2*exp.

3

The specification of the ldexp functions (7.12.6.9) applies to the functions for binary floating types like those for standard floating types: they return x2exp.

4

The specification of the logb functions (7.12.6.17) applies to binary floating types, with b=2.

5

The specification of the scalbn and scalbln functions (7.12.6.19) applies to binary floating types, with b=2.

H.11.3 Encoding conversion functions

H.11.3.1 General

1

This subclause introduces <math.h> functions that, together with the numerical conversion functions for encodings in H.12, support the non-arithmetic interchange formats specified by ISO/IEC 60559. Support for these formats is an optional feature of this annex. Implementations that do not support non-arithmetic interchange formats are not required to declare the functions in this subclause.

2

Non-arithmetic interchange formats are not associated with floating types. Arrays of element type unsigned char are used as parameters for conversion functions, to represent encodings in interchange formats that may be non-arithmetic formats.

H.11.3.2 Encode and decode functions

H.11.3.2.1 General
1

This subclause specifies functions to map representations in binary floating types to and from encodings in unsigned char arrays.

H.11.3.2.2 The encodefN functions
1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <math.h>
void encodefN(unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8],
      const _FloatN * restrict xptr);
Description
2

The encodefN functions convert *xptr into an ISO/IEC 60559 binaryN encoding and store the resulting encoding as an N /8 element array, with 8 bits per array element, in the object pointed to by encptr. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2). These functions preserve the value of *xptr and raise no floating-point exceptions. If *xptr is non-canonical, these functions may or may not produce a canonical encoding.

Returns
3

The encodefN functions return no value.

H.11.3.2.3 The decodefN functions
1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <math.h>
void decodefN(_FloatN * restrict xptr,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8]);

Description

2

The decodefN functions interpret the N /8 element array pointed to by encptr as an ISO/IEC 60559 binaryN encoding, with 8 bits per array element. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2). These functions convert the given encoding into a representation in the type _FloatN, and store the result in the object pointed to by xptr. These functions preserve the encoded value and raise no floating-point exceptions. If the encoding is non-canonical, these functions may or may not produce a canonical representation.

Returns

3

The decodefN functions return no value.

4

See EXAMPLE in H.11.3.3.2.

H.11.3.3 Encoding-to-encoding conversion functions

H.11.3.3.1 General
1

An implementation shall declare an fMencfN function for each M and N equal to the width of a supported ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic or non-arithmetic binary interchange format, M̸=N. An implementation shall provide both dMencdecdN and dMencbindNfunctions for each M and N equal to the width of a supported ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic or non-arithmetic decimal interchange format, M̸=N.

H.11.3.3.2 The fMencfN functions
1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <math.h>
void fMencfN(unsigned char encMptr[restrict static M/8],
      const unsigned char encNptr[restrict static N/8]);
Description
2

The fMencfN functions convert between ISO/IEC 60559 binary interchange formats. These functions interpret the N /8 element array pointed to by encNptr as an encoding of width N bits. They convert the encoding to an encoding of width M bits and store the resulting encoding as an M /8 element array in the object pointed to by encMptr. The conversion rounds and raises floating-point exceptions as specified in ISO/IEC 60559. The order of bytes in the arrays follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2).

Returns
3

These functions return no value.

4

EXAMPLE If the ISO/IEC 60559 binary16 format is supported as a non-arithmetic format, data in binary16 format can be converted to type float as follows:

#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <math.h>
unsigned char b16[2]; // for input binary16 datum
float f; // for result
unsigned char b32[4];
_Float32 f32;
// store input binary16 datum in array b16
...
f32encf16(b32, b16);
decodef32(&f32, b32);
f = f32;
...
H.11.3.3.3 The dMencdecdN and dMencbindN functions
1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <math.h>
void dMencdecdN(unsigned char encMptr[restrict static M/8],
      const unsigned char encNptr[restrict static N/8]);
void dMencbindN(unsigned char encMptr[restrict static M/8],
      const unsigned char encNptr[restrict static N/8]);
Description
2

The dMencdecdN and dMencbindN functions convert between ISO/IEC 60559 decimal interchange formats that use the same encoding scheme. The dMencdecdN functions convert between formats using the encoding scheme based on decimal encoding of the significand. The dMencbindN functions convert between formats using the encoding scheme based on binary encoding of the significand. These functions interpret the N /8 element array pointed to by encNptr as an encoding of width N bits. They convert the encoding to an encoding of width M bits and store the resulting encoding as an M /8 element array in the object pointed to by encMptr. The conversion rounds and raises floating-point exceptions as specified in ISO/IEC 60559. The order of bytes in the arrays follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2).

Returns
3

These functions return no value.

H.12 Numeric conversion functions <stdlib.h>

H.12.1 General

1

This clause expands the specification of numeric conversion functions in <stdlib.h> (7.24.1) to also include conversions of strings from and to interchange and extended floating types. The conversions from floating are provided by functions analogous to the strfromd function. The conversions to floating are provided by functions analogous to the strtod function.

2

This clause also specifies functions to convert strings from and to ISO/IEC 60559 interchange format encodings.

3

For each interchange or extended floating type that the implementation provides, <stdlib.h> shall declare the associated functions specified in the following subclauses in H.12.2 and H.12.3 (see H.8). Conversely, for each such type that the implementation does not provide, <stdlib.h> shall not declare the associated functions.

4

For each ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic or non-arithmetic format that the implementation supports, <stdlib.h> shall declare the associated functions specified the following subclauses in H.12.4 and H.12.5 (see H.8). Conversely, for each such format that the implementation does not provide, <stdlib.h> shall not declare the associated functions.

H.12.2 String from floating

1

This subclause expands 7.24.1.3 and 7.24.1.4 to also include functions for the interchange and extended floating types. It adds to the synopsis in 7.24.1.3 the prototypes

int strfromfN(char * restrict s, size_t n,
      const char * restrict format, _FloatN fp);
int strfromfNx(char * restrict s, size_t n,
      const char * restrict format, _FloatNx fp);

It encompasses the prototypes in 7.24.1.4 by replacing them with

int strfromdN(char * restrict s, size_t n,
      const char * restrict format, _DecimalN fp);
int strfromdNx(char * restrict s, size_t n,
      const char * restrict format, _DecimalNx fp);
2

The descriptions and returns for the added functions are analogous to the ones in 7.24.1.3 and 7.24.1.4.

H.12.3 String to floating

1

This subclause expands 7.24.1.5, 7.31.4.1.2, 7.24.1.6, and 7.31.4.1.3 to also include functions for the interchange and extended floating types.

2

It adds to the synopsis in 7.24.1.5 the prototypes

_FloatN strtofN(const char * restrict nptr,
      char ** restrict endptr);
_FloatNx strtofNx(const char * restrict nptr,
      char ** restrict endptr);
It adds to the synopsis in 7.31.4.1.2 the prototypes
_FloatN wcstofN(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
      wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
_FloatNx wcstofNx(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
      wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
It encompasses the prototypes in 7.24.1.6 by replacing them with
_DecimalN strtodN(const char * restrict nptr,
      char ** restrict endptr);
_DecimalNx strtodNx(const char * restrict nptr,
      char ** restrict endptr);
It encompasses the prototypes in 7.31.4.1.3 by replacing them with
_DecimalN wcstodN(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
      wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
_DecimalNx wcstodNx(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,
      wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
3

The descriptions and returns for the added functions are analogous to the ones in 7.24.1.5, 7.31.4.1.2, 7.24.1.6, and 7.31.4.1.3.

4

EXAMPLE If the ISO/IEC 60559 binary128 format is supported as a non-arithmetic format, data in binary128 format can be converted to type _Decimal128 as follows:

#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <stdlib.h>
#define MAXSIZE 41 // > intermediate hex string length
                   // for the "C" locale
unsigned char b128[16]; // for input binary128 datum
_Decimal128 d128; // for result
char s[MAXSIZE];
// store input binary128 datum in array b128
...
strfromencf128(s, MAXSIZE, "%a", b128);
d128 = strtod128(s, nullptr);
...

where there are up to 29 hexadecimal digits h and d has 5 digits plus 1 for the null character.

H.12.4 String from encoding

H.12.4.1 General

1

An implementation shall declare the strfromencfN function for each N equal to the width of a supported ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic or non-arithmetic binary interchange format. An implementation shall declare both the strfromencdecdN and strfromencbindN functions for each N equal to the width of a supported ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic or non-arithmetic decimal interchange format.

H.12.4.2 The strfromencfN functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <stdlib.h>
int strfromencfN(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8]);
Description
2

The strfromencfN functions are similar to the strfromfN functions, except the input is the value of the N /8 element array pointed to by encptr, interpreted as an ISO/IEC 60559 binaryN encoding. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2).

Returns
3

The strfromencfN functions return the same values as corresponding strfromfN functions.

H.12.4.3 The strfromencdecdN and strfromencbindN functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <stdlib.h>
int strfromencdecdN(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8]);
int strfromencbindN(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,
      const unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8]);
Description
2

The strfromencdecdN functions are similar to the strfromdN functions except the input is the value of the N /8 element array pointed to by encptr, interpreted as an ISO/IEC 60559 decimalN encoding in the coding scheme based on decimal encoding of the significand. The strfromencbindN functions are similar to the strfromdN functions except the input is the value of the N /8 element array pointed to by encptr, interpreted as an ISO/IEC 60559 decimalN encoding in the coding scheme based on binary encoding of the significand. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2).

Returns
3

The strfromencdecdN and strfromencbindN functions return the same values as corresponding strfromdN functions.

H.12.5 String to encoding

H.12.5.1 General

1

An implementation shall declare the strtoencfN and wcstoencfN functions for each N equal to the width of a supported ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic or non-arithmetic binary interchange format. An implementation shall declare the strtoencdecdN, strtoencbindN, wcstoencdecdN, and wcstoencbindN functions for each N equal to the width of a supported ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic or non-arithmetic decimal interchange format.

H.12.5.2 The strtoencfN functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <stdlib.h>
void strtoencfN(unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8],
      const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
Description
2

The strtoencfN functions are similar to the strtofN functions, except they store an ISO/IEC 60559 encoding of the result as an N /8 element array in the object pointed to by encptr. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2).

Returns
3

These functions return no value.

H.12.5.3 The wcstoencfN functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <wchar.h>
void wcstoencfN(unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8],
      const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
Description
2

The wcstoencfN functions are similar to the wcstofN functions, except they store an ISO/IEC 60559 encoding of the result as an N /8 element array in the object pointed to by encptr. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2).

Returns
3

These functions return no value.

H.12.5.4 The strtoencdecdN and strtoencbindN functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <stdlib.h>
void strtoencdecdN(unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8],
      const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
void strtoencbindN(unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8],
      const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);
Description
2

The strtoencdecdN and strtoencbindN functions are similar to the strtodN functions, except they store an ISO/IEC 60559 encoding of the result as an N /8 element array in the object pointed to by encptr. The strtoencdecdN functions produce an encoding in the encoding scheme based

on decimal encoding of the significand. The strtoencbindN functions produce an encoding in the encoding scheme based on binary encoding of the significand. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2).

Returns

3

These functions return no value.

H.12.5.5 The wcstoencdecdN and wcstoencbindN functions

1
#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <wchar.h>
void wcstoencdecdN(unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8],
      const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
void wcstoencbindN(unsigned char encptr[restrict static N/8],
      const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);
Description
2

The wcstoencdecdN and wcstoencbindN functions are similar to the wcstodN functions, except they store an ISO/IEC 60559 encoding of the result as an N /8 element array in the object pointed to by encptr. The wcstoencdecdN functions produce an encoding in the encoding scheme based on decimal encoding of the significand. The wcstoencbindN functions produce an encoding in the encoding scheme based on binary encoding of the significand. The order of bytes in the array follows the endianness specified with __STDC_ENDIAN_NATIVE__ (7.18.2).

Returns
3

These functions return no value.

H.13 Type-generic macros <tgmath.h>

1

This clause enhances the specification of type-generic macros in <tgmath.h> (7.27) to apply to interchange and extended floating types, as well as standard floating types.

2

If arguments for generic parameters of a type-generic macro are such that some argument has a corresponding real type that is a standard floating type or a binary floating type and another argument is of decimal floating type, the behavior is undefined.

3

The treatment of arguments of integer type in 7.27 is expanded to cases where another argument has extended type. Arguments of integer type are regarded as having type:

  • _Decimal64x, if any argument has a decimal extended type; otherwise
  • _Float32x, if any argument has a binary extended type; otherwise
  • _Decimal64, if any argument has decimal type; otherwise
  • double
4

Use of the macros carg, cimag, conj, cproj, or creal with any argument of standard floating type, binary floating type, complex type, or imaginary type invokes a complex function. Use of the macro with an argument of a decimal floating type results in undefined behavior.

5

The functions that round results to a narrower type have type-generic macros whose names are obtained by omitting any suffix from the function names. Thus, the macros with f or d prefix are (as in 7.27):

fadd fmul ffma dadd dmul dfma fsub fdiv fsqrt

:
dsub ddiv dsqrt
fMadd fMxmul dMfma
fMsub fMxdiv dMsqrt
fMmul fMxfma dMxadd
fMdiv fMxsqrt dMxsub
fMfma dMadd dMxmul
fMsqrt dMsub dMxdiv
fMxadd dMmul dMxfma
fMxsub dMdiv dMxsqrt

All arguments are generic. If any argument is not real, use of the macro results in undefined behavior. The following specification uses the notation type1type2 to mean the values of type1 are a subset of (or the same as) the values of type2. The generic parameter type T for the function invoked by the macro is determined as follows:

6

EXAMPLE With the declarations

#define __STDC_WANT_IEC_60559_TYPES_EXT__
#include <tgmath.h>
int n;
double d;
long double ld;
double complex dc;
_Float32x f32x;
_Float64 f64;
_Float64x f64x;
_Float128 f128;
_Float64x complex f64xc;

f64div(f32x, f32x) f64divf128 if _Float32x_Float128, else f64divf64x

I Common warnings

I.1 Introduction

1

An implementation may generate warnings in many situations to help find a source of unintended behavior during the translation or execution of a program. Many such situations are not specified as part of this document.

I.2 Common situations

1

The following are a few of the common situations where an implementation may generate a warning:

  • A new struct or union type appears in a function prototype (6.2.1, 6.7.3.4).
  • A block with initialization of an object that has automatic storage duration is jumped into (6.2.4).
  • An implicit narrowing conversion is encountered, such as the assignment of a long int or a double to an int, or a pointer to void to a pointer to any type other than a character type (6.3).
  • A hexadecimal floating constant cannot be represented exactly in its evaluation format (6.4.4.3).
  • An integer character constant includes more than one character or a wide character constant includes more than one multibyte character (6.4.4.5).
  • The characters /* are found in a comment (6.4.7).
  • An "unordered" binary operator (not comma, &&, or ||) contains a side effect to an lvalue in one operand, and a side effect to, or an access to the value of, the identical lvalue in the other operand (6.5.1).
  • An object is defined but not used (6.7).
  • A value is given to an object of an enumerated type other than by assignment of an enumeration constant that is a member of that type, or an enumeration object that has the same type, or the value of a function that returns the same enumerated type (6.7.3.3).
  • An aggregate has a partly bracketed initialization (6.7.9).
  • A statement cannot be reached (6.8).
  • A statement with no apparent effect is encountered (6.8).
  • A constant expression is used as the controlling expression of a selection statement (6.8.5).
  • An incorrectly formed preprocessing group is encountered while skipping a preprocessing group (6.10.2).
  • An unrecognized #pragma directive is encountered (6.10.8).

J Portability issues

J.1 Unspecified behavior

1

The following are unspecified:

(1) The manner and timing of static initialization (5.1.2).

(2) The termination status returned to the hosted environment if the return type of main is not compatible with int (5.1.2.3.4).

(3) The values of objects that are neither lock-free atomic objects nor of type volatile

sig_atomic_t and the state of the floating-point environment, when the processing of the abstract machine is interrupted by receipt of a signal (5.1.2.4).

(4) The behavior of the display device if a printing character is written when the active position is at the final position of a line (5.2.3).

(5) The behavior of the display device if a backspace character is written when the active position is at the initial position of a line (5.2.3).

(6) The behavior of the display device if a horizontal tab character is written when the active position is at or past the last defined horizontal tabulation position (5.2.3).

(7) The behavior of the display device if a vertical tab character is written when the active position is at or past the last defined vertical tabulation position (5.2.3).

(8) How an extended source character that does not correspond to a universal character name counts toward the significant initial characters in an external identifier (5.2.5.2).

(9) Many aspects of the representations of types (6.2.6).

(10) The value of padding bytes when storing values in structures or unions (6.2.6.1).

(11) The values of bytes that correspond to union members other than the one last stored into (6.2.6.1).

(12) The representation used when storing a value in an object that has more than one object representation for that value (6.2.6.1).

(13) The values of any padding bits in integer representations (6.2.6.2).

(14) Whether two string literals result in distinct arrays (6.4.5).

(15) The order in which subexpressions are evaluated and the order in which side effects take place, except as specified for the function-call (), &&, ||, ?:, and comma operators (6.5.1).

(16) The order in which the function designator, arguments, and subexpressions within the arguments are evaluated in a function call (6.5.3.3).

(17) The order of side effects among compound literal initialization list expressions (6.5.3.6).

(18) The order in which the operands of an assignment operator are evaluated (6.5.17).

(19) The alignment of the addressable storage unit allocated to hold a bit-field (6.7.3.2).

(20) Whether a call to an inline function uses the inline definition or the external definition of the function (6.7.5).

(21) Whether a size expression is evaluated when it is part of the operand of a sizeof operator and changing the value of the size expression would not affect the result of the operator (6.7.7.3).

(44) Whether the strtod, strtof, strtold, wcstod, wcstof, and wcstold functions convert a minus-signed sequence to a negative number directly or by negating the value resulting from converting the corresponding unsigned sequence (7.24.1.5, 7.31.4.1.2).

(63) The sign of one part of the complex result of several math functions for certain special cases in ISO/IEC 60559 compatible implementations (G.6.2.1, G.6.3.2, G.6.3.3, G.6.3.4, G.6.3.5, G.6.3.6, G.6.4.1, G.6.5.2).

J.2 Undefined behavior

1

The behavior is undefined in the following circumstances:

(1) A "shall" or "shall not" requirement that appears outside of a constraint is violated (Clause 4).

(2) A nonempty source file does not end in a new-line character which is not immediately preceded by a backslash character or ends in a partial preprocessing token or comment (5.1.1.2).

(25) A pointer is used to call a function whose type is not compatible with the referenced type (6.3.2.3).

(50) Pointers that do not point to the same aggregate or union (nor just beyond the same array object) are compared using relational operators (6.5.9).

(68) A function declared with a _Noreturn function specifier returns to its caller (6.7.5).

(89) The token defined is generated during the expansion of a #if or #elif preprocessing directive, or the use of the defined unary operator does not match one of the two specified forms prior to macro replacement (6.10.2).

nor representable as an unsigned char (7.4).

(132) A signal occurs other than as the result of calling the abort or raise function, and the signal handler refers to an object with static or thread storage duration that is not a lock-free atomic object other than by assigning a value to an object declared as volatile sig_atomic_t, or calls any function in the standard library other than the abort function, the _Exit function, the quick_exit function, the functions in <stdatomic.h> (except where explicitly stated otherwise) when the atomic arguments are lock-free, the atomic_is_lock_free function with any atomic argument, or the signal function (for the same signal number) (7.14.1.1).

(153) The value of a pointer to a FILE object is used after the associated file is closed (7.23.3).

(170) The result of a conversion by one of the formatted input functions cannot be represented in the corresponding object, or the receiving object does not have an appropriate type (7.23.6.2, 7.31.2.2).

(190) A signal is raised while the quick_exit function is executing (7.24.4.7).

(212) The tss_create function is called from within a destructor (7.28.6.1).

(221) The towctrans function is called using a different LC_CTYPE category from the one in effect for the call to the wctrans function that returned the description (7.32.3.2.1).

J.3 Implementation-defined behavior

J.3.1 General

1

A conforming implementation is required to document its choice of behavior in each of the areas listed in this subclause. The following are implementation-defined:

J.3.2 Translation

1

(1) How a diagnostic is identified (3.13, 5.1.1.3).

(2) Whether each nonempty sequence of white-space characters other than new-line is retained or replaced by one space character in translation phase 3 (5.1.1.2).

J.3.3 Environment

1

(1) The mapping between physical source file multibyte characters and the source character set in translation phase 1 (5.1.1.2).

(2) The name and type of the function called at program startup in a freestanding environment (5.1.2.2).

(3) The effect of program termination in a freestanding environment (5.1.2.2).

(4) An alternative manner in which the main function may be defined (5.1.2.3.2).

(5) The values given to the strings pointed to by the argv argument to main (5.1.2.3.2).

(6) What constitutes an interactive device (5.1.2.4).

(7) Whether a program can have more than one thread of execution in a freestanding environment (5.1.2.5).

(8) The set of signals, their semantics, and their default handling (7.14).

(9) Signal values other than SIGFPE, SIGILL, and SIGSEGV that correspond to a computational exception (7.14.1.1).

(12) The manner of execution of the string by the system function (7.24.4.8).

J.3.4 Identifiers

1

(1) Which additional multibyte characters may appear in identifiers and their correspondence to universal character names (6.4.2).

(2) The number of significant initial characters in an identifier (5.2.5.2, 6.4.2).

J.3.5 Characters

1

(1) The number of bits in a byte (3.7).

(2) The values of the members of the execution character set (5.2.1).

(3) The unique value of the member of the execution character set produced for each of the standard alphabetic escape sequences (5.2.3).

(4) The value of a char object into which has been stored any character other than a member of the basic execution character set (6.2.5).

(5) Which of signed char or unsigned char has the same range, representation, and behavior as "plain" char (6.2.5, 6.3.1.1).

(6) The literal encoding, which maps of the characters of the execution character set to the values in a character constant or string literal (6.2.9, 6.4.4.5).

(7) The wide literal encoding, of the characters of the execution character set to the values in a

wchar_t character constant or wchar_t string literal (6.2.9, 6.4.4.5).

(8) The mapping of members of the source character set (in character constants and string literals) to members of the execution character set (6.4.4.5, 5.1.1.2).

(9) The value of an integer character constant containing more than one character or containing a character or escape sequence that does not map to a single-byte execution character (6.4.4.5).

(10) The value of a wide character constant containing more than one multibyte character or a single multibyte character that maps to multiple members of the extended execution character set, or containing a multibyte character or escape sequence not represented in the extended execution character set (6.4.4.5).

(11) The current locale used to convert a wide character constant consisting of a single multibyte character that maps to a member of the extended execution character set into a corresponding wide character code (6.4.4.5).

(12) The current locale used to convert a wide string literal into corresponding wide character codes (6.4.5).

(13) The value of a string literal containing a multibyte character or escape sequence not represented in the execution character set (6.4.5).

(14) The encoding of wchar_t where the macro __STDC_ISO_10646__ is not defined (6.10.10.3).

J.3.6 Integers

1

(1) Any extended integer types that exist in the implementation (6.2.5).

(2) The rank of any extended integer type relative to another extended integer type with the same precision (6.3.1.1).

(3) The result of, or the signal raised by, converting an integer to a signed integer type when the value cannot be represented in an object of that type (6.3.1.3).

(4) The results of some bitwise operations on signed integers (6.5.1).

J.3.7 Floating-point

1

(1) The accuracy of the floating-point operations and of the library functions in <math.h> and <complex.h> that return floating-point results (5.2.5.3.3).

(2) The accuracy of the conversions between floating-point internal representations and string representations performed by the library functions in <stdio.h>, <stdlib.h>, and <wchar.h> (5.2.5.3.3).

(3) The rounding behaviors characterized by non-standard values of FLT_ROUNDS (5.2.5.3.3).

(4) The evaluation methods characterized by non-standard negative values of FLT_EVAL_METHOD

(5.2.5.3.3).

(5) The evaluation methods characterized by non-standard negative values of DEC_EVAL_METHOD

(5.2.5.3.4).

(6) If decimal floating types are supported (6.2.5).

(7) The direction of rounding when an integer is converted to a floating-point number that cannot exactly represent the original value (6.3.1.4).

(8) The direction of rounding when a floating-point number is converted to a narrower floatingpoint number (6.3.1.5).

(9) How the nearest representable value or the larger or smaller representable value immediately adjacent to the nearest representable value is chosen for certain floating constants (6.4.4.3).

(10) Whether and how floating expressions are contracted when not disallowed by the

FP_CONTRACT pragma (6.5.1).

(11) The default state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma (7.6.1).

(12) Additional floating-point exceptions, rounding modes, environments, and classifications, and their macro names (7.6, 7.12).

(13) The default state for the FP_CONTRACT pragma (7.12.2).

J.3.8 Arrays and pointers

1

(1) The result of converting a pointer to an integer or vice versa (6.3.2.3).

(2) The size of the result of subtracting two pointers to elements of the same array (6.5.7).

J.3.9 Hints

1

(1) The extent to which suggestions made by using the register storage-class specifier are effective (6.7.2).

(2) The extent to which suggestions made by using the inline function specifier are effective (6.7.5).

J.3.10 Structures, unions, enumerations, and bit-fields

1

(1) Whether a "plain" int bit-field is treated as a signed int bit-field or as an unsigned int

bit-field (6.7.3, 6.7.3.2).

(2) Allowable bit-field types other than bool, signed int, unsigned int, and bit-precise integer types (6.7.3.2).

(3) Whether atomic types are permitted for bit-fields (6.7.3.2).

(4) Whether a bit-field can straddle a storage-unit boundary (6.7.3.2).

(5) The order of allocation of bit-fields within a unit (6.7.3.2).

(6) The alignment of non-bit-field members of structures (6.7.3.2). This should present no problem unless binary data written by one implementation is read by another.

(7) The integer type compatible with each enumerated type without fixed underlying type (6.7.3.3).

J.3.11 Qualifiers

1

(1) What constitutes an access to an object that has volatile-qualified type (6.7.4).

J.3.12 Preprocessing directives

1

(1) The locations within #pragma directives where header name preprocessing tokens are recognized (6.4, 6.4.7).

(2) How sequences in both forms of header names are mapped to headers or external source file names (6.4.7).

(3) Whether the value of a character constant in a constant expression that controls conditional inclusion matches the value of the same character constant in the execution character set (6.10.2).

(4) Whether the value of a single-character character constant in a constant expression that controls conditional inclusion may have a negative value (6.10.2).

(5) The places that are searched for an included < > delimited header, and how the places are specified or the header is identified (6.10.3).

(6) How the named source file is searched for in an included " " delimited header (6.10.3).

(7) The method by which preprocessing tokens (possibly resulting from macro expansion) in a #include directive are combined into a header name (6.10.3).

(8) The nesting limit for #include processing (6.10.3).

(9) Whether the # operator inserts a \ character before the \ character that begins a universal character name in a character constant or string literal (6.10.5.2).

(10) The behavior on each recognized non-STDC #pragma directive (6.10.8).

(11) The definitions for __DATE__ and __TIME__ when respectively, the date and time of translation are not available (6.10.10.2).

J.3.13 Library functions

1

(1) Any library facilities available to a freestanding program, other than the minimal set required by Clause 4 (5.1.2.2).

(2) The format of the diagnostic printed by the assert macro (7.2.2.1).

(3) The representation of the floating-point status flags stored by the fegetexceptflag function (7.6.4.2).

(27) The nature and choice of encodings used for multibyte characters in files (7.23.3).

(52) The TIME_UTC epoch (7.29.2.6).

(55) Whether the functions in <math.h> honor the rounding direction mode in an ISO/IEC 60559 conformant implementation, unless explicitly specified otherwise (F.10).

J.3.14 Architecture

1

(1) The values or expressions assigned to the macros specified in the headers <float.h>, <limits.h>, and <stdint.h> (5.2.5.3, 7.22).

(2) The result of attempting to indirectly access an object with automatic or thread storage duration from a thread other than the one with which it is associated (6.2.4).

(3) The number, order, and encoding of bytes in any object (when not explicitly specified in this document) (6.2.6.1).

(4) Whether any extended alignments are supported and the contexts in which they are supported (6.2.8).

(5) Valid alignment values other than those returned by an alignof expression for fundamental types, if any (6.2.8).

(6) The value of the result of the sizeof and alignof operators (6.5.4.4).

J.4 Locale-specific behavior

1

The following characteristics of a hosted environment are locale-specific and are required to be documented by the implementation:

(1) Additional members of the source and execution character sets beyond the basic character set (5.2.1).

(2) The presence, meaning, and representation of additional multibyte characters in the execution character set beyond the basic character set (5.2.2).

(3) The shift states used for the encoding of multibyte characters (5.2.2).

(4) The direction of writing of successive printing characters (5.2.3).

(5) The decimal-point character (7.1.1).

(6) The set of printing characters (7.4, 7.32.2).

(7) The set of control characters (7.4, 7.32.2).

(8) The sets of characters tested for by the isalpha, isblank, islower, ispunct, isspace,

isupper, iswalpha, iswblank, iswlower, iswpunct, iswspace, or iswupper functions (7.4.2.2, 7.4.2.3, 7.4.2.7, 7.4.2.9, 7.4.2.10, 7.4.2.11, 7.32.2.1.2, 7.32.2.1.3, 7.32.2.1.7, 7.32.2.1.9, 7.32.2.1.10, 7.32.2.1.11).

(9) The native environment (7.11.1.1).

(10) Additional subject sequences accepted by the numeric conversion functions (7.24.1, 7.31.4.1).

(11) The collation sequence of the execution character set (7.26.4.3, 7.31.4.4.2).

(12) The contents of the error message strings set up by the strerror function (7.26.6.3).

(13) The formats for time and date (7.29.3.5, 7.31.5.1).

(14) Character mappings that are supported by the towctrans function (7.32.1).

(15) Character classifications that are supported by the iswctype function (7.32.1).

J.5 Common extensions

J.5.1 General

1

The following extensions are widely used in many systems, but are not portable to all implementations. The inclusion of any extension that may cause a strictly conforming program to become invalid renders an implementation nonconforming. Examples of such extensions are new keywords, extra library functions declared in standard headers, or predefined macros with names that do not begin with an underscore.

J.5.2 Environment arguments

1

In a hosted environment, the main function receives a third argument, char *envp[], that points to a null-terminated array of pointers to char, each of which points to a string that provides information about the environment for this execution of the program (5.1.2.3.2).

J.5.3 Specialized identifiers

1

Characters other than the underscore _, letters, and digits, that are not part of the basic source character set (such as the dollar sign $, or characters in national character sets) may appear in an identifier (6.4.2).

J.5.4 Lengths and cases of identifiers

1

All characters in identifiers (with or without external linkage) are significant (6.4.2).

J.5.5 Scopes of identifiers

1

A function identifier, or the identifier of an object the declaration of which contains the keyword extern, has file scope (6.2.1).

J.5.6 Writable string literals

1

String literals are modifiable (in which case, identical string literals should denote distinct objects) (6.4.5).

J.5.7 Other arithmetic types

1

Additional arithmetic types, such as __int128 or double double, and their appropriate conversions are defined (6.2.5, 6.3.1). Additional floating types may have more range or precision than long double, may be used for evaluating expressions of other floating types, and may be used to define float_t or double_t. Additional floating types may also have less range or precision than float.

J.5.8 Function pointer casts

1

A pointer to an object or to void may be cast to a pointer to a function, allowing data to be invoked as a function (6.5.5).

2

A pointer to a function may be cast to a pointer to an object or to void, allowing a function to be inspected or modified (for example, by a debugger) (6.5.5).

J.5.9 Extended bit-field types

1

A bit-field may be declared with a type other than bool, unsigned int, signed int, or a bit-precise integer type, with an appropriate maximum width (6.7.3.2).

J.5.10 The fortran keyword

1

The fortran function specifier may be used in a function declaration to indicate that calls suitable for FORTRAN should be generated, or that a different representation for the external name is to be generated (6.7.5).

J.5.11 The asm keyword

1

The asm keyword may be used to insert assembly language directly into the translator output (6.8). The most common implementation is via a statement of the form:

asm (character-string-literal);

J.5.12 Type inference

1

A declaration for which a type is inferred (6.7.10) may additionally accept pointer declarators, function declarators, and may have more than one declarator.

J.5.13 Multiple external definitions

1

There may be more than one external definition for the identifier of an object, with or without the explicit use of the keyword extern; if the definitions disagree, or more than one is initialized, the behavior is undefined (6.9.3).

J.5.14 Predefined macro names

1

Macro names that do not begin with an underscore, describing the translation and execution environments, are defined by the implementation before translation begins (6.10.10).

J.5.15 Floating-point status flags

1

If any floating-point status flags are set on normal termination after all calls to functions registered by the atexit function have been made (see 7.24.4.4), the implementation writes some diagnostics indicating the fact to the stderr stream, if it is still open,

J.5.16 Extra arguments for signal handlers

1

Handlers for specific signals are called with extra arguments in addition to the signal number (7.14.1.1).

J.5.17 Additional stream types and file-opening modes

1

Additional mappings from files to streams are supported (7.23.2).

2

Additional file-opening modes may be specified by characters appended to the mode argument of the fopen function (7.23.5.3).

J.5.18 Defined file position indicator

1

The file position indicator is decremented by each successful call to the ungetc or ungetwc function for a text stream, except if its value was zero before a call (7.23.7.10, 7.31.3.10).

J.5.19 Math error reporting

1

Functions declared in <complex.h> and <math.h> raise SIGFPE to report errors instead of, or in addition to, setting errno or raising floating-point exceptions (7.3, 7.12).

J.6 Reserved identifiers and keywords

J.6.1 General

1

A lot of identifier preprocessing tokens are used for specific purposes in regular clauses or appendices from translation phase 3 (5.1.1.2) onwards. Using any of these for a purpose different from their description in this document, even if the use is in a context where they are normatively permitted, may have an impact on the portability of code and should thus be avoided.

J.6.2 Rule based identifiers

1

The following 53 regular expressions characterize identifiers that are systematically reserved by some clause in this document.

atomic_[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* ATOMIC_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_DECIMAL_DIG [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_DIG [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_EPSILON [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MANT_DIG

[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MAX [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MAX_10_EXP [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MAX_EXP [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MIN [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MIN_10_EXP [a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MIN_EXP

:
LC_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
LDBL_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
MATH_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
mem[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
mtx_[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
PRI[a-zBX][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
SCN[a-zBX][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
SIG[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
SIG_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
stdc_[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
str[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
thrd_[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
TIME_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
to[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
tss_[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*
UINT[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_C
UINT[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MAX
uint[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_t
UINT[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_WIDTH
wcs[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*

ckd_[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* cnd_[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* cr_[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* DBL_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* DEC128_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* DEC32_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* DEC64_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* DEC_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* E[0-9A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* FE_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* FLT_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* FP_[A-Z][a-zA-Z0-9_]* INT[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_C INT[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MAX INT[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_MIN int[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_t INT[a-zA-Z0-9_]*_WIDTH is[a-z][a-zA-Z0-9_]*

2

The following 824 identifiers or keywords match these patterns and have particular semantics provided by this document.

_Alignas _Alignof _Atomic

atomic_bool ATOMIC_BOOL_LOCK_FREE atomic_char atomic_char16_t ATOMIC_CHAR16_T_LOCK_FREE atomic_char32_t ATOMIC_CHAR32_T_LOCK_FREE atomic_char8_t ATOMIC_CHAR8_T_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_CHAR_LOCK_FREE atomic_compare_exchange_strong atomic_compare_exchange_strong_explicit atomic_compare_exchange_weak atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit atomic_exchange atomic_exchange_explicit atomic_fetch_

atomic_fetch_add atomic_fetch_add_explicit atomic_fetch_and atomic_fetch_and_explicit atomic_fetch_or atomic_fetch_or_explicit atomic_fetch_sub atomic_fetch_sub_explicit atomic_fetch_xor atomic_fetch_xor_explicit atomic_flag

atomic_flag_clear atomic_flag_clear_explicit ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT atomic_flag_test_and_set atomic_flag_test_and_set_explicit atomic_init atomic_int atomic_int_fast16_t atomic_int_fast32_t atomic_int_fast64_t atomic_int_fast8_t atomic_int_least16_t atomic_int_least32_t atomic_int_least64_t atomic_int_least8_t ATOMIC_INT_LOCK_FREE atomic_intmax_t atomic_intptr_t atomic_is_lock_free atomic_llong ATOMIC_LLONG_LOCK_FREE atomic_load atomic_load_explicit atomic_long ATOMIC_LONG_LOCK_FREE ATOMIC_POINTER_LOCK_FREE atomic_ptrdiff_t atomic_schar atomic_short ATOMIC_SHORT_LOCK_FREE atomic_signal_fence

:
DBL_SNAN
DBL_TRUE_MIN
DEC128_EPSILON
DEC128_MANT_DIG
DEC128_MAX
DEC128_MAX_EXP
DEC128_MIN
DEC128_MIN_EXP
DEC128_SNAN
DEC128_TRUE_MIN
DEC32_EPSILON
DEC32_MANT_DIG
DEC32_MAX
DEC32_MAX_EXP
DEC32_MIN
DEC32_MIN_EXP
DEC32_SNAN
DEC32_TRUE_MIN
DEC64_EPSILON
DEC64_MANT_DIG
DEC64_MAX
DEC64_MAX_EXP
DEC64_MIN
DEC64_MIN_EXP
DEC64_SNAN
DEC64_TRUE_MIN
DEC_EVAL_METHOD
_Decimal128
_Decimal128x
_Decimal32
_Decimal32_t
_Decimal64
_Decimal64_t
_Decimal64x
DECIMAL_DIG
DEC_INFINITY
DEC_NAN
__deprecated__
EDOM
EILSEQ
EOF
EOL
ERANGE
_Exit
EXIT_FAILURE
EXIT_SUCCESS
__fallthrough__
FE_ALL_EXCEPT
FE_DEC_DOWNWARD
FE_DEC_DYNAMIC
FE_DEC_TONEAREST
FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO
FE_DEC_UPWARD
FE_DFL_ENV
FE_DFL_MODE

DBL_DECIMAL_DIG DBL_DIG DBL_EPSILON DBL_HAS_SUBNORM DBL_IS_IEC_60559 DBL_MANT_DIG DBL_MAX DBL_MAX_10_EXP DBL_MAX_EXP DBL_MIN DBL_MIN_10_EXP DBL_MIN_EXP DBL_NORM_MAX

:
FP_FAST_D32SUBD64
FP_FAST_D64ADDD128
FP_FAST_D64DIVD128
FP_FAST_D64FMAD128
FP_FAST_D64MULD128
FP_FAST_D64SQRTD128
FP_FAST_D64SUBD128
FP_FAST_DADDL
FP_FAST_DDIVL
FP_FAST_DFMAL
FP_FAST_DMULL
FP_FAST_DSQRTL
FP_FAST_DSUBL
FP_FAST_FADD
FP_FAST_FADDL
FP_FAST_FDIV
FP_FAST_FDIVL
FP_FAST_FFMA
FP_FAST_FFMAL
FP_FAST_FMA
FP_FAST_FMAD128
FP_FAST_FMAD32
FP_FAST_FMAD64
FP_FAST_FMAF
FP_FAST_FMAL
FP_FAST_FMUL
FP_FAST_FMULL
FP_FAST_FSQRT
FP_FAST_FSQRTL
FP_FAST_FSUB
FP_FAST_FSUBL
FP_ILOGB0
FP_ILOGBNAN
FP_INFINITE
FP_INT_DOWNWARD
FP_INT_TONEAREST
FP_INT_TONEARESTFROMZERO
FP_INT_TOWARDZERO
FP_INT_UPWARD
FP_LLOGB0
FP_LLOGBNAN
FP_NAN
FP_NORMAL
FP_SUBNORMAL
FP_ZERO
__func__
_Generic
__has_c_attribute
__has_embed
__has_include
__if_empty__
_Imaginary
_Imaginary_I
INT16_C
INT16_MAX
INT16_MIN

FLT_DECIMAL_DIG FLT_DIG FLT_EPSILON FLT_EVAL_METHOD FLT_HAS_SUBNORM FLT_IS_IEC_60559 FLT_MANT_DIG FLT_MAX FLT_MAX_10_EXP FLT_MAX_EXP FLT_MIN FLT_MIN_10_EXP FLT_MIN_EXP FLT_NORM_MAX FLT_RADIX FLT_ROUNDS FLT_SNAN FLT_TRUE_MIN FOPEN_MAX FP_CONTRACT FP_FAST_D32ADDD128 FP_FAST_D32ADDD64 FP_FAST_D32DIVD128 FP_FAST_D32DIVD64 FP_FAST_D32FMAD128 FP_FAST_D32FMAD64 FP_FAST_D32MULD128 FP_FAST_D32MULD64 FP_FAST_D32SQRTD128 FP_FAST_D32SQRTD64 FP_FAST_D32SUBD128

:
isnan
isnormal
isprint
ispunct
issignaling
isspace
issubnormal
isunordered
isupper
iswalnum
iswalpha
iswblank
iswcntrl
iswctype
iswdigit
iswgraph
iswlower
iswprint
iswpunct
iswspace
iswupper
iswxdigit
isxdigit
iszero
LC_ALL
LC_COLLATE
LC_CTYPE
LC_MONETARY
LC_NUMERIC
LC_TIME
LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG
LDBL_DIG
LDBL_EPSILON
LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM
LDBL_IS_IEC_60559
LDBL_MANT_DIG
LDBL_MAX
LDBL_MAX_10_EXP
LDBL_MAX_EXP
LDBL_MIN
LDBL_MIN_10_EXP
LDBL_MIN_EXP
LDBL_NORM_MAX
LDBL_SNAN
LDBL_TRUE_MIN
__limit__
__LINE__
LLONG_MAX
LLONG_MIN
LONG_MAX
LONG_MIN
MATH_ERREXCEPT
MATH_ERRNO
__maybe_unused__
MB_CUR_MAX
MB_LEN_MAX

isalnum isalpha isblank iscanonical iscntrl isdigit iseqsig isfinite isgraph isgreater isgreaterequal isinf isless islessequal islessgreater islower

:
PRIiPTR
_PRINTF_NAN_LEN_MAX
PRIo32
PRIo64
PRIoFAST32
PRIoFAST64
PRIoLEAST32
PRIoLEAST64
PRIoMAX
PRIoPTR
PRIu32
PRIu64
PRIuFAST32
PRIuFAST64
PRIuLEAST32
PRIuLEAST64
PRIuMAX
PRIuPTR
PRIX32
PRIX64
PRIXFAST32
PRIXFAST64
PRIXLEAST32
PRIXLEAST64
PRIXMAX
PRIXPTR
PTRDIFF_MAX
PTRDIFF_MIN
RAND_MAX
__reproducible__
RSIZE_MAX
SCHAR_MAX
SCHAR_MIN
SCNbMAX
SCNbPTR
SCNdMAX
SCNdPTR
SCNiMAX
SCNiPTR
SCNoMAX
SCNoPTR
SCNuMAX
SCNuPTR
SCNxMAX
SCNxPTR
SHRT_MAX
SHRT_MIN
SIGABRT
SIG_ATOMIC_MAX
SIG_ATOMIC_MIN
SIG_ATOMIC_WIDTH
SIG_DFL
SIG_ERR
SIGFPE
SIG_IGN
SIGILL

PRIb32 PRIb64 PRIbFAST32 PRIbFAST64 PRIbLEAST32 PRIbLEAST64 PRIbMAX PRIbPTR PRId32 PRId64 PRIdFAST32 PRIdFAST64 PRIdLEAST32 PRIdLEAST64 PRIdMAX PRIdPTR PRIi32 PRIi64 PRIiFAST32 PRIiFAST64 PRIiLEAST32 PRIiLEAST64 PRIiMAX

:
stdc_first_trailing_one_uc
stdc_first_trailing_one_ui
stdc_first_trailing_one_ul
stdc_first_trailing_one_ull
stdc_first_trailing_one_us
stdc_first_trailing_zero
stdc_first_trailing_zero_uc
stdc_first_trailing_zero_ui
stdc_first_trailing_zero_ul
stdc_first_trailing_zero_ull
stdc_first_trailing_zero_us
stdc_has_single_bit
stdc_has_single_bit_uc
stdc_has_single_bit_ui
stdc_has_single_bit_ul
stdc_has_single_bit_ull
stdc_has_single_bit_us
__STDC_HOSTED__
__STDC_IEC_559__
__STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__
__STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__
__STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__
__STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__
__STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__
__STDC_ISO_10646__
stdc_leading_ones
stdc_leading_ones_uc
stdc_leading_ones_ui
stdc_leading_ones_ul
stdc_leading_ones_ull
stdc_leading_ones_us
stdc_leading_zeros
stdc_leading_zeros_uc
stdc_leading_zeros_ui
stdc_leading_zeros_ul
stdc_leading_zeros_ull
stdc_leading_zeros_us
__STDC_LIB_EXT1__
__STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__
__STDC_NO_ATOMICS__
__STDC_NO_COMPLEX__
__STDC_NO_THREADS__
__STDC_NO_VLA__
stdc_trailing_ones
stdc_trailing_ones_uc
stdc_trailing_ones_ui
stdc_trailing_ones_ul
stdc_trailing_ones_ull
stdc_trailing_ones_us
stdc_trailing_zeros
stdc_trailing_zeros_uc
stdc_trailing_zeros_ui
stdc_trailing_zeros_ul
stdc_trailing_zeros_ull
stdc_trailing_zeros_us
__STDC_UTF_16__

stdc_first_leading_one stdc_first_leading_one_uc stdc_first_leading_one_ui stdc_first_leading_one_ul stdc_first_leading_one_ull stdc_first_leading_one_us stdc_first_leading_zero stdc_first_leading_zero_uc stdc_first_leading_zero_ui stdc_first_leading_zero_ul stdc_first_leading_zero_ull stdc_first_leading_zero_us stdc_first_trailing_one

:
strspn
strstr
strtod
strtod128
strtod32
strtod64
strtof
strtoimax
strtok
strtok_s
strtol
strtold
strtoll
strtoul
strtoull
strtoumax
struct
strxfrm
thrd_busy
thrd_create
thrd_current
thrd_detach
thrd_equal
thrd_error
thrd_exit
thrd_join
thrd_nomem
thrd_sleep
thrd_start_t
thrd_success
thrd_t
thrd_timedout
thrd_yield
_Thread_local
__TIME__
TIME_ACTIVE
TIME_MONOTONIC
TIME_THREAD_ACTIVE
TIME_UTC
TMP_MAX
tolower
totalorder
totalorderd128
totalorderd32
totalorderd64
totalorderf
totalorderl
totalordermag
totalordermagd128
totalordermagd32
totalordermagd64
totalordermagf
totalordermagl
toupper
towctrans
towlower

strcat strcat_s strchr strcmp strcoll strcpy strcpy_s strcspn strdup strerror strerrorlen_s strerror_s strfromd strfromd128 strfromd32 strfromd64 strfromencf128 strfromf strfroml strftime strlen strncat strncat_s strncmp strncpy strncpy_s strndup strnlen_s strpbrk strrchr

:
__VA_ARGS__
__VA_OPT__
WCHAR_MAX
WCHAR_MIN
wcscat
wcscat_s
wcschr
wcscmp
wcscoll
wcscpy
wcscpy_s
wcscspn
wcsftime
wcslen
wcsncat
wcsncat_s
wcsncmp
wcsncpy
wcsncpy_s
wcsnlen_s
wcspbrk
wcsrchr
wcsrtombs
wcsrtombs_s
wcsspn
wcsstr
wcstod
wcstod128
wcstod32
wcstod64
wcstof
wcstoimax
wcstok
wcstok_s
wcstol
wcstold
wcstoll
wcstombs
wcstombs_s
wcstoul
wcstoull
wcstoumax
wcsxfrm
WINT_MAX
WINT_MIN

USHRT_MAX

J.6.3 Particular identifiers or keywords

1

The following 1237 identifiers or keywords are not covered by the previously listed matching patterns and have particular semantics provided by this document.

abort abort_handler_s abs acos acosd128 acosd32

acosd64 acosf acosh acoshd128 acoshd32 acoshd64

acoshf acoshl acosl acospi acospid128 acospid32

:
atanpid64
atanpif
atanpil
atexit
atof
atoi
atol
atoll
at_quick_exit
auto
bitand
BITINT_MAXWIDTH
bitor
bool
BOOL_WIDTH
break
bsearch
bsearch_s
btowc
BUFSIZ
c16rtomb
c32rtomb
c8rtomb
cabs
cabsf
cabsl
cacos
cacosf
cacosh
cacoshf
cacoshl
cacosl
cacospi
cacospif
cacospil
calloc
call_once
canonicalize
canonicalized128
canonicalized32
canonicalized64
canonicalizef
canonicalizel
carg
cargf
cargl
case
casin
casinf
casinh
casinhf
casinhl
casinl
casinpi
casinpif
casinpil
catan
catanf
catanh
catanhf
catanhl
catanl
catanpi
catanpif
catanpil
cbrt
cbrtd128
cbrtd32
cbrtd64
cbrtf
cbrtl
ccompoundn
ccompoundnf
ccompoundnl
ccos
ccosf
ccosf64x
ccosh
ccoshf
ccoshl
ccosl
ccospi
ccospif
ccospil
ceil
ceild128
ceild32
ceild64
ceilf
ceill
cerf
cerfc
cerfcf
cerfcl
cerff
cerfl
cexp
cexp10
cexp10f
cexp10l
cexp10m1
cexp10m1f
cexp10m1l
cexp2
cexp2f
cexp2l
cexp2m1
cexp2m1f
cexp2m1l
cexpf
cexpl
cexpm1

acospid64 acospif acospil alignas aligned_alloc alignof and and_eq asctime asctime_s asin asind128 asind32 asind64 asinf asinh asinhd128 asinhd32 asinhd64 asinhf asinhl asinl asinpi asinpid128 asinpid32 asinpid64 asinpif asinpil assert atan atan2 atan2d128 atan2d32 atan2d64 atan2f atan2l atan2pi atan2pid128 atan2pid32 atan2pid64 atan2pif atan2pil atand128 atand32 atand64 atanf atanh atanhd128 atanhd32 atanhd64 atanhf atanhl atanl atanpi atanpid128 atanpid32

:
continue
copysign
copysignd128
copysignd32
copysignd64
copysignf
copysignl
cos
cosd128
cosd32
cosd64
cosf
cosh
coshd128
coshd32
coshd64
coshf
coshl
cosl
cospi
cospid128
cospid32
cospid64
cospif
cospil
cpow
cpowf
cpowf128
cpowl
cpown
cpownf
cpownl
cpowr
cpowrf
cpowrl
cproj
cprojf
cprojl
creal
crealf
creall
crootn
crootnf
crootnl
crsqrt
crsqrtf
crsqrtl
csin
csinf
csinh
csinhf
csinhl
csinl
csinpi
csinpif
csinpil
csqrt
csqrtf
csqrtl
ctan
ctanf
ctanh
ctanhf
ctanhl
ctanl
ctanpi
ctanpif
ctanpil
ctgamma
ctgammaf
ctgammal
ctime
ctime_s
currency_symbol
CX_LIMITED_RANGE
d32add
d32addd128
d32addd64
d32div
d32divd128
d32divd64
d32fma
d32fmad128
d32fmad64
d32mul
d32muld128
d32muld64
d32sqrt
d32sqrtd128
d32sqrtd64
d32sub
d32subd128
d32subd64
d64add
d64addd128
d64div
d64divd128
d64fma
d64fmad128
d64mul
d64muld128
d64sqrt
d64sqrtd128
d64sub
d64subd128
dadd
daddl
ddiv
ddivl
Decimal
decimal_point
decodebind128

cexpm1f cexpm1l char char16_t char32_t char8_t CHAR_BIT CHAR_WIDTH cimag cimagf cimagl clearerr clgamma clgammaf clgammal clock CLOCKS_PER_SEC clock_t clog clog10 clog10f clog10l clog10p1 clog10p1f clog10p1l clog1p clog1pf clog1pl clog2 clog2f clog2l clog2p1 clog2p1f clog2p1l clogf clogl clogp1 clogp1f clogp1l CMPLX CMPLXF CMPLXL compl complex compoundn compoundnd128 compoundnd32 compoundnd64 compoundnf compoundnl conj conjf conjl const constexpr constraint_handler_t

:
exp10d64
exp10f
exp10l
exp10m1
exp10m1d128
exp10m1d32
exp10m1d64
exp10m1f
exp10m1l
exp2
exp2d128
exp2d32
exp2d64
exp2f
exp2l
exp2m1
exp2m1d128
exp2m1d32
exp2m1d64
exp2m1f
exp2m1l
expd128
expd32
expd64
expf
expl
expm1
expm1d128
expm1d32
expm1d64
expm1f
expm1l
extern
f32add
f32addf64
f32addf64x
f32fma
f32fmaf32x
f32mul
f32mulf128
f32mulf32x
f32xsqrt
f32xsqrtf54x
f32xsqrtf64x
f64div
f64divf128
f64divf64x
fabs
fabsd128
fabsd32
fabsd64
fabsf
fabsl
fadd
faddl
fallthrough
false
fclose
fdim
fdimd128
fdimd32
fdimd64
fdimf
fdiml
fdiv
fdivl
feclearexcept
fe_dec_getround
fe_dec_setround
fegetenv
fegetexceptflag
fegetmode
fegetround
feholdexcept
femode_t
FENV_ACCESS
FENV_DEC_ROUND
FENV_ROUND
fenv_t
feof
feraiseexcept
ferror
fesetenv
fesetexcept
fesetexceptflag
fesetmode
fesetround
fetestexcept
fetestexceptflag
feupdateenv
fexcept_t
fflush
ffma
ffmal
fgetc
fgetpos
fgets
fgetwc
fgetws
FILE
float
float_t
floor
floord128
floord32
floord64
floorf
floorl
fma
fmad128
fmad32
fmad64

decodebind32 decodebind64 decodedecd128 decodedecd32 decodedecd64 DEFAULT define defined deprecated dfma dfmal difftime div div_t dmul dmull do double double_t dsqrt dsqrtl dsub dsubl elif elifdef elifndef else embed encodebind128 encodebind32 encodebind64 encodedecd128 encodedecd32 encodedecd64 endif enum erf erfc erfcd128 erfcd32 erfcd64 erfcf erfcl erfd128 erfd32 erfd64 erff erfl errno errno_t error exit exp exp10 exp10d128 exp10d32

:
fminimum_numd128
fminimum_numd32
fminimum_numd64
fminimum_numf
fminimum_numl
fminl
fmod
fmodd128
fmodd32
fmodd64
fmodf
fmodl
fmul
fmull
fopen
fopen_s
for
fpclassify
fpos_t
fprintf
fprintf_s
fputc
fputs
fputwc
fputws
frac_digits
fread
free
free_aligned_sized
free_sized
freopen
freopen_s
frexp
frexpd128
frexpd32
frexpd64
frexpf
frexpl
fromfp
fromfpd128
fromfpd32
fromfpd64
fromfpf
fromfpl
fromfpx
fromfpxd128
fromfpxd32
fromfpxd64
fromfpxf
fromfpxl
fscanf
fscanf_s
fseek
fsetpos
fsqrt
fsqrtl
fsub
fsubl
ftell
fwide
fwprintf
fwprintf_s
fwrite
fwscanf
fwscanf_s
getc
getchar
getenv
getenv_s
getpayload
getpayloadd128
getpayloadd32
getpayloadd64
getpayloadf
getpayloadl
gets
gets_s
getwc
getwchar
gmtime
gmtime_r
gmtime_s
goto
grouping
HUGE_VAL
HUGE_VAL_D128
HUGE_VAL_D32
HUGE_VAL_D64
HUGE_VALF
HUGE_VALL
hypot
hypotd128
hypotd32
hypotd64
hypotf
hypotl
I
if
ifdef
if_empty
ifndef
ignore_handler_s
ilogb
ilogbd128
ilogbd32
ilogbd64
ilogbf
ilogbl
imaginary
imaxabs
imaxdiv
imaxdiv_t

fmaf fmal fmax fmaxd128 fmaxd32 fmaxd64 fmaxf fmaximum fmaximumd128 fmaximumd32 fmaximumd64 fmaximumf fmaximuml fmaximum_mag fmaximum_magd128 fmaximum_magd32 fmaximum_magd64 fmaximum_magf fmaximum_magl fmaximum_mag_num fmaximum_mag_numd128 fmaximum_mag_numd32 fmaximum_mag_numd64 fmaximum_mag_numf fmaximum_mag_numl fmaximum_num fmaximum_numd128 fmaximum_numd32 fmaximum_numd64 fmaximum_numf fmaximum_numl fmaxl fmin fmind128 fmind32 fmind64 fminf fminimum fminimumd128 fminimumd32 fminimumd64 fminimumf fminimuml fminimum_mag fminimum_magd128 fminimum_magd32 fminimum_magd64 fminimum_magf fminimum_magl fminimum_mag_num fminimum_mag_numd128 fminimum_mag_numd32 fminimum_mag_numd64 fminimum_mag_numf fminimum_mag_numl fminimum_num

:
llroundl
localeconv
localtime
localtime_r
localtime_s
log
log10
log10d128
log10d32
log10d64
log10f
log10l
log10p1
log10p1d128
log10p1d32
log10p1d64
log10p1f
log10p1l
log1p
log1pd128
log1pd32
log1pd64
log1pf
log1pl
log2
log2d128
log2d32
log2d64
log2f
log2l
log2p1
log2p1d128
log2p1d32
log2p1d64
log2p1f
log2p1l
logb
logbd128
logbd32
logbd64
logbf
logbl
logd128
logd32
logd64
logf
logl
logp1
logp1d128
logp1d32
logp1d64
logp1f
logp1l
long
long_double_t
longjmp
LONG_WIDTH
lrint
lrintd128
lrintd32
lrintd64
lrintf
lrintl
lround
lroundd128
lroundd32
lroundd64
lroundf
lroundl
L_tmpnam
L_tmpnam_s
main
malloc
math_errhandling
max_align_t
maybe_unused
mblen
mbrlen
mbrtoc16
mbrtoc32
mbrtoc8
mbrtowc
mbsinit
mbsrtowcs
mbsrtowcs_s
mbstate_t
mbstowcs
mbstowcs_s
mbtowc
mktime
modf
modfd128
modfd32
modfd64
modff
modfl
mon_decimal_point
mon_grouping
mon_thousands_sep
nan
nand128
nand32
nand64
nanf
nanl
n_cs_precedes
NDEBUG
nearbyint
nearbyintd128
nearbyintd32
nearbyintd64
nearbyintf

include INFINITY inline int_curr_symbol int_frac_digits int_n_cs_precedes int_n_sep_by_space int_n_sign_posn int_p_cs_precedes int_p_sep_by_space int_p_sign_posn jmp_buf kill_dependency labs lconv ldexp ldexpd128 ldexpd32 ldexpd64 ldexpf ldexpl ldiv ldiv_t lgamma lgammad128 lgammad32 lgammad64 lgammaf lgammal limit line llabs lldiv lldiv_t llogb llogbd128 llogbd32 llogbd64 llogbf llogbl LLONG_WIDTH llquantexp llquantexpd128 llquantexpd32 llquantexpd64 llrint llrintd128 llrintd32 llrintd64 llrintf llrintl llround llroundd128 llroundd32 llroundd64 llroundf

:
pownd32
pownd64
pownf
pownl
powr
powrd128
powrd32
powrd64
powrf
powrl
pragma
prefix
printf
printf_s
p_sep_by_space
p_sign_posn
ptrdiff_t
PTRDIFF_WIDTH
putc
putchar
puts
putwc
putwchar
qsort
qsort_s
quantize
quantized128
quantized32
quantized64
quantum
quantumd128
quantumd32
quantumd64
quick_exit
raise
rand
realloc
register
remainder
remainderd128
remainderd32
remainderd64
remainderf
remainderl
remove
remquo
remquof
remquol
rename
reproducible
restrict
return
rewind
rint
rintd128
rintd32
rintd64
rintf
rintl
rootn
rootnd128
rootnd32
rootnd64
rootnf
rootnl
round
roundd128
roundd32
roundd64
roundeven
roundevend128
roundevend32
roundevend64
roundevenf
roundevenl
roundf
roundl
rsize_t
rsqrt
rsqrtd128
rsqrtd32
rsqrtd64
rsqrtf
rsqrtl
samequantum
samequantumd128
samequantumd32
samequantumd64
scalbln
scalblnd128
scalblnd32
scalblnd64
scalblnf
scalblnl
scalbn
scalbnd128
scalbnd32
scalbnd64
scalbnf
scalbnl
scanf
scanf_s
SCHAR_WIDTH
SEEK_CUR
SEEK_END
SEEK_SET
setbuf
set_constraint_handler_s
setjmp
setlocale
setpayload
setpayloadd128

nearbyintl negative_sign nextafter nextafterd128 nextafterd32 nextafterd64 nextafterf nextafterl nextdown nextdownd128 nextdownd32 nextdownd64 nextdownf nextdownl nexttoward nexttowardd128 nexttowardd32 nexttowardd64 nexttowardf nexttowardl nextup nextupd128 nextupd32 nextupd64 nextupf nextupl nodiscard noreturn not not_eq n_sep_by_space n_sign_posn NULL nullptr nullptr_t OFF offsetof ON once_flag ONCE_FLAG_INIT or or_eq p_cs_precedes perror positive_sign pow powd128 powd32 powd64 powf powf32 powf32x powf64 powl pown pownd128

:
stdin
stdout
suffix
switch
swprintf
swprintf_s
swscanf
swscanf_s
system
tan
tand128
tand32
tand64
tanf
tanh
tanhd128
tanhd32
tanhd64
tanhf
tanhl
tanl
tanpi
tanpid128
tanpid32
tanpid64
tanpif
tanpil
tgamma
tgammad128
tgammad32
tgammad64
tgammaf
tgammal
thousands_sep
thread_local
time
timegm
timespec
timespec_get
timespec_getres
time_t
tm
tm_hour
tm_isdst
tm_mday
tm_min
tm_mon
tmpfile
tmpfile_s
TMP_MAX_S
tmpnam
tmpnam_s
tm_sec
tm_wday
tm_yday
tm_year
true
trunc
truncd128
truncd32
truncd64
truncf
truncl
TSS_DTOR_ITERATIONS
tv_nsec
tv_sec
typedef
typeof
typeof_unqual
UCHAR_WIDTH
ufromfp
ufromfpd128
ufromfpd32
ufromfpd64
ufromfpf
ufromfpl
ufromfpx
ufromfpxd128
ufromfpxd32
ufromfpxd64
ufromfpxf
ufromfpxl
ULLONG_WIDTH
ULONG_WIDTH
undef
ungetc
ungetwc
union
unreachable
unsequenced
unsigned
USHRT_WIDTH
va_arg
va_copy
va_end
va_list
va_start
vfprintf
vfprintf_s
vfscanf
vfscanf_s
vfwprintf
vfwprintf_s
vfwscanf
vfwscanf_s
void
volatile
vprintf
vprintf_s
vscanf
vscanf_s
vsnprintf

setpayloadd32 setpayloadd64 setpayloadf setpayloadl setpayloadsig setpayloadsigd128 setpayloadsigd32 setpayloadsigd64 setpayloadsigf setpayloadsigl setvbuf short SHRT_WIDTH sig_atomic_t signal signbit signed sin sind128 sind32 sind64 sinf sinh sinhd128 sinhd32 sinhd64 sinhf sinhl sinl sinpi sinpid128 sinpid32 sinpid64 sinpif sinpil sizeof size_t SIZE_WIDTH snprintf snprintf_s snwprintf_s sprintf sprintf_s sqrt sqrtd128 sqrtd32 sqrtd64 sqrtf sqrtl srand sscanf sscanf_s static static_assert STDC stderr

:
wchar_t
WCHAR_WIDTH
wcrtomb
wcrtomb_s
wctob
wctomb
wctomb_s
wctrans
wctrans_t
wctype
wctype_t
WEOF
while
wint_t
WINT_WIDTH
wmemchr
wmemcmp
wmemcpy
wmemcpy_s
wmemmove
wmemmove_s
wmemset
wprintf
wprintf_s
wscanf
wscanf_s
xor
xor_eq

vsnprintf_s vsnwprintf_s vsprintf vsprintf_s vsscanf vsscanf_s vswprintf vswprintf_s vswscanf vswscanf_s vwprintf vwprintf_s vwscanf vwscanf_s warning

K Bounds-checking interfaces

K.1 Background

1

Traditionally, the C Library has contained many functions that trust the programmer to provide output character arrays big enough to hold the result being produced. Not only do these functions not check that the arrays are big enough, they frequently lack the information needed to perform such checks. While it is possible to write safe, robust, and error-free code using the existing library, the library tends to promote programming styles that lead to mysterious failures if a result is too big for the provided array.

2

A common programming style is to declare character arrays large enough to handle most practical cases. However, if these arrays are not large enough to handle the resulting strings, data can be written past the end of the array overwriting other data and program structures. The program never gets any indication that a problem exists, and so never has a chance to recover or to fail gracefully.

3

Worse, this style of programming has compromised the security of computers and networks. Buffer overflows can often be exploited to run arbitrary code with the permissions of the vulnerable (defective) program.

4

If the programmer writes runtime checks to verify lengths before calling library functions, then those runtime checks frequently duplicate work done inside the library functions, which discover string lengths as a side effect of doing their job.

5

This annex provides alternative library functions that promote safer, more secure programming. The alternative functions verify that output buffers are large enough for the intended result and return a failure indicator if they are not. Data is never written past the end of an array. All string results are null terminated.

6

This annex also addresses another problem that complicates writing robust code: functions that are not reentrant because they return pointers to static objects owned by the function. Such functions can be troublesome since a previously returned result can change if the function is called again, perhaps by another thread.

K.2 Scope

1

This annex specifies a series of optional extensions that can be useful in the mitigation of security vulnerabilities in programs, and comprise new functions, macros, and types declared or defined in existing standard headers.

2

An implementation that defines __STDC_LIB_EXT1__ shall conform to the specifications in this annex.454)

3

This annex should be read as if it were merged into the parallel structure of named subclauses of Clause 7.

K.3 Library

K.3.1 Introduction

K.3.1.1 Standard headers

1

The functions, macros, and types declared or defined in this annex and its subclauses are not declared or defined by their respective headers if __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is defined as a macro which expands to the integer constant 0 at the point in the source file where the appropriate header is first included.

2

The functions, macros, and types declared or defined in this annex and its subclauses are declared and defined by their respective headers if __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is defined as a macro which expands to the integer constant 1 at the point in the source file where the appropriate header is first

included.455)

3

It is implementation-defined whether the functions, macros, and types declared or defined in this annex and its subclauses are declared or defined by their respective headers if __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is not defined as a macro at the point in the source file where the appropriate header is first included.456)

4

Within a preprocessing translation unit, __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ shall be defined identically for all inclusions of any headers from this annex. If __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is defined differently for any such inclusion, the implementation shall issue a diagnostic as if a preprocessor error directive were used.

K.3.1.2 Reserved identifiers

1

Each macro name in any of the following subclauses is reserved for use as specified if it is defined by any of its associated headers when included; unless explicitly stated otherwise (see 7.1.4).

2

All identifiers with external linkage in any of the following subclauses are reserved for use as identifiers with external linkage if any of them are used by the program. None of them are reserved if none of them are used.

3

Each identifier with file scope listed in any of the following subclauses is reserved for use as a macro name and as an identifier with file scope in the same name space if it is defined by any of its associated headers when included.

K.3.1.3 Use of errno

1

An implementation may set errno for the functions defined in this annex, but is not required to.

K.3.1.4 Runtime-constraint violations

1

Most functions in this annex include as part of their specification a list of runtime-constraints. These runtime-constraints are requirements on the program using the library.457)

2

Implementations shall verify that the runtime-constraints for a function are not violated by the program. If a runtime-constraint is violated, the implementation shall call the currently registered runtime-constraint handler (see set_constraint_handler_s in <stdlib.h>). Multiple runtimeconstraint violations in the same call to a library function result in only one call to the runtimeconstraint handler. It is unspecified which one of the multiple runtime-constraint violations cause the handler to be called.

3

If the runtime-constraints section for a function states an action to be performed when a runtimeconstraint violation occurs, the function shall perform the action before calling the runtime-constraint handler. If the runtime-constraints section lists actions that are prohibited when a runtime-constraint violation occurs, then such actions are prohibited to the function both before calling the handler and after the handler returns.

4

The runtime-constraint handler is permitted not to return. If the handler does return, the library function whose runtime-constraint was violated shall return some indication of failure as given by the returns section in the function’s specification.

K.3.2 Errors <errno.h>

1

The header <errno.h> defines a type.

2

The type is

errno_t

which is type int.458)

K.3.3 Common definitions <stddef.h>

1

The header <stddef.h> defines a type.

2

The type is

rsize_t

which is the type size_t.459)

K.3.4 Integer types <stdint.h>

1

The header <stdint.h> defines a macro.

2

The macro is

RSIZE_MAX

which expands to a value of type size_t. It can be an expression that is not constant. Functions that have parameters of type rsize_t consider it a runtime-constraint violation if the values of those parameters are greater than RSIZE_MAX.

Recommended practice

3

Extremely large object sizes are frequently a sign that an object’s size was calculated incorrectly. For example, negative numbers appear as very large positive numbers when converted to an unsigned type like size_t. Also, some implementations do not support objects as large as the maximum value that can be represented by type size_t.

4

For those reasons, it is sometimes beneficial to restrict the range of object sizes to detect programming errors. For implementations targeting machines with large address spaces, it is recommended that RSIZE_MAX be defined as the smaller of the size of the largest object supported or (SIZE_MAX >> 1), even if this limit is smaller than the size of some legitimate, but very large, objects. Implementations targeting machines with small address spaces may wish to define RSIZE_MAX as SIZE_MAX, which means that there is no object size that is considered a runtime-constraint violation.

K.3.5 Input/output <stdio.h>

1

The header <stdio.h> defines several macros and two types.

2

The macros are

L_tmpnam_s
which expands to an integer constant expression that is the size needed for an array of char large enough to hold a temporary file name string generated by the tmpnam_s function;
TMP_MAX_S

which expands to an integer constant expression that is the maximum number of unique file names that can be generated by the tmpnam_s function.

3

The types are

errno_t

which is type int; and

rsize_t

which is the type size_t.

K.3.5.1 Operations on files

K.3.5.1.1 The tmpfile_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
errno_t tmpfile_s(FILE * restrict * restrict streamptr);
Runtime-constraints
2

streamptr shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, tmpfile_s does not attempt to create a file.

Description
4

The tmpfile_s function creates a temporary binary file that is different from any other existing file and that will automatically be removed when it is closed or at program termination. If the program terminates abnormally, whether an open temporary file is removed is implementation-defined. The file is opened for update with "wb+" mode with the meaning that mode has in the fopen_s function (including the mode’s effect on exclusive access and file permissions).

5

If the file was created successfully, then the pointer to FILE pointed to by streamptr will be set to the pointer to the object controlling the opened file. Otherwise, the pointer to FILE pointed to by streamptr will be set to a null pointer.

Recommended practice It should be possible to open at least TMP_MAX_S temporary files during the lifetime of the program (this limit may be shared with tmpnam_s) and there should be no limit on the number simultaneously open other than this limit and any limit on the number of open files (FOPEN_MAX).

Returns
6

The tmpfile_s function returns zero if it created the file. If it did not create the file or there was a runtime-constraint violation, tmpfile_s returns a nonzero value.

K.3.5.1.2 The tmpnam_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
errno_t tmpnam_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize);
Runtime-constraints
2

s shall not be a null pointer. maxsize shall be less than or equal to RSIZE_MAX. maxsize shall be greater than the length of the generated file name string.

Description
3

The tmpnam_s function generates a string that is a valid file name and that is not the same as the name of an existing file.460) The function is potentially capable of generating TMP_MAX_S different strings, but any or all of them may already be in use by existing files and thus not be suitable return values. The lengths of these strings shall be less than the value of the L_tmpnam_s macro.

4

The tmpnam_s function generates a different string each time it is called.

5

It is assumed that s points to an array of at least maxsize characters. This array will be set to the generated string, as specified in the rest of this subclause.

6

The implementation shall behave as if no library function except tmpnam calls the tmpnam_s function.461)

Recommended practice

7

After a program obtains a file name using the tmpnam_s function and before the program creates a file with that name, the possibility exists that someone else may create a file with that same name. To avoid this race condition, the tmpfile_s function should be used instead of tmpnam_s when possible. One situation that requires the use of the tmpnam_s function is when the program needs to create a temporary directory rather than a temporary file.

8

Implementations should take care in choosing the patterns used for names returned by tmpnam_s. For example, making a thread ID part of the names avoids the race condition and possible conflict when multiple programs run simultaneously by the same user generate the same temporary file names.

Returns

9

If no suitable string can be generated, or if there is a runtime-constraint violation, the tmpnam_s function:

  • if s is not null and maxsize is both greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, writes a null character to s[0]
  • returns a nonzero value.
10

Otherwise, the tmpnam_s function writes the string in the array pointed to by s and returns zero.

Environmental limits

11

The value of the macro TMP_MAX_S shall be at least 25.

K.3.5.2 File access functions

K.3.5.2.1 The fopen_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
errno_t fopen_s(FILE * restrict * restrict streamptr,
const char * restrict filename, const char * restrict mode);
Runtime-constraints
2

None of streamptr, filename, or mode shall be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, fopen_s does not attempt to open a file. Furthermore, if streamptr is not a null pointer, fopen_s sets *streamptr to the null pointer.

Description
4

The fopen_s function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename, and associates a stream with it.

5

The mode string shall be as described for fopen, with the addition that modes starting with the character ’w’ or ’a’ may be preceded by the character’u’ , see the following:

uw truncate to zero length or create text file for writing, default permissions

uwx create text file for writing, default permissions

ua append; open or create text file for writing at end-of-file, default permissions

ua+b or uab+ append; open or create binary file for update, writing at end-of-file, default permissions

6

Opening a file with exclusive mode (’x’ as the last character in the mode argument) fails if the file already exists or cannot be created.

7

If the file was opened successfully, then the pointer to FILE pointed to by streamptr will be set to the pointer to the object controlling the opened file. Otherwise, the pointer to FILE pointed to by streamptr will be set to a null pointer.

Returns

8

The fopen_s function returns zero if it opened the file. If it did not open the file or if there was a runtime-constraint violation, fopen_s returns a nonzero value.

K.3.5.2.2 The freopen_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
errno_t freopen_s(FILE * restrict * restrict newstreamptr,
const char * restrict filename, const char * restrict mode,
FILE * restrict stream);
Runtime-constraints
2

None of newstreamptr, mode, and stream shall be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, freopen_s neither attempts to close any file associated with stream nor attempts to open a file. Furthermore, if newstreamptr is not a null pointer, fopen_s sets *newstreamptr to the null pointer.

Description
4

The freopen_s function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by filename and associates the stream pointed to by stream with it. The mode argument has the same meaning as in the fopen_s function (including the mode’s effect on exclusive access and file permissions).

5

If filename is a null pointer, the freopen_s function attempts to change the mode of the stream to that specified by mode, as if the name of the file currently associated with the stream had been used. It is implementation-defined which changes of mode are permitted (if any), and under what circumstances.

6

The freopen_s function first attempts to close any file that is associated with stream. Failure to close the file is ignored. The error and end-of-file indicators for the stream are cleared.

7

If the file was opened successfully, then the pointer to FILE pointed to by newstreamptr will be set to the value of stream. Otherwise, the pointer to FILE pointed to by newstreamptr will be set to a null pointer.

Returns

8

The freopen_s function returns zero if it opened the file. If it did not open the file or there was a runtime-constraint violation, freopen_s returns a nonzero value.

K.3.5.3 Formatted input/output functions

K.3.5.3.1 General
1

Unless explicitly stated otherwise, if the execution of a function described in this subclause causes copying to take place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified values.

K.3.5.3.2 The fprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
int fprintf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. The %n specifier462) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to fprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the463) fprintf_s function does not attempt to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent fprintf_s produced output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The fprintf_s function is equivalent to the fprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

Returns
5

The fprintf_s function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.

K.3.5.3.3 The fscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
int fscanf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the464) fscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent fscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The fscanf_s function is equivalent to fscanf except that the c, s, and [ conversion specifiers apply to a pair of arguments (unless assignment suppression is indicated by a *). The first of these arguments is the same as for fscanf. That argument is immediately followed in the argument list by the second argument, which has type rsize_t and gives the number of elements in the array

pointed to by the first argument of the pair. If the first argument points to a scalar object, it is considered to be an array of one element.465)

5

A matching failure occurs if the number of elements in a receiving object is insufficient to hold the converted input (including any trailing null character).

Returns

6

The fscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the fscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

7

EXAMPLE 1 The call:

#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
int n, i; float x; char name[50];
n = fscanf_s(stdin, "%d%f%s", &i, &x, name, (rsize_t) 50);
with the input line:
25 54.32E-1 thompson

will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and to name the sequence thompson\0.

8

EXAMPLE 2 The call:

#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
/* ... */
int n; char s[5];
n = fscanf_s(stdin, "%s", s, sizeof s);
with the input line:
hello

will assign to n the value 0 since a matching failure occurred because the sequence hello\0 requires an array of six characters to store it.

K.3.5.3.4 The printf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
int printf_s(const char * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

format shall not be a null pointer. The %n specifier466) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to printf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the printf_s function does not attempt to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent printf_s produced output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description

4

The printf_s function is equivalent to the printf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

Returns

5

The printf_s function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.

K.3.5.3.5 The scanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
int scanf_s(const char * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

format shall not be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the scanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent scanf_s performed input before discovering the runtimeconstraint violation.

Description
4

The scanf_s function is equivalent to fscanf_s with the argument stdin interposed before the arguments to scanf_s.

Returns
5

The scanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the scanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.5.3.6 The snprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
int snprintf_s(char * restrict s, rsize_t n, const char * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX. The %n specifier467) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to snprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then the snprintf_s function sets s[0] to the null character.

Description
4

The snprintf_s function is equivalent to the snprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

5

The snprintf_s function, unlike sprintf_s, will truncate the result to fit within the array pointed to by s.

Returns

6

The snprintf_s function returns the number of characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if a runtimeconstraint violation occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is both nonnegative and less than n.

K.3.5.3.7 The sprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
int sprintf_s(char * restrict s, rsize_t n, const char * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX. The number of characters (including the trailing null) required for the result to be written to the array pointed to by s shall not be greater than n. The %n specifier468) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to sprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then the sprintf_s function sets s[0] to the null character.

Description
4

The sprintf_s function is equivalent to the sprintf function except for the parameter n and the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

5

The sprintf_s function, unlike snprintf_s, treats a result too big for the array pointed to by s as a runtime-constraint violation.

Returns
6

If no runtime-constraint violation occurred, the sprintf_s function returns the number of characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null character. If an encoding error occurred, sprintf_s returns a negative value. If any other runtime-constraint violation occurred, sprintf_s returns zero.

K.3.5.3.8 The sscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
int sscanf_s(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the sscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent sscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtimeconstraint violation.

Description
4

The sscanf_s function is equivalent to fscanf_s, except that input is obtained from a string (specified by the argument s) rather than from a stream. Reaching the end of the string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fscanf_s function. If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified values.

Returns
5

The sscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the sscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.5.3.9 The vfprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vfprintf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, va_list arg)
;
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. The %n specifier469) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to vfprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vfprintf_s function does not attempt to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent vfprintf_s produced output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The vfprintf_s function is equivalent to the vfprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

Returns
5

The vfprintf_s function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.

K.3.5.3.10 The vfscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vfscanf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vfscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vfscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The vfscanf_s function is equivalent to fscanf_s, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg invocations). The vfscanf_s function does not invoke the va_end macro.470)

Returns
5

The vfscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the vfscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.5.3.11 The vprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vprintf_s(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

format shall not be a null pointer. The %n specifier471) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to vprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vprintf_s function does not attempt to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent vprintf_s produced output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The vprintf_s function is equivalent to the vprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

Returns
5

The vprintf_s function returns the number of characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.

K.3.5.3.12 The vscanf_s function

Synopsis

1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vscanf_s(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);

Runtime-constraints

2

format shall not be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtimeconstraint violation.

Description

4

The vscanf_s function is equivalent to scanf_s, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg invocations). The vscanf_s function does not invoke the va_end macro.472)

Returns

5

The vscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the vscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.5.3.13 The vsnprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vsnprintf_s(char * restrict s, rsize_t n, const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX. The %n specifier473) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to vsnprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then the vsnprintf_s function sets s[0] to the null character.

Description
4

The vsnprintf_s function is equivalent to the vsnprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

5

The vsnprintf_s function, unlike vsprintf_s, will truncate the result to fit within the array pointed to by s.

Returns
6

The vsnprintf_s function returns the number of characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if a runtimeconstraint violation occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and

only if the returned value is both nonnegative and less than n.

K.3.5.3.14 The vsprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vsprintf_s(char * restrict s, rsize_t n, const char * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX. The number of characters (including the trailing null) required for the result to be written to the array pointed to by s shall not be greater than n. The %n specifier474) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the string pointed to by format. Any argument to vsprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then the vsprintf_s function sets s[0] to the null character.

Description
4

The vsprintf_s function is equivalent to the vsprintf function except for the parameter n and the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

5

The vsprintf_s function, unlike vsnprintf_s, treats a result too big for the array pointed to by s as a runtime-constraint violation.

Returns
6

If no runtime-constraint violation occurred, the vsprintf_s function returns the number of characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null character. If an encoding error occurred, vsprintf_s returns a negative value. If any other runtime-constraint violation occurred, vsprintf_s returns zero.

K.3.5.3.15 The vsscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
int vsscanf_s(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, va_list arg)
;
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vsscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vsscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The vsscanf_s function is equivalent to sscanf_s, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg calls). The vsscanf_s function does not invoke the va_end macro.475)

Returns

5

The vsscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the vscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.5.4 Character input/output functions

K.3.5.4.1 The gets_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
char *gets_s(char *s, rsize_t n);
Runtime-constraints
2

s shall not be a null pointer. n shall neither be equal to zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX. A newline character, end-of-file, or read error shall occur within reading n-1 characters from stdin.476)

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, characters are read and discarded from stdin until a new-line character is read, or end-of-file or a read error occurs, and if s is not a null pointer, s[0] is set to the null character.

Description
4

The gets_s function reads at most one less than the number of characters specified by n from the stream pointed to by stdin, into the array pointed to by s. No additional characters are read after a new-line character (which is discarded) or after end-of-file. The discarded new-line character does not count towards number of characters read. A null character is written immediately after the last character read into the array.

5

If end-of-file is encountered and no characters have been read into the array, or if a read error occurs during the operation, then s[0] is set to the null character, and the other elements of s take unspecified values.

Recommended practice
6

The fgets function allows properly-written programs to safely process input lines too long to store in the result array. In general this requires that callers of fgets pay attention to the presence or absence of a new-line character in the result array. It is recommended to use fgets (along with any needed processing based on new-line characters) instead of gets_s.

Returns
7

The gets_s function returns s if successful. If there was a runtime-constraint violation, or if end-offile is encountered and no characters have been read into the array, or if a read error occurs during the operation, then a null pointer is returned.

K.3.6 General utilities <stdlib.h>

1

The header <stdlib.h> defines three types.

2

The types are

errno_t
which is type int; and
rsize_t
which is the type size_t; and
constraint_handler_t
which has the following definition
typedef void (*constraint_handler_t)(
      const char * restrict msg,
      void * restrict ptr,
      errno_t error);

K.3.6.1 Runtime-constraint handling

K.3.6.1.1 The set_constraint_handler_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdlib.h>
constraint_handler_t set_constraint_handler_s(constraint_handler_t handler);
Description
2

The set_constraint_handler_s function sets the runtime-constraint handler to be handler. The runtime-constraint handler is the function to be called when a library function detects a runtimeconstraint violation. Only the most recent handler registered with set_constraint_handler_s is called when a runtime-constraint violation occurs.

3

When the handler is called, it is passed the following arguments in the following order:

  1. A pointer to a character string describing the runtime-constraint violation.
  2. A null pointer or a pointer to an implementation-defined object.
  3. If the function calling the handler has a return type declared as errno_t, the return value of the function is passed. Otherwise, a positive value of type errno_t is passed.
4

The implementation has a default constraint handler that is used if no calls to the set_constraint_handler_s function have been made. The behavior of the default handler is implementation-defined, and it may cause the program to exit or abort.

5

If the handler argument to set_constraint_handler_s is a null pointer, the implementation default handler becomes the current constraint handler.

Returns
6

The set_constraint_handler_s function returns a pointer to the previously registered handler.477)

K.3.6.1.2 The abort_handler_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdlib.h>
void abort_handler_s(const char * restrict msg, void * restrict ptr,
errno_t error);
Description
2

A pointer to the abort_handler_s function shall be a suitable argument to the set_constraint_handler_s function.

3

The abort_handler_s function writes a message on the standard error stream in an implementationdefined format. The message shall include the string pointed to by msg. The abort_handler_s function then calls the abort function.478)

Returns
4

The abort_handler_s function does not return to its caller.

K.3.6.1.3 The ignore_handler_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdlib.h>
void ignore_handler_s(const char * restrict msg, void * restrict ptr,
errno_t error);
Description
2

A pointer to the ignore_handler_s function shall be a suitable argument to the set_constraint_handler_s function.

3

The ignore_handler_s function simply returns to its caller.479)

Returns
4

The ignore_handler_s function returns no value.

K.3.6.2 Communication with the environment

K.3.6.2.1 The getenv_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdlib.h>
errno_t getenv_s(size_t * restrict len, char * restrict value, rsize_t maxsize,
const char * restrict name);
Runtime-constraints
2

name shall not be a null pointer. maxsize shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If maxsize is not equal to zero, then value shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the integer pointed to by len is set to 0 (if len is not null), and the environment list is not searched.

Description

4

The getenv_s function searches an environment list, provided by the host environment, for a string that matches the string pointed to by name.

5

If that name is found then getenv_s performs the following actions. If len is not a null pointer, the length of the string associated with the matched list member is stored in the integer pointed to by len. If the length of the associated string is less than maxsize, then the associated string is copied to the array pointed to by value.

6

If that name is not found then getenv_s performs the following actions. If len is not a null pointer, zero is stored in the integer pointed to by len. If maxsize is greater than zero, then value[0] is set to the null character.

7

The set of environment names and the method for altering the environment list are implementationdefined. The getenv_s function is not required to avoid data races with other threads of execution that modify the environment list.480)

Returns

8

The getenv_s function returns zero if the specified name is found and the associated string was successfully stored in value. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.6.3 Searching and sorting utilities

K.3.6.3.1 General
1

These utilities make use of a comparison function to search or sort arrays of unspecified type. Where an argument declared as size_t nmemb specifies the length of the array for a function, if nmemb has the value zero on a call to that function, then the comparison function is not called, a search finds no matching element, sorting performs no rearrangement, and the pointer to the array may be null.

2

The implementation shall ensure that the second argument of the comparison function (when called from bsearch_s), or both arguments (when called from qsort_s), are pointers to elements of the array.481) The first argument when called from bsearch_s shall equal key.

3

The comparison function shall not alter the contents of either the array or search key. The implementation may reorder elements of the array between calls to the comparison function, but shall not otherwise alter the contents of any individual element.

4

When the same objects (consisting of size bytes, irrespective of their current positions in the array) are passed more than once to the comparison function, the results shall be consistent with one another. That is, for qsort_s they shall define a total ordering on the array, and for bsearch_s the same object shall always compare the same way with the key.

5

A sequence point occurs immediately before and immediately after each call to the comparison function, and also between any call to the comparison function and any movement of the objects passed as arguments to that call.

K.3.6.3.2 The bsearch_s generic function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdlib.h>
QVoid *bsearch_s(const void *key, QVoid *base, rsize_t nmemb, rsize_t size,
int (*compar)(const void *k, const void *y, void *context),
void *context);

Runtime-constraints

2

Neither nmemb nor size shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If nmemb is not equal to zero, then none of key, base, or compar shall be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the bsearch_s generic function does not search the array.

Description

4

The bsearch_s generic function searches an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which is pointed to by base, for an element that matches the object pointed to by key. The size of each element of the array is specified by size.

5

The comparison function pointed to by compar is called with three arguments. The first two point to the key object and to an array element, in that order. The function shall return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if the key object is considered, respectively, to be less than, to match, or to be greater than the array element. The array shall consist of: all the elements that compare less than, all the elements that compare equal to, and all the elements that compare greater than the key object, in that order.482) The third argument to the comparison function is the context argument passed to bsearch_s. The sole use of context by bsearch_s is to pass it to the comparison function.483)

Returns

6

The bsearch_s generic function returns a pointer to a matching element of the array, or a null pointer if no match is found or there is a runtime-constraint violation. If two elements compare as equal, which element is matched is unspecified.

7

The bsearch_s generic function is generic in the qualification of the type pointed to by the argument base. If this argument is a pointer to a const-qualified object type, the returned pointer will be a pointer to const-qualified void. Otherwise, the argument shall be a pointer to an unqualified object type or a null pointer constant,484) and the returned pointer will be a pointer to unqualified void

8

The external declaration of bsearch_s has the concrete type:

void * (const void *, const void *, rsize_t, rsize_t,
      int (*) (const void *, const void *), void *)

which supports all correct uses. If a macro definition of the generic function is suppressed to access an actual function, the external declaration with this concrete type is visible.485)

K.3.6.3.3 The qsort_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdlib.h>
errno_t qsort_s(void *base, rsize_t nmemb, rsize_t size,
int (*compar)(const void *x, const void *y, void *context),
void *context);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither nmemb nor size shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If nmemb is not equal to zero, then neither base nor compar shall be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the qsort_s function does not sort the array.

Description

4

The qsort_s function sorts an array of nmemb objects, the initial element of which is pointed to by base. The size of each object is specified by size.

5

The contents of the array are sorted into ascending order according to a comparison function pointed to by compar, which is called with three arguments. The first two point to the objects being compared. The function shall return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if the first argument is considered to be respectively less than, equal to, or greater than the second. The third argument to the comparison function is the context argument passed to qsort_s. The sole use of context by qsort_s is to pass it to the comparison function.486)

6

If two elements compare as equal, their relative order in the resulting sorted array is unspecified.

Returns

7

The qsort_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.6.4 Multibyte/wide character conversion functions

1

The behavior of the multibyte character functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale. For a state-dependent encoding, each function is placed into its initial conversion state by a call for which its character pointer argument, s, is a null pointer. Subsequent calls with s as other than a null pointer cause the internal conversion state of the function to be altered as necessary. A call with s as a null pointer causes these functions to set the int pointed to by their status argument to a nonzero value if encodings have state dependency, and zero otherwise.487)

Changing the LC_CTYPE category causes the internal object describing the conversion state of these functions to have an indeterminate representation.

K.3.6.4.1 The wctomb_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdlib.h>
errno_t wctomb_s(int * restrict status, char * restrict s, rsize_t smax,
wchar_t wc);
Runtime-constraints
2

Let n denote the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte character corresponding to the wide character given by wc (including any shift sequences).

3

If s is not a null pointer, then smax shall not be less than n, and smax shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If s is a null pointer, then smax shall equal zero.

4

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, wctomb_s does not modify the int pointed to by status, and if s is not a null pointer, no more than smax elements in the array pointed to by s will be accessed.

Description
5

The wctomb_s function determines n and stores the multibyte character representation of wc in the array whose first element is pointed to by s (if s is not a null pointer). The number of characters stored never exceeds MB_CUR_MAX or smax. If wc is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state, and the function is left in the initial conversion state.

6

The implementation shall behave as if no library function calls the wctomb_s function.

7

If s is a null pointer, the wctomb_s function stores into the int pointed to by status a nonzero

or zero value, if multibyte character encodings, respectively, do or do not have state-dependent encodings.

8

If s is not a null pointer, the wctomb_s function stores into the int pointed to by status either n or 1 if wc, respectively, does or does not correspond to a valid multibyte character.

9

In no case will the int pointed to by status be set to a value greater than the MB_CUR_MAX macro.

Returns

10

The wctomb_s function returns zero if successful, and a nonzero value if there was a runtimeconstraint violation or wc did not correspond to a valid multibyte character.

K.3.6.5 Multibyte/wide string conversion functions

1

The behavior of the multibyte string functions is affected by the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.

K.3.6.5.1 The mbstowcs_s function
1
#include <stdlib.h>
errno_t mbstowcs_s(size_t * restrict retval, wchar_t * restrict dst,
rsize_t dstmax, const char * restrict src, rsize_t len);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither retval nor src shall be a null pointer. If dst is not a null pointer, then neither len nor dstmax shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t). If dst is a null pointer, then dstmax shall equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer, then dstmax shall not equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer and len is not less than dstmax, then a null character shall occur within the first dstmax multibyte characters of the array pointed to by src.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then mbstowcs_s does the following. If retval is not a null pointer, then mbstowcs_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1). If dst is not a null pointer and dstmax is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then mbstowcs_s sets dst[0] to the null wide character.

Description
4

The mbstowcs_s function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the initial shift state from the array pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding wide characters. If dst is not a null pointer, the converted characters are stored into the array pointed to by dst. Conversion continues up to and including a terminating null character, which is also stored. Conversion stops earlier in two cases: when a sequence of bytes is encountered that does not form a valid multibyte character, or (if dst is not a null pointer) when len wide characters have been stored into the array pointed to by dst.488) If dst is not a null pointer and no null wide character was stored into the array pointed to by dst, then dst[len] is set to the null wide character. Each conversion takes place as if by a call to the mbrtowc function.

5

Regardless of whether dst is or is not a null pointer, if the input conversion encounters a sequence of bytes that do not form a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the mbstowcs_s function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval. Otherwise, the mbstowcs_s function stores into

*retval the number of multibyte characters successfully converted, not including the terminating null character (if any).

6

All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by mbstowcs_s in the array of dstmax wide characters pointed to by dst take unspecified values when mbstowcs_s returns.489)

7

If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified values.

Returns

8

The mbstowcs_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.6.5.2 The wcstombs_s function
1
#include <stdlib.h>
errno_t wcstombs_s(size_t * restrict retval, char * restrict dst, rsize_t dstmax,
const wchar_t * restrict src, rsize_t len);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither retval nor src shall be a null pointer. If dst is not a null pointer, then len shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t) and dstmax shall be nonzero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX. If dst is a null pointer, then dstmax shall equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer and len is not less than dstmax, then the conversion shall have been stopped (see the following) because a terminating null wide character was reached or because an encoding error occurred.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then wcstombs_s does the following. If retval is not a null pointer, then wcstombs_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1). If dst is not a null pointer and dstmax is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then wcstombs_s sets dst[0] to the null character.

Description
4

The wcstombs_s function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that begins in the initial shift state. If dst is not a null pointer, the converted characters are then stored into the array pointed to by dst. Conversion continues up to and including a terminating null wide character, which is also stored. Conversion stops earlier in two cases:

  • when a wide character is reached that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character;
  • (if dst is not a null pointer) when the next multibyte character would exceed the limit of n total bytes to be stored into the array pointed to by dst. If the wide character being converted is the null wide character, then n is the lesser of len or dstmax. Otherwise, n is the lesser of len or dstmax-1.

If the conversion stops without converting a null wide character and dst is not a null pointer, then a null character is stored into the array pointed to by dst immediately following any multibyte characters already stored. Each conversion takes place as if by a call to the wcrtomb function.490)

5

Regardless of whether dst is or is not a null pointer, if the input conversion encounters a wide character that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the wcstombs_s function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval. Otherwise, the wcstombs_s function stores into *retval the number of bytes in the resulting multibyte character sequence, not including the terminating null character (if any).

6

All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by wcstombs_s in the array of dstmax elements pointed to by dst take unspecified values when wcstombs_s returns.491)

7

If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified values.

Returns

8

The wcstombs_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.7 String handling <string.h>

K.3.7.1 General

1

The header <string.h> defines two types.

2

The types are

errno_t
which is type int; and
rsize_t

which is the type size_t.

K.3.7.2 Copying functions

K.3.7.2.1 The memcpy_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
errno_t memcpy_s(void * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const void * restrict s2,
rsize_t n);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. n shall not be greater than s1max. Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the memcpy_s function stores zeros in the first s1max characters of the object pointed to by s1 if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is not greater than RSIZE_MAX.

Description
4

The memcpy_s function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1.

Returns
5

The memcpy_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.7.2.2 The memmove_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
errno_t memmove_s(void *s1, rsize_t s1max, const void *s2, rsize_t n);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. n shall not be greater than s1max.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the memmove_s function stores zeros in the first s1max characters of the object pointed to by s1 if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is not greater than RSIZE_MAX.

Description

4

The memmove_s function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1. This copying takes place as if the n characters from the object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n characters that does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 or s2, and then the n characters from the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.

Returns

5

The memmove_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.7.2.3 The strcpy_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
errno_t strcpy_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const char * restrict s2);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. s1max shall not equal zero. s1max shall be greater than strnlen_s(s2, s1max). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then strcpy_s sets s1[0] to the null character.

Description
4

The strcpy_s function copies the string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null character) into the array pointed to by s1.

5

All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by strcpy_s in the array of s1max characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when strcpy_s returns.492)

Returns
6

The strcpy_s function returns zero493) if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.7.2.4 The strncpy_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
errno_t strncpy_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const char * restrict s2,
rsize_t n);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. s1max shall not equal zero. If n is not less than s1max, then s1max shall be greater than strnlen_s( s2, s1max). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then strncpy_s sets s1[0] to the null character.

Description

4

The strncpy_s function copies not more than n successive characters (characters that follow a null character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by s1. If no null character was copied from s2, then s1[n] is set to a null character.

5

All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by strncpy_s in the array of s1max characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when strncpy_s returns a nonzero value.494)

Returns

6

The strncpy_s function returns zero495) if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

7

EXAMPLE The strncpy_s function can be used to copy a string without the danger that the result will not be null terminated or that characters will be written past the end of the destination array.

#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
/* ... */
char src1[100] = "hello";
char src2[7] = {’g’, ’o’, ’o’, ’d’, ’b’, ’y’, ’e’};
char dst1[6], dst2[5], dst3[5];
int r1, r2, r3;
r1 = strncpy_s(dst1, 6, src1, 100);
r2 = strncpy_s(dst2, 5, src2, 7);
r3 = strncpy_s(dst3, 5, src2, 4);

The first call will assign to r1 the value zero and to dst1 the sequence hello\0.

The second call will assign to r2 a nonzero value and to dst2 the sequence \0.

The third call will assign to r3 the value zero and to dst3 the sequence good\0.

K.3.7.3 Concatenation functions

K.3.7.3.1 The strcat_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
errno_t strcat_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const char * restrict s2);
Runtime-constraints
2

Let m denote the value s1max - strnlen_s(s1, s1max) upon entry to strcat_s.

3

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. s1max shall not equal zero. m shall not equal zero.496) m shall be greater than strnlen_s(s2,m). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

4

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then strcat_s sets s1[0] to the null character.

Description
5

The strcat_s function appends a copy of the string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null character) to the end of the string pointed to by s1. The initial character from s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1.

6

All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by strcat_s in the array of s1max characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when strcat_s returns.497)

Returns

7

The strcat_s function returns zero498) if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.7.3.2 The strncat_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
errno_t strncat_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max, const char * restrict s2,
rsize_t n);
Runtime-constraints
2

Let m denote the value s1max - strnlen_s(s1, s1max) upon entry to strncat_s.

3

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. s1max shall not equal zero. m shall not equal zero.499) If n is not less than m, then m shall be greater than strnlen_s(s2,m). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

4

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then strncat_s sets s1[0] to the null character.

Description
5

The strncat_s function appends not more than n successive characters (characters that follow a null character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of the string pointed to by s1. The initial character from s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1. If no null character was copied from s2, then s1[s1max- m +n] is set to a null character.

6

All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by strncat_s in the array of s1max characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when strncat_s returns.500)

Returns
7

The strncat_s function returns zero501) if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

8

EXAMPLE The strncat_s function can be used to copy a string without the danger that the result will not be null terminated or that characters will be written past the end of the destination array.

#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
/* ... */
char s1[100] = "good";
char s2[6] = "hello";
char s3[6] = "hello";
char s4[7] = "abc";
char s5[1000] = "bye";
int r1, r2, r3, r4;
r1 = strncat_s(s1, 100, s5, 1000);
r2 = strncat_s(s2, 6, "", 1);
r3 = strncat_s(s3, 6, "X", 2);
r4 = strncat_s(s4, 7, "defghijklmn", 3);

After the fourth call r4 will have the value zero and s4 will contain the sequence abcdef\0.

K.3.7.4 Search functions

K.3.7.4.1 The strtok_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
char *strtok_s(char * restrict s1, rsize_t * restrict s1max,
const char * restrict s2, char ** restrict ptr);
Runtime-constraints
2

None of s1max, s2, or ptr shall be a null pointer. If s1 is a null pointer, then *ptr shall not be a null pointer. The value of *s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. The end of the token found shall occur within the first *s1max characters of s1 for the first call, and shall occur within the first

*s1max characters of where searching resumes on subsequent calls.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the strtok_s function does not indirect through the s1 or s2 pointers, and does not store a value in the object pointed to by ptr.

Description
4

A sequence of calls to the strtok_s function breaks the string pointed to by s1 into a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a character from the string pointed to by s2. The fourth argument points to a caller-provided char pointer into which the strtok_s function stores information necessary for it to continue scanning the same string.

5

The first call in a sequence has a non-null first argument and s1max points to an object whose value is the number of elements in the character array pointed to by the first argument. The first call stores an initial value in the object pointed to by ptr and updates the value pointed to by s1max to reflect the number of elements that remain in relation to ptr. Subsequent calls in the sequence have a null first argument and the objects pointed to by s1max and ptr are required to have the values stored by the previous call in the sequence, which are then updated. The separator string pointed to by s2 may be different from call to call.

6

The first call in the sequence searches the string pointed to by s1 for the first character that is not contained in the current separator string pointed to by s2. If no such character is found, then there are no tokens in the string pointed to by s1 and the strtok_s function returns a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is the start of the first token.

7

The strtok_s function then searches from there for the first character in s1 that is contained in the current separator string. If no such character is found, the current token extends to the end of the string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches in the same string for a token return a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is overwritten by a null character, which terminates the current token.

8

In all cases, the strtok_s function stores sufficient information in the pointer pointed to by ptr so that subsequent calls, with a null pointer for s1 and the unmodified pointer value for ptr, shall start searching just past the element overwritten by a null character (if any).

Returns
9

The strtok_s function returns a pointer to the first character of a token, or a null pointer if there is no token or there is a runtime-constraint violation.

10

EXAMPLE

#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
static char str1[] = "?a???b,,,#c";
static char str2[] = "\t \t";
char *t, *ptr1, *ptr2;
rsize_t max1 = sizeof(str1);
rsize_t max2 = sizeof(str2);
t = strtok_s(str1, &max1, "?", &ptr1);     // t points to the token "a"
t = strtok_s(nullptr, &max1, ",", &ptr1);  // t points to the token "??b"
t = strtok_s(str2, &max2, " \t", &ptr2);   // t is a null pointer
t = strtok_s(nullptr, &max1, "#,", &ptr1); // t points to the token "c"
t = strtok_s(nullptr, &max1, "?", &ptr1);  // t is a null pointer

K.3.7.5 Miscellaneous functions

K.3.7.5.1 The memset_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
errno_t memset_s(void *s, rsize_t smax, int c, rsize_t n)
Runtime-constraints
2

s shall not be a null pointer. Neither smax nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. n shall not be greater than smax.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and smax is not greater than RSIZE_MAX, the memset_s function stores the value of c (converted to an unsigned char) into each of the first smax characters of the object pointed to by s.

Description
4

The memset_s function copies the value of c (converted to an unsigned char) into each of the first n characters of the object pointed to by s. Unlike memset, any call to the memset_s function shall be evaluated strictly according to the rules of the abstract machine as described in 5.1.2.4. That is, any call to the memset_s function shall assume that the memory indicated by s and n may be accessible in the future and thus contains the values indicated by c.

Returns
5

The memset_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.7.5.2 The strerror_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
errno_t strerror_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize, errno_t errnum);
Runtime-constraints
2

s shall not be a null pointer. maxsize shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. maxsize shall not equal zero.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then the array (if any) pointed to by s is not modified.

Description
4

The strerror_s function maps the number in errnum to a locale-specific message string. Typically, the values for errnum come from errno, but strerror_s shall map any value of type int to a

message.

5

If the length of the desired string is less than maxsize, then the string is copied to the array pointed to by s.

6

Otherwise, if maxsize is greater than zero, then maxsize-1 characters are copied from the string to the array pointed to by s and then s[maxsize-1] is set to the null character. Then, if maxsize is greater than 3, then s[maxsize-2], s[maxsize-3], and s[maxsize-4] are set to the character period (.).

Returns

7

The strerror_s function returns zero if the length of the desired string was less than maxsize and there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the strerror_s function returns a nonzero value.

K.3.7.5.3 The strerrorlen_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
size_t strerrorlen_s(errno_t errnum);
Description
2

The strerrorlen_s function calculates the length of the (untruncated) locale-specific message string that the strerror_s function maps to errnum.

Returns
3

The strerrorlen_s function returns the number of characters (not including the null character) in the full message string.

K.3.7.5.4 The strnlen_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <string.h>
size_t strnlen_s(const char *s, size_t maxsize);
Description
2

The strnlen_s function computes the length of the string pointed to by s.

Returns
3

If s is a null pointer,502) then the strnlen_s function returns zero.

4

Otherwise, the strnlen_s function returns the number of characters that precede the terminating null character. If there is no null character in the first maxsize characters of s then strnlen_s returns maxsize. At most the first maxsize characters of s shall be accessed by strnlen_s.

K.3.8 Date and time <time.h>

K.3.8.1 General

1

The header <time.h> defines two types.

2

The types are

errno_t

which is type int; and

rsize_t

which is the type size_t.

K.3.8.2 Components of time

1

A broken-down time is normalized if the values of the members of the tm structure are in their normal ranges.503)

K.3.8.3 Time conversion functions

K.3.8.3.1 General
1

Like the strftime function, the asctime_s and ctime_s functions do not return a pointer to a static object, and other library functions are permitted to call them.

K.3.8.3.2 The asctime_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <time.h>
errno_t asctime_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize, const struct tm *timeptr);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor timeptr shall be a null pointer. maxsize shall not be less than 26 and shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. The broken-down time pointed to by timeptr shall be normalized. The calendar year represented by the broken-down time pointed to by timeptr shall not be less than calendar year 0 and shall not be greater than calendar year 9999.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, there is no attempt to convert the time, and s[0] is set to a null character if s is not a null pointer and maxsize is not zero and is not greater than RSIZE_MAX.

Description
4

The asctime_s function converts the normalized broken-down time in the structure pointed to by timeptr into a 26 character (including the null character) string in the form

Sun Sep 16 01:03:52 1973\n\0

The fields making up this string are (in order):

  1. The name of the day of the week represented by timeptr->tm_wday using the following three character weekday names: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, and Sat.
  2. The character space.
  3. The name of the month represented by timeptr->tm_mon using the following three character month names: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, and Dec.
  4. The character space.
  5. The value of timeptr->tm_mday as if printed using the fprintf format "%2d".
  6. The character space.
  7. The value of timeptr->tm_hour as if printed using the fprintf format "%.2d".
  8. The character colon.
  9. The value of timeptr->tm_min as if printed using the fprintf format "%.2d".
  10. The character colon.
  11. The value of timeptr->tm_sec as if printed using the fprintf format "%.2d".
  12. The character space.
  13. The value of timeptr->tm_year + 1900 as if printed using the fprintf format "%4d".
  14. The character new line.
  15. The null character.

Recommended practice The strftime function allows more flexible formatting and supports locale-specific behavior. If you do not require the exact form of the result string produced by the asctime_s function, consider using the strftime function instead.

Returns

5

The asctime_s function returns zero if the time was successfully converted and stored into the array pointed to by s. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

K.3.8.3.3 The ctime_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <time.h>
errno_t ctime_s(char *s, rsize_t maxsize, const time_t *timer);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor timer shall be a null pointer. maxsize shall not be less than 26 and shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, s[0] is set to a null character if s is not a null pointer and maxsize is not equal zero and is not greater than RSIZE_MAX.

Description
4

The ctime_s function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer to local time in the form of a string. It is equivalent to

asctime_s(s, maxsize, localtime_s(timer, &(struct tm){ 0 }))

Recommended practice The strftime function allows more flexible formatting and supports locale-specific behavior. If you do not require the exact form of the result string produced by the ctime_s function, consider using the strftime function instead.

Returns
5

The ctime_s function returns zero if the time was successfully converted and stored into the array pointed to by s. Otherwise, it returns a nonzero value.

K.3.8.3.4 The gmtime_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <time.h>
struct tm *gmtime_s(const time_t * restrict timer, struct tm * restrict result);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither timer nor result shall be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, there is no attempt to convert the time.

Description

4

The gmtime_s function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a broken-down time, expressed as UTC. The broken-down time is stored in the structure pointed to by result.

Returns

5

The gmtime_s function returns result, or a null pointer if the specified time cannot be converted to UTC or there is a runtime-constraint violation.

K.3.8.3.5 The localtime_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <time.h>
struct tm *localtime_s(const time_t * restrict timer, struct tm * restrict result
);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither timer nor result shall be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, there is no attempt to convert the time.

Description
4

The localtime_s function converts the calendar time pointed to by timer into a broken-down time, expressed as local time. The broken-down time is stored in the structure pointed to by result.

Returns
5

The localtime_s function returns result, or a null pointer if the specified time cannot be converted to local time or there is a runtime-constraint violation.

K.3.9 Extended multibyte and wide character utilities <wchar.h>

K.3.9.1 General

1

The header <wchar.h> defines two types.

2

The types are

errno_t
which is type int; and
rsize_t

which is the type size_t.

3

Unless explicitly stated otherwise, if the execution of a function described in this subclause causes copying to take place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified values.

K.3.9.2 Formatted wide character input/output functions

K.3.9.2.1 The fwprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
int fwprintf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

Runtime-constraints

2

Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. The %n specifier504) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to fwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the fwprintf_s function does not attempt to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent fwprintf_s produced output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description

4

The fwprintf_s function is equivalent to the fwprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

Returns

5

The fwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.

K.3.9.2.2 The fwscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int fwscanf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the fwscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent fwscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The fwscanf_s function is equivalent to fwscanf except that the c, s, and [ conversion specifiers apply to a pair of arguments (unless assignment suppression is indicated by a *). The first of these arguments is the same as for fwscanf. That argument is immediately followed in the argument list by the second argument, which has type size_t and gives the number of elements in the array pointed to by the first argument of the pair. If the first argument points to a scalar object, it is considered to be an array of one element.505)

5

A matching failure occurs if the number of elements in a receiving object is insufficient to hold the converted input (including any trailing null character).

Returns
6

The fwscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the fwscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.9.2.3 The snwprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
int snwprintf_s(wchar_t * restrict s, rsize_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX /sizeof(wchar_t). The %n specifier506) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to snwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then the snwprintf_s function sets s[0] to the null wide character.

Description
4

The snwprintf_s function is equivalent to the swprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

5

The snwprintf_s function, unlike swprintf_s, will truncate the result to fit within the array pointed to by s.

Returns
6

The snwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating wide null character, or a negative value if a runtime-constraint violation occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is both nonnegative and less than n.

K.3.9.2.4 The swprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
int swprintf_s(wchar_t * restrict s, rsize_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX /sizeof(wchar_t). The number of wide characters (including the trailing null) required for the result to be written to the array pointed to by s shall not be greater than n. The %n specifier507)

(modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to swprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then the swprintf_s function sets s[0] to the null wide character.

Description

4

The swprintf_s function is equivalent to the swprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

5

The swprintf_s function, unlike snwprintf_s, treats a result too big for the array pointed to by s as a runtime-constraint violation.

Returns

6

If no runtime-constraint violation occurred, the swprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null wide character. If an encoding error occurred or if n or more wide characters are requested to be written, swprintf_s returns a negative value. If any other runtime-constraint violation occurred, swprintf_s returns zero.

K.3.9.2.5 The swscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
int swscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the swscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent swscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The swscanf_s function is equivalent to fwscanf_s, except that the argument s specifies a wide string from which the input is to be obtained, rather than from a stream. Reaching the end of the wide string is equivalent to encountering end-of-file for the fwscanf_s function.

Returns
5

The swscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the swscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.9.2.6 The vfwprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vfwprintf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. The %n specifier508) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to vfwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vfwprintf_s function does not attempt to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent vfwprintf_s produced output before discovering

the runtime-constraint violation.

Description

4

The vfwprintf_s function is equivalent to the vfwprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

Returns

5

The vfwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.

K.3.9.2.7 The vfwscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vfwscanf_s(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither stream nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vfwscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vfwscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The vfwscanf_s function is equivalent to fwscanf_s, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg invocations). The vfwscanf_s function does not invoke the va_end macro.509)

Returns
5

The vfwscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the vfwscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.9.2.8 The vsnwprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vsnwprintf_s(wchar_t * restrict s, rsize_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format
,
  va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX /sizeof(wchar_t). The %n specifier510) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to vsnwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then the vsnwprintf_s function sets s[0] to the null wide character.

Description

4

The vsnwprintf_s function is equivalent to the vswprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

5

The vsnwprintf_s function, unlike vswprintf_s, will truncate the result to fit within the array pointed to by s.

Returns

6

The vsnwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null character, or a negative value if a runtime-constraint violation occurred. Thus, the null-terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is both nonnegative and less than n.

K.3.9.2.9 The vswprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vswprintf_s(wchar_t * restrict s, rsize_t n, const wchar_t * restrict format,
va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. n shall neither equal zero nor be greater than RSIZE_MAX /sizeof(wchar_t). The number of wide characters (including the trailing null) required for the result to be written to the array pointed to by s shall not be greater than n. The %n specifier511)

(modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to vswprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer. No encoding error shall occur.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s is not a null pointer and n is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then the vswprintf_s function sets s[0] to the null wide character.

Description
4

The vswprintf_s function is equivalent to the vswprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

5

The vswprintf_s function, unlike vsnwprintf_s, treats a result too big for the array pointed to by s as a runtime-constraint violation.

Returns
6

If no runtime-constraint violation occurred, the vswprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters written in the array, not counting the terminating null wide character. If an encoding error occurred or if n or more wide characters are requested to be written, vswprintf_s returns a negative value. If any other runtime-constraint violation occurred, vswprintf_s returns zero.

K.3.9.2.10 The vswscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vswscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format,
      va_list arg);

Runtime-constraints

2

Neither s nor format shall be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vswscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vswscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description

4

The vswscanf_s function is equivalent to swscanf_s, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg invocations). The vswscanf_s function does not invoke the va_end macro.512)

Returns

5

The vswscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the vswscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.9.2.11 The vwprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vwprintf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);
Runtime-constraints
2

format shall not be a null pointer. The %n specifier513) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to vwprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vwprintf_s function does not attempt to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent vwprintf_s produced output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The vwprintf_s function is equivalent to the vwprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

Returns
5

The vwprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.

K.3.9.2.12 The vwscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>
int vwscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);

Runtime-constraints

2

format shall not be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the vwscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent vwscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description

4

The vwscanf_s function is equivalent to wscanf_s, with the variable argument list replaced by arg, which shall have been initialized by the va_start macro (and possibly subsequent va_arg invocations). The vwscanf_s function does not invoke the va_end macro.514)

Returns

5

The vwscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the vwscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.9.2.13 The wprintf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
int wprintf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);
Runtime-constraints
2

format shall not be a null pointer. The %n specifier515) (modified or not by flags, field width, or precision) shall not appear in the wide string pointed to by format. Any argument to wprintf_s corresponding to a %s specifier shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wprintf_s function does not attempt to produce further output, and it is unspecified to what extent wprintf_s produced output before discovering the runtime-constraint violation.

Description
4

The wprintf_s function is equivalent to the wprintf function except for the previously listed explicit runtime-constraints.

Returns
5

The wprintf_s function returns the number of wide characters transmitted, or a negative value if an output error, encoding error, or runtime-constraint violation occurred.

K.3.9.2.14 The wscanf_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
int wscanf_s(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

Runtime-constraints

2

format shall not be a null pointer. Any argument indirected though to store converted input shall not be a null pointer.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wscanf_s function does not attempt to perform further input, and it is unspecified to what extent wscanf_s performed input before discovering the runtimeconstraint violation.

Description

4

The wscanf_s function is equivalent to fwscanf_s with the argument stdin interposed before the arguments to wscanf_s.

Returns

5

The wscanf_s function returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion or if there is a runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, the wscanf_s function returns the number of input items assigned, which can be fewer than provided for, or even zero, in the event of an early matching failure.

K.3.9.3 General wide string utilities

K.3.9.3.1 Wide string copying functions
K.3.9.3.1.1 The wcscpy_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t wcscpy_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
const wchar_t * restrict s2);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof( wchar_t). s1max shall not equal zero. s1max shall be greater than wcsnlen_s(s2, s1max). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then wcscpy_s sets s1[0] to the null wide character.

Description
4

The wcscpy_s function copies the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null wide character) into the array pointed to by s1.

5

All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by wcscpy_s in the array of s1max wide characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when wcscpy_s returns.516)

Returns
6

The wcscpy_s function returns zero517) if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.9.3.1.2 The wcsncpy_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t wcsncpy_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
const wchar_t * restrict s2, rsize_t n);

Runtime-constraints

2

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX /sizeof(wchar_t). s1max shall not equal zero. If n is not less than s1max, then s1max shall be greater than wcsnlen_s(s2, s1max). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then wcsncpy_s sets s1[0] to the null wide character.

Description

4

The wcsncpy_s function copies not more than n successive wide characters (wide characters that follow a null wide character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by s1. If no null wide character was copied from s2, then s1[n] is set to a null wide character.

5

All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by wcsncpy_s in the array of s1max wide characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when wcsncpy_s returns.518)

Returns

6

The wcsncpy_s function returns zero519) if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

7

EXAMPLE The wcsncpy_s function can be used to copy a wide string without the danger that the result will not be null terminated or that wide characters will be written past the end of the destination array.

#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
/* ... */
wchar_t src1[100] = L"hello";
wchar_t src2[7] = {L’g’, L’o’, L’o’, L’d’, L’b’, L’y’, L’e’};
wchar_t dst1[6], dst2[5], dst3[5];
int r1, r2, r3;
r1 = wcsncpy_s(dst1, 6, src1, 100);
r2 = wcsncpy_s(dst2, 5, src2, 7);
r3 = wcsncpy_s(dst3, 5, src2, 4);

The first call will assign to r1 the value zero and to dst1 the sequence of wide characters hello\0.

The second call will assign to r2 a nonzero value and to dst2 the sequence of wide characters \0.

The third call will assign to r3 the value zero and to dst3 the sequence of wide characters good\0.

K.3.9.3.1.3 The wmemcpy_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t wmemcpy_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
const wchar_t * restrict s2, rsize_t n);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX/ sizeof(wchar_t). n shall not be greater than s1max. Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wmemcpy_s function stores zeros in the first s1max wide characters of the object pointed to by s1 if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t).

Description

4

The wmemcpy_s function copies n successive wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1.

Returns

5

The wmemcpy_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.9.3.1.4 The wmemmove_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t wmemmove_s(wchar_t *s1, rsize_t s1max, const wchar_t *s2, rsize_t n);
Runtime-constraints
2

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX/ sizeof(wchar_t). n shall not be greater than s1max.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wmemmove_s function stores zeros in the first s1max wide characters of the object pointed to by s1 if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t).

Description
4

The wmemmove_s function copies n successive wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1. This copying takes place as if the n wide characters from the object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n wide characters that does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 or s2, and then the n wide characters from the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1.

Returns
5

The wmemmove_s function returns zero if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.9.3.2 Wide string concatenation functions
K.3.9.3.2.1 The wcscat_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t wcscat_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
const wchar_t * restrict s2);
Runtime-constraints
2

Let m denote the value s1max - wcsnlen_s(s1, s1max) upon entry to wcscat_s.

3

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t). s1max shall not equal zero. m shall not equal zero.520) m shall be greater than wcsnlen_s(s2,m). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

4

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then wcscat_s sets s1[0] to the null wide character.

Description
5

The wcscat_s function appends a copy of the wide string pointed to by s2 (including the terminating null wide character) to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial wide character from

s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1.

6

All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by wcscat_s in the array of s1max wide characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when wcscat_s returns.521)

Returns

7

The wcscat_s function returns zero522) if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.9.3.2.2 The wcsncat_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t wcsncat_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t s1max,
const wchar_t * restrict s2, rsize_t n);
Runtime-constraints
2

Let m denote the value s1max - wcsnlen_s(s1, s1max) upon entry to wcsncat_s.

3

Neither s1 nor s2 shall be a null pointer. Neither s1max nor n shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX/ sizeof(wchar_t). s1max shall not equal zero. m shall not equal zero.523) If n is not less than m, then m shall be greater than wcsnlen_s(s2,m). Copying shall not take place between objects that overlap.

4

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then if s1 is not a null pointer and s1max is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then wcsncat_s sets s1[0] to the null wide character.

Description
5

The wcsncat_s function appends not more than n successive wide characters (wide characters that follow a null wide character are not copied) from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1. The initial wide character from s2 overwrites the null wide character at the end of s1. If no null wide character was copied from s2, then s1[s1max- m +n] is set to a null wide character.

6

All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by wcsncat_s in the array of s1max wide characters pointed to by s1 take unspecified values when wcsncat_s returns.524)

Returns
7

The wcsncat_s function returns zero525) if there was no runtime-constraint violation. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

8

EXAMPLE The wcsncat_s function can be used to copy a wide string without the danger that the result will not be null terminated or that wide characters will be written past the end of the destination array.

#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
/* ... */
wchar_t s1[100] = L"good";
wchar_t s2[6] = L"hello";
wchar_t s3[6] = L"hello";
wchar_t s4[7] = L"abc";
wchar_t s5[1000] = L"bye";
int r1, r2, r3, r4;
r1 = wcsncat_s(s1, 100, s5, 1000);
r2 = wcsncat_s(s2, 6, L"", 1);
r3 = wcsncat_s(s3, 6, L"X", 2);
r4 = wcsncat_s(s4, 7, L"defghijklmn", 3);

After the fourth call r4 will have the value zero and s4 will be the wide character sequence abcdef\0.

K.3.9.3.3 Wide string search functions
K.3.9.3.3.1 The wcstok_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcstok_s(wchar_t * restrict s1, rsize_t * restrict s1max,
const wchar_t * restrict s2, wchar_t ** restrict ptr);
Runtime-constraints
2

None of s1max, s2, or ptr shall be a null pointer. If s1 is a null pointer, then *ptr shall not be a null pointer. The value of *s1max shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t). The end of the token found shall occur within the first *s1max wide characters of s1 for the first call, and shall occur within the first *s1max wide characters of where searching resumes on subsequent calls.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, the wcstok_s function does not indirect through the s1 or s2 pointers, and does not store a value in the object pointed to by ptr.

Description
4

A sequence of calls to the wcstok_s function breaks the wide string pointed to by s1 into a sequence of tokens, each of which is delimited by a wide character from the wide string pointed to by s2. The fourth argument points to a caller-provided wchar_t pointer into which the wcstok_s function stores information necessary for it to continue scanning the same wide string.

5

The first call in a sequence has a non-null first argument and s1max points to an object whose value is the number of elements in the wide character array pointed to by the first argument. The first call stores an initial value in the object pointed to by ptr and updates the value pointed to by s1max to reflect the number of elements that remain in relation to ptr. Subsequent calls in the sequence have a null first argument and the objects pointed to by s1max and ptr are required to have the values stored by the previous call in the sequence, which are then updated. The separator wide string pointed to by s2 may be different from call to call.

6

The first call in the sequence searches the wide string pointed to by s1 for the first wide character that is not contained in the current separator wide string pointed to by s2. If no such wide character is found, then there are no tokens in the wide string pointed to by s1 and the wcstok_s function returns a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is the start of the first token.

7

The wcstok_s function then searches from there for the first wide character in s1 that is contained in the current separator wide string. If no such wide character is found, the current token extends to the end of the wide string pointed to by s1, and subsequent searches in the same wide string for a token return a null pointer. If such a wide character is found, it is overwritten by a null wide character, which terminates the current token.

8

In all cases, the wcstok_s function stores sufficient information in the pointer pointed to by ptr so that subsequent calls, with a null pointer for s1 and the unmodified pointer value for ptr, shall start

searching just past the element overwritten by a null wide character (if any).

Returns

9

The wcstok_s function returns a pointer to the first wide character of a token, or a null pointer if there is no token or there is a runtime-constraint violation.

10

EXAMPLE

#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
static wchar_t str1[] = L"?a???b,,,#c";
static wchar_t str2[] = L"\t \t";
wchar_t *t, *ptr1, *ptr2;
rsize_t max1 = wcslen(str1)+1;
rsize_t max2 = wcslen(str2)+1;
t = wcstok_s(str1, &max1, "?", &ptr1);     // t points to the token "a"
t = wcstok_s(nullptr, &max1, ",", &ptr1);  // t points to the token "??b"
t = wcstok_s(str2, &max2, " \t", &ptr2);   // t is a null pointer
t = wcstok_s(nullptr, &max1, "#,", &ptr1); // t points to the token "c"
t = wcstok_s(nullptr, &max1, "?", &ptr1);  // t is a null pointer
K.3.9.3.4 Miscellaneous functions
K.3.9.3.4.1 The wcsnlen_s function
1
#define __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ 1
#include <wchar.h>
size_t wcsnlen_s(const wchar_t *s, size_t maxsize);
Description
2

The wcsnlen_s function computes the length of the wide string pointed to by s.

Returns
3

If s is a null pointer,526) then the wcsnlen_s function returns zero.

4

Otherwise, the wcsnlen_s function returns the number of wide characters that precede the terminating null wide character. If there is no null wide character in the first maxsize wide characters of s then wcsnlen_s returns maxsize. At most the first maxsize wide characters of s shall be accessed by wcsnlen_s.

K.3.9.4 Extended multibyte/wide character conversion utilities

K.3.9.4.1 Restartable multibyte/wide character conversion functions
K.3.9.4.1.1 General
1

Unlike wcrtomb, wcrtomb_s does not permit the ps parameter (the pointer to the conversion state) to be a null pointer.

K.3.9.4.1.2 The wcrtomb_s function
1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t wcrtomb_s(size_t * restrict retval, char * restrict s, rsize_t smax,
wchar_t wc, mbstate_t * restrict ps);

Runtime-constraints

2

Neither retval nor ps shall be a null pointer. If s is not a null pointer, then smax shall not equal zero and shall not be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If s is not a null pointer, then smax shall not be less than the number of bytes to be stored in the array pointed to by s. If s is a null pointer, then smax shall equal zero.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then wcrtomb_s does the following. If s is not a null pointer and smax is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then wcrtomb_s sets s[0] to the null character. If retval is not a null pointer, then wcrtomb_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1).

Description

4

If s is a null pointer, the wcrtomb_s function is equivalent to the call

wcrtomb_s(&retval, buf, sizeof buf, L’\0’, ps)

where retval and buf are internal objects of the appropriate types, and the size of buf is greater than MB_CUR_MAX.

5

If s is not a null pointer, the wcrtomb_s function determines the number of bytes needed to represent the multibyte character that corresponds to the wide character given by wc (including any shift sequences), and stores the multibyte character representation in the array whose first element is pointed to by s. At most MB_CUR_MAX bytes are stored. If wc is a null wide character, a null byte is stored, preceded by any shift sequence needed to restore the initial shift state; the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

6

If wc does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the wcrtomb_s

function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval and the conversion state is unspecified. Otherwise, the wcrtomb_s function stores into *retval the number of bytes (including any shift sequences) stored in the array pointed to by s.

Returns

7

The wcrtomb_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.9.4.2 Restartable multibyte/wide string conversion functions
K.3.9.4.2.1 General
1

Unlike mbsrtowcs and wcsrtombs, mbsrtowcs_s and wcsrtombs_s do not permit the ps parameter (the pointer to the conversion state) to be a null pointer.

K.3.9.4.2.2 The mbsrtowcs_s function
1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t mbsrtowcs_s(size_t * restrict retval, wchar_t * restrict dst,
rsize_t dstmax, const char ** restrict src, rsize_t len,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Runtime-constraints
2

None of retval, src, *src, or ps shall be null pointers. If dst is not a null pointer, then neither len nor dstmax shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t). If dst is a null pointer, then dstmax shall equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer, then dstmax shall not equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer and len is not less than dstmax, then a null character shall occur within the first dstmax multibyte characters of the array pointed to by *src.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then mbsrtowcs_s does the following. If retval is not a null pointer, then mbsrtowcs_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1). If dst is not a null pointer and dstmax is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t), then mbsrtowcs_s sets dst[0] to the null wide character.

Description

4

The mbsrtowcs_s function converts a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the conversion state described by the object pointed to by ps, from the array indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding wide characters. If dst is not a null pointer, the converted characters are stored into the array pointed to by dst. Conversion continues up to and including a terminating null character, which is also stored. Conversion stops earlier in two cases: when a sequence of bytes is encountered that does not form a valid multibyte character, or (if dst is not a null pointer) when len wide characters have been stored into the array pointed to by dst.527) If dst is not a null pointer and no null wide character was stored into the array pointed to by dst, then dst[len] is set to the null wide character. Each conversion takes place as if by a call to the mbrtowc function.

5

If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null character) or the address just past the last multibyte character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null character and if dst is not a null pointer, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

6

Regardless of whether dst is or is not a null pointer, if the input conversion encounters a sequence of bytes that do not form a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the mbsrtowcs_s

function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval and the conversion state is unspecified. Otherwise, the mbsrtowcs_s function stores into *retval the number of multibyte characters successfully converted, not including the terminating null character (if any).

7

All elements following the terminating null wide character (if any) written by mbsrtowcs_s in the array of dstmax wide characters pointed to by dst take unspecified values when mbsrtowcs_s returns.528)

8

If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified values.

Returns

9

The mbsrtowcs_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

K.3.9.4.2.3 The wcsrtombs_s function
1
#include <wchar.h>
errno_t wcsrtombs_s(size_t * restrict retval, char * restrict dst,
rsize_t dstmax, const wchar_t ** restrict src, rsize_t len,
mbstate_t * restrict ps);
Runtime-constraints
2

None of retval, src, *src, or ps shall be null pointers. If dst is not a null pointer, then neither len shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX/sizeof(wchar_t) nor dstmax shall be greater than RSIZE_MAX. If dst is a null pointer, then dstmax shall equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer, then dstmax shall not equal zero. If dst is not a null pointer and len is not less than dstmax, then the conversion shall have been stopped (see the following) because a terminating null wide character was reached or because an encoding error occurred.

3

If there is a runtime-constraint violation, then wcsrtombs_s does the following. If retval is not a null pointer, then wcsrtombs_s sets *retval to (size_t)(-1). If dst is not a null pointer and dstmax is greater than zero and not greater than RSIZE_MAX, then wcsrtombs_s sets dst[0] to the null character.

Description
4

The wcsrtombs_s function converts a sequence of wide characters from the array indirectly pointed to by src into a sequence of corresponding multibyte characters that begins in the conversion state

described by the object pointed to by ps. If dst is not a null pointer, the converted characters are then stored into the array pointed to by dst. Conversion continues up to and including a terminating null wide character, which is also stored. Conversion stops earlier in two cases:

If the conversion stops without converting a null wide character and dst is not a null pointer, then a null character is stored into the array pointed to by dst immediately following any multibyte characters already stored. Each conversion takes place as if by a call to the wcrtomb function.529)

5

If dst is not a null pointer, the pointer object pointed to by src is assigned either a null pointer (if conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null wide character) or the address just past the last wide character converted (if any). If conversion stopped due to reaching a terminating null wide character, the resulting state described is the initial conversion state.

6

Regardless of whether dst is or is not a null pointer, if the input conversion encounters a wide character that does not correspond to a valid multibyte character, an encoding error occurs: the wcsrtombs_s function stores the value (size_t)(-1) into *retval and the conversion state is unspecified. Otherwise, the wcsrtombs_s function stores into *retval the number of bytes in the resulting multibyte character sequence, not including the terminating null character (if any).

7

All elements following the terminating null character (if any) written by wcsrtombs_s in the array of dstmax elements pointed to by dst take unspecified values when wcsrtombs_s returns.530)

8

If copying takes place between objects that overlap, the objects take on unspecified values.

Returns

9

The wcsrtombs_s function returns zero if no runtime-constraint violation and no encoding error occurred. Otherwise, a nonzero value is returned.

L Analyzability

L.1 Scope

1

This Annex specifies optional behavior that can aid in the analyzability of C programs.

2

An implementation that defines __STDC_ANALYZABLE__ shall conform to the specifications in this annex (see also 6.10.10.4).531)

L.2 Definitions

L.2.1

1

out-of-bounds store

an (attempted) access (3.1) that, at run time, for a given computational state, would modify (or, for an object declared volatile, fetch) one or more bytes that lie outside the bounds permitted by this document.

L.2.2

1

bounded undefined behavior

undefined behavior (3.5.3) that does not perform an out-of-bounds store.

2

Note 1 to entry: The behavior can perform a trap.

3

Note 2 to entry: Any values produced can be unspecified values, and the representation of objects that are written to can become indeterminate.

L.2.3

1

critical undefined behavior

undefined behavior that is not bounded undefined behavior.

2

Note 1 to entry: The behavior can perform an out-of-bounds store or perform a trap.

L.3 Requirements

1

If the program performs a trap (3.25), the implementation is permitted to invoke a runtime-constraint handler. Any such semantics are implementation-defined.

2

All undefined behavior shall be limited to bounded undefined behavior, except for the following which are permitted to result in critical undefined behavior:

  • An object is referred to outside of its lifetime (6.2.4).
  • A store is performed to an object that has two incompatible declarations (6.2.7),
  • A pointer is used to call a function whose type is not compatible with the referenced type (6.2.7, 6.3.2.3, 6.5.3.3).
  • An lvalue does not designate an object when evaluated (6.3.2.1).
  • The program attempts to modify a string literal (6.4.5).
  • The operand of the unary * operator has an invalid value (6.5.4.2).
  • Addition or subtraction of a pointer into, or just beyond, an array object and an integer type produces a result that points just beyond the array object and is used as the operand of a unary

* operator that is evaluated (6.5.7).

  • An attempt is made to modify an object defined with a const-qualified type through use of an lvalue with non-const-qualified type (6.7.4).

M Change History

M.1 Attribute Changes

1

The attribute feature was introduced in the fifth edition of this document, as detailed in the change list in M.2. The following table illustrates what usage of the __has_c_attribute preprocessor conditional expression should return in the latest revision, previous values, and the change associated with that value.

2

Programs and implementations may use this table to know what values were being used at any specific point in time, leading up to the publication of this document. The value at the bottom of a particular row in a table is the latest value and corresponds with the behavior for the given attribute described in this document.

Table M.1: __has_c_attribute values and associated changes

attribute tokens value semantic and/or syntactic changes deprecated 201904L Initial introduction. 202311L Harmonized for fifth edition. fallthrough 201904L Initial introduction.

201910L Expanded locations where fallthrough provides diagnostics due to improvements in specification of blocks. 202311L Harmonized for fifth edition. maybe_unused 201904L Initial introduction. 202106L maybe_unused may appertain to labels. 202311L Harmonized for fifth edition. nodiscard 201904L Initial introduction.

202003L

Added a form which accepts a string literal for diagnostic purposes, e.g. nodiscard("should have a reason"). 202311L Harmonized for fifth edition. noreturn 202202L Initial introduction. 202311L Harmonized for fifth edition. reproducible 202207L Initial introduction. 202311L Harmonized for fifth edition. unsequenced 202207L Initial introduction. 202311L Harmonized for fifth edition.

wcschr, wcspbrk, wcsrchr, wmemchr, and wcsstr;

uint_fastN_t.

M.3 Fourth Edition

1

There were no major changes in the fourth edition (__STDC_VERSION__ 201710L), only technical corrections and clarifications.

M.4 Third Edition

1

Major changes in the third edition (__STDC_VERSION__ 201112L) included:

  • conditional (optional) features (including some that were previously mandatory)
  • support for multiple threads of execution including an improved memory sequencing model, atomic objects, and thread storage (<stdatomic.h> and <threads.h>)
  • additional floating-point characteristic macros (<float.h>)
  • querying and specifying alignment of objects (<stdalign.h>, <stdlib.h>)
  • Unicode characters and strings (<uchar.h>) (originally specified in ISO/IEC TR 19769:2004)
  • type-generic expressions
  • static assertions
  • anonymous structures and unions
  • no-return functions
  • macros to create complex numbers (<complex.h>)
  • support for opening files for exclusive access
  • removed the gets function (<stdio.h>)
  • added the aligned_alloc, at_quick_exit, and quick_exit functions (<stdlib.h>)
  • (conditional) support for bounds-checking interfaces (originally specified in ISO/IEC TR 24731– 1:2007)
  • (conditional) support for analyzability

M.5 Second Edition

1

Major changes in the second edition (__STDC_VERSION__ 199901L) included:

  • restricted character set support via digraphs and <iso646.h> (originally specified in ISO/IEC 9899:1990/Amd 1:1995)
  • wide character library support in <wchar.h> and <wctype.h> (originally specified in ISO/IEC 9899:1990/Amd 1:1995)
  • more precise aliasing rules via effective type
  • restricted pointers
  • variable length arrays
  • flexible array members
  • static and type qualifiers in parameter array declarators
  • complex (and imaginary) support in <complex.h>
  • type-generic math macros in <tgmath.h>
  • the long long int type and library functions
  • extended integer types
  • increased minimum translation limits
  • additional floating-point characteristics in <float.h>
  • remove implicit int
  • reliable integer division
  • universal character names (\u and \U)
  • extended identifiers
  • hexadecimal floating constants and %a and %A printf/scanf conversion specifiers
  • compound literals
  • designated initializers
  • // comments
  • specified width integer types and corresponding library functions in <inttypes.h> and <stdint.h>
  • remove implicit function declaration
  • preprocessor arithmetic done in intmax_t/uintmax_t
  • mixed declarations and statements
  • new block scopes for selection and iteration statements
  • integer constant type rules
  • integer promotion rules
  • macros with a variable number of arguments (__VA_ARGS__)
  • the vscanf family of functions in <stdio.h> and <wchar.h>
  • additional math library functions in <math.h>

M.6 First Edition, Amendment 1

1

Major changes in the amendment to the first edition (__STDC_VERSION__ 199409L) included:

  • addition of the predefined __STDC_VERSION__ macro
  • restricted character set support via digraphs and <iso646.h>
  • wide character library support in <wchar.h> and <wctype.h>

Bibliography

M.1 Introduction

1

The Working Group responsible for this document (WG 14) maintains a site on the World Wide Web at https://www.open-std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/ containing ancillary information that may be of interest to some readers.

M.2 Informative References [1] ISO/IEC 14882 Programming languages — C++.

[2] ISO/IEC 646:1991, Information technology — ISO 7-bit coded character set for information interchange.

[3] ISO/IEC 9945–2:1993, Information technology — Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX) — Part 2: Shell and Utilities.

[4] ISO/IEC TR 10176:2003, Information technology — Guidelines for the preparation of programming language standards.

[5] ISO/IEC 10967–1:2012, Information technology — Language independent arithmetic — Part 1: Integer and floating point arithmetic.

[6] ISO/IEC TR 19769:2004, Information technology — Programming languages, their environments and system software interfaces — Extensions for the programming language C to support new character data types.

[7] ISO/IEC TR 24731–1:2007, Information technology — Programming languages, their environments and system software interfaces — Extensions to the C library — Part 1: Bounds-checking interfaces.

[8] ISO 80000–3, Quantities and units — Part 3: Space and time.

[9] IEC 60559:1989, Binary floating-point arithmetic for microprocessor systems.

[10] ISO/IEC/IEEE 60559:2011, Floating-point arithmetic.

[11] IEEE 754–1985 IEEE Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic.

[12] IEEE 754–2019 IEEE Standard for Floating-Point Arithmetic.

[13] ANSI/IEEE 854–1987, American National Standard for Radix-Independent Floating-Point Arithmetic.

[14] ANSI X3/TR–1–82 (1982), American National Dictionary for Information Processing Systems, Information Processing Systems Technical Report.

[15] "The C Reference Manual" by Dennis M. Ritchie, a version of which was published in The C Programming Language by Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, Prentice-Hall, Inc., (1978). Copyright owned by AT&T.

[16] 1984 /usr/group Standard by the /usr/group Standards Committee, Santa Clara, California, USA, November 1984.

[17] The Unicode Consortium. Unicode Standard Annex, UAX #31, Unicode Identifier and Pattern Syntax [online]. Edited by Mark Davis and Robin Leroy. Available at https://www.unicode. org/reports/tr31.

Index

- (minus punctuator), 68 - (subtraction operator), 85, 544 - (unary minus operator), 82, 515 - format flag, 331, 416 -- (minus-minus punctuator), 68 -- (postfix decrement operator), 50, 78 -- (prefix decrement operator), 50, 81 -= (minus-equal punctuator), 68 -= (subtraction assignment operator), 93 -> (minus-greater punctuator), 68 -> (structure/union pointer operator), 76 . (dot punctuator), 68, 137 . (structure/union member operator), 50, 76 ... (ellipsis punctuator), 68, 130, 179 / (division operator), 84, 542 / (slash punctuator), 68 /* */ (comment delimiters), 70 // (comment delimiter), 70 /= (division assignment operator), 93 /= (slash-equal punctuator), 68 : (colon punctuator), 68, 105 :> (alternative spelling of ]), 68 :> (colon greater punctuator), 68 ; (semicolon punctuator), 68, 97, 105, 153, 155, 156 < (less punctuator), 68 < (less-than operator), 87 <: (alternative spelling of [), 68 <: (less-colon punctuator), 68 << (left-shift operator), 86 << (less-less punctuator), 68 <<= (left-shift assignment operator), 93 <<= (less-less equal punctuator), 68 <= (less-equal punctuator), 68 <= (less-than-or-equal-to operator), 87 <% (alternative spelling of {), 68 <% (less-percent punctuator), 68 <assert.h> header, 174–176, 192, 195, 219, 475 <complex.h> header, 25, 30, 101, 139, 189, 191, 192, 196–203, 385, 386, 457, 475, 542, 543, 544, 545, 561, 563, 598, 601, 607, 677, 678 <ctype.h> header, 192, 205, 206–208, 457, 476 <errno.h> header, 150, 192, 209, 457, 476, 625 <fenv.h> header, 9, 14, 16, 25, 30, 34, 93, 150, 192, 210, 212, 213, 215–221, 237, 457, 476, 512, 515, 518–521, 529, 533, 535, 679 <float.h> header, 9, 10, 22, 24, 25, 29, 30, 101, 192, 222, 235, 335, 359, 421, 435, 457, 458, 477, 478, 508, 512, 517, 555, 556,

<wchar.h> header, 25, 30, 34, 150, 192, 214, 215, 224, 322, 415, 416, 421, 422, 426– 433, 435, 437–442, 444–449, 459, 502, 503, 581, 582, 601, 655, 656–670, 678, 679 <wctype.h> header, 192, 451, 452–456, 459, 504, 678, 679 = (equal-sign punctuator), 68, 97, 109, 137 = (simple assignment operator), 92 == (equal-equal punctuator), 68 == (equality operator), 88 > (greater punctuator), 68 > (greater-than operator), 87 >= (greater-equal punctuator), 68 >= (greater-than-or-equal-to operator), 87 >> (greater greater punctuator), 68 >> (right-shift operator), 86 >>= (greater-greater-equal punctuator), 68 >>= (right-shift assignment operator), 93 ? (question-mark punctuator), 68 ?: (conditional operator), 17, 90 [ (opening bracket punctuator), 68 [ ] (array subscript operator), 75, 82 [ ] (brackets punctuator), 128, 137 # format flag, 331, 417 % (percent punctuator), 68 % (remainder operator), 84 %: (alternative spelling of #), 68 %: (percent-colon punctuator), 68 %:%: (alternative spelling of ##), 68 %:%: (percent-percent punctuator), 68 %= (percent-equal punctuator), 68 %= (remainder assignment operator), 93 %> (alternative spelling of }), 68 %> (percent-greater punctuator), 68 %A conversion specifier, 333, 406, 419 %B conversion specifier, 332, 406, 418 %C conversion specifier, 406 %D conversion specifier, 407 %E conversion specifier, 333, 419 %F conversion specifier, 333, 407, 418 %G conversion specifier, 333, 407, 419 %H conversion specifier, 407 %I conversion specifier, 407 %M conversion specifier, 407 %R conversion specifier, 407 %S conversion specifier, 407 %T conversion specifier, 407 %U conversion specifier, 407 %V conversion specifier, 407 %W conversion specifier, 407 %X conversion specifier, 332, 407, 418 %Y conversion specifier, 407 %Z conversion specifier, 407 %[ conversion specifier, 341, 424 %% conversion specifier, 335, 342, 421, 425

_Bool, 53 _C identifier suffix, 320, 458, 495 _Complex, 26, 40, 49, 53, 101–104, 196, 541–543, 555, 561 _Complex keyword, 53 _Complex type, 40, 103, 196, 541 _Complex_I macro, 196, 475, 545, 676 _DECIMAL_DIG identifier suffix, 29, 335, 359, 421, 435, 517, 518 _Decimal128, 39 _Decimal128 keyword, 53 _Decimal128 type, 103 _Decimal128x type, 554 _Decimal32, 39 _Decimal32 keyword, 53 _Decimal32 type, 103 _Decimal32_t type, 234, 490, 603 _Decimal64, 39 _Decimal64 keyword, 53 _Decimal64 type, 103 _Decimal64_t type, 234, 490, 603 _Decimal64x type, 554 _DecimalN type, 553 _DecimalN_t type, 564 _DecimalNx type, 555 _Exit function, 286, 368, 369, 497, 594, 604 _Float128_t type, 565 _Float128x type, 554 _Float16_t type, 565 _Float32_t type, 565 _Float32x type, 554 _Float64_t type, 565 _Float64x type, 554 _FloatN type, 553 _FloatN_t type, 564 _FloatNx type, 555 _Generic, 53, 74, 113, 121, 136, 316, 387 _Generic keyword, 53 _H__ identifier suffix, 192 _IOFBF macro, 321, 329, 330, 495 _IOLBF macro, 321, 330, 495 _IONBF macro, 321, 329, 330, 495 _Imaginary keyword, 53 _Imaginary type, 196, 541 _Imaginary_I macro, 196, 203, 475, 545, 676 _MAX identifier suffix, 23, 47, 319, 320, 458, 478, 495, 557 _MIN identifier suffix, 23, 319, 320, 458, 478, 495, 558 _Noreturn, 124 _Noreturn attribute, 143, 147 _Noreturn keyword, 53 _PRINTF_NAN_LEN_MAX macro, 322, 495 _Pragma operator, 189 _Static_assert, 53 _Thread_local, 53

macro, 556, 561, 576–578, 579, 580– 582, 584 __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ macro, 476, 494– 496, 498, 499, 501, 503, 624, 625, 627– 643, 646–668 __STDC__ macro, 168, 187 __TIME__ macro, 188, 602 __VA_ARGS__ identifier, 178, 179, 180, 185, 678 __VA_OPT__ identifier, 178, 179–181, 676 __bool_true_false_are_defined (obsolete), 312, 458, 494 __cplusplus macro, 168, 187 __deprecated__ attribute, 143 __func__ identifier, 55, 56, 195, 590, 679 __has_c_attribute, 142, 144–147, 150, 167, 168, 187, 674 __has_c_attribute operator, 187 __has_embed, 52, 69, 167, 169, 187 __has_embed operator, 187 __has_include, 52, 69, 167, 168, 187, 676 __has_include operator, 187 __limit__ embed parameter, 165 __nodiscard__ attribute, 142 _explicit identifier suffix, 293, 302, 492 _r identifier suffix, 404 _t identifier suffix, 317, 318, 320, 458, 495, 564, 565, 677 wchar_t character constant, 64 wchar_t string literal, 67

acospi function, 244, 480, 517, 525 acospi type-generic macro, 386 acospid128 function, 244, 485 acospid32 function, 244, 485 acospid64 function, 244, 485 acospidN function, 567 acospidNx function, 567 acospif function, 244, 480 acospifN function, 567 acospifNx function, 567 acospil function, 244, 480 acquire fence, 297 acquire operation, 17 active position, 21 add and round to narrower type, 274 addition assignment operator (+=), 93 addition operator (+), 75, 82, 85, 544 additive expression, 84, 544 address constant, 96 address operator (&), 50, 82 address-free, 298 aggregate initialization, 138 aggregate type, 41 alert, 21 alert escape sequence (\a), 21, 65 aliasing, 72 alignas, 125 alignas keyword, 53 aligned_alloc function, 364, 365, 366, 497, 588, 597, 604, 677 alignment, 3, 45, 365 pointer, 41, 51 structure/union member, 106 alignment header, 288 alignment of memory, 374 alignment specifier, 125 alignof keyword, 53 alignof operator, 81, 82 allocated storage order and contiguity, 364 alternative spellings header, 226 and macro, 226, 478 AND operator bitwise (&), 88 bitwise assignment (&=), 93 logical (&&), 89 AND operator logical (&&), 17 and_eq macro, 226, 478 anonymous structure, 106 anonymous union, 106 argc (main function parameter), 13 argument, 3 array, 160 complex, 202 default promotion, 76

asinl function, 242, 480 asinpi function, 244, 480, 517, 525 asinpi type-generic macro, 386 asinpid128 function, 244, 485 asinpid32 function, 244, 485 asinpid64 function, 244, 485 asinpidN function, 567 asinpidNx function, 567 asinpif function, 244, 480 asinpifN function, 567 asinpifNx function, 567 asinpil function, 244, 480 assert macro, 145, 175, 177, 195, 219, 475, 593, 602 assignment compound, 93 conversion, 92 expression, 91 operator, 50, 91 simple, 92 associativity of operator, 72 asterisk punctuator (*), 127, 128 at_quick_exit function, 367, 368, 369, 497, 588, 597, 677 atan function, 242, 336, 386, 421, 480, 517, 524, 551 atan type-generic macro, 386, 551 atan2 function, 242, 243, 480, 517, 523, 524, 525, 545 atan2 type-generic macro, 386 atan2d128 function, 242, 485 atan2d32 function, 242, 485 atan2d64 function, 242, 485 atan2dN function, 567 atan2dNx function, 567 atan2f function, 242, 480 atan2fN function, 567 atan2fNx function, 567 atan2l function, 242, 480 atan2pi function, 245, 480, 517, 523, 525 atan2pi type-generic macro, 386 atan2pid128 function, 245, 485 atan2pid32 function, 245, 485 atan2pid64 function, 245, 485 atan2pidN function, 567 atan2pidNx function, 567 atan2pif function, 245, 480 atan2pifN function, 567 atan2pifNx function, 567 atan2pil function, 245, 480 atand128 function, 242, 485 atand32 function, 242, 485 atand64 function, 242, 485 atandN function, 567 atandNx function, 567 atanf function, 242, 480

:
atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit

function, 303, 492 atomic_init function, 294, 492 atomic_int type, 294, 299, 491 atomic_int_fast16_t type, 299, 492 atomic_int_fast32_t type, 299, 492 atomic_int_fast64_t type, 299, 492 atomic_int_fast8_t type, 299, 492 atomic_int_least16_t type, 299, 492 atomic_int_least32_t type, 299, 492 atomic_int_least64_t type, 299, 492 atomic_int_least8_t type, 299, 492 ATOMIC_INT_LOCK_FREE macro, 293, 491 atomic_intmax_t type, 299, 492 atomic_intptr_t type, 299, 492 atomic_is_lock_free function, 286, 298, 492, 594 atomic_llong type, 299, 492 ATOMIC_LLONG_LOCK_FREE macro, 293, 491 atomic_load function, 300, 302, 492 atomic_load_explicit function, 296, 300, 492 atomic_long type, 299, 492 ATOMIC_LONG_LOCK_FREE macro, 293, 491 ATOMIC_POINTER_LOCK_FREE macro, 293, 491 atomic_ptrdiff_t type, 299, 492 atomic_schar type, 298, 491 atomic_short type, 299, 491 ATOMIC_SHORT_LOCK_FREE macro, 293, 491 atomic_signal_fence function, 297, 298, 492 atomic_size_t type, 299, 492 atomic_store function, 299, 300, 492 atomic_store_explicit function, 296, 299, 492 atomic_thread_fence function, 149, 297, 298, 492 atomic_uchar type, 298, 491 atomic_uint type, 299, 491 atomic_uint_fast16_t type, 299, 492 atomic_uint_fast32_t type, 299, 492 atomic_uint_fast64_t type, 299, 492 atomic_uint_fast8_t type, 299, 492 atomic_uint_least16_t type, 299, 492

c identifier prefix, 385, 386 C program, 11 c16rtomb function, 412, 413, 502 c32rtomb function, 414, 502 c8rtomb function, 411, 502, 675 cabs function, 201, 385, 386, 476, 545 cabs function type-generic macro for, 386 cabsf function, 201, 388, 476

casinf function, 198, 475 casinfN function, 562 casinfNx function, 562 casinh function, 199, 386, 475, 545, 547 casinh function type-generic macro for, 386 casinhf function, 199, 475 casinhfN function, 562 casinhfNx function, 562 casinhl function, 199, 475 casinl function, 198, 475 casinpi function, 457 cast, 84 cast expression, 83 cast operator (()), 84 catan function, 198, 386, 475, 545 catan function type-generic macro for, 386 catanf function, 198, 475 catanfN function, 562 catanfNx function, 562 catanh function, 199, 200, 386, 475, 545, 547 catanh function type-generic macro for, 386 catanhf function, 200, 475 catanhfN function, 562 catanhfNx function, 562 catanhl function, 200, 475 catanl function, 198, 475 catanpi function, 457 cbrt function, 74, 256, 387, 481, 529 cbrt type-generic macro, 386 cbrtd128 function, 256, 487 cbrtd32 function, 256, 487 cbrtd64 function, 256, 487 cbrtdN function, 571 cbrtdNx function, 571 cbrtf function, 74, 256, 387, 481 cbrtfN function, 571 cbrtfNx function, 571 cbrtl function, 74, 256, 387, 481 ccompoundn function, 457 ccos function, 198, 386, 475, 545 ccos function type-generic macro for, 386 ccosf function, 198, 475 ccosf64x function, 584 ccosfN function, 562 ccosfNx function, 562 ccosh function, 200, 386, 475, 545, 547, 548 ccosh function type-generic macro for, 386 ccoshf function, 200, 475 ccoshfN function, 562 ccoshfNx function, 562 ccoshl function, 200, 475

character input/output function, 348, 638 wide character, 429 character set, 19 character string literal, see string literal character type, 40, 138 character type conversion, 46 characteristics of floating types header, 222, 457 characteristics of integer types header, 227 checked arithmetic function, 458 checked integer arithmetic header, 313 cimag function, 202, 203, 204, 476, 543, 545, 551, 582 cimag type-generic macro, 386, 551 cimagf function, 202, 476 cimagfN function, 562 cimagfNx function, 562 cimagl function, 202, 388, 476 cis function, 545 ckd_ identifier prefix, 458 ckd_add macro, 313, 494 ckd_mul macro, 313, 494 ckd_sub macro, 313, 494 classification function character, 205 extensible wide character, 454 floating-point, 238 wide character, 451 clearerr function, 354, 496 clgamma function, 457 clock function, 400, 401, 404, 501, 604 clock_t type, 400, 401, 501, 604 CLOCKS_PER_SEC macro, 400, 401, 404, 501 clog function, 201, 386, 476, 550 clog function type-generic macro for, 386 clog10 function, 457 clog10p1 function, 457 clog1p function, 457 clog2 function, 457 clog2p1 function, 457 clogf function, 201, 388, 476 clogfN function, 562 clogfNx function, 562 clogl function, 201, 476 clogp1 function, 457 closing, 324 CMPLX macro, 102, 196, 202, 203, 204, 476 CMPLXF macro, 202, 203, 476, 562 CMPLXFN function, 562 CMPLXFNx function, 562 CMPLXL macro, 203, 476 cnd_ identifier prefix, 459 cnd_broadcast function, 391, 392, 393, 500 cnd_destroy function, 392, 500 cnd_init function, 392, 500

string, 378, 648 wide string, 439, 665 conceptual model, 11 conditional expression inclusion preprocessing directive, 22, 25, 166, 193 conditional feature, 9, 39, 40, 41, 128, 188, 191, 511, 541, 624, 672 conditional inclusion, 166 conditional inclusion preprocessing directive, 166 conditional operator (?:), 17, 90 conflict, 16 conformance, 9 conforming freestanding implementation, 9 conforming hosted implementation, 9 conforming implementation, 9 conforming program, 9 conj function, 203, 476, 545, 546–550, 582 conj type-generic macro, 386 conjf function, 203, 476 conjfN function, 562 conjfNx function, 562 conjl function, 203, 476 const, 41 const keyword, 53 const type qualifier, 120 const-qualified type, 41, 50, 121 constant, 57 binary, 57 character, 63 enumeration, 35, 63 floating, 60 hexadecimal, 57 integer, 57 octal, 57 constant expression, 95, 519 constants as primary expression, 73 constexpr, 36–38, 53, 79, 95, 96, 98–103, 137, 190, 286, 519, 520, 675 constexpr storage-class specifier, 53 constraint, 5, 9 constraint_handler_t type, 498, 639 consume operation, 17 content of structure/union/enumeration, 116 contiguity of allocated storage, 364 continue, 53, 156, 157, 158 continue keyword, 53 continue statement, 157 contracted, 73 contracted expression, 73, 238, 518 control character, 20, 205 control wide character, 451 conversion, 46 arithmetic operand, 46 array, 49, 50

%X, 332, 407, 418 %Y, 407 %Z, 407 %[, 341, 424 %%, 335, 342, 421, 425 %a, 333, 340, 406, 419, 424 %b, 332, 406, 418 %c, 334, 340, 406, 420, 424 %d, 332, 340, 407, 418, 424 %e, 333, 340, 407, 419, 424 %f, 333, 340, 418, 424 %g, 333, 340, 407, 419, 424 %h, 407 %i, 332, 418 %j, 407 %m, 407 %n, 335, 342, 407, 420, 425 %o, 332, 340, 418, 424 %p, 335, 341, 407, 420, 425 %r, 407 %s, 334, 341, 420, 424 %t, 407 %u, 332, 340, 407, 418, 424 %w, 407 %x, 332, 340, 407, 418, 424 %y, 407 %z, 407 conversion state, 372, 410–414, 446, 447–449, 643, 668–671 conversion state function, 446 copying function string, 376, 646 wide string, 438 copying functions wide string, 663 copysign function, 203, 266, 267, 483, 514, 529, 534, 535, 543, 544 copysign type-generic macro, 386 copysignd128 function, 267, 488 copysignd32 function, 267, 488 copysignd64 function, 267, 488 copysigndN function, 573 copysigndNx function, 573 copysignf function, 267, 483 copysignfN function, 573 copysignfNx function, 573 copysignl function, 267, 388, 483 correctly rounded result, 5 corresponding real type, 40 corresponding unsigned integer type, 39 cos function, 136, 243, 386, 480, 517, 525, 551 cos type-generic macro, 386, 551 cosd128 function, 243, 485 cosd32 function, 243, 485 cosd64 function, 243, 485 cosdN function, 567

D format modifier, 332, 340, 418, 423 d identifier prefix, 386, 387 d-wchar sequence, 360, 436 d128 identifier prefix, 387 d32 identifier prefix, 387 d32add macro, 33, 215, 387 d32add type-generic macro, 387 d32addd128 function, 274, 489 d32addd64 function, 274, 489 d32div macro, 33, 215, 387 d32div type-generic macro, 387

DBL_MIN_EXP macro, 28, 30, 477, 509 DBL_NORM_MAX macro, 28, 477, 509 DBL_SNAN macro, 26, 101, 102, 478, 512 DBL_TRUE_MIN macro, 29, 30, 478 DD format modifier, 332, 340, 418, 423 ddiv macro, 387, 583, 584 ddiv type-generic macro, 387 ddivl function, 275, 484, 513, 516, 584 DEC identifier prefix, 478 DEC128_ identifier prefix, 30, 457 DEC128_EPSILON macro, 32, 510 DEC128_MANT_DIG macro, 31, 510 DEC128_MAX macro, 31, 510 DEC128_MAX_EXP macro, 31, 510 DEC128_MIN macro, 32, 510 DEC128_MIN_EXP macro, 31, 510 DEC128_SNAN macro, 30 DEC128_TRUE_MIN macro, 32, 510 DEC32_ identifier prefix, 30, 457 DEC32_EPSILON macro, 32, 510 DEC32_MANT_DIG macro, 31, 510 DEC32_MAX macro, 31, 510 DEC32_MAX_EXP macro, 31, 510 DEC32_MIN macro, 32, 510 DEC32_MIN_EXP macro, 31, 510 DEC32_SNAN macro, 30, 102 DEC32_TRUE_MIN macro, 32, 510 DEC64_ identifier prefix, 30, 457 DEC64_EPSILON macro, 32, 510 DEC64_MANT_DIG macro, 31, 510 DEC64_MAX macro, 31, 510 DEC64_MAX_EXP macro, 31, 510 DEC64_MIN macro, 32, 510 DEC64_MIN_EXP macro, 31, 510 DEC64_SNAN macro, 30, 102 DEC64_TRUE_MIN macro, 32, 100, 102, 510 DEC_ identifier prefix, 457 DEC_EVAL_METHOD macro, 25, 30, 62, 95, 234, 478, 509, 540, 555, 564, 601, 603 DEC_INFINITY macro, 31, 102, 235, 277, 458, 478, 484 DEC_NAN macro, 31, 102, 235, 458, 478, 484 decimal constant, 57 decimal digit, 20 decimal floating type, 39, 554 decimal re-encoding function, 278 decimal rounding control pragma, 214 decimal-point character, 191, 230 decimal128 suffix, dl or DL, 61 decimal32 suffix, df or DF, 61 decimal64 suffix, dd or DD, 61 DECIMAL_DIG macro, 25, 27, 457, 477, 509, 675 decimal_point structure member, 228, 230 declaration, 97 _Static_assert, 53 function, 130

dfma type-generic macro, 387 dfmal function, 276, 388, 484, 513 diagnostic, 12 diagnostic message, 5, 12 diagnostics header, 195 difftime function, 401, 402, 501 digit, 20, 205 digraph, 68 direct input/output function, 351 display device, 21 div function, 136, 356, 371, 372, 497 div_t type, 141, 356, 371, 372, 497 divide and round to narrower type, 275 division assignment operator (/=), 93 division operator (/), 84, 542 dMadddN function, 575 dMadddNx function, 575 dMdivdN function, 575 dMdivdNx function, 575 dMencbindN function, 578 dMencdecdN function, 578 dMfmadN function, 575 dMfmadNx function, 575 dMmuldN function, 575 dMmuldNx function, 575 dMsqrtdN function, 575 dMsqrtdNx function, 575 dMsubdN function, 575 dMsubdNx function, 575 dmul macro, 387, 582 dmul type-generic macro, 387 dmull function, 275, 484, 513 dMxadddN function, 575 dMxadddNx function, 575 dMxdivdN function, 575 dMxdivdNx function, 575 dMxfmadN function, 575 dMxfmadNx function, 575 dMxmuldN function, 575 dMxmuldNx function, 575 dMxsqrtdN function, 575 dMxsqrtdNx function, 575 dMxsubdN function, 575 dMxsubdNx function, 575 do keyword, 53 do statement, 156 documentation of implementation, 10 domain error, 237, 242–247, 251–260, 262, 263, 266 dot operator (.), 76 double _Complex type, 40 double _Complex type conversion, 48 double _Imaginary type, 541 double arithmetic, 15 double keyword, 53 double type, 39, 103

end-of-file indicator, 321, 328, 348–351, 353, 354, 430, 432 end-of-line indicator, 20 endif preprocessing directive, 168 enum keyword, 53 enum type, 40, 103, 109 enumerated type, 40 enumeration, 40, 109 enumeration constant, 35, 63 enumeration content, 116 enumeration member, 109 enumeration member type, 110 enumeration specifier, 109 enumeration tag, 37, 116 enumerator, 109 environment, 11 environment function, 367, 640 environment list, 369, 641 environmental consideration, 19 environmental limit, 21, 283, 324, 325, 327, 336, 363, 367, 368, 421, 628 EOF macro, 205, 321, 327, 342, 343, 345–351, 415, 425, 427–429, 431, 446, 495, 593, 631, 632, 634–636, 638, 656, 658, 659, 661–663 epoch, 403 equal-sign punctuator (=), 97, 109, 137 equality expression, 87 equality operator (==), 88 ERANGE macro, 209, 225, 237, 238, 359–361, 363, 435–438, 476, 603, 604 erf function, 259, 482, 532 erf type-generic macro, 386 erfc function, 260, 482, 532 erfc type-generic macro, 386 erfcd128 function, 260, 487 erfcd32 function, 260, 487 erfcd64 function, 260, 487 erfcdN function, 571 erfcdNx function, 571 erfcf function, 260, 482 erfcfN function, 571 erfcfNx function, 571 erfcl function, 260, 482 erfd128 function, 259, 487 erfd32 function, 259, 487 erfd64 function, 259, 487 erfdN function, 571 erfdNx function, 571 erff function, 259, 482 erffN function, 571 erffNx function, 571 erfl function, 259, 482 errno identifier, 149, 193, 196, 209, 225, 237, 238, 286, 325, 352, 353, 355, 356, 359– 361, 363, 384, 411–414, 430, 435–438,

exp2 function, 249, 250, 481, 516, 527 exp2 type-generic macro, 386 exp2d128 function, 249, 486 exp2d32 function, 249, 486 exp2d64 function, 249, 486 exp2dN function, 570 exp2dNx function, 570 exp2f function, 249, 481 exp2fN function, 570 exp2fNx function, 570 exp2l function, 249, 481 exp2m1 function, 250, 481, 516, 527 exp2m1 type-generic macro, 386 exp2m1d128 function, 250, 486 exp2m1d32 function, 250, 486 exp2m1d64 function, 250, 486 exp2m1dN function, 570 exp2m1dNx function, 570 exp2m1f function, 250, 481 exp2m1fN function, 570 exp2m1fNx function, 570 exp2m1l function, 250, 481 expd128 function, 248, 486 expd32 function, 248, 486 expd64 function, 248, 388, 486 expdN function, 570 expdNx function, 570 expf function, 248, 480 expfN function, 570 expfNx function, 570 expl function, 248, 480 explicit conversion, 46 expm1 function, 250, 481, 516, 527 expm1 type-generic macro, 386 expm1d128 function, 250, 486 expm1d32 function, 250, 486 expm1d64 function, 250, 486 expm1dN function, 570 expm1dNx function, 570 expm1f function, 250, 481 expm1fN function, 570 expm1fNx function, 570 expm1l function, 250, 481 exponent part, 61 exponential function complex, 200, 549 real, 248, 527 expression, 72, 118 assignment, 91 cast, 83 constant, 95 evaluation, 14 full, 152 parenthesized, 73 primary, 73 unary, 81

canonicalize, 34, 269 decodebin, 34, 279 decodedec, 34, 278 encodebin, 34, 279 encodedec, 34, 278 modf, 34, 255, 385 strto, 34, 360 wcsto, 34, 435 fclose function, 174, 327, 495 fdim function, 269, 270, 483, 536 fdim type-generic macro, 386 fdimd128 function, 270, 489 fdimd32 function, 270, 488 fdimd64 function, 270, 488 fdimdN function, 574 fdimdNx function, 574 fdimf function, 270, 483 fdimfN function, 574 fdimfNx function, 574 fdiml function, 270, 483 fdiv function, 275, 388, 484, 513, 582 fdiv type-generic macro, 387 fdivl function, 275, 484, 513 FE_ identifier prefix, 211, 212, 457 FE_ALL_EXCEPT macro, 93, 211, 477 FE_DEC_DOWNWARD macro, 211, 215, 477, 516 FE_DEC_DOWNWARD pragma, 187 FE_DEC_DYNAMIC pragma, 187, 215 fe_dec_getround function, 212, 218, 219, 477, 516, 563 fe_dec_setround function, 212, 215, 220, 477, 516, 563 FE_DEC_TONEAREST macro, 211, 212, 215, 477, 516 FE_DEC_TONEAREST pragma, 187 FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO macro, 211, 215, 477, 516 FE_DEC_TONEARESTFROMZERO pragma, 187 FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO macro, 211, 215, 477, 516 FE_DEC_TOWARDZERO pragma, 187 FE_DEC_UPWARD macro, 211, 215, 477, 516 FE_DEC_UPWARD pragma, 187 FE_DFL_ENV macro, 212, 477 FE_DFL_MODE macro, 211, 219, 477, 515 FE_DIVBYZERO macro, 211, 237, 477 FE_DOWNWARD macro, 211, 477, 515 FE_DOWNWARD pragma, 187 FE_DYNAMIC pragma, 187, 213, 477 FE_INEXACT macro, 211, 215, 477, 534 FE_INVALID macro, 211, 218, 237, 477

ffma type-generic macro, 387 ffmal function, 276, 484, 513 fgetc function, 322, 325, 348, 349, 351, 496 fgetpos function, 323, 324, 352, 353, 496, 587, 597, 604 fgets function, 322, 348, 349, 496, 597, 638 fgetwc function, 322, 325, 429, 430, 431, 502 fgetws function, 322, 430, 502, 597 field width, 330, 416 file, 324 access function, 327, 628 name, 324 operation, 325, 627 position indicator, 321, 323, 324, 328, 348, 349, 351–353, 430, 432 positioning function, 352 file name, 324 file position indicator, 324 file scope, 35, 159 FILE type, 174, 321, 322, 324, 326, 327, 329, 330, 338, 346, 348–355, 416, 422, 427, 430– 432, 495, 496, 502, 503, 595, 627–630, 634, 635, 655, 656, 658, 659 FILENAME_MAX macro, 321, 495 finite number, 541 fixed underlying type, 109 flag, 330, 416 flexible array member, 107 float _Complex type, 40 float _Complex type conversion, 48 float _Imaginary type, 541 float arithmetic, 15 float keyword, 53 float type, 39, 103 float type conversion, 47, 48 float_t type, 234, 479, 520, 563, 565, 603, 606 floating constant, 60 floating suffix, f or F, 61 floating type, 40, 190 floating type conversion, 47, 48, 517 floating-point accuracy, 25, 63, 73, 359, 517 floating-point arithmetic function, 234, 523 floating-point classification function, 238 floating-point control mode, 210, 520 floating-point environment, 210, 518, 520 dynamic, 210 floating-point environment header, 210, 457 floating-point exception, 210, 215, 523 floating-point number, 24, 39 floating-point rounding mode, 25 floating-point status flag, 210, 520 floor, 7 floor function, 235, 261, 482, 512, 533 floor type-generic macro, 386 floord128 function, 261, 487 floord32 function, 261, 487

fma type-generic macro, 386 fmad128 function, 274, 489 fmad32 function, 274, 489 fmad64 function, 274, 489 fMaddfN function, 575 fMaddfNx function, 575 fmadN function, 574 fmadNx function, 574 fmaf function, 274, 484 fmafN function, 574 fmafNx function, 574 fmal function, 236, 274, 484 fmax function, 270, 271, 483, 515, 536 fmax type-generic macro, 386 fmaxd128 function, 270, 489 fmaxd32 function, 270, 489 fmaxd64 function, 270, 489 fmaxf function, 270, 483 fmaximum function, 271, 272, 484, 513, 536 fmaximum type-generic macro, 386 fmaximum_mag type-generic macro, 386 fmaximum_mag_num type-generic macro, 386 fmaximum_num type-generic macro, 386 fmaximum_mag function, 271, 272, 273, 484, 513, 536 fmaximum_mag_num function, 272, 273, 484, 513, 536, 537 fmaximum_mag_numd128 function, 273, 489 fmaximum_mag_numd32 function, 273, 489 fmaximum_mag_numd64 function, 273, 489 fmaximum_mag_numdN function, 574 fmaximum_mag_numdNx function, 574 fmaximum_mag_numf function, 273, 484 fmaximum_mag_numfN function, 574 fmaximum_mag_numfNx function, 574 fmaximum_mag_numl function, 273, 484 fmaximum_magd128 function, 271, 489 fmaximum_magd32 function, 271, 489 fmaximum_magd64 function, 271, 489 fmaximum_magdN function, 574 fmaximum_magdNx function, 574 fmaximum_magf function, 271, 484 fmaximum_magfN function, 574 fmaximum_magfNx function, 574 fmaximum_magl function, 271, 484 fmaximum_num function, 271, 272, 484, 513, 515, 536, 537, 544 fmaximum_numd128 function, 272, 489 fmaximum_numd32 function, 272, 489 fmaximum_numd64 function, 272, 489 fmaximum_numdN function, 574 fmaximum_numdNx function, 574 fmaximum_numf function, 272, 484 fmaximum_numfN function, 574 fmaximum_numfNx function, 574 fmaximum_numl function, 272, 484

:
+, 331, 416

fminimum_numfNx function, 574 fminimum_numl function, 273, 484 fminimumd128 function, 271, 489 fminimumd32 function, 271, 489 fminimumd64 function, 271, 489 fminimumdN function, 574 fminimumdNx function, 574 fminimumf function, 271, 484 fminimumfN function, 574 fminimumfNx function, 574 fminimuml function, 271, 484 fminl function, 270, 483 fMmulfN function, 575 fMmulfNx function, 575 fmod function, 265, 266, 483, 534, 535, 603 fmod type-generic macro, 386 fmodd128 function, 265, 488 fmodd32 function, 265, 488 fmodd64 function, 265, 488 fmoddN function, 572 fmoddNx function, 572 fmodf function, 265, 483 fmodfN function, 572 fmodfNx function, 572 fmodl function, 265, 483 fMsqrtfN function, 575 fMsqrtfNx function, 575 fMsubfN function, 575 fMsubfNx function, 575 fmul function, 275, 484, 513, 582 fmul type-generic macro, 387 fmull function, 275, 484, 513 fMxaddfN function, 575 fMxaddfNx function, 575 fMxdivfN function, 575 fMxdivfNx function, 575 fMxfmafN function, 575 fMxfmafNx function, 575 fMxmulfN function, 575 fMxmulfNx function, 575 fMxsqrtfN function, 575 fMxsqrtfNx function, 575 fMxsubfN function, 575 fMxsubfNx function, 575 fopen function, 174, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 495, 596, 607, 628 FOPEN_MAX macro, 321, 325, 326, 495, 627 fopen_s function, 496, 627, 628, 629 for keyword, 53 for, 156 form feed, 21 form-feed character, 20, 52 form-feed escape sequence (\f), 21, 65, 207 format conversion of integer types header, 457 format flag

:
FP_FAST_DMSQRTDN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMSQRTDNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_DMSUBDN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMSUBDNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_DMULL macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_DMXADDDN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXADDDNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_DMXDIVDN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXDIVDNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_DMXFMADN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXFMADNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_DMXMULDN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXMULDNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_DMXSQRTDN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXSQRTDNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_DMXSUBDN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXSUBDNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_DSQRTL macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_DSUBL macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_FADD macro, 236, 479, 565
FP_FAST_FADDL macro, 236, 479, 565
FP_FAST_FDIV macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_FDIVL macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_FFMA macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_FFMAL macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_FMA macro, 236, 479, 565
FP_FAST_FMAD128 macro, 236, 484
FP_FAST_FMAD32 macro, 236, 484
FP_FAST_FMAD64 macro, 236, 484
FP_FAST_FMADDFN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMADDFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMADN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMAFNX macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMAF macro, 236, 479, 564
FP_FAST_FMAFN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMAFNX macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMAL macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_FMDIVFN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMDIVFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMFMAFN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMFMAFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMMULFN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMMULFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMSQRTFN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMSQRTFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMSUBFN macro, 565
FP_FAST_FMSUBFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMUL macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_FMULL macro, 236, 479
FP_FAST_FMXADDFN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXADDFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXDIVFN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXDIVFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXFMAFN macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXFMAFNX macro, 566
FP_FAST_FMXMULFN macro, 566

D, 332, 340, 418, 423 DD, 332, 340, 418, 423 E, 407 H, 332, 340, 418, 423 h, 331, 339, 417, 423 hh, 331, 339, 417, 423 j, 332, 339, 417, 423 L, 332, 340, 418, 423 l, 331, 339, 417, 423 ll, 332, 339, 417, 423 O, 407 t, 332, 339, 417, 423 wfN, 332, 340, 418, 423 wN, 332, 339, 418, 423 z, 332, 339, 417, 423 formatted input/output function, 229, 330, 630 wide character, 416, 655 forward reference, 5 FP_ identifier prefix, 235, 457 FP_CONTRACT pragma, vi, 73, 151, 186, 187, 238, 479, 543, 593, 601 FP_FAST_D32ADDD128 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32ADDD64 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32DIVD128 macro, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32DIVD64 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32FMAD128 macro, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32FMAD64 macro, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32MULD128 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32MULD64 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32SQRTD128 macro, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32SQRTD64 macro, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32SUBD128 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32SUBD64 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D64ADDD128 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D64DIVD128 macro, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D64FMAD128 macro, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D64MULD128 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D64SQRTD128 macro, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D64SUBD128 macro, 236, 484 FP_FAST_DADDL macro, 236, 479, 565 FP_FAST_DDIVL macro, 236, 479 FP_FAST_DFMAL macro, 236, 479 FP_FAST_DMADDDN macro, 565 FP_FAST_FMADDDNX macro, 566 FP_FAST_DMDIVDN macro, 565 FP_FAST_FMDIVDNX macro, 566 FP_FAST_DMFMADN macro, 565 FP_FAST_FMFMADNX macro, 566 FP_FAST_DMMULDN macro, 565 FP_FAST_FMMULDNX macro, 566

fromfpd64 function, 264, 488 fromfpdN function, 572 fromfpdNx function, 572 fromfpf function, 264, 483 fromfpfN function, 572 fromfpfNx function, 572 fromfpl function, 264, 483 fromfpx function, 236, 265, 483, 513, 517, 534 fromfpx function, 265 fromfpx type-generic macro, 386 fromfpxd128 function, 265, 488 fromfpxd32 function, 265, 488 fromfpxd64 function, 265, 488 fromfpxdN function, 572 fromfpxdNx function, 572 fromfpxf function, 265, 483 fromfpxfN function, 572 fromfpxfNx function, 572 fromfpxl function, 265, 483 fscanf function, 223, 224, 322, 338, 342–346, 458, 496, 604, 630 fscanf_s function, 496, 630, 631, 632, 634, 635 fseek function, 322, 325, 328, 351, 352, 353, 354, 432, 496, 597 fsetpos function, 323, 324, 328, 351, 352, 353, 432, 496, 597, 604 fsqrt function, 276, 484, 513, 582 fsqrt type-generic macro, 387 fsqrtl function, 276, 484, 513 fsub function, 274, 484, 513, 582 fsub type-generic macro, 387 fsubl function, 274, 388, 484, 513, 584 ftell function, 352, 353, 496, 587, 597, 604 full declarator, 127 full expression, 152 fully buffered, 324 fully buffered stream, 324 function argument, 75, 160 body, 159 byte input/output, 322 call, 75 library, 193 declarator, 130 definition, 130, 159 designator, 50 image, 21 inline, 124 library, 11, 193 name length, 22, 55, 190 no-return, 125 parameter, 13, 75, 98, 160 prototype, 13, 35, 130, 160, 234 prototype scope, 36, 128, 129 recursive call, 76 return, 158, 518

:
I macro, 203, 545

hexadecimal digit), 65 hh format modifier, 331, 339, 417, 423 hidden, 36 high-order bit, 4, 5 horizontal tab, 21 horizontal-tab character, 20, 52 horizontal-tab escape sequence (\t), 21, 65, 206, 207, 452 hosted execution environment, 9, 12, 13 HUGE_VAL macro, 234, 238, 359, 435, 479, 523 HUGE_VAL_D128 macro, 235, 490 HUGE_VAL_D32 macro, 234, 235, 490 HUGE_VAL_D64 macro, 235, 490 HUGE_VAL_DN macro, 564 HUGE_VAL_DNX macro, 564 HUGE_VAL_FN macro, 564 HUGE_VAL_FNX macro, 564 HUGE_VALF macro, 234, 238, 359, 435, 479, 523 HUGE_VALL macro, 234, 238, 359, 435, 479, 523 hyperbolic function complex, 199, 546 real, 246, 526 hypot function, 257, 482, 512, 516, 530, 545 hypot type-generic macro, 386 hypotd128 function, 257, 487 hypotd32 function, 257, 487 hypotd64 function, 257, 487 hypotdN function, 571 hypotdNx function, 571 hypotf function, 257, 482 hypotfN function, 571 hypotfNx function, 571 hypotl function, 257, 482

indeterminately sequenced, 14, 76, 78, 93 indirection operator (*), 75, 82 inequality operator (!=), 88 infinitary, 237 infinity, 541 INFINITY macro, 26, 101, 102, 203, 235, 333, 358–361, 419, 434–436, 458, 478, 479, 512, 543, 544 initial position, 21 initial shift state, 20 initialization, 12, 37, 50, 79, 136, 520 in block, 152 initialized, 12 initializer, 136 permitted form, 95 string literal, 50 inline, 124 inline definition, 124 inline function, 124 inline keyword, 53 inner scope, 36 input failure, 428, 429, 631, 632, 634–636, 638, 656, 658, 659, 661–663 input/output device, 14 input/output function character, 348, 638 direct, 351 formatted, 330, 630 wide character, 416, 655 wide character, 429 formatted, 416, 655 input/output header, 321, 458, 626 INT identifier prefix, 319, 320, 458, 495 int identifier prefix, 317, 458, 495, 677 int keyword, 53 int type, 39, 47, 59, 103 int type conversion, 46–48 intN_t type, 317 INTN_C macro, 320 INTN_MAX macro, 319 INTN_MIN macro, 319, 320 int8_t type, 317 INT_FAST identifier prefix, 319, 495 int_fast identifier prefix, 318, 495, 677 INT_LEAST identifier prefix, 319, 495 int_least identifier prefix, 317, 320, 495 int_curr_symbol structure member, 228, 231, 232 INT_FASTN_MAX macro, 319 INT_FASTN_MIN macro, 319, 320 int_fast16_t type, 299, 318 int_fast32_t type, 223, 299, 318 int_fast64_t type, 299, 318 int_fast8_t type, 299, 318 int_fastN_t type, 318

j format modifier, 332, 339, 417, 423 jmp_buf type, 283, 284, 491, 673 jump statement, 156

memory_order_acq_rel, 295, 296, 297, 300, 303, 491 memory_order_acquire, 295, 297, 300, 303, 491 memory_order_consume, 295, 297, 300, 491 memory_order_relaxed, 149, 295, 296, 297, 491 memory_order_release, 295, 297, 300, 491 memory_order_seq_cst, 19, 42, 78, 92, 93, 293, 295, 297, 491 mtx_plain, 390, 394, 500 mtx_recursive, 390, 394, 500 mtx_timed, 391, 394, 500 thrd_busy, 391, 395, 500 thrd_error, 391, 392–399, 500 thrd_nomem, 391, 392, 395, 500 thrd_success, 391, 392–399, 500

,

catanh, 199, 200, 386, 475, 545, 547 catanhf, 200, 475 catanhl, 200, 475 catanl, 198, 475 catanpi, 457 cbrt, 74, 256, 387, 481, 529 cbrtd128, 256, 487 cbrtd32, 256, 487 cbrtd64, 256, 487 cbrtf, 74, 256, 387, 481 cbrtl, 74, 256, 387, 481 ccompoundn, 457 ccos, 198, 386, 475, 545 ccosf, 198, 475 ccosf64x, 584 ccosh, 200, 386, 475, 545, 547, 548 ccoshf, 200, 475 ccoshl, 200, 475 ccosl, 198, 475 ccospi, 457 ceil, 235, 261, 482, 512, 532, 533, 534 ceild128, 34, 261, 487 ceild32, 34, 261, 487 ceild64, 34, 261, 487 ceilf, 261, 482 ceill, 261, 265, 482 cerf, 457 cerfc, 457 cexp, 200, 201, 386, 475, 549, 550 cexp10, 457 cexp10m1, 457 cexp2, 457 cexp2m1, 457 cexpf, 201, 475 cexpl, 201, 475 cexpm1, 457 cimag, 202, 203, 204, 476, 543, 545, 551, 582 cimagf, 202, 476 cimagl, 202, 388, 476 clearerr, 354, 496 clgamma, 457 clock, 400, 401, 404, 501, 604 clog, 201, 386, 476, 550 clog10, 457 clog10p1, 457 clog1p, 457 clog2, 457 clog2p1, 457 clogf, 201, 388, 476 clogl, 201, 476 clogp1, 457 cnd_broadcast, 391, 392, 393, 500 cnd_destroy, 392, 500 cnd_init, 392, 500 cnd_signal, 392, 393, 500

:
csinl, 198, 475
csinpi, 457
csqrt, 202, 386, 388, 476, 545, 550
csqrtf, 202, 476
csqrtl, 202, 476
ctan, 199, 386, 475, 545
ctanf, 199, 475
ctanh, 200, 386, 475, 545, 549
ctanhf, 200, 475
ctanhl, 200, 475
ctanl, 199, 475
ctanpi, 457
ctgamma, 457
ctime, 404, 405, 501
ctime_s, 501, 653, 654
d32addd128, 274, 489
d32addd64, 274, 489
d32divd128, 275, 489
d32divd64, 275, 388, 489
d32fmad128, 276, 489
d32fmad64, 276, 489
d32muld128, 275, 489
d32muld64, 275, 489
d32sqrtd128, 276, 489
d32sqrtd64, 276, 489
d32subd128, 275, 388, 489
d32subd64, 275, 489
d64addd128, 274, 388, 489
d64divd128, 275, 489
d64fmad128, 276, 388, 489
d64muld128, 275, 489
d64sqrtd128, 276, 489
d64subd128, 275, 489
daddl, 274, 388, 484, 513
ddivl, 275, 484, 513, 516, 584
decodebind128, 279, 490
decodebind32, 279, 490
decodebind64, 279, 385, 387, 490
decodedecd128, 278, 490
decodedecd32, 278, 490
decodedecd64, 278, 385, 387, 490
dfmal, 276, 388, 484, 513
difftime, 401, 402, 501
div, 136, 356, 371, 372, 497
dmull, 275, 484, 513
dsqrtl, 276, 484, 513
dsubl, 274, 484, 513, 584
encodebind128, 279, 490
encodebind32, 279, 490
encodebind64, 279, 385, 387, 490
encodedecd128, 278, 490
encodedecd32, 278, 490
encodedecd64, 278, 385, 387, 490
erf, 259, 482, 532
erfc, 260, 482, 532
erfcd128, 260, 487

cnd_timedwait, 392, 393, 500 cnd_wait, 392, 393, 500 compoundn, 256, 481, 516, 530 compoundnd128, 256, 487 compoundnd32, 256, 487 compoundnd64, 256, 487 compoundnf, 256, 482 compoundnl, 256, 482 conj, 203, 476, 545–550, 582 conjf, 203, 476 conjl, 203, 476 copysign, 203, 266, 267, 483, 514, 529, 534, 535, 543, 544 copysignd128, 267, 488 copysignd32, 267, 488 copysignd64, 267, 488 copysignf, 267, 483 copysignl, 267, 388, 483 cos, 136, 243, 386, 480, 517, 525, 551 cosd128, 243, 485 cosd32, 243, 485 cosd64, 243, 485 cosf, 243, 480 cosh, 247, 386, 480, 517, 526, 551 coshd128, 247, 485 coshd32, 247, 485 coshd64, 247, 485 coshf, 247, 480 coshl, 247, 480 cosl, 243, 480 cospi, 245, 480, 517, 526 cospid128, 245, 485 cospid32, 245, 485 cospid64, 245, 485 cospif, 245, 480 cospil, 245, 480 cpow, 201, 202, 386, 476, 550 cpowf, 201, 476 cpowf128, 584 cpowl, 201, 388, 476 cpown, 457 cpowr, 457 cproj, 203, 476, 545, 582 cprojf, 203, 388, 476 cprojl, 203, 388, 476 creal, 202, 203, 204, 388, 476, 543, 545, 551, 582 crealf, 204, 476 creall, 204, 476 crootn, 457 crsqrt, 457 csin, 198, 199, 386, 475, 545 csinf, 198, 475 csinh, 200, 386, 475, 545, 548 csinhf, 200, 475 csinhl, 200, 475

fabsd128, 256, 487 fabsd32, 256, 487 fabsd64, 256, 487 fabsf, 256, 482 fabsl, 256, 482 fadd, 274, 484, 513, 582 faddl, 274, 484, 513 fclose, 174, 327, 495 fdim, 269, 270, 483, 536 fdimd128, 270, 489 fdimd32, 270, 488 fdimd64, 270, 488 fdimf, 270, 483 fdiml, 270, 483 fdiv, 275, 388, 484, 513, 582 fdivl, 275, 484, 513 fe_dec_getround, 212, 218, 219, 477, 516, 563 fe_dec_setround, 212, 215, 220, 477, 516, 563 feclearexcept, 93, 215, 216, 218, 221, 477, 514, 534 fegetenv, 220, 221, 477, 515, 594 fegetexceptflag, 215, 216, 217, 477, 514, 594, 602 fegetmode, 218, 219, 477, 514 fegetround, 211, 214, 218, 219, 477, 514, 515, 529, 533, 563 feholdexcept, 93, 220, 221, 477, 515, 534, 594 feof, 343, 348, 354, 430, 496 feraiseexcept, 215, 216, 477, 520, 587, 603 ferror, 343, 348, 355, 430, 496 fesetenv, 213, 221, 477, 515, 594 fesetexcept, 216, 217, 477, 514 fesetexceptflag, 215, 217, 477, 514, 594 fesetmode, 213, 218, 219, 477, 515 fesetround, 9, 25, 100, 211, 213, 214, 218, 219, 220, 477, 514, 515, 529, 533, 534, 563 fetestexcept, 215, 217, 218, 477, 514, 534 fetestexceptflag, 217, 477, 514 feupdateenv, 93, 213, 220, 221, 477, 515, 534, 594 fflush, 327, 328, 495, 596 ffma, 276, 484, 513, 582 ffmal, 276, 484, 513 fgetc, 322, 325, 348, 349, 351, 496 fgetpos, 323, 324, 352, 353, 496, 587, 597, 604 fgets, 322, 348, 349, 496, 597, 638 fgetwc, 322, 325, 429, 430, 431, 502 fgetws, 322, 430, 502, 597

fminimum_mag_numd64, 273, 489 fminimum_mag_numf, 273, 484 fminimum_mag_numl, 273, 484 fminimum_magd128, 272, 489 fminimum_magd32, 272, 489 fminimum_magd64, 272, 489 fminimum_magf, 272, 484 fminimum_magl, 272, 484 fminimum_num, 271, 272, 273, 484, 513, 515, 536, 537 fminimum_numd128, 273, 489 fminimum_numd32, 273, 489 fminimum_numd64, 273, 489 fminimum_numf, 272, 484 fminimum_numl, 273, 484 fminimumd128, 271, 489 fminimumd32, 271, 489 fminimumd64, 271, 489 fminimumf, 271, 484 fminimuml, 271, 484 fminl, 270, 483 fmod, 265, 266, 483, 534, 535, 603 fmodd128, 265, 488 fmodd32, 265, 488 fmodd64, 265, 488 fmodf, 265, 483 fmodl, 265, 483 fmul, 275, 484, 513, 582 fmull, 275, 484, 513 fopen, 174, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 495, 596, 607, 628 fopen_s, 496, 627, 628, 629 fprintf_s, 496, 630 fputc, 21, 322, 325, 349, 350, 352, 496 fputs, 184, 322, 349, 496 fputwc, 322, 325, 430, 432, 502 fputws, 322, 430, 431, 502 fread, 172, 174, 322, 351, 496, 597 free, 365, 366, 378, 497, 597, 673 free_aligned_sized, 366, 497, 677 free_sized, 365, 366, 497, 677 freopen, 323, 324, 329, 495 freopen_s, 496, 629, 630 frexp, 250, 251, 481, 527, 576, 587, 588 frexpd128, 250, 486 frexpd32, 250, 486 frexpd64, 250, 486 frexpf, 250, 481 frexpl, 250, 481 fromfp, 236, 264, 265, 483, 513, 517, 534 fromfpd128, 264, 488 fromfpd32, 264, 488 fromfpd64, 264, 488 fromfpf, 264, 483 fromfpl, 264, 483 fromfpx, 236, 265, 483, 513, 517, 534

isalnum, 205, 207, 476 isalpha, 205, 451, 476, 605 isblank, 205, 206, 476, 605 iscntrl, 205, 206, 207, 476 isdigit, 205, 206, 207, 229, 476 isgraph, 206, 451, 476 islower, 4, 205, 206, 207, 208, 476, 605 isprint, 21, 206, 476 ispunct, 205, 206, 207, 476, 605 isspace, 191, 205, 206, 207, 476, 605 isupper, 205, 207, 208, 476, 605 iswalnum, 452, 453, 454, 504 iswalpha, 451, 452, 454, 504, 605 iswblank, 452, 454, 504, 605 iswcntrl, 452, 453, 454, 504 iswctype, 454, 455, 504, 599, 605 iswdigit, 452, 453, 454, 504 iswgraph, 451, 453, 454, 504 iswlower, 452, 453, 454, 455, 504, 605 iswprint, 451, 453, 454, 504 iswpunct, 451, 452, 453, 454, 504, 605 iswspace, 191, 451, 452, 453, 454, 504, 605 iswupper, 452, 453, 454, 455, 504, 605 iswxdigit, 454, 504 isxdigit, 207, 229, 476 labs, 371, 497 ldexp, 251, 252, 481, 528, 576 ldexpd128, 251, 486 ldexpd32, 251, 486 ldexpd64, 251, 486 ldexpf, 251, 481 ldexpl, 251, 481 ldiv, 136, 356, 371, 372, 497 lgamma, 260, 482, 532 lgammad128, 260, 487 lgammad32, 260, 487 lgammad64, 260, 487 lgammaf, 260, 482 lgammal, 260, 482 llabs, 371, 497 lldiv, 136, 356, 371, 372, 497 llogb, 237, 252, 481, 513, 528 llogbd128, 252, 486 llogbd32, 252, 486 llogbd64, 252, 486 llogbf, 252, 481 llogbl, 252, 481 llquantexpd128, 277, 490 llquantexpd32, 277, 490 llquantexpd64, 277, 490 llrint, 262, 482, 517, 533, 534, 588 llrintd128, 262, 488 llrintd32, 262, 488 llrintd64, 262, 488 llrintf, 262, 482

logp1d32, 253, 486 logp1d64, 253, 486 logp1f, 253, 481 logp1l, 253, 481 longjmp, 283, 284, 368, 369, 491, 594, 597, 673 lrint, 262, 482, 517, 533, 534, 588 lrintd128, 262, 488 lrintd32, 262, 487 lrintd64, 262, 488 lrintf, 262, 482 lrintl, 262, 482 lround, 263, 482, 513, 534, 588 lroundd128, 263, 488 lroundd32, 263, 488 lroundd64, 263, 488 lroundf, 263, 482 lroundl, 263, 483 mblen, 372, 447, 497 mbrlen, 447, 503 mbrtoc16, 411, 412, 502 mbrtoc32, 413, 502 mbrtoc8, 410, 411, 502, 675 mbrtowc, 325, 341, 420, 421, 446, 447, 448, 449, 503, 644, 670 mbsinit, 446, 447, 503 mbsrtowcs, 446, 449, 503, 669 mbsrtowcs_s, 504, 669, 670 mbstowcs, 68, 373, 374, 433, 448, 497 mbstowcs_s, 498, 644, 645 mbtowc, 66, 372, 373, 447, 497 memalignment, 9, 374, 498, 676 memccpy, 376, 498, 675 memcmp, 42, 174, 301, 379, 499 memcpy, 42, 72, 171, 194, 294, 301, 376, 498, 514 memcpy_s, 499, 646 memmove, 72, 376, 377, 498, 514, 593 memmove_s, 499, 646, 647 memset, 294, 383, 499, 651 memset_explicit, 383, 499, 676 memset_s, 499, 651 mktime, 402, 501 modf, 255, 385, 386, 481, 529 modfd128, 255, 486 modfd32, 255, 486 modfd64, 255, 486 modff, 255, 481 modfl, 255, 481 mtx_destroy, 393, 500 mtx_init, 390, 391, 393, 394, 500 mtx_lock, 394, 500, 598 mtx_timedlock, 394, 500, 598 mtx_trylock, 394, 395, 500 mtx_unlock, 394, 395, 500, 598 nan, 267, 333, 418, 419, 483, 512, 535

powrl, 258, 482 printf_s, 496, 631, 632 puts, 185, 315, 322, 350, 496 putwc, 322, 432, 502 putwchar, 322, 432, 502 qsort, 370, 371, 497, 588 qsort_s, 498, 641, 642, 643 quantized128, 276, 489 quantized32, 276, 489 quantized64, 276, 489 quantumd128, 277, 489 quantumd32, 277, 489 quantumd64, 277, 489 quick_exit, 286, 367, 368, 369, 497, 588, 594, 597, 604, 677 raise, 285, 286, 287, 294, 367, 491, 594, 595 rand, 356, 363, 364, 497 realloc, 364, 365, 366, 367, 497, 588, 597, 604, 673, 677 remainder, 266, 388, 483, 513, 516, 535, 603 remainderd128, 266, 488 remainderd32, 266, 488 remainderd64, 266, 488 remainderf, 266, 483 remainderl, 266, 483 remove, 325, 326, 495, 604, 627 remquo, 266, 483, 513, 516, 535, 587, 603 remquof, 266, 483 remquol, 266, 483 rename, 326, 495, 604 rewind, 328, 351, 353, 354, 432, 496 rint, 262, 482, 512, 517, 533, 534 rintd128, 262, 487 rintd32, 262, 487 rintd64, 262, 487 rintf, 262, 482 rintl, 262, 482 rootn, 258, 482, 516, 531 rootnd128, 258, 487 rootnd32, 258, 487 rootnd64, 258, 487 rootnf, 258, 482 rootnl, 258, 482 round, 235, 262, 263, 482, 512, 533 roundd128, 263, 488 roundd32, 262, 488 roundd64, 263, 488 roundeven, 235, 263, 264, 483, 512, 534 roundevend128, 263, 488 roundevend32, 263, 488 roundevend64, 263, 488 roundevenf, 263, 483 roundevenl, 263, 483 roundf, 262, 482

sinhd64, 248, 485 sinhf, 248, 480 sinhl, 248, 480 sinl, 243, 480 sinpi, 245, 246, 480, 517, 526 sinpid128, 246, 485 sinpid32, 246, 485 sinpid64, 246, 485 sinpif, 245, 480 sinpil, 246, 480 snprintf, 345, 347, 357, 358, 405, 495, 632, 679 snprintf_s, 496, 632, 633 snwprintf_s, 503, 657, 658 sprintf, 345, 348, 495, 633 sprintf_s, 496, 633 sqrt, 151, 259, 386, 482, 513, 532, 537 sqrtd128, 259, 487 sqrtd32, 259, 388, 487 sqrtd64, 259, 487 sqrtf, 259, 482 sqrtl, 259, 482 srand, 363, 364, 497 sscanf, 343, 345, 348, 495 sscanf_s, 496, 634, 637 stdc_bit_ceil_uc, 311, 494 stdc_bit_ceil_ui, 311, 494 stdc_bit_ceil_ul, 311, 494 stdc_bit_ceil_us, 311, 494 stdc_bit_floor_uc, 311, 494 stdc_bit_floor_ui, 311, 494 stdc_bit_floor_ul, 311, 494 stdc_bit_floor_ull, 311, 494 stdc_bit_floor_us, 311, 494 stdc_bit_width_uc, 310, 494 stdc_bit_width_ui, 310, 494 stdc_bit_width_ul, 310, 494 stdc_bit_width_ull, 310, 494 stdc_bit_width_us, 310, 494 stdc_count_ones_uc, 309, 493 stdc_count_ones_ui, 309, 493 stdc_count_ones_ul, 309, 494 stdc_count_ones_ull, 309, 494 stdc_count_ones_us, 309, 493 stdc_count_zeros_uc, 309, 493 stdc_count_zeros_ui, 309, 493 stdc_count_zeros_ul, 309, 493 stdc_count_zeros_ull, 309, 493 stdc_count_zeros_us, 309, 493 stdc_first_leading_one_uc, 307, 493 stdc_first_leading_one_ui, 307, 493 stdc_first_leading_one_ul, 307, 493

stdc_trailing_zeros_ul, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_zeros_ull, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_zeros_us, 306, 493 strcat, 378, 498 strcat_s, 499, 648, 649 strcmp, 379, 380, 499 strcoll, 9, 229, 379, 380, 499 strcpy, 176–178, 343, 377, 498 strcpy_s, 499, 647 strcspn, 381, 499 strdup, 9, 377, 378, 498, 675 strerror, 9, 355, 383, 384, 499, 597, 598, 605 strerror_s, 384, 499, 651, 652 strerrorlen_s, 499, 652 strfromd, 357, 433, 497, 513, 514 strfromd128, 358, 498 strfromd32, 358, 498 strfromd64, 358, 498 strfromencf128, 579, 580 strfromf, 357, 433, 497 strfroml, 357, 497 strftime, 229, 404, 406, 409, 445, 501, 588, 596, 598, 605, 653, 654, 675, 679 strlen, 378, 384, 499 strncat, 378, 498 strncat_s, 499, 649, 650 strncmp, 184, 379, 380, 499 strncpy, 377, 498 strncpy_s, 499, 647, 648 strndup, 9, 378, 498, 675 strnlen_s, 499, 647–649, 652 strspn, 382, 499 strtod, 63, 267, 339, 340, 344, 357, 358, 433, 497, 513, 514, 518, 519, 587, 604 strtod128, 360, 498, 579, 604 strtod32, 360, 498, 604 strtod64, 360, 361, 498, 604 strtof, 267, 344, 357, 358, 497, 587, 604 strtoimax, 224, 225, 478 strtok, 9, 382, 383, 499, 598 strtok_s, 383, 499, 650, 651 strtol, 225, 339, 340, 344, 357, 362, 363, 497 strtold, 267, 344, 357, 358, 497, 587, 604 strtoll, 225, 344, 357, 362, 363, 497 strtoul, 225, 340, 344, 357, 362, 363, 497 strtoull, 225, 344, 357, 362, 363, 497 strtoumax, 224, 225, 478 strxfrm, 9, 229, 380, 499, 598 swprintf, 426, 428, 502, 657, 658 swprintf_s, 503, 657, 658 swscanf, 426, 427, 428, 502 swscanf_s, 503, 658, 661

towlower, 455, 456, 504 towupper, 455, 456, 504 trunc, 235, 264, 483, 512, 534 truncd128, 264, 488 truncd32, 264, 488 truncd64, 264, 488 truncf, 264, 483 truncl, 264, 483 tss_create, 397, 398, 501, 598, 599 tss_delete, 398, 501, 588, 599 tss_get, 398, 501, 599 tss_set, 398, 399, 501, 599 ufromfp, 236, 264, 265, 483, 513, 517, 534 ufromfpd128, 264, 488 ufromfpd32, 264, 488 ufromfpd64, 264, 488 ufromfpf, 264, 483 ufromfpl, 264, 483 ufromfpx, 236, 265, 483, 513, 517, 534 ufromfpxd128, 265, 488 ufromfpxd32, 265, 488 ufromfpxd64, 265, 488 ufromfpxf, 265, 483 ufromfpxl, 265, 483 ungetc, 322, 350, 351, 353, 458, 496, 587, 597, 607, 679 ungetwc, 322, 432, 433, 502, 587, 607 va_arg, 223, 289, 290–292, 335, 346–348, 421, 427–429, 491, 595, 635–637, 659, 661, 662 va_copy, 193, 289, 290, 292, 491, 587, 595, 679 va_end, 193, 289, 290, 291, 292, 346–348, 427–429, 491, 587, 595, 597, 635–637, 659, 661, 662 va_start, 289, 290, 291, 292, 346–348, 427–429, 491, 595, 635–637, 659, 661, 662, 676 vfprintf, 322, 346, 495, 597, 634 vfprintf_s, 496, 634, 635–637 vfscanf, 322, 346, 495, 597 vfscanf_s, 496, 635, 636, 637 vfwprintf, 322, 427, 502, 597, 659 vfwprintf_s, 503, 658, 659 vfwscanf, 322, 427, 428, 432, 502, 597 vfwscanf_s, 503, 659, 661, 662 vprintf, 322, 346, 347, 495, 597, 635 vprintf_s, 496, 635, 636, 637 vscanf, 322, 346, 347, 496, 597, 678 vscanf_s, 496, 635, 636–638 vsnprintf, 346, 347, 496, 597, 636 vsnprintf_s, 496, 635, 636, 637 vsnwprintf_s, 503, 659, 660 vsprintf, 346, 347, 348, 496, 597, 637 vsprintf_s, 496, 635, 636, 637

:
__VA_ARGS__, 178, 179, 180, 185, 678
__VA_OPT__, 178, 179–181, 676
__func__, 55, 56, 195, 590, 679
__STDC_, 190
__STDC_VERSION_, 192
ATOMIC_, 458
atomic_, 458
c, 385, 386
ckd_, 458
cnd_, 459
cr_, 458, 516, 524
d, 386, 387
d128, 387
d32, 387
d64, 385, 387
DBL_, 457
DEC, 478
DEC128_, 30, 457
DEC32_, 30, 457
DEC64_, 30, 457
DEC_, 457
E, 209, 457
FE_, 211, 212, 457
FLT_, 457
FP_, 235, 457
INT, 319, 320, 458, 495
int, 317, 458, 495, 677
INT_FAST, 319, 495
int_fast, 318, 495, 677
INT_LEAST, 319, 495
int_least, 317, 320, 495
is, 457–459
LC_, 228, 457
LDBL_, 457
llquantexpd, 277, 278, 387
MATH_, 458

errno, 149, 193, 196, 209, 225, 237, 238, 286, 325, 352, 353, 355, 356, 359–361, 363, 384, 411–414, 430, 435–438, 448– 450, 476, 594, 595, 603, 604, 607, 625, 626, 651 identifier prefix

__STDC_HOSTED__, 187 __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__, 9, 24, 188, 189, 191, 490, 511, 537–539, 552–554 __STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__, 24, 102, 188, 189, 191, 541 __STDC_IEC_60559_DFP__, 9, 30, 188, 189, 191, 215, 218, 220, 234, 241–268, 269, 270–274, 275, 276–279, 358, 360, 388, 435, 477, 478, 484, 490, 498, 503, 509–511, 537–539, 552–554 __STDC_IEC_60559_TYPES__, 188, 189, 191, 552–554 __STDC_ISO_10646__, 188, 600 __STDC_LIB_EXT1__, 189, 191, 476, 494–496, 498, 499, 501, 503, 624 __STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__, 45, 188, 314 __STDC_NO_ATOMICS__, 189, 293, 491 __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__, 189, 196, 475 __STDC_NO_THREADS__, 16, 189, 390, 500 __STDC_NO_VLA__, 189 __STDC_UTF_16__, 188 __STDC_UTF_32__, 188 __STDC_VERSION_ASSERT_H__, 195, 475 __STDC_VERSION_COMPLEX_H__, 196, 475 __STDC_VERSION_FENV_H__, 210, 477 __STDC_VERSION_FLOAT_H__, 222, 477 __STDC_VERSION_INTTYPES_H__, 223, 478 __STDC_VERSION_LIMITS_H__, 227, 479 __STDC_VERSION_MATH_H__, 234, 479 __STDC_VERSION_SETJMP_H__, 283, 491 __STDC_VERSION_STDARG_H__, 289, 491 __STDC_VERSION_STDATOMIC_H__, 293, 491 __STDC_VERSION_STDBIT_H__, 304, 492 __STDC_VERSION_STDCKDINT_H__, 313, 494 __STDC_VERSION_STDDEF_H__, 314, 494 __STDC_VERSION_STDINT_H__, 317, 495 __STDC_VERSION_STDIO_H__, 321, 495 __STDC_VERSION_STDLIB_H__, 356, 497 __STDC_VERSION_STRING_H__, 376, 498 __STDC_VERSION_TGMATH_H__, 385 __STDC_VERSION_TIME_H__, 400, 501

543, 561, 562, 584, 588 CR_DECIMAL_DIG, 25, 478, 517, 518 d32add, 33, 215, 387 d32div, 33, 215, 387 d32fma, 33, 215, 387 d32mul, 33, 215, 387 d32sqrt, 33, 215, 387 d32sub, 33, 215, 387 d64add, 33, 215, 387 d64div, 33, 215, 387 d64fma, 33, 215, 387 d64mul, 33, 215, 387 d64sqrt, 33, 215, 387 d64sub, 33, 215, 387 dadd, 387, 582 DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, 27, 30, 477, 509 DBL_DIG, 27, 28, 30, 477, 509 DBL_EPSILON, 28, 30, 478, 509 DBL_HAS_SUBNORM, 26, 30, 457, 477 DBL_IS_IEC_60559, 26, 30, 477 DBL_MANT_DIG, 27, 30, 102, 477, 509 DBL_MAX, 28, 30, 477, 509 DBL_MAX_10_EXP, 28, 30, 477, 509 DBL_MAX_EXP, 28, 30, 477, 509 DBL_MIN, 29, 30, 478, 509 DBL_MIN_10_EXP, 28, 30, 477, 509 DBL_MIN_EXP, 28, 30, 477, 509 DBL_NORM_MAX, 28, 477, 509 DBL_SNAN, 26, 101, 102, 478, 512 DBL_TRUE_MIN, 29, 30, 478 ddiv, 387, 583, 584 DEC128_EPSILON, 32, 510 DEC128_MANT_DIG, 31, 510 DEC128_MAX, 31, 510 DEC128_MAX_EXP, 31, 510 DEC128_MIN, 32, 510 DEC128_MIN_EXP, 31, 510 DEC128_SNAN, 30 DEC128_TRUE_MIN, 32, 510 DEC32_EPSILON, 32, 510 DEC32_MANT_DIG, 31, 510 DEC32_MAX, 31, 510 DEC32_MAX_EXP, 31, 510 DEC32_MIN, 32, 510 DEC32_MIN_EXP, 31, 510 DEC32_SNAN, 30, 102 DEC32_TRUE_MIN, 32, 510 DEC64_EPSILON, 32, 510 DEC64_MANT_DIG, 31, 510 DEC64_MAX, 31, 510 DEC64_MAX_EXP, 31, 510 DEC64_MIN, 32, 510 DEC64_MIN_EXP, 31, 510 DEC64_SNAN, 30, 102 DEC64_TRUE_MIN, 32, 100, 102, 510

FLT_IS_IEC_60559, 26, 29, 477 FLT_MANT_DIG, 27, 29, 102, 477, 509 FLT_MAX, 28, 29, 30, 477, 509 FLT_MAX_10_EXP, 28, 29, 30, 477, 509 FLT_MAX_EXP, 28, 29, 30, 477, 509 FLT_MIN, 29, 30, 478, 509 FLT_MIN_10_EXP, 28, 29, 30, 477, 509 FLT_MIN_EXP, 28, 29, 30, 477, 509 FLT_NORM_MAX, 28, 477, 509 FLT_RADIX, 25, 27, 28, 29, 31, 61, 215, 220, 255, 334, 335, 359, 419, 421, 434, 477, 509, 514, 555, 556, 564 FLT_ROUNDS, 25, 211, 477, 508, 509, 512, 601 FLT_SNAN, 26, 101, 478, 512 FLT_TRUE_MIN, 29, 30, 478 FOPEN_MAX, 321, 325, 326, 495, 627 FP_FAST_D32ADDD128, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32ADDD64, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32DIVD128, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32DIVD64, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32FMAD128, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32FMAD64, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32MULD128, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32MULD64, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32SQRTD128, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32SQRTD64, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D32SUBD128, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D32SUBD64, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D64ADDD128, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D64DIVD128, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D64FMAD128, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D64MULD128, 236, 484 FP_FAST_D64SQRTD128, 236, 485 FP_FAST_D64SUBD128, 236, 484 FP_FAST_DADDL, 236, 479, 565 FP_FAST_DDIVL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_DFMAL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_DMULL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_DSQRTL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_DSUBL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_FADD, 236, 479, 565 FP_FAST_FADDL, 236, 479, 565 FP_FAST_FDIV, 236, 479 FP_FAST_FDIVL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_FFMA, 236, 479 FP_FAST_FFMAL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_FMA, 236, 479, 565 FP_FAST_FMAD128, 236, 484 FP_FAST_FMAD32, 236, 484 FP_FAST_FMAD64, 236, 484 FP_FAST_FMAF, 236, 479, 564 FP_FAST_FMAL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_FMUL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_FMULL, 236, 479 FP_FAST_FSQRT, 236, 479

kill_dependency, 17, 297, 492 L_tmpnam, 322, 327, 495 L_tmpnam_s, 496, 626, 627 LC_ALL, 228, 229, 232, 479 LC_COLLATE, 228, 229, 379, 440, 479 LC_CTYPE, 228, 229, 356, 372, 373, 446, 451, 454–456, 479, 598, 599, 643, 644 LC_MONETARY, 228, 229, 232, 479 LC_NUMERIC, 228, 229, 232, 479 LC_TIME, 228, 229, 404, 406, 479 LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG, 27, 457, 477, 509 LDBL_DIG, 27, 28, 477, 509 LDBL_EPSILON, 28, 478, 509 LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM, 26, 457, 477 LDBL_IS_IEC_60559, 26, 477 LDBL_MANT_DIG, 27, 477, 509 LDBL_MAX, 28, 477, 509 LDBL_MAX_10_EXP, 28, 477, 509 LDBL_MAX_EXP, 28, 477, 509 LDBL_MIN, 29, 478, 509 LDBL_MIN_10_EXP, 28, 477, 509 LDBL_MIN_EXP, 28, 477, 509 LDBL_NORM_MAX, 28, 477, 509 LDBL_SNAN, 26, 478, 512 LDBL_TRUE_MIN, 29, 478 LLONG_MAX, 23, 363, 438, 479, 508 LLONG_MIN, 23, 278, 363, 438, 479, 508 LLONG_WIDTH, 23, 479, 508 LONG_MAX, 23, 237, 252, 363, 438, 479, 508 LONG_MIN, 23, 237, 363, 438, 479, 508 LONG_WIDTH, 23, 479, 508 MATH_ERREXCEPT, 237, 238, 359–361, 435, 437, 479, 523, 524, 603 math_errhandling, 193, 237, 238, 359– 361, 435–437, 479, 523, 524, 587, 594, 603, 679 MATH_ERRNO, 237, 238, 359–361, 435– 437, 479, 603 MB_CUR_MAX, 191, 334, 356, 373, 411– 414, 448, 497, 643, 644, 669 MB_LEN_MAX, 23, 191, 356, 479, 508 memchr, 380, 381, 459, 499, 676 NAN, 27, 101, 102, 235, 322, 333, 358–361, 419, 434–436, 458, 478, 479, 512 NDEBUG, 145, 192, 195, 475 noreturn, 375 not, 226, 478 not_eq, 226, 478 NULL, 50, 228, 314, 321, 356, 376, 400, 415, 479, 494, 495, 497, 498, 501, 502, 603 offsetof, 108, 314, 494, 595 ONCE_FLAG_INIT, 356, 390, 497, 500 or, 226, 478 or_eq, 226, 478

SIGABRT, 285, 367, 491 SIGFPE, 237, 285, 286, 491, 594, 599, 607 SIGILL, 285, 286, 491, 594, 599 SIGINT, 285, 491 signbit, 240, 479, 514, 515, 535 SIGSEGV, 285, 286, 491, 594, 599 SIGTERM, 285, 491 SIZE_MAX, 41, 495, 626 SIZE_WIDTH, 320, 495 stdc_bit_ceil, 311, 494 stdc_bit_floor, 311, 494 stdc_bit_width, 310, 494 stdc_count_ones, 309, 494 stdc_count_zeros, 309, 493 stdc_first_leading_one, 307, 493 stdc_first_leading_zero, 307, 493 stdc_first_trailing_one, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_zero, 308, 493 stdc_has_single_bit, 310, 494 stdc_leading_ones, 305, 493 stdc_leading_zeros, 305, 492 stdc_trailing_ones, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_zeros, 306, 493 strchr, 380, 381, 459, 499, 676 strpbrk, 380, 381, 459, 499, 676 strrchr, 380, 381, 382, 459, 499, 676 strstr, 380, 382, 459, 499, 676 TIME_ACTIVE, 400, 404, 459, 501, 604 TIME_MONOTONIC, 400, 403, 459, 501, 604 TIME_THREAD_ACTIVE, 400, 404, 459, 501, 604 TIME_UTC, 393, 394, 397, 400, 403, 501, 604 TMP_MAX, 322, 326, 327, 495 TMP_MAX_S, 496, 626, 627, 628 TSS_DTOR_ITERATIONS, 390, 396, 500 UCHAR_MAX, 23, 24, 479, 508 UCHAR_WIDTH, 23, 479, 508 UINT64_C, 320 UINT_MAX, 23, 103, 112, 167, 479, 508 UINT_WIDTH, 23, 265, 479, 508 UINTMAX_C, 320, 495 UINTMAX_MAX, 224, 225, 319, 495, 517 UINTMAX_WIDTH, 319, 495 UINTPTR_MAX, 319, 495 UINTPTR_WIDTH, 319, 495 ULLONG_MAX, 23, 102, 112, 363, 438, 479, 508 ULLONG_WIDTH, 23, 479, 508 ULONG_MAX, 23, 363, 438, 479, 508 ULONG_WIDTH, 23, 479, 508 unreachable, viii, 314, 315, 494, 595, 677 USHRT_MAX, 23, 111, 479, 508 USHRT_WIDTH, 23, 479, 508

atomic_bool, 298, 299, 302, 491 atomic_char, 298, 491 atomic_char16_t, 299, 492 atomic_char32_t, 299, 492 atomic_char8_t, 299, 492 atomic_flag, 293, 294, 302, 303, 491, 492 atomic_int, 294, 299, 491 atomic_int_fast16_t, 299, 492 atomic_int_fast32_t, 299, 492 atomic_int_fast64_t, 299, 492 atomic_int_fast8_t, 299, 492 atomic_int_least16_t, 299, 492 atomic_int_least32_t, 299, 492 atomic_int_least64_t, 299, 492 atomic_int_least8_t, 299, 492 atomic_intmax_t, 299, 492 atomic_intptr_t, 299, 492 atomic_llong, 299, 492

int_fast32_t, 223, 299, 318 int_fast64_t, 299, 318 int_fast8_t, 299, 318 int_least16_t, 299, 318 int_least32_t, 299, 317, 318 int_least64_t, 299, 318 int_least8_t, 299, 318 intmax_t, 23, 167, 224, 225, 299, 318, 320, 332, 339, 417, 423, 478, 495, 676, 678 intptr_t, 299, 318, 495 jmp_buf, 283, 284, 491, 673 ldiv_t, 356, 371, 372, 497 lldiv_t, 356, 371, 372, 497 long_double_t, 563, 564, 565 max_align_t, 45, 314, 494 mbstate_t, 323–325, 334, 341, 353, 410, 411–414, 415, 420, 424, 425, 446–449, 501–504, 599, 605, 668–670 memory_order, 293, 294, 297–300, 302, 303, 458, 491, 492 mtx_t, 390, 392–395, 500 nullptr_t, viii, 41, 47, 50, 51, 84, 87, 88, 90, 92, 289, 314, 315, 316, 494, 595, 676 once_flag, 356, 390, 391, 497, 500 ptrdiff_t, 85, 293, 299, 314, 315, 319, 332, 339, 417, 423, 494, 590, 676 rsize_t, 495, 496, 498, 499, 501, 503, 504, 626, 627, 630–633, 636–638, 639, 640–645, 646, 647–651, 653, 654, 655, 656, 657, 659, 660, 663–670 sig_atomic_t, 14, 285, 286, 319, 491, 586, 594 signed, 103 thrd_start_t, 390, 395, 500 thrd_t, 390, 395, 396, 500, 501 time_t, 400, 401, 402, 403, 405, 406, 501, 604, 654, 655 tss_dtor_t, 390, 397, 500, 501 tss_t, 390, 397, 398, 500, 501 uint64_t, 265 uint_fast16_t, 299, 318 uint_fast32_t, 299, 318 uint_fast64_t, 299, 318 uint_fast8_t, 299, 318 uint_least16_t, 299, 317, 318, 410 uint_least32_t, 299, 318, 410 uint_least64_t, 299, 318, 320 uint_least8_t, 299, 318 uintmax_t, 23, 167, 224, 225, 299, 318, 320, 332, 339, 417, 423, 478, 495, 676, 678 uintptr_t, 299, 318, 495 unsigned, 103, 331, 339, 417, 423 va_list, 289, 290–292, 346–348, 427–

llrintd32 function, 262, 488 llrintd64 function, 262, 488 llrintdN function, 572 llrintdNx function, 572 llrintf function, 262, 482 llrintfN function, 572 llrintfNx function, 572 llrintl function, 262, 482 llround function, 263, 483, 513, 534, 588 llround function, 263 llround type-generic macro, 386 llroundd128 function, 263, 488 llroundd32 function, 263, 488 llroundd64 function, 263, 488 llrounddN function, 572 llrounddNx function, 572 llroundf function, 263, 483 llroundfN function, 572 llroundfNx function, 572 llroundl function, 263, 483 local, 148 local time, 400 locale, 4 locale-specific behavior, 4, 605 localeconv function, 229, 232, 479, 594 localization header, 228, 457 localtime function, 402, 404, 405, 406, 501 localtime_r function, 406, 501, 675 localtime_s function, 501, 654, 655 log function, 237, 252, 253, 386, 481, 516, 528 log type-generic macro, 386 log10 function, 252, 253, 481, 516, 528 log10 type-generic macro, 386 log10d128 function, 253, 486 log10d32 function, 252, 486 log10d64 function, 252, 486 log10dN function, 570 log10dNx function, 570 log10f function, 252, 481 log10fN function, 570 log10fNx function, 570 log10l function, 252, 481 log10p1 function, 253, 481, 516, 528 log10p1 type-generic macro, 386 log10p1d128 function, 253, 486 log10p1d32 function, 253, 486 log10p1d64 function, 253, 486 log10p1dN function, 570 log10p1dNx function, 570 log10p1f function, 253, 481 log10p1fN function, 570 log10p1fNx function, 570 log10p1l function, 253, 481 log1p function, 253, 254, 481, 516, 528 log1p type-generic macro, 386 log1pd128 function, 253, 486

OR (||), 89 OR (||), 17 logical source line, 11 logl function, 252, 481 logp1 function, 253, 254, 481, 516, 528 logp1 type-generic macro, 386 logp1d128 function, 253, 486 logp1d32 function, 253, 486 logp1d64 function, 253, 486 logp1dN function, 570 logp1dNx function, 570 logp1f function, 253, 481 logp1fN function, 570 logp1fNx function, 570 logp1l function, 253, 481 long double _Complex type, 40 long double _Complex type conversion, 48 long double _Imaginary type, 541 long double suffix, l or L, 61 long double type, 39, 103 long double type conversion, 47, 48 long int type, 39, 103 long int type conversion, 46–48 long integer suffix, l or L, 59 long keyword, 53 long long int type, 39, 103 long long int type conversion, 46–48 long long integer suffix, ll or LL, 59 long_double_t type, 563, 564, 565 LONG_MAX macro, 23, 237, 252, 363, 438, 479, 508 LONG_MIN macro, 23, 237, 363, 438, 479, 508 LONG_WIDTH macro, 23, 479, 508 longjmp function, 283, 284, 368, 369, 491, 594, 597, 673 loop body, 155 low-order bit, 4 lowercase letter, 20 lrint function, 262, 482, 517, 533, 534, 588 lrint type-generic macro, 386 lrintd128 function, 262, 488 lrintd32 function, 262, 487 lrintd64 function, 262, 488 lrintdN function, 572 lrintdNx function, 572 lrintf function, 262, 482 lrintfN function, 572 lrintfNx function, 572 lrintl function, 262, 482 lround function, 263, 482, 513, 534, 588 lround function, 263 lround type-generic macro, 386 lroundd128 function, 263, 488 lroundd32 function, 263, 488 lroundd64 function, 263, 488 lrounddN function, 572

mbsrtowcs_s function, 504, 669, 670 mbstate_t type, 323–325, 334, 341, 353, 410, 411–414, 415, 420, 424, 425, 446–449, 501–504, 599, 605, 668–670 mbstowcs function, 68, 373, 374, 433, 448, 497 mbstowcs_s function, 498, 644, 645 mbtowc function, 66, 372, 373, 447, 497 mem identifier prefix, 459 memalignment function, 9, 374, 498, 676 member access operators (. and-> ), 76 member alignment, 106 members, 37 memccpy function, 376, 498, 675 memchr macro, 380, 381, 459, 499, 676 memcmp function, 42, 174, 301, 379, 499 memcpy function, 42, 72, 171, 194, 294, 301, 376, 498, 514 memcpy_s function, 499, 646 memmove function, 72, 376, 377, 498, 514, 593 memmove_s function, 499, 646, 647 memory location, 6 memory management function, 364 memory_ identifier prefix, 458 memory_order_ identifier prefix, 458 memory_order type, 293, 294, 297–300, 302, 303, 458, 491, 492 memory_order_acq_rel constant, 295, 296, 297, 300, 303, 491 memory_order_acquire constant, 295, 297, 300, 303, 491 memory_order_consume constant, 295, 297, 300, 491 memory_order_relaxed constant, 149, 295, 296, 297, 491 memory_order_release constant, 295, 297, 300, 491 memory_order_seq_cst constant, 19, 42, 78, 92, 93, 293, 295, 297, 491 memset explicit, 383 memset function, 294, 383, 499, 651 memset_explicit function, 383, 499, 676 memset_s function, 499, 651 minimum function, 269, 536 minus operator unary, 515 minus operator, unary, 82 miscellaneous function string, 383 wide string, 445 miscellaneous functions string, 651 wide string, 668 mktime function, 402, 501 modf family, 33, 34, 255, 385 modf function, 255, 385, 386, 481, 529

n_sep_by_space structure member, 228, 230– 232 n_sign_posn structure member, 228, 231, 232 name external, 22, 55, 190 file, 324 internal, 22, 55 label, 37 structure/union member, 37 name space, 37 named constant, 95 named label, 153 NaN, 24 nan function, 267, 333, 418, 419, 483, 512, 535 NAN macro, 27, 101, 102, 235, 322, 333, 358–361, 419, 434–436, 458, 478, 479, 512 nand128 function, 267, 488 nand32 function, 267, 488 nand64 function, 267, 488 nandN function, 573 nandNx function, 573 nanf function, 267, 483 nanfN function, 573 nanfNx function, 573 nanl function, 267, 483 NDEBUG macro, 145, 192, 195, 475 nearbyint function, 261, 262, 482, 515, 517, 529, 533 nearbyint type-generic macro, 386 nearbyintd128 function, 261, 487 nearbyintd32 function, 261, 487 nearbyintd64 function, 261, 487 nearbyintdN function, 572 nearbyintdNx function, 572 nearbyintf function, 261, 482 nearbyintfN function, 572 nearbyintfNx function, 572 nearbyintl function, 261, 482 nearest integer function, 261, 532 negation operator (!), 82 negative zero, 267 negative_sign structure member, 228, 230– 232 new line, 21 new-line character, 11, 20, 52, 165, 185 new-line escape sequence (\n), 21, 65, 207 nextafter function, 267, 268, 388, 483, 515, 535 nextafter type-generic macro, 386 nextafterd128 function, 267, 488 nextafterd32 function, 267, 488 nextafterd64 function, 267, 488 nextafterdN function, 573 nextafterdNx function, 573 nextafterf function, 267, 483 nextafterfN function, 573

O format modifier, 407 object, 6 object representation, 42 object type, 38 object types, 38 object-like macro, 179 observable, 149 observable behavior, 14 observed, 149 obsolescence, xiii, 190, 457 octal constant, 57 octal digit, 58, 65 octal-character escape sequence (\octal digit), 65 OFF pragma, 151, 543 offsetof macro, 108, 314, 494, 595 ON pragma, 93, 213, 218, 219, 221, 519–521, 529, 533, 535 on-off switch, 186 once_flag type, 356, 390, 391, 497, 500 ONCE_FLAG_INIT macro, 356, 390, 497, 500 opening, 324 operand, 68, 72 operating system, 12, 369 operations on file, 325 operations on files, 627 operator, 68, 72 _Alignas, 53 _Alignof, 53 __has_c_attribute, 142, 144–147, 150, 167, 168, 187, 674 __has_embed, 52, 69, 167, 169, 187 __has_include, 52, 69, 167, 168, 187, 676 additive, 84 alignas, 53 alignof, 53, 82 assignment, 91 associativity, 72 defined, 167, 168, 174, 187, 592, 593 equality, 87 multiplicative, 84, 542

physical source line, 11 placemarker, 181 plus operator unary, 82 pointer null, 50 pointer arithmetic, 85 pointer comparison, 87 pointer declarator, 127 pointer operator (->), 76 pointer to a string, 191 pointer to a wide string, 191 pointer to function, 75 pointer type, 41 pointer type conversion, 50 pole error, 237, 246, 247, 252–260 portability, 9 positive difference, 270 positive difference function, 269, 536 positive_sign structure member, 228, 230– 232 postfix decrement operator (--), 50, 78 postfix expression, 74 postfix increment operator (++), 50, 78 pow function, 257, 386, 482, 516, 530, 584 pow type-generic macro, 386 powd128 function, 257, 487 powd32 function, 257, 487 powd64 function, 257, 388, 487 powdN function, 571 powdNx function, 571 power function complex, 201, 550 real, 256, 529 powf function, 257, 482 powf32x function, 584 powf64 function, 584 powfN function, 571 powfNx function, 571 powl function, 257, 482, 515 pown function, 257, 258, 482, 516, 531 pown type-generic macro, 386 pownd128 function, 257, 487 pownd32 function, 257, 487 pownd64 function, 257, 487 powndN function, 571 powndNx function, 571 pownf function, 257, 482 pownfN function, 571 pownfNx function, 571 pownl function, 257, 482 powr function, 258, 482, 516, 531 powr type-generic macro, 386 powrd128 function, 258, 487 powrd32 function, 258, 487 powrd64 function, 258, 487

preprocessing, 165 preprocessing concatenation, 181 preprocessing directive, 11, 163, 164 ifdef, 9, 102, 163, 166, 167, 168, 215, 218, 220, 241–268, 269, 270–274, 275, 276– 279, 358, 360, 388, 435, 509, 510, 537– 539 pragma, 52, 69, 93, 151, 163, 186, 189, 197, 212–215, 218, 219, 221, 238, 475, 477, 479, 519–521, 529, 533, 535, 543, 585, 593, 602 undef, 55, 163, 166, 183, 187, 193, 194, 593 preprocessing file, 11, 163 preprocessing number, 52, 70 preprocessing operator #, 181 ##, 181 _Pragma, 189 preprocessing parameter, 165 preprocessing token, 11, 52, 164 preprocessing translation unit, 11 preprocessor, 163 preprocessor parameter, 165 prefixed, 165 standard, 165 preprocessor prefixed parameter, 165 preprocessor standard parameter, 165 PRI identifier prefix, 223, 457 PRIBMAX macro, 223, 478 PRIbMAX macro, 223, 478 PRIBPTR macro, 223, 478 PRIbPTR macro, 223, 478 PRIdFAST32 macro, 223 PRIdMAX macro, 223, 478 PRIdPTR macro, 223, 478 PRIiMAX macro, 223, 478 PRIiPTR macro, 223, 478 primary block, 152 primary expression, 73 printf_s function, 496, 631, 632 printing character, 21, 205, 206 printing wide character, 451 PRIoMAX macro, 223, 478 PRIoPTR macro, 223, 478 PRIuMAX macro, 223, 478 PRIuPTR macro, 223, 478 PRIXMAX macro, 223, 478 PRIxMAX macro, 223, 224, 478 PRIXPTR macro, 223, 478 PRIxPTR macro, 223, 478 program conforming, 9 strictly conforming, 9 program diagnostic, 195 program execution, 13 program file, 11

raise function, 285, 286, 287, 294, 367, 491, 594, 595 rand function, 356, 363, 364, 497 RAND_MAX macro, 356, 363, 364, 497 range excess, 26, 49, 158 range error, 237, 242–251, 253–260, 262, 263, 268, 270, 274 read-modify-write operation, 17 read-read coherence, 19 read-write coherence, 19 real floating type, 40 real floating type conversion, 47, 48, 517 real floating types, 554 real type, 40 real type domain, 40 real-floating, 239 realloc function, 364, 365, 366, 367, 497, 588, 597, 604, 673, 677 recommended practice, 6 recursion, 76 recursive function call, 76 redefinition of macro, 178 reentrancy, 14, 21 library function, 194 referenced type, 41 register, 99 register storage-class specifier, 53, 159 relational expression, 86 relaxed atomic operation, 17 release fence, 297 release operation, 17 release sequence, 17 reliability of data interrupted, 14 remainder assignment operator (%=), 93 remainder function, 265, 534 remainder function, 266, 388, 483, 513, 516, 535, 603 remainder operator (%), 84 remainder type-generic macro, 386 remainderd128 function, 266, 488 remainderd32 function, 266, 488 remainderd64 function, 266, 488 remainderdN function, 572 remainderdNx function, 572 remainderf function, 266, 483 remainderfN function, 572 remainderfNx function, 572 remainderl function, 266, 483 remove function, 325, 326, 495, 604, 627 remquo function, 266, 483, 513, 516, 535, 587, 603 remquo type-generic macro, 386 remquof function, 266, 483 remquofN function, 572

same scope, 36 samequantum macro, 513 samequantumd identifier prefix, 277, 387 samequantumd128 function, 277, 489 samequantumd32 function, 277, 489 samequantumd64 function, 277, 489 samequantumdN function, 575 samequantumdNx function, 575 save calling environment function, 283

search functions string, 650 wide string, 667 secondary block, 152 SEEK_CUR macro, 322, 352, 495 SEEK_END macro, 322, 325, 352, 495 SEEK_SET macro, 322, 352, 354, 495, 597 selection _Generic, 53, 74, 113, 121, 136, 316, 387 selection statement, 154 self-referential structure, 116 semicolon punctuator (;), 97, 105, 153, 155, 156 separate compilation, 11 separate translation, 11 sequence point, 14, 76, 89, 90, 94, 121, 122, 152, 193, 194, 330, 370, 416, 505, 641 sequenced before, 14, 72, 76, 78, 91 sequenced during a function call, 149 sequencing of statement, 152 sequential consistency, 19 set_constraint_handler_s function, 498, 625, 639, 640 setbuf function, 321, 324, 325, 327, 329, 495 setjmp function, 193, 283, 284, 491, 587, 594, 673 setlocale function, 191, 228, 229, 232, 404, 479, 594, 603 setpayload function, 490, 513, 539 setpayloadd128 function, 491, 539 setpayloadd32 function, 491, 539 setpayloadd64 function, 491, 539 setpayloaddN function, 576 setpayloaddNx function, 576 setpayloadf function, 490, 539 setpayloadfN function, 576 setpayloadfNx function, 576 setpayloadl function, 490, 539 setpayloadsig function, 490, 513, 539 setpayloadsigd128 function, 491, 539 setpayloadsigd32 function, 491, 539 setpayloadsigd64 function, 491, 539 setpayloadsigdN function, 576 setpayloadsigdNx function, 576 setpayloadsigf function, 490, 539 setpayloadsigfN function, 576 setpayloadsigfNx function, 576 setpayloadsigl function, 490, 539 setvbuf function, 321, 324, 325, 327, 329, 330, 495, 596 shall, 9 shift expression, 86 shift sequence, 191 shift state, 20 initial, 20 short identifier

single-byte character, 20 single-byte/wide character conversion function, 446 single-quote escape sequence (\’), 65, 67 singularity, 237 sinh function, 248, 386, 480, 517, 526, 551 sinh type-generic macro, 386, 551 sinhd128 function, 248, 486 sinhd32 function, 248, 485 sinhd64 function, 248, 485 sinhdN function, 568 sinhdNx function, 568 sinhf function, 248, 480 sinhfN function, 568 sinhfNx function, 568 sinhl function, 248, 480 sinl function, 243, 480 sinpi function, 245, 246, 480, 517, 526 sinpi type-generic macro, 386 sinpid128 function, 246, 485 sinpid32 function, 246, 485 sinpid64 function, 246, 485 sinpidN function, 567 sinpidNx function, 567 sinpif function, 245, 480 sinpifN function, 567 sinpifNx function, 567 sinpil function, 246, 480 SIZE_MAX macro, 41, 495, 626 SIZE_WIDTH macro, 320, 495 sizeof keyword, 53 sizeof operator, 50, 81, 82 snprintf function, 345, 347, 357, 358, 405, 495, 632, 679 snprintf_s function, 496, 632, 633 snwprintf_s function, 503, 657, 658 sorting utility function, 370, 641 source character set, 11, 19 source file, 11 name, 185, 187 source file inclusion, 170 source line, 11 source text, 11 space character (’ ’), 11, 20, 52, 206, 207, 452 space format flag, 331, 417 spilling, 15 sprintf function, 345, 348, 495, 633 sprintf_s function, 496, 633 sqrt function, 151, 259, 386, 482, 513, 532, 537 sqrt type-generic macro, 386 sqrtd128 function, 259, 487 sqrtd32 function, 259, 388, 487 sqrtd64 function, 259, 487 sqrtdN function, 571 sqrtdNx function, 571 sqrtf function, 259, 482

224, 317, 319, 320, 332, 339, 340, 418, 423, 458, 495, 605, 626, 678 <stdio.h>, 16, 25, 30, 34, 56, 150, 170, 174, 192, 214, 215, 321, 325–327, 329, 330, 336, 338, 342–355, 402, 416, 421, 422, 425–427, 429–432, 458, 495, 496, 601, 626, 627–638, 656, 658, 659, 677–679 <stdlib.h>, 9, 25, 30, 34, 192, 194, 214, 215, 356, 357, 358, 360, 362–374, 458, 497, 498, 553, 578, 579, 580, 581, 601, 625, 639, 640–645, 677 <stdnoreturn.h>, 9, 10, 147, 192, 375, 498 <string.h>, 9, 173, 176, 177, 192, 376, 377–384, 459, 498, 499, 646, 647–652 <tgmath.h>, 34, 192, 385, 388, 499, 511, 523, 551, 582, 584, 678 <threads.h>, 149, 150, 189, 191, 192, 390, 391–398, 459, 500, 677 <time.h>, 192, 390, 400, 401–406, 445, 459, 501, 652, 653–655, 677 <uchar.h>, 66, 68, 192, 410, 411–414, 501, 675, 677 <wchar.h>, 25, 30, 34, 150, 192, 214, 215, 224, 322, 415, 416, 421, 422, 426–433, 435, 437–442, 444–449, 459, 502, 503, 581, 582, 601, 655, 656–670, 678, 679 <wctype.h>, 192, 451, 452–456, 459, 504, 678, 679 standard input stream, 322, 324 standard integer type, 39 standard output stream, 322, 324 standard signed integer type, 39 standard unsigned integer type, 39 state-dependent encoding, 20, 372, 643 stateless function, 149 statement, 152 break, 53, 158 compound, 153 continue, 53, 156, 157, 158 do, 53, 156 else, 53, 154 expression, 153 for, 53, 156 goto, 53, 156 if, 53, 154 iteration, 155 jump, 156 labeled, 153 null, 153 return, 53, 158, 518 selection, 154 sequencing, 152 switch, 53, 154 while, 53, 156 static, 99

307, 493 stdc_first_leading_zero_ull function, 307, 493 stdc_first_leading_zero_us function, 307, 493 stdc_first_trailing_one macro, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_one_uc function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_one_ui function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_one_ul function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_one_ull function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_one_us function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_zero macro, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_zero_uc function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_zero_ui function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_zero_ul function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_zero_ull function, 308, 493 stdc_first_trailing_zero_us function, 308, 493 stdc_has_single_bit macro, 310, 494 stdc_has_single_bit_uc function, 310, 494 stdc_has_single_bit_ui function, 310, 494 stdc_has_single_bit_ul function, 310, 494 stdc_has_single_bit_ull function, 310, 494 stdc_has_single_bit_us function, 310, 494 stdc_leading_ones macro, 305, 493 stdc_leading_ones_uc function, 305, 492 stdc_leading_ones_ui function, 305, 492 stdc_leading_ones_ul function, 305, 492 stdc_leading_ones_ull function, 305, 493 stdc_leading_ones_us function, 305, 492 stdc_leading_zeros macro, 305, 492 stdc_leading_zeros_uc function, 305, 492 stdc_leading_zeros_ui function, 305, 492 stdc_leading_zeros_ul function, 305, 492 stdc_leading_zeros_ull function, 305, 492 stdc_leading_zeros_us function, 305, 492 stdc_trailing_ones macro, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_ones_uc function, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_ones_ui function, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_ones_ul function, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_ones_ull function, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_ones_us function, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_zeros macro, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_zeros_uc function, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_zeros_ui function, 306, 493 stdc_trailing_zeros_ul function, 306, 493

strfromd64 function, 358, 498 strfromdN function, 579 strfromdNx function, 579 strfromencbindN function, 580 strfromencdecdN function, 580 strfromencf128 function, 579, 580 strfromencfN function, 580 strfromf function, 357, 433, 497 strfromfN function, 578 strfromfNx function, 578 strfroml function, 357, 497 strftime function, 229, 404, 406, 409, 445, 501, 588, 596, 598, 605, 653, 654, 675, 679 stricter, 45 strictly conforming program, 9 string, 191 comparison function, 379 concatenation function, 378, 648 conversion function, 229 copying function, 376, 646 library function convention, 376 literal, 12, 19, 50, 67, 73, 138 miscellaneous function, 383, 651 numeric conversion function, 224, 356 search function, 380, 650 string duplicate function, 377, 378 string handling header, 376, 459, 646 string literal wide, 67 stringizing, 181, 189 stringizing argument, 181 strlen function, 378, 384, 499 strncat function, 378, 498 strncat_s function, 499, 649, 650 strncmp function, 184, 379, 380, 499 strncpy function, 377, 498 strncpy_s function, 499, 647, 648 strndup function, 9, 378, 498, 675 strnlen_s function, 499, 647–649, 652 stronger, 45 strpbrk macro, 380, 381, 459, 499, 676 strrchr macro, 380, 381, 382, 459, 499, 676 strspn function, 382, 499 strstr macro, 380, 382, 459, 499, 676 strto family, 33, 34, 214, 215, 360 strtod family, 360, 361 strtod function, 63, 267, 339, 340, 344, 357, 358, 433, 497, 513, 514, 518, 519, 587, 604 strtod128 function, 360, 498, 579, 604 strtod32 function, 360, 498, 604 strtod64 function, 360, 361, 498, 604 strtodN function, 579 strtodNx function, 579 strtoencbindN function, 581 strtoencdecdN function, 581

t format modifier, 332, 339, 417, 423 tab character, 20, 52 tag, 114 tag compatibility, 43 tag name space, 37 tags, 37 tan function, 243, 244, 386, 480, 517, 525, 551 tan type-generic macro, 386, 551 tand128 function, 243, 485 tand32 function, 243, 485 tand64 function, 243, 485 tandN function, 567 tandNx function, 567 tanf function, 243, 480 tanfN function, 567 tanfNx function, 567 tanh function, 248, 386, 480, 517, 527, 551 tanh type-generic macro, 386, 551 tanhd128 function, 248, 486 tanhd32 function, 248, 486 tanhd64 function, 248, 486 tanhdN function, 568 tanhdNx function, 568 tanhf function, 248, 480 tanhfN function, 568 tanhfNx function, 568 tanhl function, 248, 480 tanl function, 243, 480 tanpi function, 246, 480, 517, 526 tanpi type-generic macro, 386 tanpid128 function, 246, 485 tanpid32 function, 246, 485 tanpid64 function, 246, 485 tanpidN function, 567 tanpidNx function, 567 tanpif function, 246, 480 tanpifN function, 567 tanpifNx function, 567 tanpil function, 246, 480 temporary lifetime, 38 tentative definition, 161 term, 3 text stream, 323, 351–353 tgamma function, 260, 261, 482, 532 tgamma type-generic macro, 386 tgammad128 function, 260, 487 tgammad32 function, 260, 487 tgammad64 function, 260, 487 tgammadN function, 571 tgammadNx function, 571

653 tm_isdst structure member, 401, 402, 407 tm_mday structure member, 401, 402, 403, 405, 407, 653 tm_min structure member, 401, 402, 405, 407, 653 tm_mon structure member, 401, 402, 403, 405– 407, 653 tm_sec structure member, 401, 402, 405, 407, 654 tm_wday structure member, 401, 402, 403, 405– 407, 653 tm_yday structure member, 401, 402, 403, 407 tm_year structure member, 401, 402, 403, 405– 407, 654 TMP_MAX macro, 322, 326, 327, 495 TMP_MAX_S macro, 496, 626, 627, 628 tmpfile function, 326, 368, 495 tmpfile_s function, 496, 627, 628 tmpnam function, 322, 326, 327, 495, 628 tmpnam_s function, 496, 626, 627, 628 to identifier prefix, 457, 459 token, 12, 52 token concatenation, 181 token pasting, 181 tolower function, 207, 476 totalorder function, 490, 514, 537, 538 totalorderd128 function, 490, 537 totalorderd32 function, 490, 537 totalorderd64 function, 490, 537 totalorderdN function, 575 totalorderdNx function, 575 totalorderf function, 490, 537 totalorderfN function, 575 totalorderfNx function, 575 totalorderl function, 490, 537 totalordermag function, 490, 514, 538 totalordermagd128 function, 490, 538 totalordermagd32 function, 490, 538 totalordermagd64 function, 490, 538 totalordermagdN function, 575 totalordermagdNx function, 575 totalordermagf function, 490, 538 totalordermagfN function, 575 totalordermagfNx function, 575 totalordermagl function, 490, 538 toupper function, 207, 208, 476 towctrans function, 455, 456, 504, 599, 605 towlower function, 455, 456, 504 towupper function, 455, 456, 504 translation environment, 11 translation limit, 21 translation phase, 11 translation unit, 11, 159 trigonometric function complex, 197, 546

U encoding prefix, 64, 65, 67, 138 u encoding prefix, 64, 65, 67, 138 u8 encoding prefix, 64, 65, 67 UCHAR_MAX macro, 23, 24, 479, 508 UCHAR_WIDTH macro, 23, 479, 508 ufromfp function, 236, 264, 265, 483, 513, 517, 534 ufromfp function, 264 ufromfp type-generic macro, 386 ufromfpd128 function, 264, 488 ufromfpd32 function, 264, 488 ufromfpd64 function, 264, 488 ufromfpdN function, 572 ufromfpdNx function, 572 ufromfpf function, 264, 483 ufromfpfN function, 572 ufromfpfNx function, 572 ufromfpl function, 264, 483 ufromfpx function, 236, 265, 483, 513, 517, 534 ufromfpx function, 265

undef, 55, 163, 166, 183, 187, 193, 194, 593 undef preprocessing directive, 183, 193 undefined behavior, 4, 9, 588 underlying type, 109 underscore leading in identifier, 192 underspecified, 98 ungetc function, 322, 350, 351, 353, 458, 496, 587, 597, 607, 679 ungetwc function, 322, 432, 433, 502, 587, 607 Unicode, 410 Unicode required set, 188 Unicode Standard Annex, UAX #31, 680 Annex, UAX #44, 2 Derived Core Properties, 2 Unicode utilities header, 410 union arrow operator (->), 76 content, 116 dot operator (.), 76 initialization, 138 member alignment, 106 member name space, 37 member operator (.), 50, 76 pointer operator (->), 76 specifier, 104 tag, 37, 116 type, 40, 104 union content, 116 union keyword, 53 universal character name, 56, 506 unnormalized floating-point number, 24 unqualified type, 41 unqualified version of type, 41 unreachable, 315 unreachable macro, viii, 314, 315, 494, 595, 677 unsequenced, 14, 72, 91, 149 unsequenced attribute, 143, 148, 150, 151, 305– 311, 492–494, 592, 674, 675 unsigned bit-precise integer suffix, uwb or UWB, 59 unsigned integer suffix, u or U, 59 unsigned integer type, 39, 47, 59 unsigned keyword, 53 unsigned type, 39, 103, 331, 339, 417, 423 unsigned type conversion, 46–48 unspecified behavior, 4, 9, 586 unspecified value, 7 unsuccessful termination, 367, 368 uppercase letter, 19 use of library function, 193 USHRT_MAX macro, 23, 111, 479, 508 USHRT_WIDTH macro, 23, 479, 508

warning, 12, 585 WCHAR_MAX macro, 415, 495, 502 WCHAR_MIN macro, 320, 415, 495, 502 wchar_t type, 5, 45, 64–67, 138, 188, 225, 299, 314, 320, 331, 334, 336, 339, 341, 344, 356, 372–374, 410, 415, 416, 417, 420– 433, 435, 437–442, 444, 445, 447–449, 451, 478, 494, 497, 498, 502–504, 579, 581, 582, 588, 599, 600, 643–645, 655– 670 WCHAR_WIDTH macro, 320, 415, 495 wcrtomb function, 325, 334, 338, 344, 415, 424– 426, 448, 450, 503, 588, 645, 668, 671 wcrtomb_s function, 504, 668, 669 wcs identifier prefix, 457–459 wcscat function, 439, 503 wcscat_s function, 504, 665, 666 wcschr macro, 441, 459, 503, 676 wcscmp function, 439, 440, 503 wcscoll function, 440, 503 wcscpy function, 438, 502 wcscpy_s function, 504, 663 wcscspn function, 441, 442, 503 wcsftime function, 229, 445, 503, 588, 596, 598, 605 wcslen function, 439, 445, 503, 668 wcsncat function, 439, 503 wcsncat_s function, 504, 666, 667 wcsncmp function, 440, 503 wcsncpy function, 438, 502 wcsncpy_s function, 504, 663, 664 wcsnlen_s function, 504, 663–666, 668

z format modifier, 332, 339, 417, 423 zero, 541

1)This implies that a conforming implementation reserves no identifiers other than those explicitly reserved in this document.

2)Strictly conforming programs are intended to be maximally portable among conforming implementations. Conforming programs can depend upon nonportable features of a conforming implementation.

3)This requires implementations to behave as if these separate phases occur, even though many are typically folded together in practice. Source files, translation units, and translated translation units necessarily can be stored as files or through/within any other implementation-defined medium. There does not have to be any one-to-one correspondence between these entities and any external representation. The description is conceptual only, and does not specify any particular implementation.

4)As described in 6.4, the process of dividing a source file’s characters into preprocessing tokens is context-dependent. For example, see the handling of < within a #include preprocessing directive.

5)An implementation may convert each instance of the same non-corresponding source character to a different member of the execution character set.

6)Thus, int can be replaced by a typedef name defined as int, or the type of argv can be written as char ** argv, or the return type may be specified by typeof(1), and so on.

7)In accordance with 6.2.4, the lifetimes of objects with automatic storage duration declared in main will have ended in the former case, even where they would not have in the latter.

8)ISO/IEC 60559 requires certain user-accessible status flags and control modes. Floating-point operations implicitly set the status flags; modes affect result values of floating-point operations. Implementations that support such floating-point state are required to regard changes to it as side effects — see Annex F for details. The floating-point environment library <fenv.h> provides a programming facility for indicating when these side effects matter, freeing the implementations in other cases.

9)The executions of unsequenced evaluations can interleave. Indeterminately sequenced evaluations cannot interleave, but can be executed in any order.

10)The execution can usually be viewed as an interleaving of all the threads. However, some kinds of atomic operations, for example, allow executions inconsistent with a simple interleaving as described in this subclause.

11)The "carries a dependency" relation is a subset of the "sequenced before" relation, and is similarly strictly intra-thread.

12)The "dependency-ordered before" relation is analogous to the "synchronizes with" relation, but uses release/consume in place of release/acquire.

13)Implementations are encouraged to avoid imposing fixed translation limits whenever possible.

14)See "future language directions" (6.11.3).

15)This value is exact.

16)The floating-point model is intended to clarify the description of each floating-point characteristic and does not require the floating-point arithmetic of the implementation to be identical.

17)The evaluation method determines evaluation formats of expressions involving all floating types, not just real types. For example, if FLT_EVAL_METHOD is 1, then the product of two float _Complex operands is represented in the double _Complex format, and its parts are evaluated to double.

18)The floating-point model in ISO/IEC 60559 sums powers of b from zero, so the values of the exponent limits are one less than shown here.

19)That means, that the outer declaration is not visible for the initializer.

20)There is no linkage between different identifiers.

21)A function declaration can contain the storage-class specifier static only if it is at file scope; see 6.7.2.

22)As specified in 6.2.1, the later declaration can hide the prior declaration.

23)There is only one name space for tags even though three are possible.

24)The term "constant address" means that two pointers to the object constructed at possibly different times will compare equal. The address can be different during two different executions of the same program.

25)In the case of a volatile object, the last store is not required to be explicit in the program.

26)Leaving the innermost block containing the declaration, or jumping to a point in that block or an embedded block prior to the declaration, leaves the scope of the declaration.

27)The address of such an object is taken implicitly when an array member is accessed.

28)An incomplete type can only be used when the size of an object of that type is not needed. It is not needed, for example, when a typedef name is declared to be a specifier for a structure or union, or when a pointer to or a function returning a structure or union is being declared. The specification has to be complete before such a function is called or defined.

29)A type can be incomplete or complete throughout an entire translation unit, or it can change states at different points within a translation unit.

30)Thus, _BitInt(3) is not the same type as _BitInt(4).

31)Implementation-defined keywords have the form of an identifier reserved for any use as described in 7.1.3.

32)Any statement in this document about signed integer types also applies to the bit-precise signed integer types and the extended signed integer types, unless otherwise noted.

33)Any statement in this document about unsigned integer types also applies to the bit-precise unsigned integer types and the extended unsigned integer types, unless otherwise specified.

34)The same representation and alignment requirements are meant to imply interchangeability as arguments to functions, return values from functions, and members of unions.

35)See "future language directions" (6.11.1).

36)ISO/IEC 60559 specifies decimal32 as a data-interchange format that does not require arithmetic support; however, _Decimal32 is a fully supported arithmetic type.

37)A specification for imaginary types is in Annex G.

38)CHAR_MIN, defined in <limits.h>, will have one of the values 0 or SCHAR_MIN, and this can be used to distinguish the two options. Irrespective of the choice made, char is a separate type from the other two and is not compatible with either.

39)Note that aggregate type does not include union type because an object with union type can only contain one member at a time.

40)See 6.7.4 regarding qualified array and function types.

41)The same representation and alignment requirements are meant to imply interchangeability as arguments to functions, return values from functions, and members of unions.

42)This does not apply to the _Atomic qualifier. Note that qualifiers do not have any direct effect on the array type itself, but affect conversion rules for pointer types that reference an array type.

43)Thus, an automatic variable can be initialized to a non-value representation without causing undefined behavior, but the value of the variable cannot be used until a proper value is stored in it.

44)It is possible for objects x and y with the same effective type T to have the same value when they are accessed as objects of type T, but to have different values in other contexts. In particular, if == is defined for type T, then x == y does not imply that memcmp(&x, &y, sizeof(T))== 0. Furthermore, x == y does not necessarily imply that x and y have the same value; other operations on values of type T can distinguish between them.

45)Two types need not be identical to be compatible.

46)A structure, union, or enumerated type without a tag or an incomplete structure, union or enumerated type is not compatible with any other structure, union or enum type declared in the same translation unit.

47)The notion of "same type" affects redeclarations of typedef names and tags in the same scope.

48)As specified in 6.2.1, the later declaration can hide the prior declaration.

49)Every over-aligned type is, or contains, a structure or union type with a member to which an extended alignment has been applied.

50)E.g. unsigned _BitInt(7): 2 is a bit-field that can hold the values 0, 1, 2, 3, and converts to unsigned _BitInt(7).

51)The rules describe arithmetic on the mathematical value, not the value of a given type of expression.

52)The remaindering operation performed when a value of integer type is converted to unsigned type need not be performed when a value of real floating type is converted to unsigned type. Thus, the range of portable real floating values is (1, Utype_MAX +1).

53)See 6.3.1.2.

54)For example, addition of a double _Complex and a float entails just the conversion of the float operand to double (and yields a double _Complex result).

55)The name "lvalue" comes originally from the assignment expression E1 = E2, in which the left operand E1 is required to be a (modifiable) lvalue. It is perhaps better considered as representing an object "locator value". What is sometimes called

56)Because this conversion does not occur, the operand of the sizeof operator remains a function designator and violates the constraints in 6.5.4.4

57)The macro NULL is defined in <stddef.h> (and other headers) as a null pointer constant; see 7.21.

58)The mapping functions for converting a pointer to an integer or an integer to a pointer are intended to be consistent with the addressing structure of the execution environment.

59)In general, the concept "correctly aligned" is transitive: if a pointer to type A is correctly aligned for a pointer to type B, which in turn is correctly aligned for a pointer to type C, then a pointer to type A is correctly aligned for a pointer to type C.

60)An additional category, placemarkers, is used internally in translation phase 4 (see 6.10.5.3); it cannot occur in source files.

61)One possible specification for imaginary types appears in Annex G.

62)These alternative keywords are obsolescent features and should not be used for new code and development.

63)The intent of this specification is to allow but not force the implementation of the corresponding feature by means of a predefined macro.

64)On systems that cannot accept extended characters in external identifiers, an encoding of the universal character name may be used in forming such identifiers. For example, some otherwise unused character or sequence of characters may be used to encode the u in a universal character name.

65)This allows a reserved identifier that matches the spelling of a keyword to be used as a macro name by the program.

66)Since the name __func__ is reserved for any use by the implementation (7.1.3), if any other identifier is explicitly declared using the name __func__, the behavior is undefined.

67)The disallowed characters are the characters in the basic character set and the code positions reserved by ISO/IEC 10646 for control characters, the character DELETE, the S-zone (reserved for use by UTF-16), and characters too large to be encoded by ISO/IEC 10646. Disallowed universal character escape sequences can still be specified with hexadecimal and octal escape sequences (6.4.4.5).

68)Hexadecimal floating constants can be used to obtain exact values in the semantic type that are independent of the evaluation format. Casts produce values in the semantic type, though depend on the rounding mode and may raise the inexact floating-point exception.

69)1.23, 1.230, 123e-2, 123e-02, and 1.23L are all different source forms and thus need not convert to the same internal format and value.

70)That is, assuming the default translation rounding-direction mode is not changed by an FENV_DEC_ROUND pragma (7.6.3).

71)The specification for the library functions recommends more accurate conversion than required for floating constants (see 7.24.1.5).

72)The semantics of these characters were discussed in 5.2.3. If any other character follows a backslash, the result is not a token and a diagnostic is required. See "future language directions" (6.11.4).

73)For example u8’ab’ violates this constraint.

74)The constants false and true promote to type int, see 6.3.1.1. When used for arithmetic, in translation phase 4 (5.1.1.2), they are signed values and the result of such arithmetic is consistent with the results of later translation phases.

75)A string literal may not be a string (see 7.1.1), because a null character can be embedded in it by a \0 escape sequence.

76)These tokens are sometimes called "digraphs".

77)Thus [ and <: behave differently when "stringized" (see 6.10.5.2), but can otherwise be freely interchanged.

78)Thus, sequences of characters that resemble escape sequences cause undefined behavior.

79)For an example of a header name preprocessing token used in a #pragma directive, see 6.10.11.

80)Thus, /* . .. */ comments do not nest.

81)This paragraph renders undefined statement expressions such as

82)The syntax specifies the precedence of operators in the evaluation of an expression, which is the same as the order of the major subclauses of this subclause, highest precedence first. Thus, for example, the expressions allowed as the operands of the binary + operator (6.5.7) are those expressions defined in 6.5.2 through 6.5.7. The exceptions are cast expressions (6.5.5) as operands of unary operators (6.5.4), and an operand contained between any of the following pairs of operators: grouping parentheses () (6.5.2), generic selection parentheses () (6.5.2.1), subscripting brackets code[] (6.5.3.2), function-call parentheses () (6.5.3.3), and the conditional operator ?: (6.5.16). Within each major subclause, the operators have the same precedence. Left- or right-associativity is indicated in each subclause by the syntax for the expressions discussed therein.

83)In an expression that is evaluated more than once during the execution of a program, unsequenced and indeterminately sequenced evaluations of its subexpressions can be performed inconsistently in different evaluations.

84)Allocated objects have no declared type.

85)The intent of this list is to specify those circumstances in which an object can or cannot be aliased.

86)The intermediate operations in the contracted expression are evaluated as if to infinite range and precision, while the final operation is rounded to the format determined by the expression evaluation method. A contracted expression may also omit the raising of floating-point exceptions.

87)This license is specifically intended to allow implementations to exploit fast machine instructions that combine multiple C operators. As contractions potentially undermine predictability, and can even decrease accuracy for containing expressions, their use needs to be well-defined and clearly documented.

88)An identifier designating an enumeration constant is a primary expression through the constant production, not the identifier production.

89)An lvalue conversion drops type qualifiers.

90)Most often, this is the result of converting an identifier that is a function designator.

91)A function can change the values of its parameters, but these changes cannot affect the values of the arguments. On the other hand, it is possible to pass a pointer to an object, and the function can then change the value of the object pointed to. A

92)In other words, function executions do not interleave with each other.

93)If the member used to read the contents of a union object is not the same as the member last used to store a value in the object the appropriate part of the object representation of the value is reinterpreted as an object representation in the new type as described in 6.2.6 (a process sometimes called type punning). This may be a non-value representation.

94)If &E is a valid pointer expression (where & is the address of operator, which generates a pointer to its operand), the expression (&E)->MOS is the same as E.MOS.

95)For example, a data race would occur if access to the entire structure or union in one thread conflicts with access to a member from another thread, where at least one access is a modification. Members can be safely accessed using a non-atomic object which is assigned to or from the atomic object.

96)Where a pointer to an atomic object can be formed and E has integer type, E++ is equivalent to the following code sequence where T is the type of E:

97)If the storage-class specifiers contain the same storage-class specifier more than once, the following constraint is violated.

98)Note that this differs from a cast expression. For example, a cast specifies a conversion to scalar types or void only, and the result of a cast expression is not an lvalue.

99)For example, subobjects without explicit initializers are initialized to zero.

100)This allows implementations to share storage for string literals and constant compound literals with the same or overlapping representations.

101)Thus, &*E is equivalent to E (even if E is a null pointer), and &(E1[E2]) to ((E1)+(E2)). It is always true that if E is a function designator or an lvalue that is a valid operand of the unary & operator, *&E is a function designator or an lvalue equal to E. If *P is an lvalue and T is the name of an object pointer type, *(T)P is an lvalue that has a type compatible with that to which T points. Among the invalid values for dereferencing a pointer by the unary * operator are a null pointer, an address inappropriately aligned for the type of object pointed to, and the address of an object after the end of its lifetime.

102)When applied to a parameter declared to have array or function type, the sizeof operator yields the size of the adjusted (pointer) type (see 6.9.2).

103)A cast does not yield an lvalue.

104)This is often called "truncation toward zero".

105)Another way to approach pointer arithmetic is first to convert the pointer(s) to character pointer(s): In this scheme the

106)The expression a<b<c is not interpreted as in ordinary mathematics. As the syntax indicates, it means (a<b)<c; in other words, "if a is less than b, compare 1 to c; otherwise, compare 0 to c".

107)Because of the precedences, a<b == c<d is 1 whenever a<b and c<d have the same truth-value.

108)Two objects can be adjacent in memory because they are adjacent elements of a larger array or adjacent members of a structure with no padding between them, or because the implementation chose to place them so, even though they are unrelated. If prior invalid pointer operations (such as accesses outside array bounds) produced undefined behavior, subsequent comparisons also produce undefined behavior.

109)If a second or third operand of type nullptr_t is used and the other operand is not a pointer and does not have type nullptr_t itself, a constraint is violated even if that other operand is a null pointer constant such as 0.

110)A conditional expression does not yield an lvalue.

111)The implementation is permitted to read the object to determine the value but is not required to, even when the object has volatile-qualified type.

112)The asymmetric appearance of these constraints with respect to type qualifiers is due to the conversion (specified in 6.3.2.1) that changes lvalues to "the value of the expression" and thus removes any type qualifiers that were applied to the type category of the expression (for example, it removes const but not volatile from the type int volatile * const).

113)As described in 6.2.6.1, a store to an object with atomic type is done with memory_order_seq_cst semantics.

114)A comma operator does not yield an lvalue.

115)The operand of a typeof (6.7.3.6), sizeof, or alignof operator is usually not evaluated (6.5.4.4).

116)The use of evaluation formats as characterized by FLT_EVAL_METHOD and DEC_EVAL_METHOD also applies to evaluation in the translation environment.

117)An integer constant expression is required in contexts such as the size of a bit-field member of a structure, the value of an enumeration constant, and the size of a non-variable length array. Further constraints that apply to the integer constant expressions used in conditional-inclusion preprocessing directives are discussed in 6.10.2.

118)A named constant or compound literal constant of integer type and value zero is a null pointer constant. A named constant or compound literal constant with a pointer type and a value null is a null pointer but not a null pointer constant; it may only be used to initialize a pointer object if its type implicitly converts to the target type.

119)Named constants or compound literal constants with arithmetic type, including names of constexpr objects, are valid in offset computations such as array subscripts or in pointer casts, as long as the expressions in which they occur form integer constant expressions. In contrast, names of other objects, even if const-qualified and with static storage duration, are not valid.

120)For example, in the declaration int arr_or_vla[(int)+1.0];, while possible to be computed by some implementations as an array with a size of one, it is implementation-defined whether this results in a variable length array declaration or a declaration of an array of known constant size of automatic storage duration. The choice depends on whether (int)+1.0 is an extended integer constant expression.

121)Thus, in the following initialization,

122)Function definitions have a different syntax, described in 6.9.2.

123)It is recommended that implementations that accept such declarations follow the semantics of the corresponding feature in ISO/IEC 14882.

124)See "future language directions" (6.11.5).

125)All assignment expressions of such an initializer, if any, are constant expressions or string literals, see 6.7.11.

126)In the context of arithmetic conversions, 6.3.1 describes the details of changes of value that occur if values of arithmetic expressions are stored in the objects that for example have a different signedness, excess precision or quantum exponent. Whenever such a change of value is necessary, the constraint is violated.

127)The named constant or compound literal constant corresponding to an object declared with storage-class specifier constexpr and pointer type is a constant expression with a value null, and thus a null pointer and an address constant. Thus, such a named constant is a valid initializer for other constexpr declarations, provided the pointer types match accordingly. However, even if it has type void* it is not a null pointer constant.

128)The implementation can treat any register declaration simply as an auto declaration. However, whether or not addressable storage is used, the address of any part of an object declared with storage-class specifier register cannot be computed, either explicitly (by use of the unary & operator as discussed in 6.5.4.2) or implicitly (by converting an array name to a pointer as discussed in 6.3.2.1). Thus, the only operator that can be applied to an array declared with storage-class specifier register is sizeof and the typeof operators.

129)While the number of bits in a bool object is at least CHAR_BIT, the width of a bool is just 1 bit.

130)For further rules affecting compatibility and completeness of structure or union types, see 6.2.7 and 6.7.3.4.

131)A structure or union cannot contain a member with a variably modified type because member names are not ordinary identifiers as defined in 6.2.3.

132)The unary & (address-of) operator cannot be applied to a bit-field object; thus, there are no pointers to or arrays of bit-field objects.

133)As specified in 6.7.3, if the actual type specifier used is int or a typedef-name defined as int, then it is implementationdefined whether the bit-field is signed or unsigned. This includes an int type specifier produced using the typeof specifiers (6.7.3.6).

134)An unnamed bit-field structure member is useful for padding to conform to externally imposed layouts.

135)The specifier qualifier list is not a context listed in 6.7.6 as permitted for alignment specifiers, so the presence of an alignment specifier in the list violates a constraint.

136)Thus, the identifiers of enumeration constants declared in the same scope are all required to be distinct from each other and from other identifiers declared in ordinary declarators.

137)Therefore, a constraint has been violated.

138)An implementation can delay the choice of which integer type until all enumeration constants have been seen.

139)For further rules affecting compatibility and completeness of enumerated types see 6.2.7 and 6.7.3.4.

140)The integer type selected during processing of the enumerator list (before completion) of the enumeration may not be the same as the compatible implementation-defined integer type selected for the completed enumeration.

141)This means in particular that if the compatible type is bool, values of the enumerated type behave in all aspects the same as bool, conversion to the enumerated type behaves the same as bool (6.3.1.2), and the members only have values false and true. If it is a signed integer type and the constant expression of an enumeration constant overflows, a constraint for constant expressions (6.6) is violated.

142)As specified in 6.7.3.2, the type specifier may be followed by a ; or a member declaration list.

143)If there is no identifier, the type can, within the translation unit, only be referred to by the declaration of which it is a part. Of course, when the declaration is of a typedef name, subsequent declarations can make use of that typedef name to declare objects having the specified structure, union, or enumerated type.

144)A similar construction for an enum that does not contain a fixed underlying type does not exist. Enumerations with a fixed underlying type are always complete after the enum type specifier.

145)When applied to a parameter declared to have array or function type, the typeof operators yield the adjusted (pointer) type (see 6.9.2).

146)If the typeof specifier argument is itself a typeof specifier, the operand will be evaluated before evaluating the current typeof operator. This happens recursively until a typeof specifier is no longer the operand.

147)_Atomic ( type-name), with parentheses, is considered an _Atomic-qualified type.

148)The implementation can place a const object that is not volatile in a read-only region of storage. Moreover, the implementation does not have to allocate storage for such an object if its address is never used.

149)This applies to those objects that behave as if they were defined with qualified types, even if they are never actually defined as objects in the program (such as an object at a memory-mapped input/output address).

150)A volatile declaration can be used to describe an object corresponding to a memory-mapped input/output port or an object accessed by an asynchronously interrupting function. Actions on objects so declared are not allowed to be "optimized out" by an implementation or reordered except as permitted by the rules for evaluating expressions.

151)For example, a statement that assigns a value returned by malloc to a single pointer establishes this association between the allocated object and the pointer.

152)This can occur with typedef s. Note that this rule does not apply to the _Atomic qualifier, and that qualifiers do not have any direct effect on the array type itself, but affect conversion rules for pointer types that reference an array type.

153)In other words, E depends on the value of P itself rather than on the value of an object referenced indirectly through P. For example, if identifier p has type (int **restrict), then the pointer expressions p and p+1 are based on the restricted pointer object designated by p, but the pointer expressions *p and p[1] are not.

154)By using, for example, an alternative to the usual function call mechanism, such as "inline substitution". Inline substitution is not textual substitution, nor does it create a new function. Therefore, for example, the expansion of a macro used within the body of the function uses the definition it had at the point the function body appears, and not where the function is called; and identifiers refer to the declarations in scope where the body occurs. Likewise, the function has a single address, regardless of the number of inline definitions that occur in addition to the external definition.

155)For example, an implementation may never perform inline substitution, or may only perform inline substitutions to calls in the scope of an inline declaration.

156)Since an inline definition is distinct from the corresponding external definition and from any other corresponding inline definitions in other translation units, all corresponding objects with static storage duration are also distinct in each of the definitions.

157)An alignment specification of zero also does not affect other alignment specifications in the same declaration.

158)When several "array of" specifications are adjacent, a multidimensional array is declared.

159)The array is considered identically qualified to T according to 6.2.5.

160)They can be used only in function declarations that are not definitions (see 6.7.7.4 and 6.9.2).

161)The macros defined in the <stdarg.h> header (7.16) can be used to access arguments that correspond to the ellipsis.

162)As indicated by the syntax, empty parentheses in a type name are interpreted as "function with no parameters", rather than redundant parentheses around the omitted identifier.

163)The scope rules as described in 6.2.1 also prohibit the use of the identifier of the declarator within the assignment expression.

164)It is recommended that implementations that accept different forms of direct declarators follow the syntax and semantics of the corresponding feature in ISO/IEC 14882.

165)A representation with all bits zero results in a decimal floating-point zero with the most negative exponent.

166)If the object being initialized does not have automatic storage duration, this case violates a constraint unless the expression is a named constant or compound literal constant (6.6).

167)If the initializer list for a subaggregate or contained union does not begin with a left brace, its subobjects are initialized as usual, but the subaggregate or contained union does not become the current object: current objects are associated only with brace-enclosed initializer lists.

168)After a union member is initialized, the next object is not the next member of the union; instead, it is the next subobject of an object containing the union.

169)Thus, a designator can only specify a strict subobject of the aggregate or union that is associated with the surrounding brace pair. Note, too, that each separate designator list is independent.

170)Any initializer for the subobject which is overridden and so not used to initialize that subobject may not be evaluated at all.

171)In particular, the evaluation order can be the same or different as the order of subobject initialization.

172)Thus, the attributes [[nodiscard]] and [[__nodiscard__]] can be freely interchanged. Implementations are encouraged to behave similarly for attribute tokens (including attribute prefixed tokens) they provide.

173)Standard attributes specified by this document can be parsed but ignored by an implementation without changing the semantics of a correct program; the same is not true for attributes not specified by this document.

174)In particular, deprecated is appropriate for names and entities that are obsolescent, insecure, unsafe, or otherwise unfit for purpose.

175)[[_Noreturn]] and [[noreturn]] are equivalent attributes to support code that includes <stdnoreturn.h>, because that header defines noreturn as a macro that expands to _Noreturn.

176)That is, they appear in the attributes right after the closing parenthesis of the parameter list, independently of whether the function type is, for example, used directly to declare a function or whether it is used in a pointer to function type.

177)If several declarations of the same function or function pointer are visible, regardless whether an attribute is present at several or just one of the declarators, it is attached to the type of the corresponding function definition, function pointer object, or function pointer value.

178)That is, the fact that a function has one of these properties is in general not determined by the specification of the translation unit in which it is found; other translation units and specific run time conditions also condition the possible assertion of the properties.

179)The initializations of the parameters is sequenced during the function call.

180)This considers the evaluation of the function call itself, not the evaluation of a full function call expression. Such an evaluation is sequenced after all evaluations that determine f and the call arguments, if any, have been performed.

181)This considers the evaluation of the function call itself, not the evaluation of a full function call expression. Such an evaluation is sequenced after all evaluations that determine f and the call arguments, if any, have been performed.

182)A function call of an unsequenced function can be executed as early as the function pointer value, the values of the arguments and all objects that are accessible through them, and all values of globally accessible state have been determined, and it can be executed as late as the arguments and the objects they possibly target are unchanged and as any of its return value or modified pointed-to arguments are accessed.

183)Such as assignments, and function calls which have side effects.

184)That is, the declaration either precedes the switch statement, or it follows the last case or default label associated with the switch that is in the block containing the declaration.

185)Code jumped over is not executed. In particular, the controlling expression of a for or while statement is not evaluated before entering the loop body, nor is clause-1 (6.8.6.4) of a for statement.

186)An omitted controlling expression is replaced by a nonzero constant, which is a constant expression.

187)This is intended to allow compiler transformations such as removal of empty loops even when termination cannot be proven.

188)Thus, clause-1 specifies initialization for the loop, possibly declaring one or more variables for use in the loop; the controlling expression, expression-2, specifies an evaluation made before each iteration, such that execution of the loop continues until the expression compares equal to 0; and expression-3 specifies an operation (such as incrementing) that is performed after each iteration.

189)Following the contin: label in the 2nd example is a null statement. The null statement in the first and third example is implied by the label (6.8.3).

190)The return statement is not an assignment. The overlap restriction of 6.5.17.2 does not apply to the case of function return. The representation of floating-point values can have wider range or precision than implied by the type; a cast can be used to remove this extra range and precision.

191)Thus, if an identifier declared with external linkage is not used in an expression, there need be no external definition for it.

192)The visibility scope of a parameter in a function definition starts when its declaration is completed, extends to following parameter declarations, to possible attributes that follow the parameter type list, and then to the entire function body. The lifetime of each instance of a parameter starts when the declaration is evaluated starting a call and ends when that call terminates.

193)A parameter that has no declared name is inaccessible within the function body.

194)A parameter identifier cannot be redeclared in the function body except in an enclosed block.

195)Thus, preprocessing directives are commonly called "lines". These "lines" have no other syntactic significance, as all white space is equivalent except in certain situations during preprocessing (see the # character string literal creation operator in 6.10.5.2, for example).

196)An unrecognized preprocessor prefixed parameter is a constraint violation, except within has_embed expressions (6.10.2).

197)Because the controlling constant expression is evaluated during translation phase 4, all identifiers either are or are not macro names — there simply are no keywords, enumeration constants, etc.

198)As indicated by the syntax, no preprocessing tokens are allowed to follow a #else or #endif directive before the terminating new-line character. However, comments can appear anywhere in a source file, including within a preprocessing directive.

199)Note that adjacent string literals are not concatenated into a single string literal (see the translation phases in 5.1.1.2); thus, an expansion that results in two string literals is an invalid directive.

200)This constraint helps ensure data is neither filled with padding values nor truncated in a given environment, and helps ensure the data is portable with respect to usages of memcpy (7.26.2.1) with character type arrays initialized from the data.

201)For example, an embed element width of 8 will yield a range of values from 0 to 255, inclusive.

202)Note that adjacent string literals are not concatenated into a single string literal (see the translation phases in 5.1.1.2); thus, an expansion that results in two string literals is an invalid directive.

203)Since, by macro-replacement time, all character constants and string literals are preprocessing tokens, not sequences possibly containing identifier-like subsequences (see 5.1.1.2, translation phases), they are never scanned for macro names or parameters.

204)Despite the name, a non-directive is a preprocessing directive.

205)Placemarker preprocessing tokens do not appear in the syntax because they are temporary entities that exist only within translation phase 4 (5.1.1.2).

206)Because a new-line is explicitly included as part of the #line directive, the number of new-line characters read while processing to the first pp-token can be different depending on whether the implementation uses a one-pass preprocessor. Therefore, there are two possible values for the line number following a directive of the form #line __LINE__ new-line.

207)An implementation is not required to perform macro replacement in pragmas, but it is permitted except for in standard pragmas (where STDC immediately follows pragma). If the result of macro replacement in a non-standard pragma has the same form as a standard pragma, the behavior is still implementation-defined; an implementation is permitted to behave as if it were the standard pragma, but is not required to.

208)See "future language directions" (6.11.6).

209)See "future language directions" (6.11.7).

210)The presumed source file name and line number can be changed by the #line directive.

211)See Annex M for the values in previous editions of this document. The intention is that this will remain an integer constant of type long int that is increased with each revision of this document.

212)The functions that make use of the decimal-point character are the numeric conversion functions (7.24.1, 7.31.4.1) and the formatted input/output functions (7.23.6, 7.31.2).

213)For state-dependent encodings, the values for MB_CUR_MAX and MB_LEN_MAX are thus required to be large enough to count all the bytes in any complete multibyte character plus at least one adjacent shift sequence of maximum length. Whether these counts provide for more than one shift sequence is the implementation’s choice.

214)A header is not necessarily a source file, nor are the< and > delimited sequences in header names necessarily valid source file names.

215)The headers <complex.h>, <stdatomic.h>, and <threads.h> are conditional features that implementations need not support; see 6.10.10.4.

216)All library functions have external linkage.

217)A potentially reserved identifier becomes a reserved identifier when an implementation begins using it or a future standard reserves it, but is otherwise available for use by the programmer.

218)The list of reserved identifiers with external linkage includes math_errhandling, setjmp, va_copy, and va_end.

219)This includes, for example, passing a valid pointer that points one-past-the-end of an array along with a size of 0, or using any valid pointer with a size of 0.

220)This means that an implementation is required to provide an actual function for each library function, even if it also provides a macro for that function.

221)However, such macros may not contain the sequence points that the corresponding function calls do.

222)Because external identifiers and some macro names beginning with an underscore are reserved, implementations can provide special semantics for such names. For example, the identifier _BUILTIN_abs could be used to indicate generation of in-line code for the abs function. Thus, the appropriate header could specify

223)Thus, a signal handler cannot, in general, call standard library functions.

224)This means, for example, that an implementation is not permitted to use a static object for internal purposes without synchronization because it could cause a data race even in programs that do not explicitly share objects between threads. Similarly, an implementation of memcpy is not permitted to copy bytes beyond the specified length of the destination object and then restore the original values because it could cause a data race if the program shared those bytes between threads.

225)This allows implementations to parallelize operations if there are no visible side effects.

226)The message written can be of the form:

227)See "future library directions" (7.33.1).

228)The imaginary unit is a number i such that i2 = −1.

229)A specification for imaginary types is in Annex G.

231)For a complex variable z, z and CMPLX(creal(z), cimag(z)) are equivalent expressions. If imaginary types are supported, z and creal(z)+cimag(z)*I are equivalent expressions.

232)For a complex variable z, z and CMPLX(creal(z), cimag(z)) are equivalent expressions. If imaginary types are supported, z and creal(z)+cimag(z)*I are equivalent expressions.

233)See "future library directions" (7.33.2).

234)In an implementation that uses the seven-bit US ASCII character set, the printing characters are those whose values lie from 0x20 (space) through 0x7E (tilde); the control characters are those whose values lie from 0 (NUL) through 0x1F (US), and the character 0x7F (DEL).

235)The functions islower and isupper test true or false separately for each of these additional characters; all four combinations are possible.

236)The macro errno need not be the identifier of an object. Expansion to a modifiable lvalue resulting from a function call (for example, (*errno())) is a viable implementation strategy.

237)Thus, a program that uses errno for error checking would set it to zero before a library function call, then inspect it before a subsequent library function call. Of course, a library function can save the value of errno on entry and then set it to zero, as long as the original value is restored if errno’s value is still zero just before the return.

238)See "future library directions" (7.33.3).

239)This header is designed to support the floating-point exception status flags and rounding-direction control modes required by ISO/IEC 60559, and other similar floating-point state information. It is also designed to facilitate code portability among all systems.

240)A floating-point status flag is not an object and can be set more than once within an expression.

241)With these conventions, a programmer can safely assume default floating-point control modes (or be unaware of them). The responsibilities associated with accessing the floating-point environment fall on the programmer or program that does so explicitly.

242)The implementation supports a floating-point exception if there are circumstances where a call to at least one of the functions in 7.6.4, using the macro as the appropriate argument, will succeed. It is not necessary for all the functions to succeed all the time.

243)See "future library directions" (7.33.4).

244)The macros are typically distinct powers of two.

245)See "future library directions" (7.33.4).

246)Even though the rounding direction macros can expand to constants corresponding to the values of FLT_ROUNDS, they are not required to do so.

247)See "future library directions" (7.33.4).

248)The purpose of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is to allow certain optimizations that could subvert flag tests and mode changes (e.g. global common subexpression elimination, code motion, and constant folding). In general, if the state of FENV_ACCESS is "off", the translator can assume that the flags are not tested, and that default modes are in effect, except where specified otherwise by an FENV_ROUND pragma.

249)The side effects impose a temporal ordering that requires two evaluations of x + 1. On the other hand, without the #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON pragma, and assuming the default state is "off", just one evaluation of x + 1 would suffice.

250)The functions fetestexcept, feraiseexcept, and feclearexcept support the basic abstraction of flags that are either set or clear. An implementation can endow floating-point status flags with more information — for example, the address of the code which first raised the floating-point exception; the functions fegetexceptflag and fesetexceptflag deal with the full content of flags.

251)The effect is intended to be similar to that of floating-point exceptions raised by arithmetic operations. Hence, implementation extensions associated with raising a floating-point exception (for example, enabled traps or ISO/IEC 60559 alternate exception handling) should be honored. The specification in F.8.7 is in the same spirit.

252)Implementation extensions like traps for floating-point exceptions and ISO/IEC 60559 exception handling do not occur.

253)This mechanism allows testing several floating-point exceptions with just one function call.

254)ISO/IEC 60559 systems have a default non-stop mode, and typically at least one other mode for trap handling or aborting; if the system provides only the non-stop mode then installing it is trivial. For such systems, the feholdexcept function can be used in conjunction with the feupdateenv function to write routines that hide spurious floating-point exceptions from their callers.

255)See "future library directions" (7.33.6).

256)For any given type, the corresponding macros for fprintf and fscanf functions may be distinct.

257)The absolute value of the most negative number is not representable.

258)ISO/IEC 9945 specifies locale and charmap formats that can be used to specify locales for C.

259)See "future library directions" (7.33.7).

260)The only functions in 7.4 whose behavior is not affected by the current locale are isdigit and isxdigit.

261)The implementation is thus required to arrange to encode in a string the various categories due to a heterogeneous locale when category has the value LC_ALL.

262)Particularly on systems with wide expression evaluation, a <math.h> function can pass arguments and return values in wider format than the synopsis prototype indicates.

263)The types float_t and double_t are intended to be the implementation’s most efficient types at least as wide as float and double, respectively. For FLT_EVAL_METHOD equal 0, 1, or 2, the type float_t is the narrowest type used by the implementation to evaluate floating expressions.

264)HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, and HUGE_VALL can be positive infinities in an implementation that supports infinities.

265)Typically, the FP_FAST_FMA macro is defined if and only if the fma function is implemented directly with a hardware multiply-add instruction. Software implementations are expected to be substantially slower.

266)In an implementation that supports infinities, this allows an infinity as an argument to be a domain error if the mathematical domain of the function does not include the infinity.

267)Range errors that are required or implementation-defined shall or may be reported, as specified in this subclause.

268)Ordinary accuracy is determined by the implementation. It refers to the accuracy of the function where results are not compromised by extreme magnitude.

269)The term underflow here is intended to encompass both "gradual underflow" as in ISO/IEC 60559 and also "flush-to-zero" underflow. ISO/IEC 60559 underflow can occur in cases where the magnitude of the rounded result (accurate to the full precision of the type) equals the minimum normalized number in the format.

270)Math errors are being indicated by the floating-point exception flags rather than by errno.

271)Since an expression can be evaluated with more range and precision than its type has, it is important to know the type that classification is based on. For example, a normal long double value can become subnormal when converted to double, and zero when converted to float.

272)For the isnan macro, the type for determination does not matter unless the implementation supports NaNs in the evaluation type but not in the semantic type.

273)The signbit macro determines the sign of all values, including infinities, zeros, and NaNs.

274)F.3 specifies that issignaling (and all the other classification macros), raise no floating-point exception if the argument is a variable, or any other expression whose value is represented in the format of its semantic type, even if the value is a signaling NaN.

275)For small magnitude x, expm1(x) is expected to be more accurate than exp(x)-1.

276)The logp1 functions are preferred for name consistency with the log10p1 and log2p1 functions.

277)For small magnitude x, logp1(x) is expected to be more accurate than log(1 + x).

278)Restricting the domain to that of the formula ey loge x is intended to better meet expectations for a continuous power function and to allow implementations with fewer tests for special cases.

280)The argument values are converted to the return type of the function, even by a macro implementation of the function.

281)The result of the nexttoward functions is determined in the return type of the function, without loss of range or precision in a floating second argument.

282)Arguments x and cx may point to the same object.

283)Quiet NaN arguments are treated as missing data: if one argument is a quiet NaN and the other numeric, then the fmax functions choose the numeric value. See F.10.9.2.

284)The fmin functions are analogous to the fmax functions in their treatment of quiet NaNs.

285)In some cases the destination type may not be narrower than the parameter types. For example, double potentially is not narrower than long double.

286)ISO/IEC 60559 requires that the built-in relational operators raise the "invalid" floating-point exception if the operands compare unordered, as an error indicator for programs written without consideration of NaNs; the result in these cases is false.

287)If any argument is of integer type, or any other type that is not a real floating type, the behavior is undefined.

288)Whether an argument represented in a format wider than its semantic type is converted to the semantic type is unspecified.

289)These functions are useful for dealing with unusual conditions encountered in a low-level function of a program.

290)For example, by executing a return statement or because another longjmp call has caused a transfer to a setjmp invocation in a function earlier in the set of nested calls.

291)This includes, but is not limited to, the floating-point environment and the state of open files.

292)See "future library directions" (7.33.9). The names of the signal numbers reflect the following terms (respectively): abort, floating-point exception, illegal instruction, interrupt, segmentation violation, and termination.

293)This includes functions called indirectly via standard library functions (e.g. a SIGABRT handler called via the abort function).

294)If any signal is generated by an asynchronous signal handler, the behavior is undefined.

295)A pointer to a va_list can be created and passed to another function, in which case the original function can make further use of the original list after the other function returns.

296)Such types are in particular pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of void.

297)See "future library directions" (7.33.10).

298)See "future library directions" (7.33.10).

299)See "future library directions" (7.33.10).

300)obj can be a null pointer.

301)See "future library directions" (7.33.10).

302)The same representation and alignment requirements are meant to imply interchangeability as arguments to functions, return values from functions, and members of unions.

303)Thus, during the whole program execution an object of type nullptr_t evaluates to the assumed value nullptr.

304)See "future library directions" (7.33.14).

305)Some of these types can denote implementation-defined extended integer types.

306)The designated type is not guaranteed to be fastest for all purposes; if the implementation has no clear grounds for choosing one type over another, it will simply pick some integer type satisfying the signedness and width requirements.

307)Thus this type is capable of representing any value of any unsigned integer type with the possible exception of bit-precise integer types and particular extended integer types that are wider than unsigned long long.

308)The exact-width and pointer-holding integer types are optional.

309)A freestanding implementation need not provide all these types.

310)Of course, file name string contents are subject to other system-specific constraints; therefore all possible strings of length FILENAME_MAX cannot be expected to be opened successfully.

311)If the implementation only uses the [-]NAN style, then _PRINTF_NAN_LEN_MAX would have the value 4.

312)An implementation need not distinguish between text streams and binary streams. In such an implementation, there need be no new-line characters in a text stream nor any limit to the length of a line.

313)The three predefined streams stdin, stdout, and stderr are unoriented at program startup.

314)Setting the file position indicator to end-of-file, as with fseek(file, 0, SEEK_END), has undefined behavior for a binary stream (because of possible trailing null characters) or for any stream with state-dependent encoding that does not assuredly end in the initial shift state.

315)Among the reasons the implementation could cause the rename function to fail are that the file is open or that it is necessary to copy its contents to effectuate its renaming.

316)Files created using strings generated by the tmpnam function are temporary only in the sense that their names are not expected to collide with those generated by conventional naming rules for the implementation. It is still necessary to use the remove function to remove such files when their use is ended, and before program termination.

317)If the string begins with one of the listed mode sequences, the implementation can choose to ignore the remaining characters, or it can use them to select different kinds of a file (some of which may not conform to the properties in 7.23.2).

318)The primary use of the freopen function is to change the file associated with a standard text stream (stderr, stdin, or stdout), as those identifiers need not be modifiable lvalues to which the value returned by the fopen function could be assigned.

319)The buffer has to have a lifetime at least as great as the open stream, so not closing the stream before a buffer that has automatic storage duration is deallocated upon block exit results in undefined behavior.

320)The fprintf functions perform writes to memory for the %n specifier.

321)Note that 0 is taken as a flag, not as the beginning of a field width.

322)The results of all floating conversions of a negative zero, and of negative values that round to zero, include a minus sign.

323)When applied to infinite and NaN values, the -, +, and space flag characters have their usual meaning; the # and 0 flag characters have no effect.

324)Binary implementations can choose the hexadecimal digit to the left of the decimal-point character so that subsequent digits align to nibble (4-bit) boundaries. This implementation choice affects numerical values printed with a precision P that is insufficient to represent all values exactly. Implementations with different conventions about the most significant hexadecimal digit will round at different places, affecting the numerical value of the hexadecimal result. For example, possible printed output for the code

325)The formatting precision P is sufficient to distinguish values of the source type if 16P>bp where b (not a power of 2) and p are the base and precision of the source type (5.2.5.3.3). A smaller P potentially suffices depending on the implementation’s scheme for determining the digit to the left of the decimal-point character.

326)No special provisions are made for multibyte characters.

327)Redundant shift sequences can result if multibyte characters have a state-dependent encoding.

328)See "future library directions" (7.33.15).

329)The behavior is undefined when the types differ as specified for va_arg 7.16.1.1.

330)For binary-to-decimal conversion, the result format’s values are the numbers representable with the given format specifier. The number of significant digits is determined by the format specifier, and in the case of fixed-point conversion by the source value as well.

331)These white-space characters are not counted against a specified field width.

332)fscanf pushes back at most one input character onto the input stream. Therefore, some sequences that are acceptable to strtod, strtol, etc., are unacceptable to fscanf.

333)No special provisions are made for multibyte characters in the matching rules used by the c, s, and [ conversion specifiers — the extent of the input field is determined on a byte-by-byte basis. The resulting field is nevertheless a sequence of multibyte characters that begins in the initial shift state.

334)See "future library directions" (7.33.15).

335)As the functions vfprintf, vfscanf, vprintf, vscanf, vsnprintf, vsprintf, and vsscanf invoke the va_arg macro, arg after the return has an indeterminate representation.

336)An end-of-file and a read error can be distinguished by use of the feof and ferror functions.

337)Note that a file positioning function could further modify the file position indicator after discarding any pushed-back characters.

338)See "future library directions" (7.33.15).

339)See "future library directions" (7.33.16).

340)It is unspecified whether a minus-signed sequence is converted to a negative number directly or by negating the value resulting from converting the corresponding unsigned sequence (see F.5); the two methods could yield different results if rounding is toward positive or negative infinity. In either case, the functions honor the sign of zero if floating-point arithmetic supports signed zeros.

341)An implementation can use the n-char sequence to determine extra information to be represented in the NaN’s significand.

342)M is sufficiently large that L and U will usually correctly round to the same internal floating value, but if not will correctly round to adjacent values.

343)Non-arithmetic interchange formats are an optional feature in Annex H.

344)An implementation may use the d-char sequence to determine extra information to be represented in the NaN’s significand.

345)The alignment requirements from 7.24.3 also apply even if the requested alignment is less strict.

346)Note that this need not be the same as the representation of floating-point zero or a null pointer constant.

347)The atexit function registrations are distinct from the at_quick_exit registrations, so applications potentially need to call both registration functions with the same argument.

348)The at_quick_exit function registrations are distinct from the atexit registrations, so applications potentially need to call both registration functions with the same argument.

349)Each function is called as many times as it was registered, and in the correct order with respect to other registered functions.

350)Many implementations provide non-standard functions that modify the environment list.

351)Each function is called as many times as it was registered, and in the correct order with respect to other registered functions.

352)That is, if the value passed is p, then the following expressions are always nonzero:

353)In practice, the entire array is sorted according to the comparison function.

354)If the argument is a null pointer and the call is executed, the behavior is undefined.

355)This is an obsolescent feature.

356)The absolute value of the most negative number is not representable.

357)If the locale employs special bytes to change the shift state, these bytes do not produce separate wide character codes, but are grouped with an adjacent multibyte character.

358)The array will not be null-terminated if the value returned is n.

359)The actual alignment of an object may be stricter than the alignment requested for an object by alignas or (implicitly) by an allocation function, but will always satisfy it.

360)See "future library directions" (7.33.17).

361)Thus, if there is no null character in the first n characters of the array pointed to by s2, the result will not be nullterminated.

362)Thus, the maximum number of characters that can end up in the array pointed to by s1 is strlen(s1)+n+1.

363)The unused bytes used as padding for purposes of alignment within structure objects take on unspecified values when a value is stored in the object (see 6.2.6.1). Strings shorter than their allocated space and unions can also cause problems in comparison.

364)The null pointer constant is not a pointer to a const-qualified type, and therefore the result expression has the type of a pointer to an unqualified element; however, evaluating such a call is undefined.

365)This is an obsolescent feature.

366)The strtok_s function can be used instead to avoid data races.

367)The intention is that the memory store is always performed (i.e. never elided), regardless of optimizations. This is in contrast to calls to the memset function (7.26.6.1)

368)The strerror_s function can be used instead to avoid data races.

369)Like other function-like macros in standard libraries, each type-generic macro can be suppressed to make available the corresponding ordinary function.

370)If the type of the argument is not compatible with the type of the parameter for the selected function, the behavior is undefined.

371)See "future library directions" (7.33.19).

372)See future library directions (7.33). Implementations can define additional time bases, but are only required to support a real time clock based on UTC.

373)The tv_sec member is a linear count of seconds and potentially does not have the normal semantics of a time_t.

374)The range [0, 60] for tm_sec allows for a positive leap second.

375)This could be due to overflow of the clock_t type.

376)If the broken-down time specifies a time that is either skipped over or repeated when a transition to or from Daylight Saving Time occurs, it is unspecified whether the mktime function produces the same result as an equivalent call with a positive tm_isdst value or as an equivalent call with a tm_isdst value of zero.

377)Although a struct timespec object describes times with nanosecond resolution, the available resolution is system dependent and could even be greater than 1 second.

378)Commonly, this reference point is the boot time of the execution environment or the start of the execution.

379)The execution environment may, for example, not be able to track physical time that elapsed during suspension in a low power consumption mode.

380)This does not mean that these functions may not read global state that describes the time and calendar settings of the execution, such as the LC_TIME locale or the implementation-defined specification of the local time zone. Only the setting of that state by setlocale or by means of implementation-defined functions may constitute races.

381)See 7.29.1.

382)When n has at least the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro, this case can only occur if s points at a sequence of redundant shift sequences (for implementations with state-dependent encodings).

383)When n has at least the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro, this case can only occur if s points at a sequence of redundant shift sequences (for implementations with state-dependent encodings).

384)When n has at least the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro, this case can only occur if s points at a sequence of redundant shift sequences (for implementations with state-dependent encodings).

385)See "future library directions" (7.33.20).

386)wchar_t and wint_t can be the same integer type.

387)The value of the macro WEOF can differ from that of EOF and need not be negative.

388)The fwprintf functions perform writes to memory for the %n specifier.

389)Note that 0 is taken as a flag, not as the beginning of a field width.

390)The results of all floating conversions of a negative zero, and of negative values that round to zero, include a minus sign.

391)When applied to infinite and NaN values, the -, +, and space flag wide characters have their usual meaning; the # and 0 flag wide characters have no effect.

392)Binary implementations can choose the hexadecimal digit to the left of the decimal-point wide character so that subsequent digits align to nibble (4-bit) boundaries. This implementation choice affects numerical values printed with a precision P that is insufficient to represent all values exactly. Implementations with different conventions about the most significant hexadecimal digit will round at different places, affecting the numerical value of the hexadecimal result. For example, possible printed output for the code

393)The formatting precision P is sufficient to distinguish values of the source type if 16P>bp where b (not a power of 2) and p are the base and precision of the source type (5.2.5.3.3). A smaller P potentially suffices depending on the implementation’s scheme for determining the digit to the left of the decimal-point wide character.

394)See "future library directions" (7.33.20).

395)The behavior is undefined when the types differ as specified for va_arg 7.16.1.1.

396)For binary-to-decimal conversion, the result format’s values are the numbers representable with the given format specifier. The number of significant digits is determined by the format specifier, and in the case of fixed-point conversion by the source value as well.

397)These white-space wide characters are not counted against a specified field width.

398)fwscanf pushes back at most one input wide character onto the input stream. Therefore, some sequences that are acceptable to wcstod, wcstol, etc., are unacceptable to fwscanf.

399)See "future library directions" (7.33.20).

400)As the functions vfwprintf, vswprintf, vfwscanf, vwprintf, vwscanf, and vswscanf invoke the va_arg macro, the representation of arg after the return is indeterminate.

401)An end-of-file and a read error can be distinguished by use of the feof and ferror functions. Also, errno will be set to EILSEQ by input/output functions only if an encoding error occurs.

402)If the orientation of the stream has already been determined, fwide does not change it.

403)Note that a file positioning function could further modify the file position indicator after discarding any pushed-back wide characters.

404)Wide string analogs of the strfromd family of functions (7.24.1.5, 7.24.1.6) are not provided because those conversions can be done by using mbstowcs (7.24.8.1) to convert the result of strfromd, strfromf, and similar to wide string. For example, the following converts double d to wide string ws with at most n-1 non-null wide characters, using style g formatting, and computes the number nc of wide characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large, not counting the terminating null wide character.

405)It is unspecified whether a minus-signed sequence is converted to a negative number directly or by negating the value resulting from converting the corresponding unsigned sequence (see F.5); the two methods could yield different results if rounding is toward positive or negative infinity. In either case, the functions honor the sign of zero if floating-point arithmetic supports signed zeros.

406)An implementation can use the n-wchar sequence to determine extra information to be represented in the NaN’s significand.

407)M is sufficiently large that L and U will usually correctly round to the same internal floating value, but if not will correctly round to adjacent values.

408)Non-arithmetic interchange formats are an optional feature in Annex H.

409)An implementation may use the d-wchar sequence to determine extra information to be represented in the NaN’s significand.

410)Thus, if there is no null wide character in the first n wide characters of the array pointed to by s2, the result will not be null-terminated.

411)Thus, the maximum number of wide characters that can end up in the array pointed to by s1 is wcslen(s1)+n+1.

412)The null pointer constant is not a pointer to a const-qualified type, and therefore the result expression has the type of a pointer to an unqualified element; however, evaluating such a call is undefined.

413)This is an obsolescent feature.

414)Thus, a particular mbstate_t object can be used, for example, with both the mbrtowc and mbsrtowcs functions as long as they are used to step sequentially through the same multibyte character string.

415)When n has at least the value of the MB_CUR_MAX macro, this case can only occur if s points at a sequence of redundant shift sequences (for implementations with state-dependent encodings).

416)Thus, the value of len is ignored if dst is a null pointer.

417)If conversion stops because a terminating null wide character has been reached, the bytes stored include those necessary to reach the initial shift state immediately before the null byte.

418)See "future library directions" (7.33.21).

419)For example, if the expression isalpha(wctob(wc)) evaluates to true, then the call iswalpha(wc) also returns true. But, if the expression isgraph(wctob(wc)) evaluates to true (which cannot occur for wc == L’’ of course), then either iswgraph(wc) or iswprint(wc)&& iswspace(wc) is true, but not both.

420)The functions iswlower and iswupper test true or false separately for each of these additional wide characters; all four combinations are possible.

421)Note that the behavior of the iswgraph and iswpunct functions can differ from their corresponding functions in 7.4.2 with respect to printing, white-space, single-byte execution characters other than ’ ’.

422)For the minimum value of a signed integer type there is no expression consisting of a minus sign and a decimal literal of that same type. The numbers in the table are only given as indications for the values and do not represent suitable expressions to be used for these macros.

423)Implementations that do not define either of __STDC_IEC_60559_BFP__ and __STDC_IEC_559__ are not required to conform to these specifications. New code should not use the obsolescent macro __STDC_IEC_559__ to test for conformance to this annex.

424)ISO/IEC 60559 binary64-extended formats include the common 80-bit ISO/IEC 60559 format.

425)A non-ISO/IEC 60559 long double type provides signed infinities, signed zeros, and NaNs, as its values include all double values.

426)Since NaNs created by ISO/IEC 60559 arithmetic operations are always quiet, quiet NaNs (along with infinities) are sufficient for closure of the arithmetic.

427)Where the source and destination formats are the same, convertFormat operations differ from copy operations in that convertFormat operations raise the "invalid" floating-point exception on signaling NaN inputs and do not propagate non-canonical encodings.

428)ISO/IEC 60559 recommends that implicit floating-to-integer conversions raise the "inexact" floating-point exception for non-integer in-range values. In those cases where it matters, library functions can be used to effect such conversions with or without raising the "inexact" floating- point exception. See fromfp, ufromfp, fromfpx, ufromfpx, rint, lrint, llrint, and nearbyint in <math.h>.

429)The intermediate conversion is exact only if all input digits after the first CR_DECIMAL_DIG digits are 0.

430)Assignment removes any extra range and precision.

431)Dynamic rounding precision and trap enablement modes are examples of such extensions.

432)If the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "off", the implementation is free to assume the dynamic floating-point control modes will be the default ones and the floating-point status flags will not be tested, which allows certain optimizations (see F.9).

433)As floating constants are converted to appropriate internal representations at translation time, their conversion is subject to constant or default rounding modes and raises no execution-time floating-point exceptions (even where the state of the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on"). Library functions, for example strtod, provide execution-time conversion of numeric strings.

434)Where the state for the FENV_ACCESS pragma is "on", results of inexact expressions like 1.0/3.0 are affected by rounding modes set at execution time, and expressions such as 0.0/0.0 and 1.0/0.0 generate execution-time floating-point exceptions. The programmer can achieve the efficiency of translation-time evaluation through static initialization, such as

435)Use of float_t and double_t variables increases the likelihood of translation-time computation. For example, the automatic initialization

436)Implementations may have non-required features that invalidate these and other transformations that remove arithmetic operators. Examples include strict support for signaling NaNs (an optional feature) and alternate exception handling (not included in this specification).

437)ISO/IEC 60559 prescribes a signed zero to preserve mathematical identities across certain discontinuities. Examples include: 1/(1/±) is ± and conj(csqrt(z)) is csqrt(conj(z)), for complex z.

438)0-0 yields -0 instead of +0 just when the rounding direction is downward.

439)Tiny generally indicates having a magnitude in the subnormal range. See ISO/IEC 60559 for details about detecting tininess.

440)It is intended that spurious "underflow" and "inexact" floating-point exceptions are raised only if avoiding them would be too costly. 7.12.1 specifies that if math_errhandling & MATH_ERREXCEPT is nonzero, then an "underflow" floating-point exception shall not be raised unless an underflow range error occurs.

441)atan2(0,0) does not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception, nor does atan2(y,0) raise the "divide-by-zero" floatingpoint exception.

442)atan2pi(0,0) does not raise the "invalid" floating-point exception, nor does atan2pi(y,0) raise the "divide-by-zero" floating-point exception.

443)This code does not handle signaling NaNs as required of implementations that define FE_SNANS_ALWAYS_SIGNAL.

444)As if *x * 1e0 were computed.

445)If possible, fmax is sensitive to the sign of zero, for example fmax(0.0,+0.0) ideally returns +0. Note also that this implementation does not handle signaling NaNs as required of implementations that define FE_SNANS_ALWAYS_SIGNAL.

446)For the purpose of determining value inclusion (as in 6.2.5, 7.12, and H.11), quiet NaN representations can be regarded as having the same value, regardless of payloads.

447)Implementations that do not define __STDC_IEC_60559_COMPLEX__ or __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ are not required to conform to these specifications. The use of __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ for this purpose is obsolescent and should be avoided in new code.

448)See 6.3.1.2.

449)These properties are already implied for those cases covered in the tables, but are required for all cases (at least where the state for CX_LIMITED_RANGE is "off").

450)As noted in G.3, a complex value with at least one infinite part is regarded as an infinity even if its other part is a quiet NaN.

451)This allows cpow(z,c) to be implemented as cexp(cclog(z)) without precluding implementations that treat special cases more carefully.

452)In ISO/IEC 60559, normal floating-point numbers are expressed with the first significant digit to the left of the radix point. Hence the exponent in the C model (shown in the tables) is 1 more than the exponent of the same number in the ISO/IEC 60559 model.

453)All cases where float may have the same format as another type are covered in the preceding paragraphs.

454)Implementations that do not define __STDC_LIB_EXT1__ are not required to conform to these specifications.

455)Future revisions of this document can define meanings for other values of __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__.

456)7.1.3 reserves certain names and patterns of names that an implementation can use in headers. All other names are not reserved, and a conforming implementation is not permitted to use them. While some of the names defined in this annex and its subclauses are (potentially) reserved, others are not. If an unreserved name is defined in a header when __STDC_WANT_LIB_EXT1__ is defined as 0, the implementation is not conforming.

457)Although runtime-constraints replace many cases of undefined behavior, undefined behavior still exists in this annex. Implementations are free to detect any case of undefined behavior and treat it as a runtime-constraint violation by calling the runtime-constraint handler. This license comes directly from the definition of undefined behavior.

458)As a matter of programming style, errno_t can be used as the type of something that deals only with the values that can be found in errno. For example, a function which returns the value of errno could be declared as having the return type errno_t.

459)See the description of the RSIZE_MAX macro in <stdint.h>.

460)Files created using strings generated by the tmpnam_s function are temporary only in the sense that their names are not expected to collide with those generated by conventional naming rules for the implementation. It is still necessary to use the remove function to remove such files when their use is ended, and before program termination.

461)An implementation can have tmpnam call tmpnam_s (perhaps so there is only one naming convention for temporary files), but this is not required.

462)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the characters %n to appear in sequence in the string pointed at by format when those characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was %%n.

463)Because an implementation can treat any undefined behavior as a runtime-constraint violation, an implementation can treat any unsupported specifiers in the string pointed to by format as a runtime-constraint violation.

464)Because an implementation can treat any undefined behavior as a runtime-constraint violation, an implementation can treat any unsupported specifiers in the string pointed to by format as a runtime-constraint violation.

465)If the format is known at translation time, an implementation can issue a diagnostic for any argument used to store the result from a c, s, or [ conversion specifier if that argument is not followed by an argument of a type compatible with rsize_t. A limited amount of checking can be done if even if the format is not known at translation time. For example, an implementation could issue a diagnostic for each argument after format that has of type pointer to one of char, signed char, unsigned char, or void that is not followed by an argument of a type compatible with rsize_t. The diagnostic could warn that unless the pointer is being used with a conversion specifier using the hh length modifier, a length argument is expected to follow the pointer argument. Another useful diagnostic could flag any non-pointer argument following format that did not have a type compatible with rsize_t.

466)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the characters %n to appear in sequence in the string pointed at by format when those characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was %%n.

467)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the characters %n to appear in sequence in the string pointed at by format when those characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was %%n.

468)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the characters %n to appear in sequence in the string pointed at by format when those characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was %%n.

469)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the characters %n to appear in sequence in the string pointed at by format when those characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was %%n.

470)As the functions vfprintf_s, vfscanf_s, vprintf_s, vscanf_s, vsnprintf_s, vsprintf_s, and vsscanf_s invoke the va_arg macro, the representation of arg after the return is indeterminate.

471)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the characters %n to appear in sequence in the string pointed at by format when those characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was %%n.

472)As the functions vfprintf_s, vfscanf_s, vprintf_s, vscanf_s, vsnprintf_s, vsprintf_s, and vsscanf_s invoke the va_arg macro, the representation of arg after the return is indeterminate.

473)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the characters %n to appear in sequence in the string pointed at by format when those characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was %%n.

474)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the characters %n to appear in sequence in the string pointed at by format when those characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was %%n.

475)As the functions vfprintf_s, vfscanf_s, vprintf_s, vscanf_s, vsnprintf_s, vsprintf_s, and vsscanf_s invoke the va_arg macro, the value of arg after the return is indeterminate.

476)The gets_s function, unlike the historical gets function, makes it a runtime-constraint violation for a line of input to overflow the buffer to store it. Unlike the fgets function, gets_s maintains a one-to-one relationship between input lines and successful calls to gets_s. Programs that use gets expect such a relationship.

477)If the previous handler was registered by calling set_constraint_handler_s with a null pointer argument, a pointer to the implementation default handler is returned (not null).

478)Many implementations invoke a debugger when the abort function is called.

479)If the runtime-constraint handler is set to the ignore_handler_s function, any library function in which a runtimeconstraint violation occurs will return to its caller. The caller can determine whether a runtime-constraint violation occurred based on the library function’s specification (usually, the library function returns a nonzero errno_t).

480)Many implementations provide non-standard functions that modify the environment list.

481)That is, if the value passed is p, then the following expressions are always valid and nonzero:

482)In practice, this means that the entire array has been sorted according to the comparison function.

483)The context argument is for the use of the comparison function in performing its duties. For example, it can specify a collating sequence used by the comparison function.

484)If the argument is a null pointer and the call is executed, the behavior is undefined.

485)This is an obsolescent feature.

486)The context argument is for the use of the comparison function in performing its duties. For example, it can specify a collating sequence used by the comparison function.

487)If the locale employs special bytes to change the shift state, these bytes do not produce separate wide character codes, but are grouped with an adjacent multibyte character.

488)Thus, the value of len is ignored if dst is a null pointer.

489)This allows an implementation to attempt converting the multibyte string before discovering a terminating null character did not occur where required.

490)If conversion stops because a terminating null wide character has been reached, the bytes stored include those necessary to reach the initial shift state immediately before the null byte. However, if the conversion stops before a terminating null wide character has been reached, the result will be null terminated, but potentially not end in the initial shift state.

491)When len is not less than dstmax, the implementation can fill the array before discovering a runtime-constraint violation.

492)This allows an implementation to copy characters from s2 to s1 while simultaneously checking if any of those characters are null. Such an approach can write a character to every element of s1 before discovering that the first element was set to the null character.

493)A zero return value implies that all the requested characters from the string pointed to by s2 fit within the array pointed to by s1 and that the result in s1 is null terminated.

494)This allows an implementation to copy characters from s2 to s1 while simultaneously checking if any of those characters are null. Such an approach can write a character to every element of s1 before discovering that the first element was set to the null character.

495)A zero return value implies that all of he requested characters from the string pointed to by s2 fit within the array pointed to by s1 and that the result in s1 is null terminated.

496)Zero means that s1 was not null terminated upon entry to strcat_s.

497)This allows an implementation to append characters from s2 to s1 while simultaneously checking if any of those characters are null. Such an approach can write a character to every element of s1 before discovering that the first element was set to the null character.

498)A zero return value implies that all the requested characters from the string pointed to by s2 were appended to the string pointed to by s1 and that the result in s1 is null terminated.

499)Zero means that s1 was not null terminated upon entry to strncat_s.

500)This allows an implementation to append characters from s2 to s1 while simultaneously checking if any of those characters are null. Such an approach can write a character to every element of s1 before discovering that the first element was set to the null character.

501)A zero return value implies that all the requested characters from the string pointed to by s2 were appended to the string pointed to by s1 and that the result in s1 is null terminated.

502)Note that the strnlen_s function has no runtime-constraints. This lack of runtime-constraints along with the values returned for a null pointer or an unterminated string argument make strnlen_s useful in algorithms that gracefully handle such exceptional data.

503)The normal ranges are defined in 7.29.1.

504)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the wide characters %n to appear in sequence in the wide string pointed at by format when those wide characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was L"%%n".

505)If the format is known at translation time, an implementation can issue a diagnostic for any argument used to store the result from a c, s, or [ conversion specifier if that argument is not followed by an argument of a type compatible with rsize_t. A limited amount of checking can be done if even if the format is not known at translation time. For example, an implementation could issue a diagnostic for each argument after format that has of type pointer to one of char, signed char, unsigned char, or void that is not followed by an argument of a type compatible with rsize_t. The diagnostic could warn that unless the pointer is being used with a conversion specifier using the hh length modifier, a length argument is expected to follow the pointer argument. Another useful diagnostic could flag any non-pointer argument following format that did not have a type compatible with rsize_t.

506)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the wide characters %n to appear in sequence in the wide string pointed at by format when those wide characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was L"%%n".

507)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the wide characters %n to appear in sequence in the wide string pointed at by format when those wide characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was L"%%n".

508)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the wide characters %n to appear in sequence in the wide string pointed at by format when those wide characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was L"%%n".

509)As the functions vfwscanf_s, vwscanf_s, and vswscanf_s invoke the va_arg macro, the representation of arg after the return is indeterminate.

510)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the wide characters %n to appear in sequence in the wide string pointed at by format when those wide characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was L"%%n".

511)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the wide characters %n to appear in sequence in the wide string pointed at by format when those wide characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was L"%%n".

512)As the functions vfwscanf_s, vwscanf_s, and vswscanf_s invoke the va_arg macro, the representation of arg after the return is indeterminate.

513)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the wide characters %n to appear in sequence in the wide string pointed at by format when those wide characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was L"%%n".

514)As the functions vfwscanf_s, vwscanf_s, and vswscanf_s invoke the va_arg macro, the representation of arg after the return is indeterminate.

515)It is not a runtime-constraint violation for the wide characters %n to appear in sequence in the wide string pointed at by format when those wide characters are not a interpreted as a %n specifier. For example, if the entire format string was L"%%n".

516)This allows an implementation to copy wide characters from s2 to s1 while simultaneously checking if any of those wide characters are null. Such an approach can write a wide character to every element of s1 before discovering that the first element was set to the null wide character.

517)A zero return value implies that all the requested wide characters from the string pointed to by s2 fit within the array pointed to by s1 and that the result in s1 is null terminated.

518)This allows an implementation to copy wide characters from s2 to s1 while simultaneously checking if any of those wide characters are null. Such an approach can write a wide character to every element of s1 before discovering that the first element was set to the null wide character.

519)A zero return value implies that all the requested wide characters from the string pointed to by s2 fit within the array pointed to by s1 and that the result in s1 is null terminated.

520)Zero means that s1 was not null terminated upon entry to wcscat_s.

521)This allows an implementation to append wide characters from s2 to s1 while simultaneously checking if any of those wide characters are null. Such an approach can write a wide character to every element of s1 before discovering that the first element was set to the null wide character.

522)A zero return value implies that all the requested wide characters from the wide string pointed to by s2 were appended to the wide string pointed to by s1 and that the result in s1 is null terminated.

523)Zero means that s1 was not null terminated upon entry to wcsncat_s.

524)This allows an implementation to append wide characters from s2 to s1 while simultaneously checking if any of those wide characters are null. Such an approach can write a wide character to every element of s1 before discovering that the first element was set to the null wide character.

525)A zero return value implies that all the requested wide characters from the wide string pointed to by s2 were appended to the wide string pointed to by s1 and that the result in s1 is null terminated.

526)Note that the wcsnlen_s function has no runtime-constraints. This lack of runtime-constraints along with the values returned for a null pointer or an unterminated wide string argument make wcsnlen_s useful in algorithms that gracefully handle such exceptional data.

527)Thus, the value of len is ignored if dst is a null pointer.

528)This allows an implementation to attempt converting the multibyte string before discovering a terminating null character did not occur where required.

529)If conversion stops because a terminating null wide character has been reached, the bytes stored include those necessary to reach the initial shift state immediately before the null byte. However, if the conversion stops before a terminating null wide character has been reached, the result will be null terminated, but does not necessarily end in the initial shift state.

530)When len is not less than dstmax, the implementation can fill the array before discovering a runtime-constraint violation.

531)Implementations that do not define __STDC_ANALYZABLE__ are not required to conform to these specifications.